Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on July 7, 2014

Registration No. 333-194767

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

AMENDMENT NO. 1 TO

FORM S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

 

 

Box, Inc.

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

Delaware   7372   20-2714444
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

(877) 729-4269

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)

 

 

Aaron Levie, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Dan Levin, President and Chief Operating Officer

Dylan Smith, Chief Financial Officer

Box, Inc.

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

(877) 729-4269

 

 

(Names, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agents for service)

Please send copies of all communications to:

 

Steven E. Bochner, Esq.   Peter McGoff, Esq.   Richard A. Kline, Esq.
Jose F. Macias, Esq.   Senior Vice President and General Counsel   Anthony J. McCusker, Esq.
Jon C. Avina, Esq.   Box, Inc.   Goodwin Procter LLP
Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C.   4440 El Camino Real   135 Commonwealth Drive
650 Page Mill Road   Los Altos, California 94022   Menlo Park, California 94025
Palo Alto, California 94304   (877) 729-4269   (650) 752-3100
(650) 493-9300    

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public : As soon as practicable after this registration statement becomes effective.

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box:   ¨

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer

  ¨    Accelerated filer  ¨
Non-accelerated filer   x   (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)    Smaller reporting company  ¨

 

 

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

 

Title of Each Class of Securities
to be Registered
  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate Offering
Price  (1)(2)
  Amount of
Registration Fee  (3)

Class A common stock, $0.0001 par value per share

  $150,000,000   $19,320

 

 

 

(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of computing the amount of the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
(2) Includes the aggregate offering price of additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase to cover over-allotments, if any.
(3) The Registrant previously paid the registration fee in connection with the initial filing of the Registration Statement.

 

 

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

LOGO

39K+ Paying organizations
27M+ Registered users
3BN+ Content interactions every three months


Table of Contents

LOGO

Store, share, collaborate like 225K+ great organizations.


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

Prospectus Summary

     1   

Risk Factors

     14   

Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

     38   

Market and Industry Data

     40   

Use of Proceeds

     41   

Dividend Policy

     41   

Capitalization

     42   

Dilution

     44   

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

     47   

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

     50   

Letter from Aaron Levie, Co-Founder, Chairman and CEO

     79   

Business

     81   
     Page  

Management

     109   

Executive Compensation

     116   

Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions

     125   

Principal Stockholders

     131   

Description of Capital Stock

     134   

Shares Eligible for Future Sale

     140   

Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences to Non-U.S. Holders of Our Common Stock

     142   

Underwriters

     146   

Legal Matters

     153   

Experts

     153   

Where You Can Find Additional Information

     153   

Index to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-1   
 

 

 

We have not authorized anyone to provide any information or make any representations other than those contained in this prospectus or in any free writing prospectus prepared by or on behalf of us or to which we have referred you. We take no responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. We are offering to sell, and seeking offers to buy, shares of our Class A common stock only in jurisdictions where offers and sales are permitted. The information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date of this prospectus, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or of any sale of our Class A common stock.

Through and including                     , 2014 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer’s obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.

For investors outside of the United States: Neither we nor the underwriters have done anything that would permit this offering or possession or distribution of this prospectus in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required, other than in the United States. You are required to inform yourselves about and to observe any restrictions relating to this offering and the distribution of this prospectus outside of the United States.


Table of Contents

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary is not complete and does not contain all of the information you should consider in making your investment decision. You should read the following summary together with the more detailed information appearing elsewhere in this prospectus, including the sections titled “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes, before deciding whether to purchase shares of our Class A common stock.

BOX, INC.

Our Mission and Vision

Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information. We believe our platform can become the cloud-based content layer that spans organizations, applications and devices to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our paying business customers include more than 45% of Fortune 500 companies and 21% of Global 2000 companies, and our 27 million registered users include employees from 99% of Fortune 500 companies, including companies in highly regulated industries such as healthcare and life sciences, telecommunications, energy and financial services.

There are several fundamental technology trends that are dramatically changing both individual behavior and enterprise IT infrastructure. Information workers increasingly expect to be able to access and work with their business content from any internet-enabled device, and they demand solutions that are as simple to use as their consumer internet applications, such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. However, legacy on-premise IT architectures were not built for ease of use or mobility. As a result, IT departments are increasingly pressured to find easier to use solutions that address employees’ changing work styles, while also protecting confidential content, including documents, presentations, spreadsheets and multimedia.

At our founding, we recognized that content is more accessible, useful and powerful when it is centrally stored, managed and shared. We have architected our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform from the ground up to be cloud-based and mobile-optimized to meet the evolving demands of today’s information worker. Cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration is especially powerful because it enables users to access and collaborate on centralized content from anywhere and allows organizations to access new features and apply policies and controls across all users and content simultaneously. Our solution is especially well-suited to support globally distributed workers with multiple devices.

We are building a rich ecosystem around Box. Our platform integrates with the applications of our technology partners, including salesforce.com, NetSuite and others, giving our users full access to Box without leaving partner applications. In addition, third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of our service, increasingly with a focus on specific

 

 

1


Table of Contents

industries and vertical market use cases. To date, tens of thousands of third-party developers have leveraged our platform as the secure content layer for their applications, including developers that are part of our Box OneCloud ecosystem, which provides users with access to more than 1,000 iOS and Android third-party applications.

Our go-to-market strategy combines user-driven adoption with a direct and indirect sales approach. We offer individuals a free basic version of Box to provide them with a first-hand experience of the simplicity and effectiveness of our service. Our solution often spreads virally within and across organizations, as users adopt Box and invite new users to collaborate. We monetize this network effect through direct and indirect sales strategies to formalize deployments within organizations and further expand our footprint. We also make it easy for users and organizations to visit our website and subscribe to both free and paid versions of our service. Frequently, an organization will purchase Box for one use case and later expand its deployment to other use cases and larger groups of employees.

Our solution is highly scalable and can support deployments ranging in size from one user to tens of thousands of users. As of April 30, 2014, we had 27 million registered users and supported over 240,000 organizations that collectively interact with their content on average over three billion times every three months. Our customers include more than 39,000 paying organizations globally, and our largest deployment to date is over 80,000 users. We currently offer our solution in 16 languages. Our customer base includes leading organizations across industries, including Ameriprise Financial, Inc., Bechtel, Eli Lilly and Company, Gap, Inc., Schneider Electric and Sunbelt Rentals.

We have experienced significant growth since our incorporation in 2005. For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%. For the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $23.4 million and $45.3 million, respectively, representing period-over-period growth of 94%. We have invested and continue to invest heavily in our business to capitalize on our large market opportunity. As a result, we incurred net losses of $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. For the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, we incurred net losses of $34.0 million and $38.5 million, respectively.

Industry Trends

Trends such as Cloud, Mobility and the Proliferation of Data are Changing How People Work

Several technology trends have driven down the cost of storage, enabled faster, more powerful applications and increased the number of connected devices, paving the way for cloud and mobile to transform the way that people live and work.

 

    Shift from On-Premise to Cloud-Based Applications . Advances in technology architectures have supported the rise of cloud computing, which enables the delivery of software-as-a-service (SaaS). Today, mission-critical applications can be delivered reliably, securely and cost-effectively to customers over the internet without the need to purchase supporting hardware, software or ongoing maintenance. The lower total cost of ownership, better functionality and flexibility of cloud applications represent a compelling alternative to traditional on-premise solutions. As a result, Gartner, Inc. (Gartner) expects total cloud spending to increase from $132 billion worldwide in 2013 to $244 billion in 2017.

 

   

Increased Functionality and Proliferation of Mobile Devices . The rapidly increasing functionality of smartphones, tablets and other mobile devices has resulted in the significant adoption of such devices within organizations. According to International Data Corporation (IDC), there were 1.4 billion mobile internet users worldwide in 2013 and there will be 2.3 billion in 2017. Forrester Research, Inc. (Forrester) estimates that 29% of the global workforce in 2012 used three or more devices, worked

 

 

2


Table of Contents
 

from multiple locations and accessed several applications. According to Gartner, the number of tablets sold has grown at a compound annual growth rate of 97% between 2010 and 2014 worldwide, and is expected to surpass personal computers (PCs), by annual number of units sold, in 2016.

 

    Explosion of Content and Data . The volume of data continues to grow significantly as users and organizations increase their usage of data-rich applications and access content from multiple connected devices. According to IDC, from 2005 to 2020, the volume of digital information will grow by a factor of 300, increasing demand for cost-efficient and scalable storage and content management solutions.

These technology advancements have enabled the rapid development of a number of highly intuitive and engaging consumer-oriented internet and mobile applications that have changed the expectations of today’s workforce. The rich functionality and usability of applications such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter have led today’s generation to expect their work applications to be similarly accessible, intuitive, social and collaborative, and their content to be available in the cloud and on any of their mobile devices. In response to the growing desire among workers to access and interact with their business information through their preferred personal devices, many organizations have established “bring your own device” policies. At the same time, workers are increasingly utilizing their favorite applications in the workplace in order to be more productive without seeking approval from their IT departments.

IT is Changing to Embrace These Trends while Maintaining Security and Scalability Standards

IT departments are mandated to ensure security for enterprise content in the face of an increasing number of cyber attacks and data leaks, to comply with ever-changing regulatory requirements and to maintain control and visibility over internal and external users while also taking advantage of the benefits of cloud and mobility. While it is clear that embracing cloud and mobility is a competitive imperative, meeting the permissions, security, scalability and administrative requirements typical of IT departments has become increasingly difficult as the proliferation of devices and applications on various architectures has created a more heterogeneous IT environment. Regulatory and compliance requirements for content, collaboration and storage have grown increasingly complex across geographies and industries. At the same time, reliance on technology for critical content and data has made organizations more vulnerable to both sophisticated external cyber attacks and data leaks.

Effective Content Management is Critical to Business Success Today

The technology trends described above are changing where and how work gets done because people can now access information and do their work from anywhere at any time. Employees, clients, vendors and contractors can now be seamlessly connected, creating new opportunities for sharing, collaboration and productivity. Ultimately, these modern approaches to productivity are empowering organizations to increase information velocity and speed up decision making, thereby increasing their competitiveness in the marketplace.

Our Market Opportunity

Our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform provides a combination of intuitive, user-friendly content applications with enterprise-grade features and security to serve as a central content layer across organizations. Our platform addresses several traditional IT categories defined by IDC, including content management, cloud storage, collaboration, and project and portfolio management, which in aggregate represents an estimated $29 billion in global IT spending in 2014. We believe our opportunity includes large segments of existing enterprise IT spending as well as new use cases and users that are not currently captured by traditional market sizing studies. Customers purchase our services both to replace existing storage and content management solutions, as well as to enable entirely new use cases not well served by existing content or collaboration solutions.

 

 

3


Table of Contents

The size and importance of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market is driven by the fact that information is central to every organization’s workflow, and organizations regularly invest in new ways to increase workforce productivity. According to Forrester, there were 615 million information workers as of 2013, and there are expected to be 865 million information workers by 2016. We believe our mobile-optimized platform extends our opportunity beyond information workers to anyone who uses information to get his or her job done, including all mobile workers. According to IDC, there were 1.0 billion mobile workers as of 2010, and there will be 1.3 billion mobile workers by 2015.

The Box Solution

Our solution empowers people to share and interact with content within their organization, with external partners and across their other business applications. Our solution offers:

 

    Modern Cloud Architecture . We have built our platform from the ground up on a cloud-based architecture, which enables us to rapidly develop, update and provision our services to users.

 

    Mobility . Our solution enables users to access content securely in real time through nearly any mobile device and operating system, including iOS, Android, Windows and Blackberry.

 

    Elegant, Intuitive and User-Focused Interface . We strive to maintain an elegant, intuitive and simple interface with compelling content collaboration features to enable quick and viral user adoption.

 

    Simple and Rapid Deployment . Our cloud-based software allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our product.

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security and Administrative Controls . We have invested heavily to build the security and administrative controls demanded by our largest customers. Box gives IT administrators powerful and granular tools to define access rights by user, content type, device and usage.

 

    Platform Agnostic Content Layer . We have designed our solution to serve as the horizontal content and collaboration layer across an organization and its employees. Users typically store their most important information on our platform, enabling them to interact with almost any type of content, regardless of format or file type, and from any device, location or operating system.

 

    Extensible Platform for Custom and Third-Party Application Development . We provide an open platform for independent software vendors (ISVs), companies and third-party developers to build and deploy unique applications with custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box capabilities for content access, viewing, sharing, collaboration, security and reporting. We have a growing developer ecosystem building applications on the Box platform, including over 1,000 OneCloud mobile applications.

 

    Easy Integration with Other Cloud-Based Applications . We offer a number of off-the-shelf integrations with critical business applications, including Salesforce, NetSuite and others. Using Box Embed, customers are able to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box platform and any integrated business application.

 

    Industry-Specific Compliance Certifications . We have obtained various regulatory and compliance certifications and have built the necessary security and controls to support specific industry vertical needs. For example, in healthcare, we facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act by our customers.

 

    Customized Plans and Pricing . We offer our solution through multiple plans to meet the varying needs of our diverse customer base. An individual user can create a personal Box account with a set storage capacity for a monthly fee. Organizations can purchase packages with different amounts of storage, levels of functionality and monthly fees per user.

 

 

4


Table of Contents
    Version for Free Users . We offer users a free version of Box in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Our free offering allows users to invite anyone to collaborate on Box, enabling faster content collaboration across employees, vendors, clients, contractors and other parties while exposing more potential users to our solution and helping our solution grow virally.

 

    Robust Customer Support . Our customer success team works closely with customers to ensure they are obtaining the highest value from our services. Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers to understand their specific use cases and deployment needs. We believe our customer service efforts are one of the reasons why we have been successful in retaining customers and increasing their use of our service within and across their organizations.

Benefits of Our Platform

We provide the following key benefits to users, IT departments, organizations, and technology partners and third-party developers:

 

    Benefits to Users . We provide users with the ability to securely store, access, share and collaborate on content from any location using any operating system and on any device, ranging from PCs to smartphones and tablet devices. Our real-time collaboration solution enables users and their partners and customers to work together securely and more productively across functions, organizations and geographies. We provide these benefits with a service that is both powerful and simple to use.

 

    Benefits to IT Departments . Our cloud-based service is quick and inexpensive to deploy. At the same time, our solution provides IT departments with enterprise-grade security, sophisticated data encryption technologies, secure content delivery networks and an intrusion detection system to monitor network traffic. We also offer an administrative console that allows IT administrators to manage their users and content, exercise granular security control, apply permission policies and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts.

 

    Benefits to Organizations . Our solution enables organizations to replace technologies, such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP) servers, Managed File Transfer (MFT) tools and networked file servers, and experience greater ease of use at a lower total cost of ownership compared to their prior solutions. Moreover, our product is optimized for cloud and mobile, allowing organizations to extend content and collaboration to a broader base of users who work remotely using tablets and smartphones, enabling increased user productivity. Finally, by delivering our software as a cloud-based service, our customers always operate with the latest features and functionality.

 

    Benefits to Technology Partners and Third-Party Developers . We have designed Box to integrate with the applications of our technology partners, such as salesforce.com, NetSuite and over 20 others, giving our users full access to Box’s complete functionality without leaving partner applications. ISVs, system integrators and other third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of Box. We also give developers access to an audience of 27 million registered users, which we believe allows our ecosystem of technology partners and third-party developers to address a broad set of use cases.

Our Growth Strategy

With an increasing number of information workers, industry trends toward cloud and mobility, and the increased need for global collaboration, we believe the market opportunity for Enterprise Content Collaboration is significant and growing. Key elements of our growth strategy include:

 

    Extending Our Technology Leadership . We have made, and will continue to make, significant investments in research and development to strengthen our existing platform, continually enhance usability and develop additional Enterprise Content Collaboration functionality to improve productivity.

 

 

5


Table of Contents
    Increasing Our Customer Base Globally . We plan to continue investing in direct and indirect sales and free user marketing to acquire new customers both in the United States and internationally.

 

    Growing Our Presence within Our Existing Customer Base . We will continue to expand deployment of our solution with existing customers by, among other things, growing from departmental deployments to broader implementations and addressing a broader range of use cases.

 

    Target Industry Verticals . We will continue to invest in industry verticals, such as healthcare and life sciences, financial services, legal services, media and entertainment, education, energy and government, by developing targeted sales and marketing activities, ensuring that our service meets specific industry and regulatory requirements, and building relationships with partners that develop custom applications to address the unique needs in these industries.

 

    Extending Our Sales Reach through Channel and Strategic Partners . We will continue to develop partnerships with leading channel partners, mobile device and hardware manufacturers, telecommunications service providers and system integrators.

 

    Expanding Our Platform Ecosystem . We will continue to expand our platform ecosystem by developing additional relationships with ISVs, our customers’ internal development organizations and other third-party developers. By supporting these strategic relationships, we believe our platform ecosystem will extend to new use cases that deliver more targeted, higher value solutions. We also believe that, as more ISVs and other third-party developers join the ecosystem, we will attract more customers, further strengthening our ecosystem and making it more attractive to new developers.

Risks Affecting Us

Our business is subject to numerous risks and uncertainties, including those highlighted in the section titled “Risk Factors” immediately following this prospectus summary. These risks include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

    We have a history of cumulative losses, and we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future;

 

    We have a limited operating history, which makes it difficult to predict our future operating results;

 

    The market in which we participate is intensely competitive, and if we do not compete effectively, our operating results could be harmed;

 

    If the cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market develops more slowly than we expect or declines, our business could be adversely affected;

 

    We have experienced rapid growth in recent periods. If we fail to manage our growth effectively, we may be unable to execute our business plan, maintain high levels of service or adequately address competitive challenges;

 

    Our business depends substantially on customers renewing their subscriptions with us and expanding their use of our services. Any decline in our customer renewals or failure to convince our customers to broaden their use of our services would harm our future operating results;

 

    If we are not able to provide successful enhancements, new features and modifications to our services, our business could be adversely affected;

 

    Actual or perceived security vulnerabilities in our services or any breaches of our security controls and unauthorized access to a customer’s data could harm our business and operating results; and

 

   

The dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with those stockholders who held our capital stock prior to the completion of this offering, including our executive

 

 

6


Table of Contents
 

officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, which will limit your ability to influence the outcome of important transactions, including a change in control. The holders of our outstanding Class B common stock will hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock following this offering.

Corporate Information

Our principal executive offices are located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California 94022, and our telephone number is (877) 729-4269. Our website address is www.box.com. Information contained on, or that can be accessed through, our website is not incorporated by reference into this prospectus, and you should not consider information on our website to be part of this prospectus. We were incorporated in 2005 as Box.Net, Inc., a Washington corporation, and later reincorporated in 2008 under the same name as a Delaware corporation. In November 2011, we changed our name to Box, Inc. We recently changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31.

Unless expressly indicated or the context requires otherwise, the terms “Box,” “company,” “we,” “us,” and “our” in this prospectus refer to Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and, where appropriate, its wholly-owned subsidiaries. The Box design logo, “Box” and our other registered and common law trade names, trademarks and service marks are the property of Box, Inc. This prospectus contains additional trade names, trademarks and service marks of other companies. We do not intend our use or display of other companies’ trade names, trademarks or service marks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, these other companies.

Emerging Growth Company

The Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act (JOBS Act) was enacted in April 2012 with the intention of encouraging capital formation in the United States and reducing the regulatory burden on newly public companies that qualify as “emerging growth companies.” We are an emerging growth company within the meaning of the JOBS Act. As an emerging growth company, we may take advantage of certain exemptions from various public reporting requirements, including the requirement that our internal control over financial reporting be audited by our independent registered public accounting firm pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Sarbanes-Oxley Act), certain requirements related to the disclosure of executive compensation in this prospectus and in our periodic reports and proxy statements and the requirement that we hold a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and any golden parachute payments. We may take advantage of these exemptions until we are no longer an emerging growth company.

We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of (i) the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; (ii) the date we qualify as a “large accelerated filer,” with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; (iii) the date on which we have issued, in any three-year period, more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; and (iv) the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of the completion of this offering.

See the section titled “ Risk Factors—Risks Related to Our Business and Our Industry—We are an emerging growth company, and any decision on our part to comply only with certain reduced reporting and disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies could make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors ” for certain risks related to our status as an emerging growth company.

 

 

7


Table of Contents

THE OFFERING

 

Class A common stock offered by us

  

             shares

Class A common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Total Class A common stock and Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Over-allotment option of Class A common stock offered by us

  

             shares

Use of proceeds

  

We estimate that our net proceeds from the sale of our Class A common stock that we are offering will be approximately $        , assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our capitalization and financial flexibility and create a public market for our Class A common stock. We intend to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. While we cannot specify with certainty the particular uses of the net proceeds we receive from this offering, we currently expect to invest at least 50% of the net proceeds in sales and marketing activities, product development, general and administrative matters and capital expenditures to support the growth in our business. We also may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire complementary businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific acquisitions at this time. See the section titled “Use of Proceeds” for additional information.

Voting rights

  

Shares of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share.

 

Shares of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share.

 

Holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock will generally vote together as a single class, unless otherwise required by law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. The

 

 

8


Table of Contents
   holders of our outstanding Class B common stock will hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock following this offering and will have the ability to control the outcome of matters submitted to our stockholders for approval, including the election of our directors and the approval of any change in control transaction. See the sections titled “Principal Stockholders” and “Description of Capital Stock” for additional information.

NYSE trading symbol

  

“BOX”

Prior to the completion of this offering, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and the holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights.

Upon the completion of this offering, we will have authorized a new class of Class A common stock and a new class of Class B common stock. All currently outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares to be issued upon the exercise of the Net Exercise Warrant described below immediately prior to the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all currently outstanding restricted stock units (RSUs) and options to purchase shares of our capital stock will become eligible to be settled in or exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, references in this prospectus to our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are to our new Class A common stock and new Class B common stock, respectively. We refer to our Class A common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class A common stock” and our Class B common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class B common stock.”

The number of shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 91,033,929 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) outstanding as of April 30, 2014, and excludes:

 

    18,667,091 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $4.82 per share;

 

    2,904,794 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of April 30, 2014;

 

    7,500,000 shares of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock, convertible into shares of our Class B common stock, issued after April 30, 2014, at a purchase price of $20.00 per share;

 

    300,431 shares of our Class B common stock issued after April 30, 2014, and 313,205 shares of our Class B common stock issuable after April 30, 2014, in connection with our acquisition of Greply Inc. (Streem); and

 

 

9


Table of Contents
                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Equity Incentive Plan (2014 Plan), which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    378,486 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (2011 Plan) as of April 30, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP), which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder, and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

Of the shares described above, up to 21,571,885 shares of our Class B common stock will be issuable after this offering upon the exercise or vesting of outstanding stock options or RSUs.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, all information in this prospectus assumes:

 

    the filing and effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the effectiveness of our amended and restated bylaws, each of which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    the reclassification of our outstanding Existing Class A common stock and Existing Class B common stock into an equivalent number of shares of our Class B common stock, which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering, and the authorization of our Class A common stock;

 

    the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (other than our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock) into an aggregate of 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock into an aggregate of 7,500,000 shares of our Class B common stock immediately prior to the completion of this offering, based on an assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus;

 

    the issuance of              shares of our Class B common stock upon the assumed net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014 (Net Exercise Warrant), which exercise will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering at an exercise price of $0.29 per share, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus; and

 

    no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option.

 

 

10


Table of Contents

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

We changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, and as a result, we also present below certain summary consolidated financial information for the one-month transition period ended January 31, 2012. The summary consolidated statements of operations data presented below for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one-month period ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The summary consolidated statements of operations data for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of April 30, 2014 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited consolidated financial statements were prepared on a basis consistent with our audited financial statements and reflect, in the opinion of management, all adjustments of a normal recurring nature that are necessary for the fair presentation of those unaudited consolidated financial statements. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected in any future period, and the results for the three months ended April 30, 2014 are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for the full year. The following summary consolidated financial data should be read together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

                                                                                                                                         
    Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
            2013     2014  
                           

(unaudited)

 
    (in thousands, except per share data)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

           

Revenue

  $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192      $ 23,414      $ 45,330   

Cost of revenue (1)

    6,873        850        14,280        25,974        4,561        9,228   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

    14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218        18,853        36,102   

Operating expenses:

           

Research and development (1)

    14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967        9,439        14,898   

Sales and marketing (1)

    36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188        33,936        47,440   

General and administrative (1)

    13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843        8,261        11,546   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

    64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998        51,636        73,884   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

    (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780     (32,783     (37,782

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

    (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477     (693     (267

Interest income (expense), net

    (109     27        (1,764     (3,705     (548     (405

Other income (expense), net

    49        (8     116        (26     (9     7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

    (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988     (34,033     (38,447

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    1        15        59        (2,431     6        64   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

    (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557     (34,039     (38,511

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

    (80     (9     (226     (341  

 

(85

    (43
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

  $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898   $ (34,124   $ (38,554
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

  $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89   $ (3.47   $ (2.81
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

    5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341        9,825        13,734   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

        $ (1.93     $ (0.43
       

 

 

     

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

          82,948          89,972   
       

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

11


Table of Contents

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
     Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
                 2013      2014  
           

(unaudited)

 
     (in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 6       $ 1,087       $ 450       $ 61       $ 227   

Research and development

     899         19         1,211         3,154         329         2,007   

Sales and marketing

     837         24         1,893         5,017         738         2,066   

General and administrative

     3,800         23         3,345         3,128         515         1,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 72       $ 7,536       $ 11,749       $ 1,643       $ 5,752   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Our consolidated balance sheet data as of April 30, 2014 is presented on:

 

    an actual basis;

 

    a pro forma basis, giving effect to the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, as if such conversion, reclassification and effectiveness had occurred on April 30, 2014; and

 

    a pro forma as adjusted basis, giving effect to the pro forma adjustments and the sale and issuance of              shares of our Class A common stock by us in this offering, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma as adjusted information set forth in the table below is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

 

     April 30, 2014  
     Actual     Pro Forma      Pro Forma As
Adjusted (1)
 
     (unaudited)               
     (in thousands)  

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

  

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 79,266      $ 79,266       $            

Working capital

     3,485        3,485      

Total assets

     208,237        208,237      

Deferred revenue, current and non-current

     88,950        88,950      

Debt, non-current

     34,000        34,000      

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

     1,613             

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     393,260             

Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity

     (363,593     31,280      

 

(1) Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our cash and cash equivalents, working capital, total assets and total stockholders’ (deficit) equity by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

 

12


Table of Contents

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (GAAP), we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165      $ 28,389      $ 44,208   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103     94     56

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136     141     135

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services (which we refer to as Box Consulting). We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings. See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data—Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue” for a reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, and explanations of why we track billings and why billings may be a useful measure for investors.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate the ACV from these same customers as of the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represented a substantial majority of our revenue for the period ended April 30, 2014. See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” for explanations of why we track retention rate, why retention rate may be a useful measure for investors and an explanation that there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

 

 

13


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

Investing in our Class A common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the risks and uncertainties described below, together with all of the other information in this prospectus, including in the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes, before making a decision to invest in our Class A common stock. If any of the risks actually occur, our business, financial condition, operating results and prospects could be materially and adversely affected. In that event, the market price of our Class A common stock could decline, and you could lose part or all of your investment.

Risks Related to Our Business and Our Industry

We have a history of cumulative losses, and we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future.

We have incurred significant losses in each period since our inception in 2005. We incurred net losses of $50.3 million in our fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, $112.6 million in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, $168.6 million in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2014, and $38.5 million in the three months ended April 30, 2014. As of April 30, 2014, we had an accumulated deficit of $399.7 million. These losses and accumulated deficit reflect the substantial investments we made to acquire new customers and develop our services. We intend to continue scaling our business to increase our number of users and paying organizations and to meet the increasingly complex needs of our customers. We have invested, and expect to continue to invest, in our sales and marketing organizations to sell our services around the world and in our development organization to deliver additional features and capabilities of our cloud services to address our customers’ evolving needs. We also expect to continue to make significant investments in our datacenter infrastructure and in our professional service organization as we focus on customer success. As a result of our continuing investments to scale our business in each of these areas, we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future. Furthermore, to the extent we are successful in increasing our customer base, we will also incur increased losses due to upfront costs associated with acquiring new customers, particularly as a result of the limited free trial version of our service and the nature of subscription revenue, which is generally recognized ratably over the term of the subscription period, which is typically one year, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We cannot assure you that we will achieve profitability in the future or that, if we do become profitable, we will sustain profitability.

We have a limited operating history, which makes it difficult to predict our future operating results.

We were incorporated and introduced our first service in 2005. As a result of our limited operating history, our ability to accurately forecast our future operating results is limited and subject to a number of uncertainties. We have encountered, and will continue to encounter, risks and uncertainties frequently experienced by growing companies in rapidly changing industries, such as the risks and uncertainties described herein. If our assumptions regarding these risks and uncertainties (which we use to plan our business) are incorrect or change due to changes in our markets, or if we do not address these risks and uncertainties successfully, our operating and financial results could differ materially from our expectations, and our business could suffer.

The market in which we participate is intensely competitive, and if we do not compete effectively, our operating results could be harmed.

The market for cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services is fragmented, rapidly evolving and highly competitive, with relatively low barriers to entry for certain applications and services. Many of our competitors and potential competitors are larger and have greater name recognition, much longer operating histories, larger marketing budgets and significantly greater resources than we do. Our competitors include Citrix, Dropbox, EMC, Google, and Microsoft. With the introduction of new technologies and market entrants, we expect competition to continue to intensify in the future. If we fail to compete effectively, our business will

 

14


Table of Contents

be harmed. Some of our principal competitors offer their products or services at a lower price, which has resulted in pricing pressures on our business. If we are unable to achieve our target pricing levels, our operating results would be negatively impacted. In addition, pricing pressures and increased competition generally could result in reduced sales, lower margins, losses or the failure of our services to achieve or maintain widespread market acceptance, any of which could harm our business.

Many of our competitors are able to devote greater resources to the development, promotion and sale of their products or services. In addition, many of our competitors have established marketing relationships and major distribution agreements with channel partners, consultants, system integrators and resellers. Moreover, many software vendors could bundle products or offer them at lower prices as part of a broader product sale or enterprise license arrangement. Some competitors may offer products or services that address one or a number of business execution functions at lower prices or with greater depth than our services. As a result, our competitors may be able to respond more quickly and effectively to new or changing opportunities, technologies, standards or customer requirements. Furthermore, some potential customers, particularly large enterprises, may elect to develop their own internal solutions. For all of these reasons, we may not be able to compete successfully against our current and future competitors.

If the cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market develops more slowly than we expect or declines, our business could be adversely affected.

The cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market is not as mature as the market for on-premise enterprise software, and it is uncertain whether a cloud-based service like ours will achieve and sustain high levels of customer demand and market acceptance. Because we derive, and expect to continue to derive, substantially all of our revenue and cash flows from sales of our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration solution, our success will depend to a substantial extent on the widespread adoption of cloud computing in general and of cloud-based content collaboration services in particular. Many organizations have invested substantial personnel and financial resources to integrate traditional enterprise software into their organizations and, therefore, may be reluctant or unwilling to migrate to a cloud-based model for storing, accessing, sharing and managing their content. It is difficult to predict customer adoption rates and demand for our services, the future growth rate and size of the cloud computing market or the entry of competitive services. The expansion of a cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market depends on a number of factors, including the cost, performance and perceived value associated with cloud computing, as well as the ability of companies that provide cloud-based services to address security and privacy concerns. If we or other providers of cloud-based services experience security incidents, loss of customer data, disruptions in delivery or other problems, the market for cloud-based services as a whole, including our services, may be negatively affected. If cloud-based services do not achieve widespread adoption, or there is a reduction in demand for cloud-based services caused by a lack of customer acceptance, technological challenges, weakening economic conditions, security or privacy concerns, competing technologies and products, decreases in corporate spending or otherwise, it could result in decreased revenue, harm our growth rates, and adversely affect our business and operating results.

We have experienced rapid growth in recent periods. If we fail to manage our growth effectively, we may be unable to execute our business plan, maintain high levels of service or adequately address competitive challenges.

We have recently experienced a period of rapid growth in our operations and employee headcount. In particular, we grew from 689 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 1,016 employees as of April 30, 2014, and have also significantly increased the size of our customer base. You should not consider our recent growth in revenue as indicative of our future performance. However, we anticipate that we will significantly expand our operations and employee headcount in the near term, including internationally. This growth has placed, and future growth will place, a significant strain on our management, administrative, operational and financial infrastructure. Our success will depend in part on our ability to manage this growth effectively. To manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we will need to continue to improve our operational, financial

 

15


Table of Contents

and management controls, and our reporting systems and procedures. Failure to effectively manage growth could result in difficulty or delays in deploying customers, declines in quality or customer satisfaction, increases in costs, difficulties in introducing new features or other operational difficulties. Any of these difficulties could adversely impact our business performance and operating results.

Our business depends substantially on customers renewing their subscriptions with us and expanding their use of our services. Any decline in our customer renewals or failure to convince our customers to broaden their use of our services would harm our future operating results.

In order for us to maintain or improve our operating results, it is important that our customers renew their subscriptions with us when the existing subscription term expires. Our customers have no obligation to renew their subscriptions upon expiration, and we cannot assure you that customers will renew subscriptions at the same or higher level of service, if at all. Although our retention rate has historically been high, some of our customers have elected not to renew their subscriptions with us.

Our retention rate may decline or fluctuate as a result of a number of factors, including our customers’ satisfaction or dissatisfaction with our services, the effectiveness of our customer support services, our pricing, the prices of competing products or services, mergers and acquisitions affecting our customer base, the effects of global economic conditions or reductions in our customers’ spending levels. If our customers do not renew their subscriptions, purchase fewer seats or renew on less favorable terms, our revenue may decline, and we may not realize improved operating results from our customer base.

In addition, the growth of our business depends in part on our customers expanding their use of our services. The use of our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration platform often expands within an organization as new users are added or as additional services are purchased by or for other departments within an organization. Further, as we have introduced new services throughout our operating history, our existing customers have constituted a significant portion of the users of such services. If we are unable to encourage our customers to broaden their use of our services, our operating results may be adversely affected.

If we are not able to provide successful enhancements, new features and modifications to our services, our business could be adversely affected.

Our industry is marked by rapid technological developments and new and enhanced applications and services. If we are unable to provide enhancements and new features for our existing services or new services that achieve market acceptance or that keep pace with rapid technological developments, our business could be adversely affected. For example, we have recently introduced Box Notes, which allows users to create documents, take notes and share ideas in real-time with anyone. The success of enhancements, new features and services depends on several factors, including the timely completion, introduction and market acceptance of such enhancements, features or services. Failure in this regard may significantly impair our revenue growth. In addition, because our services are designed to operate on a variety of systems, we will need to continuously modify and enhance our services to keep pace with changes in internet-related hardware, mobile operating systems such as iOS and Android, and other software, communication, browser and database technologies. We may not be successful in either developing these modifications and enhancements or in bringing them to market in a timely fashion. Furthermore, modifications to existing platforms or technologies will increase our research and development expenses. Any failure of our services to operate effectively with future network platforms and technologies could reduce the demand for our services, result in customer dissatisfaction and adversely affect our business.

Actual or perceived security vulnerabilities in our services or any breaches of our security controls and unauthorized access to a customer’s data could harm our business and operating results.

The services we offer involve the storage of large amounts of our customers’ sensitive and proprietary information. Cyber attacks and other malicious internet-based activity continue to increase in frequency and in magnitude generally, and cloud-based content collaboration services have been targeted in the past. As we

 

16


Table of Contents

increase our customer base and our brand becomes more widely known and recognized, we may become more of a target for these malicious third parties. If our security measures are breached as a result of third-party action, employee negligence and/or error, malfeasance, product defects or otherwise, and this results in the disruption of the confidentiality, integrity or availability of our customers’ data, we could incur significant liability to our customers and to individuals or organizations whose information was being stored by our customers, and our business may suffer and our reputation may be damaged. Techniques used to obtain unauthorized access to, or to sabotage, systems or networks, change frequently and generally are not recognized until launched against a target. Therefore, we may be unable to anticipate these techniques, react in a timely manner, or implement adequate preventive measures. In addition, our customer contracts often include (i) specific obligations that we maintain the availability of the customer’s data through our service and that we secure customer content against unauthorized access or loss, and (ii) indemnity provisions whereby we indemnify our customers for third-party claims asserted against them that result from our failure to maintain the availability of their content or securing the same from unauthorized access or loss. While our customer contracts contain limitations on our liability in connection with these obligations and indemnities, if an actual or perceived security breach occurs, the market perception of the effectiveness of our security measures could be harmed, we could be subject to indemnity or damage claims in certain customer contracts, and we could lose future sales and customers, any of which could harm our business and operating results. Furthermore, while our errors and omissions insurance policies include liability coverage for these matters, if we experienced a widespread security breach that impacted a significant number of our customers for whom we have these indemnity obligations, we could be subject to indemnity claims that exceed such coverage.

As a substantial portion of our sales efforts are increasingly targeted at enterprise customers, our sales cycle may become lengthier and more expensive, we may encounter greater pricing pressure and implementation and customization challenges, and we may have to delay revenue recognition for more complicated transactions, all of which could harm our business and operating results.

As a substantial portion of our sales efforts are increasingly targeted at enterprise customers, we face greater costs, longer sales cycles and less predictability in the completion of some of our sales. In this market segment, the customer’s decision to use our services may be an enterprise-wide decision, in which case these types of sales require us to provide greater levels of customer education regarding the uses and benefits of our services, as well as education regarding security, privacy, and data protection laws and regulations, especially for those customers in more heavily regulated industries or those with significant international operations. In addition, larger enterprises may demand more customization, integration and support services, and features. As a result of these factors, these sales opportunities may require us to devote greater sales support and professional services resources to individual customers, which could increase our costs and sales cycle and divert our own sales and professional services resources to a smaller number of larger customers. Meanwhile, this would potentially require us to delay revenue recognition on some of these transactions until the technical or implementation requirements have been met. Professional services may also be performed by a third party or a combination of our own staff and a third party. Our strategy is to work with third parties to increase the breadth of capability and depth of capacity for delivery of these services to our customers. If a customer is not satisfied with the quality or interoperability of our services with their own IT environment, we could incur additional costs to address the situation, which could adversely affect our margins. Moreover, any customer dissatisfaction with our services could damage our ability to encourage broader adoption of our services by that customer. In addition, any negative publicity resulting from such situations, regardless of its accuracy, may further damage our business by affecting our ability to compete for new business with current and prospective customers.

Privacy concerns and laws or other domestic or foreign regulations may reduce the effectiveness of our services and harm our business.

Users can use our services to store personal or identifying information. However, federal, state and foreign government bodies and agencies have adopted or are considering adopting laws and regulations regarding the collection, use and disclosure of personal information obtained from consumers and other individuals. The costs

 

17


Table of Contents

of compliance with, and other burdens imposed by, such laws and regulations that are applicable to our business or the businesses of our customers may limit the use and adoption of our services and reduce overall demand for them.

In addition, foreign data protection, privacy and other laws and regulations are often more restrictive than those in the United States. For example, a revision to the 1995 European Union Data Protection Directive is currently being considered by European legislative bodies that may include more stringent operational requirements for data processors and significant penalties for non-compliance. Similarly, there have been a number of recent legislative proposals in the United States, at both the federal and state level, that would impose new obligations in areas such as privacy and liability for copyright infringement by third parties. These existing and proposed laws and regulations can be costly to comply with and can delay or impede the development of new products, result in negative publicity, increase our operating costs, require significant management time and attention, and subject us to claims or other remedies, including fines or demands that we modify or cease existing business practices.

These U.S. federal and state and foreign laws and regulations, which can be enforced by private parties or governmental entities, are constantly evolving and can be subject to significant change. A number of proposals are pending before federal, state and foreign legislative and regulatory bodies that could affect our business. For example, the European Commission is currently considering a data protection regulation that may include operational requirements for companies that receive personal data that are different than those currently in place in the European Union, and that may also include significant penalties for non-compliance. In addition, some countries are considering legislation requiring local storage and processing of data that could increase the cost and complexity of delivering our services.

Furthermore, government agencies may seek to access sensitive information that our users upload to Box, or restrict users’ access to Box. Laws and regulations relating to government access and restrictions are evolving, and compliance with such laws and regulations could limit adoption of our services by users and create burdens on our business. Moreover, regulatory investigations into our compliance with privacy-related laws and regulations could increase our costs and divert management attention.

If we are not able to satisfy data protection, security, privacy, and other government- and industry-specific requirements, our growth could be harmed.

There are a number of data protection, security, privacy and other government- and industry-specific requirements, including those that require companies to notify individuals of data security incidents involving certain types of personal data. Security compromises experienced by our competitors, by our customers or by us may lead to public disclosures, which could harm our reputation, erode customer confidence in the effectiveness of our security measures, negatively impact our ability to attract new customers, or cause existing customers to elect not to renew their agreements with us. In addition, some of the industries we serve have industry-specific requirements relating to compliance with certain security and regulatory standards, such as those required by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH). As we expand into new verticals and regions, we will need to comply with these and other new requirements. If we cannot comply or if we incur a violation in one or more of these requirements, our growth could be adversely impacted, and we could incur significant liability.

Because we recognize revenue from subscriptions for our services over the term of the subscription, downturns or upturns in new business may not be immediately reflected in our operating results.

We generally recognize revenue from customers ratably over the terms of their subscription agreements, which are typically one year. As a result, most of the revenue we report in each quarter is the result of subscription agreements entered into during previous quarters. Consequently, a decline in new or renewed subscriptions in any one quarter may not be reflected in our revenue results for that quarter. However, any such

 

18


Table of Contents

decline will negatively affect our revenue in future quarters. Accordingly, the effect of significant downturns in sales and market acceptance of our services, and potential changes in our retention rate may not be fully reflected in our operating results until future periods. Our subscription model also makes it difficult for us to rapidly increase our revenue through additional sales in any period, as revenue from new customers must be recognized over the applicable subscription term.

Our platform must integrate with a variety of operating systems and software applications that are developed by others, and if we are unable to ensure that our solutions interoperate with such systems and applications, our service may become less competitive, and our operating results may be harmed.

We offer our services across a variety of operating systems and through the internet. We are dependent on the interoperability of our platform with third-party mobile devices, desktop and mobile operating systems, as well as web browsers that we do not control. Any changes in such systems, devices or web browsers that degrade the functionality of our services or give preferential treatment to competitive services could adversely affect usage of our services. In order to deliver high quality services, it is important that they work well with a range of operating systems, networks, devices, web browsers and standards that we do not control. In addition, because a substantial number of our users access our services through mobile devices, we are particularly dependent on the interoperability of our services with mobile devices and operating systems. We may not be successful in developing relationships with key participants in the mobile industry or in developing services that operate effectively with these operating systems, networks, devices, web browsers and standards. In the event that it is difficult for our users to access and use our services, our user growth may be harmed, and our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

We cannot accurately predict new subscription or expansion rates and the impact these rates may have on our future revenue and operating results.

In order for us to improve our operating results and continue to grow our business, it is important that we continue to attract new customers and expand deployment of our solution with existing customers. To the extent we are successful in increasing our customer base, we could incur increased losses because costs associated with new customers are generally incurred up front, while revenue is recognized ratably over the term of our subscription services. Alternatively, to the extent we are unsuccessful in increasing our customer base, we could also incur increased losses as costs associated with marketing programs and new products intended to attract new customers would not be offset by incremental revenue and cash flow. Furthermore, if our customers do not expand their deployment of our services, our revenue may grow more slowly than we expect. All of these factors can negatively impact our future revenue and operating results.

Our quarterly results may fluctuate significantly and may not fully reflect the underlying performance of our business.

Our quarterly operating results, including the levels of our revenue, gross margin, profitability, cash flow and deferred revenue, may vary significantly in the future, and period-to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful. Accordingly, the results of any one quarter should not be relied upon as an indication of future performance. Our quarterly financial results may fluctuate as a result of a variety of factors, many of which are outside of our control and, as a result, may not fully reflect the underlying performance of our business. Fluctuations in quarterly results may negatively impact the value of our Class A common stock. Factors that may cause fluctuations in our quarterly financial results include, but are not limited to:

 

    our ability to attract new customers;

 

    our ability to convert users of our limited free versions to paying customers;

 

    the addition or loss of large customers, including through acquisitions or consolidations;

 

    our retention rate;

 

19


Table of Contents
    the timing of recognition of revenue;

 

    the amount and timing of operating expenses related to the maintenance and expansion of our business, operations and infrastructure;

 

    network outages or security breaches;

 

    general economic, industry and market conditions;

 

    increases or decreases in the number of features in our services or pricing changes upon any renewals of customer agreements;

 

    changes in our pricing policies or those of our competitors;

 

    seasonal variations in sales of our services, which has historically been highest in the fourth quarter of a calendar year;

 

    the timing and success of new services and service introductions by us and our competitors or any other change in the competitive dynamics of our industry, including consolidation among competitors, customers or strategic partners; and

 

    the timing of expenses related to the development or acquisition of technologies or businesses and potential future charges for impairment of goodwill from acquired companies.

One of our marketing strategies is to offer a limited free version of our service, and we may not be able to realize the benefits of this strategy.

We offer a limited version of our service to users free of charge in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Some users never convert from a free version to a paid version of our service. Our marketing strategy also depends in part on persuading users who use the free version of our service to convince decision-makers to purchase and deploy our service within their organization. To the extent that these users do not become, or lead others to become, paying customers, we will not realize the intended benefits of this marketing strategy, and our ability to grow our business and revenue may be harmed.

If we fail to effectively manage our technical operations infrastructure, our customers may experience service outages and delays in the further deployment of our services, which may adversely affect our business.

We have experienced significant growth in the number of users and the amount of data that our operations infrastructure supports. We seek to maintain sufficient excess capacity in our operations infrastructure to meet the needs of all of our customers. We also seek to maintain excess capacity to facilitate the rapid provisioning of new customer deployments and the expansion of existing customer deployments. In addition, we need to properly manage our technological operations infrastructure in order to support version control, changes in hardware and software parameters and the evolution of our services. However, the provision of new hosting infrastructure requires significant lead-time. We have experienced, and may in the future experience, website disruptions, outages and other performance problems. These problems may be caused by a variety of factors, including infrastructure changes, human or software errors, viruses, security attacks, fraud, spikes in customer usage and denial of service issues. In some instances, we may not be able to identify the cause or causes of these performance problems within an acceptable period of time, which may harm our reputation and operating results. Furthermore, if we do not accurately predict our infrastructure requirements, our existing customers may experience service outages that may subject us to financial penalties, financial liabilities and customer losses. If our operations infrastructure fails to keep pace with increased sales, customers may experience delays as we seek to obtain additional capacity, which could adversely affect our reputation and our revenue.

Interruptions or delays in service from our third-party datacenter hosting facilities could impair the delivery of our services and harm our business.

We currently store our customers’ information within two third-party datacenter hosting facilities located in Northern California. As part of our current disaster recovery arrangements, our production environment and all

 

20


Table of Contents

of our customers’ data is currently replicated in near real time in a facility located in Las Vegas, Nevada. In addition, all of our customers’ data is further replicated on a third-party storage platform located on the East Coast. These facilities are located in areas prone to earthquakes and are also vulnerable to damage or interruption from floods, fires, power loss, telecommunications failures and similar events. They may also be subject to break-ins, sabotage, intentional acts of vandalism and similar misconduct. Any damage to, or failure of, our systems generally could result in interruptions in our service. Interruptions in our service may reduce our revenue, cause us to issue credits or pay penalties, cause customers to terminate their subscriptions and adversely affect our renewal rate and our ability to attract new customers. Our business will also be harmed if our customers and potential customers believe our service is unreliable. Despite precautions taken at these facilities, the occurrence of a natural disaster, an act of terrorism, a decision to close the facilities without adequate notice or other unanticipated problems at these facilities could result in lengthy interruptions in our service. Even with the disaster recovery arrangements, our service could be interrupted. As we continue to add datacenters and add capacity in our existing datacenters, we may move or transfer our data and our customers’ data. Despite precautions taken during this process, any unsuccessful data transfers may impair the delivery of our service. Further, as we continue to grow and scale our business to meet the needs of our customers, additional burdens may be placed on our hosting facilities. In particular, a rapid expansion of our business could cause our network or systems to fail.

If we overestimate or underestimate our data center capacity requirements, our operating results could be adversely affected.

Only a small percentage of our customers that are organizations currently use our service as a way to organize all of their internal files. In particular, larger organizations and enterprises typically use our service to connect people and their most important information so that they are able to get work done more efficiently. However, over time, we may experience an increase in customers that look to Box as their complete content storage solution. The costs associated with leasing and maintaining our data centers already constitute a significant portion of our capital and operating expenses. We continuously evaluate our short- and long-term data center capacity requirements to ensure adequate capacity for new and existing customers while minimizing unnecessary excess capacity costs. If we overestimate the demand for our cloud-based storage service and therefore secure excess data center capacity, our operating margins could be reduced. If we underestimate our data center capacity requirements, we may not be able to service the expanding needs of new and existing customers and may be required to limit new customer acquisition, which would impair our revenue growth. Furthermore, regardless of our ability to appropriately manage our data center capacity requirements, an increase in the number of organizations, in particular large businesses and enterprises, that use our service as a larger component of their content storage requirements could result in lower gross and operating margins or otherwise have an adverse impact on our financial condition and operating results.

We depend on highly skilled personnel to grow and operate our business, and if we are unable to hire, retain and motivate our personnel, we may not be able to grow effectively.

Our future success will depend upon our continued ability to identify, hire, develop, motivate and retain highly skilled personnel, including senior management, engineers, designers, product managers, sales representatives, and customer support representatives. Our ability to execute efficiently is dependent upon contributions from our employees, including our senior management team and, in particular, Aaron Levie, our co-founder, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. In addition, occasionally, there may be changes in our senior management team that may be disruptive to our business. If our senior management team, including any new hires that we may make, fails to work together effectively and to execute on our plans and strategies on a timely basis, our business could be harmed.

Our growth strategy also depends on our ability to expand our organization with highly skilled personnel. Identifying, recruiting, training and integrating qualified individuals will require significant time, expense and attention. In addition to hiring new employees, we must continue to focus on retaining our best employees. Many

 

21


Table of Contents

of our employees may be able to receive significant proceeds from sales of our equity in the public markets after this offering, which may reduce their motivation to continue to work for us. Competition for highly skilled personnel is intense, particularly in the San Francisco Bay Area, where our headquarters are located. We may need to invest significant amounts of cash and equity to attract and retain new employees, and we may never realize returns on these investments. If we are not able to effectively add and retain employees, our ability to achieve our strategic objectives will be adversely impacted, and our business will be harmed.

We may be sued by third parties for alleged infringement of their proprietary rights.

There is considerable patent and other intellectual property development activity in our industry. Our success depends on our not infringing upon the intellectual property rights of others. Our competitors, as well as a number of other entities, including non-practicing entities, and individuals, may own or claim to own intellectual property relating to our industry.

For example, on June 5, 2013, Open Text S.A. (Open Text) filed a lawsuit against us in U.S. District Court, Eastern District of Virginia, alleging that our core cloud software and Box Edit application directly and indirectly infringe 12 patents in three patent families that Open Text acquired through its acquisition of various companies. Open Text is seeking preliminary and permanent injunctions against infringement, treble damages, and attorney’s fees. A claims construction hearing, also known as a Markman hearing, is scheduled for October 2014, motions for summary judgment are scheduled to be heard late 2014, and a trial date has been scheduled for February 2, 2015.

Should Open Text prevail on its claims that one or more elements of our solution infringe one or more of its valid patents, we could be required to pay substantial damages for past sales of our solution, enjoined from developing, using, and licensing such elements of our solution if a license or other right to continue selling such elements is not made available to us or we are unable to work around such patents, and required to pay substantial ongoing royalties and comply with unfavorable terms if such a license is made available to us. While we believe we have valid defenses to Open Text’s claims, any of these outcomes could result in a material adverse effect on our business. Even if we were to prevail, this litigation could be costly and time-consuming, divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations and dissuade potential customers from purchasing our solution, which would also materially harm our business. During the course of litigation, we anticipate announcements of the results of hearings and motions, and other interim developments related to the litigation. If securities analysts or investors regard these announcements as negative, the market price of our common stock may decline.

We intend to defend the lawsuit vigorously. Given the early stage in the litigation, we are unable to predict the likelihood of success of Open Text’s infringement claims.

From time to time, certain other third parties have claimed that we are infringing upon their intellectual property rights, and we may be found to be infringing upon such rights. In addition, we cannot assure you that actions by other third parties alleging infringement by us of third-party patents will not be asserted or prosecuted against us. In the future, others may claim that our services and underlying technology infringe or violate their intellectual property rights. However, we may be unaware of the intellectual property rights that others may claim cover some or all of our technology or services. Any claims or litigation could cause us to incur significant expenses and, if successfully asserted against us, could require that we pay substantial damages or ongoing royalty payments, prevent us from offering our services, or require that we comply with other unfavorable terms. We may also be obligated to indemnify our customers or business partners or pay substantial settlement costs, including royalty payments, in connection with any such claim or litigation and to obtain licenses, modify services, or refund fees, which could be costly. Even if we were to prevail in such a dispute, any litigation regarding our intellectual property could be costly and time consuming and divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations.

 

22


Table of Contents

Any failure to protect our intellectual property rights could impair our ability to protect our proprietary technology and our brand.

Our success and ability to compete depend in part on our intellectual property. As of April 30, 2014, we had five issued U.S. patents, four issued Great Britain patents and more than 140 pending patent applications. We primarily rely on copyright, trade secret and trademark laws, trade secret protection and confidentiality or license agreements with our employees, customers, partners and others to protect our intellectual property rights. However, the steps we take to protect our intellectual property rights may be inadequate. We may not be able to obtain any further patents, and our pending applications may not result in the issuance of patents. We have issued patents and pending patent applications outside the U.S., and we may have to expend significant resources to obtain additional patents as we expand our international operations.

In order to protect our intellectual property rights, we may be required to spend significant resources to monitor and protect these rights. Litigation brought to protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could be costly, time-consuming and distracting to management and could result in the impairment or loss of portions of our intellectual property. Furthermore, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights may be met with defenses, counterclaims and countersuits attacking the validity and enforceability of our intellectual property rights. Accordingly, we may not be able to prevent third parties from infringing upon or misappropriating our intellectual property. Our failure to secure, protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could materially adversely affect our brand and adversely impact our business.

We rely on third parties for certain financial and operational services essential to our ability to manage our business. A failure or disruption in these services could materially and adversely affect our ability to manage our business effectively.

We rely on third parties for certain essential financial and operational services. Traditionally, the vast majority of these services have been provided by large enterprise software vendors who license their software to customers. However, we receive many of these services on a subscription basis from various software-as-a-service companies that are smaller and have shorter operating histories than traditional software vendors. Moreover, these vendors provide their services to us via a cloud-based model instead of software that is installed on our premises. As a result, we depend upon these vendors providing us with services that are always available and are free of errors or defects that could cause disruptions in our business processes, which would adversely affect our ability to operate and manage our operations.

We are subject to governmental export controls that could impair our ability to compete in international markets due to licensing requirements and economic sanctions programs that subject us to liability if we are not in full compliance with applicable laws.

Certain of our services are subject to export controls, including the U.S. Department of Commerce’s Export Administration Regulations and various economic and trade sanctions regulations administered by the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Controls. The provision of our products and services must comply with these laws. The U.S. export control laws and U.S. economic sanctions laws include prohibitions on the sale or supply of certain products and services to U.S. embargoed or sanctioned countries, governments, persons and entities and also require authorization for the export of encryption items. In addition, various countries regulate the import of certain encryption technology, including through import permitting and licensing requirements, and have enacted laws that could limit our ability to distribute our services or could limit our customers’ ability to implement our services in those countries.

Although we take precautions to prevent our services from being provided in violation of such laws, our solutions may have been in the past, and could in the future be, provided inadvertently in violation of such laws, despite the precautions we take. If we fail to comply with these laws, we and our employees could be subject to civil or criminal penalties, including the possible loss of export privileges, monetary penalties, and, in extreme cases, imprisonment of responsible employees for knowing and willful violations of these laws. We may also be adversely affected through penalties, reputational harm, loss of access to certain markets, or otherwise.

 

23


Table of Contents

Changes in our services, or changes in export, sanctions and import laws, may delay the introduction and sale of our services in international markets, prevent our customers with international operations from deploying our services or, in some cases, prevent the export or import of our services to certain countries, governments, persons or entities altogether. Any change in export or import regulations, economic sanctions or related laws, shift in the enforcement or scope of existing regulations, or change in the countries, governments, persons or technologies targeted by such regulations, could result in decreased use of our services, or in our decreased ability to export or sell our services to existing or potential customers with international operations. Any decreased use of our services or limitation on our ability to export or sell our services would likely adversely affect our business, financial condition and operating results.

We focus on product innovation and user engagement rather than short-term operating results.

We focus heavily on developing and launching new and innovative products and features, as well as on improving the user experience for our services. We also focus on growing the number of Box users and paying organizations through direct field sales, direct inside sales, indirect channel sales and through word-of-mouth by individual users, some of whom use our services at no cost. We prioritize innovation and the experience for users on our platform, as well as the growth of our user base, over short-term operating results. We frequently make product and service decisions that may reduce our short-term operating results if we believe that the decisions are consistent with our goals to improve the user experience and to develop innovative features that we feel our users desire. These decisions may not be consistent with the short-term expectations of investors and may not produce the long-term benefits that we expect.

We provide service level commitments under our subscription agreements. If we fail to meet these contractual commitments, we could be obligated to provide credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused subscription services or face subscription terminations, which could adversely affect our revenue. Furthermore, any failure in our delivery of high-quality customer support services may adversely affect our relationships with our customers and our financial results.

Our subscription agreements with customers provide certain service level commitments. If we are unable to meet the stated service level commitments or suffer extended periods of downtime that exceed the periods allowed under our customer agreements, we may be obligated to provide these customers with service credits, or we could face subscription terminations, which could significantly impact our revenue. Any extended service outages could also adversely affect our reputation, which would also impact our future revenue and operating results.

Our customers depend on our customer success organization to resolve technical issues relating to our services. We may be unable to respond quickly enough to accommodate short-term increases in customer demand for support services. Increased customer demand for these services, without corresponding revenue, could increase costs and adversely affect our operating results. In addition, our sales process is highly dependent on the ease of use of our services, on our reputation and on positive recommendations from our existing customers. Any failure to maintain high-quality customer support, or a market perception that we do not maintain high-quality support, could adversely affect our reputation and our ability to sell our services to existing and prospective customers.

If our services fail to perform properly or if we are unable to scale our services to meet the needs of our customers, our reputation could be adversely affected, our market share could decline and we could be subject to liability claims.

Our services are inherently complex and may contain material defects or errors. Any defects either in functionality or that cause interruptions in the availability of our services, as well as user error, could result in:

 

    loss or delayed market acceptance and sales;

 

    breach of warranty claims;

 

    sales credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused subscription services;

 

24


Table of Contents
    loss of customers;

 

    diversion of development and customer service resources; and

 

    harm to our reputation.

The costs incurred in correcting any material defects or errors might be substantial and could adversely affect our operating results.

Because of the large amount of data that we collect and manage, it is possible that hardware failures, errors in our systems or user errors could result in data loss or corruption that our customers regard as significant. Furthermore, the availability or performance of our services could be adversely affected by a number of factors, including customers’ inability to access the internet, the failure of our network or software systems, security breaches or variability in customer traffic for our services. We may be required to issue credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused services or otherwise be liable to our customers for damages they may incur resulting from some of these events. In addition to potential liability, if we experience interruptions in the availability of our services, our reputation could be adversely affected, which could result in the loss of customers. For example, our customers access our services through their internet service providers. If a service provider fails to provide sufficient capacity to support our services or otherwise experiences service outages, such failure could interrupt our customers’ access to our services, adversely affect their perception of our services’ reliability and consequently reduce our revenue.

Our errors and omissions insurance may be inadequate or may not be available in the future on acceptable terms, or at all. In addition, our policy may not cover all claims made against us, and defending a lawsuit, regardless of its merit, could be costly and divert management’s attention.

Furthermore, we will need to ensure that our services can scale to meet the needs of our customers, particularly as we continue to focus on larger enterprise customers. If we are not able to provide our services at the scale required by our customers, potential customers may not adopt our solution and existing customers may not renew their agreements with us.

If the prices we charge for our services are unacceptable to our customers, our operating results will be harmed.

As the market for our services matures, or as new or existing competitors introduce new products or services that compete with ours, we may experience pricing pressure and be unable to renew our agreements with existing customers or attract new customers at prices that are consistent with our pricing model and operating budget. If this were to occur, it is possible that we would have to change our pricing model or reduce our prices, which could harm our revenue, gross margin and operating results.

Sales to customers outside the United States or with international operations expose us to risks inherent in international sales.

A key element of our growth strategy is to expand our international operations and develop a worldwide customer base. To date, we have not realized a substantial portion of our revenue from customers outside the United States. Operating in international markets requires significant resources and management attention and will subject us to regulatory, economic, geographic and political risks that are different from those in the United States. Because of our limited experience with international operations and significant differences between international and U.S. markets, our international expansion efforts may not be successful in creating demand for our services outside of the United States or in effectively selling subscriptions to our services in all of the international markets we enter. In addition, we will face specific risks in doing business internationally that could adversely affect our business, including:

 

    the need to localize and adapt our services for specific countries, including translation into foreign languages and associated expenses;

 

25


Table of Contents
    data privacy laws that, among other things, could require that customer data be stored and processed in a designated territory;

 

    difficulties in staffing and managing foreign operations;

 

    different pricing environments, longer sales cycles and longer accounts receivable payment cycles and collections issues;

 

    new and different sources of competition;

 

    weaker protection for intellectual property and other legal rights than in the United States and practical difficulties in enforcing intellectual property and other rights outside of the United States;

 

    laws and business practices favoring local competitors;

 

    compliance challenges related to the complexity of multiple, conflicting and changing governmental laws and regulations, including employment, tax, privacy and data protection laws and regulations;

 

    increased financial accounting and reporting burdens and complexities;

 

    restrictions on the transfer of funds;

 

    adverse tax consequences; and

 

    unstable regional, economic and political conditions.

We both sell our services and incur operating expenses in various currencies. Therefore, fluctuations in the value of the U.S. dollar and foreign currencies may impact our operating results when translated into U.S. dollars. We currently manage our exchange rate risk by matching foreign currency cash balances with payables but do not have any other hedging programs in place to limit the risk of exchange rate fluctuations.

Failure to adequately expand our direct sales force will impede our growth.

We will need to continue to expand and optimize our sales infrastructure in order to grow our customer base and our business. We plan to continue to expand our direct sales force, both domestically and internationally. Identifying and recruiting qualified personnel and training them requires significant time, expense and attention. Our business may be adversely affected if our efforts to expand and train our direct sales force do not generate a corresponding increase in revenue. If we are unable to hire, develop and retain talented sales personnel or if new direct sales personnel are unable to achieve desired productivity levels in a reasonable period of time, we may not be able to realize the intended benefits of this investment or increase our revenue.

If we are unable to maintain and promote our brand, our business and operating results may be harmed.

We believe that maintaining and promoting our brand is critical to expanding our customer base. Maintaining and promoting our brand will depend largely on our ability to continue to provide useful, reliable and innovative services, which we may not do successfully. We may introduce new features, products, services or terms of service that our customers do not like, which may negatively affect our brand and reputation. Additionally, the actions of third parties may affect our brand and reputation if customers do not have a positive experience using third-party apps or other services that are integrated with Box. Maintaining and enhancing our brand may require us to make substantial investments, and these investments may not achieve the desired goals. If we fail to successfully promote and maintain our brand or if we incur excessive expenses in this effort, our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

Our growth depends in part on the success of our strategic relationships with third parties.

In order to grow our business, we anticipate that we will continue to depend on our relationships with third parties, such as alliance partners, distributors, system integrators and developers. For example, we have entered into agreements with partners to market, resell, integrate with or endorse our services. We also partner with channel partners and resellers to sell our services. Identifying partners and resellers, and negotiating and

 

26


Table of Contents

documenting relationships with them, requires significant time and resources. Also, we depend on our ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform. Our competitors may be effective in providing incentives to third parties to favor their products or services, or to prevent or reduce subscriptions to our services. In addition, acquisitions of our partners by our competitors could result in a decrease in the number of current and potential customers, as our partners may no longer facilitate the adoption of our services by potential customers.

If we are unsuccessful in establishing or maintaining our relationships with third parties, our ability to compete in the marketplace or to grow our revenue could be impaired and our operating results may suffer. Even if we are successful, we cannot assure you that these relationships will result in increased customer usage of our services or increased revenue.

Furthermore, if our partners and resellers fail to perform as expected, our reputation may be harmed and our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

We depend on our ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform.

We depend on our partner ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform. This presents certain risks to our business, including:

 

    we cannot provide any assurance that these applications meet the same quality standards that we apply to our own development efforts, and to the extent that they contain bugs or defects, they may create disruptions in our customers’ use of our services or negatively affect our brand;

 

    we do not currently provide support for software applications developed by our partner ecosystem, and users may be left without support and potentially cease using our services if these system integrators and developers do not provide adequate support for their applications; and

 

    these system integrators and developers may not possess the appropriate intellectual property rights to develop and share their applications.

Many of these risks are not within our control to prevent, and our brand may be damaged if these applications do not perform to our users’ satisfaction and that dissatisfaction is attributed to us.

Our corporate culture has contributed to our success, and if we cannot maintain this culture as we grow, we could lose the innovation, creativity and teamwork fostered by our culture, and our business may be harmed.

We believe that our culture has been and will continue to be a key contributor to our success. From January 31, 2013 to April 30, 2014, we increased the size of our workforce by over 320 employees, and we expect to continue to hire aggressively as we expand. If we do not continue to develop our corporate culture or maintain our core values as we grow and evolve both in the United States and internationally, we may be unable to foster the innovation, creativity and teamwork we believe we need to support our growth. Moreover, liquidity available to our employee security holders following this offering could lead to disparities of wealth among our employees, which could adversely impact relations among employees and our culture in general. Our transition from a private company to a public company may result in a change to our corporate culture, which could harm our business.

Our services contain open source software, and we license some of our software through open source projects, which may pose particular risks to our proprietary software, products, and services in a manner that could have a negative impact on our business.

We use open source software in our services and will use open source software in the future. In addition, we regularly contribute software source code to open source projects under open source licenses or release internal software projects under open source licenses, and anticipate doing so in the future. The terms of many open

 

27


Table of Contents

source licenses to which we are subject have not been interpreted by U.S. or foreign courts, and there is a risk that open source software licenses could be construed in a manner that imposes unanticipated conditions or restrictions on our ability to provide or distribute our services. Additionally, we may from time to time face claims from third parties claiming ownership of, or demanding release of, the open source software or derivative works that we developed using such software, which could include our proprietary source code, or otherwise seeking to enforce the terms of the applicable open source license. These claims could result in litigation and could require us to make our software source code freely available, purchase a costly license or cease offering the implicated services unless and until we can re-engineer them to avoid infringement. This re-engineering process could require significant additional research and development resources, and we may not be able to complete it successfully. In addition to risks related to license requirements, use of certain open source software can lead to greater risks than use of third-party commercial software, as open source licensors generally do not provide warranties or controls on the origin of software. Additionally, because any software source code we contribute to open source projects is publicly available, our ability to protect our intellectual property rights with respect to such software source code may be limited or lost entirely, and we are unable to prevent our competitors or others from using such contributed software source code. Any of these risks could be difficult to eliminate or manage, and, if not addressed, could have a negative effect on our business, financial condition and operating results.

Future acquisitions and investments could disrupt our business and harm our financial condition and operating results.

Our success will depend, in part, on our ability to expand our services and grow our business in response to changing technologies, customer demands, and competitive pressures. In some circumstances, we may choose to do so through the acquisition of complementary businesses and technologies rather than through internal development, including, for example, our recent acquisitions of Crocodoc, Inc., a company with advanced HTML5 based document rendering technology, and Streem, a company with technology that allows users to mount a cloud drive onto their computer. The identification of suitable acquisition candidates can be difficult, time-consuming and costly, and we may not be able to successfully complete identified acquisitions. The risks we face in connection with acquisitions include:

 

    diversion of management time and focus from operating our business to addressing acquisition integration challenges;

 

    coordination of research and development and sales and marketing functions;

 

    retention of key employees from the acquired company;

 

    cultural challenges associated with integrating employees from the acquired company into our organization;

 

    integration of the acquired company’s accounting, management information, human resources and other administrative systems;

 

    the need to implement or improve controls, procedures, and policies at a business that prior to the acquisition may have lacked effective controls, procedures and policies;

 

    liability for activities of the acquired company before the acquisition, including intellectual property infringement claims, violations of laws, commercial disputes, tax liabilities and other known and unknown liabilities;

 

    unanticipated write-offs or charges; and

 

    litigation or other claims in connection with the acquired company, including claims from terminated employees, customers, former stockholders or other third parties.

Our failure to address these risks or other problems encountered in connection with our past or future acquisitions and investments could cause us to fail to realize the anticipated benefits of these acquisitions or investments, cause us to incur unanticipated liabilities, and harm our business generally. Future acquisitions could also result in dilutive issuances of our equity securities, the incurrence of debt, contingent liabilities,

 

28


Table of Contents

amortization expenses, incremental operating expenses or the write-off of goodwill, any of which could harm our financial condition or operating results.

We may require additional capital to support our operations or the growth of our business, and we cannot be certain that this capital will be available on reasonable terms when required, or at all.

On occasion, we may need additional financing to operate or grow our business. Our ability to obtain additional financing, if and when required, will depend on investor and lender demand, our operating performance, the condition of the capital markets and other factors. We cannot guarantee that additional financing will be available to us on favorable terms when required, or at all. If we raise additional funds through the issuance of equity, equity-linked or debt securities, those securities may have rights, preferences or privileges senior to the rights of our Class A common stock, and our existing stockholders may experience dilution. If we are unable to obtain adequate financing or financing on terms satisfactory to us when we require it, our ability to continue to support the operation or growth of our business could be significantly impaired and our operating results may be harmed.

Financing agreements we are party to or may become party to may contain operating and financial covenants that restrict our business and financing activities.

Our existing credit agreement with certain lenders contains certain operating and financial restrictions and covenants, including the prohibition of the incurrence of certain indebtedness and liens, the prohibition of certain investments, restrictions against certain merger and consolidation transactions, certain restrictions against the disposition of assets and the requirement to maintain a minimum level of liquidity. These restrictions and covenants, as well as those contained in any future financing agreements that we may enter into, may restrict our ability to finance our operations, engage in, expand or otherwise pursue our business activities and strategies. Our ability to comply with these covenants may be affected by events beyond our control, and breaches of these covenants could result in a default under the credit agreement and any future financial agreements that we may enter into. If not waived, defaults could cause our outstanding indebtedness under our credit agreement and any future financing agreements that we may enter into to become immediately due and payable.

Adverse economic conditions may negatively impact our business.

Our business depends on the overall demand for Enterprise Content Collaboration and on the economic health of our current and prospective customers. The financial recession resulted in a significant weakening of the economy in the United States, Europe and worldwide, more limited availability of credit, a reduction in business confidence and activity, and other difficulties that may affect one or more of the industries to which we sell our services. In addition, there has been pressure to reduce government spending in the United States, and tax increases and spending cuts at the Federal level (the sequester) have gone into effect. In the event lawmakers cannot agree on matters such as the national debt ceiling or future budgets, the United States could default on its obligations. This may reduce demand for our services from organizations that receive funding from the U.S. government and this could negatively affect the U.S. economy, which could further reduce demand for our services. Furthermore, the economies of certain European countries have been experiencing difficulties associated with high sovereign debt levels, weakness in the banking sector and uncertainty over the future of the eurozone. We have operations in the United Kingdom, Germany and France and current and potential customers in Europe. If economic conditions in Europe and other key markets for our services continue to remain uncertain or deteriorate further, many customers may delay or reduce their information technology spending. This could result in reductions in sales of our services, longer sales cycles, reductions in subscription duration and value, slower adoption of new technologies and increased price competition. Any of these events would likely have an adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial position. In addition, there can be no assurance that Enterprise Content Collaboration spending levels will increase following any recovery.

 

29


Table of Contents

Changes in laws and regulations related to the internet or changes in the internet infrastructure itself may diminish the demand for our services, and could have a negative impact on our business.

The future success of our business depends upon the continued use of the internet as a primary medium for commerce, communication and business services. Federal, state or foreign government bodies or agencies have in the past adopted, and may in the future adopt, laws or regulations affecting the use of the internet as a commercial medium. Changes in these laws or regulations could require us to modify our services in order to comply with these changes. In addition, government agencies or private organizations may begin to impose taxes, fees or other charges for accessing the internet or commerce conducted via the internet. These laws or charges could limit the growth of internet-related commerce or communications generally, or result in reductions in the demand for internet-based services such as ours.

In addition, the use of the internet and, in particular, the cloud as a business tool could be adversely affected due to delays in the development or adoption of new standards and protocols to handle increased demands of internet activity, security, reliability, cost, ease of use, accessibility, and quality of service. The performance of the internet and its acceptance as a business tool have been adversely affected by “viruses,” “worms” and similar malicious programs, and the internet has experienced a variety of outages and other delays as a result of damage to portions of its infrastructure. If the use of the internet is adversely affected by these issues, demand for our services could suffer.

We employ third-party licensed software for use in or with our services, and the inability to maintain these licenses or errors in the software we license could result in increased costs, or reduced service levels, which would adversely affect our business.

Our services incorporate certain third-party software obtained under licenses from other companies. We anticipate that we will continue to rely on such third-party software and development tools in the future. Although we believe that there are commercially reasonable alternatives to the third-party software we currently license, this may not always be the case, or it may be difficult or costly to replace. In addition, integration of the software used in our services with new third-party software may require significant work and require substantial investment of our time and resources. Also, to the extent that our services depend upon the successful operation of third-party software in conjunction with our software, any undetected errors or defects in this third-party software could prevent the deployment or impair the functionality of our services, delay new services introductions, result in a failure of our services, and injure our reputation. Our use of additional or alternative third-party software would require us to enter into additional license agreements with third parties.

If we fail to maintain an effective system of disclosure controls and internal control over financial reporting, our ability to produce timely and accurate financial statements or comply with applicable regulations could be impaired.

As a public company, we will be subject to the reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (Exchange Act), the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the listing standards of the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE). We expect that the requirements of these rules and regulations will continue to increase our legal, accounting and financial compliance costs, make some activities more difficult, time consuming and costly, and place significant strain on our personnel, systems and resources.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires, among other things, that we maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures, and internal control over financial reporting. We are continuing to develop and refine our disclosure controls and other procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we will file with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in SEC rules and forms. We are also continuing to improve our internal control over financial reporting. We have expended, and anticipate that we will continue to expend, significant resources in order to maintain and improve the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting.

 

30


Table of Contents

Our current controls and any new controls that we develop may become inadequate because of changes in conditions in our business, including increased complexity resulting from our international expansion. Further, weaknesses in our disclosure controls or our internal control over financial reporting may be discovered in the future. Any failure to develop or maintain effective controls, or any difficulties encountered in their implementation or improvement, could harm our operating results or cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations and may result in a restatement of our financial statements for prior periods. Any failure to implement and maintain effective internal control over financial reporting could also adversely affect the results of management reports and independent registered public accounting firm audits of our internal control over financial reporting that we will eventually be required to include in our periodic reports that will be filed with the SEC. Ineffective disclosure controls and procedures, and internal control over financial reporting could also cause investors to lose confidence in our reported financial and other information, which would likely have a negative effect on the market price of our Class A common stock. In addition, if we are unable to continue to meet these requirements, we may not be able to remain listed on the NYSE.

We are not currently required to comply with the SEC rules that implement Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and are therefore not required to make a formal assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting for that purpose. Upon becoming a public company, we will be required to provide an annual management report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting commencing with our second annual report on Form 10-K. Our independent registered public accounting firm is not required to audit the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting until after we are no longer an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the JOBS Act. At such time, our independent registered public accounting firm may issue a report that is adverse in the event it is not satisfied with the level at which our internal control over financial reporting is documented, designed or operating.

Any failure to maintain effective disclosure controls and internal control over financial reporting could have a material and adverse effect on our business and operating results, and cause a decline in the market price of our Class A common stock.

We are an emerging growth company, and any decision on our part to comply only with certain reduced reporting and disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies could make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors.

We are an emerging growth company, and, for as long as we continue to be an emerging growth company, we may choose to take advantage of exemptions from various reporting requirements applicable to other public companies but not to “emerging growth companies,” including: not being required to have our independent registered public accounting firm audit our internal control over financial reporting under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, and exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and stockholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. We could be an emerging growth company for up to five years following the completion of this offering. We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of (i) the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; (ii) the date we qualify as a “large accelerated filer,” with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; (iii) the date on which we have issued, in any three-year period, more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; and (iv) the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of the completion of this offering. We cannot predict if investors will find our Class A common stock less attractive if we choose to rely on these exemptions. If some investors find our Class A common stock less attractive as a result of any choices we make to avail ourselves of these exemptions, there may be a less active trading market for our Class A common stock and the market price of our Class A common stock may be more volatile.

Under the JOBS Act, emerging growth companies can also delay adopting new or revised accounting standards until such time as those standards apply to private companies. We have irrevocably elected not to avail ourselves of this accommodation allowing for delayed adoption of new or revised accounting standards, and,

 

31


Table of Contents

therefore, we will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

Our ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and certain other tax attributes may be limited.

As of January 31, 2014, we had U.S. federal net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $263.7 million and state net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $262.6 million. Under Sections 382 and 383 of Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), if a corporation undergoes an “ownership change,” the corporation’s ability to use its pre-change net operating loss carryforwards and other pre-change tax attributes, such as research tax credits, to offset its post-change income and taxes may be limited. In general, an “ownership change” occurs if there is a cumulative change in our ownership by “5% shareholders” that exceeds 50 percentage points over a rolling three-year period. Similar rules may apply under state tax laws. We have in the past experienced an ownership change which has impacted our ability to fully realize the benefit of these net operating loss carryforwards. If we experience additional ownership changes as a result of this offering or future transactions in our stock, then we may be further limited in our ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and other tax assets to reduce taxes owed on the net taxable income that we earn. Any such limitations on the ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and other tax assets could adversely impact our business, financial condition and operating results.

Tax laws or regulations could be enacted or changed and existing tax laws or regulations could be applied to us or to our customers in a manner that could increase the costs of our services and adversely impact our business.

The application of federal, state, local and international tax laws to services provided electronically is unclear and continuously evolving. Income, sales, use or other tax laws, statutes, rules, regulations or ordinances could be enacted or amended at any time, possibly with retroactive effect, and could be applied solely or disproportionately to services provided over the internet. These enactments or amendments could adversely affect our sales activity due to the inherent cost increase the taxes would represent and ultimately result in a negative impact on our operating results and cash flows.

In addition, existing tax laws, statutes, rules, regulations or ordinances could be interpreted or applied adversely to us, possibly with retroactive effect, which could require us or our customers to pay additional tax amounts, as well as require us or our customers to pay fines or penalties, as well as interest for past amounts. If we are unsuccessful in collecting such taxes due from our customers, we could be held liable for such costs, thereby adversely impacting our operating results and cash flows.

We may be subject to additional tax liabilities.

We are subject to income, sales, use, value added and other taxes in the United States and other countries in which we conduct business, and such laws and rates vary by jurisdiction. Certain jurisdictions in which we do not collect sales, use, value added or other taxes on our sales may assert that such taxes are applicable, which could result in tax assessments, penalties and interest, and we may be required to collect such taxes in the future. Significant judgment is required in determining our worldwide provision for income taxes. These determinations are highly complex and require detailed analysis of the available information and applicable statutes and regulatory materials. In the ordinary course of our business, there are many transactions and calculations where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. Although we believe our tax estimates are reasonable, the final determination of tax audits and any related litigation could be materially different from our historical tax practices, provisions and accruals. If we receive an adverse ruling as a result of an audit, or we unilaterally determine that we have misinterpreted provisions of the tax regulations to which we are subject, there could be a material effect on our tax provision, net income or cash flows in the period or periods for which that determination is made. In addition, liabilities associated with taxes are often subject to an extended or indefinite statute of limitations period. Therefore, we may be subject to additional tax liability (including penalties and interest) for a particular year for extended periods of time.

 

32


Table of Contents

Our reported financial results may be adversely affected by changes in accounting principles generally accepted in the United States.

Generally accepted accounting principles in the United States are subject to interpretation by the Financial Accounting Standards Board, the SEC and various bodies formed to promulgate and interpret appropriate accounting principles. A change in these principles or interpretations could have a significant effect on our reported financial results, and could affect the reporting of transactions completed before the announcement of a change.

Risks Related to Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock and this Offering

The dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with those stockholders who held our capital stock prior to the completion of this offering, including our executive officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, which will limit your ability to influence the outcome of important transactions, including a change in control.

Our Class B common stock has 10 votes per share, and our Class A common stock, which is the stock we are offering in this offering, has one vote per share. Upon the completion of this offering, stockholders who hold shares of our Class B common stock, including our executive officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, will collectively hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock. Because of the ten-to-one voting ratio between our Class B common stock and Class A common stock, after the completion of this offering, the holders of our Class B common stock will collectively continue to control a majority of the combined voting power of our capital stock and therefore be able to control all matters submitted to our stockholders for approval so long as the shares of our Class B common stock represent at least     % of all outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock. These holders of our Class B common stock may also have interests that differ from yours and may vote in a way with which you disagree and which may be adverse to your interests. This concentrated control may have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change in control of our company, could deprive our stockholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their capital stock as part of a sale of our company and might ultimately affect the market price of our Class A common stock.

Future transfers by holders of our Class B common stock will generally result in those shares converting into shares of our Class A common stock, subject to limited exceptions, such as certain transfers effected for estate planning or charitable purposes. The conversion of shares of our Class B common stock into shares of our Class A common stock will have the effect, over time, of increasing the relative voting power of those holders of Class B common stock who retain their shares in the long term. If, for example, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith retain a significant portion of their holdings of our Class B common stock for an extended period of time, they could control a significant portion of the voting power of our capital stock for the foreseeable future. As board members, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith each owe a fiduciary duty to our stockholders and must act in good faith and in a manner they reasonably believe to be in the best interests of our stockholders. As stockholders, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith are entitled to vote their shares in their own interests, which may not always be in the interests of our stockholders generally. For a description of the dual class structure, see the section titled “Description of Capital Stock.”

Anti-takeover provisions contained in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, as well as provisions of Delaware law, could impair a takeover attempt.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended and restated bylaws and Delaware law contain or will contain provisions which could have the effect of rendering more difficult, delaying or preventing an acquisition deemed undesirable by our board of directors. Among other things, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will include provisions:

 

    creating a classified board of directors whose members serve staggered three-year terms;

 

33


Table of Contents
    authorizing “blank check” preferred stock, which could be issued by our board of directors without stockholder approval and may contain voting, liquidation, dividend and other rights superior to our common stock;

 

    limiting the liability of, and providing indemnification to, our directors and officers;

 

    limiting the ability of our stockholders to call and bring business before special meetings;

 

    requiring advance notice of stockholder proposals for business to be conducted at meetings of our stockholders and for nominations of candidates for election to our board of directors;

 

    controlling the procedures for the conduct and scheduling of board of directors and stockholder meetings; and

 

    authorizing two classes of common stock, as discussed above.

These provisions, alone or together, could delay or prevent hostile takeovers and changes in control or changes in our management.

As a Delaware corporation, we are also subject to provisions of Delaware law, including Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation law, which prevents certain stockholders holding more than 15% of our outstanding capital stock from engaging in certain business combinations without approval of the holders of at least two-thirds of our outstanding common stock not held by such stockholder.

Any provision of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended and restated bylaws or Delaware law that has the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change in control could limit the opportunity for our stockholders to receive a premium for their shares of our capital stock, and could also affect the price that some investors are willing to pay for our Class A common stock.

An active trading market for our Class A common stock may never develop or be sustained.

Our Class A common stock has been approved for listing on the NYSE under the symbol “BOX.” However, we cannot assure you that an active trading market for our Class A common stock will develop on that exchange or elsewhere or, if developed, that any market will be sustained. Accordingly, we cannot assure you of the liquidity of any trading market, your ability to sell your shares of our Class A common stock when desired or the prices that you may obtain for your shares of our Class A common stock.

The market price of our Class A common stock may be volatile, and you could lose all or part of your investment.

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for shares of our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price of our Class A common stock will be determined through negotiation between us and the underwriters. This price will not necessarily reflect the price at which investors in the market will be willing to buy and sell shares of our Class A common stock following this offering. In addition, the market price of our Class A common stock following this offering is likely to be highly volatile, may be higher or lower than the initial public offering price of our Class A common stock and could be subject to wide fluctuations in response to various factors, some of which are beyond our control and may not be related to our operating performance.

Fluctuations in the price of our Class A common stock could cause you to lose all or part of your investment because you may not be able to sell your shares at or above the price you paid in this offering. Factors that could cause fluctuations in the market price of our Class A common stock include the following:

 

    price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market from time to time;

 

    volatility in the market prices and trading volumes of technology stocks;

 

    changes in operating performance and stock market valuations of other technology companies generally or those in our industry in particular;

 

34


Table of Contents
    sales of shares of our Class A common stock by us or our stockholders;

 

    failure of securities analysts to maintain coverage of us, changes in financial estimates by securities analysts who follow us, or our failure to meet these estimates or the expectations of investors;

 

    the financial projections we may provide to the public, any changes in those projections or our failure to meet those projections;

 

    announcements by us or our competitors of new products or services;

 

    the public’s reaction to our press releases, other public announcements and filings with the SEC;

 

    rumors and market speculation involving us or other companies in our industry;

 

    actual or anticipated changes in our operating results or fluctuations in our operating results;

 

    actual or anticipated developments in our business, our competitors’ businesses or the competitive landscape generally;

 

    litigation involving us, our industry or both, or investigations by regulators into our operations or those of our competitors;

 

    developments or disputes concerning our intellectual property or other proprietary rights;

 

    announced or completed acquisitions of businesses or technologies by us or our competitors;

 

    new laws or regulations or new interpretations of existing laws or regulations applicable to our business;

 

    changes in accounting standards, policies, guidelines, interpretations or principles;

 

    any significant change in our management; and

 

    general economic conditions and slow or negative growth of our markets.

In addition, in the past, following periods of volatility in the overall market and the market price of a particular company’s securities, securities class action litigation has often been instituted against these companies. This litigation, if instituted against us, could result in substantial costs and a diversion of our management’s attention and resources.

A total of     , or     %, of the outstanding shares of our capital stock after this offering will be restricted from immediate resale but may be sold on a stock exchange in the near future. The large number of shares of our capital stock eligible for public sale or subject to rights requiring us to register them for public sale could depress the market price of our Class A common stock.

The market price of our Class A common stock could decline as a result of sales of a large number of shares of our Class A common stock in the market after this offering, and the perception that these sales could occur may also depress the market price of our Class A common stock. Based on shares of our capital stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, we will have              shares of our capital stock outstanding after this offering. Our executive officers, directors and the holders of substantially all of our capital stock and securities convertible into or exchangeable for our capital stock have entered into market standoff agreements with us or will enter into lock-up agreements with the underwriters under which they have agreed or will agree, subject to specific exceptions, not to sell any of our capital stock for 180 days following the date of this prospectus. As a result of these agreements, the provisions of our investors’ rights agreement described further in the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” and the provisions of Rule 144 or Rule 701 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (Securities Act), shares of our capital stock will be available for sale in the public market as follows:

 

    beginning on the date of this prospectus, all              shares of our Class A common stock sold in this offering will be immediately available for sale in the public market; and

 

35


Table of Contents
    beginning 180 days after the date of this prospectus, the remainder of the shares of our capital stock will be eligible for sale in the public market from time to time thereafter, subject in some cases to the volume and other restrictions of Rule 144 and our insider trading policy.

Following the expiration of the lock-up agreements referred to above, stockholders owning an aggregate of up to 80,983,494 shares of our Class B common stock can require us to register shares of our capital stock owned by them for public sale in the United States. In addition, we intend to file a registration statement to register approximately              shares of our capital stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans. Upon effectiveness of that registration statement, subject to the satisfaction of applicable exercise periods and expiration of the market standoff agreements and lock-up agreements referred to above, the shares of our capital stock issued upon exercise of outstanding options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock and upon the vesting of outstanding RSUs will be available for immediate resale in the United States in the open market.

Sales of our Class A common stock as restrictions end or pursuant to registration rights may make it more difficult for us to sell equity securities in the future at a time and at a price that we deem appropriate. These sales also could cause the market price of our Class A common stock to fall and make it more difficult for you to sell shares of our Class A common stock.

In making your investment decision, you should understand that we and the underwriters have not authorized any other party to provide you with information concerning us or this offering.

You should carefully evaluate all of the information in this prospectus. We have in the past received, and may continue to receive, a high degree of media coverage, including coverage that is not directly attributable to statements made by our officers or employees, that incorrectly reports on statements made by our officers or employees or that is misleading as a result of omitting information provided by us, our officers or employees. We and the underwriters have not authorized any other party to provide you with information concerning us or this offering.

We may invest or spend the proceeds of this offering in ways with which you may not agree or in ways which may not yield a return.

Our net proceeds from the sale of shares of our Class A common stock in this offering will be used for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. Additionally, we may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific material acquisitions at this time. Our management will have considerable discretion in the application of the net proceeds, and you will not have the opportunity, as part of your investment decision, to assess whether the proceeds are being used appropriately. Until the net proceeds are used, they may be placed in investments that do not produce significant income or that may lose value.

Purchasers in this offering will experience immediate and substantial dilution in the book value of their investment.

The assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, is substantially higher than the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our outstanding capital stock upon the completion of this offering. Therefore, if you purchase shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, you will incur immediate dilution of $         in the net tangible book value per share from the price you paid. In addition, investors purchasing shares of our Class A common stock from us in this offering will have contributed     % of the total consideration paid to us by all stockholders who purchased shares of our common stock, in exchange for acquiring approximately     % of the outstanding shares of our common stock as of April 30, 2014, after giving effect to this offering. The exercise of outstanding options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock and the vesting of outstanding RSUs will result in further dilution.

 

36


Table of Contents

If securities or industry analysts do not publish or cease publishing research or reports about us, our business, our market or our competitors, or if they adversely change their recommendations regarding our Class A common stock, the market price of our Class A common stock and trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our Class A common stock will be influenced by the research and reports that securities or industry analysts may publish about us, our business, our market or our competitors. If any of the analysts who may cover us adversely change their recommendations regarding our Class A common stock or provide more favorable recommendations about our competitors, the market price of our Class A common stock would likely decline. If any of the analysts who may cover us were to cease coverage of our company or fail to regularly publish reports on us, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which in turn could cause the market price of our Class A common stock or trading volume to decline.

We do not expect to declare any dividends in the foreseeable future.

We do not anticipate declaring any cash dividends to holders of our Class A common stock in the foreseeable future. Consequently, investors may need to rely on sales of our Class A common stock after price appreciation, which may never occur, as the only way to realize any future gains on their investment. Investors seeking cash dividends should not purchase shares of our Class A common stock.

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been limited trading of our securities at prices that may be higher than what our Class A common stock will trade at once it is listed.

Prior to the completion of this offering, our securities have not been listed on any stock exchange or other public trading market, but there has been some trading of our securities in private transactions. These transactions were speculative, and the trading prices of our securities in these transactions were privately negotiated. We cannot assure you that the market price of our Class A common stock will equal or exceed the price at which our securities have traded prior to the completion of this offering.

 

37


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus, including the sections titled “Prospectus Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Use of Proceeds,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations,” “Business,” and “Executive Compensation,” contains forward-looking statements. The words “believe,” “may,” “will,” “potentially,” “estimate,” “continue,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “could,” “would,” “project,” “plan,” “expect” and similar expressions that convey uncertainty of future events or outcomes are intended to identify forward-looking statements.

These forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements concerning the following:

 

    our ability to maintain an adequate rate of revenue growth;

 

    our business plan and our ability to effectively manage our growth;

 

    costs associated with defending intellectual property infringement and other claims;

 

    our ability to attract and retain end-customers;

 

    our ability to further penetrate our existing customer base;

 

    our ability to displace existing products in established markets;

 

    our ability to expand our leadership position in Enterprise Content Collaboration solutions;

 

    our ability to timely and effectively scale and adapt our existing technology;

 

    our ability to innovate new products and bring them to market in a timely manner;

 

    our ability to expand internationally;

 

    the effects of increased competition in our market and our ability to compete effectively;

 

    the effects of seasonal trends on our operating results;

 

    our expectations concerning relationships with third parties;

 

    the attraction and retention of qualified employees and key personnel;

 

    our ability to maintain, protect and enhance our brand and intellectual property; and

 

    future acquisitions of or investments in complementary companies, products, services or technologies.

These forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions, including those described in the section titled “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus. Moreover, we operate in a very competitive and rapidly changing environment, and new risks emerge from time to time. It is not possible for our management to predict all risks, nor can we assess the impact of all factors on our business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements we may make. In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, the forward-looking events and circumstances discussed in this prospectus may not occur and actual results could differ materially and adversely from those anticipated or implied in the forward-looking statements.

You should not rely upon forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee that the future results, levels of activity, performance or events and circumstances reflected in the forward-looking statements will be achieved or occur. Moreover, neither we nor any other person assumes responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the forward-looking statements. We undertake no obligation to update publicly any forward-looking statements for any reason after the date of this prospectus to conform these statements to actual results or to changes in our expectations, except as required by law.

 

38


Table of Contents

You should read this prospectus and the documents that we reference in this prospectus and have filed with the SEC as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part with the understanding that our actual future results, levels of activity, performance, and events and circumstances may be materially different from what we expect.

 

39


Table of Contents

MARKET AND INDUSTRY DATA

This prospectus contains estimates and information concerning our industry, including market size and growth rates of the markets in which we participate, that are based on industry publications and reports. This information involves a number of assumptions and limitations, and you are cautioned not to give undue weight to these estimates. We have not independently verified the accuracy or completeness of the data contained in these industry publications and reports. The industry in which we operate is subject to a high degree of uncertainty and risk due to a variety of factors, including those described in the section titled “Risk Factors,” that could cause results to differ materially from those expressed in these publications and reports.

Certain information in the text of this prospectus is contained in independent industry publications. The source of these independent industry publications is provided below:

 

  (1)   Gartner, Inc., Forecast: Public Cloud Services, Worldwide, 2011-2017, 3Q13 Update, September 2013

 

  (2)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide New Media Market Model 1H2013, June 2013

 

  (3)   Forrester Research, Inc., 2013 Mobile Workforce Adoption Trends, February 2013

 

  (4)   Gartner, Inc., Forecast: Devices by Operating System and User Type, Worldwide, 2010-2017, 3Q13 Update, September 2013

 

  (5)   International Data Corporation, THE DIGITAL UNIVERSE IN 2020: Big Data, Bigger Digital Shadows, and Biggest Growth in the Far East, December 2012

 

  (6)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Content Management Software 2013-2017 Forecast, June 2013

 

  (7)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide and Regional Public IT Cloud Services 2013-2017 Forecast, August 2013

 

  (8)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Collaborative Applications 2013-2017 Forecast and 2012 Vendor Shares, June 2013

 

  (9)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Project and Portfolio Management 2013-2017 Forecast and 2012 Vendor Shares: Resource Prioritization Amid Complexity Sustains Low-Level 2012 PPM Market Growth, September 2013

 

  (10)   Forrester Research, Inc., Info Workers Will Erase The Boundary Between Enterprise And Consumer Technologies, August 2012

 

  (11)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Mobile Worker Population 2011-2015 Forecast, December 2011

The Gartner Reports described herein represent data, research opinion or viewpoints published, as part of a syndicated subscription service, by Gartner, Inc. and are not representations of fact. Each Gartner Report speaks as of its original publication date (and not as of the date of this prospectus) and the opinions expressed in the Gartner Reports are subject to change without notice.

 

40


Table of Contents

USE OF PROCEEDS

We estimate that our net proceeds from the sale of shares of our Class A common stock that we are offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, will be approximately $        , or $         if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full. A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price would increase (decrease) the net proceeds from this offering by approximately $        , assuming the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Similarly, a one million increase (decrease) in the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us would increase (decrease) the net proceeds from this offering by approximately $        , assuming the assumed initial public offering price remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our capitalization and financial flexibility and create a public market for our Class A common stock. We intend to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. While we cannot specify with certainty the particular uses of the net proceeds we receive from this offering, we currently expect to invest at least 50% of the net proceeds in sales and marketing activities, product development, general and administrative matters and capital expenditures to support the growth in our business. We also may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire complementary businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific acquisitions at this time. We will have broad discretion over the uses of the net proceeds from this offering, provided that we comply with the terms and conditions contained in our revolving line of credit facility. Pending the use of proceeds from this offering as described above, we intend to invest the net proceeds from this offering in short-term, investment-grade interest-bearing securities such as money market accounts, certificates of deposit, commercial paper and guaranteed obligations of the U.S. government.

DIVIDEND POLICY

We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our capital stock. We currently intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation of our business and do not anticipate paying any dividends on our capital stock in the foreseeable future. Any future determination to declare dividends will be made at the discretion of our board of directors, subject to applicable laws, and will depend on our financial condition, operating results, capital requirements, general business conditions and other factors that our board of directors may deem relevant.

 

41


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of April 30, 2014 on:

 

    an actual basis;

 

    a pro forma basis, giving effect to the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, as if such conversion, reclassification and effectiveness had occurred on April 30, 2014; and

 

    a pro forma as adjusted basis, giving effect to the pro forma adjustments and the sale and issuance of             shares of our Class A common stock by us in this offering, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma as adjusted information set forth in the table below is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

You should read this table together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

    April 30, 2014  
    Actual     Pro Forma     Pro Forma
as Adjusted (1)
 
    (unaudited)              
    (in thousands, except share and per share
data)
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 79,266      $ 79,266      $                
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Debt, non-current

    34,000        34,000     

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

    1,613            

Redeemable convertible preferred stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 77,101,959 shares authorized, 76,238,097 issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

    393,260            

Stockholders’ equity (deficit):

     

Preferred Stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;             shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

               

Existing Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 120,856,000 shares authorized, 11,410,767 shares issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

    1            

Existing Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 25,000,000 shares authorized, 3,385,065 shares issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

               

Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;             shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma;              shares authorized,              shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

               

Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;              shares authorized, 91,033,929 shares issued and              outstanding, pro forma;              shares authorized,              shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

           9     

Additional paid-in capital

    37,243        432,108     

Treasury stock

    (1,177 )       (1,177  

Accumulated other comprehensive income

    17        17     

Accumulated deficit

    (399,677     (399,677  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total stockholders’ equity (deficit)

    (363,593   $ 31,280     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total capitalization

  $ 65,280      $ 65,280      $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

42


Table of Contents

 

(1) Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted cash and cash equivalents, additional paid-in capital, total stockholders’ equity (deficit), and total capitalization by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma and pro forma as adjusted columns in the table above are based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 91,033,929 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) outstanding as of April 30, 2014, and exclude:

 

    18,667,091 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $4.82 per share;

 

    2,904,794 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of April 30, 2014;

 

    7,500,000 shares of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock, convertible into shares of our Class B common stock, issued after April 30, 2014, at a purchase price of $20.00 per share;

 

    300,431 shares of our Class B common stock issued after April 30, 2014, and 313,205 shares of our Class B common stock issuable after April 30, 2014, in connection with our acquisition of Streem; and

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Plan, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    378,486 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Plan as of April 30, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our ESPP, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

 

43


Table of Contents

DILUTION

If you invest in our Class A common stock in this offering, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share of our Class A common stock in this offering and the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering.

As of April 30, 2014, our pro forma net tangible book value was approximately $12.8 million, or $0.14 per share of common stock. Our pro forma net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total tangible assets reduced by the amount of our total liabilities and divided by the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, assuming the conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, which conversion will occur immediately prior to the completion of the offering, and the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital.

After giving effect to the sale of             shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of April 30, 2014 would have been approximately $         million, or $         per share. This represents an immediate increase in pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value of $         per share to our existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $         per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering.

The following table illustrates this dilution:

 

Assumed initial public offering price per share

      $                

Pro forma net tangible book value per share as of April 30, 2014

   $ 0.14      

Increase in pro forma net tangible book value per share attributable to investors purchasing shares in this offering

     
  

 

 

    

Pro forma net tangible book value, as adjusted to give effect to this offering

      $     
     

 

 

 

Dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering

      $     
     

 

 

 

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         per share and the dilution per share to new investors in this offering by $         per share, assuming the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Similarly, a one million increase (decrease) in the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         per share and the dilution per share to new investors in this offering by $         per share, assuming the assumed initial public offering price remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock would be $         per share, and the dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering would be $         per share.

The following table summarizes, on a pro forma as adjusted basis as of April 30, 2014 after giving effect to (i) the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding

 

44


Table of Contents

the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, and (ii) this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the difference between existing stockholders and new investors with respect to the number of shares of our common stock purchased from us, the total consideration paid, and the average price per share paid, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

 

     Shares Purchased     Total Consideration     Average Price
Per Share
 
     Number      Percent     Amount      Percent    

Existing stockholders

     91,033,929                $                             $                

Investors purchasing shares in this offering

            
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

Total

        100.0   $                      100.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) total consideration paid by new investors and total consideration paid by all stockholders by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

To the extent that any outstanding options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock are exercised, outstanding RSUs vest, or new awards are granted under our equity compensation plans, there will be further dilution to investors participating in this offering.

Except as otherwise indicated, the above discussion and tables assume no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option. If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, our existing stockholders would own     % and our new investors would own     % of the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding upon the completion of this offering.

The number of shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 91,033,929 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) outstanding as of April 30, 2014, and excludes:

 

    18,667,091 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $4.82 per share;

 

    2,904,794 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of April 30, 2014;

 

    7,500,000 shares of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock, convertible into shares of our Class B common stock, issued after April 30, 2014, at a purchase price of $20.00 per share;

 

    300,431 shares of our Class B common stock issued after April 30, 2014, and 313,205 shares of our Class B common stock issuable after April 30, 2014, in connection with our acquisition of Streem; and

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Plan, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

45


Table of Contents
    378,486 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Plan as of April 30, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

             shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our ESPP, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder, and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

 

46


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

We changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, and as a result, we also present below certain selected financial data for the one-month transition period ended January 31, 2012. The selected consolidated statements of operations data presented below for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one-month period ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated statements of operations data for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of April 30, 2014 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited consolidated financial statements were prepared on a basis consistent with our audited financial statements and reflect, in the opinion of management, all adjustments of a normal recurring nature that are necessary for the fair presentation of those unaudited consolidated financial statements. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected in any future period, and the results for the three months ended April 30, 2014 are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for the full year. The following consolidated financial data should be read together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated financial data in this section are not intended to replace our consolidated financial statements and the related notes, and are qualified in their entirety by the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
             2013     2014  
                             (unaudited)  
     (in thousands, except per share data)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

            

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192      $ 23,414      $ 45,330   

Cost of revenue (1)

     6,873        850        14,280        25,974        4,561        9,228   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218        18,853        36,102   

Operating expenses:

            

Research and development (1)

     14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967        9,439        14,898   

Sales and marketing (1)

     36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188        33,936        47,440   

General and administrative (1)

     13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843        8,261        11,546   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998        51,636        73,884   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780     (32,783     (37,782

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477     (693     (267

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     27        (1,764     (3,705     (548     (405

Other income (expense), net

     49        (8     116        (26     (9     7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988     (34,033     (38,447

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        15        59        (2,431     6        64   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557     (34,039     (38,511

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80     (9     (226     (341     (85     (43
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898   $ (34,124   $ (38,554
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89   $ (3.47   $ (2.81
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

     5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341        9,825        13,734   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

47


Table of Contents
     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
   One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
   Year Ended
January 31,

2013
   Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
                2013    2014  
           (unaudited)  
     (in thousands, except per share data)  

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

            $ (1.93      $ (0.43
           

 

 

      

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

           

 

82,948

  

       89,972   
           

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
     Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
                 2013      2014  
            (unaudited)  
     (in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 6       $ 1,087       $ 450       $ 61       $ 227   

Research and development

     899         19         1,211         3,154         329         2,007   

Sales and marketing

     837         24         1,893         5,017         738         2,066   

General and administrative

     3,800         23         3,345         3,128         515         1,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 72       $ 7,536       $ 11,749       $ 1,643       $ 5,752   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
    April 30,
2014
 
                 (unaudited)  
    

(in thousands)

 

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

      

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 127,625      $ 108,851      $ 79,266   

Working capital

     104,799        44,289        3,485   

Total assets

     195,792        235,429        208,237   

Deferred revenue, current and non-current

     40,099        90,072        88,950   

Debt, current and non-current

     31,028        34,000        34,000   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, current and non-current

     2,869        1,346        1,613   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     281,899        393,217        393,260   

Total stockholders’ deficit

     (183,656     (332,512     (363,593

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with GAAP, we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165      $ 28,389      $ 44,208   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103     94     56

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136     141     135

 

48


Table of Contents

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services (which we refer to as Box Consulting). We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate ACV from these same customers as of the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represented a substantial majority of our revenue for the period ended April 30, 2014. Retention rate is an operational metric and there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue

To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus billings, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have provided a reconciliation below of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. We consider billings a significant performance measure and a leading indicator of future revenue. Billings also help investors better understand our sales activity for a particular period, which is not necessarily reflected in our revenue as a result of the fact that we recognize subscription revenue ratably over the subscription term. We monitor billings to manage our business, make planning decisions, evaluate our performance and allocate resources.

Our use of billings, a non-GAAP financial measure, has the following limitations as an analytical tool and should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for revenue or an analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Billings are recognized when invoiced, while the related revenue is recognized ratably over the term of the subscription or premier support services. When we invoice customers more frequently than their subscription period, amounts not yet invoiced will not be reflected in deferred revenue or billings. Also, other companies, including companies in our industry, may not use billings, may calculate billings differently, may have different billing frequencies, or may use other financial measures to evaluate their performance, all of which could reduce the usefulness of billings as a comparative measure.

A reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  
                       (unaudited)  
    

(in thousands)

 

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 58,797      $ 124,192      $ 23,414      $ 45,330   

Deferred revenue, end of period

     12,921        40,099        90,072        45,074        88,950   

Less: deferred revenue, beginning of period

     (3,614     (13,169     (40,099     (40,099     (90,072
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Billings

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165      $ 28,389      $ 44,208   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

49


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations together with the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion contains forward-looking statements based upon current expectations that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results may differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including those discussed in the section titled “Risk Factors” and in other parts of this prospectus.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information.

We were founded and publicly launched our platform in 2005 with a simple but powerful idea: to make it incredibly easy for people to store, share and access their most important content online. In 2006, we introduced a free version of our product in order to rapidly grow our user base, surpassing one million registered users by July 2007. As users began to bring our solution into the workplace, we learned that businesses were eager for a solution to empower user-friendly content sharing and collaboration in a secure, manageable way. Starting in 2007, we began enhancing our platform to serve businesses and large enterprises, which meant expanding our business functionality with features such as our administrative console, identity integration, activity reporting and full-text search. To further satisfy the requirements of IT departments in large organizations, we began to invest heavily in enhancing the security of our platform. Also in 2007, we began to build an enterprise sales team. The continual evolution of our platform features allowed our sales team to sell into increasingly larger organizations. To empower users to work securely from anywhere, we built native applications for all major mobile platforms. The introduction of our iPad application in 2010 further accelerated enterprise adoption of our platform. In 2012, we introduced our Box OneCloud platform and our Box Embed framework to encourage developers and independent software vendors (ISVs) to build powerful applications that connect to Box, furthering the reach of the Box service. In recent years, we have expanded our global presence, opening our first international office in London in 2012, followed by Munich, Paris and Tokyo in 2013. For the three months ended April 30, 2014, revenue from non-U.S. customers represented 20% of our revenue. We expect our revenue from non-U.S. customers to increase at a higher rate than our revenue from U.S. customers in the future.

We offer our solution to our customers as a subscription-based service, with subscription fees based on the requirements of our customers, including the number of users and functionality deployed. The majority of our customers subscribe to our service through one-year contracts, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. We recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period.

Our objective is to build an enduring business that creates sustainable revenue and earnings growth over the long term. To best achieve this objective, we focus on growing the number of Box users and paying organizations through direct field sales, direct inside sales, indirect channel sales and through word-of-mouth by individual users, some of whom use our services at no cost. Individual users and organizations can also simply sign up to use our solution on our website. We believe this approach not only helps us build a critical mass of users but also has a viral effect within organizations as more of their employees use our service and encourage their IT professionals to deploy our services to a broader user base.

 

50


Table of Contents

We have achieved significant growth in a short period of time. Our user base includes 27 million registered users across more than 240,000 organizations. We define a registered user as a Box account that has been provisioned to a unique user ID. As of April 30, 2014, approximately 92% of our registered users are non-paying users who have independently registered for accounts and approximately 8% of our registered users are paying users who register as part of a larger enterprise or business account or by using a personal account. We currently have more than 39,000 paying organizations, and our solution is offered in 16 languages. We define paying organizations as separate and distinct buying entities, such as a company, an educational or government institution, or a distinct business unit of a large corporation, that have entered into a subscription agreement with us to utilize our services.

Organizations typically purchase our solution in the following ways: (i) employees in one or more small groups within the organization may individually purchase our service; (ii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements with deployments for specific, targeted use cases ranging from tens to thousands of user seats; or (iii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements where the number of user seats sold is intended to accommodate and enable nearly all information workers within the organization in whatever use cases they desire to adopt over the term of the subscription.

For the trailing 12 months ended April 30, 2014, 58% of our orders for subscription services were from new enterprise customers and upsells from existing enterprise customers. We consider enterprise customers to be organizations with at least 1,000 employees, as such organizations are the focus of our Enterprise Accounts and Major Accounts sales teams.

We intend to continue scaling our organization to meet the increasingly complex needs of our customers. Our sales and customer success teams are organized to efficiently serve organizations ranging from small businesses to the world’s largest global organizations. We have invested and expect to continue to invest heavily in our sales and marketing teams to sell our services around the world, as well as in our development efforts to deliver additional features and capabilities of our cloud services to address customers’ evolving needs. We also expect to continue to make significant investments in both our datacenter infrastructure to meet the needs of our growing user base and our professional services organization to address the strategic needs of our customers in more complex deployments and to drive broader adoption across a wide array of use cases. As a result of our continuing investments to scale our business in each of these areas, we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future.

For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%, and our net losses were $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million, respectively. For the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $23.4 million and $45.3 million, respectively, representing period-over-period growth of 94%, and our net losses were $34.0 million and $38.5 million, respectively. Box is headquartered in Los Altos, California and operates offices in California, New York, Texas, London, Paris, Munich and Tokyo.

Fiscal Year End

We changed our fiscal year end from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013. For the year-over-year discussions below, the 12 months ended January 31, 2013 is compared to the 12 months ended December 31, 2011.

Our Business Model

Our business model focuses on maximizing the lifetime value of a customer relationship. We make significant investments in acquiring new customers and believe that we will be able to achieve a positive return on these investments by retaining customers and expanding the size of our deployments within our customer base over time. In connection with the acquisition of new customers, we incur and recognize significant upfront costs. These costs include sales and marketing costs associated with acquiring new customers, such as sales commission expenses, a significant portion of which is expensed upfront and the remaining portion of which is expensed over the length of the non-cancellable subscription term, and marketing costs, which are expensed as

 

51


Table of Contents

incurred. Due to our subscription model, we recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period, which commences when all of the revenue recognition criteria have been met. Although our objective is for each customer to be profitable for us over the duration of our relationship, the costs we incur with respect to any customer relationship, whether a new customer or an upsell to an existing customer, may exceed revenue in earlier periods because we recognize those costs faster than we recognize the associated revenue.

To provide an understanding of our customer economics, we are providing an analysis of the customers we acquired in fiscal year 2010, which we will refer to as the 2010 Cohort. The 2010 Cohort includes every customer we acquired in fiscal year 2010, including customers who at one point did not renew their subscriptions but are customers today. We selected the 2010 Cohort as a representative set of customers for this analysis because 2010 was the first year since our inception during which we acquired a material number of customers across a diverse range of industries, and we think the perspective of time is important to help investors understand the long-term value of our customers. In fiscal year 2010, we recognized $2.8 million in revenue and incurred variable costs that resulted in a negative contribution margin for the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2014, we recognized $14.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 34% from the 2010 Cohort. In the three months ended April 30, 2014, we recognized $4.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 56% from the 2010 Cohort.

We define contribution margin for a period as the revenue recognized from the customer in excess of the estimated variable costs for the period associated with expanding the size of our deployments within the customer and supporting the customer, expressed as a percentage of associated revenue. The expenses allocated to the customer include estimates for personnel costs associated with the sales teams that support that customer, such as salaries, commissions and allocated management overhead expenses. The expenses allocated to the customer also include the costs associated with use of technology infrastructure and personnel costs associated with the marketing, operations, professional services and customer success teams that support the customer. Personnel costs exclude stock-based compensation for purposes of this calculation. In addition, we exclude all research and development and general and administrative expenses from this analysis because these expenses support the growth of our business and benefit our users, customers, technology partners and third-party developers.

We cannot assure you that we will experience similar financial outcomes from customers added in other years or in future periods. You should not rely on the allocated expenses or relationship of revenue to sales and marketing or other variable costs as being indicative of our current or future performance. Because we are still in the early stages of our development, we do not yet have enough operating history to measure the lifetime of our customer relationships. Therefore, we cannot predict the average duration of a customer relationship for the 2010 Cohort or for customers acquired in other fiscal years. We also cannot predict whether revenue from the 2010 Cohort will continue to grow at the rate of growth experienced through April 30, 2014, or whether the growth rate of other cohorts will be similar to that of the 2010 Cohort. We may not achieve profitability even if our revenue exceeds costs from our customers over time. We encourage you to read our consolidated financial statements that are included in this prospectus.

 

52


Table of Contents

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections, assess operational efficiencies and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with GAAP, we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165      $ 28,389      $ 44,208   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103     94     56

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136     141     135

See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data—Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue” for a reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure and explanations of why we track billings and why billings may be a useful measure for investors.

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings.

We consider billings a significant performance measure and a leading indicator of future revenue. Billings also help investors better understand our sales activity for a particular period, which is not necessarily reflected in our revenue as a result of the fact that we recognize subscription revenue ratably over the subscription term. We monitor billings to manage our business, make planning decisions, evaluate our performance and allocate resources. We believe that billings offers valuable supplemental information regarding the performance of our business and will help investors better understand the sales volumes and performance of our business.

Billings increased 182% in the year ended January 31, 2013 over the year ended December 31, 2011, 103% in the year ended January 31, 2014 over the year ended January 31, 2013, and 56% in the three months ended April 30, 2014 over the three months ended April 30, 2013. The decline in billing growth rate for the three months ended April 30, 2013 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2014, was primarily driven by a higher percentage of invoices with quarterly and monthly installments. The increase in billings was primarily driven by the addition of new customers with larger initial deployments and expansion with respect to the number of users within existing customers.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate ACV from these same customers as of the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12 month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12 month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represented a substantial majority of our revenue for the three months ended April 30, 2014. Retention rate is an operational metric and there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

 

53


Table of Contents

Our retention rate was approximately 129%, 144%, 136% and 135% as of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013, January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, respectively. The increase in our retention rate from December 31, 2011 to April 30, 2014 was primarily attributable to an increase in user expansion, particularly expansion within larger enterprises, which oftentimes implement a limited initial deployment of our services before renewing their subscription on a broader scale. We believe our investments in product, customer service, and Box Consulting are driving improvements in customer retention. As we penetrate customer accounts, we expect our rate of growth in upsells to trend down over time but our retention rate to remain above 100% for the foreseeable future.

Components of Results of Operations

Revenue

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and other implementation services.

To date, practically all of our revenue has been derived from subscription and premier support services. Subscription and premier support revenue is driven primarily by the number of customers, the number of seats sold to each customer and the price of our services.

Subscription and premier support revenue is recognized ratably over the contract term beginning on the later of the date the service is provisioned to the customer and the date all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions. The majority of our customers subscribe to our service through one-year contracts, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Amounts that have been invoiced are initially recorded as deferred revenue and are recognized ratably over the invoice period. Amounts that have not been invoiced are not reflected in deferred revenue. Revenue is recognized ratably over the subscription term.

Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services revenue was not material for all periods presented.

Cost of Revenue

Our cost of revenue consists primarily of costs related to providing our cloud-based services to our paying customers, including employee compensation and related expenses for datacenter operations, customer support and professional services personnel, payments to outside infrastructure service providers, depreciation of servers and equipment, security services and other tools, as well as amortization of acquired technology. We allocate overhead such as rent, information technology costs and employee benefit costs to all departments based on headcount. As such, general overhead expenses are reflected in cost of revenue and each of the operating expense categories set forth below. We expect our cost of revenue to increase in dollars and may increase as a percentage of revenue as we continue to invest in our datacenter operations and customer support to support the growth of our business, our customer base, as well as our international expansion.

Operating Expenses

Our operating expenses consist of research and development, sales and marketing, and general and administrative expenses. Personnel costs are the most significant component of each category of operating expenses. Operating expenses also include allocated overhead costs for facilities, information technology costs and employee benefit costs.

 

54


Table of Contents

Research and Development. Research and development expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses, as well as allocated overhead. Our research and development efforts are focused on scaling our platform, adding enterprise grade features, functionality and security, and enhancing the ease of use of our cloud-based services. We expect our research and development expense to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time, as we continue to invest in our future products and services.

Sales and Marketing.  Sales and marketing expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses, sales commissions, marketing programs, travel related expenses, as well as allocated overhead. Marketing programs include but are not limited to advertising, events, corporate communications, brand building, and product marketing. Sales and marketing expense also consists of datacenter and customer support costs related to providing our cloud-based services to our free users. We market and sell our cloud-based services worldwide through our direct sales organization and through indirect distribution channels such as strategic resellers. We expect our sales and marketing expense to continue to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time as we increase the size of our sales and marketing organization and expand our international presence.

General and Administrative.  General and administrative expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses for administrative functions including finance, legal, human resources and recruiting, and fees for external professional services as well as allocated overhead. External professional services fees are primarily comprised of outside legal, accounting, temporary services, audit and outsourcing services. We expect our general and administrative expense to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time as we incur additional costs related to operating as a publicly traded company including increased headcount and audit, legal, regulatory and other related fees.

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

The remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability includes charges from the change in fair value of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability as of each period end. These redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants will remain outstanding until the exercise or expiration of the warrants or the completion of this offering, at which time the warrant liability will be remeasured to fair value and reclassified to additional paid-in capital.

Interest Income (Expense), Net

Interest income consists of interest earned on our cash and cash equivalent and marketable securities balances. We have historically invested our cash in overnight deposits and short-term, investment-grade corporate securities. Interest expense consists of interest charges and the amortization of capitalized debt issuance costs associated with our outstanding borrowings.

Other Income (Expense), Net

Other income (expense), net consists primarily of gains and losses from foreign currency transactions and other income (expense).

Provision (Benefit) for Income Taxes

Provision (benefit) for income taxes consists primarily of state income taxes in the United States and income taxes in certain foreign jurisdictions in which we conduct business. At January 31, 2014, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards (NOLs) of $263.7 million and $262.6 million, which expire at various dates beginning in 2025 and 2016, respectively. Federal and state tax laws impose limitations on the utilization of NOLs in the event of an “ownership change” for tax purposes, as defined in Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code. In the past, we have experienced an ownership change which has impacted our ability to fully realize the benefit of these NOLs. If we experience additional ownership changes as a result of this offering, our ability to utilize our NOLs may be further limited.

 

55


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

The following tables set forth our results of operations for the periods presented in dollars and as a percentage of our revenue:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  
                       (unaudited)  
    

(in thousands)

 

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

          

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 58,797      $ 124,192      $ 23,414      $ 45,330   

Cost of revenue (1)

     6,873        14,280        25,974        4,561        9,228   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        44,517        98,218        18,853        36,102   

Operating expenses:

          

Research and development (1)

     14,396        28,996        45,967        9,439        14,898   

Sales and marketing (1)

     36,189        99,221        171,188        33,936        47,440   

General and administrative (1)

     13,480        25,429        39,843        8,261        11,546   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        153,646        256,998        51,636        73,884   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (109,129     (158,780     (32,783     (37,782

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (1,727     (8,477     (693     (267

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     (1,764     (3,705     (548     (405

Other income (expense), net

     49        116        (26     (9     7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (112,504     (170,988     (34,033     (38,447

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        59        (2,431     6        64   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

   $ (50,271   $ (112,563   $ (168,557   $ (34,039   $ (38,511
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
     Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
              2013      2014  
                          (unaudited)  
    

(in thousands)

 

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 1,087       $ 450       $ 61       $ 227   

Research and development

     899         1,211         3,154         329         2,007   

Sales and marketing

     837         1,893         5,017         738         2,066   

General and administrative

     3,800         3,345         3,128         515         1,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 7,536       $ 11,749       $ 1,643       $ 5,752   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

56


Table of Contents
     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  
                       (unaudited)  

Percentage of Revenue:

          

Revenue

     100     100     100     100     100

Cost of revenue

     33        24        21        19        20   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     67        76        79        81        80   

Operating expenses:

          

Research and development

     68        49        37        40        33   

Sales and marketing

     172        169        138        146        105   

General and administrative

     64        43        32        35        25   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     304        261        207        221        163   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (237     (185     (128     (140     (83

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (1     (3     (7     (3     (1

Interest income (expense), net

            (3     (3     (2     (1

Other income (expense), net

                                   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (238     (191     (138     (145     (85

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

                   (2              
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (238 )%      (191 )%      (136 )%      (145 )%      (85 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comparison of the Three Months Ended April 30, 2013 and April 30, 2014

Revenue

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

Revenue

   $ 23,414       $ 45,330       $ 21,916         94

Revenue increased by $21.9 million, or 94%, during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The increase in revenue was substantially driven by an increase in subscription services. The increase in subscription services was due to the addition of new customers, as the number of paying organizations increased by 54% from April 30, 2013 to April 30, 2014. Also in this period, we experienced increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our product offerings, as reflected in our retention rate of 135% as of April 30, 2014.

Cost of Revenue and Gross Margin

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30,
              
     2013     2014     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 4,561      $ 9,228      $ 4,667         102

Gross margin

     81     80     

Cost of revenue increased by $4.7 million, or 102%, during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase in employee and related costs resulting from growth in our datacenter operations, customer support and professional services headcount from 91 employees as of April 30, 2013 to 131 employees as of April 30, 2014 to support an increased

 

57


Table of Contents

number of paying customers and an increase in datacenter service costs and depreciation of our server equipment as we brought our Las Vegas datacenter online and increased our capacity to serve a larger number of customers.

Research and Development

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

Research and development

   $ 9,439       $ 14,898       $ 5,459         58

Research and development increased by $5.5 million, or 58%, during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The increase was primarily driven by an increase of $3.2 million in employee and related costs and an increase of $1.7 million in stock-based compensation expense, as we increased our headcount from 175 employees as of April 30, 2013 to 233 employees as of April 30, 2014 to support continued investment in our product and service offerings and scalability.

Sales and Marketing

 

                                       
     Three Months Ended
April 30,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

Sales and marketing

   $ 33,936       $ 47,440       $ 13,504         40

Sales and marketing increased by $13.5 million, or 40%, during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $6.4 million in employee and related costs driven by headcount growth from 439 employees as of April 30, 2013 to 529 employees as of April 30, 2014, an increase of $2.7 million in datacenter and customer support costs to support free users, an increase of $1.3 million in advertising expenses, and an increase of $0.5 million in travel-related costs.

General and Administrative

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

General and administrative

   $ 8,261       $ 11,546       $ 3,285         40

General and administrative increased by $3.3 million, or 40%, during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $1.6 million in legal expenses, an increase of $0.9 million in employee and related costs and an increase of $0.9 million in stock-based compensation expense resulting from headcount growth from 88 employees as of April 30, 2013 to 123 employees as of April 30, 2014.

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30,
             
       2013         2014       $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands, unaudited)  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $ (693   $ (267   $ (426     *   

 

* Not meaningful

 

58


Table of Contents

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability decreased by $0.4 million during the three months ended April 30, 2014 compared to the three months ended April 30, 2013. The decrease was primarily due to the exercise of certain warrants to purchase our redeemable convertible preferred stock in January 2014.

Comparison of the Years Ended January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014

Revenue

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
     $ Change      % Change  
     2013      2014        
     (dollars in thousands)  

Revenue

   $ 58,797       $ 124,192       $ 65,395         111

Revenue increased by $65.4 million, or 111%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase in revenue was substantially driven by an increase in subscription services. The increase in subscription services was due to the addition of new customers, as the number of paying organizations increased by 44% from January 31, 2013 to January 31, 2014. Also in this period, we experienced increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our product offerings, as reflected in our retention rate of 136% as of January 31, 2014.

Cost of Revenue and Gross Margin

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
    $ Change      % Change  
     2013     2014       
     (dollars in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 14,280      $ 25,974      $ 11,694         82

Gross margin

     76     79     

Cost of revenue increased by $11.7 million, or 82%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase in employee and related costs resulting from growth in our datacenter operations, customer support and professional services headcount from 81 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 116 employees as of January 31, 2014 to support an increased number of paying customers and an increase in depreciation of our server equipment as we brought our Las Vegas datacenter online and increased our capacity to serve a larger number of customers.

Research and Development

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
     $ Change      % Change  
     2013      2014        
     (dollars in thousands)  

Research and development

   $ 28,996       $ 45,967       $ 16,971         59

Research and development increased by $17.0 million, or 59%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily driven by an increase of $14.3 million in employee and related costs as we increased our headcount from 159 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 234 employees as of January 31, 2014 to support continued investment in our product and service offerings and scalability, and a $2.5 million increase in allocated overhead costs.

 

59


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
     $ Change      % Change  
     2013      2014        
     (dollars in thousands)  

Sales and marketing

   $ 99,221       $ 171,188       $ 71,967         73

Sales and marketing increased by $72.0 million, or 73%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $45.5 million in employee and related costs, including higher commission expenses of $16.0 million, driven by headcount growth from 374 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 513 employees as of January 31, 2014, and higher sales, an increase of $12.6 million in datacenter and customer support costs to support free users, an increase of $6.4 million in allocated overhead costs, and an increase of $2.8 million in travel-related costs.

General and Administrative

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
     $ Change      % Change  
     2013      2014        
     (dollars in thousands)  

General and administrative

   $ 25,429       $ 39,843       $ 14,414         57

General and administrative increased by $14.4 million, or 57%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $7.9 million in consulting, legal and accounting and audit fees as we expand internationally and prepare to become a public company, as well as an increase of $6.5 million in employee and related costs resulting from headcount growth from 75 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 109 employees as of January 31, 2014.

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
    $ Change     % Change  
     2013     2014      
     (dollars in thousands)  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $ (1,727   $ (8,477   $ (6,750     *

 

* Not meaningful

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability increased by $6.8 million during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase in the fair value of our outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants was primarily driven by the increase in the value of our underlying common stock.

Interest Expense, Net and Other Income (Expense), Net

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
    $ Change     % Change  
     2013     2014      
     (dollars in thousands)  

Interest expense, net

   $ (1,764   $ (3,705   $ (1,941     110

Other income (expense), net

     116        (26     (142     *   

 

* Not meaningful

 

60


Table of Contents

Interest expense, net increased by $1.9 million, or 110%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to the end-of-term and early payment fees in connection with the payoff of prior borrowings, which was recorded as interest expense during the year ended January 31, 2014.

Other income (expense), net consisted primarily of foreign currency gains (losses).

Provision (Benefit) for Income Taxes

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
    $ Change     % Change  
     2013      2014      
     (dollars in thousands)  

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

   $ 59       $ (2,431   $ (2,490     *   

 

* Not meaningful

The decrease in provision (benefit) for income taxes during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily due to a discrete tax benefit from a partial release of the valuation allowance on our deferred tax assets, primarily in connection with our acquisition of Crocodoc. With the acquisition, a deferred tax liability was established for the book-tax basis difference related to purchased intangibles. The net deferred tax liability provided an additional source of income to support the realizability of pre-existing deferred tax assets.

Comparison of the Years Ended December 31, 2011 and January 31, 2013

Revenue

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Revenue

   $ 21,084       $ 58,797       $ 37,713         179

Revenue increased by $37.7 million, or 179%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in revenue was substantially driven by an increase in subscription services. The increase in subscription services was due to a 61% increase in the number of paying organizations from December 31, 2011 to January 31, 2013. Also in this period, we experienced increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services, as reflected by our retention rate of approximately 144% as of January 31, 2013.

Cost of Revenue and Gross Margin

 

     Year Ended               
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 6,873      $ 14,280      $ 7,407         108

Gross margin

     67     76     

Cost of revenue increased by $7.4 million, or 108%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase in employee and related costs resulting from growth in our datacenter operations, customer support and professional services headcount from

 

61


Table of Contents

36 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 81 employees as of January 31, 2013 to support an increased number of paying customers and an increase in depreciation of our server equipment as we expanded our Box services deployment capacity.

Research and Development

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Research and development

   $ 14,396       $ 28,996       $ 14,600         101

Research and development expense increased by $14.6 million, or 101%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily driven by an increase of $10.4 million in employee and related costs as we increased our headcount from 99 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 159 employees as of January 31, 2013 to support continued investment in our product and service offerings, and a $3.1 million increase in allocated overhead costs.

Sales and Marketing

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Sales and marketing

   $ 36,189       $ 99,221       $ 63,032         174

Sales and marketing expense increased by $63.0 million, or 174%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $31.6 million in employee and related costs, including an increase in commission expenses of $9.2 million driven by headcount growth from 160 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 374 employees as of January 31, 2013, and higher sales, an increase of $11.9 million in lead generation, brand awareness and marketing costs, an increase of $9.1 million in datacenter and customer support costs to support free users, and an increase of $8.6 million in allocated overhead costs.

General and Administrative

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

General and administrative

   $ 13,480       $ 25,429       $ 11,949         89

General and administrative expense increased by $11.9 million, or 89%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $2.8 million in outside placement fees and related costs, a $2.6 million increase in consulting, legal and accounting fees, a $2.3 million increase in miscellaneous taxes, as well as a $1.4 million increase in employee and related costs resulting from headcount growth from 41 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 75 employees as of January 31, 2013.

 

62


Table of Contents

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

 

     Year Ended              
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $ (356   $ (1,727   $ (1,371     *   

 

* Not meaningful

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability increased by $1.4 million during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in the fair value of our outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants during the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily driven by the underlying increase in the value of our common stock.

Interest Expense, Net and Other Income, Net

 

     Year Ended              
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Interest expense, net

   $ (109   $ (1,764   $ (1,655     *   

Other income, net

     49        116        67        137

 

* Not meaningful

Interest expense, net increased by $1.7 million during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to additional borrowings during the year ended January 31, 2013.

Provision for Income Taxes

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Provision for income taxes

   $ 1       $ 59       $ 58         *   

 

* Not meaningful

The increase in provision for income taxes during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011 was due to an increase in foreign taxes related to our foreign operations.

 

63


Table of Contents

Quarterly Results of Operations

The following tables set forth selected unaudited quarterly consolidated statements of operations data for each of the eight quarters in the period ended April 30, 2014. The information for each of these quarters has been prepared on the same basis as the audited annual consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments, which include only normal recurring adjustments, necessary for the fair presentation of the results of operations for these periods in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. This data should be read in conjunction with our audited consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. These quarterly operating results are not necessarily indicative of our operating results for a full year or any future period.

 

    Three Months Ended  
    Jul. 31,
2012
    Oct. 31,
2012
    Jan. 31,
2013
    Apr. 30,
2013
    Jul. 31,
2013
    Oct. 31,
2013
    Jan. 31,
2014
    Apr. 30,
2014
 
   

(in thousands)

 

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

               

Revenue

  $ 12,958      $ 16,164      $ 19,662      $ 23,414      $ 28,364      $ 33,585      $ 38,829      $ 45,330   

Cost of revenue

    3,164        4,484        4,277        4,561        5,907        7,172        8,334        9,228   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

    9,794        11,680        15,385        18,853        22,457        26,413        30,495        36,102   

Operating expenses:

               

Research and development

    6,663        7,993        8,346        9,439        10,965        12,090        13,473        14,898   

Sales and marketing

    22,363        27,934        30,953        33,936        41,416        48,822        47,014        47,440   

General and administrative

    5,385        8,447        7,687        8,261        10,010        11,386        10,186        11,546   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

    34,411        44,374        46,986        51,636        62,391        72,298        70,673        73,884   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

    (24,617     (32,694     (31,601     (32,783     (39,934     (45,885     (40,178     (37,782

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

    (1,529     (81     (117     (693     (1,607     (3,583     (2,594     (267

Interest income (expense), net

    (347     (614     (581     (548     (716     (1,979     (462     (405

Other income (expense), net

    6               101        (9     (73     111        (55     7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

    (26,487     (33,389     (32,198     (34,033     (42,330     (51,336     (43,289     (38,447

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

           8        48        6        (2,575     55        83        64   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

  $ (26,487   $ (33,397   $ (32,246   $ (34,039   $ (39,755   $ (51,391   $ (43,372   $ (38,511
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

64


Table of Contents
     Jul. 31,
2012
    Oct. 31,
2012
    Jan. 31,
2013
    Apr. 30,
2013
    Jul. 31,
2013
    Oct. 31,
2013
    Jan. 31,
2014
    Apr. 30,
2014
 
                                                  

Percentage of Revenue:

                

Revenue

    
100

    100     100     100     100     100     100     100

Cost of revenue

     24        28        22        19        21        21        21        20   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     76        72        78        81        79        79        79        80   

Operating expenses:

                

Research and development

     51        49        42        40        39        36        35        33   

Sales and marketing

     173        173        157        146        146        145        121        105   

General and administrative

     42        52        39        35        35        34        26        25   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     266        274        238        221        220        215        182        163   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (190     (202     (160     (140     (141     (136     (103     (83

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (12     (1     (1     (3     (6     (11     (7     (1

Interest income (expense), net

     (2     (4     (4     (2     (2     (6     (2     (1

Other income (expense), net

                   1                                      
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (204     (207     (164     (145     (149     (153     (112     (85

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

                                 (9                     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (204 )%      (207 )%      (164 )%      (145 )%      (140 )%      (153 )%      (112 )%      (85 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Quarterly Revenues Trends

Our quarterly revenues increased sequentially for all periods presented due primarily to increases in the number of new customers as well as increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. Our fourth quarter has historically been our strongest quarter for contracting activity as a result of large enterprise buying patterns.

Quarterly Costs and Expenses Trends

Total costs and expenses generally increased sequentially for all periods presented, primarily due to the addition of personnel in connection with the expansion of our business. Sales and marketing expenses generally grew sequentially over the periods. General and administrative costs generally increased in recent quarters due to higher professional service fees for preparing to be a public company. During the three months ended October 31, 2012, we recorded a non-recurring stock-based compensation expense of $3.8 million related to secondary sales of shares of our common stock. This $3.8 million compensation expense was distributed among cost of revenue, research and development expenses, sales and marketing expenses and general and administrative expenses in amounts of $825,000, $571,000, $328,000 and $2.1 million, respectively, based upon the classification of the underlying employees involved.

Our quarterly operating results may fluctuate due to various factors affecting our performance. As noted above, we recognize revenue from subscription fees ratably over the term of the contract. Therefore, changes in our contracting activity in the near term may not be apparent as a change to our reported revenue until future periods. Most of our expenses are recorded as period costs, and thus, factors affecting our cost structure may be reflected in our financial results sooner than changes to our contracting activity.

 

65


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
         2013     2014  
     (in thousands)     (unaudited)  

Cash flow used in operating activities

   $ (34,273   $ (81,751   $ (91,769   $ (15,802   $ (23,468

Cash flow provided by (used in) investing activities

     (38,293     314        (32,185     (4,435     (5,961

Cash flow provided by (used in) financing activities

     102,849        172,797        105,165        332        (158

As of April 30, 2014, we had cash and cash equivalents of $79.3 million. Our cash and cash equivalents are comprised primarily of overnight cash deposits. We have generated significant operating losses and negative cash flows from operations as reflected in our accumulated deficit and consolidated statements of cash flows. We may continue to incur operating losses and negative cash flows from operations in the future and may require additional capital resources to execute strategic initiatives to grow our business.

Since our inception, we have financed our operations primarily through equity and, to a lesser extent, debt financing, as well as cash generated from sales. We believe our existing cash and cash equivalents, our credit facilities, and cash provided by this offering will be sufficient to meet our working capital and capital expenditure needs for at least the next 12 months. Our future capital requirements will depend on many factors including our growth rate, subscription renewal activity, billing frequency, the timing and extent of spending to support development efforts, the expansion of sales and marketing and international operation activities, the introduction of new and enhanced services offerings, and the continuing market acceptance of our services. We may in the future enter into arrangements to acquire or invest in complementary businesses, services and technologies, including intellectual property rights. We may be required to seek additional equity or debt financing. In the event that additional financing is required from outside sources, we may not be able to raise it on terms acceptable to us or at all. If we are unable to raise additional capital when desired, our business, operating results and financial condition would be adversely affected.

In August 2013, we entered into a $100.0 million two-year revolving line of credit facility with Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc. and BMO Harris Financing, Inc. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars and, depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) plus 3.0% or the Alternate Base Rate (ABR) plus 2.0%. Also in August 2013, we drew $34.0 million of the credit facility at 3.4% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%), which was used to pay down outstanding borrowings and related end-of-term and early payment fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. As of April 30, 2014, the outstanding borrowings on our revolving line of credit facility were $34.0 million. In July 2014, we drew an additional $12.0 million under the credit facility at 3.3% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%).

The revolving line of credit facility is collateralized by substantially all of our assets. It also contains various covenants, including covenants related to the delivery of financial and other information, the maintenance of quarterly financial covenants, as well as limitations on dispositions, mergers or consolidations and other corporate activities. As of April 30, 2014, we were in compliance with all financial covenants.

Operating Activities

For the three months ended April 30, 2014, cash used in operating activities was $23.5 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $38.5 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $5.9 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment and intangible assets, $5.8 million for stock-based compensation, $2.9 million for amortization of deferred commissions, and $0.3 million for the remeasurement of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, and net cash inflows of $0.1 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the

 

66


Table of Contents

changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $10.6 million decrease in accounts receivable and a $1.3 million increase in accounts payable, partially offset by a $6.3 million decrease in accrued expenses and other liabilities, a $2.8 million increase in deferred commissions, a $2.3 million increase in prepaid expenses and other assets, and a $1.1 million decrease in deferred revenue. The decrease in accounts receivable was primarily attributable to timing of our billings and cash collections. The decrease in accrued expenses and other liabilities was primarily attributable to timing of our cash payments.

For the three months ended April 30, 2013, cash used in operating activities was $15.8 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $34.0 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $3.4 million for amortization of deferred commissions, $2.7 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment and intangible assets, $1.6 million for stock-based compensation, and $0.7 million for the remeasurement of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, and net cash inflows of $9.6 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $6.9 million increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities, a $5.0 million increase in deferred revenue, and a $2.3 million decrease in accounts receivable, partially offset by a $2.6 million increase in prepaid expenses and other assets and a $1.9 million increase in deferred commissions. The increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities was primarily attributable to increased activities to support the overall growth of our business. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily due to the growth in the number of paying customers and expansion within our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services.

For the year ended January 31, 2014, cash used in operating activities was $91.8 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $168.6 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $17.9 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment and intangible assets, $13.5 million for amortization of deferred commissions, $11.7 million for stock-based compensation, and $8.5 million for the remeasurement of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, and net cash inflows of $27.6 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $50.0 million increase in deferred revenue and a $24.1 million increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities, partially offset by a $25.2 million increase in accounts receivable and a $14.0 million increase in deferred commissions. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily due to the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from, and expansion within, our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities was primarily attributable to increased activities to support the overall growth of our business. The increase in deferred commissions was due to higher sales. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

For the year ended January 31, 2013, cash used in operating activities was $81.8 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $112.6 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $8.6 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment, $7.5 million for stock-based compensation, and $7.0 million for the amortization of deferred commissions, and net cash inflows of $5.3 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $26.9 million increase in deferred revenue, partially offset by a $14.0 million increase in deferred commissions and a $11.5 million increase in accounts receivable. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily driven by the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from and expansion within our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in deferred commissions was due to increased sales. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

For the year ended December 31, 2011, cash used in operating activities was $34.3 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $50.3 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $6.2 million for stock-based compensation and $2.8 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment, and net cash inflows of $4.7 million provided by changes in our operating assets and

 

67


Table of Contents

liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $9.3 million increase in deferred revenue, partially offset by a $4.1 million increase in accounts receivable. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily driven by the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from and expansion within our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

Investing Activities

Cash used in investing activities of $6.0 million for the three months ended April 30, 2014 was due to capital expenditures.

Cash used in investing activities of $4.4 million for the three months ended April 30, 2013 was primarily due to $4.3 million in capital expenditures.

Cash used in investing activities of $32.2 million for the year ended January 31, 2014 was due to $24.4 million in capital expenditures and $7.8 million for the acquisition of Crocodoc and other intangible assets, net of cash acquired.

Cash provided by investing activities of $0.3 million for the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily due to $20.0 million in proceeds from the maturity of marketable securities, partially offset by $19.5 million in capital expenditures.

Cash used in investing activities of $38.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to $23.8 million from net purchases of and proceeds from maturities of marketable securities and $13.5 million in capital expenditures.

Financing Activities

Cash used in financing activities of $0.2 million for the three months ended April 30, 2014 was primarily due to $1.7 million of payments of deferred offering costs, offset by $1.6 million of proceeds from the exercise of stock options.

Cash provided by financing activities of $0.3 million for the three months ended April 30, 2013 was primarily due to $0.5 million of proceeds from the exercise of stock options, partially offset by $0.2 million of repayments in connection with our prior borrowings.

Cash provided by financing activities of $105.2 million for the year ended January 31, 2014 was primarily due to $99.9 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock and $3.0 million of proceeds from the exercise of stock options. During this period, we also drew a net of $32.7 million on our new revolving line of credit facility and repaid $31.0 million in connection with our prior borrowings.

Cash provided by financing activities of $172.8 million for the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily attributable to $150.8 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series D-2 and Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock and $19.8 million in net proceeds from borrowings.

Cash provided by financing activities of $102.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to $92.0 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series D, D-1 and D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock and net proceeds of $10.6 million from borrowings.

 

68


Table of Contents

Contractual Obligations and Commitments

The following summarizes our contractual obligations and commitments as of January 31, 2014:

 

            Payments Due by Period  
     Total      Less Than 1
Year
     1-3 Years      3-5 Years      More Than
5 Years
 
     (in thousands)  

Debt (1)

   $ 36,353       $ 1,486       $ 34,867       $       $   

Operating leases

     27,294         7,517         11,791         7,986           

Purchase obligations (2)

     18,825         14,474         4,351                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 82,472       $ 23,477       $ 51,009       $ 7,986       $   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes interest and unused commitment fee on our line of credit.
(2) Purchase obligations relate primarily to datacenter operations and sales activities.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

Through April 30, 2014, we did not have any relationships with unconsolidated organizations or financial partnerships, such as structured finance or special purpose entities that would have been established for the purpose of facilitating off-balance sheet arrangements or other contractually narrow or limited purposes.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Our consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue, costs and expenses, and related disclosures. On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates and assumptions. Our actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

We believe that of our significant accounting policies, which are described in Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements, the following accounting policies involve a greater degree of judgment and complexity. Accordingly, these are the policies we believe are the most critical to aid in fully understanding and evaluating our consolidated financial condition and results of our operations.

Revenue Recognition

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and implementation services.

We recognize revenue when all of the following conditions are met:

 

    there is persuasive evidence of an arrangement;

 

    the service has been provided to the customer;

 

    the collection of fees is reasonably assured; and

 

    the amount of fees to be paid by the customer is fixed or determinable.

 

69


Table of Contents

We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions.

In instances where we collect fees in advance of service delivery, revenue under the contract is deferred until we successfully deliver such services.

Subscription revenue is recognized ratably over the period of the subscription beginning once all requirements for revenue recognition have been met, including provisioning the service so that it is available to our customers. Premier support is sold together with the subscription hosting services, and the term of the premier support is generally the same as the related subscription hosting services arrangement. Accordingly, we recognize premier support revenue in the same manner as the associated subscription hosting service. Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services and premier support services revenues were not material for all periods presented.

We assess collectability based on a number of factors, such as past collection history and creditworthiness of the customer. If management determines collectability is not reasonably assured, we defer revenue recognition until collectability becomes reasonably assured.

Our arrangements can include multiple elements which may consist of some or all of subscription services, premier support and professional services. When multiple-element arrangements exist, we evaluate whether these individual deliverables should be accounted for as separate units of accounting or one single unit of accounting.

In order to treat deliverables in a multiple-element arrangement as separate units of accounting, the delivered item or items must have standalone value upon delivery. A delivered item has standalone value to the customer when either (1) any vendor sells that item separately or (2) the customer could resell that item on a standalone basis. Our subscription hosting services have standalone value as such services are often sold separately. Our premier support services do not have standalone value because we and other vendors do not sell premier support services separately. Our professional services have stand-alone value because there are other vendors which sell the same professional services separately. Accordingly, we consider the separate units of accounting in our multiple deliverable arrangements to be the professional services, subscription services or a combined deliverable comprised of subscription hosting services and premier support services. When multiple deliverables included in an arrangement are separable into different units of accounting, the arrangement consideration is allocated to the identified separate units of accounting based on their relative selling price. Multiple-element arrangement accounting guidance provides a hierarchy to use when determining the relative selling price for each unit of accounting. Vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of selling price, based on the price at which the item is regularly sold by the vendor on a standalone basis, should be used if it exists. If VSOE of selling price is not available, third-party evidence (TPE) of selling price is used to establish the selling price if it exists. We have not established VSOE for our subscription services, premier support or professional services due to lack of pricing consistency, the introduction of new services and other factors. We have also concluded that third-party evidence of selling price is not a practical alternative due to differences in our service offerings compared to other parties and the availability of relevant third-party pricing information. Accordingly, we use our best estimate of selling price (BESP) to determine the relative selling price for our subscription, premier support and professional services offerings. For arrangements with multiple deliverables which can be separated into different units of accounting, we allocate the arrangement fee to the separate units of accounting based on our BESP. The amount of arrangement fee allocated is limited by contingent revenue, if any.

We determined BESP by considering our overall pricing objectives and market conditions. Significant pricing practices taken into consideration for our subscription hosting services, which may also include premier support, and professional services, include discounting practices, the size and volume of our transactions, the customer demographic, the geographic area where services are sold, price lists, our go-to-market strategy,

 

70


Table of Contents

historical standalone sales and contract prices. The determination of BESP is made through consultation with and approval by our management, taking into consideration our go-to-market strategy. As our go-to-market strategies evolve, we may modify our pricing practices in the future, which could result in changes in relative selling prices.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions consist of direct incremental costs paid to our sales force associated with non-cancellable terms of the related contracts. The deferred commission amounts are recoverable through future revenue streams under the non-cancellable customer contracts. Direct sales commissions are deferred when earned and amortized over the same period that revenue is recognized for the related non-cancellable subscription period. Amortization of deferred commissions is included in sales and marketing expense in the consolidated statements of operations.

Stock-Based Compensation

We measure and recognize compensation expense for all stock-based awards granted to our employees and other service providers, including stock options, restricted stock units and restricted stock, based on the estimated fair value of the award on the grant date. We use the Black-Scholes option pricing model to estimate the fair value of stock option awards. The fair value of restricted stock units and restricted stock is determined based on the fair value of our common stock estimated as part of the capital stock and business enterprise valuation process. The fair value is recognized as an expense, net of estimated forfeitures, on a straight line basis over the requisite service period.

Our option pricing model requires the input of highly subjective assumptions, including the fair value of the underlying common stock, the expected term of the option, the expected volatility of the price of our common stock, risk-free interest rates, and the expected dividend yield of our common stock. The assumptions used in our option-pricing model represent management’s best estimates. These estimates involve inherent uncertainties and the application of management’s judgment. If factors change and different assumptions are used, our stock-based compensation expense could be materially different in the future.

These assumptions are estimated as follows:

 

    Fair Value of Our Common Stock. As our common stock is not publicly traded, we must estimate the fair value of our common stock, as discussed in the section “Common Stock Valuations” below.

 

    Risk-Free Interest Rate. We base the risk-free interest rate used in the Black-Scholes option pricing model on the implied yield available on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with remaining terms similar to the expected term on the options.

 

    Expected Term. The expected term represents the period that our stock-based awards are expected to be outstanding. We determined the expected term assumption based on the vesting terms, exercise terms and contractual terms of the options.

 

    Volatility. We determine the price volatility factor based on the historical volatilities of our comparable companies as we do not have a sufficient trading history for our common stock. To determine our comparable companies, we consider public enterprise cloud-based application providers and select those that are similar to us in size, stage of life cycle, and financial leverage. For valuations prior to June 2013, we used the same group of comparable companies. For valuations beginning June 2013, we updated the group with companies that have recently become publicly traded and are similar to us. We intend to continue to apply this process using the same or similar public companies until a sufficient amount of historical information regarding the volatility of our own common stock share price becomes available, or unless circumstances change such that the identified companies are no longer similar to us, in which case, more suitable companies whose share prices are publicly available would be utilized in the calculation.

 

    Dividend Yield. We have not paid and do not expect to pay dividends.

 

71


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes the assumptions relating to our stock options as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
           2013     2014  
                       (unaudited)  

Expected term (in years)

     5.0 – 6.1        5.0 – 7.4        4.9 – 6.3        5.4 – 6.3        5.7 – 6.1   

Risk-free interest rate

     1.1% – 2.7     0.7% – 1.7     0.8% – 1.9     0.8% – 1.2     2.1

Volatility

     55% – 57     53% – 55     48% – 57     49% – 50     49

Expected dividend yield

     0     0     0     0     0

In addition, we are required to estimate the expected forfeiture rate and only recognize expense for those shares that are expected to vest. We estimate the expected forfeiture rate based on historical experience and our expectations regarding future pre-vesting termination behavior of employees and other service providers. To the extent our actual forfeiture rate is different from our estimate, stock-based compensation expense is adjusted accordingly.

We will continue to use judgment in evaluating the assumptions related to our stock-based compensation on a prospective basis. As we continue to accumulate additional data related to our common stock, we may have refinements to our estimates, which could materially impact our future stock-based compensation expense.

The following table summarizes, by grant date, all stock options, restricted stock units and restricted stock awards since January 1, 2013:

 

Grant Date

   Number of
Options Granted
     Number of
Shares of
Restricted Stock
Units Granted
     Number of
Shares of
Restricted Stock
Granted
     Exercise Price
Per Share for
Options Granted
     Deemed Fair
Value of
Common Stock
Per Share
 

February 2013

     807,100                       $ 4.28 – 4.63       $ 4.63   

April 2013

     600,000                         4.63         5.48   

May 2013

     943,750                 322,435         4.63         5.85 – 5.96   

June 2013

     49,000                         4.63         6.53   

July 2013

     2,628,380                 20,000         4.63 – 6.13         7.09 – 7.52   

August 2013

     10,000                         4.63         8.58   

October 2013

     1,899,880                 875         4.63 – 6.97         10.10   

November 2013

     956,200                         4.63 - 6.97         10.10   

January 2014

     555,700         225,300         50,000         6.13 – 14.06         14.06   

April 2014

     1,447,897         2,689,924         22,500         17.85         17.85   

Based on the assumed initial public offering price per share of $        , which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the aggregate intrinsic value of our outstanding stock awards as of April 30, 2014 was $        , of which $         million related to vested awards and $         million related to unvested awards.

Common Stock Valuations

The fair values of the common stock underlying our stock-based awards were determined by our board of directors, with input from management and contemporaneous third-party valuations. We believe that our board of directors has the relevant experience and expertise to determine the fair value of our common stock. If awards were granted a short period of time preceding the date of a valuation report, we retrospectively assessed the fair value used for financial reporting purposes after considering the fair value reflected in the subsequent valuation report and other facts and circumstances on the date of grant as discussed below. In such instances, the fair value that we used for financial reporting purposes generally exceeded the exercise price for those awards.

Given the absence of a public trading market for our common stock, and in accordance with the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Practice Guide,  Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities

 

72


Table of Contents

Issued as Compensation , our board of directors exercised reasonable judgment and considered numerous objective and subjective factors to determine the best estimate of the fair value of our common stock including:

 

    contemporaneous valuations performed by unrelated third-party specialists;

 

    the prices, rights, preferences, and privileges of our redeemable convertible preferred stock relative to those of our common stock;

 

    lack of marketability of our common stock;

 

    our actual operating and financial performance;

 

    current business conditions and projections;

 

    hiring of key personnel and the experience of our management;

 

    the history of the company and the introduction of new services;

 

    our stage of development;

 

    likelihood of achieving a liquidity event, such as an initial public offering or a merger or acquisition of our company given prevailing market conditions;

 

    illiquidity of stock-based awards involving securities in a private company;

 

    the market performance of comparable publicly traded companies;

 

    recent private stock sale transactions; and

 

    the U.S. and global capital market conditions.

In valuing our common stock, our board of directors determined the equity value of our business generally using the income approach and the market comparable approach valuation methods. When applicable due to a recent redeemable convertible preferred stock offering, the prior sale of company stock approach was also utilized.

The income approach estimates value based on the expectation of future cash flows that a company will generate—such as cash earnings, cost savings, tax deductions, and the proceeds from disposition. These future cash flows are discounted to their present values using a discount rate derived from an analysis of the cost of capital of comparable publicly traded companies in our industry or similar lines of business as of each valuation date and is adjusted to reflect the risks inherent in our cash flows. In addition, we also considered an appropriate discount adjustment to recognize the lack of marketability due to being a private company.

The market comparable approach estimates value based on a comparison of the subject company to comparable public companies in a similar line of business. To determine our peer group of companies, we considered public enterprise cloud-based application providers and selected those that are similar to us in size, stage of life cycle, and financial leverage. From the comparable companies, a representative market value multiple is determined which is applied to the subject company’s operating results to estimate the value of the subject company. The market value multiple was determined based on consideration of revenue multiples and earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA) to each of the comparable companies’ last 12-month revenue and the forecasted future 12-month revenue. In addition, the market approach considers merger and acquisition transactions involving companies similar to the subject company’s business being valued. Multiples of revenue or EBITDA are calculated for these transactions and then applied to the business being valued, after reduction by an appropriate discount. Based on the above, the estimated value is then discounted by a non-marketability factor due to the fact that stockholders of private companies do not have access to trading markets similar to those enjoyed by stockholders of public companies, which impacts liquidity.

The prior sale of company stock approach estimates value by considering any prior arm’s length sales of the company’s equity. When considering prior sales of the company’s equity, the valuation considers the size of the equity sale, the relationship of the parties involved in the transaction, the timing of the equity sale, and the financial condition of the company at the time of the sale.

 

73


Table of Contents

Once we determined an equity value, we utilized the option pricing method (OPM), to allocate the equity value to each of our classes of stock. This method is generally preferred when future outcomes are difficult to predict and dissolution or liquidation is not imminent. The OPM values each equity class by creating a series of call options on our equity value, with exercise prices based on the liquidation preferences, participation rights, and strike prices of derivatives. We performed this OPM analysis under two liquidity scenarios, a sale event and an initial public offering event, and applied an appropriate weighting to each scenario to determine the final fair market value of our common stock.

The Probability-Weighted Expected Return Method (PWERM) estimates the value of the common stock based upon an analysis of future values for the enterprise assuming various future outcomes. Share value is based upon the probability-weighted present value of expected future investment returns, considering each of the possible future outcomes available to the enterprise, as well as the rights of each share class.

The Hybrid Method is a hybrid between the PWERM and OPM, estimating the probability weighted value across multiple scenarios but using OPM to estimate the allocation of value within one or more of the scenarios. The Hybrid Method can be a useful alternative to explicitly modeling all PWERM scenarios in situations when the company has transparency into one or more near-terms exits (e.g., IPO) but is unsure about what will occur if the current plans fall through.

For all of the valuations through October 2013, we used the OPM due primarily to our early stage of development, lack of availability and reliability of estimates regarding the nature and timing horizons for exit outcomes, number and materiality of assumptions required, and availability of information. For the January 2014 and March 2014 valuations, we utilized the Hybrid Method in estimating the fair value of the common stock given there was more clarity on our IPO plans.

The following discussion relates primarily to our determination of the fair value per share of our common stock for purposes of calculating stock-based compensation expenses for grants since January 1, 2013. No single event caused the valuation of our common stock to increase or decrease through the date of the grants in April 2014. For financial reporting purposes, we considered the amount of time between the valuation date and the grant date to determine whether to use the latest common stock valuation or a straight-line calculation between the two valuation dates. This determination included an evaluation of whether the subsequent valuation indicated that any significant change in valuation had occurred between the previous valuation and the grant date. Notwithstanding the fair value reassessments described below, we believe we applied a reasonable valuation method to determine the deemed fair value of the awards on the respective grant dates.

February 6, 2013 Valuation

The February 6, 2013 independent contemporaneous valuation was prepared on a minority, non-marketable interest basis. Revenue increased 179% in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013 compared to our fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, and increased 22% from the third quarter of fiscal 2013 to the fourth quarter of fiscal 2013. The valuation took into account that the U.S. and global economies appeared broadly stable albeit with downside potential. The valuation used an equal weighting of the market comparable approach (25% for comparable companies and 25% for comparable merger and acquisition transactions) and the income approach. The discount rate applied to our cash flows was 45% and our enterprise value reflected a non-marketability discount of 23%. We also considered the secondary sales of an aggregate of 496,340 shares of our common stock in September 2012 at a price of $12.00 per share in our valuation and our determination of the fair value of our common stock. However, these transactions were not considered arms-length because the purchasers consisted of existing stockholders. Based on the factors noted above and the valuation, our board of directors determined that the fair value of our common stock was $4.63 per share.

For stock-based awards granted in February 2013, our board of directors determined the related fair value to be $4.63 per share given the close proximity of the February 6, 2013 valuation and the grant date of these awards.

 

74


Table of Contents

June 14, 2013 Valuation

The June 14, 2013 independent contemporaneous valuation was prepared on a minority, non-marketable interest basis. Revenue increased 134% from the first quarter of fiscal 2013 to the first quarter of fiscal 2014, and increased 19% from the fourth quarter of fiscal 2013 to the first quarter of fiscal 2014. In addition, the U.S. economy continued to recover with the prospect of further improvement through 2013 and 2014. We also updated our set of comparable companies utilized in our valuation with companies that we believed were relevant to us at that time. These comparable companies had slightly higher revenue multiples. The valuation used an equal weighting of the market comparable approach (25% for comparable companies and 25% for comparable merger and acquisition transactions) and the income approach. The discount rate applied to our cash flows was 43% and our enterprise value reflected a non-marketability discount of 27%. The higher non-marketability discount than the one used in the previous valuation was primarily a function of using an updated set of comparable companies. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined that the fair value of our common stock was $6.13 per share.

For financial reporting purposes, we applied a straight-line calculation using the valuations of $4.63 per share as of February 6, 2013 and $6.13 per share as of June 14, 2013 to retrospectively determine, with the benefit of hindsight, the fair value of our common stock for stock-based awards granted in April 2013 and May 2013. There was no single event identified during the interim period between February 2013 and June 2013 that resulted in the increase in fair value but rather a series of events related to our continued growth, including our acquisition of Crocodoc, product enhancements, an increase in the number of paying customers and the hiring of certain key employees.

October 11, 2013 Valuation

An independent contemporaneous valuation of our common stock was performed as of October 11, 2013. The valuation utilized the prior sale of company stock approach to estimate the fair value of our common stock. In October 2013, we established the terms for our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. By October 31, 2013, we had raised $76 million through the issuance of 4,222,221 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a price of $18.00 per share, the majority of which was issued to new investors. In performing the valuation of our common stock as of October 11, 2013, we relied upon this transaction price to estimate the fair value of our common stock using the OPM model, given the close proximity of the financing to the valuation date and the fact that the price per share for our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock was established through sales to new investors on an arm’s length basis. Under the prior sale of company stock method, we considered other securities in relation to our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock and applied a volatility rate of 50%, an assumed time to liquidity, and a risk-free interest rate of 0.35% to determine our implied business enterprise value. Volatility was estimated based on available information on the volatility of the common stock of comparable, publicly traded companies. A non-marketability discount of 15% was then applied to the valuation. The lower non-marketability discount than the one used in the previous valuation was a function of several factors, including the implied value from our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing and consideration of a quantitative put option based marketability discount model. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined the fair value of our common stock was $6.97 per share.

We believe the valuation of our common stock as of October 11, 2013 was based upon assumptions that were appropriate for valuing common stock of a private company at that time. However, in light of certain activities that occurred subsequent to October 2013, including the commencement in November 2013 of our initial public offering process, management re-evaluated the valuation as of October 11, 2013 to determine whether there should be a reassessment of the fair value of our common stock solely for purposes of determining our stock-based compensation expense for the period ended October 31, 2013. Specifically, management reassessed the originally determined fair value of our common stock as of October 11, 2013 by giving more weighting to the probability of completing our initial public offering and by shortening the estimate of the time from October 11, 2013 to a potential liquidity event. On this basis, management revised our estimate of the fair value of our common stock to be $10.10 per share.

 

75


Table of Contents

For financial reporting purposes, we applied a straight-line calculation using the valuations of $6.13 per share in June 2013 and the revised fair value determination of $10.10 per share to retrospectively determine, with the benefit of hindsight, the fair value of our common stock for stock-based awards granted in June 2013, July 2013 and August 2013. There was no other single event identified during the interim period between June 2013 and October 2013 that resulted in the increase in fair value but rather a series of events related to our continued growth, product enhancements, an increase in the number of paying customers and the hiring of certain key employees. For stock-based awards granted in October 2013 and November 2013, we determined it was appropriate to use $10.10 per share to calculate the stock-based compensation expense for these awards.

January 13, 2014 Valuation

An independent contemporaneous valuation of our common stock was performed as of January 13, 2014. The valuation utilized the market comparable approach and the prior sale of company stock approach. We also updated the set of comparable companies utilized in our valuation with companies that we believed were relevant to us. These comparable companies had slightly higher revenue multiples than the comparable companies used in previous valuations. The prior sale of company stock approach considered primarily the Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock financing transaction at $18.00 per share as discussed in the aforementioned October 11, 2013 Valuation.

To determine the fair value of our common stock, we utilized the Hybrid Method and then gave consideration to recent secondary sales of our common stock. Under the Hybrid Method, an aggregate weighting of 55% was applied to two IPO scenarios given there was more clarity with respect to our IPO plans and a 45% weighting was applied to a non-IPO scenario. Under an IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the market comparable approach, a discount rate of 35%, an assumed time to liquidity of 0.41 year and a non-marketability discount of 10%. Under a second IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock financing transaction at $18.00 per share and a non-marketability discount of 10%. Under a non-IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the prior sale of company stock approach using a volatility rate of 45%, an assumed time to liquidity of two years, a risk-free interest rate of 0.39% and a non-marketability discount of 20%. The use of the three aforementioned scenarios under the Hybrid Method yielded a per share value of $12.92. We also considered recent secondary sales of 32,626 shares of our common stock at an average sales price of $24.25. We then applied a 90% weighting to the $12.92 per share value determined under the Hybrid Method and a 10% weighting to the $24.25 average sales price of the secondary sales. Due to the relatively small number of shares sold in secondary sale transactions, the recent sale of our Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock to new investors at $18.00 per share, and the lack of financial information available to the purchasers of the secondary sales, we determined a 10% weighting was appropriate. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined the fair value of our common stock was $14.06 per share. For stock-based awards granted in January 2014, we determined it was appropriate to use $14.06 per share to calculate the stock-based compensation expense for these awards.

March 28, 2014 Valuation

An independent contemporaneous valuation of our common stock was performed as of March 28, 2014. The valuation utilized the Hybrid Method and the prior sale of company stock approach. We updated the set of comparable companies utilized in our valuation with companies that we believed were relevant to us as of the valuation date. As a result of the downward shift in the trading multiples of high growth SaaS companies which occurred during the second half of March 2014, these comparable companies reflected lower revenue multiples than those used in the January 2014 valuation.

To determine the fair value of our common stock, we utilized the Hybrid Method and gave consideration to secondary sales of our common stock. Under the Hybrid Method, a 90% weighting was applied to an IPO scenario given management’s expectations of an IPO event and a 10% weighting was applied to a non-IPO scenario. Under the IPO scenario, the fair value was estimated using the market comparable approach, a discount rate of 25%, an assumed time to liquidity of 0.09 years and a non-marketability discount of 5%. Under the non-

 

76


Table of Contents

IPO scenario, the fair value was estimated using a volatility rate of 45%, an assumed time to liquidity of two years, a risk-free interest rate of 0.45% and a non-marketability discount of 20%. The use of the Hybrid Method yielded a per share value of $17.14. The valuation continued to be informed by the secondary sales of 32,626 shares of our common stock by certain of our stockholders to third parties at an average sales price of $24.25 per share. We then applied a 90% weighting to the $17.14 per share value determined under the Hybrid Method and a 10% weighting to the $24.25 average sales price of the secondary sales. Due to the relatively small number of shares sold in secondary sale transactions, the sale of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to new investors in the third and fourth quarters of fiscal 2014 and the lack of financial information available to purchasers of the secondary sales, we determined a 10% weighting was appropriate. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined the fair value of our common stock was $17.85 per share. For stock-based awards granted in April 2014, we determined it was appropriate to use $17.85 per share to calculate the stock-based compensation expense for these awards.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

We have operations both within the United States and internationally, and we are exposed to market risks in the ordinary course of our business.

Interest Rate Risk

Our investments are considered cash equivalents and primarily consist of bank deposits or money market funds backed by United States Treasury Bills and certificates of deposit. At April 30, 2014, we had cash and cash equivalents of $79.3 million. The carrying amount of our cash equivalents reasonably approximates fair value, due to the short maturities of these instruments. The primary objectives of our investment activities are the preservation of capital, the fulfillment of liquidity needs and the fiduciary control of cash and investments. We do not enter into investments for trading or speculative purposes. Our investments are exposed to market risk due to a fluctuation in interest rates, which may affect our interest income and the fair market value of our investments. Due to the short-term nature of our investment portfolio, however, we do not believe an immediate 10% increase or decrease in interest rates would have a material effect on the fair market value of our portfolio. We therefore do not expect our operating results or cash flows to be materially affected by a sudden change in market interest rates.

In August 2013, we entered into a $100.0 million two-year revolving line of credit facility. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars, and depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the LIBOR plus 3.0% or the ABR plus 2.0%. Also in August 2013, we drew $34.0 million of the credit facility at 3.4% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%), which was used to pay down outstanding borrowings and related end-of-term and early payment fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. As of April 30, 2014, the outstanding borrowings on our revolving line of credit facility were $34.0 million. In July 2014, we drew an additional $12.0 million under the credit facility at 3.3% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%).

Interest rate risk also reflects our exposure to movements in interest rates associated with our borrowings. At April 30, 2014, we had total debt outstanding with carrying amount of $34.0 million which approximates fair value. A hypothetical 10% increase or decrease in interest rates after April 30, 2014 would not have a material impact on the fair values of our outstanding debt.

Foreign Currency Risk

Our sales contracts are denominated predominantly in U.S. dollars and, to a lesser extent, the British Pound, Euros and Japanese Yen. Consequently, our customer billings denominated in foreign currency are subject to foreign currency exchange risk. A portion of our operating expenses are incurred outside the United States and are denominated in foreign currencies, which are also subject to fluctuations due to changes in foreign currency

 

77


Table of Contents

exchange rates, particularly changes in the British Pound, Euro and Japanese Yen. Additionally, fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates may cause us to recognize transaction gains and losses in our statement of operations. To date we have managed our foreign currency risk by netting assets and liabilities and have not entered into derivatives or hedging transactions as our exposure to foreign currency exchange rates has not been material to our historical operating results, but we may do so in the future if our exposure to foreign currency should become more significant. There were no significant foreign exchange gains or losses in the years ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014.

Recent Accounting Pronouncement

On May 28, 2014, the FASB issued ASU 2014-09 regarding ASC Topic 606, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. The standard provides principles for recognizing revenue for the transfer of promised goods or services to customers with the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The standard will be effective for our fiscal year beginning February 1, 2017. Early adoption is not permitted. We are currently evaluating the impact of this standard.

 

78


Table of Contents

LETTER FROM AARON LEVIE, CO-FOUNDER, CHAIRMAN AND CEO

Powering a New Way to Work

Box’s journey began in 2004 with a simple and, in retrospect, obvious idea: it should be incredibly easy for people to get to their files from anywhere. As college students, Dylan and I were using a number of ineffective tools like email, FTP, thumb drives, and shared drives to accomplish our most basic sharing and collaboration tasks. We knew there had to be a better way. So with some free time and online poker winnings, we set out to change how people could access, share and collaborate on information, thus launching Box in 2005.

We designed a product focused on the end user and created a business model that encouraged individuals within corporations to sign up for free. Whenever legacy systems prevented a marketing manager, sales person, or finance executive from accessing and sharing important information, Box was just a few clicks away. Thanks to the people who brought Box into their organizations, we saw tremendous and unexpected organic growth within businesses of all sizes. To borrow from author and professor Clayton Christensen, Box became the low-end disruptor to traditional enterprise content management software, which was costly, cumbersome, and overly complex. To our surprise and delight, early users and IT administrators at sizable enterprises helped us refine and evolve our product to meet their needs and, by extension, the needs of other large organizations.

It’s been a thrilling ride. But it’s also just beginning.

Over the last several years, Box, and a host of similar, user-centric enterprise services that were initially adopted at the fringes of organizations, have gained a wider foothold in the marketplace. The growth and viability of these technologies have been accelerated by two immensely important trends: the unprecedented adoption of mobile devices globally and the rapid maturation of cloud computing. The result is a rare combination of forces that will transform what people expect from the technology they use at work, how organizations think about the power and potential of IT, and eventually, even the structure of entire industries.

As individuals, we now expect simple, always-on experiences in both our personal and work lives. Instead of being fixed to a local network and office, where data and apps are tightly bound to a physical location, the mobile enterprise is about building flexibility of access into work so that we get the most out of our information anywhere and anytime. It’s also about choice. Whereas five years ago, a few select technology vendors controlled the workplace, the future is exponentially more heterogeneous. Box customers like Schneider Electric and Gap, Inc. are supporting a diverse employee base that works from Android phones, Macs, iPads, Windows PCs, and iPhones, and in turn now expect the same support from their software vendors.

At an organizational level, as people become more mobile and networked, the linear, process-centric ways of working that dominated the mainframe and PC eras of technology are neither tenable nor warranted. Mission critical workflows should be as simple as sharing an update on Facebook, whether it’s Pearson’s editors collaborating on new educational content around the globe; Wasserman Media Group sharing content seamlessly and efficiently with their key client and media partners; or Eli Lilly delivering up-to-date information to its distributed teams.

Finally, as individuals and organizations continue to adopt these new norms, industries will change in response. Engineering and construction powerhouses like Bechtel can connect an array of contractors to their digital information, and workers can pull up content on mobile devices right on the job site. In healthcare, Wake Forest Baptist Health enables doctors to access critical medical information from iPads, allowing physicians to make decisions faster and work more closely with patients. And non-profits like charity: water can connect with global partners in real time, no longer held back by limited IT budgets.

Ultimately, we are moving toward an information economy, where every worker will be an information worker, and every business, regardless of industry, will be in the information business. Companies that don’t find ways for information to enhance their competitive advantage will be outdone by businesses that do. To thrive, companies must arm themselves with a new understanding of the opportunities of information technology to drive their success.

 

79


Table of Contents

And our role at Box is to help enable this transition for every organization in the world.

A New Kind of Enterprise Software Company

To fulfill our mission of helping organizations get the most out of their information, and consequently create a better way of working, we’ve built a different kind of enterprise software company. Admittedly, in some areas starting from a blank slate was the product of inexperience, as neither Dylan nor I had storied careers at IBM or Oracle (though I did use Lotus Notes once in an internship). In other cases, we’ve intentionally ignored conventional wisdom, instead trying to imagine and bring to life the very best ways to build and deliver amazing technology for our customers.

While our focus on serving organizations is singular, how we deliver on that promise is hybrid: balancing the needs of end-users with those of IT and the enterprise. In the past, this has been a contradiction. Personal technology is often simple and elegant, yet goes unmanaged by CIOs and CISOs; corporate software focuses on security and integration into the enterprise but is often too complex and constraining for most users. Our approach uniquely balances the needs of both constituents, with years of perfecting advanced security functionality for enterprises, robust logging and controls, and compliance within regulated industries, all while maintaining a focus on end-user simplicity.

We design our software with the passion and attention to detail that you’d expect from leading consumer companies like Apple. Similar to Facebook, we release updates to our product continuously, which allows us to act on user feedback to improve the Box experience and respond to opportunities with agility. We support our customers with the greatest care and attention, delivering Zappos-like support. And we’ve created an open ecosystem much like salesforce.com, leveraging the talents and skills of tens of thousands of developers outside of our corporation to build value on Box.

To accomplish all this, we’ve built a team of some of the most amazing people in the technology industry hailing from leading consumer internet and enterprise software companies. Each person brings a unique perspective and set of experience to our business. We believe our culture is a critical competitive advantage that helps attract such great talent and is built on a foundation of thinking big, being a little bit irreverent, and getting stuff done.

Importantly, we’ve built a company that moves quickly. Our industry is in a permanent state of change. We’ve seen companies that were once wildly successful become shadows of their former selves. This happens in all sectors but is more pronounced in technology, where Moore’s Law ensures that any leadership position can be toppled as quickly as it was created. For that reason, at Box we are always focused on what comes next. We orient the entire company around how we can be improving, innovating, and moving faster. While you never know for sure what’s around the corner, it’s the speed with which you respond to changes that determines success or failure.

At times, we may get some things wrong, but we respond quickly and “fail fast.” More often, however, our speed affords us an incredible competitive advantage, as when Box was able to deliver the first enterprise content solution available for the iPad, just a few months after the device was announced. In other, less agile organizations, this can take years.

What is most invigorating is that our work is never done. With constant innovation all around us—from all the various devices we use, to the constantly evolving ways we work—Box must always find new opportunities to delight our customers. In the face of this challenge, we will continue to find our inspiration in the belief that we can build powerful yet simple technology that improves how the world collaborates, shares, and works.

Go Cloud!

Aaron

 

80


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

Our Mission and Vision

Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information. We believe our platform can become the cloud-based content layer that spans organizations, applications and devices to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our paying business customers include more than 45% of Fortune 500 companies and 21% of Global 2000 companies, and our 27 million registered users include employees from 99% of Fortune 500 companies, including companies in highly regulated industries such as healthcare and life sciences, telecommunications, energy and financial services.

There are several fundamental technology trends that are dramatically changing both individual behavior and enterprise IT infrastructure. Information workers increasingly expect to be able to access and work with their business content from any internet-enabled device, and they demand solutions that are as simple to use as their consumer internet applications, such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. However, legacy on-premise IT architectures were not built for ease of use or mobility. As a result, IT departments are increasingly pressured to find easier to use solutions that address employees’ changing work styles, while also protecting confidential content, including documents, presentations, spreadsheets and multimedia.

At our founding, we recognized that content is more accessible, useful and powerful when it is centrally stored, managed and shared. We have architected our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform from the ground up to be cloud-based and mobile-optimized to meet the evolving demands of today’s information worker. Cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration is especially powerful because it enables users to access and collaborate on centralized content from anywhere and allows organizations to access new features and apply policies and controls across all users and content simultaneously. Our solution is especially well-suited to support globally distributed workers with multiple devices.

We are building a rich ecosystem around Box. Our platform integrates with the applications of our technology partners, including salesforce.com, NetSuite and others, giving our users full access to Box without leaving partner applications. In addition, third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of our service, increasingly with a focus on specific industries and vertical market use cases. To date, tens of thousands of third-party developers have leveraged our platform as the secure content layer for their applications, including developers that are part of our Box OneCloud ecosystem, which provides users with access to more than 1,000 iOS and Android third-party applications.

Our go-to-market strategy combines user-driven adoption with a direct and indirect sales approach. We offer individuals a free basic version of Box to provide them with a first-hand experience of the simplicity and effectiveness of our service. Our solution often spreads virally within and across organizations, as users adopt Box and invite new users to collaborate. We monetize this network effect through direct and indirect sales strategies to formalize deployments within organizations and further expand our footprint. We also make it easy for users and organizations to visit our website and subscribe to both free and paid versions of our service. Frequently, an organization will purchase Box for one use case and later expand its deployment to other use cases and larger groups of employees.

 

81


Table of Contents

Our solution is highly scalable and can support deployments ranging in size from one user to tens of thousands of users. As of April 30, 2014, we had 27 million registered users and supported over 240,000 organizations that collectively interact with their content on average over three billion times every three months. Our customers include more than 39,000 paying organizations globally, and our largest deployment to date is over 80,000 users. We currently offer our solution in 16 languages. Our customer base includes leading organizations across industries, including Ameriprise Financial, Inc., Bechtel, Eli Lilly and Company, Gap, Inc., Schneider Electric and Sunbelt Rentals.

We have experienced significant growth since our incorporation in 2005. For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%. For the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $23.4 million and $45.3 million, respectively, representing period-over-period growth of 94%. We have invested and continue to invest heavily in our business to capitalize on our large market opportunity. As a result, we incurred net losses of $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. For the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, we incurred net losses of $34.0 million and $38.5 million, respectively.

Industry Trends

Trends such as Cloud, Mobility and the Proliferation of Data are Changing How People Work

Several technology trends have driven down the cost of storage, enabled faster, more powerful applications and increased the number of connected devices, paving the way for cloud and mobile to transform the way that people live and work.

 

    Shift from On-Premise to Cloud-Based Applications . Advances in technology architectures have supported the rise of cloud computing, which enables the delivery of software-as-a-service (SaaS). Today, mission-critical applications can be delivered reliably, securely and cost-effectively to customers over the internet without the need to purchase supporting hardware, software or ongoing maintenance. The lower total cost of ownership, better functionality and flexibility of cloud applications represent a compelling alternative to traditional on-premise solutions. As a result, Gartner, Inc. (Gartner) expects total cloud spending to increase from $132 billion worldwide in 2013 to $244 billion in 2017.

 

    Increased Functionality and Proliferation of Mobile Devices . The rapidly increasing functionality of smartphones, tablets and other mobile devices has resulted in the significant adoption of such devices within organizations. According to International Data Corporation (IDC), there were 1.4 billion mobile internet users worldwide in 2013 and there will be 2.3 billion in 2017. Forrester Research, Inc. (Forrester) estimates that 29% of the global workforce in 2012 used three or more devices, worked from multiple locations and accessed several applications. According to Gartner, the number of tablets sold has grown at a compound annual growth rate of 97% between 2010 and 2014 worldwide, and is expected to surpass personal computers (PCs), by annual number of units sold, in 2016.

 

    Explosion of Content and Data . The volume of data continues to grow significantly as users and organizations increase their usage of data-rich applications and access content from multiple connected devices. According to IDC, from 2005 to 2020, the volume of digital information will grow by a factor of 300, increasing demand for cost-efficient and scalable storage and content management solutions.

These technology advancements have enabled the rapid development of a number of highly intuitive and engaging consumer-oriented internet and mobile applications that have changed the expectations of today’s workforce. The rich functionality and usability of applications such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter have led today’s generation to expect their work applications to be similarly accessible, intuitive, social and collaborative, and their content to be available in the cloud and on any of their mobile devices. In response to the growing desire among workers to access and interact with their business information through their preferred personal devices, many organizations have established “bring your own device” policies. At the same time, workers are

 

82


Table of Contents

increasingly utilizing their favorite applications in the workplace in order to be more productive without seeking approval from their IT departments.

IT is Changing to Embrace These Trends while Maintaining Security and Scalability Standards

IT departments are mandated to ensure security for enterprise content in the face of an increasing number of cyber attacks and data leaks, to comply with ever-changing regulatory requirements and to maintain control and visibility over internal and external users while also taking advantage of the benefits of cloud and mobility. While it is clear that embracing cloud and mobility is a competitive imperative, meeting the permissions, security, scalability and administrative requirements typical of IT departments has become increasingly difficult as the proliferation of devices and applications on various architectures has created a more heterogeneous IT environment. Regulatory and compliance requirements for content, collaboration and storage have grown increasingly complex across geographies and industries. At the same time, reliance on technology for critical content and data has made organizations more vulnerable to both sophisticated external cyber attacks and data leaks.

Effective Content Management is Critical to Business Success Today

The technology trends described above are changing where and how work gets done because people can now access information and do their work from anywhere at any time. Employees, clients, vendors and contractors can now be seamlessly connected, creating new opportunities for sharing, collaboration and productivity. Ultimately, these modern approaches to productivity are empowering organizations to increase information velocity and speed up decision making, thereby increasing their competitiveness in the marketplace.

Our Market Opportunity

Our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform provides a combination of intuitive, user-friendly content applications with enterprise-grade features and security to serve as a central content layer across organizations. Our platform addresses several traditional IT categories defined by IDC, including content management, cloud storage, collaboration, and project and portfolio management, which in aggregate represents an estimated $29 billion in global IT spending in 2014. We believe our opportunity includes large segments of existing enterprise IT spending as well as new use cases and users that are not currently captured by traditional market sizing studies. Customers purchase our services both to replace existing storage and content management solutions, as well as to enable entirely new use cases not well served by existing content or collaboration solutions.

The size and importance of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market is driven by the fact that information is central to every organization’s workflow, and organizations regularly invest in new ways to increase workforce productivity. According to Forrester, there were 615 million information workers as of 2013, and there are expected to be 865 million information workers by 2016. We believe our mobile-optimized platform extends our opportunity beyond information workers to anyone who uses information to get his or her job done, including all mobile workers. According to IDC, there were 1.0 billion mobile workers as of 2010, and there will be 1.3 billion mobile workers by 2015.

The Box Solution

Our solution empowers people to share and interact with content within their organization, with external partners and across their other business applications. Our solution offers:

 

    Modern Cloud Architecture. We have built our platform from the ground up on a cloud-based architecture, which enables us to rapidly develop, update and provision our services to users. Our proprietary cloud architecture is particularly well-suited for enterprise content management because it enables our users to use the most up-to-date versions of our solutions at all times and administrators to immediately apply changes in policies and controls across all their organizations’ critical content simultaneously.

 

    Mobility. Our solution enables users to access content securely in real time through nearly any mobile device and operating system, including iOS, Android, Windows and Blackberry.

 

83


Table of Contents
    Elegant, Intuitive and User-Focused Interface. We are dedicated to keeping our solution easy for users to understand with little to no upfront training. We strive to maintain an elegant, intuitive and simple interface with compelling content collaboration features to enable quick and viral user adoption.

 

    Simple and Rapid Deployment. Our cloud-based software allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our product. IT administrators can quickly add users, set up permissions, create folders, and begin using our product almost immediately without the need to procure and provision hardware or install and configure software.

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security and Administrative Controls. We have invested heavily to build the security and administrative controls demanded by our largest customers. Box gives IT administrators powerful and granular tools to define access rights by user, content type, device and usage. Administrators can set specific content policies such as expiration dates to auto-delete or deactivate file links to time-sensitive materials. They can also manage mobile and sync security settings, including remote disability and installations on device, as well as integrate our service with data loss prevention systems.

 

    Platform Agnostic Content Layer. We have designed our solution to serve as the horizontal content and collaboration layer across an organization and its employees. Users typically store their most important information on our platform, enabling them to interact with almost any type of content, regardless of format or file type, and from any device, location or operating system. We provide varying levels of storage capacity for different customer tiers, ranging from 10GB for free users to unlimited storage for our enterprise customers, and our platform is capable of storing thousands of file types.

 

    Extensible Platform for Custom and Third-Party Application Development. We provide an open platform for independent software vendors (ISVs), companies and third-party developers to build and deploy unique applications with custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box capabilities for content access, viewing, sharing, collaboration, security and reporting. We have a growing developer ecosystem building applications on the Box platform, including over 1,000 OneCloud mobile applications.

 

    Easy Integration with Other Cloud-Based Applications. Our open platform allows for easy integration with other cloud-based applications. We offer a number of off-the-shelf integrations with critical business applications, including Salesforce, NetSuite and others. Using Box Embed, customers are able to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box platform and any integrated business application.

 

    Industry-Specific Compliance Certifications. We have obtained various regulatory and compliance certifications and have built the necessary security and controls to support specific industry vertical needs. For example, in healthcare, we facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act by our customers.

 

    Customized Plans and Pricing . We offer our solution through multiple plans to meet the varying needs of our diverse customer base. An individual user can create a personal Box account with a set storage capacity for a monthly fee. Organizations can purchase packages with different amounts of storage, levels of functionality and monthly fees per user. Our starter package provides a shared workspace for a team or project and supports one to 10 users. Our business package provides increased storage capacity and user management features and requires a minimum of three users. Our enterprise package provides a full set of features for content management and can be customized for large-scale user deployments and unlimited online storage.

 

    Version for Free Users. We offer users a free version of Box in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Our free offering allows users to invite anyone to collaborate on Box, enabling faster content collaboration across employees, vendors, clients, contractors and other parties while exposing more potential users to our solution and helping our solution grow virally.

 

84


Table of Contents
    Robust Customer Support. Our ability to support our customers is core to maintaining high retention rates. Our Customer Success team works closely with customers to ensure they are obtaining the highest value from our services. Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers to understand their specific use cases and deployment needs. We believe our customer service efforts are one of the reasons why we have been successful in retaining customers and increasing their use of our service within and across their organizations.

Benefits of Our Platform

We provide the following key benefits to users, IT departments, organizations, and technology partners and third-party developers:

Benefits to Users

 

    Increased Productivity. Our solution enables users to achieve higher productivity by connecting people and their most important information to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

 

    Real-Time Collaboration. Our real-time collaboration solution enables users to build stronger and more collaborative relationships with their partners and customers and enable teams to work together securely and more productively across functions, organizations and geographies.

 

    Ubiquitous and Secure Access to Files. We provide users with the ability to securely store, access, share and collaborate on content from any location using any operating system and on any device, ranging from PCs to smartphones and tablet devices.

 

    Simplified Technology Experience. Our product is simple to use and powerful, combining the best features of traditional content management with the usability of consumer internet applications. We enable users to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box application and any integrated business application.

Benefits to IT Departments

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security. We deliver enterprise-grade security standards to our entire customer base. We address security at many levels, providing robust security settings set by administrators, sophisticated data encryption technologies, secure content delivery networks and an intrusion detection system to monitor network traffic.

 

    Robust Administrative Controls. We offer an administrative console that allows IT administrators to manage their users and content, exercise granular security control, apply permission policies, and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts.

 

    Compliance. Our solution has been designed and managed in alignment with regulations, standards and best practices including: ISO 27001, SOC-1/SSAE 16 (formerly SAS70), SOC-2 Type II, U.S./EU Safe Harbor, FIPS 140-2 and HIPAA/HITECH. Such adherence to these recognized standards and our continued focus on stringent security and controls further enables the deployment of the Box service by IT departments in healthcare, financial services and other key industries.

 

    Easy Deployment. Our cloud-based service allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our solution. IT departments can leverage active directory and set permissions on an organizational, group or individual level.

Benefits to Organizations

 

   

Reduced Total Cost of Ownership. Our solution includes applications, storage, security, monitoring, integration services, upgrades, maintenance, customer support and disaster recovery, and our subscription-based solution enables customers to adjust the size of their deployment as necessary to

 

85


Table of Contents
 

scale with demand. Our product often replaces legacy technologies, such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP) servers, Managed File Transfer (MFT) tools and networked file servers, also known as shared drives. According to TechValidate, an independent research firm that surveyed 187 Box customers, companies across industries have saved an average of $8,567 per user from increased productivity and replacement of prior solutions.

 

    Frequent Product Updates. We push out new features and functionality on a weekly basis to all of our customers, improving and configuring our platform so that it is compatible with new devices, operating systems, applications and regulatory environments. By delivering our software as a cloud-based service, our customers always operate with the latest features and functionality.

 

    Enable New Class of Information Workers. Our product is optimized for cloud and mobile, allowing organizations to extend content and collaboration to a broader base of users who work remotely using tablets and smartphones.

Benefits to Technology Partners and Third-Party Developers

 

    Seamless Integration with Business Applications. We have designed Box to integrate with the applications of our technology partners, such as salesforce.com, NetSuite and over 20 others, giving our users full access to Box’s complete functionality without leaving partner applications. ISVs, system integrators and other third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of Box.

 

    Ability to Leverage Box Services. Through the use of our platform, developers creating custom web and mobile applications can incorporate nearly all of the functionality of the Box application for integration with their own applications.

 

    Rapid Application Development. Developers who build on the Box platform are able to develop their applications more quickly by leveraging our best-in-class content services.

 

    Reach Extensive User Audience. We give developers access to an audience of 27 million registered users, which we believe allows our ecosystem of technology partners and third-party developers to address a broad set of use cases.

Our Business Model

Our business model focuses on maximizing the lifetime value of a customer relationship. We make significant investments in acquiring new customers and believe that we will be able to achieve a positive return on these investments by retaining customers and expanding the size of our deployments within our customer base over time. In connection with the acquisition of new customers, we incur and recognize significant upfront costs. These costs include sales and marketing costs associated with acquiring new customers, such as sales commission expenses, a significant portion of which is expensed upfront and the remaining portion of which is expensed over the length of the non-cancellable subscription term, and marketing costs which are expensed as incurred. Due to our subscription model, we recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period, which commences when all of the revenue recognition criteria have been met. Although our objective is for each customer to be profitable for us over the duration of our relationship, the costs we incur with respect to any customer relationship, whether a new customer or an upsell to an existing customer, may exceed revenue in earlier periods because we recognize those costs faster than we recognize the associated revenue.

Organizations typically purchase our solution in the following ways: (i) employees in one or more small groups within the organization may individually purchase our service; (ii) organizations may purchase IT sponsored, enterprise-level agreements with deployments for specific, targeted use cases ranging from tens to thousands of user seats; or (iii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements where the number of user seats sold is intended to accommodate and enable nearly all information workers within the organization in whatever use cases they desire to adopt over the term of the subscription.

 

86


Table of Contents

A typical customer that uses our Enterprise Content Collaboration solution will initially purchase a Business subscription plan that provides features including sharing, collaboration, syncing across devices, permissioning, basic content management and up to 1,000GB of storage. Larger customers purchase an Enterprise subscription plan that provides features including additional content management and security, integrations with other applications, access to application programming interfaces and potentially unlimited storage. Our customers generally use Box to unlock enhanced productivity through greater accessibility and easier sharing of their most important content. Customers often expand the size of their Box deployment as our solution spreads virally among users within the organization.

To provide an understanding of our customer economics, we analyzed the customers we acquired in fiscal year 2010, which we will refer to as the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2010, we recognized $2.8 million in revenue and incurred variable costs that resulted in a negative contribution margin for the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2014, we recognized $14.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort, representing a compound annual revenue growth rate of 69.2%, and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 34% from the 2010 Cohort. In the three months ended April 30, 2014, we recognized $4.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 56% from the 2010 Cohort.

As a result of investing heavily in sales and marketing to add customers, we expect that our profitability will be favorably impacted in the future to the extent that a greater portion of our revenue is derived from customer renewals rather than new customers. See the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Our Business Model” for a description of how we computed contribution margin. We cannot assure you that we will experience similar contribution margins from customers not included in the 2010 Cohort.

Our Growth Strategy

With an increasing number of information workers, industry trends toward cloud and mobility, and the increased need for global collaboration, we believe the market opportunity for Enterprise Content Collaboration is significant and growing. Key elements of our growth strategy include:

 

    Extending Our Technology Leadership. We have made, and will continue to make, significant investments in research and development to strengthen our existing platform, continually enhance usability and develop additional Enterprise Content Collaboration functionality to improve productivity. By extending our technology to support capabilities like metadata and business process automation, we believe that we can address new use cases and offer greater value to users.

 

    Increasing Our Customer Base Globally. We believe the global market for Enterprise Content Collaboration is large and underserved, and we intend to continue to make investments in our business to capture increasingly larger market share, both domestically and internationally. We plan to continue investing in direct and indirect sales and free user marketing to acquire new customers both in the United States and internationally.

 

    Growing Our Presence within Our Existing Customer Base. We estimate that we currently address a small percentage of available users within our existing customer base, especially our customers who are Fortune 500 companies. While we have at least three users in 99% of Fortune 500 companies, we believe that we have only begun to penetrate the total addressable users at these companies, representing a significant expansion opportunity. We will continue to expand deployment of our solution with existing customers by, among other things, growing from departmental deployments to broader implementations and addressing a broader range of use cases.

 

   

Target Industry Verticals. We have a three-pronged strategy to target industry verticals such as healthcare and life sciences, financial services, legal services, media and entertainment, education, energy and government. First, we have developed targeted sales and marketing activities for specific industry verticals. Second, we ensure that our service meets specific industry and regulatory

 

87


Table of Contents
 

requirements. Third, we are building relationships with partners that develop custom applications that can address the unique needs that exist in specific industries.

 

    Extending Our Sales Reach through Channel and Strategic Partners. We are focused on developing partnerships that extend our reach and enable us to enter new markets. We will continue to develop partnerships with leading channel partners, mobile device and hardware manufacturers, telecommunications service providers and system integrators.

 

    Expanding Our Platform Ecosystem. Applications built by third-party developers on our platform provide greater functionality for users, while still enabling critical information to be stored and monitored in one central location. We will continue to expand our platform ecosystem by developing additional relationships with ISVs, our customers’ internal development organizations and other third-party developers. By supporting these strategic relationships, we believe our platform ecosystem will extend to new use cases that deliver more targeted, higher value solutions. We also believe that, as more ISVs and other third-party developers join the ecosystem, we will attract more customers, further strengthening our ecosystem and making it more attractive to new developers. We also believe that customers who are using applications or integrations through our platform ecosystem are more likely to stay with Box.

The Box Platform

We have built an Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables users to easily store, share, manage, create and collaborate with content both internally and externally. We have invested to make Box a technology agnostic platform, making our solution usable regardless of content format, application, device, location or operating system. Our Box applications provide functionality for content storage, management, collaboration, editing and creation. We also enable integrations between third-party ISV applications and our content services, and provide customers and system integrators with the ability to develop custom applications leveraging our content services. Our core platform services support these applications and content services. We provide robust security and administrative controls to ensure that content on our platform remains secure and manageable from end-to-end.

 

88


Table of Contents

The diagram below illustrates the major elements of the Box platform:

 

LOGO

Users can access our solution from mobile devices, including tablets and smartphones, and from PCs. Box is accessible using nearly any operating system.

Personal Computers

Our solution can be accessed by a web browser or via the desktop through Box Sync and offers integrations for popular productivity applications such as Microsoft Office and Google Apps. Our product has been designed with simplicity in mind, combining the core features of traditional content management with the usability of consumer internet applications.

Mobile Applications

Box’s mobile applications bring the key functionalities from our solution to users’ mobile devices, allowing users to access and manage their content from anywhere. Box is accessible from any device, regardless of the manufacturer or operating system, and has a dedicated mobile application for iPad, iPhone, Android devices, Windows 8 devices, Windows phone, BlackBerry phone and Playbook. Our mobile applications allow users to access, share and upload their files, view an activity feed and search for content. In 2012, we introduced our Box OneCloud platform and our Box Embed framework to encourage developers and independent software vendors

 

89


Table of Contents

to build applications on Box. Today, we offer over 1,000 OneCloud Mobile applications and have over 30 Box Embed and Box partner application integrations. Of the registered users who accessed Box in the three months ended April 30, 2014, over 2.4 million did so via a mobile device, compared to the more than 1.7 million registered users who did so during the three months ended April 30, 2013, representing year-over-year growth of 35%.

Our recently updated application for iPad and iPhone features our new file preview technology that renders files for more than 100 file types, real-time search, the ability to work with multiple files at once, easier access to the Box OneCloud application gallery and a new navigation layout that meets the high usability expectations that our users have for top iOS applications.

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box iPad application:

 

LOGO

 

90


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box Android smartphone application:

 

LOGO

Application Layer

Box Applications

 

    Content Storage and Management. Content stored in Box is encrypted and indexed for full-text search. Other important content management features include unlimited version history, version control, permissions and other granular security controls over users and content.

 

    Content Collaboration. The Box application includes social capabilities to facilitate collaboration in the browser, such as comments, assigning tasks and due dates and receiving real-time updates on collaborator activity. Users have access to a universal stream of events related to their account such as when collaborators upload, download, update, assign tasks or comment on files. Users can choose to receive automatic email alerts on these activities.

 

    Content Editing. Box Edit is an add-on feature that allows users to edit files directly in Box. Designed for nearly all file types, browsers and platforms, Box Edit uses the default application installed on a user’s computer to edit centralized content. For example, DOC files open in Microsoft Word, PPT files open in Microsoft PowerPoint, images open in Photoshop and CAD files open in AutoCAD.

 

    Content Creation. Users can simultaneously create content using Box Notes, our real-time, collaborative word processing application built natively in Box. With Box Notes, users can work together to take notes, share ideas and collaborate in real time with their team without leaving Box. The notes are web-based documents and do not require any other software in order to create, view or edit. The feature is currently available through the Box webapp and on iOS devices, both iPhones and iPads.

 

91


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of Box Notes:

 

LOGO

 

    Box Sync. Box Sync enables users to edit documents on their desktop and simultaneously sync changes to their Box account so all updates are reflected in the cloud. Updates made and files added while offline are automatically synced after re-connecting to the internet, and files added by collaborators are downloaded once the user is back online. We recently released version 4.0 of Box Sync, which includes significant enhancements to our previous versions. Sync 4.0 is faster than Sync 3.0, can support uploads of up to 100,000 files, requires less computing power and supports sub-folder sync.

Third-Party ISV Applications

We enhance the value of the Box platform for our customers by integrating it with other ISV applications and enabling third-party developers to build, update and provision new applications using our services.

 

    Enterprise SaaS. We enable ISVs to easily integrate and extend Box content storage and collaboration functionality to their applications. We integrate with a number of leading third-party SaaS applications including Salesforce, NetSuite and others to enable users to access their content on Box from partner applications. We also integrate with supplemental security features from other applications such as mobile device management from MobileIron and single sign-on from Okta.

 

    OneCloud Mobile. Box OneCloud is an ecosystem of third-party mobile applications that integrate with and extend Box’s core product offering with functionality that includes annotations, scanning, presentations, editing and online signatures. Since its launch in March 2012, Box OneCloud has grown to over 1,000 applications, including CloudOn, GeniusScan, GoFormz, Notability, Plangrid, Outline+ and Wrike.

Custom Applications

 

    Enterprise IT . We provide an open platform for customers and partners to build and deploy unique applications and create custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box services. Our platform enables customers to extend the power and functionality of Box into other applications and use cases. Our product can be further customized for industry-specific workflows through third-party applications available on the Box platform. To date, we have granted tens of thousands of application programming interface (API) keys to third-party developers to extend functionality with Box.

 

92


Table of Contents
    System Integrators . We have established agreements with system integrators such as Capgemini and Tech Mahindra to provide broader customer coverage and solution delivery capabilities. These system integrators write custom applications on Box for use cases specific to their customers.

Content Services

To support our applications and third-party applications, we provide APIs and software development kits (SDKs) that enable developers to build applications that leverage Box’s capabilities.

 

    Content API . Our content API is the main API that developers use to build applications on the Box platform or to integrate existing applications with Box. Developers can extend the content management features from the Box web and mobile interfaces into their own applications using our content API. This API allows developers to leverage Box as the horizontal content layer to power their applications.

 

    View API . In May 2013, we acquired Crocodoc, a company that embeds viewable and annotatable documents within websites, and we have since integrated Crocodoc’s technology into our platform, serving as the solution behind our preview experience. We also continue to sell the Crocodoc API, now marketed as the View API, as a core standalone platform offering, providing HTML5 document viewing to third-party applications.

 

    Metadata API . Our metadata offering, announced in September 2013, will enable users to add context to their content. The underlying technology allows users to add key value pairs to files stored in Box via the API, making it easy to add, edit and view additional types of information around a file from within a custom application or on Box. A sample use case for metadata would be a radiologist searching for a patient name and diagnosis that have been assigned to an x-ray image uploaded to Box. A private beta of metadata will be available in the upcoming months.

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box metadata tagging functionality:

 

LOGO

 

93


Table of Contents
    SDKs . The Box SDKs include language-specific libraries built on top of the Box API to allow for quicker development compared to working directly with the API. The Box SDKs currently have six libraries built on the Box API: iOS, Android (Java), Windows (C# / XAML), Java, C# and Ruby.

 

    Box Embed. Developers can use our HTML5-based embeddable framework to deliver Box’s entire suite of collaboration and management features including preview, comments, tasks and search into partner and customer third-party enterprise applications. Embed integrates customer relationship management software, social business software, financial management software, customer service applications and custom-built legacy business applications into the Box platform.

The graphic below shows Box integrated within the Salesforce application via Box Embed:

 

LOGO

Core Platform Services

We have invested significantly in building a robust platform to support our solution and ecosystem. Our platform provides many of the core features and functionalities required to optimize content collaboration and management.

 

    Content / Data Storage . To take advantage of our Enterprise Content Collaboration capabilities such as collaboration, accessibility and syncing across devices, content must be stored on our platform. Our platform enables users to store, organize, and access thousands of file types in the cloud. All historical versions of a file are stored in our hosted datacenters, making it easy to track changes over time. We provide varying levels of storage capacity for different customer tiers up to unlimited storage.

 

94


Table of Contents
    Search . We have built search capabilities into our platform to allow users to navigate content more quickly. Users can search all content types, data and people in one place, and search for files by name of owner, date edited and contents of the file.

 

    Event Logging . Box automatically logs all file and user activities on the application and maintains a complete audit trail of all activity within the account. The audit log provides IT administrators with insight into what is being done in the system, facilitates discovery and fulfills certain compliance requirements with relevant industry regulations.

 

    Encryption . We provide a secure content collaboration environment to address the needs of our business and enterprise customers. We use sophisticated data encryption technologies to ensure that the content on our platform remains secure. Content on our platform is encrypted in transit and at rest within Box.

 

    Upload Acceleration . We have invested in Box Accelerator, an enterprise-grade global data transfer network that gives our customers faster upload speeds. In September 2012, Neustar found that Box had the lowest average upload time versus competitors across all locations tested, and was 2.7 times faster than the closest competitor globally.

 

    Convert / View . Our solution is platform agnostic and enables users to preview over 100 file types directly in a web browser. We have developed conversion technology to support this large number of disparate file types. Our proprietary preview technology converts business documents such as Word, PowerPoint and PDF files into HTML5 online documents that are then viewable across devices.

Security and Administration

Box is built with security features that meet the standards of the largest enterprises. We enable IT departments to exercise granular security control, manage their users and content and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts. We make these security and control features available to our users through our solution and to third-party developers who build on our platform. We provide the following functionalities:

 

    Reporting . Box offers IT administrators the ability to generate reports on storage usage, security, sync history, user browser history, file activity and user activity, including logins, downloads, edits and uploads.

 

    Sharing Controls . Users work in a secure, online workspace and create shared workspaces by inviting internal and external collaborators to work within a folder or on a file. Files are uploaded into the workspace and can be shared by hyperlink, email, comment or direct navigation within the folder. To restrict access, users can set an expiration date, require a password, make files accessible to only users within a certain domain and set download permissions to enable recipients of shared links to view a file but not download it.

 

    Third-Party Application Management . IT administrators can choose to enable or disable certain applications and integrations within their administrator console. For added security, defaults can be set to automatically disable newly published applications.

 

    User / Password Management . IT administrators have the ability to manage tens of thousands of users in a single view; add, modify and manage users; control login settings; and allocate storage quotas.

 

95


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the management console that enables IT administrators to manage user settings:

 

LOGO

 

    Content Rules . IT administrators can organize and manage all content in a global view. Both users and IT administrators can get visibility into all activity with respect to their content and assign levels of user privileges, which range from “upload only” to full editing rights.

 

    Mobile Device Pinning . Device pinning is a new feature that allows IT administrators to assign users’ Box accounts to a particular mobile device or Box Sync client. IT administrators also have access to a dashboard in the administrator console for managing, enabling and disabling of device pinning, as well as the number of devices the Box application can be pinned to.

 

96


Table of Contents

Customers

Our 27 million registered users represent a diverse customer base from over 240,000 organizations located in over 200 countries and territories. Of these, over 39,000 represent paying organizations. We define a paying organization as a separate and distinct buying entity, such as a company, an educational or government institution or other organization, or a distinct business unit of a large corporation, that has entered into a subscription agreement with us to utilize our services. No customer represented more than 10% of our total revenue in the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014. Below is a list of some of our largest customers by revenue, organized by industry.

 

Advertising

ADS Alliance Data Systems Inc.

Grey Group

Yellow Pages Group

 

Healthcare and Life Sciences

Allergan

Eli Lilly and Company

The University of Texas M. D. Anderson Cancer Center

Business Services

Booz & Company

Creative Artists Agency

Royal HaskoningDHV

 

Industrial

Mondi Group

Schneider Electric

Sunbelt Rentals

Construction

Bechtel

DPR Construction

M. A. Mortenson Company

 

Legal Services

Patterson Belknap Webb & Tyler LLP

Perkins Coie LLP

Sheppard, Mullin, Richter & Hampton LLP

Consumer

Molson Coors Brewing Company

New Balance

Pabst Brewing Company

 

Media & Entertainment

BBC Worldwide

Discovery Communications

TES Connect

Education

Pennsylvania State University

San Jose Unified School District

University of Illinois

 

Non-Profit

Battelle Memorial Institute

The Leukemia & Lymphoma Society

WestEd

Energy

Chevron U.S.A. Inc.

Marathon Petroleum

J-W Energy Company

 

Real Estate

Cushman & Wakefield

Jones Lang LaSalle

The Related Companies

Financial Services

Ameriprise Financial, Inc.

Guaranteed Rate

Nationwide Mutual Insurance

 

Retail

AutoTrader Group

Gap, Inc.

Safeway

Government

Argonne National Laboratory

London Borough of Hounslow

State Government of Victoria, Australia

 

Technology

Dell

DeNA Co.

eBay

Telecom

Bandwidth.com

RingCentral

Telefónica Digital

 

97


Table of Contents

Case Studies

We believe that the following case studies are representative examples of how our customers have benefitted from our solution.

Wake Forest Baptist Health

Situation : With a level 1 trauma center and a busy academic program, Wake Forest Baptist Health (Wake Forest) needed to keep physicians informed of the latest administrative processes, medical protocols, and information on resident education. Because Wake Forest primarily used email and SharePoint to store and share information, physicians frequently missed critical updates—email attachments got buried in inboxes, and because SharePoint was not accessible from mobile devices, physicians would have to leave the exam room to find a desktop computer in order to access information. In addition, the doctors were always on-the-move. Going from patient to patient, doctors needed access to their most important information at all times.

Solution and benefits : Wake Forest first adopted Box on August 31, 2012, with 85 managed users and, as of April 30, 2014, it has continued to maintain these users. Wake Forest chose Box as a single content repository to keep its physicians updated on critical information, giving doctors more time with patients and facilitating collaboration among professors and residents. Having armed their medical staff with iPads, doctors are able to access client information through Box and make real-time decisions. Wake Forest reported the following benefits:

 

    Central repository of latest protocols accessible from iPads in the exam room and anywhere else in the hospital

 

    Better informed doctors have gained time with patients in the exam room

 

    Ability for doctors to make faster decisions because they have all relevant information readily available

Since moving to the Box solution, Wake Forest has saved on storage costs and reduced costs related to upgrading content management solutions.

Live Nation

Situation : Live Nation, the world’s largest live entertainment and event ticketing company, needed a secure, simple way to share files with more than 200 event vendors (e.g., food, security, lighting, sound) for each of their eight annual festivals. In addition, Live Nation’s more than 30 business groups were struggling to collaborate. The company needed a mobile solution that allowed users to access, share and collaborate on content.

Solution and benefits : Live Nation first adopted Box on October 19, 2012, with 320 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of April 30, 2014, it is rolling out to more than 2,000 users. Live Nation replaced another online storage provider with Box for the management of media files and artist related assets, internal human resources collaboration, and secure mobile access for their executives and tour management. The company integrated Box with Salesforce within its media and ad sales departments to provide easier access to critical business information. For festival management, Box serves as the central repository for all vendor documents (e.g., maps, stage information, contracts, forms, and policies). Live Nation reported the following benefits:

 

    Executive team uses Box and iPads to share their critical board presentations

 

    Gained security and administrative controls over data; implementation required little to no training; content easily migrated into Box

 

    Over 500 information workers using the platform

 

98


Table of Contents

Nationwide Insurance

Situation : At Nationwide, one of the largest insurance and financial services companies in the world, security is paramount. Strict security parameters significantly limited internal and external collaboration: employees often had to burn and ship CDs and DVDs in order to share information with law enforcement agencies, federal agencies, affiliated insurance companies and external insurance companies. Employees in sales, marketing, legal and other departments required easy access to documents from their mobile devices and needed to be able to securely share content with external collaborators.

Solution and benefits : Nationwide first adopted Box in September 30, 2012, with 100 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of April 30, 2014, it had maintained 6,000 users. Nationwide adopted the Box solution in addition to a “bring your own device” policy. As a result, Nationwide employees could easily and securely share and collaborate on content with external parties via Box. After deploying Box, Nationwide discovered other use cases including integration with third-party mobile applications such as Quickoffice, iAnnotate and Good Dynamics. Ultimately, the insurance leader reduced costs by going digital and replacing legacy software with Box and its partner apps. Nationwide reported the following benefits:

 

    The ability to centrally house documents, provide appropriate access to both internal and external parties and maintain security of confidential financial information

 

    Ease of use driving viral adoption of the product that led to the company’s deployment growing from 500 to 3,000 users in one year

 

    The ability to work from anywhere anytime increased productivity for the insurer’s employees

By implementing Box, Nationwide has reduced paper costs and replaced its other paid cloud solutions, saving the company $150,000 on an annual basis.

New Balance

Situation : New Balance, a global apparel company, shipped countless USB drives to sales teams around the world in order to distribute marketing and sales content, including thousands of media files. In addition, New Balance needed an internal collaboration solution to replace existing FTP servers.

Solution and benefits : New Balance first adopted Box on December 28, 2012, with 1,400 users and, as of April 30, 2014, it has continued to maintain these users. New Balance purchased the Box solution to protect their intellectual property, while being able to easily share content with its global workforce. New Balance replaced their information sharing repositories, such as FTP, email attachments, USB drives and other cloud storage providers, with Box, resulting in savings of over $100,000 per year. New Balance reported the following benefits:

 

    The New Balance sales team uses Box Sync and the mobile applications to access sales material, such as product information and order forms on a daily basis

 

    The company recently rolled out a mobile strategy and is using third-party Box OneCloud applications to work in the field

 

    The marketing team uses Box to share content internally and externally with third-party vendors

 

    More than 1,400 users on the platform

By implementing Box, New Balance has experienced savings of over $100,000 per year by consolidating other paid cloud solutions, replacing their FTP servers and eliminating the use of USB drives.

 

99


Table of Contents

Schneider Electric

Situation : Schneider Electric, a global specialist in energy management with operations in more than 100 countries, wanted to address consumerization of IT and offer a mobile-friendly document sharing and storage solution. This solution would combine both the ease of use that is experienced by its employees with consumer software and the control and administration features that are required in an enterprise environment.

Solution and benefits : Schneider Electric first adopted Box on August 31, 2012, with 2,000 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of April 30, 2014, it had maintained 82,300 users. To enable collaboration within the organization and enable its knowledge workers to be more efficient, Schneider Electric implemented Box to be a centrally managed, collaborative content store. Box allows Schneider Electric to share content internally across divisions and subsidiaries and externally with over 13,000 partners and customers. Schneider leverages Box’s version-tracking features in order to make the collaboration across multiple teams and locations more efficient, and uses Box on a daily basis, including, for instance, to run a complex RFP (or to allow its management teams to access content such as presentations and speeches from anywhere, including on the way to meet clients). Schneider Electric indicated the following benefits:

 

    Box was successfully adopted by approximately 82,300 employees at a rate of roughly 1,000 new users for every 1.5 weeks

 

    The Schneider Electric IT administration team can now monitor activity (per file or user account) in a centralized and governed way, across over 31.9 terabytes of data stored on Box

By implementing Box, Schneider Electric has facilitated document sharing and collaboration internally and externally. Schneider Electric users have ranked Box among the best rated IT services provided internally in 2013.

Technology and Operations

Our product is a multi-tenant SaaS offering that operates in a cloud-computing environment. Multi-tenancy refers to a principle in software architecture where a single instance of the software runs on a server, serving multiple client organizations. Security, availability, scalability and ease-of-use are core principles in our architecture and design. Our cloud offering allows us to offer global services to our customers in a highly scalable fashion. Co-location allows us to quickly expand capacity geographically using datacenters and networking providers. All computing assets (servers, network devices, data storage) at these co-location datacenters are owned or leased by us and are managed by our employees. We do not own any of these co-location data centers.

Our services are co-located in two separate datacenters in Northern California, and we also operate a disaster recovery datacenter in Las Vegas, Nevada. We license space and services at these facilities pursuant to separate master service agreements, which expire between 2015 and 2016. These facilities currently provide us with an aggregate of 5.37 megawatts of power, which can be increased as necessary. All facilities provide redundant power and cooling systems, fire protection, 24x7 on-site security and biometric authentication. We utilize a third-party solution as additional backup storage for our disaster recovery datacenter.

The Box solution is engineered to provide high reliability and availability. Our uptime service-level agreement (SLA) is 99.90% and in the 12 months ended April 30, 2014, our average monthly uptime was 99.92%. We maintain our service’s reliability by utilizing redundant network infrastructure, server clusters that tolerate failure of individual nodes, servers deployed in high availability pairs and a replica disaster recovery environment. Customer files are backed up to another location that would be out of any disaster zone due to proximity.

With respect to security, we provide IT administrators with a detailed audit log that captures uploads, downloads, preview and deletion with associated metadata such as time modified and the IP address where the content interaction originated from. Box offers Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption in transit. Files are encrypted at rest using 256 bit Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

 

100


Table of Contents

System performance and upload speeds are essential to providing excellent service. Consequently, Box has made significant infrastructure investments in the performance of file transfers. Our Box Accelerator Network consists of accelerator nodes placed strategically around the world and a sophisticated routing mechanism that actively routes file transfers through the fastest path. This network is designed to accelerate traffic without the need for any software installed on the client. Neustar, a neutral third-party, has validated that Box’s average upload speeds across locations are 2.7 times faster on average than the closest competitor.

We have built and deployed accelerator technology nodes across 10 locations and cloud-based points of presence. On top of each node, we deploy patent-pending, intelligent routing technology that determines the fastest path for data to take during the upload process. This combination of proximity and intelligent routing ensures that Box customers everywhere experience the best possible performance as they collaborate with colleagues and partners distributed globally.

Compliance and Certifications

We prioritize the protection of customer and company data. We have developed and implemented an effective framework comprising both technical and operational controls. We ensure that there is both internal and independent external oversight of the security framework to ensure its continued implementation and effectiveness.

We have implemented a formal decentralized management structure for security and compliance that comprises three distinct functions. Each function has an independent reporting structure that ensures appropriate segregation of duties and oversight commensurate with the risk of storing customer data. In addition, we have obtained a number of independent certifications, verifications and approvals for security frameworks and currently maintain accreditation with the following:

 

    ISO/IEC 27001:2005 Information Security Management System Standard . The ISO/IEC 27001:2005 standard is the internationally recognized standard for information security management systems and sets the baseline requirements for the implementation of an effective security management system. This international certification was awarded to Box by the British Standards Institute (BSI).

 

    U.K. Government G-Cloud Approval . The U.K. government has introduced a “G-Cloud” procurement framework to encourage the adoption of cloud services across the whole Public Sector and has the aim of simplifying how Public Sector buys and delivers services by creating a marketplace of cloud commodity services that can be easily scaled up. As of October 2013, Box obtained formal approval for the G-Cloud Framework 4 and is now included on the G-Cloud catalogue for SaaS providers.

 

    Safe Harbor Privacy Principles . Box self certifies under the Safe Harbor Privacy Principles for the EU/EEA and Switzerland. The Safe Harbor scheme is intended for organizations within the European Union or United States that store customer data. The Safe Harbor Principles are designed to prevent accidental information disclosure or loss. As a U.S.-based company, Box has opted into the program and adheres to the seven principles outlined in the Directive on Data Protection.

In addition, at least annually, we engage independent third-party professionals to perform security audits that are conducted in accordance with the Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE) No. 16, Reporting on Controls at a Service Organization, HIPAA and HITECH requirements. The output of these third-party independent audits is as follows:

 

    Service Organization Control (SOC) Reports . SOC reports include Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE) 16 and Attestation Standards (AT) section 101 Reporting on Controls at a Service Organization.

 

    HIPAA and HITECH . Box complies with HIPAA and HITECH requirements regarding Electronic Protected Health Information.

 

101


Table of Contents

Research and Development

Our engineering, operations, product and platform teams operate cross-functionally to enhance our existing cloud services, platform and technology operations. Our product managers on both the product and platform teams regularly engage with customers, partners and industry analysts as well as certain of our stakeholders, in functions such as sales, customer success, marketing and business development to understand customer needs as well as general trends in our industry. Once product improvements are identified, the entire development organization works closely together to design, develop, test and launch a solution.

Research and development expenses were $14.4 million, $29.0 million, $46.0 million and $14.9 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2014, respectively.

Sales and Marketing

Our sales and marketing organizations work together closely to drive market awareness, build a strong sales pipeline and cultivate customer relationships to drive revenue growth.

Sales

We sell our solution through direct field sales, direct inside sales and indirect channel sales. We cultivate prospects through a broad range of marketing programs and events and through users who use the free version of our application. Our sales strategy varies based on the size of the company and whom we are specifically targeting as our point-of-entry into an organization—individual users, IT leaders or leaders of other functions in the company.

We use both bottoms-up and top-down sales strategies. Our bottoms-up sales strategy leverages the free version of our product to seed accounts with small groups of users. Once these users bring the product into their organization, it may be adopted by other individuals, groups or departments in the organization. This helps us identify new and different use cases and can result in companies adding additional users. Our top-down strategy targets IT and line of business leaders to sell larger accounts and enterprise-wide accounts. Our enterprise scale, richness of reporting, configuration capabilities and advanced security make Box attractive to IT organizations.

We have built a comprehensive direct and indirect global sales team that focuses on specific use cases. Our sales organization is organized into four groups: Emerging and Small Business Accounts, which refers to organizations with 1-20 employees; Corporate Accounts, which refers to organizations with 21-1,000 employees; Major Accounts, which refers to organizations with 1,001-5,000 employees; and Enterprise Accounts, which refers to organizations with over 5,000 employees. We employ quota-carrying field and inside sales representatives who are dedicated to these categories, covering specific geographic regions and selling along specific industry verticals. We also have a team of channel account representatives who lead our indirect sales effort by developing partnerships with distribution vendors, resellers and OEMs. These channels provide additional sales coverage, solution-based selling, services and training throughout the world. Our channel program is led by a dedicated sales team and provides training, certification and sales resources to our partners. We have replicated our sales strategy in Europe and plan to do so in other international markets over time.

Our sales segments are supported by a team of inbound and outbound sales representatives. Inbound and outbound sales representatives focus primarily on telesales, while our sales development representatives focus on qualifying leads generated through marketing activities. Opportunities generated by these activities are then passed onto quota-carrying sales representatives based on the potential customer’s size, industry and geographic location. Upon closing a sale, quota-carrying sales representatives manage contract renewals and upsell processes and engage our customer success team to manage the deployment, integration and support of our services. We also have a team of sales engineers dedicated to supporting our account executives in more technical conversations with customers and prospects. Our sales efforts are supported by our sales operations team which runs analytics to enhance our sales function productivity and overall success.

 

102


Table of Contents

Marketing

Our marketing strategy targets users, IT leaders, buyers and application developers across industries and regions. Additionally, our events, lead generation, customer programs, corporate communications, field marketing and product marketing teams focus on building engagement and demand. In conjunction with obtaining key compliance certifications, we are developing vertical marketing programs. We leverage customer case studies, sponsorship of industry conferences, customized partner applications and vocalizing our traction to support our go-to-market strategy in each vertical.

Building our free user base is important to our sales and marketing strategy as it drives viral adoption and growth of our product. We offer free use of our core services with a limited amount of content storage to attract individual users who often attract other users to our products through collaboration. We also offer web trials of our paid products to attract small groups of users in an organization to adopt our product. This often leads to the users bringing our solution into their organization and can facilitate an initial evaluation with the organization. We have established a number of partnerships with hardware and mobile device partnerships to facilitate growth in our free user base.

We utilize various online and offline channels to establish our brand and build awareness. These channels include traditional media advertising, search engine advertising, online mobile campaigns, social media initiatives, large-scale promotions, content syndication, participation in and sponsorship of conferences, trade shows, executive events and industry events, the Box website, and our annual conference, BoxWorks. BoxWorks 2013 attracted approximately 2,900 attendees, an increase of approximately 60% from BoxWorks 2012.

Partnerships and Strategic Relationships

In 2012, we began to further evolve our ecosystem of partners by creating the Box Partner Network and adding an indirect sales approach through channel partners. This complements our direct sales force by offering customers more ways to subscribe to Box. As part of this evolution, we have also engaged with partners who are integrating the Box platform with existing third-party applications and developers creating new applications.

Our partnerships generally fall within three categories: channel partners, strategic partners and developers. These partners, respectively, resell Box broadly to new customers and markets, integrate the Box service into their products or services and build new applications using Box as the content layer, maintaining a secure and central environment for users’ content. Agreements with strategic partners and developers have not been material to date.

Channel Partners

Partners who resell Box include value-added resellers, solution providers, direct market resellers, system integrators, distributors, and service providers, amongst others. Our channel strategy is centered around accelerating our sales reach globally, and generating long-term, profitable revenue streams by leveraging our partners’ strong customer relationships. Such partners include Ingram Micro, CDW, Insight Direct, SoftChoice, AT&T and SHI International Corp.

Strategic Partners

We have entered into agreements with the intent to either market, resell, integrate with or endorse the Box service, or a combination of these activities, that will directly benefit our customers. Current partners include Deutsche Telekom, DocuSign, Good Technology, MobileIron, NetSuite, Okta and salesforce.com.

Developers

We have built APIs to enable developers to build applications using Box as the content layer, allowing users to store content related to that application centrally and securely within Box.

 

103


Table of Contents

Customer Success

We are passionate about supporting our customers from the moment we first engage with them and throughout the lifetime of our partnership. We have multiple teams within our customer success organization dedicated to maintaining a high level of customer satisfaction: customer success management, professional services and customer support. Our operations are structured with the customer experience in mind, and we strive to create a “least-effort” process for users. Internally, our customer success mantra is to “blow our customers’ minds,” and we take that mission seriously. We believe that providing a premium level of support to our customers is critical to enhancing our brand as a superior enterprise service provider.

Once Box is chosen by the customer, our customer success managers are assigned to the customer for the life of the contract to ensure that the service is meeting users’ needs, that users are utilizing our service for the use cases for which they purchase our service and to identify additional needs or opportunities. We have a data-driven approach to account management and closely monitor engagement. When engagement levels trend lower within an enterprise, we proactively reach out to identify and address adoption issues. Customer success managers work closely with our sales team as contracts come up for renewal. Each of our customer success managers is assigned as the primary point of contact to a specific set of customers, for any issues, questions or needs that these customers may have.

Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers prior to signing a contract and implements our service for customers once a sale is complete. The team’s objectives are to fully understand the customer’s objectives for purchasing Box, configure Box for the identified use cases and educate users on how to use our product for those use cases. Our implementation methodology is light and outcome-focused, resulting in our customers going live in days or weeks rather than months. Box Consulting tracks deployment very closely as a key performance indicator.

Our customer support team works directly with users to understand and solve problems as soon as they arise. This team assists with cases directed to customer success managers and also addresses direct inbound issues. The team has on-site subject matter experts to address specific issues and never uses scripts when interacting with customers. Our customer support team works closely with our product team to pass along requests and suggestions made by users. Within the customer success organization, we have a team dedicated to customer retention that monitors our customer usage data to identify opportunities for enhancing our customer’s engagement with our product. This team employs a very data-driven and systems-based approach to analyzing customer usage and satisfaction.

We focus our efforts on providing users with fast response and resolution, technical expertise and multiple communication channels by which to reach us. Support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week and users can reach us by phone, email, Twitter and Facebook. All users are provided with a standard support package by which we provide target response times based on the urgency of the issue. We also offer, for an additional fee, a higher-touch premier support package. Customers with premier support have a dedicated team of premier support specialists with limited account assignments. In addition, premier support users benefit from dedicated communication channels, advanced trending and reporting, and the escalation of issues directly to our engineering organization.

Access to support resources is provided through our Customer Success Corner, a portal with self-service training materials, best practice guides and product documentation. The Customer Success Corner serves as a one-stop shop for administrators and end users who prefer to find answers on their own, as well as supporting materials for those working with Box to configure their accounts.

Culture and Employees

Our founders, our leadership team and our employees have collectively been instrumental in helping us create and sustain our culture of empowerment and collaboration, and we use Box technology extensively within

 

104


Table of Contents

our company to create an environment to facilitate this. We are one of the few companies that combine the enterprise software and enterprise execution capabilities with consumer grade instincts, and we believe our hiring strategy is unique in that we hire people who have experience across both enterprise- and consumer-oriented industries that are leading in technology capabilities and user experience. We take best practices from innovating and leading companies, whether it is customer support, product innovation or enterprise selling. Our goal is to take the best of these very different disciplines and build a company that looks and feels different from what anybody has ever seen before.

As of April 30, 2014, we had 1,016 employees. We also engage temporary employees and consultants. None of our employees are covered by collective bargaining agreements. We believe our employee relations are good, and we have not experienced any work stoppages.

Competition

The Enterprise Content Collaboration market is large, highly competitive and highly fragmented. It is subject to rapidly evolving technology, shifting customer needs and frequent introductions of new products and services. Outside of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market, we compete against several categories of technology providers: vendors whose core competency is simple file sync and share, which can be deployed on premise, hybrid, or via a SaaS delivery model; real-time collaboration vendors whose focus is on real-time voice, video and text communication in the enterprise; social collaboration vendors who focus on the conversations that occur between teams; traditional Enterprise Content Management (ECM) vendors who deploy on premise and offer deep records management, business process workflow, and archival capabilities; and newer mobile enterprise vendors who are beginning to enter the content collaboration market, are adding adjacent content capabilities onto an existing product, or serve a particular business or industry use case. Our current primary competitors include but are not limited to:

 

    Enterprise Content Collaboration: established vendors including EMC, IBM and Microsoft (Office365 and SharePoint); and

 

    File Sync and Share: including Citrix (ShareFile), Dropbox, Google (Drive) and Microsoft (Skydrive Pro).

We may face future competition in our markets from other large, established companies, as well as from smaller specialized companies. In addition, we expect continued consolidation in our industry, which could lead to increased price competition and other forms of competition.

The principal competitive factors in our market include:

 

    enterprise-grade security and compliance;

 

    ease of user experience;

 

    scalable product and infrastructure for large deployments;

 

    speed, availability, and reliability of the service;

 

    low-cost, quick deployment;

 

    integration into office productivity, desktop and mobile tools;

 

    current and forward-thinking product development;

 

    agnostic to device, operating system, and file type;

 

    extensible platform for custom application development;

 

    customer-centric product development;

 

    rich ecosystem of channel partners and applications;

 

105


Table of Contents
    superior customer service and commitment to customer success; and

 

    strength of professional services organization.

We believe that we compete favorably on the basis of these factors. Our ability to remain competitive will depend to a great extent upon our ongoing performance in the areas of product development, core technical innovation, platform and partner ecosystem and customer support. In addition, many of our competitors, particularly the large software companies named above, may have greater name recognition, longer operating histories and significantly greater resources. Some competitors may be able to devote greater resources to the development, promotion and sale of their products than we can to ours, which could allow them to respond more quickly than we can to new technologies and changes in customer needs. We cannot assure you that our competitors will not offer or develop products or services that are superior to ours or achieve greater market acceptance.

Intellectual Property

We rely on a combination of patents, copyrights, trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, confidentiality procedures and contractual restrictions to establish and protect our proprietary rights in our products and services. As of April 30, 2014, we had five issued U.S. patents and four issued Great Britain patents that directly relate to our technology that expire between 2028 and 2033, and we had 82 pending patent applications in the U.S. and 61 pending patent applications internationally. We intend to pursue additional patent protection to the extent that we believe it would be beneficial and cost effective.

We registered “Box,” the Box logo and certain other marks as trademarks in the United States and several other jurisdictions. We also filed trademark applications in the United States and certain other jurisdictions, and will pursue additional trademark registrations to the extent we believe it would be beneficial and cost effective.

We are the registered holder of a variety of domestic and international domain names that include “box.com,” “box.net” and similar variations.

We license software from third parties for integration into our products, including open source software and other software available on commercially reasonable terms.

All of our employees and independent contractors are required to sign agreements acknowledging that all inventions, trade secrets, works of authorship, developments and other processes generated by them on our behalf are our property, and they assign to us any ownership that they may claim in those works. In addition, we generally enter into confidentiality agreements with our employees, consultants, vendors and customers, and generally limit access to and distribution of our proprietary information.

Despite our precautions, it may be possible for unauthorized third parties to copy our products and use information that we regard as proprietary to create products and services that compete with ours.

Some license provisions protecting against unauthorized use, copying, transfer and disclosures of our products may be unenforceable under the laws of certain jurisdictions and foreign countries. In addition, the laws of some countries do not protect proprietary rights to as great of an extent as the laws of the United States, and many foreign countries do not enforce these laws as diligently as government agencies and private parties in the United States. To the extent that we expand our international activities, our exposure to unauthorized copying and use of our products and misappropriation of our proprietary information may increase.

We expect that software and other solutions in our industry may be increasingly subject to third-party infringement claims as the number of competitors grows and the functionality of products in different industry segments overlap. Moreover, many of our competitors and other industry participants have issued patents or filed patent applications, and have asserted claims and related litigation regarding patent and other intellectual property rights. From time to time, third parties have asserted patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret and other intellectual property rights within the industry.

 

106


Table of Contents

Legal Proceedings

On June 5, 2013, Open Text S.A. (Open Text) filed a lawsuit against us in U.S. District Court, Eastern District of Virginia, alleging that our core cloud software and Box Edit application directly and indirectly infringe 12 patents in three patent families that Open Text acquired through its acquisition of various companies: U.S. Patent No. 7,062,515, titled “System and Method for the Synchronization of a File in a Cache,” U.S. Patent No. 7,590,665, titled “System and Method for the Synchronization of a File in a Cache,” and U.S. Patent No. 8,117,152, titled “System and Method for the Synchronization of a File in a Cache,” (collectively, the File Synchronization Patents), U.S. Patent No. 6,223,177, titled “Network Based Groupware System,” U.S. Patent No. 6,917,962, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” U.S. Patent No. 7,287,055, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” U.S. Patent No. 7,299,258, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” U.S. Patent No. 7,320,018, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” U.S. Patent No. 7,734,694, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” and U.S. Patent No. 8,176,122, titled “Web-Based Groupware System,” (collectively, the Groupware Patents), and U.S. Patent No. 7,647,372, titled “Method and System for Facilitating Marketing Dialogues,” and U.S. Patent No. 7,975,007, titled “Method and System for Facilitating Marketing Dialogues,” (collectively, the Dialog Patents). Open Text is a Luxembourg corporation that does not sell any products in the United States. Open Text is a subsidiary of Open Text Corp., located in Waterloo, Ontario, Canada, which is not a party to the litigation.

Open Text is seeking preliminary and permanent injunctions against infringement, treble damages, and attorney’s fees. On August 1, 2013, we filed an answer to Open Text’s complaint, which denied that we infringed Open Text’s patents and asserted that Open Text’s patents were invalid. On the same date, we also filed a motion to transfer the case to the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. On September 13, 2013, Open Text filed a motion for preliminary injunction seeking to enjoin us from providing our Box Edit feature to companies with more than 100 users. On September 28, 2013, we filed papers in opposition to Open Text’s motion for preliminary injunction. On October 18, 2013, the Virginia court granted our motion to transfer and the case was transferred to the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. Discovery commenced on February 6, 2014. On April 9, 2014, the California court denied Open Text’s motion for preliminary injunction, finding that (1) Open Text failed to meet its burden to show irreparable harm, (2) Open Text failed to show a reasonable likelihood of success on the merits of its case, and (3) we have raised a substantial question as to the validity of the patents asserted during the preliminary injunction proceedings.

The judge has issued a scheduling order which sets forth the current expectation for important events in the lawsuit, although no assurances can be given that the schedule will not change. The court ordered that Open Text reduce the total number of patent claims being asserted in the case to 25 total claims across the asserted patents and to identify those particular claims it contends are being infringed. On June 27, 2014, Open Text did reduce the total number of claims asserted against us to 25 and on the same day, we provided our invalidity contentions. A claims construction hearing, also known as a Markman hearing, is scheduled for October 2014, and a trial date has been scheduled for February 2, 2015.

We intend to defend the lawsuit vigorously. Given the early stage in the litigation, we are unable to predict the likelihood of success of Open Text’s infringement claims. While we believe we have valid defenses to Open Text’s claims, an adverse outcome to the litigation could result in a material adverse effect on our business.

In addition, from time to time, we are a party to litigation and subject to claims incident to the ordinary course of business. Although the results of litigation and claims cannot be predicted with certainty, we currently believe that the final outcome of these ordinary course matters will not have a material adverse effect on our business. Regardless of the outcome, litigation can have an adverse impact on us because of defense and settlement costs, diversion of management resources and other factors.

Facilities

Our corporate headquarters, which includes research and development, sales, marketing, business operations and executive offices, is located in Los Altos, California. It consists of approximately 97,000 square feet of space

 

107


Table of Contents

under a lease that expires in 2018. In addition to our headquarters, we lease approximately 30,000 square feet in San Francisco, California for a sales office under a lease that expires in 2021 and approximately 20,640 square feet in Austin, Texas for an office under a lease that expires in 2019. We also maintain space for our East Coast sales team in New York, New York.

We lease more than 11,000 square feet of space in London for our European headquarters, which includes sales and business operations. We currently maintain space in Germany and France, which we use to deliver sales support and professional services locally. We intend to expand further in Europe as needed to support our growing customer base.

We also have an office in Tokyo to target the Asia Pacific market.

We lease all of our facilities and do not own any real property. We intend to procure additional space as we add employees and expand geographically. We believe that our facilities are adequate to meet our needs for the immediate future, and that, should it be needed, suitable additional space will be available to accommodate expansion of our operations.

 

108


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

The following table provides information regarding our executive officers and directors as of June 30, 2014:

 

Name

  

Age

  

Position(s)

Executive Officers

     

Aaron Levie

   29   

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Dan Levin

   50   

President, Chief Operating Officer and Director

Dylan Smith

   28   

Chief Financial Officer and Director

Peter McGoff

   50   

Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary

Graham Younger

   45   

Executive Vice President, Worldwide Field Operations

Non-Employee Directors

     

Dana Evan (1)(3)

   54   

Director

Steven Krausz (1)

   59   

Director

Rory O’Driscoll (1)(2)

   49   

Director

Gary Reiner (3)

   59   

Director

Josh Stein (2)(3)

   41   

Director

Padmasree Warrior

   53   

Director

 

(1) Member of our audit committee.
(2) Member of our compensation committee.
(3) Member of our nominating and corporate governance committee.

Executive Officers

Aaron Levie co-founded our company and has served as our Chairman since December 2013 and as our Chief Executive Officer and a member of our board of directors since April 2005. Mr. Levie attended the University of Southern California from 2003 to 2005.

Mr. Levie was selected to serve on our board of directors because of the perspective and experience he brings as one of our founders.

Dan Levin has served as our President and Chief Operating Officer since December 2013, as our Chief Operating Officer since July 2010 and as a member of our board of directors since January 2010. From March 2009 to July 2010, Mr. Levin served as an advisor to various technology start-ups, including our company since September 2009. From July 2008 to March 2009, Mr. Levin served as the interim Chief Executive Officer of Picateers Inc., an online photo sales company. Previously, Mr. Levin served in various executive roles at Intuit Inc., a business and financial management solutions company, most recently as Vice President and General Manager, Healthcare. Mr. Levin holds a B.A. in the independent concentration of Applications of Computer Graphics to Statistical Data Analysis from Princeton University.

Mr. Levin was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his extensive experience with technology companies.

Dylan Smith co-founded our company and has served as our Chief Financial Officer and as a member of our board of directors since April 2005. Mr. Smith holds a B.A. in Economics from Duke University.

 

109


Table of Contents

Mr. Smith was selected to serve on our board of directors because of the perspective and experience he brings as one of our founders.

Peter McGoff has served as our Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary since April 2012. From June 2000 to April 2012, Mr. McGoff served as Senior Vice President and General Counsel of Informatica Corporation, an enterprise data integration software company. Mr. McGoff holds a B.S. in Finance from California State University, Sacramento, a J.D. from the University of the Pacific and an LL.M. in Intellectual Property Law from the London School of Economics.

Graham Younger has served as our Executive Vice President, Worldwide Field Operations since February 2014. From August 2011 to February 2014, Mr. Younger was employed by SuccessFactors, Inc., a software company and subsidiary of SAP America, Inc., most recently serving as Senior Vice President and General Manager, Global Sales. From August 2008 to August 2011, Mr. Younger was employed by Oracle Corporation, a computer technology company, most recently serving as a Global Vice President of Sales. Mr. Younger is a Computer Science graduate from Birmingham City University, England.

Non-Employee Directors

Dana Evan has served as a member of our board of directors since December 2011. Since July 2007, Ms. Evan has invested in and served on the boards of directors of companies in the internet, technology and media sectors. From May 1996 until July 2007, Ms. Evan served as Chief Financial Officer of VeriSign, Inc., a provider of intelligent infrastructure services for the internet and telecommunications networks. Ms. Evan currently serves on the boards of directors of Criteo S.A., a performance display advertising company, Everyday Health, Inc., a provider of digital health and wellness solutions, Fusion-io, Inc., a flash memory technology company, Proofpoint, Inc., a security-as-a-service provider, and a number of privately held companies. Ms. Evan previously served on the board of directors of Omniture, Inc., an online marketing and web analytics company, until it was acquired by Adobe Systems Incorporated in October 2009. Ms. Evan holds a B.S. in Commerce from Santa Clara University and is a certified public accountant (inactive).

Ms. Evan was selected to serve on our board of directors because of her experience in operations, strategy, accounting, financial management and investor relations at both publicly and privately held technology companies.

Steven Krausz has served as a member of our board of directors since August 2013. Since 1985, Mr. Krausz has served in various roles at U.S. Venture Partners, a venture capital firm, where he currently serves as a Managing Member. Mr. Krausz currently serves on the boards of directors of Imperva, Inc., a data security company, and a number of privately held companies. He previously served on the boards of directors of Guidewire Software, Inc., a provider of software for insurance companies, and Occam Networks, Inc., a broadband network equipment company, until it was acquired by Calix, Inc. in February 2011. Mr. Krausz holds a B.S. in Electrical Engineering from Stanford University and an M.B.A. from the Stanford University Graduate School of Business.

Mr. Krausz was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and as a director of both publicly and privately held technology companies.

Rory O’Driscoll has served as a member of our board of directors since April 2010. Since 1994, Mr. O’Driscoll has been a Managing Director at Scale Venture Partners, a venture capital firm. Mr. O’Driscoll currently serves on the boards of directors of several privately held companies and previously served on the boards of directors of ExactTarget, Inc., a digital marketing software company, until it was acquired by salesforce.com, inc. in July 2013, and Omniture, Inc. until it was acquired by Adobe Systems Incorporated in October 2009. Mr. O’Driscoll holds a B.Sc. from the London School of Economics.

Mr. O’Driscoll was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and as a director of both publicly and privately held technology companies.

 

110


Table of Contents

Gary Reiner has served as a member of our board of directors since August 2012. Since November 2011, Mr. Reiner has been an Operating Partner at General Atlantic LLC, a private equity firm. From September 2010 to November 2011, Mr. Reiner served as Special Advisor to General Atlantic. From 1996 to September 2010, Mr. Reiner served as Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer at General Electric Company, a multinational conglomerate corporation. Mr. Reiner previously held other executive positions with General Electric Company since joining the company in 1991. Mr. Reiner currently serves on the boards of directors of Citigroup Inc., a financial services firm, and Hewlett Packard Company, a computer software, hardware and IT services company. He previously served on the board of directors of Genpact Ltd., a business process management company, and a number of General Atlantic’s privately held portfolio companies. Mr. Reiner holds a B.A. in Economics from Harvard University and an M.B.A. from Harvard Business School.

Mr. Reiner was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his operating and management experience with technology companies.

Josh Stein has served as a member of our board of directors since July 2006. Since December 2006, Mr. Stein has been a Managing Director at Draper Fisher Jurvetson, a venture capital firm he joined in May 2004. Mr. Stein currently serves on the boards of directors of several privately held companies. Mr. Stein holds a B.A. in Psychology from Dartmouth College and an M.B.A. from the Stanford University Graduate School of Business.

Mr. Stein was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and his knowledge of technology companies.

Padmasree Warrior has served as a member of our board of directors since March 2014. Ms. Warrior has served as Chief Technology Officer since March 2008 and Chief Strategy Officer since July 2012 at Cisco Systems, Inc., a networking equipment provider. Prior to joining Cisco, Ms. Warrior served in various executive roles at Motorola, Inc., a telecommunications company, from 1998 to November 2007, most recently as Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer from January 2003 to November 2007. Ms. Warrior currently serves on the board of directors of The Gap, Inc., a retail apparel company. Ms. Warrior holds a B.S. in Chemical Engineering from the Indian Institute of Technology in New Delhi and an M.S. in Chemical Engineering from Cornell University.

Ms. Warrior was selected to serve on our board of directors because of her extensive experience with technology companies.

Our executive officers are appointed by our board of directors and serve until their successors have been duly elected and qualified. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.

Codes of Business Conduct and Ethics

Our board of directors intends to adopt a code of business conduct and ethics that applies to all of our employees, officers and directors, including our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and other executive and senior financial officers. The full text of our code of business conduct and ethics will be posted on the investor relations page of our website. We intend to disclose any amendments to our code of business conduct and ethics, or waivers of its requirements, on our website or in filings under the Exchange Act.

Board of Directors

Our business affairs are managed under the direction of our board of directors. Our board of directors consists of nine directors, six of whom qualify as independent under the listing standards of the NYSE. Pursuant to our current certificate of incorporation and amended and restated voting agreement, our current directors were elected as follows:

 

   

Mr. Levie was elected as the designee reserved for the person serving as our Chief Executive Officer;

 

111


Table of Contents
    Mr. Smith was elected as the designee of the holders of our common stock;

 

    Ms. Evan and Mr. Levin were elected as the designees of our board of directors;

 

    Mr. Krausz was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series B convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. O’Driscoll was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series C convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. Reiner was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series E convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. Stein was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series A convertible preferred stock;

 

    Ms. Warrior was elected by the holders of our voting convertible preferred stock and Existing Class A common stock; and

 

    One director is to be elected by the holders of our Series F convertible preferred stock.

Our amended and restated voting agreement will terminate and the provisions of our current certificate of incorporation by which our directors were elected will be amended and restated in connection with this offering.

After the completion of this offering, the number of directors will be fixed by our board of directors, subject to the terms of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws that will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering. Following this offering, the persons nominated for director who receive the highest number of affirmative votes at each annual meeting for the class of directors to be elected at such meeting (as further described below) will be elected to our board of directors.

Classified Board of Directors

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation that will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering will provide that, immediately after the completion of this offering, our board of directors will be divided into three classes with staggered three-year terms. Only one class of directors will be elected at each annual meeting of stockholders, with the other classes continuing for the remainder of their respective three-year terms. Our current directors will be divided among the three classes as follows:

 

    the Class I directors will be Ms. Evan and Messrs. Krausz and Levie, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2015;

 

    the Class II directors will be Messrs. Levin, Reiner and Stein, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2016; and

 

    the Class III directors will be Messrs. O’Driscoll, Smith and                      and Ms. Warrior, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2017.

Each director’s term will continue until the election and qualification of his or her successor, or until his or her earlier death, resignation or removal. Any increase or decrease in the number of directors will be distributed among the three classes so that, as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one-third of the total number of our directors.

This classification of our board of directors may have the effect of delaying or preventing changes in control of our company.

Director Independence

Our board of directors has undertaken a review of the independence of each director. Based on information provided by each director concerning his or her background, employment and affiliations, our board of directors has determined that Mses. Evan and Warrior and Messrs. Krausz, O’Driscoll, Reiner and Stein do not have relationships that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director and that each of these directors is “independent” as that term is defined under the listing standards of the NYSE. In making these determinations, our board of directors considered the current and prior relationships that each non-employee director has with our company and all other facts and circumstances our board of

 

112


Table of Contents

directors deemed relevant in determining their independence, including the beneficial ownership of our capital stock by each non-employee director and the transactions described in the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

Lead Independent Director

Our board of directors has adopted corporate governance guidelines that provide that one of our independent directors should serve as our Lead Independent Director at any time when our Chief Executive Officer serves as the Chairman of our board of directors or if the Chairman is not otherwise independent. Because Mr. Levie is our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, our board of directors has appointed Mr. O’Driscoll to serve as our Lead Independent Director. As Lead Independent Director, Mr. O’Driscoll will preside over periodic meetings of our independent directors, serve as a liaison between our Chairman and our independent directors and perform such additional duties as our board of directors may otherwise determine and delegate.

Committees of Our Board of Directors

Our board of directors has established an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee. The composition and responsibilities of each of the committees of our board of directors are described below. Members serve on these committees until their resignation or until otherwise determined by our board of directors.

Audit Committee

Ms. Evan and Messrs. Krausz and O’Driscoll, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our audit committee. Ms. Evan is the chair of our audit committee. Our board of directors has determined that each of the members of our audit committee satisfies the requirements for independence and financial literacy under the listing standards of the NYSE and SEC rules and regulations. Our board of directors has also determined that Ms. Evan qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert” as defined in the SEC rules and satisfies the financial sophistication requirements of the NYSE, and that simultaneous service by Ms. Evan on the audit committees of more than three public companies does not impair her ability to effectively serve on our audit committee. Our audit committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    selecting and hiring our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    evaluating the performance and independence of our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    approving the audit and pre-approving any non-audit services to be performed by our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    reviewing our financial statements and related disclosures and reviewing our critical accounting policies and practices;

 

    reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of our internal control policies and procedures and our disclosure controls and procedures;

 

    overseeing procedures for the treatment of complaints on accounting, internal accounting controls, or audit matters;

 

    reviewing and discussing with management and the independent registered public accounting firm the results of our annual audit and the financial statements included in our publicly filed reports;

 

    reviewing and approving any proposed related person transactions; and

 

    preparing the audit committee report included in our annual proxy statement.

Our audit committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC and the listing standards of the NYSE.

 

113


Table of Contents

Compensation Committee

Messrs. O’Driscoll and Stein, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our compensation committee. Mr. Stein is the chair of our compensation committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our compensation committee satisfies the requirements for independence under the listing standards of the NYSE and the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC. Each member of our compensation committee is also a non-employee director, as defined pursuant to Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act, and an outside director, as defined pursuant to Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code. Our compensation committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    reviewing and approving our Chief Executive Officer’s and other executive officers’ annual base salaries, incentive compensation plans, including the specific goals and amounts, equity compensation, employment agreements, severance arrangements and change in control agreements, and any other benefits, compensation or arrangements;

 

    administering our equity compensation plans;

 

    overseeing our overall compensation philosophy, compensation plans and benefits programs; and

 

    preparing the compensation committee report included in our annual proxy statement.

Our compensation committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC and the listing standards of the NYSE.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

Ms. Evan and Messrs. Reiner and Stein, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our nominating and corporate governance committee. Mr. Reiner is the chair of our nominating and corporate governance committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our nominating and corporate governance committee satisfies the requirements for independence under the listing standards of the NYSE. Our nominating and corporate governance committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    evaluating and making recommendations regarding the composition, organization and governance of our board of directors and its committees;

 

    evaluating and making recommendations regarding the creation of additional committees or the change in mandate or dissolution of committees;

 

    reviewing and making recommendations with regard to our corporate governance guidelines; and

 

    reviewing and approving conflicts of interest of our directors and corporate officers, other than related person transactions reviewed by our audit committee.

Our nominating and corporate governance committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the listing standards of the NYSE.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

None of the members of our compensation committee is or has been an officer or employee of our company. None of our executive officers currently serves, or in the past year has served, as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee (or other board committee performing equivalent functions) of any entity that has one or more executive officers serving on our board of directors or our compensation committee.

Mr. O’Driscoll, a member of our compensation committee, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners. Since January 1, 2011, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (SVP III) has purchased shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock in the following transactions: in February 2011, SVP III purchased an

 

114


Table of Contents

aggregate of 503,056 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $1,590,613; and in August 2012, SVP III purchased an aggregate of 38,183 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $500,003.

Mr. Stein, a member of our compensation committee, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson. Since January 1, 2011, entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (DFJ Entities) have purchased shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock in the following transactions: in February 2011, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 1,715,928 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,425,593; in August 2011, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 996,090 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $7,999,998; in August 2012, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 229,097 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $3,000,003; and in October 2013, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 277,778 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,000,004. In October 2011, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain of our stockholders, including the DFJ Entities, sold an aggregate of 350,514 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock, 1,345,970 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock and 509,633 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock to entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $19,999,995.

The sale of our redeemable convertible preferred stock to SVP III and the DFJ Entities was made in connection with our redeemable convertible preferred stock financings and on substantially the same terms and conditions as all other sales of our redeemable convertible preferred stock by us in each such financing. SVP III and the DFJ Entities are also party to our investors’ rights agreement, right of first refusal and co-sale agreement and voting agreement. See the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for further description of these transactions.

Non-Employee Director Compensation

Our non-employee directors do not currently receive, and did not receive in fiscal 2014, any cash compensation for their service on our board of directors or committees of our board of directors.

As of January 31, 2014, Ms. Evan held 160,000 shares of our Class B common stock pursuant to the early exercise of an option to purchase shares of our Class B common stock, of which 76,667 shares were subject to a right of repurchase held by us. The shares began to vest on January 31, 2012 and vest in 48 equal monthly installments; provided, however, that the shares shall become fully vested if Ms. Evan is terminated or resigns from her position as a director in connection with or within 12 months of a change in control.

Our directors who are also our employees receive no additional compensation for their service as directors. During fiscal 2014, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith were our employees. See the section titled “Executive Compensation” for additional information about the compensation paid to Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith.

We do not currently have a policy or plan to make equity award grants or pay cash retainers to our non-employee directors at a particular time, of a particular value or of a particular amount. Following the completion of this offering, we intend to implement a formal policy pursuant to which our non-employee directors would be eligible to receive equity awards and cash retainers as compensation for service on our board of directors and committees of our board of directors.

 

115


Table of Contents

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Fiscal 2014 Summary Compensation Table

The following table presents summary information regarding the total compensation for services rendered in all capacities that was earned by our Chief Executive Officer and our two other most highly compensated executive officers in fiscal 2014. The individuals listed in the table below are our named executive officers for fiscal 2014.

 

Name and Principal
Position

   Fiscal Year      Salary($)     Bonus ($) (1)      Option
Awards ($) (2)
     Non-Equity
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($) (3)
     All Other
Compensation
($) (4)
     Total ($)  

Aaron Levie

     2014         150,833        38,750                         87         189,670   

Chairman and Chief

     2013         140,833                1,827,185         39,773         53         2,007,844   

Executive Officer

                   

Dan Levin

     2014         240,000 (5)       60,000         1,656,552                 388         1,956,940   

President and Chief

                   

Operating Officer

                   

Dylan Smith

     2014         202,500        50,000         311,858                 114         564,472   

Chief Financial Officer

     2013         182,500                450,236         52,761         80         685,577   

 

(1) The amounts reported represent discretionary bonuses earned in fiscal 2014.
(2) The amounts reported represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to the named executive officers during fiscal 2013 and fiscal 2014 as computed in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in this column are set forth in the notes to our audited consolidated financial statements included in this prospectus.
(3) The amounts reported represent amounts earned in fiscal 2013 under our 2012 executive bonus program.
(4) The amounts reported represent amounts paid on behalf of the named executive officers for basic life insurance.
(5) Mr. Levin’s annual salary was increased to $275,000 effective March 2014.

Non-Equity Incentive Plan Compensation

Executive Bonus Program

We sponsored a 2012 executive bonus program (2012 Bonus Program) that covered calendar year 2012. Our named executive officers for fiscal 2013 were eligible to participate in our 2012 Bonus Program. Incentives under our 2012 Bonus Program were payable based on our achievement of certain company financial targets. For calendar year 2012, the performance metric was tied to the acquisition of new and recurring business revenue. Subject to achieving the performance metric, each participant was eligible to receive a target incentive payment as a percentage of the participant’s base salary. For calendar year 2012, the target incentives for each eligible named executive officer were as follows: (i) Aaron Levie, 40% of his base salary; and (ii) Dylan Smith, 40% of his base salary. During calendar year 2012, we achieved the performance metric at a level that triggered the payments described in the Fiscal 2014 Summary Compensation Table.

In addition, as a result of transitioning to a January 31 fiscal year-end, we paid out bonuses to cover the additional one month for the remainder of fiscal 2013. For this one-month period, we paid each executive 1/12 of his target amount for calendar year 2012.

 

116


Table of Contents

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End

The following table provides information regarding equity awards held by our named executive officers at January 31, 2014.

 

    Option Awards     Stock Awards  
    Grant
Date
    Number of Securities
Underlying Unexercised
Options
    Option
Exercise

Price
($)
    Option
Expiration

Date
    Number of
Shares of
Stock
That Have Not

Vested
(#)
    Market Value
of Shares of

Stock
That Have
Not

Vested
($)
 

Name

    Exercisable
(#)
    Unexercisable
(#)
         

Aaron Levie

    07/15/2010 (1)       515,235        73,606        0.29        07/14/2020                 
    04/07/2011 (2)       25,000               0.59        04/06/2021                 
    04/02/2012 (3)       385,000        385,000        1.16        04/01/2022                 
    04/02/2012 (4)       102,500        307,500        4.00        04/01/2022                 
    04/02/2012 (5)              410,000        4.00        04/01/2022                 
    04/27/2012 (6)              410,000        4.00        04/26/2022                 

Dan Levin

    04/19/2013 (7)       34,375        265,625        4.63        04/18/2023                 
    04/19/2013 (8)       150,000        150,000        4.63        04/18/2023                 

Dylan Smith

    07/15/2010                                    42,973 (9)       604,200 (10)  
    04/07/2011 (2)       17,362               0.59        04/06/2021                 
    04/01/2012 (11)       160,000        80,000        1.16        03/31/2022                 
    04/01/2012 (12)       35,000        105,000        1.16        03/31/2022                 
    02/07/2013 (7)       16,041        123,959        4.63        02/06/2023                 

 

(1) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on August 1, 2010 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(2) One thirty-sixth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2011 and one thirty-sixth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(3) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2012 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(4) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2013 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(5) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vest on February 1, 2014 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(6) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vest on February 1, 2015 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(7) One ninety-sixth of the shares subject to the option vest monthly over two years beginning on February 1, 2013 and one thirty-second of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(8) One-twelfth of the shares subject to the option vested on August 29, 2013 and one-twelfth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(9) Shares acquired pursuant to an early exercise provision and subject to a right of repurchase we held as of January 31, 2014. One forty-eighth of the 343,780 shares subject to the underlying option award vested on August 1, 2010 and one forty-eighth of these shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(10) This amount reflects the fair market value of our common stock of $14.06 per share as of January 31, 2014 multiplied by the amount shown in the column for the Number of Shares of Stock That Have Not Vested.
(11) One thirty-sixth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2012 and one thirty-sixth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(12) One ninety-sixth of the shares subject to the option vest monthly over two years beginning on January 1, 2012 and one thirty-second of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.

Executive Employment Agreements

Aaron Levie

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Levie is an at-will employee. Mr. Levie’s current annual base salary is $155,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

 

117


Table of Contents

Dan Levin

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Levin is an at-will employee. Mr. Levin’s current annual base salary is $275,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

Dylan Smith

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Smith is an at-will employee. Mr. Smith’s current annual base salary is $200,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

Employee Benefit and Stock Plans

2014 Equity Incentive Plan

Prior to the effectiveness of this offering, our board of directors intends to adopt, and we expect our stockholders will approve, our 2014 Equity Incentive Plan (2014 Plan). Our 2014 Plan will be effective on the business day immediately prior to the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part and is not expected to be utilized until after the completion of this offering. Our 2014 Plan will provide for the grant of incentive stock options, within the meaning of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code (the Code), to our employees and any of our parent and subsidiary corporations’ employees, and for the grant of nonstatutory stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights, performance units and performance shares to our employees, directors and consultants, and our parent and subsidiary corporations’ employees and consultants.

Authorized Shares . A total of              shares of our Class A common stock are expected to be reserved for issuance pursuant to our 2014 Plan, of which no awards are issued and outstanding. In addition, the shares reserved for issuance under our 2014 Plan will also include (i) those shares of our Class B common stock reserved but not subject to outstanding awards under our 2011 Plan (as defined below) as of the effective date described above and (ii) shares of our Class B common stock returned to our 2011 Plan as the result of expiration or termination of options (provided that the maximum number of shares that may be added to our 2014 Plan pursuant to (i) and (ii) is              shares). Any such shares under clauses (i) and (ii) above that had covered awards under our 2011 Plan as shares of Class B common stock will, under our 2014 Plan, become issuable instead as Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis. The number of shares of our Class A common stock available for issuance under our 2014 Plan will also include an annual increase on the first day of each fiscal year beginning in fiscal 2016, equal to the least of:

 

                 shares;

 

        % of the outstanding shares of our capital stock as of the last day of our immediately preceding fiscal year; or

 

    such other amount as our board of directors may determine.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee will administer our 2014 Plan. In case of options intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code, our compensation committee will consist of two or more “outside directors” within the meaning of Section 162(m). Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator has the power to determine the terms of the awards, including the exercise price, the number of shares subject to each such award, the exercisability of the awards, and the form of consideration, if any, payable upon exercise. The administrator also has the authority to amend existing awards to reduce their exercise price, to allow participants the opportunity to transfer outstanding awards

 

118


Table of Contents

to a financial institution or other person or entity selected by the administrator and to institute an exchange program by which outstanding awards may be surrendered in exchange for awards with a higher or lower exercise price.

Stock Options . The exercise price of options granted under our 2014 Plan must at least be equal to the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the date of grant. The term of an incentive stock option may not exceed 10 years, except that with respect to any participant who owns more than 10% of the voting power of all classes of our outstanding capital stock, the term must not exceed five years and the exercise price must equal at least 110% of the fair market value on the grant date. Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator determines the term of all other options. After the termination of service of an employee, director, or consultant, he or she may exercise his or her option or stock appreciation right for the period of time stated in his or her award agreement. Generally, if termination is due to death or disability, the option or stock appreciation right will remain exercisable for 12 months. In all other cases, the option or stock appreciation right will generally remain exercisable for three months following the termination of service. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of our Class A common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant. Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator determines the terms of stock appreciation rights, including when such rights become exercisable and whether to pay any increased appreciation in cash or with shares of our Class A common stock, or a combination thereof, except that the per share exercise price for the shares to be issued pursuant to the exercise of a stock appreciation right will be no less than 100% of the fair market value per share of our Class A common stock on the date of grant.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our Class A common stock that vest in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator. The administrator will determine the number of shares of restricted stock granted and may impose whatever conditions to vesting it determines to be appropriate (for example, the administrator may set restrictions based on the achievement of specific performance goals or continued service to us). The administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed. Shares of restricted stock that do not vest are subject to our right of repurchase or forfeiture.

Restricted Stock Units . Restricted stock units may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Restricted stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our Class A common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the number of units granted, the vesting criteria (which may include achievement of specified performance goals or continued service to us), and the form and timing of payment. The administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Performance Units and Performance Shares . Performance units and performance shares may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Performance units and performance shares are awards that will result in a payment to a participant only if performance goals established by the administrator are achieved or the awards otherwise vest. The administrator will establish organizational or individual performance goals in its discretion, which, depending on the extent to which they are met, will determine the number and/or the value of performance units and performance shares to be paid out to participants. After the grant of a performance unit or performance share, the administrator, in its sole discretion, may reduce or waive any performance objectives or other vesting provisions for such performance units or performance shares. The administrator, in its sole discretion, may pay earned performance units or performance shares in the form of cash, in shares, or in some combination thereof.

Non-Employee Directors . Our 2014 Plan provides that all non-employee directors will be eligible to receive awards other than incentive stock options under our 2014 Plan. Our 2014 Plan provides that in any given year a non-employee director will not receive (i) cash-settled awards having a grant date fair value greater than $        ,

 

119


Table of Contents

increased to $         in connection with his or her initial service; and (ii) stock-settled awards having a grant date fair value greater than $        , increased to $         in connection with his or her initial service, in each case, as determined under generally accepted accounting principles.

Non-Transferability of Awards . Unless the administrator provides otherwise, our 2014 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise an award during his or her lifetime.

Merger or Change in Control . Our 2014 Plan provides that in the event of a merger or change in control, as defined in our 2014 Plan, each outstanding award will be treated as the administrator determines, including that the successor corporation or its parent or subsidiary will assume or substitute an equivalent award for each outstanding award. The administrator is not required to treat all awards similarly. If there is no assumption or substitution of outstanding awards, the awards will fully vest, all restrictions will lapse, all performance goals or other vesting criteria will be deemed achieved at 100% of target levels, and the awards will become fully exercisable.

Amendment; Termination . Our 2014 Plan will automatically terminate in 2024, unless we terminate it sooner. The administrator has the authority to amend, suspend, or terminate our 2014 Plan provided such action does not impair the existing rights of any participant.

2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan

Prior to the effectiveness of this offering, our board of directors intends to adopt, and we expect our stockholders will approve, our 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP). Our ESPP will be effective on the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part. We believe that allowing our employees to participate in our ESPP provides them with a further incentive towards ensuring our success and accomplishing our corporate goals.

Authorized Shares . A total of              shares of our Class A common stock will be made available for sale under our ESPP. The number of shares of our Class A common stock available for issuance under our ESPP will be increased on the first day of each fiscal year beginning in fiscal 2016, with such increase equal to the least of:

 

                 shares;

 

        % of the outstanding shares of our capital stock on the first day of such fiscal year; or

 

    such other amount as our board of directors may determine.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee will administer our ESPP and will have full and exclusive authority to interpret the terms of our ESPP including with respect to eligibility, subject to the conditions of our ESPP as described below.

Eligibility . Generally, all of our employees are eligible to participate if they are employed by us, or any participating subsidiary, for at least 20 hours per week and more than five months in any calendar year. However, an employee may not be granted rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under our ESPP if such employee:

 

    immediately after the grant would own capital stock possessing 5% or more of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of our capital stock; or

 

    holds rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under all of our employee stock purchase plans that accrue at a rate that exceeds $25,000 worth of shares of our Class A common stock for each calendar year.

Offering Periods . Our ESPP is intended to qualify under Section 423 of the Code. Each offering period includes purchase periods, which will be approximately      months commencing with one exercise date and

 

120


Table of Contents

ending with the next exercise date. The offering periods are scheduled to start on the first trading day on or after                      and                      of each year, except for the first offering period, which will commence on the first trading day on or after the completion of this offering and will end on the first trading day on or after             .

Contributions . Our ESPP permits participants to purchase shares of our Class A common stock through payroll deductions of up to     % of their eligible compensation. A participant may purchase a maximum of              shares of our Class A common stock during a purchase period.

Exercise of Purchase Right . Amounts deducted and accumulated by the participant are used to purchase shares of our Class A common stock at the end of each purchase period. The purchase price of the shares will be     % of the lower of the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the first trading day of each offering period or on the exercise date. If the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the exercise date is less than the fair market value on the first trading day of the offering period, participants will be withdrawn from the current offering period following their purchase of shares of our Class A common stock on the purchase date and will be automatically re-enrolled in a new offering period. Participants may end their participation at any time during an offering period and will be paid their accrued contributions that have not yet been used to purchase shares of our Class A common stock. Participation ends automatically upon termination of employment with us.

Non-Transferability . A participant may not transfer rights granted under our ESPP. If our compensation committee permits the transfer of rights, it may only be done by will, the laws of descent and distribution, or as otherwise provided under our ESPP.

Merger or Change in Control . In the event of a merger or change in control, as defined under our ESPP, a successor corporation may assume or substitute each outstanding purchase right. If the successor corporation refuses to assume or substitute such outstanding purchase right, the offering period then in progress will be shortened, and a new exercise date will be set. The administrator will notify each participant that the exercise date has been changed and that the participant’s option will be exercised automatically on the new exercise date unless prior to such date the participant has withdrawn from the offering period.

Amendment; Termination . Our ESPP will automatically terminate in 2034, unless we terminate it sooner. The administrator has the authority to amend, suspend, or terminate our ESPP, except that, subject to certain exceptions described in our ESPP, no such action may adversely affect any outstanding rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under our ESPP.

2011 Equity Incentive Plan

Our board of directors adopted, and our stockholders approved, our 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (2011 Plan), in November 2011. Our 2011 Plan was most recently amended in April 2014. We will not grant any additional awards under our 2011 Plan following this offering and will instead grant awards under our 2014 Plan. However, our 2011 Plan will continue to govern the terms and conditions of the outstanding awards previously granted thereunder.

Authorized Shares . As of April 30, 2014, an aggregate of 20,990,327 shares of our Class B common stock were reserved for issuance under our 2011 Plan. As of April 30, 2014, options to purchase 15,190,387 shares of our Class B common stock and 2,904,794 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs remained outstanding under our 2011 Plan.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee currently administers our 2011 Plan. Subject to the provisions of our 2011 Plan, the administrator has the full power and authority to administer our 2011 Plan.

Stock Options . Options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Generally, the exercise price per share of all options must equal at least 100% of the fair market value per share of our common stock on the date the grants are approved by our board of directors. The term of an incentive stock option may not exceed 10 years. An incentive stock option held by a participant who owns more

 

121


Table of Contents

than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of our stock, or any parent or subsidiary corporations, may not have a term in excess of five years and must have an exercise price of at least 110% of the fair market value per share of our common stock on the date of grant. The administrator will determine the methods of payment of the exercise price of an option. After the termination of service of an employee, director or consultant, the participant may generally exercise his or her options, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, for three months after termination. If termination is due to death, disability or retirement, the option will generally remain exercisable, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, until the one-year anniversary of such termination. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term. If termination is for cause, then an option automatically expires upon first notification to the participant of such termination.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of shares of our common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant.

Stock Award s. Stock awards may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are not subject to vesting.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are subject to various restrictions, including restrictions on transferability and forfeiture provisions. Shares of restricted stock will vest, and the restrictions on such shares will lapse, in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator.

Stock Units . Stock units may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the vesting criteria (which may include accomplishing specified performance criteria or continued service to us) and the form and timing of payment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Transferability of Awards . Our 2011 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise such an award during his or her lifetime.

Certain Adjustment . In the event of certain changes in our capitalization, the number of shares reserved under our 2011 Plan, the exercise prices of and the number of shares subject to outstanding options, and the purchase price of and the numbers of shares subject to outstanding awards, will be proportionately adjusted, subject to any required action by our board of directors.

Change of Control . Our 2011 Plan provides that, in the event of a change of control (as defined in our 2011 Plan), if an outstanding award is not assumed or substituted for, then the award vests with respect to 25% of the unvested shares and then terminates.

Amendment; Termination . Our board of directors may amend our 2011 Plan at any time, provided that such amendment does not materially adversely affect any rights under outstanding awards without the award holder’s consent. Upon the completion of this offering, our 2011 Plan will be terminated and no further awards will be granted thereunder. All outstanding awards will continue to be governed by their existing terms.

2006 Stock Incentive Plan

Our board of directors adopted, and our stockholders approved, our 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (2006 Plan), in June 2006. Our 2006 Plan was terminated in connection with the adoption of our 2011 Plan and we will not grant any additional awards under our 2006 Plan; however, our 2006 Plan will continue to govern the terms and conditions of the outstanding awards previously granted thereunder.

 

122


Table of Contents

Authorized Shares . As of April 30, 2014, an aggregate of 3,476,704 shares of our Class B common stock were reserved for future issuance under our 2006 Plan. As of April 30, 2014, options to purchase 3,476,704 shares of our Class B common stock remained outstanding under our 2006 Plan.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee currently administers our 2006 Plan. Subject to the provisions of our 2006 Plan, the administrator has the full power and authority to administer our 2006 Plan.

Stock Options . Options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. The administrator will determine the methods of payment of the exercise price of an option. After the termination of service of an employee, director, or consultant, the participant may generally exercise his or her options, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, for three months after termination. If termination is due to death, disability or retirement, the option will generally remain exercisable, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, until the one-year anniversary of such termination. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term. If termination is for cause, then an option automatically expires upon first notification to the participant of such termination.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of shares of our common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant.

Stock Awards . Stock awards were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are not subject to vesting.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are subject to various restrictions, including restrictions on transferability and forfeiture provisions. Shares of restricted stock will vest, and the restrictions on such shares will lapse, in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator.

Stock Units . Stock units were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the vesting criteria (which may include accomplishing specified performance criteria or continued service to us) and the form and timing of payment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrator, in its sole discretion may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Transferability of Awards . Our 2006 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise such an award during his or her lifetime.

Certain Adjustment . In the event of certain changes in our capitalization, the number of shares reserved under our 2006 Plan, the exercise prices of and the number of shares subject to outstanding options, and the purchase price of and the numbers of shares subject to outstanding awards, will be proportionately adjusted, subject to any required action by our board of directors.

Company Transaction . Our 2006 Plan provides that, in the event of a company transaction (as defined in our 2006 Plan) that is not a related party transaction, if an outstanding award is not assumed or substituted for, then the award vests with respect to 25% of the unvested shares and then terminates.

Amendment; Termination . Our board of directors may amend our 2006 Plan at any time, provided that such amendment does not materially adversely affect any rights under outstanding awards without the award holder’s consent. Our 2006 Plan has been terminated, and no further awards will be granted thereunder. All outstanding awards will continue to be governed by their existing terms.

 

123


Table of Contents

Executive Incentive Plan

In April 2014, our compensation committee adopted an Executive Incentive Plan (Bonus Plan) that allows our compensation committee to provide cash incentive awards to selected employees, including our named executive officers, based upon performance goals established by our compensation committee.

Under our Bonus Plan, our compensation committee will determine the performance goals applicable to any award. The performance goals include attainment of research and development milestones, billings, bookings, business divestitures and acquisitions, cash flow, cash position, contract awards or backlog, customer-related measures, customer retention rates from an acquired company, business unit or division, earnings (which may include earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization, earnings before taxes and net earnings), earnings per share, expenses, gross margin, growth in stockholder value relative to the moving average of the S&P 500 Index or another index, internal rate of return, inventory turns, inventory levels, market share, net billings, net income, net profit, net sales, new product development, new product invention or innovation, number of customers, operating cash flow, operating expenses, operating income, operating margin, overhead or other expense reduction, product defect measures, product release timelines, productivity, profit, return on assets, return on capital, return on equity, return on investment, return on sales, revenue, revenue growth, sales results, sales growth, stock price, time to market, total stockholder return, working capital, and individual objectives such as MBOs, peer reviews or other subjective or objective criteria. Performance goals that include our financial results may be determined in accordance with GAAP or such financial results may consist of non-GAAP financial measures, and any actual results may be adjusted by our compensation committee for one-time items or unbudgeted or unexpected items when determining whether the performance goals have been met. The goals may be on the basis of any factors our compensation committee determines relevant and may be adjusted on an individual, divisional, business unit or company-wide basis. The performance goals may differ from participant to participant and from award to award.

Our compensation committee may, in its sole discretion and at any time, increase, reduce or eliminate a participant’s actual award, and/or increase, reduce or eliminate the amount allocated to the bonus pool for a particular performance period. The actual award may be below, at or above a participant’s target award, in our compensation committee’s discretion. Our compensation committee may determine the amount of any reduction on the basis of such factors as it deems relevant, and it is not required to establish any allocation or weighting with respect to the factors it considers.

Actual awards will be paid in cash only after they are earned, which usually requires continued employment through the date a bonus is paid.

Our compensation committee will have the authority to amend, alter, suspend or terminate our Bonus Plan provided such action does not impair the existing rights of any participant with respect to any earned bonus.

401(k) Plan

We maintain a tax-qualified retirement plan (401(k) Plan) that provides eligible U.S. employees with an opportunity to save for retirement on a tax advantaged basis. Eligible employees are able to defer eligible compensation subject to applicable annual Code limits. We have the ability to make discretionary contributions to our 401(k) Plan but have not done so to date. Employees’ pre-tax contributions are allocated to each participant’s individual account and are then invested in selected investment alternatives according to the participants’ directions. Employees are immediately and fully vested in their contributions. Our 401(k) Plan is intended to be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code with our 401(k) Plan’s related trust intended to be tax exempt under Section 501(a) of the Code. As a tax-qualified retirement plan, contributions to our 401(k) Plan and earnings on those contributions are not taxable to the employees until distributed from our 401(k) Plan.

 

124


Table of Contents

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

In addition to the compensation arrangements that are described in the sections titled “Management” and “Executive Compensation,” and the registration rights described in the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights,” we describe below transactions and series of similar transactions since January 1, 2011, and currently proposed transactions, to which we were a party or will be a party, in which:

 

    the amounts involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000; and

 

    any of our directors, executive officers or beneficial holders of more than 5% of any class of our capital stock, or any immediate family member of, or person sharing the household with, any of these individuals or entities (each, a related person), had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.

Other than as described below, since January 1, 2011, there has not been, nor is there currently proposed, any transactions or series of similar transactions in which we were, or currently propose to be, a party where the amount involved exceeds, or will exceed, $120,000, and in which any related person had or will have a direct or indirect material interest. We believe the terms of the transactions described below were comparable to terms we could have obtained in arm’s-length dealings with unrelated third parties.

Equity Financings

Series D Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From February 2011 through April 2011, we sold an aggregate of 11,543,699 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $36,500,022, pursuant to our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. Concurrently, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer and a member of our board of directors, sold an aggregate of 411,138 shares of our common stock to purchasers, including the Series D Investors (as defined below), at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $1,299,977, and each such purchaser exchanged such shares of our common stock for an equivalent number of shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons (Series D Investors):

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total
Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (1)

     4,111,452       $ 13,000,001   

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (2)

     1,715,928         5,425,593   

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (3)

     943,672         2,983,797   

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     503,056         1,590,613   

 

(1) Affiliates of Meritech Capital Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. and Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P.
(2) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(3) Steven Krausz, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Member at U.S. Venture Partners.
(4) Rory O’Driscoll, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners.

 

125


Table of Contents

Series D-1 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From August 2011 through September 2011, we sold an aggregate of 3,218,033 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $25,845,311, pursuant to our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. Concurrently, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Aaron Levie, Dylan Smith and Dan Levin, each of whom is a member of our board of directors and an executive officer, sold an aggregate of 641,815 shares of our common stock to purchasers, including the Series D-1 Investors (as defined below), at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,154,673, and each such purchaser exchanged such shares of our common stock for an equivalent number of shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons (Series D-1 Investors):

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D-1
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total
Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     996,090       $ 7,999,998   

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (2)

     498,045         3,999,999   

 

(1) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(2) Affiliates of Meritech Capital Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. and Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P.

Series D-2 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From October 2011 through March 2012, we sold an aggregate of 3,529,927 shares of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $32,001,260, pursuant to our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D-2
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (1)

     1,654,588       $ 14,999,999   

 

(1) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.

Concurrently with our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson and U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. sold an aggregate of 350,514 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock, 1,345,970 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock and 509,633 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock to entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $19,999,995.

Series E Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From August 2012 through October 2012, we sold an aggregate of 11,454,838 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price

 

126


Table of Contents

of $149,999,959, pursuant to our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series E
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with General Atlantic (1)

     7,636,560       $ 99,999,990   

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (2)

     916,386         11,999,984   

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (3)

     229,097         3,000,003   

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     38,183         500,003   

 

(1) Affiliates of General Atlantic holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P., GAP Coinvestments III, LLC, GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC, GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P. and GAPCO GmbH & Co. KG. Gary Reiner, a member of our board of directors, is an Operating Partner of General Atlantic.
(2) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.
(3) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(4) Rory O’Driscoll, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners.

In connection with our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Aaron Levie, Dan Levin and Dylan Smith, each of whom is a member of our board of directors and an executive officer, sold an aggregate of 488,340 shares of our common stock at a purchase price of $12.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,860,080.

Series E-1 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From October 2013 through January 2014, we sold an aggregate of 5,554,440 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $99,979,920, pursuant to our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series E-1
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     277,778       $ 5,000,004   

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (2)

     260,000         4,680,000   

 

(1) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(2) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.

 

127


Table of Contents

Series F Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

In July 2014, we sold an aggregate of 7,500,000 shares of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $20.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $150,000,000, pursuant to our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series F
Redeemable
Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Coatue Management (1)

     3,750,000       $ 75,000,000   

 

(1) Affiliates of Coatue Management holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Coatue Offshore Master Fund, Ltd. and Coatue Private Fund I LP.

Investors’ Rights Agreement

We are party to an investors’ rights agreement which provides, among other things, that certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, entities affiliated with Coatue Management, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, and Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, have the right to demand that we file a registration statement or request that their shares of our capital stock be included on a registration statement that we are otherwise filing. See the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” for additional information regarding these registration rights.

Right of First Refusal

Pursuant to our equity compensation plans and certain agreements with our stockholders, including a right of first refusal and co-sale agreement with certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, entities affiliated with Coatue Management, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, and Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer, we or our assignees have a right to purchase shares of our capital stock which stockholders propose to sell to other parties. This right will terminate upon the completion of this offering. Since January 1, 2011, we have waived our right of first refusal in connection with the sale of certain shares of our capital stock, including sales by certain of our executive officers, resulting in the purchase of such shares by certain of our stockholders, including related persons. See the section titled “Principal Stockholders” for additional information regarding beneficial ownership of our capital stock.

Voting Agreement

We are party to a voting agreement under which certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, entities affiliated with Coatue Management, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, and Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer, have agreed as to the manner in which they will vote their shares of our capital stock on certain matters, including with respect to the election of directors. Upon the completion of this offering, the voting agreement will terminate and none of our stockholders will have any special rights regarding the election or designation of members of our board of directors.

 

128


Table of Contents

Limitation of Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors

Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt an amended and restated certificate of incorporation, which will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering, and which will contain provisions that limit the liability of our directors for monetary damages to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Consequently, our directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duties as directors, except liability for the following:

 

    any breach of their duty of loyalty to our company or our stockholders;

 

    any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

 

    unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law; or

 

    any transaction from which they derived an improper personal benefit.

Any amendment to, or repeal of, these provisions will not eliminate or reduce the effect of these provisions in respect of any act, omission or claim that occurred or arose prior to that amendment or repeal. If the Delaware General Corporation Law is amended to provide for further limitations on the personal liability of directors of corporations, then the personal liability of our directors will be further limited to the greatest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law.

In addition, prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt amended and restated bylaws which will provide that we will indemnify, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any person who is or was a party or is threatened to be made a party to any action, suit or proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she is or was one of our directors or officers or is or was serving at our request as a director or officer of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, or other enterprise. Our amended and restated bylaws are expected to provide that we may indemnify to the fullest extent permitted by law any person who is or was a party or is threatened to be made a party to any action, suit, or proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she is or was one of our employees or agents or is or was serving at our request as an employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise. Our amended and restated bylaws will also provide that we must advance expenses incurred by or on behalf of a director or officer in advance of the final disposition of any action or proceeding, subject to very limited exceptions.

Further, we have entered into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers that may be broader than the specific indemnification provisions contained in the Delaware General Corporation Law. These indemnification agreements require us, among other things, to indemnify our directors and executive officers against liabilities that may arise by reason of their status or service. These indemnification agreements also require us to advance all expenses incurred by the directors and executive officers in investigating or defending any such action, suit, or proceeding. We believe that these agreements are necessary to attract and retain qualified individuals to serve as directors and executive officers.

The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions that are expected to be included in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended restated bylaws, and in indemnification agreements that we have entered into with our directors and executive officers may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors and executive officers for breach of their fiduciary duties. They may also reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our directors and executive officers, even though an action, if successful, might benefit us and other stockholders. Further, a stockholder’s investment may be adversely affected to the extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and executive officers as required by these indemnification provisions. At present, we are not aware of any pending litigation or proceeding involving any person who is or was one of our directors, officers, employees or other agents or is or was serving at our request as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, for which indemnification is sought, nor are we aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification.

 

129


Table of Contents

We have obtained insurance policies under which, subject to the limitations of the policies, coverage is provided to our directors and executive officers against loss arising from claims made by reason of breach of fiduciary duty or other wrongful acts as a director or executive officer, including claims relating to public securities matters, and to us with respect to payments that may be made by us to these directors and executive officers pursuant to our indemnification obligations or otherwise as a matter of law.

Certain of our non-employee directors may, through their relationships with their employers, be insured and/or indemnified against certain liabilities incurred in their capacity as members of our board of directors.

Policies and Procedures for Related Person Transactions

Our audit committee will have the primary responsibility for reviewing and approving transactions with related persons. Our audit committee charter provides that our audit committee shall review and approve in advance any related person transactions.

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to adopt a formal written policy providing that we are not permitted to enter into any transaction that exceeds $120,000 and in which any related person has a direct or indirect material interest without the consent of our audit committee. In approving or rejecting any such transaction, our audit committee is to consider the relevant facts and circumstances available and deemed relevant to our audit committee, including whether the transaction is on terms no less favorable than terms generally available to an unaffiliated third party under the same or similar circumstances and the extent of the related person’s interest in the transaction.

 

130


Table of Contents

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the beneficial ownership of our capital stock as of May 31, 2014, and as adjusted to reflect the sale of our Class A common stock offered by us in this offering, for:

 

    each person or group of affiliated persons known by us to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

 

    each of our named executive officers;

 

    each of our directors; and

 

    all of our current executive officers and directors as a group.

We have determined beneficial ownership in accordance with the rules and regulations of the SEC, and the information is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Except as indicated by the footnotes below, we believe, based on information furnished to us, that the persons and entities named in the table below have sole voting and sole investment power with respect to all shares of our capital stock that they beneficially own, subject to applicable community property laws.

Applicable percentage ownership prior to the offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 91,170,066 shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of May 31, 2014, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into shares of our Class B common stock. Applicable percentage ownership after the offering is based on              shares of our Class A common stock and 91,170,066 shares of our Class B common stock outstanding immediately after the completion of this offering, assuming that the underwriters will not exercise their over-allotment option. In computing the number of shares of capital stock beneficially owned by a person and the percentage ownership of such person, we deemed to be outstanding all shares of our capital stock subject to options held by the person that are currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014 and issuable upon the vesting of RSUs held by the person within 60 days of May 31, 2014. However, we did not deem such shares of our capital stock outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of any other person.

Unless otherwise indicated, the address of each beneficial owner listed in the table below is c/o Box, Inc., 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California 94022.

 

     Beneficial Ownership
Prior to the Offering
    Beneficial Ownership
After the Offering
   Percent of
Total Voting
Power After
the

Offering

Name of Beneficial Owner

   Number      Percent     Number    Percent   

5% Stockholders:

             

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     23,016,047         25.2        

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (2)

     11,713,775         12.8           

Entities affiliated with General Atlantic (3)

     7,636,560         8.4           

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     6,711,857         7.4           

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (5)

     5,037,091         5.5           

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (6)

     4,609,497         5.1           

Entities affiliated with Coatue Management (7)

     2,985,878         3.3           

Named Executive Officers and Directors:

             

Aaron Levie (8)

     3,890,463         4.1           

Dan Levin (9)

     1,907,747         2.0           

Dylan Smith (10)

     1,704,948         1.8           

Dana Evan (11)

     160,000         *           

Steven Krausz (12)

     11,713,775         12.8           

Rory O’Driscoll (13)

     6,711,857         7.4           

Gary Reiner

                       

Josh Stein (14)

     23,016,047         25.2           

Padmasree Warrior (15)

     3,375         *           

All current executive officers and directors as a group (12 persons) (16)

     49,327,399         52.7           

 

* Represents beneficial ownership of less than one percent (1%).

 

131


Table of Contents
(1) Consists of (i) 14,904,281 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P. (Fund VIII); (ii) 4,660,560 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P. (Fund IX); (iii) 1,490,740 shares held of record by Draper Associates, L.P. (DALP); (iv) 1,390,544 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P. (Growth Fund); (v) 331,206 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC (Partners VIII); (vi) 126,295 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC (Partners IX); and (vii) 112,421 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC (Partners Growth). Timothy C. Draper, John H.N. Fisher, and Stephen T. Jurvetson, as the managing directors of the general partner entities of Fund VIII and Fund IX and managing members of Partners VIII and Partners IX share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Fund VIII, Fund IX, Partners VIII and Partners IX. Mark W. Bailey, Mr. Fisher and Barry M. Schuler, as the managing directors of the general partner of Growth Fund, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Growth Fund. Any three of Messrs. Bailey, Draper, Fisher and Jurvetson and Mr. Schuler, as the managing members of Partners Growth, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Partners Growth. Mr. Draper, as the President of Draper Associates, Inc., the general partner of DALP, shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by DALP. The address for each of these entities is c/o Draper Fisher Jurvetson, 2882 Sand Hill Road, Suite 150, Menlo Park, California 94025.
(2) Consists of 11,713,775 shares held of record by U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (USVP IX). Presidio Management Group IX, L.L.C. (PMG IX), the general partner of USVP IX, has sole voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX. Irwin Federman, Steven Krausz, David Liddle, Paul Matteucci, Jonathan Root, Casey Tansey and Philip Young, the managing members of PMG IX, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX. The address for each of these entities is c/o U.S. Venture Partners, 2735 Sand Hill Road, Menlo Park, California 94025.
(3) Consists of (i) 7,076,139 shares held of record by General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P. (GAP 90); (ii) 18,627 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P. (GAPCO CDA); (iii) 441,949 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments III, LLC (GAPCO III); (iv) 82,194 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC (GAPCO IV); and (v) 17,651 shares held of record by GAPCO GmbH & Co. KG (GAPCO KG, together with GAP 90, GAPCO CDA, GAPCO III and GAPCO IV, the GA Funds). The general partner of GAP 90 is General Atlantic GenPar, L.P. (GA GenPar) and the general partner of GA GenPar is General Atlantic LLC (GA LLC). GA LLC is the managing member of GAPCO III and GAPCO IV. GA LLC is also the general partner of GAPCO CDA. The general partner of GAPCO KG is GAPCO Management GmbH (GAPCO Management). The Managing Directors of GA LLC control the voting and dispositive decisions made by GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management. There are 23 Managing Directors of GA LLC and they may be deemed to share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by the GA Funds. The Managing Directors of GA LLC are William E. Ford, Steven A. Denning, John D. Bernstein, J. Frank Brown, Gabriel Caillaux, Mark F. Dzialga, Cory Eaves, Martin Escobari, Patricia L. Hedley, David C. Hodgson, Rene M. Kern, Jonathan Korngold, Christopher G. Lanning, Jeff Leng, Anton J. Levy, Adrianna C. Ma, Thomas J. Murphy, Sandeep Naik, Andrew C. Pearson, Brett B. Rochkind, David A. Rosenstein, Philip P. Trahanas and Robbert Vorhoff. GA LLC, GA GenPar, GAP 90, GAPCO III, GAPCO IV, GAPCO CDA and GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management are a “group” within the meaning of Rule 13d-5 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. The address of the General Atlantic entities (other than GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management) is c/o General Atlantic Service Company, LLC, 55 East 52nd Street, 32nd Floor, New York, New York 10055. The address of GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management is c/o General Atlantic GmbH, Maximilianstrasse 35b, 5th floor, 80539 Munich, Germany.
(4) Consists of 6,711,857 shares held of record by Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (SVP III). Scale Venture Management III, LLC (SVM III), the general partner of SVP III, has sole voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III. Stacey Bishop, Kate Mitchell, Rory O’Driscoll and Robert Theis, the managing members of SVM III, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III. The address for each of these entities is c/o Scale Venture Partners, 950 Tower Lane, Suite 700, Foster City, California 94404.
(5) Consists of (i) 2,750,252 shares held of record by Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P. and (ii) 2,286,839 shares held of record by Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. (collectively, the BVP Funds). Each of Deer VIII & Co. L.P. (Deer VIII L.P.), the general partner of the BVP Funds, and Deer VIII & Co. Ltd. (Deer VIII Ltd.), the general partner of Deer VIII L.P., may be deemed to have voting and dispositive power over the shares held by the BVP Funds. J. Edmund Colloton, David J. Cowan, Byron B. Deeter, Robert P. Goodman, Jeremy S. Levine and Robert M. Stavis are the directors of Deer VIII Ltd. Investment and voting decisions with respect to the shares held by the BVP Funds are made by the directors of Deer VIII Ltd. acting as an investment committee. No stockholder, partner, director, officer, manager, member or employee of Deer VIII L.P. or Deer VIII Ltd. has beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of any shares held by the BVP Funds. The address for each of these entities is c/o Bessemer Venture Partners, 1865 Palmer Avenue, Suite 104, Larchmont, New York 10538.
(6) Consists of (i) 4,498,408 shares held of record by Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. (MCP IV); and (ii) 111,089 shares held of record by Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P. (MCA IV). Meritech Capital Associates IV L.L.C. (MCA LLC) is the general partner of MCP IV and MCA IV. George H. Bischof, Michael B. Gordon, Paul S. Madera, Craig D. Sherman and Robert D. Ward are the managing members of MCA LLC and share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by MCP IV and MCA IV. The address for each of these entities is c/o Meritech Capital Partners, 245 Lytton Avenue, Suite 125, Palo Alto, California 94301.
(7) Consists of 2,985,878 shares held of record by Coatue Private Fund I LP (Private Fund). The table above does not reflect the 3,500,000 shares purchased by Coatue Offshore Master Fund, Ltd. (Coatue Master Fund), for which Coatue Management, L.L.C. (Coatue Management) serves as investment manager, and 250,000 shares purchased by Private Fund in July 2014. Coatue Hybrid GP I LLC (General Partner), the general partner of Private Fund, has retained Coatue Management to serve as the investment manager to Private Fund. Philippe Laffont serves as managing member to both General Partner and Coatue Management and has voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Private Fund and Coatue Master Fund. The address for Philippe Laffont and each of these entities is 9 West 57th Street, 25th Floor, New York, New York 10019. For additional information about the purchases in July 2014, see the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Series F Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing.”

 

132


Table of Contents
(8) Consists of (i) 2,590,372 shares held of record by Mr. Levie; and (ii) 1,300,091 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.
(9) Consists of (i) 1,242,122 shares held of record by Daniel J. Levin and Naomi J. Andrews, as Trustees of the Levin/Andrews Family Trust dated 9/18/99; (ii) 156,250 shares held of record by Daniel J. Levin, as Trustee of the Daniel Levin GRAT dated 12/10/13; (iii) 156,250 shares held of record by Naomi J. Andrews, as Trustee of the Naomi J. Andrews GRAT dated 12/10/13; and (iv) 353,125 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.
(10) Consists of (i) 1,316,545 shares held of record by Mr. Smith; (ii) 85,000 shares held of record by the DCS GRAT of 2014 for which Mr. Smith serves as trustee, and (iii) 303,403 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.
(11) Consists of 160,000 shares held of record by Ms. Evan, of which 60,000 shares may be repurchased by us at the original purchase price of $1.16 within 60 days of May 31, 2014.
(12) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (2) above, which are held by USVP IX. Mr. Krausz is a managing member at U.S. Venture Partners and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX.
(13) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (4) above, which are held by SVP III. Mr. O’Driscoll is a managing member at SVM III and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III.
(14) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (1) above, which are held by entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson. Mr. Stein is a managing director at Draper Fisher Jurvetson and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by the entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(15) Consists of (i) 2,250 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date, and (ii) 1,125 shares issuable upon the vesting of restricted stock units within 60 days of May 31, 2014.
(16) Consists of (i) 47,298,218 shares beneficially owned by our current executive officers and directors, of which 125,625 shares may be repurchased by us at the original purchase price within 60 days of May 31, 2014; and (ii) 2,029,181 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of May 31, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.

 

133


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

General

The following is a summary of the rights of our common stock and preferred stock and certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws as they will be in effect upon the completion of this offering. This summary does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, copies of which will be filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

Immediately following the completion of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of              shares, $0.0001 par value per share, of which:

 

                 shares are designated as Class A common stock;

 

                 shares are designated as Class B common stock;

 

                 shares are designated as common stock; and

 

                 shares are designated as preferred stock.

As of April 30, 2014, there were no outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and 91,033,929 outstanding shares of our Class B common stock, held by approximately 709 stockholders of record, and no outstanding shares of preferred stock, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into shares of our Class B common stock effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering.

As of April 30, 2014, up to 21,571,885 shares of our Class B common stock will be issuable after this offering upon the exercise or vesting of outstanding stock options or RSUs.

Class A Common Stock and Class B Common Stock

Prior to the completion of this offering, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights.

Upon the completion of this offering, we will have authorized a new class of Class A common stock and a new class of Class B common stock. All currently outstanding shares of our Existing Class A common stock, Existing Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares to be issued upon the exercise of the Net Exercise Warrant immediately prior to the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, our RSUs and all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of this offering will become eligible to be settled in or exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, references in this prospectus to our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are to our new Class A common stock and new Class B common stock, respectively. We refer to our Class A common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class A common stock” and our Class B common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class B common stock.”

Voting Rights

The holders of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share. The holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common

 

134


Table of Contents

stock will generally vote together as a single class on all matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders, unless otherwise required by Delaware law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. Delaware law could require either holders of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock to vote separately as a single class in the following circumstances:

 

    if we were to seek to amend our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to increase or decrease the par value of a class of our capital stock, then that class would be required to vote separately to approve the proposed amendment; and

 

    if we were to seek to amend our amended and restated certificate of incorporation in a manner that alters or changes the powers, preferences or special rights of a class of our capital stock in a manner that affected its holders adversely, then that class would be required to vote separately to approve the proposed amendment.

Our stockholders do not have the ability to cumulate votes for the election of directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws provide for a classified board of directors consisting of three classes of approximately equal size, each class serving staggered three-year terms. Only one will be elected at each annual meeting of our stockholders, with the other classes continuing for the remainder of their respective three-year terms.

No Preemptive or Similar Rights

Our common stock is not entitled to preemptive rights and is not subject to conversion, redemption or sinking fund provisions.

Right to Receive Liquidation Distributions

Upon our dissolution, liquidation or winding-up, the assets legally available for distribution to our stockholders are distributable ratably among the holders of our common stock, subject to prior satisfaction of all outstanding debt and liabilities and the preferential rights and payment of liquidation preferences, if any, on any outstanding shares of preferred stock.

Conversion

Each share of our Class B common stock is convertible at any time at the option of the holder into one share of our Class A common stock. In addition, each share of our Class B common stock will convert automatically into one share of our Class A common stock upon any transfer, whether or not for value, except for certain transfers described in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, including, without limitation, transfers between Aaron Levie, Dan Levin and Dylan Smith and transfers for tax and estate planning purposes, so long as the transferring holder of Class B common stock continues to hold exclusive voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares transferred.

Once transferred and converted into a share of our Class A common stock, the converted share of our Class B common stock will not be reissued. Following the conversion of all outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock into a single class of common stock, no further shares of our Class A common stock or our Class B common stock will be issued.

Preferred Stock

Upon the completion of this offering, no shares of our preferred stock will be outstanding. Pursuant to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will have the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue from time to time up to              shares of preferred stock in one or more series. Our board of directors may designate the rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions of the preferred stock, including dividend rights, conversion rights, voting rights, redemption rights, liquidation preference,

 

135


Table of Contents

sinking fund terms, and the number of shares constituting any series or the designation of any series. The issuance of preferred stock could have the effect of restricting dividends on our common stock, diluting the voting power of our common stock, impairing the liquidation rights of our common stock, or delaying, deterring, or preventing a change in control. Such issuance could have the effect of decreasing the market price of our Class A common stock. We currently have no plans to issue any shares of preferred stock.

Options

As of April 30, 2014, we had outstanding options to purchase an aggregate of 18,667,091 shares of our Class B common stock, with a weighted-average exercise price of approximately $4.82 per share, under our equity compensation plans.

RSUs

As of April 30, 2014, we had outstanding 2,904,794 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs under our equity compensation plans.

Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, certain holders of our Class B common stock will be entitled to rights with respect to the registration of their shares under the Securities Act. These registration rights are contained in our Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement (IRA) dated as of July 7, 2014. We and certain holders of our redeemable convertible preferred stock are parties to the IRA. With respect to certain of our stockholders, the registration rights set forth in the IRA will expire five years following the completion of this offering, or, with respect to any particular stockholder, when such stockholder is able to sell all of its shares entitled to registration rights pursuant to Rule 144 of the Securities Act during any 90-day period. With respect to other stockholders, the registration rights set forth in the IRA will expire when, following the completion of this offering, such stockholders cease to be an affiliate (as defined pursuant to Rule 405 of the Exchange Act) of us and hold less than five percent of the outstanding shares of our common stock. We will pay the registration expenses (other than underwriting discounts, commissions and stock transfer taxes) of the holders of the shares registered pursuant to the registrations described below. In an underwritten offering, the underwriters have the right, subject to specified conditions, to limit the number of shares such holders may include. In addition, in connection with this offering, we expect that each stockholder that has registration rights will agree not to sell or otherwise dispose of any securities without the prior written consent of the underwriters for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus. See the section titled “Underwriters” for additional information regarding such restrictions.

Demand Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,983,494 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain demand registration rights. At any time beginning on the earlier of one year after the effective date of this offering or August 7, 2015, certain of our stockholders or the holders of at least a majority of the shares entitled to registration rights then outstanding can request that we register the offer and sale of their shares. We are obligated to effect only three such registrations. Such request for registration must cover the registration of at least 20% of the initiating stockholders’ shares entitled to registration rights or the registration of shares with an anticipated aggregate public offering price of at least $2,000,000. If we determine that it would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders to effect such a demand registration, we have the right to defer such registration, not more than once in any 12-month period, for a period of up to 90 days.

Piggyback Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, if we propose to register any of our securities under the Securities Act, the holders of up to 77,076,577 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain “piggyback”

 

136


Table of Contents

registration rights allowing the holders to include their shares in such registration, subject to certain marketing and other limitations. As a result, if we propose to file a registration statement under the Securities Act, the holders of these shares are entitled to notice of the registration and have the right, subject to certain limitations, to include their shares in the registration.

S-3 Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,983,494 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain Form S-3 registration rights. The holders of these shares then outstanding may make a written request that we register the offer and sale of their shares on a registration statement on Form S-3 if we are eligible to file a registration statement on Form S-3 so long as the request covers securities the anticipated aggregate public offering price of which is at least $500,000. These stockholders may make an unlimited number of requests for registration on Form S-3. However, we will not be required to effect a registration on Form S-3 if we have effected two such registrations within the 12-month period preceding the date of the request. Additionally, if we determine that it would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders to effect such a registration, we have the right to defer such registration, not more than once in any 12-month period, for a period of up to 60 days.

Anti-Takeover Effects of Delaware Law and Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws to be effective upon the completion of this offering will contain provisions that could have the effect of delaying, deferring, or discouraging another party from acquiring control of us. These provisions and certain provisions of Delaware law, which are summarized below, could discourage takeovers, coercive or otherwise. These provisions are also designed, in part, to encourage persons seeking to acquire control of us to negotiate first with our board of directors. We believe that the benefits of increased protection of our potential ability to negotiate with an unfriendly or unsolicited acquirer outweigh the disadvantages of discouraging a proposal to acquire us.

Dual Class Stock . As described above in “—Class A Common Stock and Class B Common Stock—Voting Rights,” our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide for a dual class common stock structure, which will provide our founders, current investors, executives and employees with significant influence over all matters requiring stockholder approval, including the election of directors and significant corporate transactions, such as a merger or other sale of our company or its assets.

Undesignated Preferred Stock . As discussed above under “—Preferred Stock,” our board of directors will have the ability to designate and issue preferred stock with voting or other rights or preferences that could deter hostile takeovers or delay changes in our control or management.

Board of Directors Vacancies . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will authorize only our board of directors to fill vacant directorships, including newly created seats. In addition, the number of directors constituting our board of directors will be permitted to be set only by a resolution adopted by a majority vote of our entire board of directors. These provisions would prevent a stockholder from increasing the size of our board of directors and then gaining control of our board of directors by filling the resulting vacancies with its own nominees. This will make it more difficult to change the composition of our board of directors and will promote continuity of management.

Classified Board . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will provide that our board of directors is classified into three classes of directors. A third party may be discouraged from making a tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain control of us as it is more difficult and time consuming for stockholders to replace a majority of the directors on a classified board of directors. See the section titled “Management—Classified Board of Directors.”

 

137


Table of Contents

Limits on Ability of Stockholders to Act by Written Consent or Call a Special Meeting . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that our stockholders may not act by written consent. This limit on the ability of stockholders to act by written consent may lengthen the amount of time required to take stockholder actions. As a result, the holders of a majority of our capital stock would not be able to amend our amended and restated bylaws or remove directors without holding a meeting of stockholders called in accordance with our amended and restated bylaws.

In addition, our amended and restated bylaws will provide that special meetings of the stockholders may be called only by the chairperson of our board of directors, the chief executive officer, the president (in the absence of a chief executive officer) or our board of directors. A stockholder may not call a special meeting, which may delay the ability of our stockholders to force consideration of a proposal or for holders controlling a majority of our capital stock to take any action, including the removal of directors.

Requirements for Advance Notification of Stockholder Nominations and Proposals . Our amended and restated bylaws will establish advance notice procedures with respect to stockholder proposals and the nomination of candidates for election as directors, other than nominations made by or at the direction of our board of directors or a committee of our board of directors. These advance notice procedures may have the effect of precluding the conduct of certain business at a meeting if the proper procedures are not followed and may also discourage or deter a potential acquirer from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect its own slate of directors or otherwise attempt to obtain control of our company.

Amendment of Charter Provisions . Any amendment of the above provisions in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation would require approval by holders of at least 66  2 3 % of our then outstanding capital stock.

Delaware Anti-Takeover Statute . We will be subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law regulating corporate takeovers. In general, Section 203 prohibits a publicly held Delaware corporation from engaging, under certain circumstances, in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date the person became an interested stockholder unless:

 

    prior to the date of the transaction, our board of directors approved either the business combination or the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

    upon completion of the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, excluding for purposes of determining the voting stock outstanding, but not the outstanding voting stock owned by the interested stockholder, (i) shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers and (ii) shares owned by employee stock plans in which employee participants do not have the right to determine confidentially whether shares held subject to the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer; or

 

    at or subsequent to the date of the transaction, the business combination is approved by our board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders, and not by written consent, by the affirmative vote of at least 66  2 3 % of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.

Generally, a business combination includes a merger, asset or stock sale, or other transaction resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. An interested stockholder is a person who, together with affiliates and associates, owns or, within three years prior to the determination of interested stockholder status, did own 15% or more of a corporation’s outstanding voting stock. We expect the existence of this provision to have an anti-takeover effect with respect to transactions our board of directors does not approve in advance. We also anticipate that Section 203 may discourage attempts that might result in a premium over the market price for the shares of common stock held by stockholders.

 

138


Table of Contents

The provisions of Delaware law and the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws could have the effect of discouraging others from attempting hostile takeovers, and as a consequence, they might also inhibit temporary fluctuations in the market price of our Class A common stock that often result from actual or rumored hostile takeover attempts. These provisions might also have the effect of preventing changes in our management. It is also possible that these provisions could make it more difficult to accomplish transactions that stockholders might otherwise deem to be in their best interests.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

Upon the completion of this offering, the transfer agent and registrar for our Class A common stock and Class B common stock will be Computershare Trust Company, N.A. The transfer agent’s address is 250 Royall Street, Canton, Massachusetts 02021.

Limitations of Liability and Indemnification

See the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Limitation of Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors.”

Exchange Listing

Our Class A common stock has been approved for listing on the NYSE under the symbol “BOX.”

 

139


Table of Contents

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for shares of our capital stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of shares of our Class A common stock, including shares issued upon the exercise of outstanding options or the vesting of outstanding RSUs, in the public market after this offering, or the possibility of these sales occurring, could adversely affect the prevailing market price for our Class A common stock or impair our ability to raise equity capital.

Based on shares of our capital stock outstanding as of April 30, 2014, upon the completion of this offering, a total of              shares of Class A common stock and              shares of Class B common stock will be outstanding, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock into shares of our Class B common stock immediately prior to the completion of this offering. Of these shares, all of the shares of our Class A common stock sold in this offering by us, plus any shares sold upon exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option, will be freely tradable in the public market without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, unless these shares are held by “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act.

The remaining shares of our Class B common stock will be “restricted securities,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act. These restricted securities are eligible for public sale only if they are registered under the Securities Act or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act, which are summarized below.

Subject to the lock-up agreements described below and the provisions of Rule 144 under the Securities Act, as well as our insider trading policy, these restricted securities will be available for sale in the public market at various times beginning more than 180 days after the date of this prospectus.

Rule 144

In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, once we have been subject to public company reporting requirements for at least 90 days, a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates for purposes of the Securities Act at any time during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares of our capital stock proposed to be sold for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, is entitled to sell such shares without complying with the manner of sale, volume limitation, or notice provisions of Rule 144, subject to compliance with the public information requirements of Rule 144. If such a person has beneficially owned the shares of our capital stock proposed to be sold for at least one year, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, then such person is entitled to sell such shares without complying with any of the requirements of Rule 144.

In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, our affiliates or persons selling shares of our capital stock on behalf of our affiliates are entitled to sell upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described below, within any three-month period beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

 

    1% of the number of shares of our capital stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately              shares immediately after this offering; or

 

    the average weekly trading volume of our Class A common stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to such sale.

Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates or persons selling shares of our capital stock on behalf of our affiliates are also subject to certain manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.

 

140


Table of Contents

Rule 701

Rule 701 generally allows a stockholder who purchased shares of our capital stock pursuant to a written compensatory plan or contract and who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of our company during the immediately preceding 90 days to sell these shares in reliance upon Rule 144, but without being required to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation, or notice provisions of Rule 144. Rule 701 also permits affiliates of our company to sell their Rule 701 shares under Rule 144 without complying with the holding period requirements of Rule 144. However, all holders of Rule 701 shares are required to wait until 90 days after the date of this prospectus before selling such shares pursuant to Rule 701.

Lock-Up Agreements

We, our directors and executive officers, and other holders of our Class B common stock or securities exercisable for or convertible into our Class B common stock have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J. P. Morgan Securities LLC, on behalf of the underwriters, we and they will not, during the period ending 180 days after the date of this prospectus:

 

    offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our Class A or Class B common stock;

 

    file any registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission relating to the offering of any shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A or Class B common stock; or

 

    enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our Class A or Class B common stock;

whether any such transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. This agreement is subject to certain exceptions as set forth in the section titled “Underwriters.”

Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,983,494 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to rights with respect to the registration of these shares under the Securities Act. Registration of these shares under the Securities Act would result in these shares becoming fully tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon the effectiveness of the registration, except for shares purchased by affiliates. See the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” for additional information.

Registration Statements on Form S-8

Upon the completion of this offering, we intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register all of the shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock issued or reserved for issuance under our equity incentive plans. Shares covered by this registration statement will be eligible for sale in the public market, upon the expiration or release from the terms of the lock-up agreements and subject to vesting of such shares.

 

141


Table of Contents

MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES TO

NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR COMMON STOCK

The following is a summary of the material U.S. federal income tax consequences to non-U.S. holders (as defined below) of the ownership and disposition of our Class A common stock, but does not purport to be a complete analysis of all the potential tax considerations relating thereto. This summary is based upon the provisions of the Code, Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, administrative rulings and judicial decisions, all as of the date hereof. These authorities may be changed, possibly retroactively, so as to result in U.S. federal income tax consequences different from those set forth below. We have not sought any ruling from the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) with respect to the statements made and the conclusions reached in the following summary, and there can be no assurance that the IRS will agree with such statements and conclusions.

This summary also does not address the tax considerations arising under the laws of any non-U.S., state or local jurisdiction or under U.S. federal gift and estate tax laws, except to the limited extent set forth below. In addition, this discussion does not address the potential application of the Medicare contribution tax, the alternative minimum tax or any tax considerations applicable to an investor’s particular circumstances or to investors that may be subject to special tax rules, including, without limitation:

 

    banks, insurance companies or other financial institutions;

 

    tax-exempt organizations;

 

    controlled foreign corporations, passive foreign investment companies and corporations that accumulate earnings to avoid U.S. federal income tax;

 

    dealers in securities or currencies;

 

    traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for their securities holdings;

 

    persons that own, or are deemed to own, more than 5% of our capital stock (except to the extent specifically set forth below);

 

    certain former citizens or long-term residents of the United States;

 

    persons who hold our Class A common stock as a position in a hedging transaction, “straddle,” “conversion transaction” or other risk reduction transaction;

 

    persons who do not hold our Class A common stock as a capital asset within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Code; or

 

    persons deemed to sell our Class A common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code.

In addition, if a partnership or entity classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes holds our Class A common stock, the tax treatment of a partner generally will depend on the status of the partner and upon the activities of the partnership. Accordingly, partnerships that hold our Class A common stock, and partners in such partnerships, should consult their tax advisors.

YOU ARE URGED TO CONSULT YOUR TAX ADVISOR WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATION OF THE U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX LAWS TO YOUR PARTICULAR SITUATION, AS WELL AS ANY TAX CONSEQUENCES OF THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK ARISING UNDER THE U.S. FEDERAL ESTATE OR GIFT TAX RULES OR UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY STATE, LOCAL, NON-U.S. OR OTHER TAXING JURISDICTION OR UNDER ANY APPLICABLE TAX TREATY.

 

142


Table of Contents

Non-U.S. Holder Defined

For purposes of this discussion, you are a non-U.S. holder if you are any holder other than a partnership or other entity classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, or:

 

    an individual citizen or resident of the United States (for tax purposes);

 

    a corporation or other entity taxable as a corporation created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States or any political subdivision thereof;

 

    an estate whose income is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source; or

 

    a trust (x) whose administration is subject to the primary supervision of a U.S. court and which has one or more U.S. persons who have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (y) which has made a valid election to be treated as a U.S. person.

Distributions

We have not made any distributions on our Class A common stock. However, if we do make distributions on our Class A common stock, those payments will constitute dividends for U.S. tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. To the extent those distributions exceed both our current and our accumulated earnings and profits, they will constitute a return of capital and will first reduce your basis in our Class A common stock, but not below zero, and then will be treated as gain from the sale of stock.

Any dividend paid to you generally will be subject to U.S. withholding tax either at a rate of 30% of the gross amount of the dividend or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. In order to receive a reduced treaty rate, you must provide us with an IRS Form W-8BEN (or successor form) or other appropriate version of IRS Form W-8 (or successor form), including a U.S. taxpayer identification number, certifying qualification for the reduced rate. A non-U.S. holder of shares of our Class A common stock eligible for a reduced rate of U.S. withholding tax pursuant to an income tax treaty may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by filing an appropriate claim for refund with the IRS. If the non-U.S. holder holds the stock through a financial institution or other agent acting on the non-U.S. holder’s behalf, the non-U.S. holder will be required to provide appropriate documentation to the agent, which then will be required to provide certification to us or our paying agent, either directly or through other intermediaries.

Dividends received by you that are effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business (and, if an income tax treaty applies, that are attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you in the United States), are exempt from such withholding tax. In order to obtain this exemption, you must provide us with an IRS Form W-8ECI (or successor form) or other applicable IRS Form W-8 (or successor form) properly certifying such exemption. Such effectively connected dividends, although not subject to withholding tax, generally are taxed at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. In addition, if you are a corporate non-U.S. holder, dividends you receive that are effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business may also be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.

Gain on Disposition of Our Class A Common Stock

Subject to the discussion below regarding backup withholding and foreign accounts, you generally will not be required to pay U.S. federal income tax on any gain realized upon the sale or other disposition of our Class A common stock unless:

 

    the gain is effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business (and, if an income tax treaty applies, the gain is attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you in the United States);

 

143


Table of Contents
    you are an individual who is present in the United States for a period or periods aggregating 183 days or more during the calendar year in which the sale or disposition occurs and certain other conditions are met; or

 

    our Class A common stock constitutes a U.S. real property interest by reason of our status as a “United States real property holding corporation” (USRPHC) for U.S. federal income tax purposes at any time within the shorter of the five-year period preceding your disposition of, or your holding period for, our Class A common stock.

We believe that we are not currently and will not become a USRPHC and the remainder of this discussion so assumes. However, because the determination of whether we are a USRPHC depends on the fair market value of our U.S. real property relative to the fair market value of our other business assets, there can be no assurance that we will not become a USRPHC in the future. Even if we become a USRPHC, however, as long as our Class A common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market, such Class A common stock will be treated as U.S. real property interests only if you actually or constructively hold more than 5% of such regularly traded Class A common stock at any time during the shorter of the five-year period preceding your disposition of, or your holding period for, our Class A common stock.

If you are a non-U.S. holder described in the first bullet above, you will be required to pay tax on the net gain derived from the sale under regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates, and a corporate non-U.S. holder described in the first bullet above also may be subject to the branch profits tax at a 30% rate, or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. If you are an individual non-U.S. holder described in the second bullet above, you will be required to pay a flat 30% tax on the gain derived from the sale, which tax may be offset by U.S.-source capital losses for the year. You should consult any applicable income tax or other treaties that may provide for different rules.

Federal Estate Tax

Our Class A common stock beneficially owned by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the United States (as defined for U.S. federal estate tax purposes) at the time of their death will generally be includable in the decedent’s gross estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise. Such stock, therefore, may be subject to U.S. federal estate tax, unless an applicable estate tax or other treaty provides otherwise.

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

Generally, we must report annually to the IRS the amount of dividends paid to you, your name and address, and the amount of tax withheld, if any. A similar report will be sent to you. Pursuant to applicable income tax treaties or other agreements, the IRS may make these reports available to tax authorities in your country of residence.

Payments of dividends on or of proceeds from the disposition of our Class A common stock made to you may be subject to additional information reporting and backup withholding at a current rate of 28% unless you establish an exemption, for example, by properly certifying your non-U.S. status on a Form W-8BEN or another appropriate version of IRS Form W-8. Notwithstanding the foregoing, backup withholding and information reporting may apply if either we or our paying agent has actual knowledge, or reason to know, that you are a U.S. person.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax; rather, the U.S. income tax liability of persons subject to backup withholding will be reduced by the amount of tax withheld. If withholding results in an overpayment of taxes, a refund or credit may generally be obtained from the IRS, provided that the required information is furnished to the IRS in a timely manner.

 

144


Table of Contents

Foreign Accounts

The Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (FATCA) generally imposes a U.S. federal withholding tax of 30% on dividends on and the gross proceeds of a disposition of our Class A common stock, paid to a “foreign financial institution” (as specially defined under these rules), unless such institution enters into an agreement with the U.S. government, among other things, to withhold on certain payments and to collect and provide to the U.S. tax authorities substantial information regarding the U.S. account holders of such institution (which includes certain equity and debt holders of such institution, as well as certain account holders that are foreign entities with U.S. owners) or otherwise establishes an exemption. A U.S. federal withholding tax of 30% also applies to dividends and the gross proceeds of a disposition of our Class A common stock paid to a “non-financial foreign entity” (as specifically defined for purposes of these rules) unless such entity provides the withholding agent with a certification identifying certain substantial direct and indirect U.S. owners of the entity, certifies that there are none or otherwise establishes an exemption. The withholding provisions under FATCA will generally apply to dividends on our Class A common stock paid on or after July 1, 2014 and with respect to the gross proceeds of a sale or other disposition of our Class A common stock on or after January 1, 2017. Under certain circumstances, a non-U.S. holder might be eligible for refunds or credits of such taxes. An intergovernmental agreement between the United States and an applicable foreign country may modify the requirements described in this paragraph. Prospective investors are encouraged to consult with their own tax advisors regarding the possible implications of this legislation on their investment in our Class A common stock.

EACH PROSPECTIVE INVESTOR SHOULD CONSULT ITS OWN TAX ADVISOR REGARDING THE PARTICULAR U.S. FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL AND NON-U.S. TAX CONSEQUENCES OF PURCHASING, HOLDING AND DISPOSING OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK, INCLUDING THE CONSEQUENCES OF ANY PROPOSED CHANGE IN APPLICABLE LAWS.

 

145


Table of Contents

UNDERWRITERS

Under the terms and subject to the conditions in an underwriting agreement dated the date of this prospectus, the underwriters named below, for whom Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC are acting as representatives, have severally agreed to purchase, and we have agreed to sell to them, severally, the number of shares indicated below:

 

Underwriters

  

Number of

Shares

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC

  

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC

  

J.P. Morgan Securities LLC

  

BMO Capital Markets Corp.

  

Canaccord Genuity Inc.

  

Pacific Crest Securities LLC

  

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

  

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC

  
  

 

Total

  
  

 

The underwriters and the representatives are collectively referred to as the “underwriters” and the “representatives,” respectively. The underwriters are offering the shares of our Class A common stock subject to their acceptance of the shares from us and subject to prior sale. The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the several underwriters to pay for and accept delivery of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus are subject to the approval of certain legal matters by their counsel and to certain other conditions. The underwriters are obligated to take and pay for all of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus if any such shares are taken. However, the underwriters are not required to take or pay for the shares covered by the underwriters’ over-allotment option described below.

The underwriters initially propose to offer part of the shares of our Class A common stock directly to the public at the offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus and part to certain dealers. After the initial offering of the shares of our Class A common stock, the offering price and other selling terms may from time to time be varied by the representatives.

We have granted to the underwriters an option, exercisable for 30 days from the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to             additional shares of our Class A common stock at the public offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus, less underwriting discounts and commissions. The underwriters may exercise this option solely for the purpose of covering over-allotments, if any, made in connection with the offering of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus. To the extent the option is exercised, each underwriter will become obligated, subject to certain conditions, to purchase about the same percentage of the additional shares of our Class A common stock as the number listed next to the underwriter’s name in the preceding table bears to the total number of shares of our Class A common stock listed next to the names of all underwriters in the preceding table.

The following table shows the per share and total public offering price, underwriting discounts and commissions, and proceeds before expenses to us. These amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase up to an additional             shares of our Class A common stock.

 

     Total  
     Per Share      No Exercise      Full Exercise  

Public offering price

   $                        $                        $                    

Underwriting discounts and commissions to be paid by:

        

Us

   $         $         $     

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

   $         $         $     

 

146


Table of Contents

The estimated offering expenses payable by us, exclusive of the underwriting discounts and commissions, are approximately $        . We have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for expenses relating to clearance of this offering with the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority up to $30,000.

The underwriters have informed us that they do not intend sales to discretionary accounts to exceed 5% of the total number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by them.

Our Class A common stock has been approved for listing on the NYSE under the trading symbol “BOX.”

We and all of our directors and officers and the holders of substantially all of our outstanding securities have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC on behalf of the underwriters, we and they will not, during the period ending 180 days after the date of this prospectus, or the restricted period:

 

    offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

 

    file any registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission relating to the offering of any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock; or

 

    enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

whether any such transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. In addition, we and each such person agrees that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC on behalf of the underwriters, we or such other person will not, during the restricted period, make any demand for, or exercise any right with respect to, the registration of any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock.

The restrictions described in the immediately preceding paragraph do not apply to our directors, officers and other holders of substantially all of our outstanding securities with respect to:

 

    the sale of securities pursuant to the underwriting agreement;

 

    the receipt by the security holder of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock upon the exercise of stock options; provided that such shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock are subject to the restrictions described above and that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made within 30 days after the date of this prospectus, and after such 30th day, any such public reports or filings shall clearly indicate in the footnotes thereto that (i) the filing relates to an exercise of a stock option, (ii) the shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock received upon exercise of the stock option are subject to a lock-up agreement and (iii) no securities were sold by the reporting person;

 

    transactions relating to shares of our Class A common stock or other securities acquired in open market transactions after the completion of this offering; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with subsequent sales of our Class A common stock or other securities acquired in such open market transactions;

 

   

transfers of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock (i) by

 

147


Table of Contents
 

bona fide gift, will or intestacy; (ii) to an immediate family member of the security holder or to a trust formed for the benefit of the security holder or of an immediate family member; (iii) if the security holder is a corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other business entity (A) to another corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other business entity that controls, is controlled by or is under common control with the security holder or (B) as part of a disposition, transfer or distribution without consideration by the security holder to its equity holders; or (iv) if the security holder is a trust, to a trustor or beneficiary of the trust; provided that, in the case of any such transfer or distribution, each transferee, donee or distributee shall sign and deliver a lock-up agreement and no public reports or filings reporting a reduction of beneficial ownership of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock will be required or voluntarily made during the restricted period;

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock to us pursuant to agreements under which we have the option to repurchase such securities or a right of first refusal with respect to transfers of such securities; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made within 30 days after the date of this prospectus, and after such 30th day, any such public reports or filings shall clearly indicate in the footnotes thereto that (i) such transfer of securities was solely to us pursuant to the circumstances described above and (ii) no securities were sold by the reporting person;

 

    the establishment of a trading plan pursuant to Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act for the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock, provided that (i) such plan does not provide for the transfer of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock during the restricted period and (ii) to the extent a public announcement or filing under the Exchange Act, if any, is required or voluntarily made regarding the establishment of such plan, such announcement or filing shall include a statement to the effect that no transfer of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock may be made under such plan during the restricted period;

 

    the conversion or reclassification of the outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock or other classes of our common stock into shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock; provided that such shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock remain subject to the terms of the lock-up agreement;

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock that occurs by order of a court of competent jurisdiction; provided that the transferee shall sign a lock-up agreement and no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with such transfer of securities pursuant to an order of a court of competent jurisdiction;

 

    the disposition after the completion of this offering of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock purchased from us pursuant to any employee stock purchase plan; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with subsequent sales of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock received pursuant to such employee stock purchase plan; or

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock after the closing of this offering pursuant to a bona fide third party tender offer, merger, consolidation or other similar transaction made to all holders of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock involving a change of control; provided that such transaction must be approved by our board of directors and, in the event that such transaction is not completed, our Class A common stock or Class B common stock owned by the security holder shall remain subject to the restrictions described above.

 

148


Table of Contents

The lock-up restrictions described in the foregoing do not apply solely to us with respect to:

 

    the shares of our Class A common stock to be sold by us in this offering;

 

    the issuance by us of shares of common stock upon the exercise of an option or warrant or the conversion of a security outstanding on the date hereof of which the underwriters have been advised in writing;

 

    the grant of options or the issuance of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock by us to our employees, officers, directors, advisors or consultants pursuant to employee benefit plans in effect on the date hereof and described in this prospectus or pursuant to an employee stock purchase plan described in this prospectus;

 

    the filing by us of a registration statement with the SEC on Form S-8 in respect of any shares issued under or the grant of any award pursuant to an employee benefit plan in effect on the date hereof and described in this prospectus; or

 

    the sale or issuance of or entry into an agreement to sell or issue shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock in connection with any (i) mergers, (ii) acquisition or securities, businesses, property or other assets, (iii) joint ventures, (iv) strategic alliances, (v) equipment leasing arrangements or (iv) debt financing; provided, that the aggregate number of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock (on an as-converted or as-exercised basis, as the case may be) that we may sell or issue or agree to sell or issue pursuant to this exception shall not exceed     % of the total number of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock issued and outstanding immediately following the completion of this offering, and provided further, that each recipient of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock pursuant to this exception shall execute a lock-up agreement.

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC, in their sole discretion, may release our Class A common stock or Class B common stock and other securities subject to the lock-up agreements described above in whole or in part at any time with or without notice; provided, however, that, at least two business days before the effective date of a release or waiver that is granted to our directors or officers of any lock-up agreement, we have agreed with the underwriters that we will announce the impending release or waiver in a publicly filed registration statement in connection with a secondary offering or through a major news service if Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC notify us of the impending release or waiver at least three business days before the effective date of such release or waiver, except where the release or waiver is effected solely to permit a transfer of securities that is not for consideration and where the transferee has agreed in writing to be bound by the same lock-up agreement terms in place for the director or officer.

In order to facilitate this offering of our Class A common stock, the underwriters may engage in transactions that stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the price of our Class A common stock. Specifically, the underwriters may sell more shares than they are obligated to purchase under the underwriting agreement, creating a short position. A short sale is covered if the short position is no greater than the number of shares available for purchase by the underwriters under the over-allotment option. The underwriters can close out a covered short sale by exercising the over-allotment option or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out a covered short sale, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the open market price of shares compared to the price available under the over-allotment option. The underwriters may also sell shares in excess of the over-allotment option, creating a naked short position. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of our Class A common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in this offering. As an

 

149


Table of Contents

additional means of facilitating this offering, the underwriters may bid for, and purchase, shares of our Class A common stock in the open market to stabilize the price of our Class A common stock. These activities may raise or maintain the market price of our Class A common stock above independent market levels or prevent or retard a decline in the market price of our Class A common stock. The underwriters are not required to engage in these activities and may end any of these activities at any time.

We and the underwriters have agreed to indemnify each other against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.

A prospectus in electronic format may be made available on websites maintained by one or more underwriters, or selling group members, if any, participating in this offering. The representatives may agree to allocate a number of shares of our Class A common stock to underwriters for sale to their online brokerage account holders. Internet distributions will be allocated by the representatives to underwriters that may make internet distributions on the same basis as other allocations.

The underwriters and their respective affiliates are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include securities trading, commercial and investment banking, financial advisory, investment management, investment research, principal investment, hedging, financing and brokerage activities. Certain of the underwriters and their respective affiliates have, from time to time, performed, and may in the future perform, various financial advisory and investment banking services for us, for which they received or will receive customary fees and expenses. One of the underwriters of this offering, Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, acted as private placement agent for our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing in 2012. In 2013, we entered into a credit facility with several banks, including affiliates of three of the underwriters of this offering (Morgan Stanley & Co LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC).

In addition, in the ordinary course of their various business activities, the underwriters and their respective affiliates may make or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade debt and equity securities (or related derivative securities) and financial instruments (including bank loans) for their own account and for the accounts of their customers and may at any time hold long and short positions in such securities and instruments. Such investment and securities activities may involve our securities and instruments. The underwriters and their respective affiliates may also make investment recommendations or publish or express independent research views in respect of such securities or instruments and may at any time hold, or recommend to clients that they acquire, long or short positions in such securities and instruments.

Pricing of the Offering

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price was determined by negotiations between us and the representatives. Among the factors considered in determining the initial public offering price were our future prospects and those of our industry in general, our sales, earnings and certain other financial and operating information in recent periods, and the price-earnings ratios, price-sales ratios, market prices of securities, and certain financial and operating information of companies engaged in activities similar to ours.

Selling Restrictions

European Economic Area

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a Relevant Member State) an offer to the public of any shares of our Class A common stock may not be made in that Relevant Member State, except that an offer to the public in that Relevant Member State of any shares of our Class A common stock may be made at any time under the following exemptions under the Prospectus Directive, if they have been implemented in that Relevant Member State:

(a) to any legal entity which is a qualified investor as defined in the Prospectus Directive;

 

150


Table of Contents

(b) to fewer than 100 or, if the Relevant Member State has implemented the relevant provision of the 2010 PD Amending Directive, 150, natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive), as permitted under the Prospectus Directive, subject to obtaining the prior consent of the representatives for any such offer; or

(c) in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, provided that no such offer of shares of our Class A common stock shall result in a requirement for the publication by us or any underwriter of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer to the public” in relation to any shares of our Class A common stock in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and any shares of our Class A common stock to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase any shares of our Class A common stock, as the same may be varied in that Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Member State, the expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC (and amendments thereto, including the 2010 PD Amending Directive, to the extent implemented in the Relevant Member State), and includes any relevant implementing measure in the Relevant Member State, and the expression “2010 PD Amending Directive” means Directive 2010/73/EU.

United Kingdom

Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:

(a) it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares of our Class A common stock in circumstances in which Section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to us; and

(b) it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares of our Class A common stock in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

Hong Kong

Shares of our Class A common stock may not be offered or sold by means of any document other than (i) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), or (ii) to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder, or (iii) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a “prospectus” within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), and no advertisement, invitation or document relating to shares of our Class A common stock may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to shares of our Class A common stock which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.

Japan

Shares of our Class A common stock have not been and will not be registered under the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan (the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law) and each underwriter has agreed that it will not offer or sell any shares of our Class A common stock, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to,

 

151


Table of Contents

or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan (which term as used herein means any person resident in Japan, including any corporation or other entity organized under the laws of Japan), or to others for re-offering or resale, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to a resident of Japan, except pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of, and otherwise in compliance with, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law and any other applicable laws, regulations and ministerial guidelines of Japan.

Singapore

This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of shares of our Class A common stock may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the shares of our Class A common stock be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore (the SFA), (ii) to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.

Where shares of our Class A common stock are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 by a relevant person which is: (a) a corporation (which is not an accredited investor) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or (b) a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary is an accredited investor, shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest in that trust shall not be transferable for 6 months after that corporation or that trust has acquired shares of our Class A common stock under Section 275 except: (1) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the SFA or to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA; (2) where no consideration is given for the transfer; or (3) by operation of law.

 

152


Table of Contents

LEGAL MATTERS

Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C., Palo Alto, California, which has acted as our counsel in connection with this offering, will pass upon the validity of the shares of our Class A common stock being offered by this prospectus. Goodwin Procter LLP, Menlo Park, California, has acted as counsel to the underwriters in connection with this offering.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements of Box, Inc. at January 31, 2013 and 2014, and for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month period ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014, appearing in this Prospectus and Registration Statement have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon such report given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus. This prospectus, which constitutes a part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement, some of which is contained in exhibits to the registration statement as permitted by the rules and regulations of the SEC. For further information with respect to us and our Class A common stock, we refer you to the registration statement, including the exhibits filed as a part of the registration statement. Statements contained in this prospectus concerning the contents of any contract or any other document are not necessarily complete. If a contract or document has been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, please see the copy of the contract or document that has been filed. Each statement is this prospectus relating to a contract or document filed as an exhibit is qualified in all respects by the filed exhibit. You may obtain copies of this information by mail from the Public Reference Section of the SEC, 100 F Street, N.E., Room 1580, Washington, D.C. 20549, at prescribed rates. You may obtain information on the operation of the public reference rooms by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains an internet website that contains reports, proxy statements, and other information about issuers, like us, that file electronically with the SEC. The address of that website is www.sec.gov.

As a result of this offering, we will become subject to the information and reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and, in accordance with this law, will file periodic reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. These periodic reports, proxy statements and other information will be available for inspection and copying at the SEC’s public reference facilities and the website of the SEC referred to above. We also maintain a website at www.box.com. Upon the completion of this offering, you may access these materials free of charge as soon as reasonably practicable after they are electronically filed with, or furnished to, the SEC. Information contained on our website is not a part of this prospectus and the inclusion of our website address in this prospectus is an inactive textual reference only.

 

153


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Consolidated Balance Sheets

     F-3   

Consolidated Statements of Operations

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Loss

     F-6   

Consolidated Statements of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders’ Deficit

     F-7   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     F-9   

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-11   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors and Stockholders of Box, Inc.

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Box, Inc. as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive loss, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ deficit, and cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. We were not engaged to perform an audit of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Box, Inc. at January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

San Francisco, California

March 24, 2014

 

F-2


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands, except per share data)

 

     January 31,
2013
     January 31,
2014
     April 30,
2014
     Pro Forma
April 30,
2014
 
                   (unaudited)  

ASSETS

           

Current assets:

           

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 127,625       $ 108,851       $ 79,266       $ 79,266   

Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $2,258, $3,376 and $3,376

     17,218         42,669         32,083         32,083   

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

     8,177         7,776         10,005         10,005   

Deferred commissions

     8,959         7,152         7,112         7,112   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total current assets

     161,979         166,448         128,466         128,466   

Property and equipment, net

     29,949         41,385         51,679         51,679   

Intangible assets, net

     830         6,567         5,871         5,871   

Goodwill

             8,081         8,081         8,081   

Other long-term assets

     3,034         12,948         14,140         14,140   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 195,792       $ 235,429       $ 208,237       $ 208,237   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

LIABILITIES, REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ (DEFICIT) EQUITY

           

Current liabilities:

           

Accounts payable

   $ 11,906       $ 12,405       $ 21,120       $ 21,120   

Accrued compensation and benefits

     3,899         16,098         12,786         12,786   

Accrued expenses and other current liabilities

     1,628         14,161         12,803         12,803   

Deferred revenue

     38,275         78,282         77,166         77,166   

Deferred rent

     504         1,213         1,106         1,106   

Debt

     968                           
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total current liabilities

     57,180         122,159         124,981         124,981   

Debt, non-current

     30,060         34,000         34,000         34,000   

Deferred revenue, non-current

     1,824         11,790         11,784         11,784   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

     2,869         1,346         1,613        

  

Deferred rent, non-current

     5,125         4,086         4,888         4,888   

Other long-term liabilities

     491         1,343         1,304         1,304   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     97,549         174,724         178,570         176,957   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-3


Table of Contents
     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
    April 30,
2014
    Pro Forma
April 30,
2014
 
                 (unaudited)  

Commitments and contingencies (Note 7)

        

Redeemable convertible preferred stock:

        

Redeemable convertible preferred stock, par value of $0.0001 per share; 71,546, 77,102 and 77,102 shares authorized as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and April 30, 2014 (unaudited); 69,999, 76,238 and 76,238 shares issued and outstanding with aggregate liquidation preference of $283,410, $384,423 and $384,423 as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and April 30, 2014 (unaudited); no shares issued and outstanding as of April 30, 2014, pro forma (unaudited)

   $ 281,899      $ 393,217      $ 393,260          

Stockholders’ (deficit) equity:

        

Class A and Class B Common stock, par value of $0.0001 per share; 132,300 (Class A 112,300, Class B 20,000), 145,856 (Class A 120,856, Class B 25,000) shares and 145,856 (Class A 120,856, Class B 25,000) shares authorized as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and April 30, 2014 (unaudited); 10,429 (Class A 9,672, Class B 757), 13,955 (Class A 11,024, Class B 2,931) and 14,796 (Class A 11,411, Class B 3,385) shares issued and outstanding as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and April 30, 2014 (unaudited) (including common stock subject to repurchase, see Note 12); 91,034 (no Class A or Class B, new Class B 91,034) shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as of April 30, 2014 (see Note 1) (unaudited)

     1        1        1        9   

Additional paid-in capital

     10,129        29,815        37,243        432,108   

Treasury stock (see Note 10)

     (1,177     (1,177     (1,177     (1,177

Accumulated other comprehensive income

            15        17        17   

Accumulated deficit

     (192,609     (361,166     (399,677     (399,677
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity

     (183,656     (332,512     (363,593     31,280   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ (deficit) equity

   $ 195,792      $ 235,429      $ 208,237      $ 208,237   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(In thousands, except per share data)

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
             2013     2014  
                             (unaudited)  

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192      $ 23,414      $ 45,330   

Cost of revenue

     6,873        850        14,280        25,974        4,561        9,228   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218        18,853        36,102   

Operating expenses:

            

Research and development

     14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967        9,439        14,898   

Sales and marketing

     36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188        33,936        47,440   

General and administrative

     13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843        8,261        11,546   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998        51,636        73,884   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780     (32,783     (37,782

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477     (693     (267

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     27        (1,764     (3,705     (548     (405

Other income (expense), net

     49        (8     116        (26     (9     7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988     (34,033     (38,447

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        15        59        (2,431     6        64   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557     (34,039     (38,511

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80     (9     (226     (341     (85     (43
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898   $ (34,124   $ (38,554
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89   $ (3.47   $ (2.81
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

     5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341        9,825        13,734   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

         $ (1.93     $ (0.43
        

 

 

     

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

           82,948          89,972   
        

 

 

     

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-5


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE LOSS

(In thousands)

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
             2013     2014  
                             (unaudited)  

Net loss

   $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,557   $ (34,039   $ (38,511

Changes in foreign currency translation adjustment*

                          15        (1     2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income (loss)

                          15        (1     2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive loss

   $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,542   $ (34,040   $ (38,509
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Tax effect was not material

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-6


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ DEFICIT

(In thousands)

 

     Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Class A and B
Common Stock
     Additional
Paid-In
Capital
    Treasury
Stock
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive

Income
     Accumulated
Deficit
    Total
Stockholders’

Deficit
 
     Shares      Amount      Shares      Amount              

Balance as of January 31, 2012

     58,324         130,893         6,359         1         1,595        (1,177             (80,046     (79,627

Issuance of Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash

     220         2,002                                                        

Issuance of Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $1,222

     11,455         148,778                                                        

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options

                     4,048                 1,022                              1,022   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                     22                 7,536                              7,536   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                     202                              202   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             226                         (226                           (226

Net loss

                                                           (112,563     (112,563
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     69,999         281,899         10,429         1         10,129        (1,177             (192,609     (183,656

Issuance of Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $36

     5,555         99,944                                                        

Issuance of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     423         6,669                                                        

Issuance of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     199         3,168                                                        

 

F-7


Table of Contents
     Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Class A and B
Common Stock
     Additional
Paid-In
Capital
    Treasury
Stock
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive

Income
     Accumulated
Deficit
    Total
Stockholders’

Deficit
 
     Shares      Amount      Shares      Amount              

Issuance of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     62         1,196                                                        

Issuance of common stock in connection with Crocodoc acquisition

                     813                 4,742                              4,742   

Issuance of common stock upon stock option
exercises

                     2,268                 2,077                              2,077   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                     395                 11,749                              11,749   

Issuance of common stock in connection with the purchase of intangible assets

                     50                 324                              324   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                     1,135                              1,135   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             341                         (341                           (341

Other comprehensive
income

                                                   15                15   

Net loss

                                                           (168,557     (168,557
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2014

     76,238       $ 393,217         13,955       $ 1       $ 29,815      $ (1,177   $ 15       $ (361,166   $ (332,512
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Issuance of common stock upon stock option exercises (unaudited)

                     818                 1,479                              1,479   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards (unaudited)

                     23                 5,752                              5,752   

Vesting of early exercised stock options (unaudited)

                                     240                              240   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value (unaudited)

             43                         (43                           (43

Other comprehensive income (unaudited)

                                                   2                2   

Net loss (unaudited)

                                                           (38,511     (38,511
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     76,238       $ 393,260         14,796       $ 1       $ 37,243      $ (1,177   $ 17       $ (399,677   $ (363,593
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-8


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(In thousands)

 

    Year
Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January  31
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
            2013     2014  
                            (unaudited)  

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:

           

Net loss

  $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,557   $ (34,039   $ (38,511

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash used in operating activities:

           

Depreciation and amortization

    2,838        443        8,616        17,867        2,731       
5,896
  

Stock-based compensation expense

    6,222        72        7,536        11,749        1,643        5,752   

Amortization of deferred commissions

    1,688        262        7,028        13,500        3,423        2,858   

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

    356        371        1,727        8,477        693        267   

Release of deferred tax valuation allowance

                         (2,590              

Other

    214        48        628        212        110       
157
  

Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of effects of acquisitions:

           

Accounts receivable

    (4,102     171        (11,499     (25,157     2,301        10,586   

Deferred commissions

    (3,108     (247     (14,027     (13,999     (1,935     (2,789

Prepaid expenses and other assets

    (7,478     (661     (2,028     (3,792     (2,580     (2,283

Accounts payable

    3,546        3,779        2,046        (3,177     129        1,314   

Accrued expenses and other liabilities

    3,048        (1,355     2,100        24,055        6,945        (6,288

Deferred rent

    3,467        264        1,755        (330     (198     695   

Deferred revenue

    9,307        248        26,930        49,973        4,975        (1,122
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash used in operating activities

    (34,273     (1,732     (81,751     (91,769     (15,802     (23,468

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:

           

Purchases of marketable securities

    (35,814                                   

Proceeds from maturity of marketable securities

    12,000        3,350        20,000                        

Purchases of property and equipment

    (13,467     (4,181     (19,499     (24,424     (4,335     (5,961

Investments in non-marketable equity securities

                  (125                     

Acquisition, net of cash acquired and purchases of intangible assets

    (1,012            (62     (7,761     (100       
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

    (38,293     (831     314        (32,185     (4,435     (5,961

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

           

Proceeds from borrowings, net of borrowing costs

    10,972               20,353        32,744                 

Principal payments on borrowings

    (341     (46     (577     (30,971     (153       

Proceeds from issuance of redeemable convertible preferred stock, net of issuance costs

    91,968               150,780        99,944                 

Proceeds from exercise of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

                         1,033                 

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

    250        22        2,241        3,003        485        1,577   

Payments of deferred offering costs

                         (588            (1,735
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

    102,849        (24     172,797        105,165        332        (158

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

                         15        (1     2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

    30,283        (2,587     91,360        (18,774     (19,906     (29,585

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period

    8,569        38,852        36,265        127,625        127,625        108,851   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of period

  $ 38,852      $ 36,265      $ 127,625      $ 108,851      $ 107,719      $ 79,266   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-9


Table of Contents
    Year
Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January  31
2014
     Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
             2013     2014  
                             (unaudited)  

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:

            

Cash paid for interest, including end of term fees and early payoff penalty

  $ 216      $ 37      $ 1,973      $ 3,461       $ 478      $ 206   

Cash paid for income taxes

    1               60        86         61        124   

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF NONCASH INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

            

Accrued equipment purchases

  $ 1,007      $ 557      $ 20      $ 2,768       $ (89   $ 9,533   

Issuance of common stock in connection with an acquisition and purchases of intangible assets

    6                      5,066                  

Vesting of early exercised stock options and restricted stock

    45        4        202        1,135         116        240   

Exchange of common stock with the investors for redeemable convertible preferred stock

    (897                                    

Unpaid deferred offering costs

                         1,755                (411

Issuance of preferred stock upon exercise of warrants

                         10,000                  

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-10


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

Note 1. Description of Business and Basis of Presentation

Description of Business

Box, Inc. was incorporated in the state of Washington in April 2005. We were reincorporated in the state of Delaware in March 2008. Further, we officially changed our name from Box.Net, Inc. to Box, Inc. in November 2011. We provide a cloud-based mobile optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally.

Basis of Presentation and Principles of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (U.S. GAAP) and include the consolidated accounts of Box, Inc. and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Change in Fiscal Year

We changed our fiscal year end from December 31 to January 31, commencing with our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013. As a result of the change, a one month transition period beginning January 1, 2012 and ending January 31, 2012 is presented in the consolidated financial statements.

Prior Period Reclassifications

Certain reclassifications of prior period amounts have been made to conform to the current period presentation.

Unaudited Pro Forma Balance Sheet

As of April 30, 2014, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all current outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock, and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering. Therefore, the April 30, 2014, unaudited pro forma consolidated balance sheet has been prepared assuming the conversion of the outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the shares related to the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of the new Class B common stock, the reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital related to the net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock, and the conversion of all of the outstanding shares of our existing Class A and Class B common stock into our new Class B common stock.

Unaudited Interim Consolidated Financial Information

The accompanying interim consolidated balance sheet as of April 30, 2014 and the consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive loss and cash flows for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, and the

 

F-11


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

consolidated statement of redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ deficit for the three months ended April 30, 2014, and the related footnote disclosures are unaudited. These unaudited interim financial statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In management’s opinion, the unaudited interim financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited financial statements and include all adjustments, which include only normal recurring adjustments, necessary for the fair presentation of our statement of financial position as of April 30, 2014 and our results of operations and cash flows for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014. The results for the three months ended April 30, 2014 are not necessarily indicative of the results expected for the full fiscal year or any other period.

Note 2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Use of Estimates

The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make, on an ongoing basis, estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported and disclosed in the financial statements and the accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from these estimates. Such estimates include, but are not limited to, the determination of the allowance for accounts receivable, the fair value of intangible assets, useful lives of intangible assets and property and equipment, fair values of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants, best estimate of selling price included in multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements, fair values of stock-based awards, and the provision for income taxes, including related reserves, among others. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions which management believes to be reasonable, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities.

Revenue Recognition

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and implementation services.

We recognize revenue when all of the following conditions are met:

 

    there is persuasive evidence of an arrangement;

 

    the service has been provided to the customer;

 

    the collection of fees is reasonably assured; and

 

    the amount of fees to be paid by the customer is fixed or determinable.

We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions.

In instances where we collect fees in advance of service delivery, revenue under the contract is deferred until we successfully deliver such services.

Subscription revenue is recognized ratably over the period of the subscription beginning once all requirements for revenue recognition have been met, including provisioning the service so that it is available to

 

F-12


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

our customers. Premier support is sold together with the subscription hosting services, and the term of the premier support is generally the same as the related subscription hosting services arrangement. Accordingly, we recognize premier support revenue in the same manner as the associated subscription hosting service. Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services and premier support services revenues were not material for all periods presented.

We assess collectability based on a number of factors, such as past collection history and creditworthiness of the customer. If management determines collectability is not reasonably assured, we defer revenue recognition until collectability becomes reasonably assured.

Our arrangements can include multiple elements which may consist of some or all of subscription services, premier support and professional services. When multiple-element arrangements exist, we evaluate whether these individual deliverables should be accounted for as separate units of accounting or one single unit of accounting.

In order to treat deliverables in a multiple-element arrangement as separate units of accounting, the delivered item or items must have standalone value upon delivery. A delivered item has standalone value to the customer when either (1) any vendor sells that item separately or (2) the customer could resell that item on a standalone basis. Our subscription hosting services have standalone value as such services are often sold separately. Our premier support services do not have standalone value because we and other vendors do not sell premier support services separately. Our professional services have stand-alone value because there are other vendors which sell the same professional services separately. Accordingly, we consider the separate units of accounting in our multiple deliverable arrangements to be the professional services, subscription services or a combined deliverable comprised of subscription hosting services and premier support services. When multiple deliverables included in an arrangement are separable into different units of accounting, the arrangement consideration is allocated to the identified separate units of accounting based on their relative selling price. Multiple-element arrangement accounting guidance provides a hierarchy to use when determining the relative selling price for each unit of accounting. Vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of selling price, based on the price at which the item is regularly sold by the vendor on a standalone basis, should be used if it exists. If VSOE of selling price is not available, third-party evidence (TPE) of selling price is used to establish the selling price if it exists. We have not established VSOE for our subscription services, premier support or professional services due to lack of pricing consistency, the introduction of new services and other factors. We have also concluded that third-party evidence of selling price is not a practical alternative due to differences in our service offerings compared to other parties and the availability of relevant third-party pricing information. Accordingly, we use our best estimate of selling price (BESP) to determine the relative selling price for our subscription, premier support and professional services offerings. For arrangements with multiple deliverables which can be separated into different units of accounting, we allocate the arrangement fee to the separate units of accounting based on our BESP. The amount of arrangement fee allocated is limited by contingent revenue, if any.

We determined BESP by considering our overall pricing objectives and market conditions. Significant pricing practices taken into consideration for our subscription hosting services, which may also include premier support, and professional services, include discounting practices, the size and volume of our transactions, the customer demographic, the geographic area where services are sold, price lists, our go-to-market strategy, historical standalone sales and contract prices. The determination of BESP is made through consultation with and approval by our management, taking into consideration the go-to-market strategy. As our go-to-market strategies evolve, we may modify our pricing practices in the future, which could result in changes in relative selling prices.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Cost of Revenue

Cost of revenue consists primarily of costs related to providing our subscription services to our paying customers, including employee compensation and related expenses for datacenter operations, customer support and professional services personnel, payments to outside technology service providers, depreciation of servers and equipment, security services and other tools, as well as amortization of acquired technology.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions consist of direct incremental costs paid to our sales force associated with non-cancellable terms of the related contracts. The deferred commission amounts are recoverable through future revenue streams under the non-cancellable customer contracts. Direct sales commissions are deferred when earned and amortized over the same period that revenue is recognized for the related non-cancellable subscription period. Amortization of deferred commissions is included in sales and marketing expense in the consolidated statements of operations.

We deferred sales commissions costs of $3.1 million, $247,000, $14.0 million, and $14.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and amortized $1.7 million, $262,000, $7.0 million, and $13.5 million of deferred commissions during the same periods. We deferred sales commissions costs of $1.9 million and $2.8 million during the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, and amortized $3.4 million and $2.9 million of deferred commissions during the same periods.

Deferred Revenue

Deferred revenue consists of billings and payments received in advance of revenue recognition generated by our subscription services, premier customer support and professional services described above. For these services, we typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Accordingly, the deferred revenue balance does not represent the total contract value of annual or multiyear, non-cancellable subscription contracts.

Certain Risks and Concentrations

Our financial instruments that are exposed to concentrations of credit risk consist primarily of cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities and accounts receivable. Although we deposit our cash with multiple financial institutions, our deposits, at times, may exceed federally insured limits.

We sell to a broad range of customers. Our revenue is derived substantially from the U.S. across a multitude of industries. Accounts receivable are derived from the delivery of our services to customers primarily located in the U.S. We accept and settle our accounts receivable using credit cards, electronic payments and checks. A majority of our lower dollar value invoices are settled by credit card on or near the date of the invoice. We do not require collateral from customers to secure accounts receivable. We maintain an allowance for accounts receivable based upon the expected collectability, which takes into consideration specific customer creditworthiness and current economic trends. We believe collections of our accounts receivable are reasonably assured based on the size, industry diversification, financial condition and past transaction history of our customers. We had one customer that individually accounted for 17% of our total accounts receivable balance as of January 31, 2013. As of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, no single customer accounted for more than 10% of total accounts receivable. No single customer represented over 10% of revenue for any of the periods presented in the consolidated statements of operations.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

We serve our customers and users from datacenter facilities operated by third parties. In order to reduce the risk of down time of our enterprise cloud content management services, we have established datacenters in various locations in the United States. We have internal procedures to restore services in the event of disaster at one of our current datacenter facilities. Even with these procedures for disaster recovery in place, our cloud services could be significantly interrupted during the implementation of the procedures to restore services.

Foreign Currency Translation and Transactions

The functional currency of our principal foreign subsidiaries is generally the U.S. dollar. Adjustments resulting from translating foreign functional currency financial statements into U.S. dollars for those entities that do not have U.S. dollars as their functional currency are recorded as part of a separate component of the consolidated statements of comprehensive loss. Foreign currency transaction gains and losses are included in the consolidated statements of operations for the period. All assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are translated into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate on the balance sheet date. Revenue and expenses are translated at the average exchange rate during the period. Equity transactions are translated using historical exchange rates. Translation adjustments at the balance sheet dates were not material. Transaction gains and losses recognized were not material for all periods presented.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

We consider all highly liquid investments with an initial maturity of 90 days or less at the date of purchase to be cash equivalents. We maintain such funds in overnight cash deposits.

Restricted Cash

Restricted cash is comprised of certificates of deposit related to our credit card processing and leases. These restricted cash balances have been excluded from our cash and cash equivalents balance and are classified as part of prepaid expenses and other current assets and other long-term assets on our consolidated balance sheets. The amount of restricted cash as of January 31, 2013 was $3.9 million, of which $1.5 million was classified as current and $2.4 million was classified as non-current. The amount of restricted cash as of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014 was $3.9 million and $4.2 million, which was classified as non-current.

Marketable Securities

Our marketable securities consisted of short-term investment-grade corporate securities. We classify our marketable securities as available-for-sale at the time of purchase and reevaluate such classification as of each balance sheet date. All marketable securities are recorded at their estimated fair value. Unrealized gains and losses for available-for-sale securities are recorded in other comprehensive income (loss). We evaluate our investments to assess whether those with unrealized loss positions are other than temporarily impaired. We consider impairments to be other than temporary if they are related to deterioration in credit risk or if it is likely we will sell the securities before the recovery of their cost basis. Realized gains and losses and declines in value deemed to be other than temporary are determined based on the specific identification method and are reported in other income (expense), net in the consolidated statements of operations. Gross realized gains and losses on marketable securities were not material for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the year ended January 31, 2013. We held no marketable securities during the year ended January 31, 2014 or the three months ended April 30, 2014.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Our financial assets and financial liabilities which include cash equivalents, marketable securities and redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants are measured and recorded at fair value on a recurring basis. We measure certain other assets including our non-marketable equity securities at fair value on a nonrecurring basis when they are deemed to be other-than-temporarily impaired. Our other current financial assets and our other current financial liabilities have fair values which approximate their carrying value due to their short term maturities.

Accounts Receivable and Related Allowance

Accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amounts and do not bear interest. We maintain an allowance for estimated losses inherent in our accounts receivable portfolio. We assess the collectability of the accounts by taking into consideration the aging of our trade receivables, historical experience, and management judgment. We write off trade receivables against the allowance when management determines a balance is uncollectible and no longer actively pursues collection of the receivable.

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets, generally two to three years. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the remaining lease term, generally three to five years. Depreciation commences once the asset is placed in service. Construction in progress is primarily related to the construction or development of property and equipment which have not yet been placed in service for their intended use.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets, Intangible Assets, and Goodwill

We review our long-lived assets, including property and equipment, and finite-lived intangible assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. We measure the recoverability of these assets by comparing the carrying amounts to the future undiscounted cash flows the assets are expected to generate. If the total of the future undiscounted cash flows is less than the carrying amount of an asset, we record an impairment charge for the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its fair market value. There have been no impairment charges recorded in any of the periods presented in the consolidated financial statements.

Intangible assets consist primarily of developed technology and trade names and are carried at cost and amortized on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives, which is generally two to seven years.

In addition, we test our goodwill for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate this asset may be impaired. These tests are based on our single operating segment and reporting unit structure. No indications of impairment of goodwill were noted during the year ended January 31, 2014.

Research and Development Costs

Research and development costs include personnel costs, including stock-based compensation expense, associated with our engineering personnel and consultants responsible for the design, development and testing of

 

F-16


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

the product, depreciation of equipment used in research and development and allocated facilities and information technology costs. Research and development costs are expensed as incurred.

Internal-Use Software Costs

We capitalize costs to develop software for internal use incurred during the application development stage. Costs related to preliminary project activities and post implementation activities are expensed as incurred. Once an application has reached the development stage, management has authorized and committed to the funding of the software project, it is probable the project will be completed and the software will be used to perform the function intended, internal and external costs, if direct and incremental, are capitalized until the application is substantially complete and ready for its intended use. There were no material qualifying costs incurred during the application development stage in any of the periods presented.

Advertising Costs

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and are included in sales and marketing expense. Advertising costs for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, were $8.8 million, $1.2 million, $20.1 million, $25.0 million, $5.0 million and $6.2 million.

Stock-Based Compensation

We determine the fair value of our stock options issued to employees on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model, which is impacted by the fair value of our common stock, as well as changes in assumptions regarding a number of highly complex and subjective variables. These variables include, but are not limited to, the expected common stock price volatility over the term of the option awards, the expected term of the awards, risk-free interest rates and the expected dividend yield. The fair value of restricted stock awards and restricted stock units is determined by the estimated fair value of our common stock at the time of grant.

We recognize compensation expense for our stock based awards on a straight-line basis over the period during which an employee is required to provide services in exchange for the award (generally the vesting period of the award). Stock-based compensation expense is recognized only for those awards expected to vest. We estimate future forfeitures at the date of grant and revise the estimates, if necessary, in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from those estimates.

Compensation expense for stock options issued to nonemployees is calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model and is recorded over the service performance period. Options subject to vesting are required to be periodically remeasured over their service performance period, which is generally the same as the vesting period.

Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

We account for freestanding warrants to purchase shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock as a liability on the consolidated balance sheets. The redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants are recorded as a liability because the underlying shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock are optionally redeemable and, therefore, may obligate us to transfer assets at some point in the future. The warrants are recorded at fair value upon issuance and are subject to remeasurement to fair value at each balance sheet date, with any change in fair value

 

F-17


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

recognized as a separate line item on the consolidated statements of operations. We recognized remeasurement losses of $356,000, $371,000, $1.7 million, $8.5 million, $693,000 and $267,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. We will continue to adjust the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to its estimated fair value at each reporting period until the earlier of the (i) exercise of the warrants, (ii) expiration of the warrants, or (iii) other triggering events as applicable to the terms of the warrant agreements (see Note 11 for additional information).

Income Taxes

We account for income taxes under the asset and liability method, which requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities for the temporary differences between the financial statement and tax basis of assets and liabilities using the enacted tax rates in effect for the years in which the differences are expected to reverse. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in income tax rates is recognized in the consolidated statements of operations in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amounts we believe is more likely than not to be realized.

We recognize tax benefits from uncertain tax positions only if we believe that it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such positions are then measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than 50% likelihood of being realized upon settlement.

Recent Accounting Pronouncement

On May 28, 2014, the FASB issued ASU 2014-09 regarding ASC Topic 606,  Revenue from Contracts with Customers . The standard provides principles for recognizing revenue for the transfer of promised goods or services to customers with the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The standard will be effective for our fiscal year beginning February 1, 2017. Early adoption is not permitted. We are currently evaluating the impact of this standard.

Note 3. Fair Value Measurements

We define fair value as the exchange price that would be received from selling an asset or paid to transfer a liability in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability in an orderly transaction between market participants on the measurement date. We measure our financial assets and liabilities at fair value at each reporting period using a fair value hierarchy which requires us to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. A financial instrument’s classification within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement. Three levels of inputs may be used to measure fair value:

 

    Level 1—Observable inputs are unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

 

    Level 2—Observable inputs are quoted prices for similar assets and liabilities in active markets or inputs other than quoted prices which are observable for the assets or liabilities, either directly or indirectly through market corroboration, for substantially the full term of the financial instruments.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

    Level 3—Unobservable inputs which are supported by little or no market activity and which are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities. These inputs are based on our own assumptions used to measure assets and liabilities at fair value and require significant management judgment or estimation.

We measure our marketable securities, restricted cash and redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability at fair value on a recurring basis. We classify our marketable securities and restricted cash within Level 2 because they are valued using inputs other than quoted prices which are directly or indirectly observable in the market, including readily-available pricing sources for the identical underlying security which may not be actively traded. We classify our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants within Level 3 because they are valued using valuation techniques using certain inputs which are unobservable in the market.

The following tables set forth the fair value of our financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 and April 30, 2014 using the above input categories (in thousands):

 

     As of January 31, 2013  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3     Fair Value  

Assets

          

Restricted cash:

          

Certificate of deposit

   $       $ 3,928       $      $ 3,928   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets measured at fair value

   $       $ 3,928       $      $ 3,928   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liability

          

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $       $       $ (2,869   $ (2,869
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities measured at fair value

   $       $       $ (2,869   $ (2,869
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     As of January 31, 2014  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3     Fair Value  

Assets

          

Restricted cash:

          

Certificate of deposit

   $       $ 3,909       $      $ 3,909   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets measured at fair value

   $       $ 3,909       $      $ 3,909   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liability

          

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $       $       $ (1,346   $ (1,346
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities measured at fair value

   $         $       $ (1,346   $ (1,346
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-19


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

     As of April 30, 2014  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3     Fair Value  
     (unaudited)  

Assets

          

Restricted cash:

          

Certificate of deposit

   $       $ 4,236       $      $ 4,236   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets measured at fair value

   $       $ 4,236       $      $ 4,236   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liability

          

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $       $       $ (1,613   $ (1,613
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities measured at fair value

   $         $       $ (1,613   $ (1,613
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Fair Value of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

To determine the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants, we first derive the business enterprise value (BEV) of the Company using the income approach and market comparable approach valuation methods. When applicable due to recent valuation events, such as a redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, the prior sale of company stock method is utilized. Once we determined an estimated BEV, we utilized the option pricing method (OPM) to allocate the BEV to the various classes of the Company’s equity, including the Company’s preferred stock. Once the per share value of preferred stock was determined, we used this concluded per share value as the fair value of the shares input within the Black-Scholes option pricing model that was utilized to determine the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants. In addition to the fair value of the shares input, the Black-Scholes option pricing model includes assumptions related to the exercise price, expected volatility, expected term, risk-free interest rate, and the expected dividend yield. The estimated expected volatility was based on the volatility of common stock of a group of comparable, publicly-traded companies. The estimated expected term was based on the estimated time to liquidity event. The risk-free interest rate was based on the U.S. Treasury yield for a term consistent with the estimated expected term. The significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability are the fair value of the underlying stock at the valuation date, the expected volatility, and the estimated term of the warrants. Generally, increases (decreases) in the fair value of the underlying stock, expected volatility and expected term would result in a directionally similar impact to the fair value measurement.

The following table provides a roll-forward of the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants categorized as Level 3 (in thousands):

 

Balance at December 31, 2011

   $ 771   

Remeasurement

     371   
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2012

     1,142   

Remeasurement

     1,727   
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2013

     2,869   

Remeasurement

     8,477   

Exercise of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     (10,000
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2014

     1,346   

Remeasurement (unaudited)

     267   
  

 

 

 

Balance at April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

   $ 1,613   
  

 

 

 

 

F-20


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

At each reporting date, we remeasure the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liabilities to fair value using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

     As of
December 31,
2011
    As of
January 31,
2013
    As of
January 31,
2014
    As of
April 30,
2014
 
                       (unaudited)  

Series A:

        

Expected term (in years)

     4.8        3.7        2.7        2.5   

Risk-free interest rate

     0.8     0.5     0.6-0.7     0.5-0.7

Expected volatility

     57     44     40     40

Dividend rate

     0     0     0     0

Series B(1):

        

Expected term (in years)

     2.6-3.4        1.5-2.3                 

Risk-free interest rate

     0.3-0.5     0.0-0.3              

Expected volatility

     45-57     45-47              

Dividend rate

     0     0              

Series C(1):

        

Expected term (in years)

     6.0        4.9                 

Risk-free interest rate

     1.1     0.9              

Expected volatility

     56     52              

Dividend rate

     0     0              

Series D-1(1):

        

Expected term (in years)

     6.6        5.6                 

Risk-free interest rate

     1.3     1.0              

Expected volatility

     55     53              

Dividend rate

     0     0              

 

(1) In January 2014, all outstanding warrants to purchase Series B, Series C and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercised. The related preferred stock warrant liability was remeasured to fair value at the exercise date, and the remaining liability along with the proceeds received upon exercise were reclassified to redeemable convertible preferred stock.

Note 4. Balance Sheet Components

Prepaid Expenses and Other Current Assets

Prepaid expenses and other current assets consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
     January 31,
2014
     April 30,
2014
 
                  

(unaudited)

 

Prepaid expenses and deposits

   $ 5,094       $ 5,717       $ 7,654   

Restricted cash

     1,500                   

Other receivables

     1,583         2,059         2,351   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total prepaid expenses and other current assets

   $ 8,177       $ 7,776       $ 10,005   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-21


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment, net consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
    April 30,
2014
 
                 (unaudited)  

Servers

   $ 22,254      $ 49,168      $ 52,373   

Computer hardware and software

     3,086        5,792        6,403   

Furniture and fixtures

     3,427        4,388        4,416   

Leasehold improvements

     7,483        9,486        9,486   

Construction in progress

     7,031        1,763        13,413   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total property and equipment

     43,281        70,597        86,091   

Less: accumulated depreciation

     (13,332     (29,212     (34,412
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total property and equipment, net

   $ 29,949      $ 41,385      $ 51,679   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation expense related to property and equipment was $2.7 million, $429,000, $8.4 million, $15.9 million, $2.7 million and $5.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Construction in progress primarily consists of servers, networking equipment and storage infrastructure being provisioned in our third party datacenter hosting facilities as well as leasehold improvements. In addition, the amounts of interest capitalized to property and equipment were $107,000, $56,000, $585,000, $284,000, $173,000 and $89,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

Note 5. Acquisition

On May 19, 2013, we acquired all outstanding common stock of Crocodoc, Inc. (Crocodoc), a privately-held company which provides HTML5 document rendering and viewing solutions to enterprise customers, for total purchase consideration of $13.2 million ($8.5 million in cash and $4.7 million in our common stock). The acquisition is expected to enhance our Box service by embedding Crocodoc’s technology into our platform, along with gaining access to Crocodoc’s engineering team. The acquisition has been accounted for as a business combination. Of the $13.2 million total purchase price, $790,000 was cash acquired, $7.0 million was attributed to developed technology, $8.1 million to goodwill, $222,000 to net assets acquired, $311,000 to income taxes payable which was included in other long-term liabilities, and $2.6 million to deferred tax liability. Goodwill is primarily attributable to the enhancement of the Box user experience, expected synergies arising from the acquisition and the value of acquired personnel. Goodwill is not deductible for tax purposes. Developed technology is being amortized on a straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of three years. Transaction costs were approximately $280,000, which were recorded as general and administrative expense as incurred. Also, in connection with the acquisition, we loaned $844,000 to certain selling shareholders in exchange for full recourse notes, which were classified as other long-term assets on the consolidated balance sheet.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Results of operations for this acquisition have been included in our consolidated statements of operations since the acquisition date and were not material. Pro forma results of operations for this acquisition have not been presented because they were also not material to the consolidated results of operations.

Note 6. Intangible Assets

Intangible assets consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     Weighted
Average Useful
Life (1)
   Gross Value      Accumulated
Amortization
    Net Carrying
Value
 

January 31, 2013

          

Trade names

   6.9 years    $ 1,201       $ (371   $ 830   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets, net

      $ 1,201       $ (371   $ 830   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

January 31, 2014

          

Developed technology

   3.0 years    $ 7,724       $ (1,813   $ 5,911   

Trade names

   6.9 years      1,201         (545     656   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets, net

      $ 8,925       $ (2,358   $ 6,567   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

          

Developed technology

   3.0 years    $ 7,724       $ (2,467   $ 5,257   

Trade names and other

   6.9 years      1,201         (587     614   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets, net

      $ 8,925       $ (3,054   $ 5,871   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) From the date of acquisition

Intangible amortization expense was $165,000, $14,000, $176,000, $2.0 million, $55,000 and $696,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Amortization of purchased technology is included in cost of revenue and amortization for trade names is included in general and administrative expenses in the consolidated statements of operations. As of April 30, 2014, expected amortization expense for intangible assets for each of the next five years and thereafter was as follows (in thousands):

 

Fiscal years ending January 31:

  

Remainder of 2015

     2,087   

2016

     2,687   

2017

     919   

2018

     154   

2019

     23   

Thereafter

     1   
  

 

 

 
   $ 5,871   
  

 

 

 

 

F-23


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Note 7. Commitments and Contingencies

Letters of Credit

At January 31, 2014, we had letters of credit in the amount of $2.4 million in connection with our facility leases. These letters of credit renew annually and mature at various dates through December 1, 2018. These letters of credit are collateralized by certain certificates of deposit held by us in the amount of $2.4 million.

Operating Leases

We have entered into various non-cancellable operating lease agreements for certain of our offices and datacenters with lease periods expiring primarily between fiscal 2015 and 2019. Certain of these arrangements have free or escalating rent payment provisions and optional renewal clauses. We are also committed to pay a portion of the actual operating expenses under certain of these lease agreements. These operating expenses are not included in the table below. As of January 31, 2014, future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows (in thousands):

 

Years ending January 31:

  

2015

     7,517   

2016

     6,220   

2017

     5,571   

2018

     5,219   

2019

     2,767   
  

 

 

 
   $ 27,294   
  

 

 

 

We recognize rent expense under our operating leases on a straight-line basis. Rent expense totaled $2.4 million, $420,000, $4.1 million, $5.3 million, $1.2 million and $1.4 million, net of sublease income of $27,000, $9,000, $1.5 million, $1.1 million, $439,000 and $437,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

We establish assets and liabilities for the present value of estimated future costs to return certain of our leased facilities to their original condition. Such assets are depreciated over the lease period into operating expense, and the recorded liabilities are accreted to the future value of the estimated restoration costs. As of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and April 30, 2014, we had such asset retirement obligations in the amount of $311,000, $459,000, and $466,000, which is included in other noncurrent liabilities in the consolidated balance sheets.

Purchase Obligations

At January 31, 2014, we had $18.8 million of non-cancellable contractual purchase obligations related primarily to datacenter operations and sales activities.

Legal Matters

On June 5, 2013, Open Text S.A. (Open Text) filed a lawsuit against us, alleging that our core cloud software and Box Edit application infringe 12 patents of Open Text. Open Text is seeking preliminary and permanent injunctions against infringement, treble damages, and attorney’s fees. On August 1, 2013, we filed an answer to Open Text’s complaint, which denied that we infringed Open Text’s patents and asserted that Open Text’s patents

 

F-24


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

were invalid. On the same date, we also filed a motion to transfer the case to the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. On September 13, 2013, Open Text filed a motion for preliminary injunction seeking to enjoin us from providing our Box Edit feature to companies with more than 100 users. On September 28, 2013, we filed papers in opposition to Open Text’s motion for preliminary injunction. On October 18, 2013, the Virginia court granted our motion to transfer and the case was transferred to the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. Discovery commenced on February 6, 2014. On April 9, 2014, the California court denied Open Text’s motion for preliminary injunction, finding that (1) Open Text failed to meet its burden to show irreparable harm, (2) Open Text failed to show a reasonable likelihood of success on the merits of its case, and (3) we have raised a substantial question as to the validity of the patents asserted during the preliminary injunction proceedings. We intend to defend the lawsuit vigorously. This litigation is still in its early stages and the final outcome, including our liability, if any, with respect to Open Text’s claims, is uncertain. At present, we are unable to estimate a reasonably possible range of loss, if any, that may result from this matter. If an unfavorable outcome were to occur in this litigation, the impact could be material to our business, financial condition, or results of operations.

In addition, from time to time, we have become involved in claims and other legal matters arising in the ordinary course of business. We investigate these claims as they arise. Although claims are inherently unpredictable, we currently are not aware of any matters that may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

We accrue estimates for resolution of legal and other contingencies when losses are probable and estimable. From time to time, we are a party to litigation and subject to claims incident to the ordinary course of business, including intellectual property claims, labor and employment claims, and threatened claims, breach of contract claims, and other matters.

Although the results of litigation and claims are inherently unpredictable, we believe there was not at least a reasonable possibility that we had incurred a material loss with respect to such loss contingencies, as of January 31, 2013 and 2014.

Indemnification

We include service level commitments to our customers warranting certain levels of uptime reliability and performance and permitting those customers to receive credits in the event that we fail to meet those levels. In addition, our customer contracts often include (i) specific obligations that we maintain the availability of the customer’s data through our service and that we secure customer content against unauthorized access or loss, and (ii) indemnity provisions whereby we indemnify our customers for third-party claims asserted against them that result from our failure to maintain the availability of their content or securing the same from unauthorized access or loss. To date, we have not incurred any material costs as a result of such commitments.

Our arrangements generally include certain provisions for indemnifying customers against liabilities if our products or services infringe a third party’s intellectual property rights. It is not possible to determine the maximum potential amount under these indemnification obligations due to the limited history of prior indemnification claims and the unique facts and circumstances involved in each particular agreement. To date, we have not incurred any material costs as a result of such obligations and have not accrued any liabilities related to such obligations in the consolidated financial statements. In addition, we indemnify our officers, directors and certain key employees while they are serving in good faith in their respective capacities. To date, there have been no claims under any indemnification provisions.

Note 8. Debt

In December 2010, as amended in January 2011, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc. (Hercules) (the Hercules 2010 Agreement) with a maturity date of

 

F-25


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

December 31, 2014. Under this agreement, equipment loans of up to $3.0 million and a growth capital loan of up to $7.0 million were available for draw through October 31, 2011, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) the prime rate on the date of the draw as reported by the Wall Street Journal plus 5.25%, and (b) 8.50%. With respect to equipment loans, the Hercules 2010 Agreement has an end of term payment of 5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. In March 2011, we drew equipment loan borrowings of $1.6 million at an interest rate of 8.50%. Principal payments of $577,000, $968,000 and $153,000 were made during the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2010 Agreement, we granted Hercules a security interest in all equipment financed under the Hercules 2010 Agreement and issued warrants to purchase 199,219 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock (See Note 11). Separately, in March 2011, Hercules purchased 158,133 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share.

In August 2011, as amended in March 2012, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules (the Hercules 2011 Agreement) with a maturity date of March 1, 2016. Under this agreement, equipment loans of up to $10.0 million were available for draw through June 30, 2012, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) 7.5% plus the prime rate as reported in The Wall Street Journal minus 3.75%, and (b) 7.5%. In addition, there was an end of term payment of 2.5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. Under the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we drew equipment loan borrowings of $4.8 million, $4.8 million and $353,000 at an interest rate of 7.5% in September 2011, December 2011, and April 2012. No principal payments were made in the year ended January 31, 2013 or the three months ended April 30, 2013. Principal payments of $10.0 million were made during the year ended January 31, 2014. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we granted Hercules a security interest in all equipment financed under the agreement and issued warrants to purchase 62,255 shares of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock (See Note 11). Separately, in September 2011, Hercules purchased 124,511 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share.

In March 2012, as amended in June 2012, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules (the Hercules 2012 Agreement) with a maturity date of July 1, 2016. Under this agreement, growth capital loans of up to $20.0 million were available for draw through June 30, 2012, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) 8.875% plus the prime rate as reported in The Wall Street Journal minus 3.75%, and (b) 8.875%. Under the Hercules 2012 Agreement, we had an end of term payment of 4.5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. In March 2012, May 2012, and June 2012, we drew loan borrowings of $5.0 million, $5.0 million and $10.0 million at an interest rate of 8.375%. No principal payments were made in the year ended January 31, 2013 or the three months ended April 30, 2013. Principal payment of $20.0 million was made during the year ended January 31, 2014. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2012 Agreement, we granted the lender a security interest in all equipment financed under the agreement and all of our patents, patent applications, copyrights, trademarks and trademark applications. Separately, in March 2012, Hercules purchased 220,751 shares of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share.

The Hercules Agreements discussed above provided certain financial-related covenants, among others, relating to delivery of audited financial statements to Hercules. We received waivers from Hercules for not complying with the covenants and accordingly did not change the classification of the related Notes Payable to short term at January 31, 2013. We were not otherwise in default on the loan. In conjunction with the Hercules loans, we incurred interest expense of $235,000, $43,000, $1.9 million, $3.0 million and $661,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013. During the respective periods, we capitalized $107,000, $56,000, $585,000, $200,000 and $173,000 of interest costs. Interest expense consists of offering costs, including the amortization of the initial fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants issued in connection

 

F-26


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

with obtaining the loan, and amortization of end of term payments, commitment and legal and facility fees, as appropriate, over the related term of the loan using the effective interest rate method.

In August 2013, we repaid the Hercules loans in conjunction with entering into a line of credit agreement discussed below. Accordingly, the related remaining unamortized debt issuance and end of term fees, along with the early pay off penalty, of $1.4 million was expensed immediately and was included in interest income (expense), net in the consolidated statement of operations.

Line of Credit

In August 2013, we entered into a two-year $100.0 million secured revolving credit facility. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars and, depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) plus 3.0% or the Alternate Base Rate (ABR) plus 2.0%. In addition, there is a commitment fee of 0.5% on outstanding unused commitment amount. At closing, we drew $34.0 million at 3.4% (six month Libor plus 3.0%) which we used to repay the outstanding Hercules loans and the related early payoff and end of term fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. Borrowings under the line of credit are collateralized by substantially all of our assets. The credit facility also contains various covenants, including covenants related to the delivery of financial and other information, the maintenance of quarterly financial covenants, material adverse effects, as well as limitations on dispositions, mergers or consolidations and other corporate activities. As of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, we were in compliance with all financial covenants.

In connection with the line of credit, we incurred interest expense of $946,000 and $523,000 for the year ended January 31, 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2014. During the same periods, we capitalized $84,000 and $89,000 of interest costs. Interest expense also includes amortization of issuance costs and unused commitment fees which are recognized over the related term of the borrowing. In July 2014, we drew an additional $12.0 million under the credit facility at 3.3% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%).

Note 9. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock

Our redeemable convertible preferred stock is issuable in series. As of January 31, 2013 and 2014 and April 30, 2014, we had outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock (individually referred to as Series A, B, C, D, D-1, D-2, E or E-1) as follows (in thousands, except for share data):

 

     As of January 31, 2013  

Series

   Number of
Shares
Authorized
     Number of
Shares Issued
and Outstanding
     Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
     Carrying Value  

A

     5,315,560         5,228,420       $ 1,500       $ 1,475   

B

     20,331,812         19,908,882         13,110         13,055   

C

     14,261,720         14,062,501         18,000         17,937   

D

     11,954,837         11,954,837         37,800         37,723   

D-1

     3,922,103         3,859,848         31,000         30,899   

D-2

     3,529,927         3,529,927         32,000         31,910   

E

     12,230,000         11,454,838         150,000         148,900   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     71,545,959         69,999,253       $ 283,410       $ 281,899   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-27


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

     As of January 31, 2014  

Series

   Number of
Shares
Authorized
     Number of
Shares Issued
and Outstanding
     Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
     Carrying Value  

A

     5,315,560         5,228,420       $ 1,500       $ 1,481   

B

     20,331,812         20,331,812         13,388         19,738   

C

     14,261,720         14,261,720         18,255         21,121   

D

     11,954,837         11,954,837         37,800         37,740   

D-1

     3,922,103         3,922,103         31,500         32,118   

D-2

     3,529,927         3,529,927         32,000         31,930   

E

     12,230,000         11,454,838         150,000         149,143   

E-1

     5,556,000         5,554,440         99,980         99,946   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     77,101,959         76,238,097       $ 384,423       $ 393,217   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     As of April 30, 2014  

Series

   Number of
Shares
Authorized
     Number of
Shares Issued
and Outstanding
     Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
     Carrying Value  
     (unaudited)  

A

     5,315,560         5,228,420       $ 1,500       $ 1,481   

B

     20,331,812         20,331,812         13,388         19,740   

C

     14,261,720         14,261,720         18,255         21,123   

D

     11,954,837         11,954,837         37,800         37,742   

D-1

     3,922,103         3,922,103         31,500         32,121   

D-2

     3,529,927         3,529,927         32,000         31,933   

E

     12,230,000         11,454,838         150,000         149,173   

E-1

     5,556,000         5,554,440         99,980         99,947   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     77,101,959         76,238,097       $ 384,423       $ 393,260   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accretion of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock

Stock issuance costs incurred related to our redeemable convertible preferred stock are being accreted using the effective interest method via a charge to additional paid in capital over the period from issuance date to the date at which the redeemable convertible preferred stock becomes redeemable at the option of the holders.

The holders of our redeemable convertible preferred stock have the following rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions:

Voting Rights

Each holder of Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1, Series D-2, and Series E (collectively, the “Voting Preferred”) will have the same voting rights as the holders of Class A common stock, and the holders of Class A common stock and Voting Preferred will vote together as a single class on all matters except as discussed below. Holders of Series E-1 have no voting rights. Each holder of Voting Preferred has voting rights equal to the number of shares of Class A common stock into which the shares of Voting Preferred held by such holder are then convertible. Until the redeemable convertible preferred stock is converted to Class A common stock, (a) the holders of Series A, Series B, Series C and Series E are each entitled to elect one member to the

 

F-28


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Board; (b) the holders of Class A common stock are entitled to elect two members to the Board, and (c) the holders of Voting Preferred and Class A common stock, voting together as a single class, are entitled to elect all other members of the Board. Following conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock into Class A common stock, the holders of Class A common stock will be entitled to elect all the members of the Board.

Redemption

The holders of not less than sixty-six and two-thirds percent (66  2 3 %) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as a separate class, may require us to redeem all of the outstanding shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock in three equal annual installments beginning at any time after August 7, 2017; provided that the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E shall be required to redeem the shares of Series E. We are obligated to pay in cash a sum equal to the original issue price per share of each series of redeemable convertible preferred stock (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, or recapitalizations) plus all accrued or declared and unpaid dividends with respect to such shares.

The number of shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock that we are required to redeem on any one redemption date is equal to the amount determined by dividing (a) the aggregate number of shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock outstanding immediately prior to the redemption date by (b) the number of remaining redemption dates (including the redemption date to which such calculation applies). As a result, we are required to accrete the carrying value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock to its redemption value over the period from issuance through the redemption date. We recorded redeemable convertible preferred stock accretion of $80,000, $9,000, $226,000, $341,000, $85,000 and $43,000 during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. The accretion charges do not impact our net loss but are instead recognized as a charge against additional paid in capital.

If we do not have sufficient funds legally available to redeem all shares to be redeemed at the redemption date, the maximum possible number of shares is redeemed ratably among the holders of such shares based upon their holdings of redeemable convertible preferred stock, and the remaining shares will be redeemed as soon as sufficient funds are legally available. In the event that shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock are not redeemed due to a default in payment by us or because we do not have sufficient legally available funds, such shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock shall remain outstanding and entitled to all the rights and preferences of the redeemable convertible preferred stock until redeemed. No redeemable convertible preferred stock was eligible for redemption as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 or April 30, 2014.

Conversion

Each share of redeemable convertible preferred stock is convertible, at any time at the option of the stockholder, into one share of Class A common stock, subject to certain anti-dilution adjustments. Conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock into shares of Class A common stock is automatic at the respective then effective conversion rate for each series: (i) at any time upon the approval of the holders of at least (a) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Voting Preferred, (b) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Series C, and (c) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Series D; provided, however, if such conversion (i) is in conjunction with a liquidation event and if the proceeds of such liquidation event to be received by holders of Series D-1, Series D-2, or Series E is less than their respective original issue price, the conversion ratio of such series will be adjusted such that each series will receive shares of Class A common stock with a value equal to their respective original issue price; and

 

F-29


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

(ii) immediately upon the closing of a firmly underwritten public offering of our Class A common stock in which such shares of our Class A common stock have been listed for trading on a specified stock exchange and that results in gross cash proceeds (before underwriting discounts, commissions, and fees) of at least $100.0 million; provided, however, if the price per share of Class A common stock sold in any public offering of our Class A common stock causes the holders of either Series D-2 or Series E to receive shares of Class A common stock with a value less than their respective original issue price, the conversion ratio of the shares of Series D-2 or Series E, as applicable, shall be adjusted such that the holders of such class of stock receive shares of Class A common stock equal to the value of their respective original purchase price. Any automatic conversion of Series D-2 or Series E that is not effected in connection with a liquidation event or qualified initial public offering will also require the approval of holders of at least 66  2 3 % of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 and the holders of at least 60% of the outstanding shares of Series E, respectively.

Dividends

The holders of Series E-1, Series E, Series D-2, Series D-1, Series D, Series C, Series B and Series A, in preference and priority to the holders of common stock, are entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, a noncumulative cash dividend at the rate of $1.44, $1.0476, $0.7253, $0.6425, $0.2530, $0.1024, $0.0527, and $0.0230 per share, respectively, per annum, if and when declared by the Board. After payment in full of such amounts as set forth above, any additional dividends declared will be distributed among all holders of redeemable convertible preferred stock and common stock on an as-if-converted basis.

No dividends have been declared for any of the periods presented.

Liquidation

In the event of any liquidation, dissolution, or winding up of Box, Inc., whether voluntary or involuntary, the holders of Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1, Series D-2, Series E and Series E-1 shall be entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, prior to any distributions to the holders of common stock, the amounts of $0.2869, $0.6585, $1.28, $3.1619, $8.0314, $9.0657, $13.0949 and $18.00 per share, respectively, plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares. After payment in full of such amounts as set forth above, our remaining assets will be distributed ratably among the holders of common stock and Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1 and Series D-2 in proportion to the number of shares held by such holders (on an as-if-converted basis); provided that (a) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series B may not exceed $1.6463 per share; (b) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series C may not exceed $3.20 per share; (c) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D may not exceed $7.9048 per share; (d) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D-1 may not exceed $16.0628 per share; and (e) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D-2 may not exceed $18.1314 per share. After the amounts set forth above have been paid in full, our remaining assets will be distributed ratably among the holders of the common stock.

Note 10. Common Stock and Stockholders’ Deficit

Common Stock

We have two classes of common stock, Class A and Class B. The rights of the holders of Class A and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting. Each share of Class A common stock is entitled to one vote per share. Shares of Class B common stock have no voting rights, including with respect to

 

F-30


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

the election of directors. Shares of Class B common stock convert automatically into shares of Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis at such time as is determined by the Board or, in the event any shares of Class B common stock are acquired by a holder of redeemable convertible preferred stock who is not an employee or an immediate family member or controlled affiliate of an employee of the Company at the time of such acquisition.

During the year ended January 31, 2013, certain employees sold 496,340 shares of common stock to existing investors for amounts in excess of the deemed fair value of our common stock at the time of sales. The amounts paid by the investors in excess of the deemed fair value were recorded as compensation expense, which totaled $3.8 million for the year ended January 31, 2013.

We have reserved the following shares of authorized but unissued Class A and Class B common stock as of the following dates:

 

     As of January 31,
2013
     As of January 31,
2014
     As of April 30,
2014
 
                   (unaudited)  

Conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     69,999,253         76,238,097         76,238,097   

Warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock

     771,544         87,140         87,140   

Issued and outstanding stock options

     13,992,407         18,427,075         18,667,091   

Issued and outstanding restricted stock units

             225,300         2,904,794   

Future grants of equity awards

     903,152         41,840         378,486   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     85,666,356         95,019,452         98,275,608   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In December 2013, our board of directors approved the terms of two new classes of stock, the new Class A common stock and the new Class B common stock. Shares of the new Class A common stock will be entitled to one vote per share and shares of the new Class B common stock will be entitled to 10 votes per share. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all outstanding shares of our Existing Class A common stock, Existing Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the net exercise of a redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant that will otherwise expire upon the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering.

Treasury Stock

In connection with the issuance of Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock in February 2011 and the issuance of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock in August 2011, certain employees sold 411,138 and 641,815 shares of their holdings in our common stock to investors in the respective redeemable convertible preferred stock financings for amounts in excess of the deemed fair value of our common stock at the time of sale. The amounts paid by the investors in excess of the deemed fair value were recorded as compensation expense, which totaled $5.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. We then concurrently exchanged the common stock with the investors for Series D and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock on a one-for-one basis, as the case may be, and the shares of repurchased common stock were removed from common stock outstanding and recorded as treasury stock.

As of January 31, 2013 and 2014 and April 30, 2014, we held an aggregate of 3,052,953 shares of common stock as treasury stock.

 

F-31


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Note 11. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrants

The following redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants were outstanding with the related fair values as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 and April 30, 2014 (in thousands, except for share data):

 

          January 31, 2013     January 31, 2014     April 30, 2014  

Series

  Price
Per Share
    Warrants
Outstanding
    Fair
Value
    Warrants
Outstanding
    Fair
Value
    Warrants
Outstanding
    Fair
Value
 
                                 

(unaudited)

 

A

  $ 0.29        87,140      $ 379        87,140      $ 1,346        87,140      $ 1,613   

B

  $ 0.66        422,930        1,683                               

C

  $ 1.28        199,219        709                               

D-1

  $ 8.03        62,255        98                               
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

      771,544      $ 2,869        87,140      $ 1,346        87,140      $ 1,613   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In October 2006, in connection with the receipt of a loan from BlueCrest Capital Finance, L.P. (BlueCrest), we granted BlueCrest a warrant to purchase 87,140 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.2869 per share. The warrants are immediately exercisable and expire on the earlier of October 2016, immediately prior to the consummation of an initial public offering or a liquidity event.

In August 2007, in connection with the issuance of convertible notes to certain of our existing investors, we granted those existing investors warrants which entitled the investors, at any time prior to expiration of such warrants, to subscribe for and purchase shares of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock for the original Series B offering price of $0.6585 per share. The number of shares covered by the warrants and the price of those shares were contingent upon the occurrence of certain events, including the closing of the Series B equity financing. Upon the closing of the Series B equity financing in January 2008, it was determined that the warrants covered an aggregate of 151,860 shares of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.6585 per share. The warrants were exercisable, in whole or in part, from the closing date of the Series B equity financing until the earlier of August 7, 2014, immediately prior to the consummation of a liquidation event or an initial public offering occurring prior to August 7, 2014.

In May 2008, in connection with the receipt of a loan from Hercules pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Loan and Security Agreement (the Hercules Agreement), we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 271,070 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.6585 per share. The warrants were immediately exercisable and expire on the earliest of May 26, 2015, or three years after our initial public offering, or the closing date of a sale of Box, Inc. for cash or in exchange for freely-tradable securities that are publicly traded on a national securities exchange. In addition, the warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

In December 2010, in connection with the Hercules 2010 Agreement, we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 445,312 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $1.28. Initially, warrants to purchase 199,219 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were immediately exercisable and the remaining warrants to purchase 246,093 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercisable pro-rata against draws on the loan. No additional draws were made during the draw down period and the 246,093 additional warrants to purchase shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were cancelled during the year ended December 31, 2011. The warrants expire on the earlier of December 30, 2017, three years after our initial public offering, or a liquidity event. In addition, the

 

F-32


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

In August 2011, in connection with the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 62,255 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $8.0314. The warrants expire on the earlier of August 23, 2018, three years after our initial public offering, or a liquid sale. In addition, the warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

We recorded the initial fair value of all of the warrants issued as a liability with the offset as an imputed discount on the respective loan (see Note 3). These warrants will remain outstanding until the exercise or expiration of the warrants or the completion of an initial public offering, at which time the warrant liability will be remeasured to fair value and reclassified to additional paid-in capital. The discount was amortized to interest expense using the effective interest method over the term of the related loan. Interest expense of $49,000, $6,000, $76,000, $136,000, $19,000 and $0 was recognized for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

In January 2014, all outstanding warrants to purchase Series B, Series C and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercised. The related preferred stock warrant liability was remeasured to fair value at the exercise date, and the remaining liability along with the proceeds received upon exercise were reclassified to redeemable convertible preferred stock.

Note 12. Stock-Based Compensation

Equity Incentive

We maintain the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the 2006 Plan) and the 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the 2011 Plan), which are collectively referred to as the “Plan.” Shares issued upon exercise of options under the 2006 Plan are Class A common stock. Shares issued upon exercise of options under the 2011 Plan are Class B common stock. Stock awards granted under the Plan may be (i) incentive stock options (ISOs), (ii) nonqualified stock options (NSOs), (iii) Restricted Stock Units (RSUs), (iv) Restricted Stock Awards (RSAs) or (v) Stock Appreciation Rights (SARs), as determined by the Board at the time of grant. Options generally vest 25% one year from the vesting commencement date and 1/48 th  per month thereafter. The deemed fair value per share is determined by the Board at each grant date, based on input from management and a third party valuation firm. Subject to certain restrictions as defined in the Plan and the option agreement and/or restricted stock award agreement, as applicable, (a) we may (i) with respect to options that are early exercisable, repurchase any or all of the unvested shares acquired by the option holder, and (ii) with respect to restricted stock awards, repurchase any or all of the unvested shares acquired by the recipient; and (b) we have a right of first refusal on any or all of the vested shares acquired by the option holder and/or recipient of a restricted stock award, as applicable.

Upon the adoption of the 2011 Plan, the 2006 Plan was suspended, and the remaining shares available for issuance under the 2006 Plan ceased to be available for issuance. Following the adoption of the 2011 Plan, any shares subject to outstanding awards under the 2006 Plan that were subsequently cancelled were not returned to the pool of shares available for issuance under the 2006 Plan or the 2011 Plan.

 

F-33


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Stock Options

The following table summarizes the activity under the equity incentive plans and related information:

 

     Shares Subject to Options Outstanding      Weighted-Average
Remaining
Contractual Life

(Years)
     Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
 
     Shares Subject to
Outstanding
Options
    Weighted-
Average Exercise
Price
       
                         (in thousands)  

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     13,992,407      $ 1.84         8.69       $ 38,954   

Options granted

     7,847,410        6.16         

Options exercised

     (2,267,540     1.32         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2006 Plan

     (189,936     0.73         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2011 Plan

     (955,266     3.77         
  

 

 

         

Balance as of January 31, 2014

     18,427,075        3.65         8.45         191,809   

Options granted (unaudited)

     1,447,897        17.85         

Options exercised (unaudited)

     (817,890     1.93         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2006 Plan (unaudited)

     (53,454     0.82         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2011 Plan (unaudited)

     (336,537     4.33         
  

 

 

         

Balance as of April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     18,667,091      $ 4.82         8.37       $ 243,167   
  

 

 

         

Vested and expected to vest as of January 31, 2014

     17,863,613      $ 3.62         8.44       $ 186,436   
  

 

 

         

Exercisable as of January 31, 2014

     5,438,985      $ 1.57         7.49       $ 67,947   
  

 

 

         

Vested and expected to vest as of April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     18,153,391      $ 4.78         8.36       $ 237,249   
  

 

 

         

Exercisable as of April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     6,709,862      $ 2.14         `7.58       $ 105,423   
  

 

 

         

The options exercisable as of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014 include options that are exercisable prior to vesting. The aggregate intrinsic value of options vested and expected to vest and exercisable as of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014 is calculated based on the difference between the exercise price and the fair value of our common stock as of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014. The aggregate intrinsic value of exercised options for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014 was $1.2 million, $112,000, $11.6 million, $17.8 million, $1.5 million and $11.0 million, respectively, and is calculated based on the difference between the exercise price and the fair value of our common stock as of the exercise date.

The aggregate estimated fair value of stock options granted to employees that vested during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014 was $339,000, $37,000, $2.0 million, $7.4 million, $1.5 million and $4.4 million, respectively.

The weighted-average grant date fair value of options granted to employees was $0.47, $2.15, $4.75, $2.76 and $8.66 per share during the year ended December 31, 2011, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. No options were granted during the one month ended January 31, 2012.

 

F-34


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

As of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, there was $39.8 million and $46.7 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding stock options granted to employees net of estimated forfeitures. This amount is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 3.08 years and 3.09 years. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

Early Exercises of Stock Options

With the approval of the Board, we allow certain employees and directors to exercise stock options granted under the 2006 Plan and the 2011 Plan prior to vesting. The unvested shares are subject to a repurchase right held by us at the original purchase price. Early exercises of options are not deemed to be substantive exercises for accounting purposes and accordingly, amounts received for early exercises are initially recorded in other current liabilities or other noncurrent liabilities and reclassified to common stock and additional paid-in capital as the underlying shares vest. At January 31, 2013 and 2014 and April 30, 2014, we had $1.1 million, $872,000 and $730,000 recorded in liabilities related to early exercises of stock options, and the related number of unvested shares subject to repurchase was 905,293, 331,826 and 250,777, respectively.

Restricted Stock Units

A summary of our restricted stock unit activity and related information is as follows:

     Number of
Restricted
Stock Units
Outstanding
    Weighted-
Average
Grant
Date Fair
Value
 

Unvested balance—January 31, 2013

              

Granted

     225,300        14.06   

Vested

              
  

 

 

   

Unvested balance—January 31, 2014

     225,300        14.06   
  

 

 

   

Granted (unaudited)

     2,689,924        17.85   

Vested (unaudited)

              

Forfeited/cancelled (unaudited)

     (10,430     17.85   
  

 

 

   

Unvested balance—April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     2,904,794      $ 17.56   
  

 

 

   

As of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, there was $3.0 million and $47.7 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding restricted stock units net of estimated forfeitures. These amounts are expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 3.93 years and 3.88 years. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

 

F-35


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Restricted Stock

A summary of our restricted stock activity and related information is as follows:

 

     Number of
Restricted Stock
Outstanding
    Weighted-
Average
Grant
Date Fair
Value
 

Unvested balance—January 31, 2013

          $   

Granted

     395,810        7.85   

Vested

     (8,375     8.07   
  

 

 

   

Unvested balance—January 31, 2014

     387,435        7.84   
  

 

 

   

Granted (unaudited)

     22,500        17.85   

Vested (unaudited)

     (34,586     10.09   
  

 

 

   

Unvested balance—April 30, 2014 (unaudited)

     375,349      $ 8.24   
  

 

 

   

As of January 31, 2014 and April 30, 2014, there was $1.6 million and $1.4 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding restricted stock granted to employees net of estimated forfeitures. This amount is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 2.89 years and 2.64 years. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

Stock-Based Compensation

The following table summarizes the components of stock-based compensation expense recognized in the consolidated statements of operations (in thousands):

 

    Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
            2013     2014  
                            (unaudited)  

Cost of revenue

  $ 686      $ 6      $ 1,087      $ 450      $ 61      $ 227   

Research and development

    899        19        1,211        3,154        329        2,007   

Sales and marketing

    837        24        1,893        5,017        738        2,066   

General and administrative

    3,800        23        3,345        3,128        515        1,452   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

  $ 6,222      $ 72      $ 7,536      $ 11,749      $ 1,643      $ 5,752   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-36


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Determining Fair Value of Stock Options

We estimated the fair value of employee stock options using a Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

    Year Ended
December 31,

2011
  One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
  Year Ended
January 31,

2014
  Three Months Ended
April 30,
            2013   2014
                      (unaudited)

Expected term (in years)

  5.0 – 6.1          5.0 – 7.4   4.9 – 6.3   5.4 – 6.3   5.7 – 6.1

Volatility

  55% – 57%          53% – 55%   48% – 57%   49% – 50%   49%

Risk-free interest rate

  1.1% – 2.7%          0.7% – 1.7%   0.8% – 1.9%   0.8% – 1.2%   2.1%

Dividend yield

  0%          0%   0%   0%   0%

The assumptions used in the Black-Scholes option pricing model were determined as follows:

Fair Value of Common Stock. Given the absence of a public trading market, the Board considered numerous objective and subjective factors to determine the fair value of our common stock at each grant date. These factors included, but were not limited to, (i) contemporaneous valuations of common stock performed by unrelated third-party specialists; (ii) the prices for our Preferred Stock sold to outside investors; (iii) the rights, preferences and privileges of our Preferred Stock relative to our common stock; (iv) the lack of marketability of our common stock; (v) developments in the business; and (vi) the likelihood of achieving a liquidity event, such as an initial public offering or a merger or acquisition of Box, given prevailing market conditions.

Expected Term. The expected term represents the period that our share-based awards are expected to be outstanding. The expected term assumptions were determined based on the vesting terms, exercise terms and contractual lives of the options.

Expected Volatility . Since we do not have a trading history of our common stock, the expected volatility was derived from the historical stock volatilities of several unrelated public companies within the same industry that we consider to be comparable to our business over a period equivalent to the expected term of the stock option grants.

Risk-free Interest Rate. The risk-free rate that we use is based on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with remaining terms similar to the expected term on the options.

Dividend Yield . We have never declared or paid any cash dividends and do not plan to pay cash dividends in the foreseeable future, and, therefore, use an expected dividend yield of zero.

Note 13. Net Loss per Share Attributable to Common Stockholders

We calculate our basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders in conformity with the two-class method required for companies with participating securities. We consider all series of our redeemable convertible preferred stock to be participating securities. In the event a dividend is declared or paid on our common stock, holders of redeemable convertible preferred stock are entitled to a proportionate share of such dividend in proportion to the holders of common stock on an as-if converted basis. Under the two-class method, basic net loss per share attributable to common stockholders is calculated by dividing the net loss attributable to common stockholders by the weighted-average number of shares of common stock outstanding for the period, less shares subject to repurchase. Net loss attributable to common stockholders is determined by

 

F-37


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

allocating undistributed earnings between common and redeemable convertible preferred stockholders. The diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders is computed by giving effect to all potential dilutive common stock equivalents outstanding for the period. For purposes of this calculation, redeemable convertible preferred stock, options to purchase common stock, warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock, repurchasable shares from early exercised options and unvested restricted stock are considered common stock equivalents but have been excluded from the calculation of diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders as their effect is antidilutive. Under the two-class method, the net loss attributable to common stockholders is not allocated to the convertible redeemable preferred stock as the holders of our convertible redeemable preferred stock do not have a contractual obligation to share in our losses.

The rights, including the liquidation and dividend rights, of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting. As the liquidation and dividend rights are identical, the undistributed earnings are allocated on a proportionate basis and the resulting net loss per share attributed to common stockholders will, therefore, be the same for both Class A and Class B common stock on an individual or combined basis. We did not present dilutive net loss per share on an if-converted basis because the impact was not dilutive.

The following table sets forth the computation of basic and diluted net loss per share (in thousands, except per share amounts):

 

    Year Ended
December 31, 2011
    One Month Ended
January 31, 2012
    Year Ended
January 31, 2013
    Year Ended
January 31, 2014
 
    Class A     Class B     Class A     Class B     Class A     Class B     Class A     Class B  

Numerator:

               

Net loss

  $ (50,252   $ (19   $ (5,110   $ (17   $ (111,274   $ (1,289   $ (149,743   $ (18,814

Add: accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

    (80            (9            (223     (3     (303     (38
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

  $ (50,332   $ (19   $ (5,119   $ (17   $ (111,497   $ (1,292   $ (150,046   $ (18,852
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Denominator:

               

Weighted-average number of shares outstanding—basic and diluted

    5,282        2        6,079        20        7,596        88        10,075        1,266   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

  $ (9.53   $ (9.53 )*    $ (0.84   $ (0.84 )*    $ (14.68   $ (14.68   $ (14.89   $ (14.89
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Amounts cannot be recalculated due to rounding

 

F-38


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

     Three Months Ended
April 30, 2013
    Three Months Ended
April 30, 2014
 
           Class A                 Class B                 Class A                 Class B        
    

(unaudited)

 

Numerator:

        

Net loss

   $ (32,963   $ (1,076   $ (31,461   $ (7,050

Add: accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (83     (2     (35     (8
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (33,046   $ (1,078   $ (31,496   $ (7,058
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Denominator:

        

Weighted-average number of shares outstanding—basic and diluted

     9,514        311        11,220        2,514   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $ (3.47   $ (3.47   $ (2.81   $ (2.81
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The following weighted average outstanding shares of common stock equivalents were excluded from the computation of diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders for the periods presented because including them would have been antidilutive (in thousands):

 

     As of
December 31,

2011
     As of
January 31,
2012
     As of
January 31,
2013
     As of
January 31,

2014
     As of April 30,  
               2013      2014  
                                 (unaudited)  

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     51,826         58,324         63,727         71,465         69,999         76,238   

Options to purchase common stock

     9,137         10,492         13,441         17,036         14,462         18,247   

Restricted stock units

                             1                 1,070   

Warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock

     731         772         772         736         772         87   

Repurchasable shares from early-exercised options and unvested restricted stock

     321         238         699         764         847         674   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     62,015         69,826         78,639         90,002         86,080         96,316   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Unaudited Pro Forma Net Loss per Share Attributable to Common Stockholders

As of April 30, 2014, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all current outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock, and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the exercise of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants and all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering.

 

F-39


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

In contemplation of an initial public offering, pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share have been computed to give effect to the conversion of our Class A and Class B common stock, redeemable convertible preferred stock and certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants into our new Class B common stock as though the conversion had occurred as of the later of the beginning of the period or the original date of issuance, and the conversion of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants into warrants to purchase our new Class B common stock.

The following table shows our calculation of the unaudited pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share (in thousands, except per share data):

 

                                                               
     Year Ended January 31, 2014  
     Existing
Class A
    Existing
Class B
    New
Class A
     New
Class B
 
     (unaudited)  

Numerator:

         

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (150,046   $ (18,852   $       $   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     303        38                  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     7,531        946                  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders

     (142,212     (17,868               

Reallocation of pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders as a result of existing Class A and Class B common stock, redeemable convertible preferred stock and certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants converting to new Class B common stock

     142,212        17,868                (160,080
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (160,080
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Denominator:

         

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute net loss per share—basic and diluted

     10,075        1,266                  

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of existing Class A and Class B common stock to new Class B common stock

     (10,075     (1,266             11,341   

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to new Class B common stock

                           71,465   

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants to new Class B common stock

                           142   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share—basic and diluted

                           82,948   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (1.93
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-40


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

     Three Months Ended April 30, 2014  
     Existing
Class A
    Existing
Class B
    New
Class A
     New
Class B
 
     (unaudited)  

Numerator:

         

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (31,496   $ (7,058   $       $   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     35        8                  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     218        49                  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders

     (31,243     (7,001               

Reallocation of pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders as a result of existing Class A and Class B common stock, redeemable convertible preferred stock and certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants converting to new Class B common stock

     31,243        7,001                (38,244
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (38,244
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Denominator:

         

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute net loss per share—basic and diluted

     11,220        2,514                  

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of existing Class A and Class B common stock to new Class B common stock

     (11,220     (2,514             13,734   

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to new Class B common stock

                           76,238   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share—basic and diluted

                           89,972   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (0.43
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Note 14. Income Taxes

The components of loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes were as follows (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
             2013     2014  
                             (unaudited)  

United States

   $ (50,270   $ (5,112   $ (112,691   $ (148,032   $ (34,409   $ (29,358

Foreign

                   187        (22,956     376        (9,089
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

   $ (50,270   $ (5,112   $ (112,504   $ (170,988   $ (34,033   $ (38,447
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-41


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

The components of the provision (benefit) for income taxes were as follows (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,
2014
    Three Months Ended
April 30,
 
                2013      2014  
                                (unaudited)  

Current:

                

Federal

   $       $       $       $ 17      $       $ 6   

State

     1         15         12         53        6         8   

Foreign

                     47         89                50   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 1       $ 15       $ 59       $ 159      $ 6       $ 64   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deferred:

                

Federal

   $       $       $       $ (2,360   $       $   

State

                             (230               
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $       $       $       $ (2,590   $       $   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

   $ 1       $ 15       $ 59       $ (2,431   $ 6       $ 64   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The items accounting for the difference between income taxes computed at the federal statutory income tax rate of 34% and the provision for income taxes consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 

Tax benefit at federal statutory rate

   $ (17,119   $ (1,741   $ (38,328   $ (58,136

State taxes, net of federal benefit

     (2,666     (350     (7,097     (5,071

Foreign rate difference

                   (17     3,270   

Nondeductible expenses

     400        125        1,288        3,408   

Research and development credit

     (566            (1,376     (1,934

Stock-based compensation

     2,038        20        2,237        2,644   

Change in reserve for unrecognized tax benefits

     568        (260     663        3,937   

Other

     280        260        25        (421

Change in valuation allowance

     17,066        1,961        42,664        49,872   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Provision for income taxes

   $ 1      $ 15      $ 59      $ (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-42


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

The significant components of our deferred tax assets and liabilities were as follows (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
 

Deferred tax assets:

    

Net operating loss carryforward

   $ 64,446      $ 104,855   

Accruals and reserves

     5,006        5,377   

Stock-based compensation

     167        908   

Depreciation and amortization

     469        1,738   

Tax credit carryover

     2,068        3,960   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets

     72,156        116,838   

Valuation allowance

     (72,135     (115,223
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets, net of valuation allowance

     21        1,615   

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

Purchased intangible assets

            (1,524

Other

     (21     (91
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax liabilities

     (21     (1,615
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets

   $      $   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. As a result, we have established a full valuation allowance against our deferred tax assets to the extent they are not offset by liabilities from uncertain tax positions based on our history of losses. The valuation allowance increased by $42.6 million and $43.1 million during the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014. In addition, during the year ended January 31, 2014, we released $2.6 million of our valuation allowance as a result of our acquisition of Crocodoc. With the acquisition, a deferred tax liability was established for the book-tax basis difference related to purchased intangibles. The net deferred tax liability provided an additional source of income to support the realizability of pre-existing deferred tax assets.

We have not provided for U.S. federal and state income taxes on our foreign subsidiary’s undistributed earnings as of January 31, 2014 because such earnings are intended to be indefinitely reinvested. If we were to repatriate these earnings to the U.S., they would be subject to U.S. income taxes based on the U.S. statutory rate of 34% plus an applicable adjustment for foreign tax credits and foreign withholding taxes.

As of January 31, 2014, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards of $263.7 million and $262.6 million available to offset future taxable income. The federal net operating loss carryforward will expire at various dates beginning in 2025, if not utilized. The state net operating loss carryforward will expire at various dates beginning in 2016, if not utilized. In addition, as of January 31, 2014, we had federal and state research and development tax credit carryforwards of $4.6 million and $5.0 million. The federal research and development tax credit carryforwards will expire beginning in 2025, if not utilized. The state research and development tax credit carryforward do not expire.

Utilization of the net operating loss carryforwards and credits may be subject to substantial annual limitation due to the ownership change limitations provided by Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and similar state provisions. The annual limitation may result in the expiration of net operating losses and credits before utilization.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

We evaluate tax positions for recognition using a more-likely-than-not recognition threshold, and those tax positions eligible for recognition are measured as the largest amount of tax benefit that is greater than 50% likely of being realized upon the effective settlement with a taxing authority that has full knowledge of all relevant information.

As of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014, the total unrecognized tax benefits were $1.5 million, $2.5 million and $8.1 million. A reconciliation of the gross unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (in thousands):

 

     Amount  

Balance as of December 31, 2010

   $   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     497   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     960   
  

 

 

 

Balance as of December 31, 2011

     1,457   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     48   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

     (348
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2012

     1,157   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     49   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     1,342   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

     (33
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     2,515   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     547   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     5,085   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

       
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2014

   $ 8,147   
  

 

 

 

The gross unrecognized tax benefits, if recognized, would not materially affect the effective tax rate as of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2012, 2013 and 2014. We do not expect our gross unrecognized tax benefits to change significantly in the next 12 months.

Our policy is to classify interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions, if any, as a component of our income tax provision. Interest and penalties were not significant during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014.

We file tax returns in the United States for federal, California, and other states. All tax years remain open to examination for both federal and state purposes as a result of the net operating loss and credit carryforwards. We file foreign tax returns in the United Kingdom starting with the year ended January 31, 2013 and with France, Germany and Japan starting with the year ended January 31, 2014. These tax years remain open to examination.

Note 15. Segments

Our chief operating decision maker reviews financial information presented on a consolidated basis for purposes of allocating resources and evaluating financial performance. As such, we have a single reporting segment and operating unit structure. In addition, substantially all of our revenue and long-lived assets are attributable to operations in the U.S. for all the periods presented.

 

F-44


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(Unaudited as of April 30, 2014 and for the three months ended April 30, 2013 and 2014)

 

Note 16. 401(k) Plan

We have a 401(k) Savings Plan (the 401(k) Plan) which qualifies as a deferred salary arrangement under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Under the 401(k) Plan, participating employees may elect to contribute up to 100% of their eligible compensation, subject to certain limitations. We have not made any matching contributions to date.

Note 17. Subsequent Events (Unaudited)

In preparing the financial statements as of and for the year ended January 31, 2014, we evaluated subsequent events for recognition and measurement purposes through March 24, 2014, the date the independent auditors’ report was originally issued and the audited annual consolidated financial statements were available for issuance. After the original issuance of the consolidated financial statements and through July 7, 2014, we have evaluated subsequent events or transactions that have occurred that may require disclosure in the accompanying financial statements. Except as described below, we have concluded that no events or transactions have occurred that may require disclosure in the accompanying financial statements.

In July 2014, we acquired all outstanding common stock of Greply Inc. (Streem), a privately-held cloud storage and file-sharing company which specializes in large media files and streaming technology, for a total consideration of 613,636 shares of our Class A common stock and $1.5 million in cash. We are in the process of determining the final purchase consideration, including the fair value of the Class A common stock and the fair value of the acquired intangibles.

In July 2014, we issued 7,500,000 shares of Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock at $20.00 per share for gross proceeds of $150.0 million. Under the terms of the arrangement, the redemption value for the Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock is determined based on a $3 per year return on the original purchase price. Additionally, if we consummate an initial public offering on or prior to July 7, 2015, each share of Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock will convert into shares of Class A common stock equal to $20.00 divided by the lesser of 90% of the price per share of Class A common stock or $20.00. If we consummate an initial public offering after July 7, 2015, holders of Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock will receive shares of Class A common stock with a value equal to $20 plus $3 per year, calculated on a quarterly basis (based on a 360 day year) with no compounding, through such date. In addition, in certain circumstances, the shares of Class A common stock issuable upon conversion of the Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock are subject to a floor limitation.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

LOGO

Our Mission:
To make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information.


Table of Contents

LOGO

box
Without walls™
Morgan Stanley Credit Suisse J.P. Morgan
BMO Capital Markets
Canaccord Genuity Pacific Crest Securities Raymond James Wells Fargo Securities


Table of Contents

PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

ITEM 13. OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.

The following table sets forth all expenses to be paid by the Registrant, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, upon the completion of this offering. All amounts shown are estimates except for the SEC registration fee, the FINRA filing fee and the exchange listing fee.

 

SEC registration fee

   $ 19,320   

FINRA filing fee

     23,000   

Exchange listing fee

     250,000   

Printing and engraving expenses

     *   

Legal fees and expenses

     *   

Accounting fees and expenses

     *   

Transfer agent and registrar fees

     *   

Miscellaneous expenses

     *   
  

 

 

 

Total

   $ *   
  

 

 

 

 

* To be filed by amendment.

ITEM 14. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.

Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law authorizes a corporation’s board of directors to grant, and authorizes a court to award, indemnity to officers, directors, and other corporate agents.

On the completion of this offering, as permitted by Section 102(b)(7) of the Delaware General Corporation Law, the Registrant’s amended and restated certificate of incorporation will include provisions that eliminate the personal liability of its directors and officers for monetary damages for breach of their fiduciary duty as directors and officers.

In addition, as permitted by Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws of the Registrant will provide that:

 

    The Registrant shall indemnify its directors and officers for serving the Registrant in those capacities or for serving other business enterprises at the Registrant’s request, to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Delaware law provides that a corporation may indemnify such person if such person acted in good faith and in a manner such person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Registrant and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe such person’s conduct was unlawful.

 

    The Registrant may, in its discretion, indemnify employees and agents in those circumstances where indemnification is permitted by applicable law.

 

    The Registrant is required to advance expenses, as incurred, to its directors and officers in connection with defending a proceeding, except that such director or officer shall undertake to repay such advances if it is ultimately determined that such person is not entitled to indemnification.

 

    The Registrant will not be obligated pursuant to the amended and restated bylaws to indemnify a person with respect to proceedings initiated by that person, except with respect to proceedings authorized by the Registrant’s board of directors or brought to enforce a right to indemnification.

 

    The rights conferred in the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws are not exclusive, and the Registrant is authorized to enter into indemnification agreements with its directors, officers, employees, and agents and to obtain insurance to indemnify such persons.

 

II-1


Table of Contents
    The Registrant may not retroactively amend the bylaw provisions to reduce its indemnification obligations to directors, officers, employees, and agents.

The Registrant’s policy is to enter into separate indemnification agreements with each of its directors and officers that provide the maximum indemnity allowed to directors and executive officers by Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law and also to provide for certain additional procedural protections. The Registrant also maintains directors and officers insurance to insure such persons against certain liabilities.

These indemnification provisions and the indemnification agreements entered into between the Registrant and its officers and directors may be sufficiently broad to permit indemnification of the Registrant’s officers and directors for liabilities (including reimbursement of expenses incurred) arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (Securities Act).

The underwriting agreement to be filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement will provide for indemnification by the underwriters of the Registrant and its officers and directors for certain liabilities arising under the Securities Act and otherwise.

ITEM 15. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued the following unregistered securities:

Preferred Stock Issuances

From February 2011 through April 2011, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 11,543,699 shares of its Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock to 14 accredited investors at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $36,500,022, and issued an aggregate of 411,138 shares of its Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock to 12 accredited investors pursuant to a stock purchase agreement by and among the Registrant and certain stockholders of the Registrant. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From August 2011 through September 2011, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 3,218,033 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to 10 accredited investors at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $25,845,311, and issued an aggregate of 641,815 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to seven accredited investors pursuant to a stock purchase agreement by and among the Registrant and certain stockholders of the Registrant. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From October 2011 through March 2012, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 3,529,927 shares of its Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock to five accredited investors at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $32,001,260. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From August 2012 through October 2012, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 11,454,838 shares of its Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock to 17 accredited investors at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $149,999,959. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From October 2013 through January 2014, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 5,554,440 shares of its Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to 17 accredited investors at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for

 

II-2


Table of Contents

an aggregate purchase price of $99,979,920. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act as transactions not involving a public offering.

In July 2014, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 7,500,000 shares of its Series F redeemable convertible preferred stock to three accredited investors at a purchase price of $20.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $150,000,000. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

Warrant Issuances

In August 2011, the Registrant issued a warrant to purchase 62,255 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to one accredited investor in connection with a loan and security agreement at an exercise price of $8.0314 per share.

Option, RSU and Common Stock Issuances

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant granted to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers options to purchase an aggregate of 23,162,429 shares of its common stock under its equity compensation plans at exercise prices ranging from $0.59 to $17.85 per share.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers an aggregate of 2,915,224 restricted stock units to be settled in shares of its common stock under its equity compensation plans.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers an aggregate of 503,435 shares of its restricted common stock under its equity compensation plans.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued an aggregate of 5,000 shares of its common stock to a former service provider in consideration for services rendered.

Common Stock Issuances in Connection with Acquisitions

In February 2011, the Registrant issued 10,000 shares of its common stock as consideration to a company in connection with its acquisition of certain assets from the company.

In May 2013, the Registrant issued 813,405 shares of its common stock as consideration to 32 individuals and 13 entities in connection with its acquisition of all of the outstanding shares of a company.

In September 2013, the Registrant issued 50,000 shares of its common stock as consideration to a company in connection with its acquisition of certain assets from the company.

In July 2014, the Registrant issued 300,431 shares of its common stock as consideration to seven individuals and 14 entities in connection with its acquisition of all of the outstanding shares of a company.

None of the foregoing transactions involved any underwriters, underwriting discounts or commissions, or any public offering. Unless otherwise specified above, the Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act (or Regulation S or Regulation D promulgated thereunder), or Rule 701 promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act as transactions by an issuer not involving any public offering or pursuant to benefit plans and contracts relating to

 

II-3


Table of Contents

compensation as provided under Rule 701. The recipients of the securities in each of these transactions represented their intentions to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to or for sale in connection with any distribution thereof, and appropriate legends were placed upon the stock certificates issued in these transactions. All recipients had adequate access, through their relationships with the Registrant, to information about the Registrant. The sales of these securities were made without any general solicitation or advertising.

ITEM 16. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.

(a) Exhibits.

We have filed the exhibits listed on the accompanying Exhibit Index of this Registration Statement.

(b) Financial Statement Schedules.

All financial statement schedules are omitted because the information called for is not required or is shown either in the consolidated financial statements or in the notes thereto.

ITEM 17. UNDERTAKINGS.

The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers, and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit, or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer, or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:

(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-4


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant has duly caused this registration statement on Form S-1 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in Los Altos, California, on the 7 th day of July, 2014.

 

BOX, INC.
By:   /s/ Aaron Levie
 

  Aaron Levie

  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement on Form S-1 has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Signature

  

Title

 

Date

/s/ Aaron Levie

Aaron Levie

  

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

  July 7, 2014

/s/ Dylan Smith

Dylan Smith

  

Chief Financial Officer and Director

(Principal Financial Officer)

  July 7, 2014

/s/ Jeff Mannie

Jeff Mannie

  

Vice President, Controller and Chief Accounting Officer

(Principal Accounting Officer)

  July 7, 2014

*

Dana Evan

   Director   July 7, 2014

*

Steven Krausz

   Director   July 7, 2014

*

Dan Levin

   President, Chief Operating Officer and Director   July 7, 2014

*

Rory O’Driscoll

   Director   July 7, 2014

*

Gary Reiner

   Director   July 7, 2014

*

Josh Stein

   Director   July 7, 2014

*

Padmasree Warrior

   Director   July 7, 2014

 

*By:   /s/ Aaron Levie
 

Aaron Levie

Attorney-in-Fact

 

II-5


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
Number

 

Description

  1.1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement.
  3.1   Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.2*   Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, to be in effect upon the completion of this offering.
  3.3**   Bylaws of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.4*   Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant, to be in effect upon the completion of this offering.
  4.1   Form of common stock certificate of the Registrant.
  4.2   Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement among the Registrant and certain holders of its capital stock, dated as of July 7, 2014.
  5.1*   Opinion of Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C.
10.1+   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors and executive officers.
10.2+*   Box, Inc. 2014 Equity Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.3+*   Box, Inc. 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan and related form agreements.
10.4+**   Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.5+**   Box, Inc. 2006 Stock Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.6+   Box, Inc. Executive Incentive Plan.
10.7+**   Form of Executive Severance Agreement between the Registrant and each of its executive officers.
10.8+*   Offer Letter between the Registrant and Aaron Levie.
10.9+*   Offer Letter between the Registrant and Dan Levin.
10.10+*   Offer Letter between the Registrant and Dylan Smith.
10.11+*   Offer Letter between the Registrant and Peter McGoff.
10.12+*   Offer Letter between the Registrant and Graham Younger.
10.13**   Office Lease between the Registrant and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP, dated as of June 16, 2011.
10.14   Credit Agreement among the Registrant, the lenders party thereto and Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent, dated as of August 27, 2013, as amended on June 19, 2014.
10.15 ¥   Master License and Service Agreement between the Registrant and CoreSite, L.P., dated as of March 17, 2008.
10.16**   Master Service Agreement between the Registrant and Equinix Operating Co., Inc., dated as of April 29, 2008.
10.17**   Colocation Facilities Agreement between the Registrant and Switch Communications Group, L.L.C., dated as of December 20, 2011.
21.1**   List of subsidiaries of the Registrant.


Table of Contents

Exhibit
Number

 

Description

23.1   Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm.
23.2*   Consent of Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C. (included in Exhibit 5.1).
24.1**   Power of Attorney (see page II-5 to the original filing of this Registration Statement on Form S-1 on March 24, 2014).

 

* To be filed by amendment.
** Previously filed
+ Indicates management contract or compensatory plan.
¥ Confidential treatment has been requested as to certain portions of this exhibit, which portions have been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Exhibit 3.1

AMENDED AND RESTATED

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

BOX, INC.,

a Delaware Corporation

The undersigned does hereby certify on behalf of Box, Inc. (the “ Corporation ”), a corporation organized and existing under the Delaware General Corporation Law, as follows:

FIRST: That the undersigned is the duly elected and acting Chief Executive Officer of the Corporation.

SECOND: That the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation was originally filed with the Secretary of State of the State of Delaware on March 11, 2008, under the name “Box.Net, Inc.”

THIRD: That, pursuant to Sections 242 and 245 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation, as amended to the date of the filing of this certificate, is hereby amended and restated in its entirety as set forth in Exhibit A hereto.

FOURTH: That the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation as set forth in Exhibit A hereto has been duly adopted and approved by the board of directors and stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sections 141, 228, 242 and 245 of the Delaware General Corporation Law.

The undersigned hereby further declares and certifies under penalty of perjury that the facts set forth in the foregoing certificate are true and correct to the knowledge of the undersigned, and that this certificate is the act and deed of the undersigned.

Executed on this 3 rd day of July, 2014.

 

By:  

/s/ Aaron Levie

  Aaron Levie, Chief Executive Officer


EXHIBIT A

AMENDED AND RESTATED CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

BOX, INC.

ARTICLE I

The name of this corporation is Box, Inc. (the “ Corporation ”).

ARTICLE II

The address of the registered office of the Corporation in the State of Delaware is 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400, City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, 19808. The name of its registered agent at that address is Corporation Service Company.

ARTICLE III

The purpose of the Corporation is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which a corporation may be organized under the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

ARTICLE IV

 

(A) Classes of Capital Stock

This Corporation is authorized to issue 237,957,959 shares of capital stock in the aggregate. The capital stock of this Corporation shall be divided into two classes, designated “Common Stock” and “Preferred Stock.” The number of shares of Common Stock the Corporation is authorized to issue is 153,356,000, 128,356,000 of which shall be designated as Class A Common Stock (“ Class A Common ”) and 25,000,000 of which shall be designated as Class B Common Stock (“ Class B Common ”). The number of shares of Preferred Stock the Corporation is authorized to issue is 84,601,959, 5,315,560 of which shall be designated as Series A Preferred Stock (“ Series A Preferred ”), 20,331,812 of which shall be designated as Series B Preferred Stock ( Series B Preferred ”), 14,261,720 of which shall be designated as Series C Preferred Stock (“ Series C Preferred ”), 11,954,837 of which shall be designated as Series D Preferred Stock (“ Series D Preferred ”), 3,922,103 of which shall be designated as Series D-1 Preferred Stock (“ Series D-1 Preferred ”), 3,529,927 of which shall be designated as Series D-2 Preferred Stock (“ Series D-2 Preferred ”), 12,230,000 of which shall be designated as Series E Preferred Stock (“ Series E Preferred ”), 5,556,000 of which shall be designated as Series E-1 Preferred Stock (“ Series E-1 Preferred ”), and 7,500,000 of which shall be designated as Series F Preferred Stock (“ Series F Preferred ,” and together with the Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2, Series E Preferred and Series E-1 Preferred, the “ Series Preferred ”). The Common Stock and Preferred Stock shall each have a par value equal to $0.0001 per share. The Corporation shall from time to time in accordance with the General Corporation Law of Delaware increase the


authorized amount of its Common Stock if at any time the number of shares of Common Stock remaining unissued and available for issuance shall not be sufficient to permit conversion of the Preferred Stock.

 

(B) Rights, Preferences, Privileges and Restrictions of Preferred Stock

The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the respective series of Preferred Stock or the holders thereof are as follows:

 

  1. Dividends

(a) The holders of Series F Preferred, Series E-1 Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series B Preferred and Series A Preferred shall be entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, a cash dividend at the rate of $1.60, $1.44, $1.0476, $0.7253, $0.6425, $0.2530, $0.1024 $0.0527 and $0.0230 per share (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares), respectively, per annum on each outstanding share of Series F Preferred, Series E-1 Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series B Preferred and Series A Preferred, as applicable, payable out of funds legally available therefor. Such dividends shall be payable when, as, and if declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, acting in its sole discretion. The right to receive dividends shall not be cumulative, and no right shall accrue to holders of any shares by reason of the fact that dividends on such shares are not declared and paid in any prior year.

(b) No dividend, whether in cash or property, shall be paid or declared and set aside in any period with respect to the Common Stock, unless and until dividends have been paid or declared and set aside for payment in such year with respect to every outstanding series of Preferred Stock in an amount for each such series of Preferred Stock equal to the annual dividend rates stated above. After payment of dividends at the annual rates set forth above, any additional dividends declared shall be distributed among all holders of Preferred Stock and Common Stock in proportion to the number of shares of Common Stock that would be held by each such holder if all shares of Preferred Stock were converted into Class A Common pursuant to Section 4 hereof. This Section 1(b) shall not apply to a dividend solely in Common Stock to which the provisions of Section 4(d)(ii)(B) hereof are applicable.

(c) If at the time any shares of Preferred Stock are converted into Class A Common there are any accrued but unpaid dividends on such shares, then the Corporation at its option shall either pay the unpaid dividends or issue additional shares of Class A Common in the amount of the unpaid dividends at the applicable fair market value for such shares then in effect.

 

  2. Liquidation

(a) In the event of any liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, either voluntary or involuntary, the holders of the Series F Preferred shall be entitled to receive, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets of the Corporation to the holders of any other series of Preferred Stock and Common Stock, (i) an amount equal to $20.00 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits,

 

2


recapitalizations or the like), plus (ii) an additional amount equal to $3.00 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like) per year, which additional amount shall accrue quarterly following the Original Issue Date (as defined in Section 4(d)(i)(B)(2) below) for the Series F Preferred on the basis of a 360 day year with no compounding (the sum of (i) and (ii), the “ Series F Return ”), per share of Series F Preferred, plus (iii) all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares. If the assets available for distribution to the holders of Series F Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the preferential amount in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably to the holders of Series F Preferred Stock in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive. After the payment in full of the preferential amount has been made to the holders of Series F Preferred Stock, the holders of the Series A Preferred, the Series B Preferred, the Series C Preferred, the Series D Preferred, the Series D-1 Preferred, the Series D-2 Preferred, the Series E Preferred and the Series E-1 Preferred (together, the “ Junior Preferred ”) shall be entitled to receive on a pari passu basis, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets of the Corporation to the holders of the Common Stock, the amount of $0.2869, $0.6585, $1.28, $3.1619, $8.0314, $9.0657, $13.0949 and $18.00 per share of Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series E Preferred and Series E-1 Preferred, respectively (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares. If the assets available for distribution to the holders of the Junior Preferred shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably to the holders of the Junior Preferred in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive. After payment in full of the preferential amounts has been made to the holders of Preferred Stock, all remaining assets of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably among the holders of the Common Stock, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, and Series D-2 Preferred in proportion to the number of shares of Common Stock that would be held by each such holder if all shares of Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, and Series D-2 Preferred were converted into Class A Common pursuant to Section 4 hereof; provided, however, that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series B Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $1.6463 per share of Series B Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further, however, that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series C Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $3.20 per share of Series C Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further, however, that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $7.9048 per share of Series D Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further, however, that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D-1 Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $16.0628 per share of Series D-1 Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further,

 

3


however, that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D-2 Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $18.1314 per share of Series D-2 Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends.

(b) After the amounts set forth in Section 2(a) have been paid in full, all remaining assets of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably among the holders of the Common Stock.

(c) For purposes of this Section 2, a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation (a “ Liquidation Event ”) (i) shall be deemed to include (A) the Corporation’s sale, lease, exclusive license or other disposition of all or substantially all of its assets, and (B) the acquisition of the Corporation by another entity or person by means of any transaction or series of related transactions to which the Corporation is a party (including, without limitation, any stock acquisition, merger or other form of corporate reorganization) other than a transaction or series of related transactions in which the holders of the voting securities of the Corporation outstanding immediately prior to such transaction or series of related transactions retain, immediately after such transaction or series of related transactions, as a result of shares in the Corporation held by such holders prior to such transaction or series of related transactions, at least a majority of the total voting power represented by the outstanding voting securities of the Corporation or such other surviving or resulting entity (or, if the Corporation or such other surviving or resulting entity is a wholly owned subsidiary immediately following such acquisition, its parent) (any such event described in Section 2(c)(i)(A) and (B), a “ Deemed Liquidation Event ”; for avoidance of doubt, any reference to Liquidation Event in this Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation shall also include a Deemed Liquidation Event) and (ii) shall entitle the holders of each series of Preferred Stock to receive at the closing of any Liquidation Event and at each date after such closing on which additional amounts (such as earnout payments, escrow amounts and other contingent payments) are paid to stockholders of the Corporation the greater of (x) the amount to which such holder of Preferred Stock is entitled pursuant to Section 2(a) (without giving effect to this Section 2(c)) or (y) the amount such holder of Preferred Stock would be entitled to receive had such holder of Preferred Stock converted its shares of such series of Preferred Stock into Class A Common as provided in Section 4, immediately prior to the closing, evaluating this Section 2(c)(ii) with respect to each series of Preferred Stock taking into account the application of this Section 2(c)(ii) with respect to each other series of Preferred Stock. For the sake of clarification, an equity financing in which the Corporation is the surviving entity and the sole purpose of which is raising capital shall not be considered a Deemed Liquidation hereunder. The treatment of any transaction or series of related transactions as a Deemed Liquidation may be waived by the consent or vote of sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series F Preferred.

(d) Unless otherwise specified in a definitive agreement approved by the stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with the Delaware General Corporation Law, this Certificate of Incorporation and the Corporation’s bylaws, in each case as then in effect, the value of any securities to be delivered to the stockholders pursuant to this Section 2 shall be determined as follows:

(i) If traded on a national securities exchange, the value shall be deemed to be the average of the closing prices of the securities on such exchange over the thirty (30) day period ending three (3) days prior to the closing of such transaction;

 

4


(ii) If actively traded over the counter, the value shall be deemed to be the average of the closing bid prices over the thirty (30) day period ending three (3) days prior to the closing of such transaction; and

(iii) If there is no active public market, the value shall be the fair market value thereof as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

Notwithstanding the above, the method of valuation of securities subject to investment letters or other similar restrictions on free marketability shall take into account an appropriate discount (as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors) from the market value as determined pursuant to the preceding clauses (i), (ii) and (iii), so as to reflect the approximate fair market value thereof.

(e) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Section 2, the Corporation may at any time, out of funds legally available for such purpose, repurchase shares of Common Stock at cost (or the lesser of cost or fair market value) issued to or held by officers, directors, employees or other service providers upon termination of their employment or services pursuant to agreements providing the Corporation with such a right of repurchase, whether or not all declared dividends have been paid or set aside for payment and whether or not all Preferred Stock required to be redeemed by the Corporation has been redeemed or funds have been set aside for such purpose.

 

  3. Redemption

(a) If requested by the holders of not less than sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred (as defined in Section 5(a) below), voting as a single class on an as-converted basis, at any time after July 3, 2019, the Corporation shall redeem all outstanding shares of Preferred Stock in three equal, annual installments (each a “ Redemption Date ”), from any funds legally available for such purpose; provided, however, that if such a request is made, the prior approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred shall also be required to redeem the shares of Series E Preferred, and the prior approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series F Preferred shall also be required to redeem the shares of Series F Preferred. The number of shares to be redeemed from each holder on each Redemption Date shall equal the total number of shares of each series of Preferred Stock held by such holder on the date of the applicable Redemption Notice (as defined below), divided by the number of Redemption Dates remaining as of the date of the Redemption Notice, including the Redemption Date to which such calculation applies, minus the number of shares of that series of Preferred Stock that such holder converts into Class A Common after the date of the applicable Redemption Notice and prior to such Redemption Date. The Corporation shall effect redemption by paying cash in an amount equal to $0.2869 per share of Series A Preferred, $0.6585 per share of Series B Preferred, $1.28 per share of Series C Preferred, $3.1619 per share of Series D Preferred, $8.0314 per share of Series D-1 Preferred, $9.0657 per share of Series D-2 Preferred,

 

5


$13.0949 per share of Series E Preferred, $18.00 per share of Series E-1 Preferred and the Series F Return calculated through the applicable Redemption Date per share of Series F Preferred (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares (the “ Redemption Prices ”).

(b) If the funds of the Corporation legally available for redemption of shares of Preferred Stock on any Redemption Date are insufficient to redeem the total number of shares of Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such date, those funds that are legally available will first be used to redeem shares from the holders of the Series F Preferred ratably in proportion to the aggregate Redemption Price that would be payable to each holder of Series F Preferred. After the full redemption of the Series F Preferred to be redeemed on such date, the remaining funds legally available for redemption will be used to redeem shares from the holders of the Junior Preferred, on a pari passu basis and ratably in proportion to the aggregate Redemption Price that would be payable to each holder of Junior Preferred if all shares of Junior Preferred required to be redeemed were being redeemed. If any holder holds more than one series of Junior Preferred, the same proportion of each series of shares held by such holder will be redeemed. All shares of Preferred Stock not redeemed on any particular Redemption Date, whether or not such shares were supposed to be redeemed on such date or any subsequent Redemption Date, shall remain outstanding for all purposes and entitled to all the rights and preferences provided herein, including the rights of conversion set forth herein and with respect to the Series F Preferred, including the additional accrual of the Series F Return through the applicable Redemption Date of such shares. If any time thereafter additional funds become legally available for the redemption, such funds will immediately be used to redeem the balance of the shares which the Corporation has become obliged to redeem on any Redemption Date but which it has not redeemed.

(c) At least thirty (30) days prior to each Redemption Date, the Corporation shall mail a redemption notice (the “ Redemption Notice ”), first class postage prepaid, to each holder of record of Preferred Stock as of the close of business two (2) business days preceding the mailing date, at the address last shown on the records of the Corporation for such holder. The Redemption Notice shall specify the number of shares to be redeemed from such holder, the Redemption Date, the Redemption Price and the place at which payment may be obtained, and shall call upon such holder to surrender to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated, the certificate or certificates representing the shares to be redeemed. On or after the Redemption Date, each holder of Preferred Stock to be redeemed shall surrender to the Corporation the certificate or certificates representing such shares, in the manner and at the place designated in the Redemption Notice. Each surrendered certificate shall be cancelled, and the Redemption Price for such shares shall then be payable to the order of the person whose name appears on such certificate or certificates as the owner thereof. If less than all the shares represented by any such certificate are redeemed, a new certificate shall be issued representing the unredeemed shares. Nothing herein shall be deemed to prevent a holder of Preferred Stock from converting all or part of such holder’s shares into Class A Common in accordance with the terms of Section 4 hereof at any time prior to a Redemption Date covering such shares, and the provisions of this Section 3 shall not apply to any shares so converted.

 

6


(d) From and after the applicable Redemption Date, unless there has been a failure for any reason in payment of the Redemption Price or if the Redemption Price has been deposited into escrow by the Corporation, subject only to the receipt of stock certificates by the Corporation from the holder thereof together with valid stock powers attached transferring ownership of such shares to the Corporation, the shares of Preferred Stock designated for redemption in the applicable Redemption Notice with respect to which the Redemption Price has been paid in full or the Redemption Price has been so placed in escrow shall cease to be outstanding and shall no longer be transferred on the books of the Corporation, and all rights of the holders with respect to such shares shall cease.

 

  4. Conversion

(a) Right to Convert . Each share of Preferred Stock shall be convertible, at the option of the holder thereof, at any time after the date of issuance of such share, at the office of the Corporation or any transfer agent for such stock, into such number of fully paid and nonassessable shares of Class A Common as is determined by dividing $0.2869 in the case of Series A Preferred, $0.6585 in the case of Series B Preferred, $1.28 in the case of Series C Preferred, $3.1619 in the case of Series D Preferred, $8.0314 in the case of Series D-1 Preferred, $9.0657 in the case of Series D-2 Preferred, $13.0949 in the case of Series E Preferred, $18.00 in the case of Series E-1 Preferred and $20.00 in the case of Series F Preferred, in each case as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares, by the then effective Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock (such result, the “ Conversion Rate ”). The initial Series A Conversion Price shall be $0.2869 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series B Conversion Price shall be $0.6585 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series C Conversion Price shall be $1.28 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D Conversion Price shall be $3.1619 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D-1 Conversion Price shall be $8.0314 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D-2 Conversion Price shall be $9.0657 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series E Conversion Price shall be $13.0949 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series E-1 Conversion Price shall be $18.00 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series F Conversion Price shall be $20.00 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4.

(b) Automatic Conversion .

(i) Subject to Section 4(b)(ii) below, each share of Preferred Stock shall automatically be converted into shares of Class A Common at the then effective Conversion Rate applicable to such share of Preferred Stock (i) with the approval, by affirmative vote, written consent, or agreement, of the holders of at least (A) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as one class on an as-converted basis; (B) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class; (C) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D Preferred, voting as a separate class; and (D) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series F Preferred, voting as a separate class; provided, however, if such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) is in

 

7


conjunction with a Liquidation Event and if the proceeds of such Liquidation Event to be received by the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred as holders of Class A Common (i.e., after giving effect to such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i)), as applicable, would be less, in the aggregate, than the proceeds of such Liquidation Event to be received by the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred as holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred (i.e., assuming that no such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) had occurred with respect to such series), as applicable, then the Series E Conversion Price, the Series D-2 Conversion Price and/or the Series D-1 Conversion Price, as the case may be, otherwise applicable to such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) shall be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share that would result in the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred and/or Series D-1 Preferred, as applicable, being automatically converted into that number of shares of Class A Common that would cause such holders to receive, as holders of such Class A Common in the applicable Liquidation Event, an aggregate amount that is equal to the amount that would have been distributed to the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred and/or Series D-1 Preferred, as applicable, pursuant to Section 2(a) with respect to such Liquidation Event had such automatic conversion to Class A Common pursuant to this clause (i) not occurred, or (ii) upon the closing of a firmly underwritten public offering pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, of Class A Common (or any other class of Common Stock that may be authorized pursuant to any amendment to this Certificate of Incorporation, which shall be referred to in this Section 4 as “ Class A Common ”) for the account of the Corporation in an offering to the public of not less than $100,000,000 (before payment of underwriter commissions and offering expenses) in which the Corporation’s shares of Class A Common have been listed for trading on the New York Stock Exchange, NASDAQ Global Select Market or NASDAQ Global Market (a “ Qualified IPO ”); provided, however, if the price per share of Class A Common sold in any public offering of Class A Common (including a Qualified IPO) is less than $9.0657 per share (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like) and is less than the then-effective Series D-2 Conversion Price, the Series D-2 Conversion Price shall, immediately prior to the closing of such public offering, be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share equal to the price per share of Class A Common sold in the applicable public offering (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares); provided further, however, if the price per share of stock sold in any public offering of Class A Common (including a Qualified IPO) is less than $13.0949 per share (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like) and is less than the then-effective Series E Conversion Price, the Series E Conversion Price shall, immediately prior to the closing of such public offering, be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share equal to the price per share of Class A Common sold in the applicable public offering (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares); provided further, however, that notwithstanding clauses (i) and (ii) above, or anything else herein to the contrary, any automatic conversion of the Series D-2 Preferred that is not effected in connection with a Liquidation Event or a Qualified IPO shall also require the approval, by affirmative vote or written consent, of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 Preferred, voting as a separate class; provided further, however, that notwithstanding clauses (i) and (ii) above, or anything else herein to the contrary, any automatic conversion of the Series E Preferred that is

 

8


not effected in connection with a Liquidation Event or a Qualified IPO shall also require the approval, by affirmative vote or written consent, of the holders of at least sixty percent (60%) of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class. Any adjustment to the Conversion Price under this Section 4(b) shall be separate and apart from any adjustment to the Conversion Price provided for under Section 4(d)(i) hereof and, for the avoidance of doubt, the carve-out to the definition of “Additional Shares of Common Stock” set forth in Section 4(d)(i)(B)(4)(VIII) shall not have any impact on any Conversion Price adjustment required under this Section 4(b).

(ii) Series F Special Conversion Rights .

(A) Notwithstanding Section 4(b)(i) above and subject to Section 4(b)(ii)(B) below, in connection with any conversion of the Series F Preferred in connection with a Qualified IPO or any other initial public offering in which the holders of Series F Preferred have agreed to convert their shares (collectively with a Qualified IPO, an “ Approved Public Offering ”) , if the price per share of Class A Common sold in any Approved Public Offering is less than the Series F Return calculated as of the date such offering is consummated, each share of Series F Preferred shall, immediately prior to the closing of such Approved Public Offering, be automatically converted into a number of shares of Class A Common equal to the Series F Return divided by the price per share of Class A Common sold in the Approved Public Offering; provided, however, that if the Approved Public Offering is consummated on or before the one-year anniversary of the Original Issue Date (as defined in Section 4(d)(i)(B)(2) below) of the Series F Preferred, then each share of Series F Preferred shall automatically convert into shares of Class A Common pursuant to Section 4(b)(ii)(B) below; provided further, however, for any Approved Public Offering consummated after the one-year anniversary of the Original Issue Date, if the price per share of Class A Common sold in any Approved Public Offering of Class A Common is less than $13.0949 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like), then each share of Series F Preferred shall, immediately prior to the closing of such Approved Public Offering, be automatically converted into a number of shares of Class A Common equal to the Series F Return calculated as of the date such offering is consummated divided by $13.0949 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) (such number of shares resulting from the conversion, the “ Series F Limitation ”); provided further, however, that if the product of the Series F Limitation multiplied by the price per share of Class A Common sold in the Approved Public Offering is less than $20.00 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like), then the Series F Limitation shall not apply and each share of Series F Preferred shall, immediately prior to the closing of such Approved Public Offering, be automatically converted into a number of shares of Class A Common equal to $20.00 (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like) divided by the price per share of Class A Common sold in the Approved Public Offering.

(B) Notwithstanding Sections 4(b)(i) or 4(b)(ii)(A) above, in the event that the Approved Public Offering is consummated on or before the one-year anniversary of the Original Issue Date for the Series F Preferred, each share of Series F Preferred shall immediately prior to the closing of such Approved Public Offering be automatically converted into a number of shares of Class A Common equal to (I) $20.00 (as adjusted for any

 

9


stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) divided by (II) the lesser of (a) an amount equal to 90% of the price per share of Class A Common sold in the Approved Public Offering or (b) the Series F Conversion Price.

(C) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the number of shares of Class A Common resulting from the conversion contemplated by Section 4(b)(ii)(A) or 4(b)(ii)(B) is less than the number of Class A Common shares that would have resulted from a conversion of Series F Preferred taking place immediately prior to the closing of the Approved Public Offering in accordance with Section 4(b)(i) without giving effect to Sections 4(b)(ii)(A) or 4(b)(ii)(B), then the outstanding shares of Series F Preferred shall be automatically converted to the number of Class A Common shares that would have resulted had the holders of Series F Preferred elected to convert their shares immediately prior to the closing of the Approved Public Offering in accordance with Section 4(b)(i) without giving effect to Sections 4(b)(ii)(A) or 4(b)(ii)(B).

(c) Mechanics of Conversion . No fractional shares of Class A Common shall be issued upon conversion of Preferred Stock. In lieu of any fractional shares to which the holder would otherwise be entitled, the Corporation shall pay cash equal to such fraction multiplied by the then effective Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock. Conversion of shares of Preferred Stock at the option of the holder thereof shall be effected by delivery, to the office of the Corporation or to any transfer agent for such shares, of duly endorsed certificates for the shares being converted and of written notice to the Corporation that the holder elects to convert such shares. Conversion shall be deemed to occur immediately prior to the close of business on the date the shares and notice are delivered. Automatic conversion of the Preferred Stock pursuant to this section shall be effective without any further action on the part of the holders of such shares and shall be effective whether or not the certificates for such shares are surrendered to the Corporation or its transfer agent. Holders entitled to receive Class A Common upon conversion of Preferred Stock shall be treated for all purposes as the record holders of such shares of Class A Common on the date conversion is deemed to occur. The Corporation shall not be obligated to issue certificates evidencing shares of Class A Common issuable upon conversion of Preferred Stock unless either (i) the certificates evidencing such shares being converted are delivered to the Corporation or its transfer agent as provided above, or (ii) the holder (A) notifies the Corporation or its transfer agent that such certificates have been lost, stolen or destroyed and (B) executes an agreement, and at the Corporation’s election provides a surety bond or other security, satisfactory to the Corporation to indemnify the Corporation from any loss incurred by it in connection with such certificates. The Corporation shall, as soon as practicable after the delivery of such certificates, or the agreement to indemnify in the case of a lost certificate, issue and deliver at such office to the holder of the shares of Preferred Stock being converted, a certificate or certificates for the number of shares of Class A Common to which the holder is entitled and a check payable to the holder for (i) any cash due with respect to fractional shares and (ii) any declared and unpaid dividends on the Series Preferred being converted.

 

10


(d) Adjustments of Conversion Price for Certain Diluting Issuances, Splits and Combinations. In addition to as provided in 4(b), the applicable Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock shall be subject to adjustment from time to time as follows:

(i) Adjustment of Conversion Price Upon Issuance of Additional Shares of Common Stock below the Conversion Price . If the Corporation issues Additional Shares of Common Stock (including Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to be issued pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C)) without consideration or for an Effective Price (as defined below) less than the then effective Conversion Price for a series of Preferred Stock in effect immediately prior to such issue (a “ Qualifying Dilutive Issuance ”), then and in such event, the Conversion Price for such series shall be reduced, concurrently with such issue, to a price (calculated to the nearest cent) as set forth herein, unless otherwise provided in this Section 4. The “ Effective Price ” of Additional Shares of Common Stock shall mean the quotient determined by dividing the total number of Additional Shares of Common Stock issued or sold, or deemed to have been issued or sold by the Corporation, into the aggregate consideration received, or deemed to have been received by the Corporation for such issue, for such Additional Shares of Common Stock. In the event that the number of shares of Additional Shares of Common Stock or the Effective Price cannot be ascertained at the time of issuance, such Additional Shares of Common Stock shall be deemed issued immediately upon the occurrence of the first event that makes such number of shares or the Effective Price, as applicable, ascertainable.

(A) Adjustment Formula . Whenever the Conversion Price for a given series of Preferred Stock is adjusted pursuant to this Section 4(d)(i), the new Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock shall be determined by multiplying the existing Conversion Price by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such issue (the “ Common Stock Outstanding ”) plus the number of shares of Common Stock which the aggregate consideration received by the Corporation for the total number of Additional Shares of Common Stock so issued would purchase at the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock in effect immediately prior to such issue, and the denominator of which shall be the number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to such issue plus the number of such Additional Shares of Common Stock so issued. For the purpose of this paragraph and paragraph 4(d)(ii)(B), the number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding shall be deemed to include all Common Stock issued and outstanding, and the Common Stock issuable upon exercise and/or conversion of all outstanding Preferred Stock, upon conversion of all other outstanding Convertible Securities and upon exercise of all outstanding Options whether vested or unvested and whether or not immediately exercisable (and assuming conversion of Convertible Securities issuable upon exercise of Options therefor).

(B) Special Definitions . For purposes of this Section 4, the following definitions shall apply:

(1) “ Options ” shall mean rights, options or warrants to subscribe for, purchase or otherwise acquire Common Stock or Convertible Securities.

(2) “ Original Issue Date ” shall mean with respect to a series of Preferred Stock the date on which the first share of such series of Preferred Stock was issued.

 

11


(3) “ Convertible Securities ” shall mean instruments of indebtedness or securities convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock including without limitation, the Preferred Stock.

(4) “ Additional Shares of Common Stock ” for any series of Preferred Stock shall mean all shares of Common Stock issued (or, pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C), deemed to be issued) by the Corporation after the Original Issue Date for such series, other than as follows:

(I) upon conversion of shares of Preferred Stock;

(II) shares of Common Stock, options or warrants to purchase shares of Common Stock issued to officers, directors, employees of and service providers to the Corporation pursuant to plans and arrangements approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least three (3) of the Preferred Directors (as defined below);

(III) as a dividend or other distribution on the Preferred Stock or any event for which adjustment is made pursuant to Section 4(d)(ii), 4(e), 4(f) or 4(g);

(IV) upon the exercise or conversion of outstanding options or warrants;

(V) shares of capital stock, or options or warrants to purchase capital stock, issued to financial institutions or lessors in connection with bona fide commercial credit arrangements, equipment financings, real property leases, or similar transactions, the terms of which have been approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least three (3) of the Preferred Directors;

(VI) shares of capital stock, or options or warrants to purchase capital stock, issued in connection with strategic collaborations, development agreements or licensing transactions, the terms of which have been approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least three (3) of the Preferred Directors;

(VII) shares of capital stock, or warrants or options to purchase capital stock, issued in connection with bona fide acquisitions, mergers or similar transactions, the terms of which are approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least three (3) of the Preferred Directors; and

(VIII) shares of Common Stock issued or issuable in a Qualified IPO.

(C) Deemed Issue of Additional Shares of Common Stock . If the Corporation at any time after the Original Issue Date for a series of Preferred Stock shall issue or sell any Options or Convertible Securities or shall fix a record date for the determination of any holders of any class of securities entitled to receive any such Options or Convertible

 

12


Securities, then the maximum number of shares (as set forth in the instrument relating thereto without regard to any provisions contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such number) of Common Stock issuable upon the exercise of such Options or, in the case of Convertible Securities and Options for Convertible Securities, the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities, shall be deemed to be Additional Shares of Common Stock issued as of the time of such issue or, in case such a record date shall have been fixed, as of the close of business on such record date, provided that in any such case in which Additional Shares of Common Stock are deemed to be issued:

(1) no further adjustment in the Conversion Price for any series of Preferred Stock shall be made upon the subsequent actual issuance of shares of Common Stock or Convertible Securities issued upon the exercise of such Options or conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities;

(2) if such Options or Convertible Securities by their terms provide, with the passage of time or otherwise, for any increase or decrease in the consideration payable to the Corporation, or increase or decrease in the number of shares of Common Stock issuable, upon the exercise, conversion or exchange thereof, the Conversion Price for each affected series of Preferred Stock computed upon the original issue thereof (or upon the occurrence of a record date with respect thereto), and any subsequent adjustments based thereon, shall, upon any such increase or decrease becoming effective, be recomputed to reflect such increase or decrease insofar as it affects such Options or the rights of conversion or exchange under such Convertible Securities;

(3) upon the expiration of any such Options or any rights of conversion or exchange under such Convertible Securities which shall not have been exercised, the Conversion Price for each affected series of Preferred Stock computed upon the original issue thereof (or upon the occurrence of a record date with respect thereto), and any subsequent adjustments based thereon, shall, upon such expiration, be recomputed as if:

(I) in the case of Convertible Securities or Options for Common Stock, the only additional shares of Common Stock issued were shares of Common Stock, if any, actually issued upon the exercise of such Options or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities, and the consideration received therefor was the consideration actually received by the Corporation for the issue of all such Options, whether or not exercised, plus the consideration actually received by the Corporation upon such exercise, or for the issue of all such Convertible Securities which were actually converted or exchanged, plus the additional consideration, if any, actually received by the Corporation upon such conversion or exchange, and

(II) in the case of Options for Convertible Securities, only the Convertible Securities, if any, actually issued upon the exercise thereof were issued at the time of issue of such Options and the consideration received by the Corporation for the Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to have been then issued was the consideration actually received by the Corporation for the issue of all such Options, whether or not exercised, plus the consideration deemed to have been received by the Corporation upon the issue of the Convertible Securities with respect to which such Options were actually exercised;

 

13


(4) no readjustment pursuant to subsections (2) or (3) above shall have the effect of increasing the Conversion Price for any series of Preferred Stock to an amount which exceeds the lower of (x) the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock, on the original adjustment date, or (y) the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock that would have resulted from any issuance of Additional Shares of Common Stock between the original adjustment date and such readjustment date, and no readjustment shall affect Class A Common issued on conversion of Preferred Stock prior to such readjustment.

(D) Determination of Consideration . For purposes of this Section 4(d), the consideration received by the Corporation for the issue of any Additional Shares of Common Stock shall be computed as follows:

(1) Cash and Property . Such consideration shall:

(I) insofar as it consists of cash, be computed at the aggregate amount of cash received by the Corporation prior to any commissions or expenses paid by the Corporation;

(II) insofar as it consists of property other than cash, be computed at the fair value thereof at the time of such issue, as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors; and

(III) if Additional Shares of Common Stock are issued together with other shares or securities or other assets of the Corporation for consideration which covers both, be the proportion of such consideration so received for the Additional Shares of Common Stock, computed as provided in subsections (I) and (II) above, as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

(2) Options and Convertible Securities . The consideration per share received by the Corporation for Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to have been issued pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C), relating to Options and Convertible Securities, shall be determined by dividing:

(I) the total amount, if any, received or receivable by the Corporation as consideration for the issue of such Options or Convertible Securities, plus the minimum aggregate amount of additional consideration (as set forth in the instruments relating thereto, without regard to any provision contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such consideration) payable to the Corporation upon the exercise of such Option or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities, or in the case of Options for Convertible Securities, the exercise of such Options for Convertible Securities and the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities by

(II) the maximum number of shares of Common Stock (as set forth in the instruments relating thereto, without regard to any provision contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such number) issuable upon the exercise of such Options or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities.

 

14


(E) In the event that the Corporation issues or sells, or is deemed to have issued or sold, Additional Shares of Common Stock in a Qualifying Dilutive Issuance (the “ First Dilutive Issuance ”), then in the event that the Corporation issues or sells, or is deemed to have issued or sold, Additional Shares of Common Stock in a Qualifying Dilutive Issuance other than the First Dilutive Issuance as a part of the same transaction or series of related transactions as the First Dilutive Issuance (a “ Subsequent Dilutive Issuance ”), then and in each such case upon a Subsequent Dilutive Issuance the Conversion Price shall be reduced to the Conversion Price that would have been in effect had the First Dilutive Issuance and each Subsequent Dilutive Issuance all occurred on the closing date of the First Dilutive Issuance.

(ii) Adjustments for Stock Dividends, Combinations or Splits .

(A) Combinations or Splits: If the outstanding shares of Common Stock are subdivided, by stock split or otherwise, into a greater number of shares of Common Stock, then the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock in effect prior to such event shall be proportionately decreased upon the occurrence of such event. If the outstanding shares of Common Stock are combined or consolidated, by reclassification, reverse stock split or otherwise, into a lesser number of shares of Common Stock, then the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock in effect prior to such event shall be proportionately increased upon the occurrence of such event. Any adjustment under this paragraph (ii)(A) shall become effective at the close of business on the date the subdivision or combination becomes effective.

(B) Common Stock Dividends and Distributions: If at any time or from time to time on or after the Original Issue Date the Corporation pays to holders of Common Stock a dividend or other distribution in additional shares of Common Stock, then the Conversion Price then in effect for any series of Preferred Stock shall be decreased as of the time of such issuance, as provided below:

(i) The Conversion Price shall be adjusted by multiplying the Conversion Price then in effect by a fraction:

(A) the numerator of which is the total number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to the time of such issuance, and

(B) the denominator of which is the total number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to the time of such issuance plus the number of shares of Common Stock issuable in payment of such dividend or distribution;

(ii) If the Corporation fixes a record date to determine which holders of Common Stock are entitled to receive such dividend or other distribution, the Conversion Price shall be fixed as of the close of business on such record date, and the number of shares of Common Stock shall be calculated immediately prior to the close of business on such record date; and

 

15


(iii) If such record date is fixed and such dividend is not fully paid or if such distribution is not fully made on the date fixed therefor, the Conversion Price shall be recomputed accordingly as of the close of business on such record date and thereafter the Conversion Price shall be adjusted pursuant to this paragraph (ii)(B) to reflect the actual payment of such dividend or distribution.

(e) Adjustments for Other Distributions . If the Corporation fixes a record date for the determination of holders of Common Stock entitled to receive any distribution payable in securities of the Corporation other than shares of Common Stock (excluding any distribution in which the Preferred Stock participates on an as-converted basis, and any distribution for which adjustment is otherwise made pursuant to this Section 4), then in each such case provision shall be made so that the holders of Preferred Stock receive upon conversion, in addition to the Class A Common issuable upon conversion of their shares, the property or other securities of the Corporation which they would have received had their shares of Preferred Stock been converted into Class A Common immediately prior to such event and had they thereafter retained such securities, subject to all other adjustments called for during such period under this Section 4.

(f) Adjustments for Reclassification, Exchange and Substitution . If the Common Stock is changed into the same or a different number of shares of any other class or series of stock, whether by capital reorganization, reclassification or otherwise (other than a Deemed Liquidation under Section 2 and events for which adjustment is made pursuant to Sections 4(d)(ii) or 4(e) above), the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock then in effect shall, concurrently with the effectiveness of such reorganization, reclassification or change, be adjusted such that the Preferred Stock shall be convertible into, in lieu of the Class A Common which the holders thereof would otherwise have been entitled to receive, a number of shares of such other class or series of capital stock equivalent to the number of shares of such other class or series of capital stock that such holders would have been entitled to receive in such reclassification, capital reorganization or change for the number of shares of Class A Common that the holders would have been entitled to receive upon conversion of their Preferred Stock immediately prior to such reclassification, capital reorganization or change.

(g) No Impairment . The Corporation will not, without the approval of the Preferred Stock and applicable series of Preferred Stock, in each case, as provided in Section 6, avoid or seek to avoid by amendment, merger, consolidation or other corporate reorganization, the observance or performance of any of the terms to be observed or performed hereunder by the Corporation but will at all times in good faith assist in the carrying out of all the provisions of this Section 4 and in the taking of all such action as may be necessary or appropriate in order to protect the Conversion Rights of the holders of the Preferred Stock against impairment.

(h) Certificate as to Adjustments . The Corporation shall promptly compute each Conversion Price adjustment and provide each holder of Preferred Stock a certificate describing such adjustment and showing in detail the facts upon which such adjustment is based. If requested in writing by any holder of Preferred Stock, the Corporation shall provide such holder a certificate describing any Conversion Price adjustments, the current Conversion Price and the amount of Class A Common or other property issuable upon conversion of the particular series of Preferred Stock. The certificate shall set forth such adjustment, showing in detail the

 

16


facts upon which such adjustment or readjustment is based, including a statement of (i) the consideration received or deemed to be received by the Corporation for any Additional Shares of Common Stock issued or sold or deemed to have been issued or sold, (ii) the Conversion Price at the time in effect, (iii) the number of Additional Shares of Common Stock and (iv) the type and amount, if any, of other property which at the time would be received upon conversion of the Series Preferred. Failure to request or provide such notice shall have no effect on any such adjustment.

(i) Notices of Record Date . If the Corporation shall propose at any time:

(A) to declare any dividend or distribution upon its Common Stock other than a distribution payable solely in Common Stock;

(B) to offer for subscription pro rata to the holders of any class or series of its capital stock any additional shares of stock of any class or series or other rights;

(C) to effect any reclassification or recapitalization of its Common Stock; or

(D) to liquidate, dissolve or wind up or to enter into a Deemed Liquidation;

then, in connection with each such event, the Corporation shall send to the holders of the Preferred Stock:

(i) at least twenty (20) days’ prior written notice of the date on which a record shall be taken for such dividend, distribution or subscription rights (and specifying the date on which the holders of Common Stock shall be entitled thereto) or for determining rights to vote in respect of the matters referred to in (C) and (D) above; and

(ii) in the case of the matters referred to in (C) and (D) above, at least 20 days’ prior written notice of the date when the same shall take place (and specifying the date on which the holders of Common Stock shall be entitled to exchange their Common Stock for securities or other property deliverable upon the occurrence of such event).

With respect to (i) and (ii) above, a shorter notice period may be approved by the holders of a majority of the outstanding Series Preferred. Any notice required by the provisions of this section shall be in writing and shall be deemed effectively given: (i) upon personal delivery to the party to be notified, (ii) when sent by facsimile if sent during normal business hours of the recipient; if not, then on the next business day, (iii) five (5) days after having been sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or (iv) one (1) day after deposit with a nationally recognized overnight courier, specifying next day delivery, with verification of receipt. All notices shall be addressed to each holder of record at the address of such holder appearing on the books of the Corporation.

(j) Reservation of Stock Issuable Upon Conversion . This Corporation shall at all times reserve and keep available out of its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common, solely for the purpose of effecting the conversion of the shares of the Preferred Stock,

 

17


such number of its shares of Class A Common as shall from time to time be sufficient to effect the conversion of all outstanding shares of the Preferred Stock; and if at any time the number of authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common shall not be sufficient to effect the conversion of all then outstanding shares of the Preferred Stock, in addition to such other remedies as shall be available to the holder of such Preferred Stock, the Corporation will take such corporate action as may, in the opinion of its counsel, be necessary to increase its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common to such number of shares as shall be sufficient for such purposes, including, without limitation, engaging in best efforts to obtain the requisite stockholder approval of any necessary amendment to this Certificate of Incorporation.

 

  5. Voting

(a) General

Except as expressly provided in this Certificate of Incorporation or as required by law, the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall have no voting rights on any matter on which the stockholders of the Corporation shall be entitled to vote and the shares of Series E-1 Preferred shall not be included in determining the number of shares voting or entitled to vote on any such matters. Except as expressly provided by this Certificate of Incorporation or as required by law, or as may be set forth in agreements among stockholders, the holders of the Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series E Preferred and Series F Preferred (collectively, the “ Voting Preferred ”) shall have the same voting rights as the holders of the Class A Common, may act by written consent in the same manner as the Class A Common, and shall be entitled to notice of any stockholders’ meeting in accordance with the Bylaws of the Corporation, and the holders of Class A Common and the Voting Preferred shall vote as a single class on all matters. Each holder of Class A Common shall be entitled to one vote for each share of Class A Common held, and each holder of Voting Preferred shall be entitled to the number of votes equal to the number of shares of Class A Common into which such shares of Voting Preferred could then be converted. Fractional votes shall not be permitted. Any fractional voting rights resulting from the above formula (after aggregating all shares into which shares of Voting Preferred held by each holder could be converted) shall be rounded to the nearest whole number (with one half being rounded upward). The number of authorized shares of Common Stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares of Common Stock then outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the stock of this Corporation entitled to vote (voting as a single class on an as-converted basis), irrespective of the provisions of section 242(b)(2) of Delaware General Corporate Law.

(b) Election of Directors .

(i) Until the date upon which the Preferred Stock is automatically converted in accordance with Section 4(b) above: At each meeting or pursuant to each consent of the Corporation’s stockholders for the election of directors, (A) the holders of the Series A Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series A Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (B) the holders of the Series B Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1)

 

18


member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series B Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (C) the holders of the Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series C Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (D) the holders of the Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series E Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (E) the holders of Series F Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series F Director ,” and together with the Series A Director, the Series B Director, the Series C Director and the Series E Director, the “ Preferred Directors ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (F) the holders of Class A Common, voting as a separate class (without the vote of shares of outstanding Preferred Stock), shall be entitled to elect two (2) members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and to remove from office such directors and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such directors, and (G) the holders of the Voting Preferred and Class A Common, voting as a single class on an as-converted basis, shall be entitled to elect all other members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and to remove from office such directors and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director. Following an automatic conversion of the Preferred Stock in accordance with Section 4(b), the holders of the Class A Common shall be entitled to elect all of the members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

 

  6. Protective Provisions

(a) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as a single class on an as-converted basis, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation or otherwise, that:

(i) amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of any series of Preferred Stock;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Common Stock or any series of Preferred Stock;

(iii) reclassifies the Preferred Stock or authorizes any equity securities or any other securities convertible into equity securities of the Corporation having rights, preferences or privileges senior to or on a parity with the Preferred Stock or any increase in the authorized or designated number of any such new class or series;

(iv) amends or waives any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws in a manner that would alter or change the rights, preferences or privileges of the shares of the Preferred Stock;

 

19


(v) redeems or repurchases shares, other than repurchases of Common Stock at cost (or the lesser of cost or fair market value) upon termination of an officer, employee, director or consultant pursuant to an option agreement or restricted stock purchase agreement, or other agreement previously approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, or pursuant to equity incentive agreements with service providers giving the Corporation the right to repurchase shares upon the termination of services, or pursuant to the redemption provisions set forth herein;

(vi) authorizes or obligates the Corporation to pay any dividend or make any other distribution in respect of the Corporation’s capital stock;

(vii) changes the authorized number of directors; or

(viii) effects or results in a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, or results in a Deemed Liquidation.

(b) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series A Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series A Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series A Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series A Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(b).

(c) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series B Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series B Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series B Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series B Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(c).

 

20


(d) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series C Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series C Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series C Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(d).

(e) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(e).

(f) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-1 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D-1 Preferred;

 

21


(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D-1 Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D-1 Conversion Price pursuant to Sections 4(b)(i) or 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(f).

(g) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D-2 Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D-2 Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D-2 Conversion Price or any other Series D-2 Preferred conversion rights pursuant to any provision of Section 4 hereof (including Sections 4(b)(i), 4(b)(ii), 4(d)(i), 4(d)(ii), 4(e) or 4(f) hereof) or the required vote of the Series D-2 Preferred under Section 4(b);

(iv) waives the treatment of any event as a Deemed Liquidation, or amends the definition of a Deemed Liquidation in the Certificate of Incorporation solely to exclude a transaction that would otherwise qualify; or

(v) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(g).

(h) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty percent (60%) of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation, business combination or otherwise, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting, board designation or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series E Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series E Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series E Conversion Price or any other Series E Preferred conversion rights pursuant to any provision of Section 4 hereof (including Sections 4(b)(i), 4(b)(ii), 4(d)(i), 4(d)(ii), 4(e) or 4(f) hereof) or the required vote of the Series E Preferred under Section 4(b);

 

22


(iv) waives the treatment of any event as a Deemed Liquidation, or amends the definition of a Deemed Liquidation in the Certificate of Incorporation to exclude a transaction that would otherwise qualify; or

(v) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(h).

(i) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E-1 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation, business combination or otherwise, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series E-1 Preferred unless such alteration or change in power, preferences or other special rights, privileges or restrictions also applies to the other series of Preferred Stock (in which case no separate approval of the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall be required hereunder); or

(ii) waives, amends, alters, or repeals this Section 6(i), unless such waiver, amendment, alteration or repeal applies equally to the other series of Preferred Stock (in which case no separate approval of the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall be required hereunder).

(j) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series F Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation, business combination or otherwise, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) redeems or repurchases shares, other than repurchases of Common Stock at cost (or the lesser of cost or fair market value) upon termination of an officer, employee, director or consultant pursuant to an option agreement or restricted stock purchase agreement, or other agreement previously approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, or pursuant to equity incentive agreements with service providers giving the Corporation the right to repurchase shares upon the termination of services, or pursuant to the redemption provisions set forth herein;

(ii) authorizes or obligates the Corporation to pay any cash dividend or make any other cash distribution in respect of the Corporation’s capital stock;

(iii) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting, board designation or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series F Preferred;

 

23


(iv) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series F Preferred;

(v) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series F Conversion Price or any other Series F Preferred conversion rights pursuant to any provision of Section 4 hereof;

(vi) waives the treatment of any event as a Deemed Liquidation or Qualified IPO, or amends the definition of a Deemed Liquidation or Qualified IPO in the Certificate of Incorporation to exclude a transaction that would otherwise qualify as such; or

(vii) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(j).

 

  7. Status of Converted Shares

In the event any shares of Preferred Stock shall be converted pursuant to Section 4 hereof, the shares so converted shall be canceled and shall not be issuable by the Corporation. This Certificate of Incorporation shall be appropriately amended to effect the corresponding reduction in the Corporation’s authorized capital stock.

 

(C) Rights, Preferences, Privileges and Restrictions of Common Stock

1. Class A Common . The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the Class A Common or the holders thereof are as follows:

(a) Dividends . Subject to Section 1 of Division B of this Article IV, the holders of the Class A Common shall be entitled to receive, when and as declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, out of any assets of the Corporation legally available therefor, such dividends as may be declared from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

(b) Liquidation . Upon the liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, the assets of the Corporation shall be distributed as provided in Section 2 of Division B of this Article IV.

(c) Redemption . The Class A Common is not redeemable other than at the sole discretion of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, pursuant to the terms of a written plan, or agreements with individual stockholders that provide for repurchases by the Corporation in connection with the termination of such stockholder’s services to the Corporation.

(d) Voting . Each holder of Class A Common shall be entitled to one vote for each share of Class A Common held, shall be entitled to notice of any stockholders’ meeting in accordance with the Bylaws of the Corporation, and shall be entitled to vote upon such matters and in such manner as may be provided by law and this Certificate of Incorporation or as may be set forth in agreements among stockholders.

 

24


2. Class B Common . The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the Class B Common or the holders thereof are as follows:

(a) Dividends . Subject to Section 1 of Division B of this Article IV, the holders of the Class B Common shall be entitled to receive, when and as declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, out of any assets of the Corporation legally available therefor, such dividends as may be declared from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

(b) Liquidation . Upon the liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, the assets of the Corporation shall be distributed as provided in Section 2 of Division B of this Article IV.

(c) Redemption . The Class B Common is not redeemable other than at the sole discretion of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, pursuant to the terms of a written plan, or agreements with individual stockholders that provide for repurchases by the Corporation in connection with the termination of such stockholder’s services to the Corporation.

(d) Voting . Except as otherwise required by law, the Class B Common shall have no voting rights on any matter on which the stockholders of the Corporation shall be entitled to vote and the shares of Class B Common shall not be included in determining the number of shares voting or entitled to vote on any such matters; provided, however, that so long as any shares of Class B Common remain outstanding, the Corporation shall not, without the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class B Common at a meeting of the holders of Class B Common duly called for such purpose (or the written consent of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class B Common), amend, alter or repeal (in any manner, including by merger, consolidation, combination, reclassification or otherwise) this Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation so as to adversely affect (disproportionately relative to the Class A Common) the preferences, rights or powers of the Class B Common.

(e) Conversion. The holders of Class B Common shall have conversion rights as follows:

(i) Automatic Conversion . Each share of Class B Common shall automatically be converted into one share of Class A Common at such time as is determined by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, in its sole discretion; provided , however , that any shares of Class B Common that are acquired by any holder of Voting Preferred that is not an employee of the Corporation or a member of the immediate family or controlled affiliate of an employee of the Corporation (including by dividend or other distribution by the Corporation) shall automatically be converted into shares of Class A Common (on a one-for-one basis) at the time of such acquisition.

(ii) Mechanics of Conversion . The outstanding shares of Class B Common shall be converted automatically without any further action by the holders of such

 

25


shares whether or not the certificates representing such shares are surrendered to the Corporation or its transfer agent, and provided further that the Corporation shall not be obligated to issue certificates evidencing the shares of Class A Common issuable upon such automatic conversion unless the certificates evidencing such shares of Class B Common are either delivered to the Corporation or its transfer agent, or the holder notifies the Corporation or its transfer agent that such certificates have been lost, stolen or destroyed and executes an agreement satisfactory to the Corporation to indemnify the Corporation from any loss incurred by it in connection with such certificates. The Corporation shall, as soon as practicable after such delivery, or such agreement and indemnification in the case of a lost certificate, issue and deliver at such office to such holder of Class B Common, a certificate or certificates for the number of shares of Class A Common to which the holder shall be entitled as aforesaid and a check payable to the holder in the amount of any cash amounts payable as the result of a conversion into fractional shares of Class A Common as set forth in Section 2(e)(i) of Division C of this Article IV. Such conversion shall be deemed to occur as set forth in Section 2(e)(i) of Division C of this Article IV, and the person or persons entitled to receive the shares of Class A Common issuable upon such conversion shall be treated for all purposes as the record holder or holders of such shares of Class A Common on such date.

(iii) No Fractional Shares and Certificate as to Adjustments . No fractional shares of Class A Common shall be issued upon conversion of Class B Common. In lieu of any fractional shares to which the holder would otherwise be entitled, the Corporation shall pay cash equal to such fraction multiplied by the then fair market value of a share of Class A Common as determined by the Board of Directors of the Corporation. For such purpose, all shares of Class B Common held by each holder of Class B Common shall be aggregated, and any resulting fractional share of Class A Common shall be paid in cash.

(iv)  Reservation of Common Stock Issuable Upon Conversion . The Corporation shall at all times reserve and keep available out of its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common solely for the purpose of effecting the conversion of the shares of Class B Common such number of its shares of Class A Common as shall from time to time be sufficient to effect the conversion of all outstanding shares of Class B Common; and if at any time the number of authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common shall not be sufficient to effect the conversion of all then outstanding shares of Class B Common, the Corporation will take such corporate action as may, in the opinion of its counsel, be necessary to increase its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common to such number of shares as shall be sufficient for such purpose.

(f) Adjustments for Stock Dividends, Combinations or Splits . If the Corporation shall at any time or from time to time effect a stock dividend, combination or subdivision of the outstanding shares of Class A Common, then the Corporation shall effect a comparable stock dividend, combination or subdivision (as applicable) of the outstanding shares of Class B Common. If the Corporation shall at any time or from time to time effect a stock dividend, combination or subdivision of the outstanding shares of Class B Common, then the Corporation shall effect a comparable stock dividend, combination or subdivision (as applicable) of the outstanding shares of Class A Common.

 

26


ARTICLE V

The authorized number of Directors of this Corporation shall be determined in the manner provided herein and by the Bylaws and may be increased or decreased from time to time in the manner provided herein and therein.

ARTICLE VI

The personal liability of the directors to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director shall be eliminated to the fullest extent under applicable law. If the General Corporation Law or any other law of the State of Delaware is amended after approval by the stockholders of this Article VI to authorize corporate action further eliminating or limiting the personal liability of directors, then the liability of a director of the Corporation shall be eliminated or limited to the fullest extent permitted by the General Corporation Law as so amended.

Any repeal or modification of the foregoing provisions of this Article VI by the stockholders of the Corporation shall not adversely affect any right or protection of a director of the Corporation existing at the time of, or increase the liability of any director of the Corporation with respect to any acts or omissions of such director occurring prior to, such repeal or modification.

ARTICLE VII

To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, the Corporation is authorized to provide indemnification of (and advancement of expenses to) directors, officers and agents of the Corporation (and any other persons to which General Corporation Law permits the Corporation to provide indemnification) through Bylaw provisions, agreements with such agents or other persons, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise, in excess of the indemnification and advancement otherwise permitted by Section 145 of the General Corporation Law.

Any amendment, repeal or modification of the foregoing provisions of this Article VII shall not adversely affect any right or protection of any director, officer or other agent of the Corporation existing at the time of such amendment, repeal or modification.

ARTICLE VIII

For the management of the business and for the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation, and in further definition, limitation and regulation of the powers of the Corporation, of its directors and of its stockholders or any class thereof, as the case may be, it is further provided that:

A. The management of the business and the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation shall be vested in its Board of Directors. The number of directors which shall constitute the whole Board of Directors of the Corporation shall be fixed by the Board of Directors of the Corporation in the manner provided in the Bylaws of the Corporation, as then in effect, subject to any restrictions which may be set forth in this Certificate of Incorporation.

 

27


B. The Board of Directors of the Corporation is expressly empowered to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation. The stockholders shall also have the power to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation; provided, however, that, in addition to any vote of the holders of any class or series of stock of the Corporation required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of the capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting as a single class, shall be required to adopt, amend or repeal any provision of the Bylaws of the Corporation.

C. The directors of the Corporation need not be elected by written ballot unless the Bylaws so provide.

ARTICLE IX

To the fullest extent permitted by law and in recognition that the Non-Employee Directors (as defined below) have access to information about the Corporation that will enhance such person’s knowledge and understanding of the industries in which the Corporation operates, and currently have and will in the future have or will consider acquiring investments on behalf of other companies with respect to which any Non-Employee Director may serve as an advisor, an employee, a director or in a similar capacity, and in recognition that such Non-Employee Director has duties to both the Corporation and the various investors and partners of such other companies, and in anticipation that the Corporation, on the one hand, and the other companies for which such Non-Employee Director serves as an advisor, employee, director or in a similar capacity, on the other hand, may engage in the same or similar activities or lines of business and have an interest in the same areas of corporate opportunities, and in recognition of the benefits to be derived by the Corporation of such Non-Employee Director service as a director of the Corporation, the Corporation hereby waives and renounces any interest or expectancy of the Corporation in, or in being offered an opportunity to participate in, any such opportunities that may become available to any Non-Employee-Director or any holder of Preferred Stock or any partner, member, director, stockholders, employee or agent of such holder if such holder is not an employee of the Corporation (together with the Non-Employee Directors, the “ Covered Persons ”), and expressly agrees that:

1. each Non-Employee Director has the right: (A) to directly or indirectly engage in any business (including, without limitation, any business activities or lines of business that are the same as or similar to those pursued by, or competitive with, the Corporation and its subsidiaries), (B) to directly or indirectly do business with any client or customer of the Corporation and its subsidiaries, (C) to take any other action that the Non-Employee-Director believes in good faith is necessary to or appropriate to fulfill its obligations as described in the first sentence of this ARTICLE IX to such other companies, and (D) not to communicate or present potential transactions, matters or business opportunities to the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries, and to pursue, directly or indirectly, any such opportunity for itself, and to direct any such opportunity to another person or entity;

2. the Non-Employee-Director or any other Covered Person will have no duty (contractual or otherwise) to communicate or present any corporate opportunities to the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries or to refrain from any actions specified in subsection (1) of

 

28


this ARTICLE IX, and the Corporation, on its own behalf and on behalf of its affiliates, hereby renounces and waives any right to require the Non-Employee Director or other Covered Person to act in a manner inconsistent with the provisions of this ARTICLE IX;

3. except as otherwise required by Delaware law or the terms of any written agreement between the Non-Employee Director and the Corporation, the Non-Employee-Director will not be liable to the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries for breach of any duty (contractual or otherwise) by reason of such person’s participation in the activities or omissions of the type specified in this ARTICLE IX; and

4. except as otherwise required by Delaware law or federal and state securities laws, there is no restriction on the Non-Employee Director using such knowledge and understanding in making investment, voting, monitoring, governance or other decisions relating to other entities or securities.

For purposes of this ARTICLE IX, a “ Non-Employee Director ” means a director of the Corporation that is not then an employee of the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries. Any repeal or modification of this ARTICLE IX shall not adversely affect any right or protection of a director of the Corporation existing at the time of such repeal or modification.

ARTICLE X

Meetings of stockholders may be held within or without the State of Delaware, as the Bylaws of the Corporation may provide. The books of the Corporation may be kept outside the State of Delaware at such place or places as may be designated from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation or in the Bylaws of the Corporation.

 

29

Exhibit 4.1

 

LOGO

ZQ|CERT#|COY|CLS|RGSTRY|ACCT#|TRANSTYPE|RUN#|TRANS#
Certificate Number
ZQ00000000
CLASS A COMMON STOCK
PAR VALUE $0.0001
CLASS A COMMON STOCK
THIS CERTIFICATE IS TRANSFERABLE IN CANTON, MA, JERSEY CITY, NJ AND
COLLEGE STATION, TX
Shares
**000000******************
***000000*****************
****000000****************
*****000000***************
******000000**************
box
BOX, INC.
INCORPORATED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE
THIS CERTIFIES THAT
MR. SAMPLE & MRS. SAMPLE &
MR. SAMPLE & MRS. SAMPLE
CUSIP 10316T 10 4
SEE REVERSE FOR CERTAIN DEFINITIONS
is the owner of
***ZERO HUNDRED THOUSAND
ZERO HUNDRED AND ZERO***
FULLY-PAID AND NON-ASSESSABLE SHARES OF CLASS A COMMON STOCK OF
Box, Inc. (hereinafter called the “Company”), transferable on the books of the Company in person or by duly authorized attorney, upon surrender of this Certificate properly endorsed. This Certificate and the shares represented hereby, are issued and shall be held subject to all of the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation, as amended, and the By-Laws, as amended, of the Company (copies of which are on file with the Company and with the Transfer Agent), to all of which each holder, by acceptance hereof, assents. This Certificate is not valid unless countersigned and registered by the Transfer Agent and Registrar.
Witness the facsimile seal of the Company and the facsimile signatures of its duly authorized officers.
DATED DD-MMM-YYYY
COUNTERSIGNED AND REGISTERED:
COMPUTERSHARE TRUST COMPANY, N.A.
TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR,
By
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE
BOX. INC.
SEAL
2008
DELAWARE
President
Secretary
1234567
box
PO BOX 43004, Providence, RI 02940-3004
MR A SAMPLE
DESIGNATION (IF ANY)
ADD 1
ADD 2
ADD 3
ADD 4
CUSIP XXXXXX XX X
Holder ID XXXXXXXXXX
Insurance Value 1,000,000.00
Number of Shares 123456
DTC 12345678 123456789012345
Certificate Numbers Num/No Denom. Total.
1234567890/1234567890 1 1 1
1234567890/1234567890 2 2 2
1234567890/1234567890 3 3 3
1234567890/1234567890 4 4 4
1234567890/1234567890 5 5 5
1234567890/1234567890 6 6 6
Total Transaction 7


LOGO

BOX, INC.
THE COMPANY WILL FURNISH WITHOUT CHARGE TO EACH SHAREHOLDER WHO SO REQUESTS, A SUMMARY OF THE POWERS, DESIGNATIONS, PREFERENCES AND RELATIVE, PARTICIPATING, OPTIONAL OR OTHER SPECIAL RIGHTS OF EACH CLASS OF STOCK OF THE COMPANY AND THE QUALIFICATIONS, LIMITATIONS OR RESTRICTIONS OF SUCH PREFERENCES AND RIGHTS, AND THE VARIATIONS IN RIGHTS, PREFERENCES AND LIMITATIONS DETERMINED FOR EACH SERIES, WHICH ARE FIXED BY THE CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION OF THE COMPANY, AS AMENDED, AND THE RESOLUTIONS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE COMPANY, AND THE AUTHORITY OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS TO DETERMINE VARIATIONS FOR FUTURE SERIES. SUCH REQUEST MAY BE MADE TO THE OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF THE COMPANY OR TO THE TRANSFER AGENT. THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS MAY REQUIRE THE OWNER OF A LOST OR DESTROYED STOCK CERTIFICATE, OR HIS LEGAL REPRESENTATIVES, TO GIVE THE COMPANY A BOND TO INDEMNIFY IT AND ITS TRANSFER AGENTS AND REGISTRARS AGAINST ANY CLAIM THAT MAY BE MADE AGAINST THEM ON ACCOUNT OF THE ALLEGED LOSS OR DESTRUCTION OF ANY SUCH CERTIFICATE.
The following abbreviations, when used in the inscription on the face of this certificate, shall be construed as though they were written out in full according to applicable laws or regulations:
TEN COM - as tenants in common
TEN ENT - as tenants by the entireties
JT TEN - as joint tenants with right of survivorship and not as tenants in common
UNIF GIFT MIN ACT - Custodian
(Cust) (Minor)
under Uniform Gifts to Minors Act
(State)
UNIF TRF MIN ACT - Custodian (until age)
(Cust)
under Uniform Transfers to Minors Act
(Minor) (State)
Additional abbreviations may also be used though not in the above list.
For value received, hereby sell, assign and transfer unto
PLEASE INSERT SOCIAL SECURITY OR OTHER IDENTIFYING NUMBER OF ASSIGNEE
(PLEASE PRINT OR TYPEWRITE NAME AND ADDRESS, INCLUDING POSTAL ZIP CODE, OF ASSIGNEE)
Shares of the Class A common stock represented by the within Certificate, and do hereby irrevocably constitute and appoint Attorney to transfer the said stock on the books of the within-named Company with full power of substitution in the premises.
Dated: 20
Signature:
Signature:
Notice: The signature to this assignment must correspond with the name as written upon the face of the certificate, in every particular, without alteration or enlargement, or any change whatever.
Signature(s) Guaranteed: Medallion Guarantee Stamp
THE SIGNATURE(S) SHOULD BE GUARANTEED BY AN ELIGIBLE GUARANTOR INSTITUTION (Banks, Stockbrokers, Savings and Loan Associations and Credit Unions) WITH MEMBERSHIP IN AN APPROVED SIGNATURE GUARANTEE MEDALLION PROGRAM, PURSUANT TO S.E.C. RULE 17Ad-15.
SECURITY INSTRUCTIONS
THIS IS WATERMARKED PAPER, DO NOT ACCEPT WITHOUT NOTING WATERMARK, HOLD TO LIGHT TO VERIFY WATERMARK.
The IRS requires that we report the cost basis of certain shares acquired after January 1, 2011. If your shares were covered by the legislation and you have sold or transferred the shares and requested a specific cost basis calculation method, we have processed as requested. If you did not specify a cost basis calculation method, we have defaulted to the first in, first out (FIFO) method. Please visit our website or consult your tax advisor if you need additional information about cost basis.
If you do not keep in contact with us or do not have any activity in your account for the time periods specified by state law, your property could become subject to state unclaimed property laws and transferred to the appropriate state.
1234567

Exhibit 4.2

BOX, INC.

EIGHTH AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT

July 7, 2014


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.    Registration Rights      2  
   1.1   

Definitions

     2  
   1.2   

Request for Registration

     4  
   1.3   

Company Registration

     6  
   1.4   

Form S-3 Registration

     8  
   1.5   

Obligations of the Company

     10  
   1.6   

Information from Holder

     11  
   1.7   

Expenses of Registration

     11  
   1.8   

Delay of Registration

     12  
   1.9   

Indemnification

     12  
   1.10   

Reports Under the 1934 Act

     15  
   1.11   

Assignment of Registration Rights

     15  
   1.12   

Limitations on Subsequent Registration Rights

     15  
   1.13   

Market Stand-off Agreement

     16  
   1.14   

Termination of Registration Rights

     16  
   1.15   

Definitions After Initial Offering

     17  
2.    Covenants      17  
   2.1   

Delivery of Financial Statements

     17  
   2.2   

Inspection

     18  
   2.3   

Right of First Offer

     18  
   2.4   

Observer Rights

     21  
   2.5   

Expenses

     22  
   2.6   

Board Committees; Executive Compensation and Related Party Transactions

     22  
   2.7   

Stock Option Vesting

     22  
   2.8   

Proprietary Information and Inventions Agreement

     22  
   2.9   

Drag-Along Rights

     22  
   2.10   

Legal Fees and Expenses

     24  
   2.11   

Directors’ Liability and Indemnification

     24  
   2.12   

Lock-Up Agreement

     25  
   2.13   

Voting Agreement

     25  
   2.14   

Assignment of Right of First Refusal

     25  
   2.15   

Termination of Covenants

     25  
3.    Miscellaneous      26  
   3.1   

Legend

     26  
   3.2   

Successors and Assigns

     26  
   3.3   

Governing Law

     26  
   3.4   

Counterparts

     26  
   3.5   

Titles and Subtitles

     26  
   3.6   

Notices

     26  
   3.7   

Entire Agreement; Amendments and Waivers

     27  

 

i


   3.8    Severability      28  
   3.9    Aggregation of Stock      28  
   3.10    Expenses      29  
   3.11    Further Assurances      29  
   3.12    Arbitration      29  

 

SCHEDULE A   Schedule of Existing Investors
SCHEDULE B   Schedule of Series E-1 Holders
SCHEDULE C   Schedule of Series F Holders
SCHEDULE D   Schedule of Founders

 

ii


BOX, INC.

EIGHTH AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT

This Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement (this “ Agreement ”) is made as of the 7th day of July, 2014 (the “ Closing ”), by and among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), the holders of shares of Series A Preferred Stock (the “ Series A Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of whom is herein referred to as a “ Series A Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series B Preferred Stock (the “ Series B Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of whom is herein referred to as a “ Series B Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series C Preferred Stock (the “ Series C Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of whom is herein referred to as a “ Series C Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series D Preferred Stock (the “ Series D Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series D Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series D-1 Preferred Stock (the “ Series D-1 Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series D-1 Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series D-2 Preferred Stock (the “ Series D-2 Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series D-2 Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series E Preferred Stock (the “ Series E Preferred ”) listed on Schedule A hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series E Holder ,” the holders of shares of Series E-1 Preferred Stock (the “ Series E-1 Preferred ”) listed on Schedule B hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series E-1 Holder ”, and the holders of shares of Series F Preferred Stock (the “ Series F Preferred ”) listed on Schedule C hereto, each of which is herein referred to as a “ Series F Holder ,” who together with the Series A Holders, the Series B Holders, the Series C Holders, the Series D Holders, the Series D-1 Holders, the Series D-2 Holders, the Series E Holders, and the Series E-1 Holders shall be referred to herein as the “ Investors ,” certain holders of Class A Common Stock of the Company (the “ Class A Common ”) and Class B Common Stock of the Company (the “ Class B Common ,” and together with the Class A Common, the “ Common Stock ”) listed on Schedule D hereto (the “ Founders ”) and Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc., a Maryland corporation (“ Hercules ”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, the Company, the Series A Holders, the Series B Holders, the Series C Holders, the Series D Holders, the Series D-1 Holders, the Series D-2 Holders, the Series E Holders, the Series E-1 Holders, the Founders and Hercules have entered into a Seventh Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement, dated as of October 15, 2013 (the “ Existing Investors’ Rights Agreement ”) and desire to amend and restate the Existing Investors’ Rights Agreement in its entirety in accordance with Section 3.7 thereof;

WHEREAS, the Company and the Series F Holders executed a Series F Preferred Stock Purchase Agreement dated as of July 3, 2014 (as may be amended from time to time, the “ Purchase Agreement ”), pursuant to which the Series F Holders intend to purchase and the Company intends to sell shares of the Series F Preferred;


WHEREAS, the execution of this Agreement on or by the Closing (as defined in the Purchase Agreement) is a condition of the Company’s and the Series F Holders’ mutual obligations at the Closing; and

WHEREAS, in order to induce the Company, the Series A Holders, the Series B Holders, the Series C Holders, the Series D Holders, the Series D-1 Holders, the Series D-2 Holders, the Series E Holders, and the Founders to approve the issuance of the Series F Preferred and to induce the Series F Holders to invest funds in the Company pursuant to the Purchase Agreement, the Investors, the Founders and the Company hereby agree that this Agreement shall govern the rights of the Investors and the Founders to cause the Company to register shares of Common Stock issuable or issued to them and certain other matters as set forth herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the mutual covenants herein contained, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereby agree as follows:

AGREEMENT

 

1. Registration Rights

 

  1.1 Definitions

For purposes of this Agreement:

(a) The term “ Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

(b) The term “ affiliate includes, as that term is defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act, any general partner, officer, director or managers of such holder, and any venture capital fund or private equity fund now or hereafter existing that is controlled by or under common control with one or more managers or general partners of or managing members of or shares the same management company with such holder.

(c) The term “ Change of Control ” shall have the same meaning as the term “Deemed Liquidation” as defined in the Company’s Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation as in effect as of the date hereof.

(d) The term “ Coatue Stockholders ” means Coatue Management, L.L.C., Coatue Private Fund I LP, and any of their affiliates that hold Registrable Securities.

(e) The term “ Form S-3 ” means such form under the Act as in effect on the date hereof or any successor registration form under the Act subsequently adopted by the SEC that permits inclusion or incorporation of substantial information by reference to other documents filed by the Company with the SEC.

(f) The term “ General Atlantic Stockholders ” means General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P., GAP Coinvestments III, LLC, GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC, GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P., GAPCO GmbH & Co. KG and any affiliated investment fund of the foregoing entities that holds Registrable Securities.

 

2


(g) The term “ Holder ” means any person owning of record or having the right to acquire Registrable Securities or any assignee of record thereof to whom registration rights are assigned in accordance with Section 1.11 hereof, provided , however , that the Founders shall not be deemed to be Holders for the purposes of Sections 1.2, 1.4, 1.12, 2, or 3.7 of this Agreement.

(h) The term “ 1934 Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

(i) The term “ register, ” “ registered ” and “ registration ” refer to a registration effected by preparing and filing a registration statement in compliance with the Act, and the declaration or ordering of effectiveness of such registration statement or document.

(j) The term “ Registrable Securities ” shall mean (i) the Common Stock issuable or issued upon conversion of the Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series E-1 Preferred, or Series F Preferred (collectively, the “ Preferred Stock ”) held from time to time by the Investors and their permitted assigns, (ii) any shares of Class A Common hereinafter acquired by a Holder pursuant to the exercise of such Holder’s right of first refusal in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Eighth Amended and Restated Right of First Refusal and Co-Sale Agreement by and among the Company, the Founders (as defined therein) and the Investors (as defined therein) of even date herewith (including shares of Class B Common that are automatically converted into shares of Class A Common upon such acquisition), (iii) any shares of Class A Common held by the Founders as of the date hereof or which may hereafter be acquired by the Founders from the Company, (iv) any shares of Class A Common of the Company issuable or issued upon conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock issued upon exercise of the Hercules Technology II, L.P. warrant, (v) any shares of Class A Common of the Company issuable or issued upon conversion of the Series C Preferred Stock issued upon exercise of the Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc. warrant, (vi) any shares of Class A Common of the Company issuable or issued upon conversion of the Series D-1 Preferred Stock issued upon exercise of the Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc. warrant, (vii) any shares of Class A Common of the Company which may hereafter be acquired by the Investors (including shares of Class B Common that are automatically converted into shares of Class A Common upon such acquisition); and (viii) any shares of Class A Common of the Company issued as (or issuable upon the conversion or exercise of any warrant, right or other security that is issued as) a dividend or other distribution with respect to, or in exchange for, or in replacement of, the shares referenced in (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v), (vi) or (vii) above (including shares of Class B Common that are automatically converted into shares of Class A Common upon issuance to the Investors), provided , however , that the foregoing definition shall exclude in all cases any Registrable Securities sold by a person in a transaction in which his, her or its registration rights under this Agreement are not assigned in accordance with Section 1.11; provided , further , that the shares of Common Stock referenced in (iii) above (including shares issued as a dividend or other distribution with respect thereto) shall not be deemed Registrable Securities for the purposes of Sections 1.2, 1.4, 1.12, 2 and 3.7 of this Agreement; provided , further , that the shares of Class A Common referred to in (iv), (v) and/or (vi) above (including shares issued as a dividend or other distribution with respect thereto) shall not be deemed Registrable Securities for the purposes of Sections 2 and 3.7. In addition, shares of Class A Common or other securities shall only be treated as Registrable Securities if and so long as they have not been (A) sold to or

 

3


through a broker or dealer or underwriter in a public distribution or a public securities transaction, including sales made pursuant to Rule 144 promulgated under the Act, or (B) sold in a transaction exempt from the registration and prospectus delivery requirements of the Act under Section 4(1) thereof so that all transfer restrictions, and restrictive legends with respect thereto, if any, are removed upon the consummation of such sale. The number of shares of Registrable Securities deemed to be outstanding at any given time shall be the sum of the number of shares of Class A Common outstanding that are Registrable Securities plus the number of shares of Class A Common issuable upon the conversion of the Preferred Stock or pursuant to the exercise of other convertible securities that are Registrable Securities hereunder.

(k) The term “ SEC ” shall mean the Securities and Exchange Commission.

(l) The term “ TPG Stockholders ” means TPG Bogota Holdings, L.P. and any of its affiliates that hold Registrable Securities.

 

  1.2 Request for Registration

(a) Subject to the conditions of this Section 1.2, if the Company shall receive (i) at any time after the first anniversary of the effective date of the Company’s first firm commitment underwritten public offering of its Common Stock under the Act (the “ Initial Offering ”), or August 7, 2015, whichever is earlier, a written request from either (x) the General Atlantic Stockholders or (y) the Holders of at least a majority of the Registrable Securities then outstanding, and (ii) at any time after the Initial Offering, the TPG Stockholders, (in either case of (i) or (ii), hereinafter, the “ Initiating Holders ”) that the Company file a registration statement under the Act covering the registration of Registrable Securities that constitute at least twenty percent (20%) of the Initiating Holders’ Registrable Securities or Registrable Securities with an anticipated aggregate offering price of at least $2,000,000, then the Company shall, promptly but not later than twenty (20) days after the receipt thereof, give written notice of such request to all Holders, and subject to the limitations of this Section 1.2, use all reasonable efforts to effect, as soon as practicable, the registration under the Act of all Registrable Securities that the Holders request to be registered in a written request received by the Company within twenty (20) days of the mailing of the Company’s notice pursuant to this Section 1.2(a) (including, without limitation, filing post-effective amendments, appropriate qualifications under applicable blue sky or other state securities laws, and appropriate compliance with the Act), and use all reasonable efforts to permit or facilitate the sale and distribution of all or such portion of such Registrable Securities as are specified in such request.

(b) If the Initiating Holders intend to distribute the Registrable Securities covered by their request by means of an underwriting, they shall so advise the Company as a part of their request and the Company shall include such information in the written notice referred to in Section 1.2(a), except, in the case of a Shelf Registration Statement, such request may be made at any time during the effectiveness of such Shelf Registration Statement and the Company shall notify the Holders promptly following such a request. In such event the right of any Holder to include its Registrable Securities in such registration shall be conditioned upon such Holder’s participation in such underwriting and the inclusion of such Holder’s Registrable Securities in the underwriting (unless otherwise mutually agreed by a majority in interest of the Initiating Holders and such Holder) to the extent provided herein; provided , that in the case of a Shelf Registration

 

4


Statement, a request of an underwritten distribution shall not affect the rights of any Holders to include their Registrable Securities in such Shelf Registration Statement, but the right of the Holders to participate in such underwritten distribution shall be conditioned upon their participation in such underwriting, as provided herein. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 1.2, if the underwriter advises the Company that marketing factors require a limitation of the number of securities underwritten (including Registrable Securities), then the Company shall so advise all Holders of Registrable Securities that would otherwise be underwritten pursuant hereto, and the number of shares that may be included in the underwriting shall be allocated to the Holders of such Registrable Securities on a pro rata basis based on the number of Registrable Securities held by all such Holders (including the Initiating Holders), provided , however , that the number of shares of Registrable Securities to be included in such underwriting shall not be reduced unless all other securities are first entirely excluded from the underwriting and registration. Any Registrable Securities excluded or withdrawn from such underwriting shall be withdrawn from the registration. The Company shall (together with all Holders proposing to distribute their securities through such underwriting) enter into an underwriting agreement in customary form with the representative of the underwriter or underwriters selected for such underwriting by a majority in interest of the Initiating Holders, which underwriters are reasonably acceptable to the Company.

If a person who has requested inclusion in such registration as provided above does not agree to the terms of any such underwriting, such person shall be excluded therefrom by written notice from the Company, the underwriter or the Initiating Holders. Any Registrable Securities or other securities excluded or withdrawn from such underwriting shall also be withdrawn from such registration, except in the case of a Shelf Registration Statement. If shares are so withdrawn from the registration or underwriting and if the number of shares to be included in such registration or underwriting was previously reduced as a result of marketing factors pursuant to this Section 1.2, then the Company shall then offer to all Holders who have retained rights to include securities in the registration or underwriting the right to include additional Registrable Securities in the registration or underwriting in an aggregate amount equal to the number of shares so withdrawn, with such shares to be allocated among such Holders requesting additional inclusion based on the pro rata percentage of Registrable Securities held by such Holders assuming conversion.

(c) The Company shall not be required to effect a registration pursuant to this Section 1.2:

(1) in any particular jurisdiction in which the Company would be required to execute a general consent to service of process in effecting such registration, unless the Company is already subject to service in such jurisdiction, and except as may be required under the Act; or

(2) if such registration is requested by the General Atlantic Stockholders, after the Company has effected one (1) registration requested by the General Atlantic Stockholders pursuant to this Section 1.2, and such registrations have been declared or ordered effective and pursuant to which securities have been sold; or

 

5


(3) if such registration is requested by the TPG Stockholders, after the Company has effected one (1) registration requested by the TPG Stockholders pursuant to this Section 1.2, and such registrations have been declared or ordered effective and pursuant to which securities have been sold; or

(4) if such registration is requested by the Holders of at least a majority of the Registrable Securities then outstanding, after the Company has effected two (2) registrations requested by such Holders pursuant to this Section 1.2, and such registrations have been declared or ordered effective and pursuant to which securities have been sold; or

(5) during the period starting with the date sixty (60) days prior to the Company’s good faith estimate of the date of the filing of, and ending on the date one hundred eighty (180) days following the effective date of a Company-initiated registration subject to Section 1.3 below, provided that the Company is actively employing in good faith all reasonable efforts to cause such registration statement to become effective; or

(6) if the Initiating Holders propose to dispose of Registrable Securities that may be registered on Form S-3 pursuant to Section 1.4 hereof; or

(7) if the Company shall furnish to Holders requesting a registration statement pursuant to this Section 1.2, a certificate signed by the Company’s Chief Executive Officer or Chairman of the Board stating that in the good faith judgment of the Board of Directors of the Company, it would be materially detrimental to the Company and its stockholders for such registration statement to be effected at such time, in which event the Company shall have the right to defer such filing for a period of not more than ninety (90) days after receipt of the request of the Initiating Holders, provided that such right to delay a request shall be exercised by the Company not more than once in any twelve-month (12) period, and provided , further , that the Company shall not register any securities for the account of itself or any other stockholder during such ninety (90) day period (other than a registration relating solely to the sale of securities of participants in a Company stock plan or a registration relating solely to an acquisition under Rule 145 of the Act).

 

  1.3 Company Registration

(a) If the Company proposes to register (including for this purpose a registration initiated by the Company for stockholders other than the Holders) any of its stock or other securities under the Act in connection with the public offering for cash of such securities (other than a registration relating solely to the sale of securities to participants in a Company stock plan, a registration relating to a corporate reorganization or other transaction under Rule 145 of the Act, or a registration in which the only Common Stock being registered is Common Stock issuable upon conversion of debt securities that are also being registered), the Company shall, at such time, notify each Holder in writing at least forty-five (45) days prior to such registration. Upon the written request of each Holder given within fifteen (15) days after delivery of such notice by the Company in accordance with Section 3.6, the Company shall, subject to the provisions of Section 1.3(c), use all reasonable efforts to cause to be registered under the Act all of the Registrable Securities that each such Holder has requested to be registered.

 

6


Each Holder’s written request shall state the number of Registrable Securities such Holder wishes to include in such registration statement. Holders that do not elect to participate in any registration and underwriting under this Section 1.3 shall nevertheless continue to have the right to include any Registrable Securities in subsequent registrations and underwritings to which this Section 1.3 is applicable.

(b) Right to Terminate Registration . The Company shall have the right to terminate or withdraw any registration initiated by it under this Section 1.3 prior to the effectiveness of such registration whether or not any Holder has elected to include securities in such registration. The expenses of such withdrawn registration shall be borne by the Company in accordance with Section 1.7 hereof.

(c) Underwriting Requirements . The Company shall not be required to include in any registration and underwriting to which this Section 1.3 is applicable, the Registrable Securities of any Holder that fails to execute the underwriting agreement entered into between the Company and the underwriter or underwriters selected by it. In addition, the Company shall be required to include in the offering only that number of Registrable Securities that the underwriters determine in good faith will not jeopardize the success of the offering (the securities so included to be apportioned pro rata among the selling Holders according to the total amount of securities entitled to be included therein owned by each selling Holder or in such other proportions as shall mutually be agreed to by such selling Holders), but in no event shall (i) the amount of securities of the selling Holders included in the offering be reduced below thirty percent (30%) of the total amount of securities included in such offering, unless such offering is the Initial Offering, in which case the selling Holders may be completely excluded if the underwriters make the determination described above and no other stockholder’s securities are included, (ii) any securities held by Founders be included if any securities held by Investors are excluded, or (iii) the number of shares of Registrable Securities to be included in such underwriting be reduced unless all other securities (other than those of the Company) are first entirely excluded from the underwriting. For purposes of the preceding provision concerning apportionment, for any selling stockholder that is a Holder of Registrable Securities and that is a venture capital fund, private equity fund, partnership, limited liability company or corporation, the affiliated venture capital funds, private equity funds, partners, retired partners, members and stockholders of such Holder, or the estates and family members of any such partners, retired partners, members and any trusts for the benefit of any of the foregoing persons shall be deemed to be a single “selling Holder,” and any pro rata reduction with respect to such “selling Holder” shall be based upon the aggregate amount of Registrable Securities owned of record by all such related entities and individuals.

If a person who has requested inclusion in such registration as provided above does not agree to the terms of any such underwriting, such person shall also be excluded therefrom by written notice from the Company or the underwriter. The Registrable Securities or other securities so excluded shall also be withdrawn from such registration. Any Registrable Securities or other securities excluded or withdrawn from such underwriting shall be withdrawn from such registration. If shares are so withdrawn from the registration and if the number of shares of Registrable Securities to be included in such registration was previously reduced as a result of marketing factors pursuant to Section 1.3, the Company shall then offer to all persons who have retained the right to include securities in the registration the right to include additional

 

7


securities in the registration in an aggregate amount equal to the number of shares so withdrawn, with such shares to be allocated among (i) first, the Holders requesting to include Registrable Securities in such registration statement based on the pro rata percentage of Registrable Securities held by such Holders, assuming conversion, and (ii) second, others requesting to include shares in such registration statement based on the pro rata percentage of shares held by such person, assuming conversion.

(d) No Demand Registration . Registration pursuant to this Section 1.3 shall not be deemed to be a request for registration as described in Sections 1.2 and 1.4 hereof. Except as otherwise provided herein, there shall be no limit on the number of times the Holders may request registration of Registrable Securities under this Section 1.3.

 

  1.4 Form S-3 Registration

(a) After its Initial Offering, the Company shall use its commercially reasonable efforts to qualify for registration on Form S-3 or any comparable or successor form or forms. In case the Company shall receive from any of the Holders a written request or requests that the Company effect a registration on Form S-3 and any related qualification or compliance with respect to all or a part of the Registrable Securities owned by such Holder or Holders, the Company shall:

(1) promptly give written notice of the proposed registration, and any related qualification or compliance, to all other Holders of Registrable Securities; and

(2) use all reasonable efforts to effect, as soon as reasonably practicable, such registration and all such qualifications and compliances as may be so requested and as would permit or facilitate the sale and distribution of all or such portion of such Holders’ Registrable Securities as are specified in such request, together with all or such portion of the Registrable Securities of any other Holders joining in such request as are specified in a written request given within fifteen (15) days after receipt of such written notice from the Company.

(b) Holders of Registrable Securities requesting a registration on Form S-3 or any comparable or successor form or forms pursuant to this Section 1.4 shall have the right to elect for any such registration to be made for an offering to be made on a continuous or delayed basis pursuant to Rule 415 covering the Registrable Securities (a “ Shelf Registration Statement ”), in which case the registration statement filed by the Company in connection with such request shall be a Shelf Registration Statement. The Company shall use its best efforts to keep the Shelf Registration Statement continuously effective in order to permit the Prospectus forming a part thereof to be usable by the Holders for a period of 12 months plus the period of time, if any, during which use of such Shelf Registration Statement has been suspended pursuant to Section 1.4(c)(3) or, if earlier, until the distribution contemplated in the Shelf Registration Statement has been completed.

(c) The Company shall not be obligated to effect any such registration, qualification or compliance, pursuant to this Section 1.4:

(1) if Form S-3 is not available for use by the Company with respect to such offering by the Holders;

 

8


(2) if the Holders, together with the holders of any other securities of the Company entitled to inclusion in such registration, propose to sell Registrable Securities and such other securities (if any) at an aggregate price to the public of less than $500,000;

(3) if the Company shall furnish to the Holders a certificate signed by the Chief Executive Officer or Chairman of the Board of the Company stating that in the good faith judgment of the Board of Directors of the Company, it would be materially detrimental to the Company and its stockholders for such Form S-3 Registration to be effected (or, in the case of a Shelf Registration Statement (as defined above), either effected or used) at such time, in which event the Company shall have the right to defer the filing of the Form S-3 registration statement (or, in the case of an already effective Shelf Registration Statement, direct the Holders to suspend sales pursuant to such already effective Shelf Registration Statement) for a period of not more than sixty (60) days after receipt of the request of the Holder or Holders under this Section 1.4 (or, in the case of an already effective Shelf Registration Statement, after such determination by the Board of Directors of the Company), provided , however , that the Company shall not utilize this right more than once in any twelve (12) month period and provided , further , that the Company shall not register any securities for the account of itself or any other stockholder during such sixty (60) day period (other than a registration relating solely to the sale of securities of participants in a Company stock plan or a registration relating solely to an acquisition under Rule 145 of the Act);

(4) if the Company has, within the twelve (12) month period preceding the date of such request, already effected two (2) registrations on Form S-3 for the Holders pursuant to this Section 1.4; or

(5) in any particular jurisdiction in which the Company would be required to qualify to do business or to execute a general consent to service of process in effecting such registration, qualification or compliance.

(d) If the Holders intend to distribute the Registrable Securities covered by their request by means of an underwriting, they shall so advise the Company as a part of their request made pursuant to this Section 1.4 and the Company shall include such information in the written notice referred to in Section 1.4(a). The provisions of Section 1.2(b) shall be applicable (as relevant) to such request (with the substitution of Section 1.4 for references to Section 1.2). For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of a Shelf Registration Statement, any of the Holders may make such a request for some or all of the registered Registrable Securities at any time that the Shelf Registration Statement is effective and the Company shall amend or supplement the Shelf Registration Statement as may be necessary in order to enable such underwritten distribution.

(e) Subject to the foregoing, the Company shall file a Form S-3 registration statement covering the Registrable Securities and other securities so requested to be registered as soon as practicable after receipt of the request or requests of any of the Holders. Registrations effected pursuant to this Section 1.4 shall not be counted as requests for registration effected pursuant to Section 1.2. Except as otherwise provided herein, there shall be no limit on the number of times the Holders may request registration of Registrable Securities under this Section 1.4.

 

9


  1.5 Obligations of the Company

Whenever required under this Section 1 to effect the registration of any Registrable Securities, the Company shall, as expeditiously as reasonably possible:

(a) prepare and file with the SEC a registration statement with respect to such Registrable Securities not later than 45 days after a registration is requested pursuant to Section 1.2 or Section 1.4 hereof, and use all reasonable efforts to cause such registration statement to become effective, and, upon the request of the Holders of a majority of the Registrable Securities registered thereunder, keep such registration statement effective for a period of one hundred twenty (120) days or, if earlier, until the distribution contemplated in the Registration Statement has been completed; provided , however , that (i) such 120-day period shall be extended for a period of time equal to the period the Holders refrain from selling any securities included in such registration at the request of the managing underwriter of such offering; and (ii) in the case of any Shelf Registration Statement, the provisions of Section 1.4(b) hereof shall apply;

(b) prepare and file with the SEC such amendments and supplements to such registration statement and the prospectus used in connection with such registration statement as may be necessary or advisable to comply with the provisions of the Act with respect to the disposition of all securities covered by such registration statement for the period set forth in paragraph (a) above;

(c) furnish to the Holders (and to the underwriters, if applicable) such numbers of copies of a prospectus, including a preliminary prospectus, in conformity with the requirements of the Act, and such other documents as they (or the underwriters, if applicable) may reasonably request in order to facilitate the disposition of Registrable Securities owned by them;

(d) use its reasonable best efforts to register and qualify the securities covered by such registration statement under such other securities or “blue sky” laws of such jurisdictions as shall be reasonably requested by the Holders, provided that the Company shall not be required in connection therewith or as a condition thereto to qualify to do business or to file a general consent to service of process in any such states or jurisdictions;

(e) in the event of any underwritten public offering, enter into and perform its obligations under an underwriting agreement, in usual and customary form, with the managing underwriter of such offering;

(f) notify each Holder of Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement at any time when a prospectus relating thereto is required to be delivered under the Act or the happening of any event as a result of which the prospectus included in such registration statement, as then in effect, includes an untrue statement of a material fact or omits to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading in the light of the circumstances then existing;

 

10


(g) cause all such Registrable Securities registered pursuant to this Agreement to be listed on each securities exchange and/or quoted on each broker-dealer network on which similar securities issued by the Company are then listed and/or quoted;

(h) provide a transfer agent and registrar for all Registrable Securities registered pursuant to this Agreement and a CUSIP number for all such Registrable Securities, in each case not later than the effective date of such registration;

(i) use its best efforts to furnish, at the request of any Holder requesting registration of Registrable Securities pursuant to this Section 1, on the date that such Registrable Securities are delivered to the underwriters for sale in connection with a registration pursuant to this Section 1, if such securities are being sold through underwriters, or, if such securities are not being sold through underwriters, on the date that the registration statement with respect to such securities becomes effective, (x) an opinion, dated such date, of the counsel representing the Company for the purposes of such registration, in form and substance as is customarily given to underwriters in an underwritten public offering, addressed to the underwriters, if any, and to the Holders requesting registration of Registrable Securities and (y) a letter dated such date, from the independent certified public accountants of the Company, in form and substance as is customarily given by independent certified public accountants to underwriters in an underwritten public offering, addressed to the underwriters, if any, and to the Holders requesting registration of Registrable Securities;

(j) use all reasonable efforts to comply with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and all applicable federal and state securities laws, and all rules and regulations of the Commission and each securities exchange or broker-dealer network on which similar securities issued by the Company are then listed and/or quoted;

(k) make available to its security holders, as soon as reasonably practicable, an earnings statement covering the period of at least 12 months, but not more than 18 months, beginning with the first month after the effective date of the Registration Statement, which earnings statement shall satisfy the provisions of Section 11(a) of the Securities Act; and

(l) if the registration is for an underwritten offering, cause management of the Company to participate in reasonable and customary roadshows necessary to effect the disposition of the Registrable Securities.

 

  1.6 Information from Holder

It shall be a condition precedent to the obligations of the Company to take any action pursuant to this Section 1 with respect to the Registrable Securities of any selling Holder that such Holder shall furnish to the Company such information regarding itself, the Registrable Securities held by it, and the intended method of disposition of such securities as shall be required to effect the registration of such Holder’s Registrable Securities.

 

  1.7 Expenses of Registration

All fees and expenses (other than underwriting discounts, commissions and stock transfer taxes) incurred in connection with registrations, filings or qualifications pursuant to Sections 1.2,

 

11


1.3 and 1.4, including (without limitation) all registration, filing and qualification fees, printer’s and accounting fees, fees and disbursements of counsel for the Company and one (1) counsel for the selling Holders, in an amount not to exceed $50,000, shall be borne by the Company, regardless of whether the Holders have sold any securities in such offering. Any expenses exceeding the limitations set forth in the previous sentence shall be borne by the participating Holders pro rata based upon the number of Registrable Securities that were to be requested to be sold in such registration. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall not be required to pay for any expenses of any registration proceeding begun pursuant to Section 1.2 or Section 1.4 if the registration request is subsequently withdrawn at the request of the Holders of a majority of the Registrable Securities to be registered (in which case all participating Holders shall bear such expenses pro rata based upon the number of Registrable Securities that were to be requested in the withdrawn registration), unless the Holders of a majority of the Registrable Securities agree to forfeit their right to one (1) demand registration pursuant to Section 1.2, or one (1) Form S-3 registration pursuant to Section 1.4 for the following twelve month period; provided , however , that if at the time of such withdrawal, the Holders have learned of a material adverse change in the condition, business or prospects of the Company from that known to the Holders at the time of their request and have withdrawn the request with reasonable promptness following disclosure by the Company of such material adverse change, then the Holders shall not be required to pay any of such expenses and shall retain their rights pursuant to Section 1.2.

 

  1.8 Delay of Registration

No Holder shall have any right to obtain or seek an injunction restraining or otherwise delaying any such registration as the result of any controversy that might arise with respect to the interpretation or implementation of this Section 1.

 

  1.9 Indemnification

In the event any Registrable Securities are included in a registration statement under this Section 1:

(a) To the extent permitted by law, the Company will indemnify and hold harmless each Holder, the partners, members, former members, officers, directors, employees, stockholders, legal counsel and accountants of each Holder, any underwriter (as defined in the Act) for such Holder and each person, if any, who controls such Holder or underwriter within the meaning of the Act or the 1934 Act, against any losses, claims, damages or liabilities (joint or several) to which they may become subject under the Act, the 1934 Act, any state securities laws or any rule or regulation promulgated under the Act, insofar as such losses, claims, damages, or liabilities (or actions in respect thereof) arise out of or are based upon any of the following statements, omissions or violations (collectively a “ Violation ”): (i) any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact contained or incorporated by reference in such registration statement, offering circular or other document including any preliminary or final prospectus contained therein, and any amendments, supplements or exhibits thereto, or in any state “blue sky” filing required in connection therewith, (ii) the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated therein, or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, or (iii) any violation or alleged violation by the Company of the Act, the 1934 Act, any state securities laws or any rule or regulation promulgated under the Act, the 1934

 

12


Act or any state securities laws, and the Company will reimburse each such Holder and each of such Holder’s partners, members, former members, officers, directors, employees, stockholders, legal counsel and accountants, underwriter, controlling person or other aforementioned person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred by them in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, claim, damage, liability or action as such expenses are incurred, provided , however , that the indemnity agreement contained in this Section 1.9(a) shall not apply to amounts paid in settlement of any such loss, claim, damage, liability or action if such settlement is effected without the consent of the Company (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld), nor shall the Company be liable in any such case for any such loss, claim, damage, liability or action to the extent that it arises out of or is based upon a Violation that occurs in reliance upon and in conformity with written information furnished expressly for use in connection with such registration by any such Holder, underwriter, controlling person or other aforementioned person.

(b) To the extent permitted by law, each selling Holder will severally but not jointly indemnify and hold harmless the Company, each of its directors, each of its officers who has signed the registration statement, each person, if any, who controls the Company within the meaning of the Act, legal counsel and accountants for the Company, any underwriter, any other Holder selling securities in such registration statement and each of their partners, members, former members, officers and directors and any controlling person of any such underwriter or other Holder, against any losses, claims, damages or liabilities to which any of the foregoing persons may become subject, under the Act, the 1934 Act, any state securities laws or any rule or regulation promulgated under the Act, insofar as such losses, claims, damages or liabilities (or actions in respect thereto) arise out of or are based upon: (i) any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact contained or incorporated by reference in such registration statement, offering circular or other document including any preliminary or final prospectus contained therein, and any amendments, supplements or exhibits thereto, or in any state “blue sky” filing required in connection therewith, or (ii) the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated therein, or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, in each case to the extent (and only to the extent) that such Violation occurs in reliance upon and in conformity with written information furnished by such Holder expressly for use in connection with such registration, and each such Holder will reimburse any person intended to be indemnified pursuant to this Section l.9(b), for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred by such person in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, claim, damage, liability or action as such expenses are incurred, provided , however , that the indemnity agreement contained in this Section 1.9(b) shall not apply to amounts paid in settlement of any such loss, claim, damage, liability or action if such settlement is effected without the consent of the Holder (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld), and provided further that in no event shall any indemnity under this Section l.9(b) exceed the net proceeds from the offering received by such Holder.

(c) Promptly after receipt by an indemnified party under this Section 1.9 of notice of the commencement of any action (including any governmental action), such indemnified party will, if a claim in respect thereof is to be made against any indemnifying party under this Section 1.9, deliver to the indemnifying party a written notice of the commencement thereof and the indemnifying party shall have the right to participate in, and, to the extent the indemnifying party so desires, jointly with any other indemnifying party similarly noticed, to

 

13


assume the defense thereof with counsel mutually satisfactory to the parties, provided , however , that an indemnified party (together with all other indemnified parties that may be represented without conflict by one counsel) shall have the right to retain one separate counsel, with the fees and expenses to be paid by the indemnifying party, if representation of such indemnified party by the counsel retained by the indemnifying party would be inappropriate due to actual or potential differing interests between such indemnified party and any other party represented by such counsel in such proceeding. The failure to deliver written notice to the indemnifying party within a reasonable time of the commencement of any such action, unless prejudicial to its ability to defend such action, shall not relieve such indemnifying party of any liability to the indemnified party under this Section 1.9, and the omission so to deliver written notice to the indemnifying party will not relieve it of any liability that it may have to any indemnified party otherwise than under this Section 1.9.

(d) If the indemnification provided for in this Section 1.9 is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be unavailable to an indemnified party with respect to any loss, liability, claim, damage or expense referred to herein, then the indemnifying party, in lieu of indemnifying such indemnified party hereunder, shall contribute to the amount paid or payable by such indemnified party as a result of such loss, liability, claim, damage or expense in such proportion as is appropriate to reflect the relative fault of the indemnifying party on the one hand and of the indemnified party on the other in connection with the statements or omissions that resulted in such loss, liability, claim, damage or expense, as well as any other relevant equitable considerations, provided , however , that no contribution from any Holder, when combined with any amounts paid by such Holder pursuant to Section 1.9(b), shall exceed the net proceeds from the offering received by such Holder. The relative fault of the indemnifying party and of the indemnified party shall be determined by reference to, among other things, whether the untrue or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or the omission to state a material fact relates to information supplied by the indemnifying party or by the indemnified party and the parties’ relative intent, knowledge, access to information, and opportunity to correct or prevent such statement or omission.

(e) Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent that the provisions on indemnification and contribution contained in the underwriting agreement entered into in connection with the underwritten public offering are in conflict with the foregoing provisions, the provisions in the underwriting agreement shall control, provided , however , that failure of an underwriting agreement to cover a term provided in these provisions shall not be deemed a conflict.

(f) The obligations of the Company and Holders under this Section 1.9 shall survive the completion of any offering of Registrable Securities in a registration statement and, with respect to liability arising from an offering to which this Section 1.9 would apply that is covered by a registration filed before termination of this Agreement, such termination. No indemnifying party, in the defense of any such claim or litigation, shall, except with the consent of each indemnified party, consent to entry of any judgment or enter into any settlement which does not include as an unconditional term thereof the giving by the claimant or plaintiff to such indemnified party of a release from all liability in respect to such claim or litigation.

 

14


  1.10 Reports Under the 1934 Act

With a view to making available to the Holders the benefits of Rule 144 promulgated under the Act and any other rule or regulation of the SEC that may at any time permit a Holder to sell securities of the Company to the public without registration or pursuant to a registration on Form S-3, the Company agrees to:

(a) make and keep public information available, as those terms are understood and defined in SEC Rule 144 or any successor rule promulgated under the Act (“ Rule 144 ”), at all times after the effective date of the initial public offering of the Company’s equity securities,

(b) file with the SEC in a timely manner all reports and other documents required of the Company under the Act and the 1934 Act; and

(c) furnish to any Holder, so long as the Holder owns any Registrable Securities, forthwith upon request (i) a written statement by the Company that it has complied with the reporting requirements of Rule 144 (at any time after ninety (90) days after the effective date of the first registration statement filed by the Company), the Act and the 1934 Act (at any time after it has become subject to such reporting requirements), or that it qualifies as a registrant whose securities may be resold pursuant to Form S-3 (at any time after it so qualifies), (ii) a copy of the most recent annual or quarterly report of the Company and such other reports and documents so filed by the Company, and (iii) such other information as may be reasonably requested in availing any Holder of any rule or regulation of the SEC that permits the selling of any such securities without registration or pursuant to such form.

 

  1.11 Assignment of Registration Rights

The rights to cause the Company to register Registrable Securities pursuant to this Section 1 may be assigned (but only with all related obligations) by a Holder to a transferee or assignee of such securities that (i) is a partner, limited partner or retired partner of a Holder that is a partnership, or is a member or retired member of any Holder that is a limited liability company (in each case provided that such constituent partners, members, and other persons agree to act through a single representative in connection with the rights granted hereunder), (ii) is a spouse, sibling, lineal descendant or ancestor of a Holder, or any trust established for the benefit of a Holder or any spouse, sibling, lineal descendant or ancestor of a Holder, (iii) is an affiliate of the Holder, or (iv) after such assignment or transfer, holds at least 100,000 shares of Registrable Securities (subject to appropriate adjustment for stock splits, stock dividends, combinations and other recapitalizations) (or such lesser amount if the Holder is transferring all Registrable Securities held by the Holder), provided: (a) the Company is, within a reasonable time after such transfer, furnished with written notice of the name and address of such transferee or assignee and the securities with respect to which such registration rights are being assigned, and (b) such transferee or assignee agrees in writing to be bound by and subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, including without limitation the provisions of Section 1.13 below.

 

  1.12 Limitations on Subsequent Registration Rights

From and after the date of this Agreement, the Company shall not, without the prior written consent of the Holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the

 

15


Registrable Securities, enter into any agreement with any holder or prospective holder of any securities of the Company that would allow such holder or prospective holder: (a) to include such securities in any registration filed under Section 1.2, Section 1.3 or Section 1.4 hereof, unless under the terms of such agreement, such holder or prospective holder may include such securities in any such registration only to the extent that the inclusion of such securities will not reduce the amount of the Registrable Securities of the Holders that are included, (b) to demand registration of their securities on a junior or pari passu basis with the rights of the Holders hereunder, or (c) to exercise other registration rights that are pari passu to those granted to the Holders hereunder; provided , however , that the Company shall not, without the prior written consent of the Holders of at least ninety percent (90%) of the Registrable Securities, enter into any agreement with any holder or prospective holder of any securities of the Company that would grant such holder registration rights that are senior to those granted to the Holders hereunder.

 

  1.13 Market Stand-off Agreement

Each Holder hereby agrees that, upon the request of the managing underwriters, it will not, without the prior written consent of the managing underwriters, during the period commencing on the date of the final prospectus relating to the Company’s public offering and ending on the date specified by the Company and the managing underwriters (such period not to exceed one hundred eighty (180) days if such public offering is the Initial Offering or ninety (90) days if such public offering is not the Initial Offering, in either case, following the effective date of the registration statement for such offering, or such longer period as the underwriters or the Company shall request in order to facilitate compliance with NASD Rule 2711 or NYSE Member Rule 472 or any successor or similar rule or regulation, if so required by the underwriters of such offering), (i) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend, or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of Common Stock beneficially owned (as such term is used in Rule 13d-3 of the 1934 Act), by the Holder or any other securities so owned convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for Common Stock or (ii) enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of the Common Stock, whether any such transaction described in clause (i) or (ii) above is to be settled by delivery of Common Stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. The foregoing provisions of this Section 1.13 shall not apply to the sale of any shares to an underwriter pursuant to an underwriting agreement. The underwriters in connection with the Initial Offering are intended third party beneficiaries of this Section 1.13 and shall have the right, power and authority to enforce the provisions hereof as though they were a party hereto. In order to enforce the foregoing covenant, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the shares or securities of each Holder and every other person subject to the foregoing restriction until the end of such period. Each Holder agrees to execute a market standoff agreement with said underwriters in customary form consistent with the provisions of this Section 1.13.

 

  1.14 Termination of Registration Rights

No Holder (other than the General Atlantic Stockholders and the TPG Stockholders) shall be entitled to exercise any right provided for in this Section 1 after the earliest of, (a) five (5)

 

16


years following the consummation of the Initial Offering, or (b) as to any Holder, such time at which all Registrable Securities held by such Holder (and any affiliate of the Holder with whom such Holder must aggregate its sales under Rule 144) can be sold in any three (3) month period without registration in compliance with Rule 144 of the Act. Following the consummation of the Initial Offering, the General Atlantic Stockholders shall not be entitled to exercise the rights provided for in this Section 1 after the date on which the General Atlantic Stockholders (in the aggregate) cease to be an affiliate (as defined in Rule 405 promulgated under the 1934 Act) of the Company and hold, in the aggregate, less than five percent (5%) of the outstanding shares of Class A Common. Following the consummation of the Initial Offering, the TPG Stockholders shall not be entitled to exercise the rights provided for in this Section 1 after the date on which the TPG Stockholders (in the aggregate) cease to hold an amount of Registrable Securities that is, in the aggregate, less than a majority of the amount of Registrable Securities it originally purchased.

 

  1.15 Definitions After Initial Offering

If the Certificate of Incorporation to be in effect upon the closing of the Initial Offering (the “ Post-IPO Certificate ”) provides for the conversion of all shares of Common Stock into a new class of Common Stock to be called “Class B Common Stock” and authorizes a new class of Common Stock to be called “Class A Common Stock,” then effective as of the closing of the Initial Offering, all references to “Common Stock,” “Class A Common” and “Class B Common” in this Agreement shall be deemed references to the Class B Common Stock authorized by the Post-IPO Certificate and any Class A Common Stock (as defined in the Post-IPO Certificate) issued upon the conversion thereof after the closing of the Initial Offering, collectively. Wherever necessary, all other terms of this Agreement will be construed to be consistent with the terms of the foregoing; provided, however , that notwithstanding anything to the contrary, all references to “Common Stock” in Section 1.2, Section 1.3 and Section 1.13 shall be deemed references to the Class A Common Stock and Class B Common Stock authorized by the Post-IPO Certificate, collectively; provided further , that notwithstanding anything to the contrary, the reference to “Class A Common” in Section 1.14 shall be deemed a reference to the Class A Common Stock and Class B Common Stock authorized by the Post-IPO Certificate, collectively.

 

2. Covenants

The Company hereby covenants to each of the Series A Holders, the Series B Holders, the Series C Holders, the Series D Holders, the Series D-1 Holders, the Series D-2 Holders, the Series E Holders, the Series E-1 Holders and the Series F Holders as follows:

 

  2.1 Delivery of Financial Statements

The Company shall deliver to each Series A Holder, Series B Holder, Series C Holder, Series D Holder, Series D-1 Holder, Series D-2 Holder, Series E Holder, Series F Holder, or transferee who holds at least 500,000 shares of Registrable Securities (as adjusted for splits, dividends, combinations and other recapitalizations), DST Global III, L.P. (together with its affiliates, “ DST ”), Mitsui & Co. (USA), Inc. (together with its affiliates, “ Mitsui ”), Telefonica Digital Venture Capital, S.L. (together with its affiliates, “ Telefonica ”), Telstra Ventures Pty Ltd (together with its affiliates, “ Telstra ”) and Macnica Investment Partners (together with its

 

17


affiliates, “ Macnica ”) for so long as each of DST, Mitsui, Telefonica, Telstra and Macnica hold at least 100,000 shares of Series E-1 Preferred (in each case, as adjusted for splits, dividends, combinations and other recapitalizations) (each Holder or other person referenced in this paragraph, a “ Major Investor ”):

(a) as soon as practicable, but in any event within ninety (90) days after the end of each fiscal year of the Company, an income statement for such fiscal year, a balance sheet of the Company and statement of stockholders’ equity as of the end of such year, and a statement of cash flows for such year, such year-end financial reports to be in reasonable detail, prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“ GAAP ”) and certified by independent public accountants of national standing selected by the Company; provided that the holders of a majority of the Registrable Securities may waive the requirement to have such financial statements audited and certified by independent public accountants.

(b) as soon as practicable, but in any event within forty-five (45) days of the end of each calendar quarter and within thirty (30) days of the end of each month, an income statement and statement of cash flows and balance sheet for and as of the end of such period, in reasonable detail, each of the foregoing income statement, statement of cash flows and balance sheet also to set forth in comparative form the budgeted amounts for such period and the corresponding figures for the period in the prior fiscal year, to be in reasonable detail and prepared in accordance with GAAP;

(c) as soon as practicable, but in any event no more than fifteen (15) days after the end of each fiscal year, a budget and business plan for the next fiscal year, prepared on a monthly basis (including balance sheets, income statements and statements of cash flows for such months); and

(d) other information as reasonably requested by any Major Investor.

 

  2.2 Inspection

The Company shall permit each Major Investor, at such Major Investor’s expense, to visit and inspect the Company’s properties, to examine its books of account and records and to discuss the Company’s affairs, finances and accounts with its executive officers, all at such reasonable times as may be requested by the Major Investor; provided , however , that the Company shall not be obligated pursuant to this Section 2.2 to provide access to any information that it reasonably considers to be a trade secret or similar confidential information if, in consultation with legal counsel, the Company determines that providing such access would compromise the Company’s rights with respect to such information, unless such Major Investor delivers a confidentiality and non-disclosure agreement in the form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Company’s legal counsel.

 

  2.3 Right of First Offer

(a) Subject to the terms and conditions specified in this Section 2.3, if the Company proposes to issue Additional Shares of Common Stock (as defined in Section 4(d)(i)(B)(4) of Division (B) of Article IV of the Company’s Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation (as may be amended, the “ Restated Charter ”)), other than as currently contemplated in the

 

18


Purchase Agreement, it shall in any case provide each Major Investor, and each Series E-1 Holder who holds at least 500,000 shares of Registrable Securities (as adjusted for splits, dividends, combinations and other recapitalizations) (each, an “ Offeree ”), with a written notice (the “ Issuance Notice ”) stating (i) its bona fide intention to offer such Additional Shares of Common Stock, (ii) the number of such Additional Shares of Common Stock to be offered, and (iii) the price and terms upon which it proposes to offer such Additional Shares of Common Stock. By written notification received by the Company (an “ Election Notice ”), within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of the Issuance Notice, each Offeree may elect to purchase or obtain, at the price and on the terms specified in the Issuance Notice, up to that portion of such Additional Shares of Common Stock (such holder’s “ Pro-Rata Portion ”) that equals the proportion that the number of shares of Registrable Securities then held by such Offeree bears to the total number of shares of Common Stock of the Company then outstanding (including the Common Stock issuable upon conversion of all outstanding shares of Preferred Stock, upon conversion of all other outstanding convertible securities, and upon exercise of all outstanding options (and assuming conversion of convertible securities issuable upon exercise of options)). Additionally, in connection with any such issuance, within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of the Issuance Notice, each of the General Atlantic Stockholders and TPG Stockholders may elect to purchase or obtain, at the price and on the terms specified in the Issuance Notice, the number of shares of Additional Common Stock proposed to be sold by the Company in such issuance (the “ Additional GA/TPG Shares ”) equal to the total number of Additional Shares of Common Stock proposed to be sold by the Company in such offering less the number of shares equal to the aggregate Pro Rata Portion of the Additional Shares of Common Stock that all Offerees are entitled to purchase pursuant to this Section 2.3(a) in connection with such offering. Any election to purchase such Additional GA/TPG Shares shall be allocated among the electing General Atlantic Stockholders and TPG Stockholders on a pro rata basis, in each case, based on the aggregate amount of Registrable Securities then held by such electing holder as compared to the aggregate amount of Registrable Securities then held by all such electing holders.

(b) In the event that (i) an Offeree fails to give an Election Notice within the prescribed period, or otherwise fails to purchase its Pro-Rata Portion of such Additional Shares of Common Stock (not including, in the case of the General Atlantic Stockholders and TPG Stockholders, the Additional GA/TPG Shares), the Company shall promptly inform in writing each Offeree that has elected to purchase its full Pro-Rata Portion (a “ Fully Exercising Investor ”) of any other Offeree’s failure to do so. During the ten (10) day period commencing after the delivery of such supplemental notice, each Fully Exercising Investor shall be entitled to obtain its pro-rata portion of the remaining Additional Shares of Common Stock not purchased by the other Offerees (such right does not include the right to purchase a Pro Rata Portion of the Additional GA/TPG Shares not purchased by the General Atlantic Stockholders or TPG Stockholders). For the purposes of this Section 2.3, a Fully Exercising Investor’s pro rata portion shall equal the proportion that the number of shares of Registrable Securities then held by a Fully Exercising Investor bears to the total number of shares of Registrable Securities then held by all Fully Exercising Investors. If not all Fully Exercising Investors choose to purchase all the shares available to them, the other Fully Exercising Investors shall be offered those shares on a similar pro rata basis based upon the ownership of Registrable Securities of all Fully Exercising Investors who continue to wish to purchase additional shares, until all of the shares not purchased by Offerees (other than the Additional GA/TPG Shares which shall only be available

 

19


to be purchased by the General Atlantic Stockholders and TPG Stockholders) have been allocated to Offerees or all Offerees no longer wish to purchase additional shares. An Offeree shall be entitled to apportion the right of first offer hereby granted it among itself and its partners, members and affiliates in such proportions as it deems appropriate.

(c) If all Additional Shares of Common Stock that Offerees and/or the General Atlantic Stockholders and/or the TPG Stockholders, as the case may be, are entitled to purchase or obtain pursuant to Sections 2.3(a) and (b) are not elected to be purchased or obtained as provided in Sections 2.3(a) and (b) hereof, the Company may, during the one hundred twenty (120) day period following the expiration of the period provided in Sections 2.3(a) and (b) hereof, as the case may be, offer the remaining unsubscribed portion of such Additional Shares of Common Stock to any person or persons at a price not less than, and upon terms no more favorable to the offeree than those specified in the Issuance Notice. If the Company does not enter into an agreement for the sale of the Additional Shares of Common Stock within such period, or if such agreement is not consummated within one hundred twenty (120) days of the execution thereof, the right provided hereunder shall be deemed to be revived and such Additional Shares of Common Stock shall not be offered unless first reoffered to the Offerees in accordance herewith.

(d) The right of first offer in this Section 2.3 shall not be applicable to the issuance of securities excluded from the definition of Additional Shares of Common Stock in the Restated Certificate.

(e) The right of first offer in this Section 2.3 shall not be applicable with respect to any Offeree with regard to any issue of Additional Shares of Common Stock, if (i) at the time of such issue of Additional Shares of Common Stock, such Offeree is not an accredited investor, and (ii) such issue of Additional Shares of Common Stock is otherwise being offered only to accredited investors.

(f) The Company will not grant any right of first offer to any subsequent purchasers of the Company’s equity securities other than by having them become parties hereto in accordance with the amendment provisions hereof.

(g) The rights of first refusal of each Offeree under this Section 2 may be assigned to the same parties, subject to the same restrictions as any transfer of registration rights pursuant to Section 1.11.

(h) In the event that the Right of First Offer in this Section 2.3 is waived pursuant to Section 3.7 hereof with respect to an issuance of Additional Shares of Common Stock by the Company, and any Offeree that consented to such waiver pursuant to Section 3.7 purchases any Additional Shares of Common Stock sold in such offering (a “ Waiving Investor ”), each Offeree that is not a Waiving Investor shall be entitled to purchase its Adjusted Pro-Rata Share of the Additional Shares of Common Stock sold in such offering upon the terms and conditions set forth in Sections 2.3(a) and 2.3(b). For purposes of this Section 2.3(h), an Offeree’s “ Adjusted Pro-Rata Share ” of the Additional Shares of Common Stock subject to the waiver described herein shall be equal to (i) such Offeree’s Pro-Rata Portion of the Additional Shares of Common Stock sold in such offering multiplied by (ii) the highest percentage (up to

 

20


100%) of any Waiving Investor’s Pro-Rata Portion that such Waiving Investor purchases in such offering. For example, if only one Waiving Investor purchases Additional Shares of Common Stock in such offering and it purchases 50% of its Pro-Rata Portion in such offering, each Offeree’s Adjusted Pro-Rata Share shall be equal to 50% of its Pro-Rata Portion. For another example, if one Waiving Investor purchases 60% of its Pro-Rata Portion in such offering and another Waiving Investor purchases 110% of its Pro-Rata Portion in such offering, each Offeree’s Adjusted Pro-Rata Share shall be equal to 100% of its Pro-Rata Portion.

(i) Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent such Offeree is a Company Covered Person or will become a Company Covered Person as a result of a particular acquisition of Additional Shares of Common Stock or Additional GA/TPG Shares contemplated hereby, such Offeree will not have a right of first offer under this Section 2.3 with respect to the offering of such Additional Shares of Common Stock or Additional GA/TPG Shares if, and for so long as, the Offeree, any of its directors, executive officers, general partners or managing members or any person that would be deemed a beneficial owner of the securities of the Company held by the Offeree (in accordance with Rule 506(d) of the Act) is subject to any “bad actor” disqualification described in Rule 506(d)(1)(i) through (viii) under the Act (a “ Bad Actor Disqualification ”), except as set forth in Rule 506(d)(2) or (d)(3) under the Act. Each party to this Agreement will promptly notify each other party to this Agreement in writing if it or, to its knowledge, any person specified in Rule 506(d)(1) under the Act becomes subject to any Bad Actor Disqualification. To the extent any Offeree is prohibited from participating in an offering pursuant to this Section 2.3(i), such Offeree will still be permitted to assign its rights to participate in such offering to any affiliate of such Offeree that is not subject to a Bad Actor Disqualification. For purposes of this Section 2.3(i), a “ Company Covered Person ” means, with respect to the Company as an “issuer” for purposes of Rule 506 promulgated under the Securities Act, any person or entity listed in the first paragraph of Rule 506(d)(1).

 

  2.4 Observer Rights

The Company shall grant to one designee of each of Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners, Scale Venture Partners, Meritech Capital Partners, Emergence Capital Partners, Bessemer Venture Partners, New Enterprise Associates, General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P., the Coatue Stockholders and, for so long as the TPG Stockholders hold at least a majority of the Series F Preferred purchased by them pursuant to the Purchase Agreement, the TPG Stockholders (each, an “ Observer Rights Holder ”) visiting rights to attend all meetings of the Board of Directors in a nonvoting observer capacity (each, an “ Observer ”) and in connection therewith, the Company shall give such Observers copies of all notices, minutes, consents and other materials, financial or otherwise that the Company provides to its directors (including but not limited to full reports of independent third-party valuation firms for purposes of compliance with Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code); provided , however , that such Observer shall agree to hold in confidence and trust all information so provided; and, provided further , that the Company reserves the right to withhold any information and to exclude such visitors from any meeting or portion thereof if, in the opinion of counsel to the Company, such exclusion is reasonably necessary to preserve the attorney-client privilege, or is necessary to protect highly confidential proprietary information.

 

21


  2.5 Expenses

The Company shall pay the reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred by non-employee directors and one (1) Observer of each of Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners, Scale Venture Partners, Meritech Capital Partners, Emergence Capital Partners, Bessemer Venture Partners, New Enterprise Associates, General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P., the Coatue Stockholders and the TPG Stockholders, in connection with their attendance at Board of Directors meetings, committee meetings of the Board of Directors, or other Company-authorized business.

 

  2.6 Board Committees; Executive Compensation and Related Party Transactions

The Company will maintain a Compensation Committee (the “ Committee ”) comprised of all non-employee board members. All compensation of executives of the Company (whether consisting of cash, equity or otherwise) shall require the approval of the Compensation Committee. For purposes of this Section 2.6, “executives” shall mean all senior managers of vice-president or higher rank. The member of the Board of Directors designated by Scale Venture Partners and the member of the Board of Directors designated by General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P. shall each have the right to be a member of all committees of the Board of Directors or, if not a member, to attend all such committee meetings; the member of the Board of Directors designated by TPG Bogota Holdings, L.P. or the Series F Preferred shall have the right to be a member of all committees of the Board of Directors or, if not a member, to attend all such committee meetings.

 

  2.7 Stock Option Vesting

Except as expressly approved by the Board of Directors, options issued pursuant to the Company’s 2006 Stock Incentive Plan and the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan, stock grants or other equity grants shall be granted with a four year vesting schedule, with 25% of the securities vesting on the first anniversary of the vesting commencement date and the remainder vesting at the rate of 1/48 of the total grant each month.

 

  2.8 Proprietary Information and Inventions Agreement

Each officer, employee and consultant of the Company shall enter into the Company’s standard proprietary information and inventions agreement.

 

  2.9 Drag-Along Rights

(a) Anything contained herein to the contrary notwithstanding, if at any time (1) the Board of Directors of the Company, and (2) the holders of at least ninety percent (90%) of the outstanding shares of Preferred Stock, voting together as a single class, shall approve a bona fide proposal from a third party with respect to a sale of the Company whether by merger, asset or stock sale or otherwise, for a specified price payable in cash or otherwise and on specified terms and conditions (a “ Sale Proposal ”), then the Company shall deliver a notice (a “ Required Sale Notice ”) with respect to such Sale Proposal to all Investors and the Founders (together, the “ Stockholders ”) stating that the Company proposes to effect the Sale Proposal and providing the identity of the persons involved in such Sale Proposal and the terms thereof. Each

 

22


such Stockholder and each Stockholder’s transferee, upon receipt of a Required Sale Notice, shall be obligated, which obligation shall be enforceable by the Company, to sell its stock and participate in the transaction (a “ Required Sale ”) contemplated by the Sale Proposal, vote its shares of stock in favor of such Sale Proposal at any meeting of Stockholders called to vote on or approve such Sale Proposal, or in any written consent of Stockholders or similar instrument, and otherwise to take any necessary action to enable the Company and the Stockholders to consummate such Required Sale. Any such Required Sale Notice may be rescinded by the Company by delivering written notice thereof to all the Stockholders.

(b) The obligations of the Stockholders pursuant to this Section 2.9 are subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

(1) upon the consummation of the Required Sale (or as promptly thereafter as practical in the case of certain options to purchase stock, pursuant to outstanding option agreements), all of the Stockholders shall receive the proportion of the aggregate consideration from such Required Sale in accordance with the preferences and other rights set forth in Section 2 of Division B of Article IV of the Restated Charter;

(2) no Stockholder shall be obligated to make any out-of-pocket expenditure prior to the consummation of the Required Sale and no Stockholder shall be obliged to pay more than such Stockholder’s pro rata share (based upon the amount of consideration received) of reasonable expenses incurred in connection with a consummated Required Sale to the extent such costs are incurred for the benefit of all Stockholders and are not otherwise paid by the Company or the acquiring party (costs incurred by or on behalf of a Stockholder for such Stockholder’s sole benefit will not be considered costs of the transaction hereunder), provided that a Stockholder’s liability for such expenses shall be capped at the total purchase price received by such Stockholder for such Stockholder’s shares of stock (including the exercise price thereof);

(3) in the event that the Stockholders are required to provide any indemnification in connection with the Required Sale (other than indemnification concerning each Stockholder’s valid ownership of such Stockholder’s shares of stock, free of all liens and encumbrances (other than those arising under applicable securities laws), and each Stockholder’s authority, power, and right to enter into and consummate such purchase or merger agreement without violating any other agreement), then each Stockholder shall not be liable for more than such Stockholder’s pro rata share (based upon the amount of consideration received) of such indemnity and the liability of each Stockholder shall not exceed the total purchase price received by such Stockholder for such Stockholder’s shares of stock (absent fraud by such Stockholder); and

(4) prior notice of a Required Sale shall be provided to the Stockholders.

 

23


(c) The obligations of Intel Capital Corporation and Telstra pursuant to this Section 2.9 are further subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

(1) The only representations, warranties or covenants that Intel Capital Corporation and Telstra shall be required to make in connection with a Required Sale are representations and warranties with respect to (A) ability to execute, deliver and perform any acquisition agreement; (B) its own ownership of the Company’s securities to be sold by it; (C) its ability to convey title thereto free and clear of liens, encumbrances or adverse claims; and (D) reasonable covenants regarding confidentiality, publicity and similar matters.

(2) Other Agreements. Intel Capital Corporation and Telstra shall not be required to amend, extend or terminate any contractual or other relationship with the Company, the acquirer or their respective affiliates.

(3) Covenant Not to Compete. Intel Capital Corporation and Telstra shall not be required to agree to any covenant not to compete or covenant not to solicit customers, employees or suppliers of any party to the Required Sale.

(d) The obligations of the TPG Stockholders pursuant to this Section 2.9 are further subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

(1) The only representations, warranties or covenants that TPG Stockholders shall be required to make in connection with a Required Sale are representations and warranties with respect to (A) ability to execute, deliver and perform any acquisition agreement; (B) its own ownership of the Company’s securities to be sold by it; (C) its ability to convey title thereto free and clear of liens, encumbrances or adverse claims; and (D) reasonable covenants regarding confidentiality, publicity and similar matters.

(2) Covenant Not to Compete. TPG Stockholders shall not be required to agree to any covenant not to compete or covenant not to solicit customers, employees or suppliers of any party to the Required Sale.

 

  2.10 Legal Fees and Expenses

The Company shall reimburse the reasonable fees and expenses of one (1) special counsel to the holders of Preferred Stock in an amount not to exceed $5,000.00 to review closing documents on their behalf in each future financing transaction in which net proceeds to the Company total at least $1,000,000, and the Company shall reimburse the reasonable fees and expenses of one (1) special counsel to the holders of Preferred Stock in an amount not to exceed $30,000.00 in connection with a Required Sale.

 

  2.11 Directors’ Liability and Indemnification .

The Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws shall provide (a) for elimination of the liability of director to the maximum extent permitted by law and (b) for indemnification of directors for acts on behalf of the Company to the maximum extent permitted by law. In addition, the Company shall enter into and use its best efforts to at all times maintain indemnification agreements with each of its directors to indemnify such directors to the maximum extent permissible under applicable law and in a form reasonably acceptable to the directors and the Major Investors.

 

24


  2.12 Lock-Up Agreement .

The Company agrees that, until the time of the Initial Offering, in the event that the Company enters into an agreement to issue shares of its capital stock (or securities convertible or exercisable into shares of capital stock), the Company agrees to include, as a condition to entering into such agreement, a market standoff or “lockup” language substantially the same as Section 1.13.

 

  2.13 Voting Agreement .

The Company agrees that, until the time of the Initial Offering, in the event that the Company enters into an agreement to issue shares of its capital stock, following which such holder of common stock shall hold securities of the Company constituting one percent (1%) or more of the Company’s then outstanding capital stock (treating for this purpose all shares of Common Stock issuable upon exercise of or conversion of outstanding options, warrants or convertible securities, as if exercised and/or converted or exchanged), then, the Company shall cause such holder, as a condition precedent to entering into such agreement, to become a party to that certain Seventh Amended and Restated Voting Agreement, by and between the Company, the Founders and the Investors (as such terms are defined therein), of even date herewith, as may be amended from time to time.

 

  2.14 Assignment of Right of First Refusal .

In the event the Company elects not to exercise in full any right of first refusal or right of first offer the Company may have on a proposed transfer of any of the Company’s outstanding shares of capital stock pursuant to the Company’s charter documents, by contract or otherwise, the Company shall assign such right of first refusal or right of first offer with respect to any shares not acquired by the Company to each Offeree. Such assignment shall be made not less than fifteen (15) days prior to the date of the termination of the Company’s first refusal or first offer right. Each Offeree shall have a right to purchase its pro rata share of the capital stock proposed to be transferred. Each Offeree’s pro rata share is equal to the product obtained by multiplying (a) the aggregate number of shares proposed to be transferred by (ii) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of shares of Preferred Stock of which such Offeree is deemed to be a holder immediately prior to the proposed transfer and the denominator of which is the total number of shares of Preferred Stock owned by all Offerees at the time of such proposed transfer.

 

  2.15 Termination of Covenants

The covenants set forth in Section 2, other than the provisions of Section 2.11, shall terminate and be of no further force or effect (a) upon the consummation of the Company’s Initial Offering, (b) at such time as the Company becomes subject to the reporting provisions of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or (c) upon the consummation of a Liquidation Event or a Deemed Liquidation (in each case, as defined in the Restated Charter).

 

25


3. Miscellaneous

 

  3.1 Legend

Each certificate evidencing any of the Registrable Securities shall bear a legend substantially as follows:

“THE SECURITIES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF A CERTAIN INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE COMPANY AND THE STOCKHOLDER, AND MAY NOT BE SOLD, TRANSFERRED OR ENCUMBERED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS OF SAID AGREEMENT, A COPY OF WHICH IS ON FILE AT THE PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICE OF THE COMPANY AND WILL BE FURNISHED TO THE HOLDER OF THIS CERTIFICATE UPON REQUEST AND WITHOUT CHARGE.”

 

  3.2 Successors and Assigns

Except as otherwise provided herein, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the respective successors and assigns of the parties (including transferees of any shares of Registrable Securities). Nothing in this Agreement, express or implied, is intended to confer upon any party other than the parties hereto or their respective successors and assigns any rights, remedies, obligations, or liabilities under or by reason of this Agreement, except as expressly provided in this Agreement.

 

  3.3 Governing Law

This Agreement and all acts and transactions pursuant hereto and the rights and obligations of the parties hereto shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of Delaware, as applied to agreements among Delaware residents entered into and to be performed entirely within Delaware without giving effect to principles of conflicts of law.

 

  3.4 Counterparts

This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

 

  3.5 Titles and Subtitles

The titles and subtitles used in this Agreement are used for convenience only and are not to be considered in construing or interpreting this Agreement.

 

  3.6 Notices

Unless otherwise provided, any notice under this Agreement shall be given in writing and shall be deemed effectively delivered (a) upon personal delivery to the party to be notified,

 

26


(b) when sent by electronic mail or facsimile if sent during normal business hours of the recipient; if not, then on the next business day, (c) five (5) days after having been sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or (d) one (1) business day after deposit with a reputable overnight courier, prepaid for overnight delivery and addressed to the party to be notified at the address indicated for such party on the exhibits hereto, or at such other address as such party may designate by ten (10) days advance written notice to the other party given in the foregoing manner.

 

  3.7 Entire Agreement; Amendments and Waivers

This Agreement (including the exhibits hereto) and the documents referred to herein constitute the full and entire understanding and agreement among the parties with regard to the subjects hereof and thereof, and no party shall be liable or bound to any other party in any manner by any warranties, representations, or covenants, except as specifically set forth herein or therein. Without limiting the foregoing, this Agreement amends and restates the Existing Investors’ Rights Agreement in its entirety. Except as set forth herein, any term of this Agreement may be amended and the observance of any term of this Agreement may be waived (either generally or in a particular instance and either retroactively or prospectively), only with the written consent of the Company and the holders of a majority of the Registrable Securities; provided , however , that (i) any amendment of Section 2.1 that would result in DST, Mitsui, Telefonica, Telstra or Macnica not having the status of a Major Investor as a result of such amendment, or (ii) any waiver of Section 2.1 that only applies to DST, Mitsui, Telefonica, Telstra or Macnica, shall require the written consent of DST, Mitsui, Telefonica, Telstra or Macnica, as the case may be; provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 2.3 shall require the written consent of the Company and the holders of a majority of Registrable Securities held by the Major Investors and shall be subject to the provisions of Section 2.3(h); provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 2.3(h) shall require the written consent of Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. (and its affiliated entities); provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 2.3 that limits or removes the rights of the Series F Holders shall require the written consent of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the Registrable Securities held by the Series F Holders; provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 2.4 that limits or removes the rights of an Observer to the rights set forth herein shall require the written consent of the affiliated Observer Rights Holder; provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Sections 1.2(a)(ii), 1.2(c)(3), 1.4 (to the extent that such amendment or waiver would prohibit any TPG Stockholder from exercising the right to request the Company file a Shelf Registration Statement thereunder), the last sentence of 1.14, 2.1 (to the extent such amendment or waiver would prohibit any TPG Stockholder that is a Series F Holder from exercising the rights of a Major Investor hereunder), 2.3 (to the extent such amendment or waiver would amend, waive, or limit the rights of any TPG Stockholder with respect to an offering of Additional Shares of Common Stock), 2.4 (to the extent such amendment or waiver would amend, waive, or limit the rights of any TPG Stockholder with respect to appoint an Observer), 2.6 (to the extent such amendment or waiver would amend, waive, or limit the rights of the member of the Board of Directors designated by TPG Bogota Holdings, L.P. or the Series F Preferred to be a member of all committees of the Board of Directors or, if not a member, to attend all such committee meetings), 2.9(b)(1), 2.9(d) or this proviso of Section 3.7 shall require the written consent of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the Registrable Securities held by the TPG Stockholders;

 

27


provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 1.2(a)(i) or Section 2.3 shall require the prior written consent of the General Atlantic Stockholders ( provided , that, notwithstanding the foregoing or anything to the contrary, in this proviso applicable to the General Atlantic Stockholders, Holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the Registrable Securities shall be permitted to waive Section 2.3 for issuances of Additional Shares of Common Stock to operating companies or their related investment funds, provided that no venture capital fund, private equity fund or other fund or entity whose principal purpose is investment related (other than investment funds of operating companies) participates in such issuance); provided , further , that any amendment or waiver of Section 2.9(c) shall require the prior written consent of Intel Capital Corporation and Telstra; provided , further , that in the event that such amendment or waiver adversely affects the obligations or rights of the Founders or the Investors in a different manner than the other Holders, such amendment or waiver shall also require the written consent of the holders of a majority in interest of the Founders or the Investors, as applicable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Agreement may not be amended or modified and the observance of any term of this Agreement may not be waived with respect to any Investor without the written consent of such Investor unless such amendment, modification or waiver (x) applies to all Investors in the same fashion, (y) does not explicitly adversely affect such Investor in a manner differently than other Investors and (z) does not impose any additional obligations or liabilities on, or increases any liabilities or obligations of, such Investor under Section 2.9. Any amendment or waiver effected in accordance with this paragraph shall be binding upon each Holder of any Registrable Securities, each future Holder of any Registrable Securities and the Company. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may amend this Agreement solely to add a party who after the date of this Agreement acquires shares of the Company’s Series F Preferred pursuant to the terms of the Purchase Agreement. Any such additional party, by executing a counterpart signature page to this Agreement, shall become an Investor for all purposes and shall be bound by all of the applicable provisions under this Agreement. Any amendment or waiver effected in accordance with this paragraph shall be binding upon each Holder of any Registrable Securities, each future Holder of any Registrable Securities and the Company. The Company shall give prompt written notice of any amendment or termination hereof or waiver hereunder to any party hereto that did not consent in writing to such amendment, termination or waiver.

 

  3.8 Severability

If one or more provisions of this Agreement are held to be unenforceable under applicable law, such provision shall be excluded from this Agreement and the balance of the Agreement shall be interpreted as if such provision were so excluded and shall be enforceable in accordance with its terms.

 

  3.9 Aggregation of Stock

All shares of Registrable Securities held or acquired by affiliated entities or persons shall be aggregated together for the purpose of determining the availability of any rights under this Agreement.

 

28


  3.10 Expenses

If any action at law or in equity is necessary to enforce or interpret the terms of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys’ fees, costs and necessary disbursements in addition to any other relief to which such party may be entitled.

 

  3.11 Further Assurances

Each party hereto agrees to execute and deliver, by the proper exercise of its corporate, limited liability company, partnership or other powers, all such other and additional instruments and documents and do all such other acts and things as may be necessary to more fully effectuate this Agreement.

 

  3.12 Arbitration

In the event of any dispute arising hereunder or related hereto, the parties shall first attempt to resolve such dispute though informal negotiations. Any dispute not resolved through informal negotiations shall be resolved by binding arbitration before a single arbitrator sitting in Northern California, acting under the expedited commercial rules of the American Arbitration Association. The cost of the arbitration shall initially be shared equally between the parties, provided that the arbitrator shall order such cost, along with any legal costs pursuant to Section 3.10, borne by the non-prevailing party. Nothing herein shall preclude resorting to courts of competent jurisdiction for requests for preliminary injunctive relief or other such relief which cannot practicably be obtained through such arbitration procedure. Each party hereby consents to the exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the federal and state courts located in Northern California with subject matter jurisdiction over the matter in controversy, for any matter appropriately brought before a court pursuant to this Section 3.12.

[SIGNATURE PAGES FOLLOW]

 

29


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

COMPANY:
BOX, INC.

/s/ Aaron Levie

Aaron Levie
Chief Executive Officer

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

FOUNDERS:

/s/ Aaron Levie

Aaron Levie

/s/ Dylan Smith

Dylan Smith
DCS GRAT OF 2014
By:  

/s/ Dylan Smith

  Dylan Smith, Trustee

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
TPG BOGOTA HOLDINGS, L.P.
By:   TPG Growth II Advisors, Inc., its General Partner
By:  

/s/ Ronald Cami

  Name:   Ronald Cami
  Title:   Vice President

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:

ANDREESSEN HOROWITZ FUND II, L.P .

as nominee for

Andreessen Horowitz Fund II, L.P.
Andreessen Horowitz Fund II-A, L.P. and
Andreessen Horowitz Fund II-B, L.P.
By:  

AH Equity Partners II, L.L.C.

its general partner

By:  

/s/ Scott Kupor

  Name:   Scott Kupor
  Title:   COO
AH ANNEX FUND, L.P.
By:  

AH Equity Partners II, L.L.C.

Its general partner

By:  

/s/ Scott Kupor

  Name:   Scott Kupor
  Title:   COO

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
BESSEMER VENTURE PARTNERS VIII L.P.
BESSEMER VENTURE PARTNERS VIII
INSTITUTIONAL L.P.
By:   Deer VIII & Co. L.P., their General Partner
By:   Deer VIII & Co. Ltd., its General Partner
By:  

/s/ J. Edmund Colloton

  Name:   J. Edmund Colloton
  Title:   Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.
INVESTORS:
COATUE MANAGEMENT, L.L.C.
On behalf of Coatue Offshore Master Fund, Ltd.
By:  

/s/ Colleen Lynch

Name:  

Colleen Lynch

Title:  

Authorized Signatory

COATUE PRIVATE FUND I LP
By:   Coatue Hybrid GP I LLC, its general partner
By:  

/s/ Colleen Lynch

Name:  

Colleen Lynch

Title:  

Authorized Signatory

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON GROWTH FUND 2006, L.P.
By:  

/s/ Mark W. Bailey

Name:  

Mark W. Bailey

Title:  

Director

DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON PARTNERS GROWTH FUND 2006, LLC
By:  

/s/ Mark W. Bailey

  Name:   Mark W. Bailey
  Title:   Authorized Member
DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON FUND VIII, L.P.
By:  

/s/ John Fisher

  Name:   John Fisher
  Title:   Managing Director
DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON PARTNERS VIII, LLC
By:  

/s/ John Fisher

  Name:   John Fisher
  Title:   Managing Member
DRAPER ASSOCIATES, L.P.
By:  

/s/ Timothy C. Draper

  Name:   Timothy C. Draper
  Title:   General Partner

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON FUND IX, L.P.
By:  

/s/ John Fisher

  Name:   John Fisher
  Title:   Managing Director
DRAPER FISHER JURVETSON PARTNERS IX, LLC
By:  

/s/ John Fisher

  Name:   John Fisher
  Title:   Managing Member

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
DST GLOBAL III, L.P.
By:   DST Managers Limited, its General Partner
By:  

/s/ Sara Hollinrake

Name:   Sara Hollinrake
Title:   Director
DST GLOBAL III-B, L.P.
By:   DST Managers Limited, its General Partner
By:  

/s/ Sara Hollinrake

Name:   Sara Hollinrake
Title:   Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTOR:
GENERAL ATLANTIC PARTNERS 90, L.P.
By:   General Atlantic GenPar, L.P., its General Partner
By:   General Atlantic LLC, its General Partner
By:  

/s/ David Rosenstein

  Name:   David Rosenstein
  Title:   Managing Director
GAP COINVESTMENTS III, LLC
By:   General Atlantic LLC, its Managing Member
By:  

/s/ David Rosenstein

  Name:   David Rosenstein
  Title:   Managing Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTOR:
GAP COINVESTMENTS IV, LLC
By:   General Atlantic LLC, its Managing Member
By:  

/s/ David Rosenstein

  Name:   David Rosenstein
  Title:   Managing Director
GAP COINVESTMENTS CDA, L.P.
By:   General Atlantic LLC, its General Partner
By:  

/s/ David Rosenstein

  Name:   David Rosenstein
  Title:   Managing Director
GAPCO GMBH & CO. KG
By:   GAPCO Management GmbH, its General Partner
By:  

/s/ David Rosenstein

  Name:   David Rosenstein
  Title:   Managing Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
MERITECH CAPITAL PARTNERS IV L.P.
By:   Meritech Capital Associates IV L.L.C.
  its General Partner
By:  

/s/ George Bischof

  Name:   George Bischof
  Title:   Managing Director
MERITECH CAPITAL AFFILIATES IV L.P.
By:   Meritech Capital Associates IV L.L.C.
  its General Partner
By:  

/s/ George Bischof

  Name:   George Bischof
  Title:   Managing Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
NEW ENTERPRISE ASSOCIATES 13, L.P.
By:   NEA Partners 13, L.P., its general partner
By:   NEA 13 GP, LTD, its general partner
By:  

/s/ Louis S. Citron

Name:   Louis S. Citron
Title:   Chief Legal Officer
NEA VENTURES 2011, LIMITED PARTNERSHIP
By:  

/s/ Louis S. Citron

Name:   Louis S. Citron
Title:   Vice President

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
SCALE VENTURE PARTNERS III, L.P.
By:   Scale Venture Management III, LLC
Its:   General Partner
By:  

/s/ Rory O’Driscoll

  Name:   Rory O’Driscoll
  Title:   Managing Director

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
U.S. VENTURE PARTNERS IX, L.P.
By:   Presidio Management Group IX, L.L.C.
Its:   General Partner
By:  

/s/ Steven Krausz

  Name:   Steven Krausz
  Title:   Managing Member

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Eighth Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

INVESTORS:
SAP VENTURES FUND I, L.P.
By:   SAP VENTURES (GPE) I, LLC
Its:   General Partner
By:  

/s/ Jai Das

Name:   Jai Das
Title:   Managing Member
By:   SAP VENTURES (GPE) I, LLC
Its:   General Partner
By:  

/s/ Nino Marakovic

Name:   Nino Marakovic
Title:   CEO & Managing Member

 

SIGNATURE PAGE TO

EIGHT AMENDED AND RESTATED INVESTORS’ RIGHTS AGREEMENT


SCHEDULE A

SCHEDULE OF EXISTING INVESTORS

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P.

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P.

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P.

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC

Draper Associates, L.P.

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P.

TWB Investment Partnership II, L.P.

Hercules Technology II, L.P.

Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P.

Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P.

Emergence Capital Partners II, L.P.

Andreessen Horowitz Fund II, L.P. as nominee for

Andreessen Horowitz Fund II, L.P. Andreessen Horowitz

Fund II-A, L.P. and Andreessen Horowitz Fund II-B, L.P.

Red Brick Investment Company, LLC

Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc.

The Board of Trustees of the

Leland Stanford Junior University (SBST)

Direct Investments

Stanford Management Company

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P.

Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC

AH Annex Fund, L.P.

SAP Ventures Fund I, L.P.


salesforce.com, Inc.

Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P.

Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.

New Enterprise Associates 13, L.P.

NEA Ventures 2011, Limited Partnership

General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P.

GAP Coinvestments III, LLC

GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC

GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P.

GAPCO GMBH & CO. KG

The Social+Capital Partnership, L.P.

The Social+Capital Partnership Principals Fund, L.P.

Intel Capital Corporation

Coatue Hybrid GP I LLC


SCHEDULE B

SCHEDULE OF SERIES E-1 HOLDERS

MITSUI & CO. (U.S.A.), INC.

MITSUI KNOWLEDGE INDUSTRY CO., LTD.

DST GLOBAL III, L.P.

DST GLOBAL III-B, L.P.

COATUE PRIVATE FUND I LP

MACNICA INVESTMENT PARTNERS

DRAPER FISHER JURVESTSON GROWTH FUND 2006, L.P.

DRAPER FISHER JURVESTSON PARTNERS GROWTH FUND 2006, LLC

Technology Ventures III Venture Capital Investment Limited Partnership

THE SOCIAL+CAPITAL PARTNERSHIP II, L.P., FOR ITSELF AND AS NOMINEE FOR CERTAIN OTHER INDIVIDUALS AND ENTITIES

BESSEMER VENTURE PARTNERS VIII L.P.

BESSEMER VENTURE PARTNERS VIII INSTITUTIONAL L.P.

TELEFONICA DIGITAL VENTURE CAPITAL, S.L.

TELSTRA VENTURES PTY LTD

JEREMY STOPPELMAN TTEE UTD 3/16/10

ENRIQUE SALEM

A-GRADE HOLDINGS, LLC


SCHEDULE C

SCHEDULE OF SERIES F HOLDERS

COATUE OFFSHORE MASTER FUND, LTD.

COATUE PRIVATE FUND I LP

TPG BOGOTA HOLDINGS, L.P.


SCHEDULE D

SCHEDULE OF FOUNDERS

Aaron Levie

Dylan Smith

DCS GRAT OF 2014

Exhibit 10.1

BOX, INC.

INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT

This Indemnification Agreement (this “ Agreement ”) is dated as of                  , 20     and is between Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), and                      (“ Indemnitee ”).

RECITALS

A. Indemnitee’s service to the Company substantially benefits the Company.

B. Individuals are reluctant to serve as directors or officers of corporations or in certain other capacities unless they are provided with adequate protection through insurance or indemnification against the risks of claims and actions against them arising out of such service.

C. Indemnitee does not regard the protection currently provided by applicable law, the Company’s governing documents and any insurance as adequate under the present circumstances, and Indemnitee may not be willing to serve as a director or officer without additional protection.

D. In order to induce Indemnitee to continue to provide services to the Company, it is reasonable, prudent and necessary for the Company to contractually obligate itself to indemnify, and to advance expenses on behalf of, Indemnitee as permitted by applicable law.

E. This Agreement is a supplement to and in furtherance of the indemnification provided in the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws, and any resolutions adopted pursuant thereto, and this Agreement shall not be deemed a substitute therefor, nor shall this Agreement be deemed to limit, diminish or abrogate any rights of Indemnitee thereunder.

The parties therefore agree as follows:

1. Definitions .

(a) A “ Change in Control ” shall be deemed to occur upon the earliest to occur after the date of this Agreement of any of the following events:

(i) Acquisition of Stock by Third Party . Any Person (as defined below) is or becomes the Beneficial Owner (as defined below), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing fifteen percent (15%) or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding securities;

(ii) Change in Board Composition . During any period of two consecutive years (not including any period prior to the execution of this Agreement), individuals who at the beginning of such period constitute the Company’s board of directors, and any new directors (other than a director designated by a person who has entered into an agreement with the Company to effect a transaction described in Sections 1(a)(i), 1(a)(iii) or 1(a)(iv)) whose election by the board of directors or nomination for election by the Company’s stockholders was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds of the directors then still in office who either were directors at the beginning of the period or whose election or nomination for election was previously so approved, cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the members of the Company’s board of directors;


(iii) Corporate Transactions . The effective date of a merger or consolidation of the Company with any other entity, other than a merger or consolidation which would result in the voting securities of the Company outstanding immediately prior to such merger or consolidation continuing to represent (either by remaining outstanding or by being converted into voting securities of the surviving entity) more than 50% of the combined voting power of the voting securities of the surviving entity outstanding immediately after such merger or consolidation and with the power to elect at least a majority of the board of directors or other governing body of such surviving entity;

(iv) Liquidation . The approval by the stockholders of the Company of a complete liquidation of the Company or an agreement for the sale or disposition by the Company of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets; and

(v) Other Events . Any other event of a nature that would be required to be reported in response to Item 6(e) of Schedule 14A of Regulation 14A (or in response to any similar item on any similar schedule or form) promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, whether or not the Company is then subject to such reporting requirement.

For purposes of this Section 1(a), the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(1) “ Person ” shall have the meaning as set forth in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; provided , however , that “ Person ” shall exclude (i) the Company, (ii) any trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under an employee benefit plan of the Company, and (iii) any corporation owned, directly or indirectly, by the stockholders of the Company in substantially the same proportions as their ownership of stock of the Company.

(2) “ Beneficial Owner ” shall have the meaning given to such term in Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; provided , however , that “ Beneficial Owner ” shall exclude any Person otherwise becoming a Beneficial Owner by reason of (i) the stockholders of the Company approving a merger of the Company with another entity or (ii) the Company’s board of directors approving a sale of securities by the Company to such Person.

(b) “ Corporate Status ” describes the status of a person who is or was a director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or any other Enterprise.

(c) “ DGCL ” means the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

(d) “ Disinterested Director ” means a director of the Company who is not and was not a party to the Proceeding in respect of which indemnification is sought by Indemnitee.

(e) “ Enterprise ” means the Company and any other corporation, partnership, limited liability company, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise of which Indemnitee is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary.

 

-2-


(f) “ Expenses ” include all reasonable attorneys’ fees, retainers, court costs, transcript costs, fees and costs of experts, witness fees, travel expenses, duplicating costs, printing and binding costs, telephone charges, postage, delivery service fees, and all other disbursements or expenses of the types customarily incurred in connection with prosecuting, defending, preparing to prosecute or defend, investigating, being or preparing to be a witness in, or otherwise participating in, a Proceeding. Expenses also include (i) Expenses incurred in connection with any appeal resulting from any Proceeding, including without limitation the premium, security for, and other costs relating to any cost bond, supersedeas bond or other appeal bond or their equivalent, and (ii) for purposes of Section 12(d), Expenses incurred by Indemnitee in connection with the interpretation, enforcement or defense of Indemnitee’s rights under this Agreement or under any directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policies maintained by the Company. Expenses, however, shall not include amounts paid in settlement by Indemnitee or the amount of judgments or fines against Indemnitee.

(g) “ Independent Counsel ” means a law firm, or a partner or member of a law firm, that is experienced in matters of corporation law and neither presently is, nor in the past five years has been, retained to represent (i) the Company or Indemnitee in any matter material to either such party (other than as Independent Counsel with respect to matters concerning Indemnitee under this Agreement, or other indemnitees under similar indemnification agreements), or (ii) any other party to the Proceeding giving rise to a claim for indemnification hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the term “ Independent Counsel ” shall not include any person who, under the applicable standards of professional conduct then prevailing, would have a conflict of interest in representing either the Company or Indemnitee in an action to determine Indemnitee’s rights under this Agreement.

(h) “ Proceeding ” means any threatened, pending or completed action, suit, arbitration, mediation, alternate dispute resolution mechanism, investigation, inquiry, administrative hearing or proceeding, whether brought in the right of the Company or otherwise and whether of a civil, criminal, administrative or investigative nature, including any appeal therefrom and including without limitation any such Proceeding pending as of the date of this Agreement, in which Indemnitee was, is or will be involved as a party, a potential party, a non-party witness or otherwise by reason of (i) the fact that Indemnitee is or was a director or officer of the Company, (ii) any action taken by Indemnitee or any action or inaction on Indemnitee’s part while acting as a director or officer of the Company, or (iii) the fact that he or she is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or any other Enterprise, in each case whether or not serving in such capacity at the time any liability or Expense is incurred for which indemnification or advancement of expenses can be provided under this Agreement.

(i) Reference to “ other enterprises ” shall include employee benefit plans; references to “ fines ” shall include any excise taxes assessed on a person with respect to any employee benefit plan; references to “ serving at the request of the Company ” shall include any service as a director, officer, employee or agent of the Company which imposes duties on, or

 

-3-


involves services by, such director, officer, employee or agent with respect to an employee benefit plan, its participants or beneficiaries; and a person who acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in the best interests of the participants and beneficiaries of an employee benefit plan shall be deemed to have acted in a manner “ not opposed to the best interests of the Company ” as referred to in this Agreement.

2. Indemnity in Third-Party Proceedings . The Company shall indemnify Indemnitee in accordance with the provisions of this Section 2 if Indemnitee is, or is threatened to be made, a party to or a participant in any Proceeding, other than a Proceeding by or in the right of the Company to procure a judgment in its favor. Pursuant to this Section 2, Indemnitee shall be indemnified to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law against all Expenses, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on his or her behalf in connection with such Proceeding or any claim, issue or matter therein, if Indemnitee acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe that his or her conduct was unlawful.

3. Indemnity in Proceedings by or in the Right of the Company . The Company shall indemnify Indemnitee in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3 if Indemnitee is, or is threatened to be made, a party to or a participant in any Proceeding by or in the right of the Company to procure a judgment in its favor. Pursuant to this Section 3, Indemnitee shall be indemnified to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on Indemnitee’s behalf in connection with such Proceeding or any claim, issue or matter therein, if Indemnitee acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company. No indemnification for Expenses shall be made under this Section 3 in respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which Indemnitee shall have been adjudged by a court of competent jurisdiction to be liable to the Company, unless and only to the extent that the Delaware Court of Chancery or any court in which the Proceeding was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all the circumstances of the case, Indemnitee is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnification for such expenses as the Delaware Court of Chancery or such other court shall deem proper.

4. Indemnification for Expenses of a Party Who is Wholly or Partly Successful . To the extent that Indemnitee is a party to or a participant in and is successful (on the merits or otherwise) in defense of any Proceeding or any claim, issue or matter therein, the Company shall indemnify Indemnitee against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on Indemnitee’s behalf in connection therewith. To the extent permitted by applicable law, if Indemnitee is not wholly successful in such Proceeding but is successful, on the merits or otherwise, in defense of one or more but less than all claims, issues or matters in such Proceeding, the Company shall indemnify Indemnitee against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on Indemnitee’s behalf in connection with (a) each successfully resolved claim, issue or matter, and (b) any claim, issue or matter related to any such successfully resolved claim, issue or matter. For purposes of this section, the termination of any claim, issue or matter in such a Proceeding by dismissal, with or without prejudice, shall be deemed to be a successful result as to such claim, issue or matter.

 

-4-


5. Indemnification for Expenses of a Witness . To the extent that Indemnitee is, by reason of his or her Corporate Status, a witness in any Proceeding to which Indemnitee is not a party, Indemnitee shall be indemnified to the extent permitted by applicable law against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on Indemnitee’s behalf in connection therewith.

6. Additional Indemnification .

(a) Notwithstanding any limitation in Sections 2, 3 or 4, the Company shall indemnify Indemnitee to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law if Indemnitee is, or is threatened to be made, a party to or a participant in any Proceeding (including a Proceeding by or in the right of the Company to procure a judgment in its favor) against all Expenses, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee or on his or her behalf in connection with the Proceeding or any claim, issue or matter therein.

(b) For purposes of Section 6(a), the meaning of the phrase “ to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law ” shall include, but not be limited to:

(i) the fullest extent permitted by the provision of the DGCL that authorizes or contemplates additional indemnification by agreement, or the corresponding provision of any amendment to or replacement of the DGCL; and

(ii) the fullest extent authorized or permitted by any amendments to or replacements of the DGCL adopted after the date of this Agreement that increase the extent to which a corporation may indemnify its officers and directors.

7. Exclusions . Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement, the Company shall not be obligated under this Agreement to make any indemnity in connection with any Proceeding (or any part of any Proceeding):

(a) for which payment has actually been made to or on behalf of Indemnitee under any statute, insurance policy, indemnity provision, vote or otherwise, except with respect to any excess beyond the amount paid;

(b) for an accounting or disgorgement of profits pursuant to Section 16(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or similar provisions of federal, state or local statutory law or common law, if Indemnitee is held liable therefor;

(c) for any reimbursement of the Company by Indemnitee of any bonus or other incentive-based or equity-based compensation or of any profits realized by Indemnitee from the sale of securities of the Company, as required in each case under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (including any such reimbursements that arise from an accounting restatement of the Company pursuant to Section 304 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (the “ Sarbanes-Oxley Act ”), or the payment to the Company of profits arising from the purchase and sale by Indemnitee of securities in violation of Section 306 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act), if Indemnitee is held liable therefor;

 

-5-


(d) initiated by Indemnitee and not by way of defense, including any Proceeding (or any part of any Proceeding) initiated by Indemnitee against the Company or its directors, officers, employees, agents or other indemnitees, unless (i) the Company’s board of directors authorized the Proceeding (or the relevant part of the Proceeding) prior to its initiation, (ii) the Company provides the indemnification, in its sole discretion, pursuant to the powers vested in the Company under applicable law, (iii) otherwise authorized in Section 12(d) or (iv) otherwise required by applicable law; or

(e) if prohibited by applicable law.

8. Advances of Expenses .

(a) The Company shall advance the Expenses incurred by Indemnitee in connection with any Proceeding prior to its final resolution, and such advancement shall be made as soon as reasonably practicable, but in any event no later than 60 days, after the receipt by the Company of a written statement or statements requesting such advances from time to time (which shall include invoices received by Indemnitee in connection with such Expenses but, in the case of invoices in connection with legal services, any references to legal work performed or to expenditure made that would cause Indemnitee to waive any privilege accorded by applicable law shall not be included with the invoice). Advances shall be unsecured and interest free and made without regard to Indemnitee’s ability to repay such advances. Indemnitee hereby undertakes to repay any advance to the extent that it is ultimately determined that Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified by the Company. This Section 8 shall not apply to the extent advancement is prohibited by law and shall not apply to any Proceeding for which indemnity is not permitted under this Agreement, but shall apply to any Proceeding referenced in Section 7(b) or 7(c) prior to a determination that Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified by the Company.

9. Procedures for Notification and Defense of Claim .

(a) Indemnitee shall notify the Company in writing of any matter with respect to which Indemnitee intends to seek indemnification or advancement of Expenses as soon as reasonably practicable following the receipt by Indemnitee of notice thereof. The written notification to the Company shall include, in reasonable detail, a description of the nature of the Proceeding and the facts underlying the Proceeding. The failure by Indemnitee to notify the Company will not relieve the Company from any liability which it may have to Indemnitee hereunder or otherwise than under this Agreement, except to the extent that such failure or delay materially prejudices the Company.

(b) If, at the time of the receipt of a notice of a Proceeding pursuant to the terms hereof, the Company has directors’ and officers’ liability insurance in effect, the Company shall give prompt notice of the commencement of the Proceeding to the insurers in accordance with the procedures set forth in the applicable policies. The Company shall thereafter take all commercially-reasonable action to cause such insurers to pay, on behalf of Indemnitee, all amounts payable as a result of such Proceeding in accordance with the terms of such policies.

 

-6-


(c) In the event the Company may be obligated to make any indemnity in connection with a Proceeding, the Company shall be entitled to assume the defense of such Proceeding with counsel approved by Indemnitee, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. After the retention of such counsel by the Company, the Company will not be liable to Indemnitee for any fees or expenses of counsel subsequently incurred by Indemnitee with respect to the same Proceeding. Notwithstanding the Company’s assumption of the defense of any such Proceeding, the Company shall be obligated to pay the fees and expenses of Indemnitee’s separate counsel to the extent (i) the employment of separate counsel by Indemnitee is authorized by the Company, (ii) counsel for the Company or Indemnitee shall have reasonably concluded that there is a conflict of interest between the Company and Indemnitee in the conduct of any such defense such that Indemnitee needs to be separately represented, (iii) the fees and expenses are non-duplicative and reasonably incurred in connection with Indemnitee’s role in the Proceeding despite the Company’s assumption of the defense; (iv) the Company is not financially or legally able to perform its indemnification obligations, or (v) the Company shall not have retained, or shall not continue to retain, such counsel to defend such Proceeding. The Company shall have the right to conduct such defense as it sees fit in its sole discretion. Regardless of any provision in this Agreement, Indemnitee shall have the right to employ counsel in any Proceeding at Indemnitee’s personal expense. The Company shall not be entitled, without the consent of Indemnitee, to assume the defense of any claim brought by or in the right of the Company.

(d) Indemnitee shall give the Company such information and cooperation in connection with the Proceeding as may be reasonably appropriate.

(e) The Company shall not be liable to indemnify Indemnitee for any settlement of any Proceeding (or any part thereof) without the Company’s prior written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

(f) The Company shall not settle any Proceeding (or any part thereof) in a manner that imposes any penalty or liability on Indemnitee without Indemnitee’s prior written consent, which may be withheld by Indemnitee in Indemnitee’s sole discretion.

10. Procedures upon Application for Indemnification .

(a) To obtain indemnification, Indemnitee shall submit to the Company a written request, including therein or therewith such documentation and information as is reasonably available to Indemnitee and as is reasonably necessary to determine whether and to what extent Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification following the final disposition of the Proceeding. Any delay in providing the request will not relieve the Company from its obligations under this Agreement, except to the extent such failure is prejudicial.

(b) Upon written request by Indemnitee for indemnification pursuant to Section 10(a), a determination with respect to Indemnitee’s entitlement thereto shall be made in the specific case (i) if a Change in Control shall have occurred, by Independent Counsel in a written opinion to the Company’s board of directors, a copy of which shall be delivered to Indemnitee or (ii) if a Change in Control shall not have occurred, if required by applicable law (A) by a majority vote of the Disinterested Directors, even though less than a quorum of the Company’s board of

 

-7-


directors, (B) by a committee of Disinterested Directors designated by a majority vote of the Disinterested Directors, even though less than a quorum of the Company’s board of directors, (C) if there are no such Disinterested Directors or, if such Disinterested Directors so direct, by Independent Counsel in a written opinion to the Company’s board of directors, a copy of which shall be delivered to Indemnitee or (D) if so directed by the Company’s board of directors, by the stockholders of the Company. If it is determined that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification, payment to Indemnitee shall be made within ten days after such determination. Indemnitee shall cooperate with the person, persons or entity making the determination with respect to Indemnitee’s entitlement to indemnification, including providing to such person, persons or entity upon reasonable advance request any documentation or information that is not privileged or otherwise protected from disclosure and that is reasonably available to Indemnitee and reasonably necessary to such determination. Any costs or expenses (including attorneys’ fees and disbursements) reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in so cooperating with the person, persons or entity making such determination shall be borne by the Company, to the extent permitted by applicable law.

(c) In the event the determination of entitlement to indemnification is to be made by Independent Counsel pursuant to Section 10(b), the Independent Counsel shall be selected as provided in this Section 10(c). If a Change in Control shall not have occurred, the Independent Counsel shall be selected by the Company’s board of directors, and the Company shall give written notice to Indemnitee advising him or her of the identity of the Independent Counsel so selected. If a Change in Control shall have occurred, the Independent Counsel shall be selected by Indemnitee (unless Indemnitee shall request that such selection be made by the Company’s board of directors, in which event the preceding sentence shall apply), and Indemnitee shall give written notice to the Company advising it of the identity of the Independent Counsel so selected. In either event, Indemnitee or the Company, as the case may be, may, within ten days after such written notice of selection shall have been given, deliver to the Company or to Indemnitee, as the case may be, a written objection to such selection; provided , however , that such objection may be asserted only on the ground that the Independent Counsel so selected does not meet the requirements of “Independent Counsel” as defined in Section 1 of this Agreement, and the objection shall set forth with particularity the factual basis of such assertion. Absent a proper and timely objection, the person so selected shall act as Independent Counsel. If such written objection is so made and substantiated, the Independent Counsel so selected may not serve as Independent Counsel unless and until such objection is withdrawn or a court has determined that such objection is without merit. If, within 20 days after the later of (i) submission by Indemnitee of a written request for indemnification pursuant to Section 10(a) hereof and (ii) the final disposition of the Proceeding, the parties have not agreed upon an Independent Counsel, either the Company or Indemnitee may petition a court of competent jurisdiction for resolution of any objection which shall have been made by the Company or Indemnitee to the other’s selection of Independent Counsel and for the appointment as Independent Counsel of a person selected by the court or by such other person as the court shall designate, and the person with respect to whom all objections are so resolved or the person so appointed shall act as Independent Counsel under Section 10(b) hereof. Upon the due commencement of any judicial proceeding or arbitration pursuant to Section 12(a) of this Agreement, the Independent Counsel shall be discharged and relieved of any further responsibility in such capacity (subject to the applicable standards of professional conduct then prevailing). The Company shall pay the reasonable fees and expenses of any Independent Counsel.

 

-8-


11. Presumptions and Effect of Certain Proceedings .

(a) In making a determination with respect to entitlement to indemnification hereunder, the person, persons or entity making such determination shall, to the fullest extent not prohibited by law, presume that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification under this Agreement, and the Company shall, to the fullest extent not prohibited by law, have the burden of proof to overcome that presumption.

(b) The termination of any Proceeding or of any claim, issue or matter therein, by judgment, order, settlement or conviction, or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent, shall not (except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement) of itself create a presumption that Indemnitee did not act in good faith and in a manner which he or she reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company or, with respect to any criminal Proceeding, that Indemnitee had reasonable cause to believe that his or her conduct was unlawful.

(c) Neither the knowledge, actions nor failure to act of any other director, officer, agent or employee of the Enterprise shall be imputed to Indemnitee for purposes of determining the right to indemnification under this Agreement.

12. Remedies of Indemnitee .

(a) Subject to Section 12(e), in the event that (i) a determination is made pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement that Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification under this Agreement, (ii) advancement of Expenses is not timely made pursuant to Section 8 or 12(d) of this Agreement, (iii) no determination of entitlement to indemnification shall have been made pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement within 90 days after the later of the receipt by the Company of the request for indemnification or the final disposition of the Proceeding, (iv) payment of indemnification pursuant to this Agreement is not made (A) within ten days after a determination has been made that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification or (B) with respect to indemnification pursuant to Sections 4, 5 and 12(d) of this Agreement, within 30 days after receipt by the Company of a written request therefor, or (v) the Company or any other person or entity takes or threatens to take any action to declare this Agreement void or unenforceable, or institutes any litigation or other action or proceeding designed to deny, or to recover from, Indemnitee the benefits provided or intended to be provided to Indemnitee hereunder, Indemnitee shall be entitled to an adjudication by a court of competent jurisdiction of his or her entitlement to such indemnification or advancement of Expenses. Alternatively, Indemnitee, at his or her option, may seek an award in arbitration with respect to his or her entitlement to such indemnification or advancement of Expenses, to be conducted by a single arbitrator pursuant to the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. Indemnitee shall commence such proceeding seeking an adjudication or an award in arbitration within 180 days following the date on which Indemnitee first has the right to commence such proceeding pursuant to this Section 12(a); provided , however , that the foregoing clause shall not apply in respect of a proceeding brought by Indemnitee to enforce his or her rights under Section 4 of this Agreement. The Company shall not oppose Indemnitee’s right to seek any such adjudication or award in arbitration in accordance with this Agreement.

 

-9-


(b) Neither (i) the failure of the Company, its board of directors, any committee or subgroup of the board of directors, Independent Counsel or stockholders to have made a determination that indemnification of Indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because Indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct, nor (ii) an actual determination by the Company, its board of directors, any committee or subgroup of the board of directors, Independent Counsel or stockholders that Indemnitee has not met the applicable standard of conduct, shall create a presumption that Indemnitee has or has not met the applicable standard of conduct. In the event that a determination shall have been made pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement that Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification, any judicial proceeding or arbitration commenced pursuant to this Section 12 shall be conducted in all respects as a de novo trial, or arbitration, on the merits, and Indemnitee shall not be prejudiced by reason of that adverse determination. In any judicial proceeding or arbitration commenced pursuant to this Section 12, the Company shall, to the fullest extent not prohibited by law, have the burden of proving Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification or advancement of Expenses, as the case may be.

(c) To the fullest extent not prohibited by law, the Company shall be precluded from asserting in any judicial proceeding or arbitration commenced pursuant to this Section 12 that the procedures and presumptions of this Agreement are not valid, binding and enforceable and shall stipulate in any such court or before any such arbitrator that the Company is bound by all the provisions of this Agreement. If a determination shall have been made pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification, the Company shall be bound by such determination in any judicial proceeding or arbitration commenced pursuant to this Section 12, absent (i) a misstatement by Indemnitee of a material fact, or an omission of a material fact necessary to make Indemnitee’s statements not materially misleading, in connection with the request for indemnification, or (ii) a prohibition of such indemnification under applicable law.

(d) To the extent not prohibited by law, the Company shall indemnify Indemnitee against all Expenses that are incurred by Indemnitee in connection with any action for indemnification or advancement of Expenses from the Company under this Agreement or under any directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policies maintained by the Company, unless the court (or arbitrator) finds that each material argument or defense advanced by Indemnitee in such action or arbitration was either frivolous or not made in good faith. Further, if requested by Indemnitee, the Company shall (as soon as reasonably practicable, but in any event no later than 60 days, after receipt by the Company of a written request therefor) advance such Expenses to Indemnitee, subject to the provisions of Section 8, subject to Indemnitee’s agreement to repay the sums advanced if the court (or arbitrator) finds that each material argument or defense advanced by Indemnitee in such action or arbitration was either frivolous or not made in good faith.

(e) Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, no determination as to entitlement to indemnification shall be required to be made prior to the final disposition of the Proceeding.

13. Contribution . To the fullest extent permissible under applicable law, if the indemnification provided for in this Agreement is unavailable to Indemnitee, the Company, in lieu of indemnifying Indemnitee, shall contribute to the amounts incurred by Indemnitee, whether for Expenses, judgments, fines or amounts paid or to be paid in settlement, in connection with any claim

 

-10-


relating to an indemnifiable event under this Agreement, in such proportion as is deemed fair and reasonable in light of all of the circumstances of such Proceeding in order to reflect (i) the relative benefits received by the Company and Indemnitee as a result of the events and transactions giving rise to such Proceeding; and (ii) the relative fault of Indemnitee and the Company (and its other directors, officers, employees and agents) in connection with such events and transactions.

14. Non-exclusivity . The rights of indemnification and to receive advancement of Expenses as provided by this Agreement shall not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which Indemnitee may at any time be entitled under applicable law, the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws, any agreement, a vote of stockholders or a resolution of directors, or otherwise. To the extent that a change in Delaware law, whether by statute or judicial decision, permits greater indemnification or advancement of Expenses than would be afforded currently under the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws and this Agreement, it is the intent of the parties hereto that Indemnitee shall enjoy by this Agreement the greater benefits so afforded by such change, subject to the restrictions expressly set forth herein or therein. Except as expressly set forth herein, no right or remedy herein conferred is intended to be exclusive of any other right or remedy, and every other right and remedy shall be cumulative and in addition to every other right and remedy given hereunder or now or hereafter existing at law or in equity or otherwise. Except as expressly set forth herein, the assertion or employment of any right or remedy hereunder, or otherwise, shall not prevent the concurrent assertion or employment of any other right or remedy.

15. Primary Responsibility . The Company acknowledges that to the extent Indemnitee is serving as a director on the Company’s board of directors at the request or direction of a venture capital fund or other entity and/or certain of its affiliates (collectively, the “ Secondary Indemnitors ”), Indemnitee may have certain rights to indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by such Secondary Indemnitors. The Company agrees that, as between the Company and the Secondary Indemnitors, the Company is primarily responsible for amounts required to be indemnified or advanced under the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws or this Agreement and any obligation of the Secondary Indemnitors to provide indemnification or advancement for the same amounts is secondary to those Company obligations. To the extent not in contravention of any insurance policy or policies providing liability or other insurance for the Company or any director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or any other Enterprise, the Company waives any right of contribution or subrogation against the Secondary Indemnitors with respect to the liabilities for which the Company is primarily responsible under this Section 15. In the event of any payment by the Secondary Indemnitors of amounts otherwise required to be indemnified or advanced by the Company under the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws or this Agreement, the Secondary Indemnitors shall be subrogated to the extent of such payment to all of the rights of recovery of Indemnitee for indemnification or advancement of expenses under the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws or this Agreement or, to the extent such subrogation is unavailable and contribution is found to be the applicable remedy, shall have a right of contribution with respect to the amounts paid. The Secondary Indemnitors are express third-party beneficiaries of the terms of this Section 15.

16. No Duplication of Payments . The Company shall not be liable under this Agreement to make any payment of amounts otherwise indemnifiable hereunder (or for which advancement is provided hereunder) if and to the extent that Indemnitee has otherwise actually received payment for such amounts under any insurance policy, contract, agreement or otherwise.

 

-11-


17. Insurance . To the extent that the Company maintains an insurance policy or policies providing liability insurance for directors, trustees, general partners, managing members, officers, employees, agents or fiduciaries of the Company or any other Enterprise, Indemnitee shall be covered by such policy or policies to the same extent as the most favorably-insured persons under such policy or policies in a comparable position.

18. Subrogation . In the event of any payment under this Agreement, the Company shall be subrogated to the extent of such payment to all of the rights of recovery of Indemnitee, who shall execute all papers required and take all action necessary to secure such rights, including execution of such documents as are necessary to enable the Company to bring suit to enforce such rights.

19. Services to the Company . Indemnitee agrees to serve as a director or officer of the Company or, at the request of the Company, as a director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of another Enterprise, for so long as Indemnitee is duly elected or appointed or until Indemnitee tenders his or her resignation or is removed from such position. Indemnitee may at any time and for any reason resign from such position (subject to any other contractual obligation or any obligation imposed by operation of law), in which event the Company shall have no obligation under this Agreement to continue Indemnitee in such position. This Agreement shall not be deemed an employment contract between the Company (or any of its subsidiaries or any Enterprise) and Indemnitee. Indemnitee specifically acknowledges that any employment with the Company (or any of its subsidiaries or any Enterprise) is at will, and Indemnitee may be discharged at any time for any reason, with or without cause, with or without notice, except as may be otherwise expressly provided in any executed, written employment contract between Indemnitee and the Company (or any of its subsidiaries or any Enterprise), any existing formal severance policies adopted by the Company’s board of directors or, with respect to service as a director or officer of the Company, the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws or the DGCL. No such document shall be subject to any oral modification thereof.

20. Duration . This Agreement shall continue until and terminate upon the later of (a) ten years after the date that Indemnitee shall have ceased to serve as a director or officer of the Company or as a director, trustee, general partner, managing member, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of any other Enterprise, as applicable; or (b) one year after the final termination of any Proceeding, including any appeal, then pending in respect of which Indemnitee is granted rights of indemnification or advancement of Expenses hereunder and of any proceeding commenced by Indemnitee pursuant to Section 12 of this Agreement relating thereto.

21. Successors . This Agreement shall be binding upon the Company and its successors and assigns, including any direct or indirect successor by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise to all or substantially all of the business or assets of the Company, and shall inure to the benefit of Indemnitee and Indemnitee’s heirs, executors and administrators. The Company shall require and cause any successor (whether direct or indirect by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business or assets of the Company, by written agreement, expressly to assume and agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be required to perform if no such succession had taken place.

 

-12-


22. Severability . Nothing in this Agreement is intended to require or shall be construed as requiring the Company to do or fail to do any act in violation of applicable law. The Company’s inability, pursuant to court order or other applicable law, to perform its obligations under this Agreement shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. If any provision or provisions of this Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable for any reason whatsoever: (i) the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions of this Agreement (including without limitation, each portion of any section of this Agreement containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that is not itself invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby and shall remain enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law; (ii) such provision or provisions shall be deemed reformed to the extent necessary to conform to applicable law and to give the maximum effect to the intent of the parties hereto; and (iii) to the fullest extent possible, the provisions of this Agreement (including, without limitation, each portion of any section of this Agreement containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that is not itself invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall be construed so as to give effect to the intent manifested thereby.

23. Enforcement . The Company expressly confirms and agrees that it has entered into this Agreement and assumed the obligations imposed on it hereby in order to induce Indemnitee to serve as a director or officer of the Company, and the Company acknowledges that Indemnitee is relying upon this Agreement in serving as a director or officer of the Company.

24. Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior agreements and understandings, oral, written and implied, between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof; provided , however , that this Agreement is a supplement to and in furtherance of the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws and applicable law.

25. Modification and Waiver . No supplement, modification or amendment to this Agreement shall be binding unless executed in writing by the parties hereto. No amendment, alteration or repeal of this Agreement shall adversely affect any right of Indemnitee under this Agreement in respect of any action taken or omitted by such Indemnitee in his or her Corporate Status prior to such amendment, alteration or repeal. No waiver of any of the provisions of this Agreement shall constitute or be deemed a waiver of any other provision of this Agreement nor shall any waiver constitute a continuing waiver.

26. Notices . All notices and other communications required or permitted hereunder shall be in writing and shall be mailed by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, or otherwise delivered by hand, messenger or courier service addressed:

(a) if to Indemnitee, to Indemnitee’s address, as shown on the signature page of this Agreement or in the Company’s records, as may be updated in accordance with the provisions hereof; or

 

-13-


(b) if to the Company, to the attention of the Chief Executive Officer or Chief Financial Officer of the Company at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California 94022, or at such other current address as the Company shall have furnished to Indemnitee, with a copy (which shall not constitute notice) to Steven E. Bochner, Jose F. Macias, and, Jon C. Avina at Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C., 650 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304.

Each such notice or other communication shall for all purposes of this Agreement be treated as effective or having been given (i) if delivered by hand, messenger or courier service, when delivered (or if sent via a nationally-recognized overnight courier service, freight prepaid, specifying next-business-day delivery, one business day after deposit with the courier), or (ii) if sent via mail, at the earlier of its receipt or five days after the same has been deposited in a regularly-maintained receptacle for the deposit of the United States mail, addressed and mailed as aforesaid.

27. Applicable Law and Consent to Jurisdiction . This Agreement and the legal relations among the parties shall be governed by, and construed and enforced in accordance with, the laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to its conflict of laws rules. Except with respect to any arbitration commenced by Indemnitee pursuant to Section 12(a) of this Agreement, or except as mutually agreed by the parties in writing, the Company and Indemnitee hereby irrevocably and unconditionally (i) agree that any action or proceeding arising out of or in connection with this Agreement shall be brought only in the Delaware Court of Chancery, and not in any other state or federal court in the United States of America or any court in any other country, (ii) consent to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Delaware Court of Chancery for purposes of any action or proceeding arising out of or in connection with this Agreement, (iii) appoint, to the extent such party is not otherwise subject to service of process in the State of Delaware, The Corporation Trust Company, Wilmington, Delaware as its agent in the State of Delaware as such party’s agent for acceptance of legal process in connection with any such action or proceeding against such party with the same legal force and validity as if served upon such party personally within the State of Delaware, (iv) waive any objection to the laying of venue of any such action or proceeding in the Delaware Court of Chancery, and (v) waive, and agree not to plead or to make, any claim that any such action or proceeding brought in the Delaware Court of Chancery has been brought in an improper or inconvenient forum.

28. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed to be an original but all of which together shall constitute one and the same Agreement. This Agreement may also be executed and delivered by facsimile signature and in counterparts, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed to be an original but all of which together shall constitute one and the same Agreement. Only one such counterpart signed by the party against whom enforceability is sought needs to be produced to evidence the existence of this Agreement.

29. Captions . The headings of the paragraphs of this Agreement are inserted for convenience only and shall not be deemed to constitute part of this Agreement or to affect the construction thereof.

( signature page follows )

 

-14-


The parties are signing this Indemnification Agreement as of the date stated in the introductory sentence.

 

BOX, INC.

 

(Signature)

 

(Print Name)

 

(Title)
INDEMNITEE

 

(Signature)

 

(Print Name)

 

(Street address)

 

(City, State and ZIP)

Exhibit 10.6

BOX, INC.

EXECUTIVE INCENTIVE PLAN

Adopted on April 15, 2014

1. Purposes of the Plan . The Plan is intended to increase shareholder value and the success of the Company by motivating Employees to (a) perform to the best of their abilities, and (b) achieve the Company’s objectives.

2. Definitions .

(a) “ Affiliate ” means any corporation or other entity (including, but not limited to, partnerships and joint ventures) controlled by the Company.

(b) “ Actual Award ” means as to any Performance Period, the actual award (if any) payable to a Participant for the Performance Period, subject to the Committee’s authority under Section 3(d) to modify the award.

(c) “ Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(d) “ Bonus Pool ” means the pool of funds available for distribution to Participants. Subject to the terms of the Plan, the Committee establishes the Bonus Pool for each Performance Period.

(e) “ Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. Reference to a specific section of the Code or regulation thereunder will include such section or regulation, any valid regulation promulgated thereunder, and any comparable provision of any future legislation or regulation amending, supplementing or superseding such section or regulation.

(f) “ Committee ” means the committee appointed by the Board (pursuant to Section 5) to administer the Plan. Unless and until the Board otherwise determines, the Board’s Compensation Committee will administer the Plan and be considered the Committee for purposes of the Plan.

(g) “ Company ” means Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, or any successor thereto.

(h) “ Employee ” means any executive, officer, or key employee of the Company or of an Affiliate, whether such individual is so employed at the time the Plan is adopted or becomes so employed subsequent to the adoption of the Plan.

(i) “ Participant ” means as to any Performance Period, an Employee who has been selected by the Committee for participation in the Plan for that Performance Period.

(j) “ Performance Period ” means the period of time for the measurement of the performance criteria that must be met to receive an Actual Award, as determined by the Committee


in its sole discretion. A Performance Period may be divided into one or more shorter periods if, for example, but not by way of limitation, the Committee desires to measure some performance criteria over 12 months and other criteria over 3 months.

(k) “ Plan ” means this Executive Incentive Plan, as set forth in this instrument (including any appendix attached hereto) and as hereafter amended from time to time.

(l) “ Target Award ” means the target award, at 100% target level of achievement, payable under the Plan to a Participant for the Performance Period, as determined by the Committee in accordance with Section 3(b).

3. Selection of Participants and Determination of Awards .

(a) Selection of Participants . The Committee, in its sole discretion, will select the Employees who will be Participants for any Performance Period. Participation in the Plan is in the sole discretion of the Committee, on a Performance Period by Performance Period basis. Accordingly, an Employee who is a Participant for a given Performance Period in no way is guaranteed or assured of being selected for participation in any subsequent Performance Period or Periods.

(b) Determination of Target Awards . The Committee, in its sole discretion, will establish a Target Award for each Participant, which may be a percentage of a Participant’s annual base salary as of the beginning or end of the Performance Period or a fixed dollar amount.

(c) Bonus Pool . Each Performance Period, the Committee, in its sole discretion, will establish a Bonus Pool, which pool may be established before, during or after the applicable Performance Period. Actual Awards will be paid from the Bonus Pool.

(d) Discretion to Modify Awards . Notwithstanding any contrary provision of the Plan, the Committee may, in its sole discretion and at any time, (i) increase, reduce or eliminate a Participant’s Actual Award, and/or (ii) increase, reduce or eliminate the amount allocated to the Bonus Pool. The Actual Award may be below, at or above the Target Award, in the Committee’s discretion. The Committee may determine the amount of any reduction on the basis of such factors as it deems relevant, and will not be required to establish any allocation or weighting with respect to the factors it considers.

(e) Discretion to Determine Criteria . Notwithstanding any contrary provision of the Plan, the Committee will, in its sole discretion, determine the performance goals applicable to any Target Award which may include, without limitation: (i) attainment of research and development milestones, (ii) billings, (iii) bookings, (iv) business divestitures and acquisitions, (v) cash flow, (vi) cash position, (vii) contract awards or backlog, (viii) customer-related measures, (ix) customer retention rates from an acquired company, business unit or division, (x) earnings (which may include earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization, earnings before taxes and net earnings), (xi) earnings per share, (xii) expenses, (xiii) gross margin, (xiv) growth in stockholder value relative to the moving average of the S&P 500 Index or another index, (xv) internal rate of return, (xvi) inventory turns, (xvii) inventory levels, (xviii) market share,

 

-2-


(xix) net billings (xx) net income, (xx1) net profit, (xxi1) net sales, (xxii1) new product development, (xxiv) new product invention or innovation, (xxv) number of customers, (xxvi) operating cash flow, (xxvii) operating expenses, (xxviii) operating income, (xxvix) operating margin, (xxx) overhead or other expense reduction, (xxxi) product defect measures, (xxxii) product release timelines, (xxxiii) productivity, (xxxiv) profit, (xxxv) return on assets, (xxxvi) return on capital, (xxxvii) return on equity, (xxxviii) return on investment, (xxxix) return on sales, (xl) revenue, (xli) revenue growth, (xlii) sales results, (xliii) sales growth, (xliv) stock price, (xlv) time to market, (xlvi) total stockholder return, (xlvii) working capital, and (xlviii) individual objectives such as MBOs, peer reviews or other subjective or objective criteria. As determined by the Committee, the performance goals may be based on GAAP or Non-GAAP results and any actual results may be adjusted by the Committee for one-time items, unbudgeted or unexpected items and/or payments of Actual Awards under the Plan when determining whether the performance goals have been met. The goals may be on the basis of any factors the Committee determines relevant, and may be on an individual, divisional, business unit or Company-wide basis. The performance goals may differ from Participant to Participant and from award to award. Failure to meet the goals will result in a failure to earn the Target Award, except as provided in Section 3(d).

4. Payment of Awards .

(a) Right to Receive Payment . Each Actual Award will be paid solely from the general assets of the Company. Nothing in this Plan will be construed to create a trust or to establish or evidence any Participant’s claim of any right other than as an unsecured general creditor with respect to any payment to which he or she may be entitled.

(b) Timing of Payment . To receive an Actual Award a Participant must be employed by the Company or any Affiliate on the date the Actual Award is paid. Accordingly, an Actual Award is not considered earned until paid.

It is the intent that this Plan be exempt from, or comply with, the requirements of Code Section 409A so that none of the payments to be provided hereunder will be subject to the additional tax imposed under Code Section 409A, and any ambiguities herein will be interpreted to so comply. Each payment under this Plan is intended to constitute a separate payment for purposes of Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-2(b)(2).

(c) Form of Payment . Each Actual Award will be paid in cash (or its equivalent) in a single lump sum.

5. Plan Administration .

(a) Committee is the Administrator . The Plan will be administered by the Committee. The Committee will consist of not less than two (2) members of the Board. The members of the Committee will be appointed from time to time by, and serve at the pleasure of, the Board.

(b) Committee Authority . It will be the duty of the Committee to administer the Plan in accordance with the Plan’s provisions. The Committee will have all powers and discretion

 

-3-


necessary or appropriate to administer the Plan and to control its operation, including, but not limited to, the power to (i) determine which Employees will be granted awards, (ii) prescribe the terms and conditions of awards, (iii) interpret the Plan and the awards, (iv) adopt such procedures and sub-plans as are necessary or appropriate to permit participation in the Plan by Employees who are foreign nationals or employed outside of the United States, (v) adopt rules for the administration, interpretation and application of the Plan as are consistent therewith, and (vi) interpret, amend or revoke any such rules.

(c) Decisions Binding . All determinations and decisions made by the Committee, the Board, and any delegate of the Committee pursuant to the provisions of the Plan will be final, conclusive, and binding on all persons, and will be given the maximum deference permitted by law.

(d) Delegation by Committee . The Committee, in its sole discretion and on such terms and conditions as it may provide, may delegate all or part of its authority and powers under the Plan to one or more directors and/or officers of the Company.

(e) Indemnification . Each person who is or will have been a member of the Committee will be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from (i) any loss, cost, liability, or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by him or her in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit, or proceeding to which he or she may be a party or in which he or she may be involved by reason of any action taken or failure to act under the Plan or any award, and (ii) from any and all amounts paid by him or her in settlement thereof, with the Company’s approval, or paid by him or her in satisfaction of any judgment in any such claim, action, suit, or proceeding against him or her, provided he or she will give the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before he or she undertakes to handle and defend it on his or her own behalf. The foregoing right of indemnification will not be exclusive of any other rights of indemnification to which such persons may be entitled under the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation or Bylaws, by contract, as a matter of law, or otherwise, or under any power that the Company may have to indemnify them or hold them harmless.

6. General Provisions .

(a) Tax Withholding . The Company will withhold all applicable taxes from any Actual Award, including any federal, state and local taxes (including, but not limited to, the Participant’s FICA and SDI obligations).

(b) No Effect on Employment or Service . Nothing in the Plan will interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company to terminate any Participant’s employment or service at any time, with or without cause. Employment with the Company and its Affiliates is on an at-will basis only. The Company expressly reserves the right, which may be exercised at any time and without regard to when during a Performance Period such exercise occurs, to terminate any individual’s employment with or without cause, and to treat him or her without regard to the effect that such treatment might have upon him or her as a Participant.

(c) Participation . No Employee will have the right to be selected to receive an award under this Plan, or, having been so selected, to be selected to receive a future award.

 

-4-


(d) Successors . All obligations of the Company under the Plan, with respect to awards granted hereunder, will be binding on any successor to the Company, whether the existence of such successor is the result of a direct or indirect purchase, merger, consolidation, or otherwise, of all or substantially all of the business or assets of the Company.

(e) Nontransferability of Awards . No award granted under the Plan may be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than by will, by the laws of descent and distribution, or to the limited extent provided in Section 6(e). All rights with respect to an award granted to a Participant will be available during his or her lifetime only to the Participant.

7. Amendment, Termination, and Duration .

(a) Amendment, Suspension, or Termination . The Committee, in its sole discretion, may amend or terminate the Plan, or any part thereof, at any time and for any reason. The amendment, suspension or termination of the Plan will not, without the consent of the Participant, alter or impair any rights or obligations under any Actual Award theretofore earned by such Participant. No award may be granted during any period of suspension or after termination of the Plan.

(b) Duration of Plan . The Plan will commence on the date specified herein, and subject to Section 7(a) (regarding the Committee’s right to amend or terminate the Plan), will remain in effect until terminated.

8. Legal Construction .

(a) Gender and Number . Except where otherwise indicated by the context, any masculine term used herein also will include the feminine; the plural will include the singular and the singular will include the plural.

(b) Severability . In the event any provision of the Plan will be held illegal or invalid for any reason, the illegality or invalidity will not affect the remaining parts of the Plan, and the Plan will be construed and enforced as if the illegal or invalid provision had not been included.

(c) Requirements of Law . The granting of awards under the Plan will be subject to all applicable laws, rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges as may be required.

(d) Governing Law . The Plan and all awards will be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California, but without regard to its conflict of law provisions.

(e) Bonus Plan . The Plan is intended to be a “bonus program” as defined under U.S. Department of Labor regulation 2510.3-2(c) and will be construed and administered in accordance with such intention.

 

-5-


(f) Captions . Captions are provided herein for convenience only, and will not serve as a basis for interpretation or construction of the Plan.

 

-6-

Exhibit 10.14

 

 

 

CREDIT AGREEMENT

dated as of

August 27, 2013,

among

BOX, INC.,

as Borrower,

THE LENDERS PARTY HERETO

and

CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH,

as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent

CREDIT SUISSE SECURITIES (USA) LLC

as Sole Bookrunner and Sole Lead Arranger

 

 

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

ARTICLE 1 Definitions

     1   

Section 1.01.

 

Defined Terms

     1   

Section 1.02.

 

Terms Generally

     26   

Section 1.03.

 

Classification of Loans and Borrowings

     27   

ARTICLE 2 The Credits

     27   

Section 2.01.

 

Commitments

     27   

Section 2.02.

 

Loans

     27   

Section 2.03.

 

Borrowing Procedure

     28   

Section 2.04.

 

Evidence of Debt; Repayment of Loans

     29   

Section 2.05.

 

Fees

     30   

Section 2.06.

 

Interest on Loans

     30   

Section 2.07.

 

Default Interest

     31   

Section 2.08.

 

Alternate Rate of Interest

     31   

Section 2.09.

 

Termination and Reduction of Commitments

     31   

Section 2.10.

 

Conversion and Continuation of Borrowings

     32   

Section 2.11.

 

Voluntary Prepayment

     33   

Section 2.12.

 

Mandatory Prepayments

     33   

Section 2.13.

 

Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy

     34   

Section 2.14.

 

Change in Legality

     35   

Section 2.15.

 

Breakage

     36   

Section 2.16.

 

Pro Rata Treatment

     36   

Section 2.17.

 

Sharing of Setoffs

     36   

Section 2.18.

 

Payments

     37   

Section 2.19.

 

Taxes

     37   

Section 2.20.

 

Assignment of Commitments under Certain Circumstances; Duty to Mitigate

     42   

Section 2.21.

 

Defaulting Lender

     43   

Section 2.22.

 

Incremental Facilities

     44   

Section 2.23.

 

Amend and Extend Transactions

     45   

ARTICLE 3 Representations and Warranties

     47   

Section 3.01.

 

Organization; Powers

     47   

Section 3.02.

 

Authorization

     47   

Section 3.03.

 

Enforceability

     47   

Section 3.04.

 

Governmental Approvals

     48   

Section 3.05.

 

Financial Statements

     48   

Section 3.06.

 

No Material Adverse Effect

     48   

Section 3.07.

 

Title to Properties; Possession under Leases

     48   

Section 3.08.

 

Subsidiaries

     49   


Section 3.09.

 

Litigation; Compliance with Laws

     49   

Section 3.10.

 

Agreements

     49   

Section 3.11.

 

Federal Reserve Regulations

     50   

Section 3.12.

 

Investment Company Act

     50   

Section 3.13.

 

Use of Proceeds

     50   

Section 3.14.

 

Taxes

     50   

Section 3.15.

 

No Material Misstatements

     50   

Section 3.16.

 

Employee Benefit Plans

     50   

Section 3.17.

 

Environmental Matters

     51   

Section 3.18.

 

Insurance

     52   

Section 3.19.

 

Security Documents

     52   

Section 3.20.

 

Location of Real Property and Leased Premises

     53   

Section 3.21.

 

Intellectual Property

     53   

Section 3.22.

 

Labor Matters

     53   

Section 3.23.

 

Solvency

     53   

Section 3.24.

 

Sanctioned Persons

     54   

Section 3.25.

 

Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

     54   

Section 3.26.

 

Anti-Terrorism Law

     54   

ARTICLE 4 Conditions of Lending

     54   

Section 4.01.

 

All Credit Events

     54   

Section 4.02.

 

First Credit Event

     55   

ARTICLE 5 Affirmative Covenants

     57   

Section 5.01.

 

Existence; Compliance with Laws; Businesses and Properties

     58   

Section 5.02.

 

Insurance

     58   

Section 5.03.

 

Obligations and Taxes

     59   

Section 5.04.

 

Financial Statements, Reports, etc.

     60   

Section 5.05.

 

Litigation and Other Notices

     61   

Section 5.06.

 

Information Regarding Collateral

     61   

Section 5.07.

 

Maintaining Records; Access to Properties and Inspections

     62   

Section 5.08.

 

Use of Proceeds

     62   

Section 5.09.

 

Employee Benefits

     62   

Section 5.10.

 

Compliance with Environmental Laws

     62   

Section 5.11.

 

Preparation of Environmental Reports

     63   

Section 5.12.

 

Further Assurances

     63   

ARTICLE 6 Negative Covenants

     64   

Section 6.01.

 

Indebtedness

     64   

Section 6.02.

 

Liens

     66   

Section 6.03.

 

Sale and Lease-Back Transactions

     67   

Section 6.04.

 

Investments, Loans and Advances

     68   

Section 6.05.

 

Mergers and Consolidations

     69   

 

ii


Section 6.06.

 

Dispositions

     70   

Section 6.07.

 

Restricted Payments; Restrictive Agreements

     70   

Section 6.08.

 

Transactions with Affiliates

     71   

Section 6.09.

 

Business of the Borrower and Subsidiaries

     71   

Section 6.10.

 

Other Indebtedness and Agreements

     71   

Section 6.11.

 

Minimum Liquidity

     72   

Section 6.12.

 

Fiscal Year

     72   

Section 6.13.

 

Certain Equity Securities

     72   

ARTICLE 7 Events of Default

     72   

Section 7.01.

 

Events of Default

     72   

Section 7.02.

 

Application of Proceeds

     75   

ARTICLE 8 The Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent

     75   

Section 8.01.

 

Appointment and Authority

     75   

Section 8.02.

 

Rights as a Lender

     75   

Section 8.03.

 

Exculpatory Provisions

     75   

Section 8.04.

 

Reliance by Administrative Agent

     76   

Section 8.05.

 

Delegation of Duties

     77   

Section 8.06.

 

Resignation of the Administrative Agent

     77   

Section 8.07.

 

Non-Reliance on Administrative Agent and Other Lenders

     77   

Section 8.08.

 

No Other Duties, etc.

     78   

Section 8.09.

 

Agent May File Proofs of Claim

     78   

Section 8.10.

 

Collateral and Guarantee Matters

     78   

ARTICLE 9 Miscellaneous

     79   

Section 9.01.

 

Notices; Electronic Communications

     79   

Section 9.02.

 

Survival of Agreement

     82   

Section 9.03.

 

Binding Effect

     83   

Section 9.04.

 

Successors and Assigns

     83   

Section 9.05.

 

Expenses; Indemnity

     88   

Section 9.06.

 

Right of Setoff

     89   

Section 9.07.

 

Waivers; Amendment

     90   

Section 9.08.

 

Interest Rate Limitation

     91   

Section 9.09.

 

Entire Agreement

     91   

Section 9.10.

 

WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL

     92   

Section 9.11.

 

Severability

     92   

Section 9.12.

 

Counterparts

     92   

Section 9.13.

 

Headings

     92   

Section 9.14.

 

Applicable Law

     93   

Section 9.15.

 

Jurisdiction; Consent to Service of Process

     93   

Section 9.16.

 

Electronic Execution of Assignments

     93   

Section 9.17.

 

Confidentiality

     94   

Section 9.18.

 

Lender Action

     94   

 

iii


Section 9.19.

 

USA PATRIOT Act Notice

     95   

Section 9.20.

 

No Fiduciary Duty

     95   

 

SCHEDULES

      

Schedule 1.01(a)

  -     

Disqualified Lenders

Schedule 1.01(b)

  -     

Guarantors

Schedule 1.01(c)

  -     

Immaterial Subsidiaries

Schedule 2.01(a)

  -     

Lenders and Commitments

Schedule 3.08

  -     

Subsidiaries

Schedule 3.18

  -     

Insurance

Schedule 3.19(a)

  -     

UCC Filing Offices

Schedule 3.20(a)

  -     

Owned Real Property

Schedule 3.20(b)

  -     

Leased Real Property

Schedule 6.01(a)

  -     

Existing Indebtedness

Schedule 6.02(a)

  -     

Existing Liens

EXHIBITS

      

Exhibit A

  -     

Form of Administrative Questionnaire

Exhibit B

  -     

Form of Affiliate Subordination Agreement

Exhibit C

  -     

Form of Assignment and Acceptance

Exhibit D

  -     

Form of Borrowing Request

Exhibit E

  -     

Form of Compliance Certificate

Exhibit F

  -     

Form of Guarantee and Collateral Agreement

Exhibit G

  -     

Form of Interest Election Request

Exhibit H

  -     

Form of Revolving Note

Exhibit I-1

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-2

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-3

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-4

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

 

iv


CREDIT AGREEMENT dated as of August 27, 2013 (this “ Agreement ”), among BOX, INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Borrower ”), the Lenders (such term and each other capitalized term used but not defined in these introductory statements having the meaning given it in Article 1) and CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, as administrative agent (in such capacity, including any successor thereto, the “ Administrative Agent ”) and as collateral agent (in such capacity, including any successor thereto, the “ Collateral Agent ”) for the Lenders.

The Borrower has requested that the Lenders extend credit in the form of revolving Loans to the Borrower at any time and from time to time prior to the Maturity Date, in an aggregate principal amount at any time outstanding not in excess of $100,000,000. The proceeds of the Loans are to be used by the Borrower solely to (a) on the date of the initial extension of credit hereunder, (i) consummate the Refinancing and (ii) pay the Transaction Costs and (b) from time to time for general corporate purposes of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries.

The Lenders are willing to extend such credit to the Borrower on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth herein. Accordingly, the parties hereto agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1

D EFINITIONS

Section 1.01. Defined Terms . As used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the meanings specified below:

ABR Loan ” or “ ABR Borrowing ” shall mean a Loan or a Borrowing consisting of Loans bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Alternate Base Rate.

Acquired Entity ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 6.04(g).

Additional Credit Extension Amendment ” shall mean an amendment to this Agreement (which may, at the option of the Administrative Agent, be in the form of an amendment and restatement of this Agreement) providing for any Incremental Commitments pursuant to Section 2.22, which shall be consistent with the applicable provisions of this Agreement and otherwise satisfactory to the parties thereto. Each Additional Credit Extension Amendment shall be executed by the Administrative Agent, the Loan Parties and the other parties specified in Section 2.22 (but not any other Lender). Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may include conditions for delivery of opinions of counsel and other documentation consistent with the conditions in Sections 4.01 and/or 4.02, all to the extent reasonably requested by the Administrative Agent or the other parties to such Additional Credit Extension Amendment.

Additional Lender ” shall mean, at any time, any Person that is not an existing Lender and that agrees to provide any portion of any Incremental Commitments in accordance with Section 2.22 pursuant to an Additional Credit Extension Amendment;


provided that such Additional Lender shall be an Eligible Assignee with respect to the Commitments.

Adjusted LIBO Rate ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing for any Interest Period, an interest rate per annum equal to the product of (i) the LIBO Rate in effect for such Interest Period and (ii) Statutory Reserves.

Administrative Agent ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Administrative Agent Fees ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.05(b).

Administrative Questionnaire ” shall mean an Administrative Questionnaire in the form of Exhibit A, or such other form as may be supplied from time to time by the Administrative Agent.

Affiliate ” shall mean, when used with respect to a specified Person, another Person that directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, Controls or is Controlled by or is under common Control with the Person specified; provided , however, that, for purposes of the definition of “Eligible Assignee” and Section 6.08 the term “Affiliate” shall also include any Person that directly or indirectly owns 5% or more of any class of Equity Interests of the Person specified or that is an officer or director of the Person specified.

Affiliate Subordination Agreement ” shall mean an Affiliate Subordination Agreement in the form of Exhibit B pursuant to which intercompany obligations and advances owed by any Loan Party are subordinated to the Obligations.

Agents ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Article 8.

Aggregate Exposure ” shall mean the aggregate amount of the Lenders’ Exposures.

Aggregate Incremental Amount ” shall mean, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of Incremental Loans incurred at or prior to such time (assuming all Incremental Commitments established at or prior to such time are fully drawn).

Agreement ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement hereto.

Agreement Value ” shall mean, for each Hedging Agreement, on any date of determination, the maximum aggregate amount (giving effect to any netting agreements) that the Borrower or the applicable Subsidiary would be required to pay if such Hedging Agreement was terminated on such date.

Alternate Base Rate ” shall mean, for any day, a rate per annum equal to the greatest of (a) the Prime Rate in effect on such day, (b) the Federal Funds Effective Rate

 

2


in effect on such day plus 1/2 of 1.00% and (c) the Adjusted LIBO Rate for a one month Interest Period on such day (or if such day is not a Business Day, the immediately preceding Business Day) plus 1.00%; provided that, for the purpose of clause (c), the Adjusted LIBO Rate for any day shall be based on the rate determined on such day at approximately 11 a.m. (London time) by reference to the interest settlement rates set forth by (x) the British Bankers’ Association, (y) any successor service or entity that has been authorized by the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority to administer the London Interbank Offered Rate or (z) any service selected by the Administrative Agent that has been nominated by the relevant entity described in clause (x) or (y) of this proviso as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates. If the Administrative Agent shall have determined (which determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error) that it is unable to ascertain the Federal Funds Effective Rate for any reason, including the inability or failure of the Administrative Agent to obtain sufficient quotations in accordance with the terms of the definition thereof, the Alternate Base Rate shall be determined without regard to clause (b) of the preceding sentence until the circumstances giving rise to such inability no longer exist. Any change in the Alternate Base Rate due to a change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted LIBO Rate shall be effective on the effective date of such change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted LIBO Rate, as the case may be.

Anti-Terrorism Laws ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.26.

Applicable Margin ” shall mean, for any day (a) with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, 3.00% per annum and (b) with respect to any ABR Loan, 2.00% per annum.

Approved Fund ” shall mean, with respect to any Lender that is a fund or commingled investment vehicle that invests in bank loans, any other fund that invests in bank loans and is managed or advised by the same investment advisor as such Lender or by an Affiliate of such investment advisor.

Arranger ” shall mean Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC.

Assignment and Acceptance ” shall mean an assignment and acceptance entered into by a Lender and an Eligible Assignee, and accepted by the Administrative Agent, in the form of Exhibit C or such other form (including electronic documentation generated by MarkitClear or other electronic platform) as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

Availability ” shall mean, as of any time of determination, an amount equal to (a) the aggregate amount of Commitments in effect at such time minus (b) the Aggregate Exposure at such time.

Bankruptcy Code ” shall mean Title 11 of the United States Code entitled “ Bankruptcy ”, as now and hereafter in effect, or any successor statute.

 

3


Board ” shall mean the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System of the United States of America.

Borrower ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Borrower Materials ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Borrower Notice ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Borrowing ” shall mean Loans of the same Type made, converted or continued on the same date and, in the case of Eurodollar Loans, as to which a single Interest Period is in effect.

Borrowing Request ” shall mean a request by the Borrower in accordance with the terms of Section 2.03 and substantially in the form of Exhibit D, or such other form as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

Breakage Event ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.15.

Business Day ” shall mean any day other than a Saturday, Sunday or day on which banks in New York City are authorized or required by law to close; provided that, when used in connection with a Eurodollar Loan, the term “ Business Day ” shall also exclude any day on which banks are not open for dealings in Dollar deposits in the London interbank market.

Capital Lease Obligations ” of any Person shall mean the obligations of such Person to pay rent or other amounts under any lease of (or other arrangement conveying the right to use) real or personal property, or a combination thereof, which obligations are required to be classified and accounted for as capital leases on a balance sheet of such Person under GAAP, and the amount of such obligations shall be the capitalized amount thereof determined in accordance with GAAP.

A “ Change in Control ” shall be deemed to have occurred if (a) prior to a Qualified Public Offering (x) the Permitted Investors shall fail to own and control, directly or indirectly, beneficially and of record, shares representing at least 51% of the aggregate ordinary voting power represented by the issued and outstanding Equity Interests of the Borrower or (y) Aaron Levie and Dylan Smith shall together fail to own and control, directly or indirectly, beneficially and of record, shares representing at least 80% of the Equity Interests of the Borrower owned by them as of the Closing Date, (b) after a Qualified Public Offering, any “ person ” or “ group ” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-5 of the Exchange Act as in effect on the date hereof), other than the Permitted Investors, shall own, directly or indirectly, beneficially or of record, shares representing more than 35% of the aggregate ordinary voting power represented by the issued and outstanding Equity Interests of the Borrower, (c) a majority of the seats (other than vacant seats) on the board of directors of the Borrower shall at any time be occupied by

 

4


persons who were neither (i) nominated by the board of directors of the Borrower nor (ii) appointed by directors so nominated or (d) any change in control (or similar event, however denominated) with respect to the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall occur under and as defined in any indenture or agreement in respect of Material Indebtedness to which the Borrower or any Subsidiary is a party.

Change in Law ” shall mean the occurrence, after the date of this Agreement, of any of the following: (a) the adoption or taking effect of any law, rule or regulation, (b) any change in any law, rule, regulation or treaty or in the administration, interpretation or application thereof by any Governmental Authority or (c) the making or issuance of any request, rule, guideline or directive (whether or not having the force of law) of any Governmental Authority; provided that, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, (i) the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and all requests, rules, guidelines or directives thereunder or issued in connection therewith by any Governmental Authority and (ii) all requests, rules, guidelines or directives promulgated by the Bank for International Settlements, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (or any successor or similar authority) or the United States or foreign regulatory authorities, in each case pursuant to Basel III, shall in each case be deemed to be a “ Change in Law ,” regardless of the date enacted, adopted or issued.

Charges ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.08.

Class ” when used in reference to any Loan or Borrowing, refers to whether such Loan, or the Loans comprising such Borrowing, is or is not an Extended Loan and, when used in reference to any Commitment, refers to whether such Commitment is or is not an Extended Commitment.

Closing Date ” shall mean August 27, 2013.

Code ” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

Collateral ” shall mean the “ Collateral ” as defined in any Security Agreement and the “ Mortgaged Property ” as defined in any Mortgage.

Collateral Agent ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statements to this Agreement.

Commitment ” shall mean, with respect to each Lender, the commitment of such Lender to make Loans hereunder as is set forth on Schedule 2.01(a), or in the Assignment and Acceptance pursuant to which such Lender assumed its Commitment, as applicable, as the same may be (a) reduced from time to time pursuant to Section 2.09 and (b) reduced or increased from time to time pursuant to assignments by or to such Lender pursuant to Section 9.04.

Commitment Period ” shall mean the period from the Closing Date to but excluding the Termination Date.

 

5


Commitment Fee ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.05(a).

Commodity Exchange Act ” shall mean the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. § 1 et seq.), as amended from time to time, and any successor statute.

Communications ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Competitor ” of the Borrower shall mean any entity or person in the business of content collaboration and/or Enterprise Content Management (ECM) that is deployed on premise, hybrid, or via a software as a service delivery model and shall specifically include, without limitation, DropBox, Inc., Citrix Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation, Google Inc., Accellion Inc., Egnyte, Inc., EMC Corporation, Alfresco Software, Inc., OpenText Corporation, International Business Machines Corporation, Oracle Corporation, Salesforce.com Inc., AirWatch, LLC, BigTinCan (BTC Dashboard), Soonr, Inc., Watchdox, Inc. and Apple Inc.

Compliance Certificate ” shall mean a compliance certificate in the form of Exhibit E.

Control ” shall mean the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management or policies of a Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise, and the terms “ Controlling ” and “ Controlled ” shall have meanings correlative thereto.

Cost Sharing Agreement ” shall mean that Cost Sharing Agreement, dated as of June 25, 2013, between the Borrower and Box Intl Technology Ltd.

Credit Event ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 4.01.

Credit Facilities ” shall mean the revolving credit and incremental facilities provided for by this Agreement.

Credit Percentage ” of any Lender at any time shall mean the percentage of the Total Commitment represented by such Lender’s Commitment. In the event the Commitments shall have expired or been terminated, the Credit Percentages shall be determined on the basis of the Commitments most recently in effect, giving effect to any subsequent assignments.

Debtor Relief Laws ” shall mean the Bankruptcy Code and all other liquidation, conservatorship, bankruptcy, assignment for the benefit of creditors, moratorium, rearrangement, receivership, insolvency, reorganization, or similar debtor relief laws of the United States or other applicable jurisdictions from time to time in effect.

Default ” shall mean any event or condition which upon notice, lapse of time or both would constitute an Event of Default.

 

6


Defaulting Lender ” shall mean, subject to Section 2.21(b), any Lender that (a) has failed to (i) fund all or any portion of its Loans within two (2) Business Days of the date such Loans were required to be funded hereunder unless such Lender notifies the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in writing that such failure is the result of such Lender’s determination that one or more conditions precedent to funding (each of which conditions precedent, together with any applicable Default, shall be specifically identified in such writing) has not been satisfied or (ii) pay to the Administrative Agent or any other Lender any other amount required to be paid by it hereunder within two (2) Business Days of the date when due, (b) has notified the Borrower or the Administrative Agent in writing that it does not intend to comply with its funding obligations hereunder, or has made a public statement to that effect (unless such writing or public statement relates to such Lender’s obligation to fund a Loan hereunder and states that such position is based on such Lender’s determination that a condition precedent to funding (which condition precedent, together with any applicable Default, shall be specifically identified in such writing or public statement) cannot be satisfied), (c) has failed, within three (3) Business Days after written request by the Administrative Agent or the Borrower, to confirm in writing to the Administrative Agent and the Borrower that it will comply with its prospective funding obligations hereunder ( provided that such Lender shall cease to be a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this clause (c) upon receipt of such written confirmation by the Administrative Agent and the Borrower) or (d) has, or has a direct or indirect parent company that has, (i) become the subject of a proceeding under any Debtor Relief Law or (ii) had appointed for it a receiver, custodian, conservator, trustee, administrator, assignee for the benefit of creditors or similar Person charged with reorganization or liquidation of its business or assets, including the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other state or federal regulatory authority acting in such a capacity; provided that a Lender shall not be a Defaulting Lender solely by virtue of the ownership or acquisition of any equity interest in that Lender or any direct or indirect parent company thereof by a Governmental Authority so long as such ownership interest does not result in or provide such Lender with immunity from the jurisdiction of courts within the United States or from the enforcement of judgments or writs of attachment on its assets or permit such Lender (or such Governmental Authority) to reject, repudiate, disavow or disaffirm any contracts or agreements made with such Lender. Any determination by the Administrative Agent that a Lender is a Defaulting Lender under any one or more of clauses (a) through (d) above shall be conclusive and binding absent manifest error, and such Lender shall be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender (subject to Section 2.21(b)) upon delivery of written notice of such determination to the Borrower and each Lender.

Disposition ” shall mean, with respect to any Person, (a) the sale, transfer, license, lease or other disposition (by way of merger, casualty, condemnation or otherwise) of any property or asset of such Person (including, without limitation, any sale and leaseback transaction and the sale of any Equity Interest owned by such Person) to any other Person and (b) the issuance of Equity Interests by a subsidiary of such Person to any other Person.

Disqualified Lender ” shall have the meaning set forth on Schedule 1.01(a).

 

7


Disqualified Stock ” shall mean any Equity Interest that, by its terms (or by the terms of any security into which it is convertible or for which it is exchangeable), or upon the happening of any event, (a) matures (excluding any maturity as the result of an optional redemption by the issuer thereof) or is mandatorily redeemable, pursuant to a sinking fund obligation or otherwise, or is redeemable at the option of the holder thereof, in whole or in part, or requires the payment of any cash dividend or any other scheduled payment constituting a return of capital, in each case at any time on or prior to the first anniversary of the Maturity Date or (b) is convertible into or exchangeable (unless at the sole option of the issuer thereof) for (i) debt securities or (ii) any Equity Interest referred to in clause (a) above, in each case at any time prior to the first anniversary of the Maturity Date.

Dollars ” or “ $ ” shall mean lawful money of the United States of America.

Domestic Subsidiaries ” shall mean all Subsidiaries other than Foreign Subsidiaries.

Eligible Assignee ” shall mean (i) a Lender, (ii) an Affiliate of a Lender, (iii) an Approved Fund of a Lender and (iv) any other Person (other than a natural person) with respect to whom all consents to assignment required hereunder (including under Section 9.04(b)(iii)) have been obtained; provided that notwithstanding the foregoing, “Eligible Assignee” shall not include the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates.

Engagement Letter ” shall mean the Engagement Letter dated July 2, 2013, between the Borrower and Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC.

Environmental Laws ” shall mean all former, current and future federal, state, local, supranational, and foreign laws (including statutory and common law), treaties, regulations, rules, ordinances, codes, decrees, injunctions, judgments, governmental restrictions or requirements, directives, orders (including consent orders), permits, and agreements in each case, relating to the indoor or outdoor environment, natural resources, human health and safety or the presence, Release of or exposure to pollutants, contaminants, wastes, chemicals or otherwise hazardous materials, or the generation, manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, transport, recycling, disposal or handling of, or the arrangement for such activities, with respect to any pollutants, contaminants, wastes, chemicals or otherwise hazardous materials.

Environmental Liability ” shall mean all liabilities, obligations, damages, losses, claims, actions, suits, judgments, orders, fines, penalties, fees, indemnities, expenses and costs (including administrative oversight costs, natural resource damages and remediation costs), whether known or unknown, actual or potential, vested or unvested, or contingent or otherwise, arising out of or relating to (a) any Environmental Law, (b) the generation, manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, transport, recycling, disposal or handling of, or the arrangement for such activities, with respect to any Hazardous Materials, (c) exposure to any Hazardous Materials, (d) the presence or Release of any Hazardous Materials or (e) any contract, agreement or other

 

8


consensual arrangement pursuant to which liability is assumed or imposed with respect to any of the foregoing.

Equity Interests ” shall mean shares of capital stock, partnership interests, membership interests in a limited liability company, beneficial interests in a trust or other equity interests in any Person and any option, warrant or other right entitling the holder thereof to purchase or otherwise acquire any such equity interest.

ERISA ” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as the same may be amended from time to time.

ERISA Affiliate ” shall mean any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) that, together with the Borrower, is treated as a single employer under Section 414(b) or (c) of the Code, or solely for purposes of Section 302 of ERISA and Section 412 of the Code, is treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Code. For the avoidance of doubt, when any provision of this Agreement relates to a past event or period of time, the term “ ERISA Affiliate ” includes any person who was, as to the time of such past event or period of time, an “ ERISA Affiliate ” within the meaning of the preceding sentence.

ERISA Event ” shall mean (a) any “ reportable event ,” as defined in Section 4043 of ERISA or the regulations issued thereunder, with respect to a Plan (other than an event for which the 30-day notice period is waived), (b) the requirements of Section 4043(b) of ERISA apply with respect to a contributing sponsor, as defined in Section 4001(a)(13) of ERISA, of a Plan, and an event described in paragraph (9), (10), (11), (12) or (13) of Section 4043(c) of ERISA is reasonably expected to occur with respect to such Plan, (c) a determination that any Plan is or is reasonably expected to be in “ at risk ” status (within the meaning of Section 430 of the Code or Section 303 of ERISA), (d) the filing pursuant to Section 412(c) of the Code or Section 302(c) of ERISA of an application for a waiver of the minimum funding standard with respect to any Plan, (e) the incurrence by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any liability under Title IV of ERISA (other than non-delinquent premiums payable to the PBGC under Sections 4006 and 4007 of ERISA), (f) the termination, or the filing of a notice of intent to terminate, any Plan pursuant to Section 4041(c) of ERISA, (g) the receipt by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates from the PBGC or a plan administrator of any notice relating to the intention to terminate any Plan or Plans or to appoint a trustee to administer any Plan, (h) the cessation of operations at a facility of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate in the circumstances described in Section 4062(e) of ERISA, (i) conditions contained in Section 303(k)(1)(A) of ERISA for imposition of a lien shall have been met with respect to any Plan, (j) the receipt by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any notice, or the receipt by any Multiemployer Plan from the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any notice, concerning the imposition of Withdrawal Liability or a determination that a Multiemployer Plan is, or is expected to be, “ insolvent ” (within the meaning of Section 4245 of ERISA), in “ reorganization ” (within the meaning of Section 4241 of ERISA), or in “ endangered ” or “ critical ” status (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 304 of ERISA), (k) the occurrence of a non-exempt “ prohibited transaction ” with respect to which the

 

9


Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries is a “ disqualified person ” (within the meaning of Section 4975 of the Code) or a “ party in interest ” (within the meaning of Section 406 of ERISA) or with respect to which the Borrower, any such Subsidiary or their respective ERISA Affiliates could otherwise be liable, (l) any Foreign Benefit Event or (m) any other event or condition with respect to a Plan or Multiemployer Plan that could result in liability of the Borrower or any Subsidiary.

Eurodollar Loan ” or “ Eurodollar Borrowing ” shall mean a Loan or a Borrowing consisting of Loans bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Adjusted LIBO Rate.

Events of Default ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 7.01.

Evidence of Flood Insurance ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Exchange Act ” shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

Excluded Swap Obligations ” shall mean, with respect to any Guarantor, any Swap Obligation if, and to the extent that, all or a portion of the Guarantee of such Guarantor of, or the grant by such Guarantor of a security interest to secure, such Swap Obligation (or any Guarantee thereof) (after giving effect to any keepwell guarantee or other support agreement) is or becomes illegal under the Commodity Exchange Act or any rule, regulation or order of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (or the application or official interpretation of any thereof) by virtue of such Guarantor’s failure for any reason to constitute an “eligible contract participant” as defined in the Commodity Exchange Act and the regulations thereunder at the time the Guarantee of such Guarantor or the grant of such security interest becomes effective with respect to such Swap Obligation. If a Swap Obligation arises under a master agreement governing more than one swap, such exclusion shall apply only to the portion of such Swap Obligation that is attributable to swaps for which such Guarantee or security interest is or becomes illegal.

Excluded Taxes ” shall mean, any of the following Taxes imposed on or with respect to a Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to a Recipient, (a) Taxes imposed on or measured by net income (however denominated), franchise Taxes, and branch profits Taxes, in each case, (i) imposed as a result of such Recipient being organized under the laws of, or having its principal office or, in the case of any Lender, its applicable lending office located in, the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (or any political subdivision thereof) or (ii) that are Other Connection Taxes, (b) in the case of a Lender, U.S. federal withholding Taxes imposed on amounts payable to or for the account of such Lender with respect to an applicable interest in a Loan or Commitment pursuant to a law in effect on the date on which (i) such Lender acquires such interest in the Loan or Commitment (other than pursuant to an assignment request by the Borrower under Section 2.20(a)) or (ii) such Lender changes its lending office, except in each case to the extent that, pursuant to Section 2.19, amounts with respect to

 

10


such Taxes were payable either to such Lender’s assignor immediately before such Lender became a party hereto or to such Lender immediately before it changed its lending office, (c) Taxes attributable to such Recipient’s failure to comply with Section 2.19(f) and (d) any U.S. federal withholding Taxes imposed under FATCA.

Executive Order ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.26.

Existing Debt ” shall mean any and all outstanding principal, accrued interest and fees under (i) that certain Loan and Security Agreement by and between the Borrower and Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc., dated as of August 23, 2011, as amended on March 28, 2012 and (ii) that certain Loan and Security Agreement by and between the Borrower and Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc., dated as of March 28, 2012, as amended on June 13, 2012.

Exposure ” shall mean, with respect to any Lender at any time, the aggregate principal amount at such time of all outstanding Loans of such Lender.

Extended Commitment ” shall mean any Class of Commitments the maturity of which shall have been extended pursuant to Section 2.23.

Extended Loans ” shall mean any Loans made pursuant to the Extended Commitments.

Extension ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.23(a).

Extension Offer ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.23(a).

FATCA ” shall mean Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code as of the date of this Agreement (or any amended or successor version that is substantively comparable) and any current or future regulations or official interpretations thereof.

Federal Funds Effective Rate ” shall mean, for any day, the weighted average of the rates on overnight Federal funds transactions with members of the Federal Reserve System arranged by Federal funds brokers, as published on the next succeeding Business Day by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, or, if such rate is not so published for any day that is a Business Day, the average of the quotations for the day for such transactions received by the Administrative Agent from three Federal funds brokers of recognized standing selected by it.

Fees ” shall mean the Commitment Fees and the Administrative Agent Fees.

Financial Officer ” of any Person shall mean the chief financial officer, principal accounting officer, treasurer or controller of such Person.

Flood Laws ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

 

11


Foreign Benefit Event ” shall mean, with respect to any Foreign Pension Plan, (a) the existence of unfunded liabilities in excess of the amount permitted under any applicable law, or in excess of the amount that would be permitted absent a waiver from a Governmental Authority, (b) the failure to make the required contributions or payments, under any applicable law, on or before the due date for such contributions or payments, (c) the receipt of a notice by a Governmental Authority relating to the intention to terminate any such Foreign Pension Plan or to appoint a trustee or similar official to administer any such Foreign Pension Plan, or alleging the insolvency of any such Foreign Pension Plan, (d) the incurrence of any liability in excess of $5,000,000 by the Borrower or any Subsidiary under applicable law on account of the complete or partial termination of such Foreign Pension Plan or the complete or partial withdrawal of any participating employer therein, or (e) the occurrence of any transaction that is prohibited under any applicable law and that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in the incurrence of any liability by the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries, or the imposition on the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries of any fine, excise tax or penalty resulting from any noncompliance with any applicable law, in each case in excess of $5,000,000.

Foreign Lender ” shall mean (a) with respect to a Borrower that is a U.S. Person, a Lender that is not a U.S. Person and (b) with respect to a Borrower that is not a U.S. Person, a Lender that is resident or organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than that in which the Borrower is resident for tax purposes.

Foreign Pension Plan ” shall mean any benefit plan that under applicable law other than the laws of the United States or any political subdivision thereof, is required to be funded through a trust or other funding vehicle other than a trust or funding vehicle maintained exclusively by a Governmental Authority.

Foreign Subsidiary ” shall mean any Subsidiary that is a “controlled foreign corporation” within the meaning of Section 957 of the Code (and any subsidiary of such person).

GAAP ” shall mean United States generally accepted accounting principles applied on a basis consistent with the financial statements referenced in Section 4.02(j).

Governmental Authority ” shall mean any federal, state, local, supranational or foreign court or governmental agency, registry, authority, instrumentality or regulatory body.

Guarantee ” of or by any Person shall mean any obligation, contingent or otherwise, of such Person guaranteeing or having the economic effect of guaranteeing any Indebtedness or other obligation of any other Person (the “ primary obligor ”) in any manner, whether directly or indirectly, and including any obligation of such Person, direct or indirect, (a) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment of) such Indebtedness or other obligation or to purchase (or to advance or supply funds for the purchase of) any security for the payment of such Indebtedness or other obligation, (b) to purchase or lease property, securities or services for the purpose of assuring the owner of such Indebtedness or other obligation of the payment of such

 

12


Indebtedness or other obligation or (c) to maintain working capital, equity capital or any other financial statement condition or liquidity of the primary obligor so as to enable the primary obligor to pay such Indebtedness or other obligation; provided that the term “ Guarantee ” shall not include endorsements for collection or deposit in the ordinary course of business.

Guarantee and Collateral Agreement ” shall mean the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, in the form of Exhibit F, among the Borrower, the Subsidiaries party thereto and the Collateral Agent for the benefit of the Secured Parties.

Guarantor ” shall mean each wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary listed on Schedule 1.01(b), and each other wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary that is or becomes a party to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Hazardous Materials ” shall mean (a) any petroleum products, derivatives or byproducts and all other hydrocarbons, coal ash, radon gas, lead, asbestos and asbestos-containing materials, toxic mold, urea formaldehyde foam insulation, polychlorinated biphenyls, infectious or medical wastes and chlorofluorocarbons and all other ozone-depleting substances, (b) any pollutant, contaminant, waste or chemical or any toxic, radioactive, ignitable, corrosive, reactive or otherwise hazardous substance, waste or material, or any substance, waste or material having any constituent elements displaying any of the foregoing characteristics or (c) any substance, waste or material that is prohibited, limited or regulated by or pursuant to or which can form the basis for liability under any Environmental Law.

Hedging Agreement ” shall mean any interest rate protection agreement, foreign currency exchange agreement, commodity price protection agreement or other interest or currency exchange rate or commodity price hedging arrangement.

Immaterial Subsidiaries ” shall mean one or more Subsidiaries for which, (a) the assets of all such designated Subsidiaries constitute, in the aggregate, no more than 5% of the total assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis (determined as of the last day of the most recent fiscal quarter of the Borrower for which financial statements have been delivered pursuant to Section 5.04(a) or 5.04(b)), and (b) the revenues of such Subsidiaries, in the aggregate, account for no more than 5% of the total revenues of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis for the twelve-month period ending on the last day of the most recent fiscal quarter of the Borrower for which financial statements have been delivered pursuant to Section 5.04(a) or 5.04(b). The Borrower shall notify the Administrative Agent quarterly as to all Immaterial Subsidiaries as provided in Section 5.04(c). The Borrower may designate and re-designate a Subsidiary as an Immaterial Subsidiary at any time, subject to the terms set forth in this definition. As of the Closing Date, the Immaterial Subsidiaries are set forth on Schedule 1.01(c).

Incremental Cap ” shall mean $50,000,000.

 

13


Incremental Commitment ” shall mean the commitment of any Lender, established pursuant to Section 2.22, to make an Incremental Loan to the Borrower.

Incremental Lender ” shall mean a Lender with an Incremental Commitment or an outstanding Incremental Loan.

Incremental Loans ” shall mean Loans made by one or more Incremental Lenders to the Borrower pursuant to their Incremental Commitments. Incremental Loans may only be made in the form of additional Loans.

Indebtedness ” of any Person shall mean, without duplication, (a) all obligations of such Person for borrowed money, (b) all obligations of such Person evidenced by bonds, debentures, notes or similar instruments, (c) all obligations of such Person upon which interest charges are customarily paid, (d) all obligations of such Person under conditional sale or other title retention agreements relating to property or assets purchased by such Person, (e) all obligations of such Person for the deferred purchase price of property or services (excluding trade accounts payable and accrued obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business), (f) all Indebtedness of others secured by (or for which the holder of such Indebtedness has an existing right, contingent or otherwise, to be secured by) any Lien on property owned or acquired by such Person, whether or not the obligations secured thereby have been assumed, (g) all Guarantees by such Person of Indebtedness of others, (h) all Capital Lease Obligations of such Person, (i) net obligations of such Person under any Hedging Agreements, valued at the Agreement Value thereof, (j) all obligations of such Person to purchase, redeem, retire, defease or otherwise make any payment in respect of any Equity Interests of such Person or any other Person or any warrants, rights or options to acquire such equity interests, valued, in the case of redeemable preferred interests, at the greater of its voluntary or involuntary liquidation preference plus accrued and unpaid dividends, (k) all obligations of such Person as an account party in respect of letters of credit and (l) all obligations of such Person in respect of bankers’ acceptances. The Indebtedness of any Person shall include the Indebtedness of any partnership in which such Person is a general partner.

Indemnified Taxes ” shall mean (a) Taxes, other than Excluded Taxes, imposed on or with respect to any payment made by or on account of any obligation of any Loan Party under any Loan Document and (b) to the extent not otherwise described in (a), Other Taxes.

Indemnitee ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.05(b).

Information ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.17.

Intellectual Property ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Interest Election Request ” shall mean a request by the Borrower in accordance with the terms of Section 2.10 and substantially in the form of Exhibit G or such other form as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

 

14


Interest Payment Date ” shall mean (a) with respect to any ABR Loan, the last Business Day of each March, June, September and December and (b) with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing, the last day of the Interest Period applicable to such Borrowing and, in the case of a Eurodollar Borrowing with an Interest Period of more than three months’ duration, each day that would have been an Interest Payment Date had successive Interest Periods of three months’ duration been applicable to such Borrowing.

Interest Period ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing, the period commencing on the date of such Borrowing and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the calendar month that is one (1), two (2), three (3) or six (6) months thereafter, as the Borrower may elect; provided that (a) if any Interest Period would end on a day other than a Business Day, such Interest Period shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day unless such next succeeding Business Day would fall in the next calendar month, in which case such Interest Period shall end on the next preceding Business Day, (b) any Interest Period that begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month (or on a day for which there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month at the end of such Interest Period) shall, subject to clause (c), end on the last Business Day of the calendar month at the end of such Interest Period and (c) no Interest Period for any Borrowing shall extend beyond the applicable Maturity Date. Interest shall accrue from and including the first day of an Interest Period to but excluding the last day of such Interest Period. For purposes hereof, the date of a Borrowing initially shall be the date on which such Borrowing is made and thereafter shall be the effective date of the most recent conversion or continuation of such Borrowing.

Investment ” shall mean, as to any Person, any direct or indirect acquisition or investment by such Person, whether by means of (a) the purchase or other acquisition of Equity Interests or Indebtedness or other securities of another Person, (b) a loan, advance or capital contribution to, Guarantee or assumption of Indebtedness of, or purchase or other acquisition of any other Indebtedness or equity participation or interest in, another Person, including any partnership or joint venture interest in such other Person or (c) the purchase or other acquisition (in one transaction or a series of transactions) of all or substantially all of the property and assets or business of another Person or assets constituting a business unit, line of business or division of such Person. For purposes of compliance with Section 6.04, the amount of any Investment shall be the amount actually invested, without adjustment for subsequent increases or decreases in the value of such Investment but (x) giving effect to any returns or distributions of capital or repayment of principal actually received in cash by such Person with respect thereto, whether by disposition, return on capital, dividend or otherwise or (y) in the case of any Investment by a Loan Party in any Foreign Subsidiary, as reduced by any cash payments received by such Loan Party from any Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to the Management and Services Agreement or the Cost Sharing Agreement.

Investment Company Act ” shall mean the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended from time to time.

IRS ” shall mean the United States Internal Revenue Service.

 

15


Latest Maturity Date ” shall mean, at any time, the latest maturity or expiration date applicable to any Loan or Commitment (or, if so specified, applicable to the specified Loans or Commitments of the Class thereof) hereunder at such time.

Lenders ” shall mean (a) the Persons listed on Schedule 2.01(a) and (b) any Person that has become a party hereto as a Lender pursuant to an Assignment and Acceptance, Additional Credit Extension Amendment or otherwise in accordance with this Agreement, in each case other than any such Person that has ceased to be a party hereto pursuant to an Assignment and Acceptance.

LIBO Rate ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing for any Interest Period, the rate per annum determined by the Administrative Agent at approximately 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the date that is two Business Days prior to the commencement of such Interest Period by reference to the interest settlement rates for deposits in Dollars (as set forth by (a) the British Bankers’ Association, (b) any successor service or entity that has been authorized by the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority to administer the London Interbank Offered Rate or (c) any service selected by the Administrative Agent that has been nominated by the relevant entity described in clause (a) or (b) above as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates) for a period equal to such Interest Period; provided that, to the extent that an interest rate is not ascertainable pursuant to the foregoing provisions of this definition, the “LIBO Rate” shall be the interest rate per annum determined by the Administrative Agent (including by reference to any applicable published market data) to be the average of the rates per annum at which deposits in Dollars are offered for such relevant Interest Period to major banks in the London interbank market in London, England by the Administrative Agent at approximately 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the date that is two Business Days prior to the beginning of such Interest Period.

Lien ” shall mean (a) with respect to any asset, (i) any mortgage, deed of trust, lien (statutory or other), pledge, hypothecation, assignment, deposit arrangement, encumbrance, charge, preference, priority or other security interest or preferential arrangement of any kind or nature whatsoever in or on such asset and (ii) the interest of a vendor or a lessor under any conditional sale agreement, capital lease or title retention agreement (or any financing lease having substantially the same effect as any of the foregoing) relating to such asset and (b) in the case of securities, any purchase option, call or similar right of a third party with respect to such securities.

Liquidity ” shall mean, at any time of determination, the sum of (a) Availability at such time and (b) the amount of Unrestricted Cash at such time.

Loans ” shall mean the revolving loans made by the Lenders to the Borrower pursuant to Section 2.01.

Loan Documents ” shall mean this Agreement, the Security Documents, the Notes and any other document executed in connection with the foregoing.

Loan Parties ” shall mean the Borrower and the Guarantors.

 

16


Management and Services Agreement ” shall mean a Management and Services Agreement between the Borrower and Box.com (UK) Ltd substantially in the form delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to the Closing Date.

Margin Stock ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Regulation U.

Material Adverse Effect ” shall mean a material adverse effect on (a) the business, operations, property or condition, financial or otherwise, of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, (b) the ability of the Borrower and the Guarantors, taken as a whole, to perform their payment obligations under the Loan Documents or (c) the rights and remedies of or benefits available to the Lenders under the Loan Documents.

Material Indebtedness ” shall mean Indebtedness (other than the Loans) of any one or more of the Borrower or any Subsidiary in an aggregate principal amount exceeding $5,000,000. For purposes of determining Material Indebtedness, the “ principal amount ” of the obligations of the Borrower or any Subsidiary in respect of any Hedging Agreement at any time shall be the Agreement Value of such Hedging Agreement at such time.

Maturity Date ” shall mean August 27, 2015 (or, if such day is not a Business Day, the next preceding Business Day).

Maximum Rate ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.08.

Moody’s ” shall mean Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., or any successor thereto.

Mortgaged Properties ” shall mean, each parcel of real property and improvements thereto with respect to which a Mortgage is granted pursuant to Section 5.12.

Mortgages ” shall mean the mortgages, deeds of trust, deeds to secure debt and other similar security documents delivered pursuant to Section 5.12, each in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent and the Borrower.

Multiemployer Plan ” shall mean a multiemployer plan as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of ERISA.

Net Cash Proceeds ” shall mean (a) with respect to any Disposition, the cash proceeds (including cash proceeds subsequently received (as and when received) in respect of noncash consideration initially received), net of (i) selling expenses (including broker’s fees or commissions, investment banking fees, legal fees, accountants’ fees, transfer and similar taxes and the Borrower’s good faith estimate of income taxes paid or payable in connection with such sale), (ii) amounts provided as a reserve, in accordance with GAAP, against any retained liabilities or liabilities under any indemnification obligations or purchase price adjustment associated with such Disposition ( provided that, to the extent and at the time any such amounts are released from such reserve, such amounts shall constitute Net Cash Proceeds) and (iii) the principal amount, premium or

 

17


penalty, if any, interest and other amounts on any Indebtedness which is secured by the asset sold in such Disposition and which is required to be repaid with such proceeds (other than (x) Indebtedness hereunder and (y) any such Indebtedness assumed by the purchaser of such asset) and (b) with respect to any issuance of Equity Interests, the cash proceeds thereof, net of all taxes and customary fees, commissions, costs and other expenses incurred in connection therewith.

NFIP ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Non-Defaulting Lender ” shall mean, at any time, each Lender that is not a Defaulting Lender at such time.

Notes ” shall mean any promissory notes evidencing the Loans, executed and delivered pursuant to Section 2.04(e) and in the form of Exhibit H.

Obligations ” shall mean (i) all principal of all Loans, all interest (including Post-Petition Interest) on such Loans and all other amounts now or hereafter payable by the Borrower pursuant to the Loan Documents and (ii) all obligations of a Loan Party to any Qualified Counterparty under any Secured Hedging Agreements, excluding in the case of this clause (ii), the Excluded Swap Obligations.

OFAC ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.24.

Other Connection Taxes ” shall mean, with respect to any Recipient, Taxes imposed as a result of a present or former connection between such Recipient and the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (other than connections arising from such Recipient having executed, delivered, become a party to, performed its obligations under, received payments under, received or perfected a security interest under or engaged in any other transaction pursuant to or enforced any Loan Document).

Other Taxes ” shall mean all present or future stamp, court or documentary, intangible, property, excise, mortgage, recording, filing or similar Taxes that arise from any payment made under, from the execution, delivery, recording, performance, enforcement or registration of, from the receipt or perfection of a security interest under, or otherwise with respect to, any Loan Document, except any such Taxes that are Other Connection Taxes imposed with respect to an assignment (other than an assignment made pursuant to Section 2.20(a)).

Participant ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(d).

Participant Register ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(d).

PBGC ” shall mean the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation referred to and defined in ERISA.

 

18


Perfection Certificate ” shall mean the Perfection Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit E to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Permitted Acquisition ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 6.04(g).

Permitted Investments ” shall mean:

(a) direct obligations of, or obligations the principal of and interest on which are unconditionally guaranteed by, the United States of America (or by any agency thereof to the extent such obligations are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States of America), in each case maturing within one year from the date of issuance thereof;

(b) investments in commercial paper maturing within 270 days from the date of issuance thereof and having, at such date of acquisition, a rating of at least “ Prime 1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by Moody’s or “ A-1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by S&P;

(c) investments in certificates of deposit, banker’s acceptances and time deposits maturing within one year from the date of acquisition thereof issued or guaranteed by or placed with, and money market deposit accounts issued or offered by, the Administrative Agent or any domestic office of any commercial bank organized under the laws of the United States of America or any State thereof that has a combined capital and surplus and undivided profits of not less than $500,000,000 and that issues (or the parent of which issues) commercial paper rated at least “ Prime 1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by Moody’s or “ A-1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by S&P;

(d) fully collateralized repurchase agreements with a term of not more than 30 days for securities described in clause (a) above and entered into with a financial institution satisfying the criteria of clause (c) above;

(e) investments in “ money market funds ” within the meaning of Rule 2a-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, substantially all of whose assets are invested in investments of the type described in clauses (a) through (d) above; and

(f) other short-term investments utilized by Foreign Subsidiaries in accordance with normal investment practices for cash management in investments of a type analogous to the foregoing.

Permitted Investors ” shall mean (a) Aaron Levie, (b) Dylan Smith, (c) Dan Levin, (d) Andreessen Horowitz, (e) Bessemer Venture Partners, (f) Coatue Management, (g) Draper Fisher Jurvetson, (h) Emergence Capital Partners, (i) General Atlantic Partners, (j) Hercules Technology Growth Capital, (k) Intel Capital, (l) Meritech Capital, (m) New Enterprise Associates, (n) SAP Ventures, (o) Scale Venture Partners, (p) The Social+Capital Partnership, (q) U.S. Venture Partners, (r) any other Person that is reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent and that becomes a holder of voting common or preferred Equity Interests of the Borrower on or prior to the date that is 90

 

19


days after the Closing Date and (s) any Affiliate of any of the foregoing (other than any portfolio company thereof).

Permitted Refinancing ” shall mean, with respect to any Person, any refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension or similar modification of any Indebtedness of such Person (the “ Refinanced Indebtedness ”); provided that (a) the principal amount (or accreted value, if applicable) thereof does not exceed the principal amount (or accreted value, if applicable) of the Refinanced Indebtedness except by an amount equal to any interest capitalized with, any premium or other reasonable amount paid, and fees and expenses reasonably incurred, in connection with such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension, (b) such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension has a final maturity date equal to or later than the final maturity date of, and has a weighted average life to maturity equal to or longer than the weighted average life to maturity of, the Refinanced Indebtedness, (c) if the Refinanced Indebtedness is subordinated in right of payment to the Obligations, such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension is subordinated in right of payment to the Obligations on terms at least as favorable, taken as a whole, to the Lenders as those contained in the documentation governing the Refinanced Indebtedness, (d) at the time thereof, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (e) if the Refinanced Indebtedness is secured, the terms and conditions relating to collateral of any such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness, taken as a whole, are not materially less favorable to the Loan Parties than the terms and conditions with respect to the Collateral of the Refinanced Indebtedness, taken as a whole (and the Liens on any Collateral securing any such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness shall have the same (or lesser) priority as the Refinanced Indebtedness relative to the Liens on the Collateral securing the Obligations), (f) the terms and conditions (excluding any subordination, pricing, fees, rate floors, discounts, premiums and optional prepayment or redemption terms) of such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness, taken as a whole, shall not be materially less favorable to the Loan Parties than the Refinanced Indebtedness, except for covenants or other provisions applicable only to periods after the Latest Maturity Date and (g) such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension is incurred by the Person who is the obligor on the Refinanced Indebtedness.

Person ” shall mean any natural person, corporation, business trust, joint venture, association, company, limited liability company, partnership, Governmental Authority or other entity.

Plan ” shall mean any employee pension benefit plan (other than a Multiemployer Plan) that is covered by Section 4021 of ERISA, and in respect of which the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate is or, if such plan were terminated under Section 4069 of ERISA, would be, deemed to be an “ employer ” as defined in Section 3(5) of ERISA.

Platform ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

 

20


Post-Petition Interest ” shall mean any interest that accrues after the commencement of any case, proceeding or other action relating to the bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization of any one or more of the Loan Parties (or would accrue but for the operation of applicable Debtor Relief Laws), whether or not such interest is allowed or allowable as a claim in any such proceeding.

Prime Rate ” shall mean the rate of interest per annum determined from time to time by Credit Suisse AG as its prime rate in effect at its principal office in New York City and notified to the Borrower. The prime rate is a rate set by Credit Suisse AG based upon various factors including Credit Suisse AG’s costs and desired return, general economic conditions and other factors, and is used as a reference point for pricing some loans, which may be priced at, above, or below such rate.

Public Lender ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Qualified Capital Stock ” of any Person shall mean any Equity Interest of such Person that is not Disqualified Stock.

Qualified Counterparty ” shall mean, with respect to any Hedging Agreement, any counterparty thereto that, at the time such Hedging Agreement was entered into, was a Lender, the Administrative Agent, the Arranger or any of their respective Affiliates.

Qualified Public Offering ” shall mean the initial underwritten public offering of common Equity Interests of the Borrower pursuant to an effective registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission in accordance with the Securities Act that results in at least $175,000,000 of Net Cash Proceeds to the Borrower.

Real Estate Collateral Requirements ” shall mean the requirement with respect to the Mortgaged Properties as required by Section 5.12, that the Collateral Agent shall have received a Mortgage for each Mortgaged Property in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent and suitable for recording or filing, together with, with respect to each Mortgage, the following documents: (a) a fully paid policy of title insurance (or “ pro forma ” or marked up commitment having the same effect of a title insurance policy) (i) in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent insuring the Lien of the Mortgage encumbering such property as a valid first priority Lien, (ii) in an amount reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (iii) issued by a nationally recognized title insurance company reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent (the “ Title Company ”) and (iv) that includes (A) such coinsurance and direct access reinsurance as the Collateral Agent may reasonably deem necessary or desirable and (B) such endorsements or affirmative insurance reasonably required by the Collateral Agent and available in the applicable jurisdiction (including, without limitation, endorsements on matters relating to usury, first loss, last dollar, zoning, revolving credit, doing business, variable rate, address, separate tax lot, subdivision, tie in or cluster, contiguity, access and so-called comprehensive coverage over covenants and restrictions), (b) with respect to any property located in any jurisdiction in which a zoning endorsement is not available (or for which a zoning endorsement is not available at a premium that is not excessive), if requested by the Collateral Agent, a zoning compliance

 

21


letter from the applicable municipality or a zoning report from Planning and Zoning Resource Corporation (or another person acceptable to the Collateral Agent, in each case reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (c) upon the request of the Collateral Agent, a survey certified to Collateral Agent and the Title Company in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (d) upon the request of the Collateral Agent, an appraisal complying with the requirements of the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989, by a third-party appraiser selected by the Collateral Agent, (e) an opinion of local counsel reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent and in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (f) if requested by any Lender, no later than three (3) Business Days prior to the delivery of the Mortgage, the following documents and instruments, in order to comply with the National Flood Insurance Reform Act of 1994 and related legislation (including the regulations of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System) (“ Flood Laws ”): (1) a completed standard flood hazard determination form, (2) if the improvement(s) to the improved real property is located in a special flood hazard area, a notification to the Borrower (“ Borrower Notice ”) and, if applicable, notification to the Borrower that flood insurance coverage under the National Flood Insurance Program (“ NFIP ”) is not available because the community does not participate in the NFIP, (3) documentation evidencing the Borrower’s receipt of the Borrower Notice and (4) if the Borrower Notice is required to be given and flood insurance is available in the community in which the property is located, a copy of the flood insurance policy, the Borrower’s application for a flood insurance policy plus proof of premium payment, a declaration page confirming that flood insurance has been issued, or such other evidence of flood insurance satisfactory to the Collateral Agent (any of the foregoing being “ Evidence of Flood Insurance ”), (g) upon the reasonable request of the Collateral Agent, Phase I environmental site assessment reports prepared in accordance with the current ASTM E1527 standard (“ Phase Is ”) (to the extent not already provided) and reliance letters for such Phase Is (which Phase Is and reliance letters shall be in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent) and any other environmental information as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request and (h) such other instruments and documents (including consulting engineer’s reports and lien searches) as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request.

Recipient ” shall mean (a) the Administrative Agent and (b) any Lender, as applicable.

Refinancing ” shall mean the repayment in full and the termination of any commitment to make extensions of credit under the Existing Debt.

Register ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(c).

Regulation T ” shall mean Regulation T of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

Regulation U ” shall mean Regulation U of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

22


Regulation X ” shall mean Regulation X of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

Related Parties ” shall mean, with respect to any specified Person, such Person’s Affiliates and the respective officers, directors, employees, agents, advisors, representatives, controlling persons, members, successors and permitted assigns of such Person and such Person’s Affiliates.

Release ” shall mean any actual or threatened release, spill, emission, leaking, dumping, injection, pouring, pumping, deposit, disposal, discharge, dispersal, leaching or migration into or through the indoor or outdoor environment, including the air, soil and ground and surface water or into, through, within or upon any building, structure, facility or fixture.

Required Lenders ” shall mean, at any time, Lenders having Loans and unused Commitments representing more than 50% of the sum of all Loans outstanding and unused Commitments at such time; provided that the Loans and unused Commitments of any Defaulting Lender shall be disregarded in the determination of the Required Lenders at any time.

Resignation Effective Date ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 8.06.

Responsible Officer ” of any Person shall mean any executive officer or Financial Officer of such Person and any other officer or similar official thereof responsible for the administration of the obligations of such Person in respect of this Agreement.

Restricted Payment ” shall mean any dividend or other distribution (whether in cash, securities or other property) with respect to any Equity Interests in the Borrower or any Subsidiary, or any payment (whether in cash, securities or other property), including any sinking fund or similar deposit, on account of the purchase, redemption, retirement, acquisition, cancellation or termination of any Equity Interests in the Borrower or any Subsidiary.

Restricted Subsidiary ” shall mean any Subsidiary other than an Immaterial Subsidiary.

S&P ” shall mean Standard & Poor’s Ratings Service, or any successor thereto.

SEC ” shall mean the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Secured Hedging Agreement ” shall mean any Hedging Agreement entered into by a Loan Party and a Qualified Counterparty.

Secured Parties ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

 

23


Securities Act ” shall mean the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

Security Documents ” shall mean the Mortgages, the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement and each of the security agreements, mortgages and other instruments and documents executed and delivered pursuant to any of the foregoing or pursuant to Section 5.12.

Solvent ” shall mean, (a) the sum of the liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, does not exceed the fair value of the present assets of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, (b) the present fair saleable value of the assets of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is greater than the total amount that will be required to pay the probable liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries as they become absolute and matured, (c) the capital of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is not unreasonably small in relation to their business as contemplated on the determination date, (d) the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, have not incurred and do not intend to incur, or believe that they will incur, debts or liabilities, including current obligations beyond their ability to pay such debts or other liabilities as they become due (whether at maturity or otherwise) and (e) the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, are “ solvent ” within the meaning given to that term and similar terms under applicable laws relating to fraudulent transfers and conveyances.

Statutory Reserves ” shall mean a fraction (expressed as a decimal), the numerator of which is the number one and the denominator of which is the number one minus the aggregate of the maximum reserve percentages (including any marginal, special, emergency or supplemental reserves) established by the Board and any other banking authority, domestic or foreign, to which the Administrative Agent or any Lender (including any branch, Affiliate or other fronting office making or holding a Loan) is subject for Eurocurrency Liabilities (as defined in Regulation D of the Board). Eurodollar Loans shall be deemed to constitute Eurocurrency Liabilities and to be subject to such reserve requirements without benefit of or credit for proration, exemptions or offsets that may be available from time to time to any Lender under such Regulation D. Statutory Reserves shall be adjusted automatically on and as of the effective date of any change in any reserve percentage.

subsidiary ” shall mean, with respect to any Person (herein referred to as the “ parent ”), any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity (a) of which securities or other ownership interests representing more than 50% of the equity or more than 50% of the ordinary voting power or more than 50% of the general partnership interests are, at the time any determination is being made, owned, Controlled or held, or (b) that is, at the time any determination is made, otherwise Controlled, by the parent or one or more subsidiaries of the parent or by the parent and one or more subsidiaries of the parent.

Subsidiary ” shall mean any subsidiary of the Borrower.

 

24


Swap Obligation ” shall mean, with respect to any Guarantor, any obligation to pay or perform under any agreement, contract or transaction that constitutes a “ swap ” within the meaning of section 1a(47) of the Commodity Exchange Act (including without limitation any Secured Hedging Agreement).

Taxes ” shall mean any and all present or future taxes, levies, imposts, duties, deductions, assessments, fees, charges or withholdings (including backup withholding) imposed by any Governmental Authority, including any interest, additions to tax or penalties applicable thereto.

Termination Date ” shall mean the earlier to occur of (a) the Latest Maturity Date and (b) the date on which the Commitments hereunder are terminated or expire.

Title Company ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Total Commitment ” shall mean, at any time, the aggregate amount of the Commitments as in effect at such time. The initial Total Commitment is $100,000,000.

Transaction Costs ” shall mean the fees, costs and expenses incurred in connection with the Transactions.

Transactions ” shall mean, collectively, (a) the execution, delivery and performance by the Loan Parties of the Loan Documents to which they are, or will be, a party and the making of the Borrowings hereunder, (b) the repayment of all amounts due or outstanding under or in respect of, and the termination of, the Existing Debt and (c) the payment of related fees and expenses.

Type ” when used in respect of any Loan or Borrowing, shall refer to the Rate by reference to which interest on such Loan or on the Loans comprising such Borrowing is determined. For purposes hereof, the term “ Rate ” shall mean the Adjusted LIBO Rate and the Alternate Base Rate.

Unfunded Pension Liability ” shall mean, with respect to any Plan at any time, the amount of any of its unfunded benefit liabilities as defined in Section 4001(a)(18) of ERISA.

Unrestricted Cash ” shall mean, as of any date of determination, the amount (without duplication) of unrestricted cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries that is in deposit accounts or in securities accounts, or any combination thereof, that are Controlled Deposit Accounts (as defined in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement) or Controlled Securities Accounts (as defined in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement), as applicable.

USA PATRIOT Act ” shall mean The Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (Title III of Pub. L. No. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)).

 

25


U.S. Person ” shall mean any Person that is a “ United States Person ” as defined in Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code.

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.19(f).

Wholly Owned Subsidiary ” of any Person shall mean a subsidiary of such Person of which securities (except for directors’ qualifying shares) or other ownership interests representing 100% of the Equity Interests are, at the time any determination is being made, owned, Controlled or held by such Person or one or more wholly owned subsidiaries of such Person or by such Person and one or more wholly owned subsidiaries of such Person.

Withdrawal Liability ” shall mean liability to a Multiemployer Plan as a result of a complete or partial withdrawal from such Multiemployer Plan, as such terms are defined in Part I of Subtitle E of Title IV of ERISA.

Withholding Agent ” shall mean any Loan Party and the Administrative Agent.

Section 1.02. T erms Generally . The definitions in Section 1.01 shall apply equally to both the singular and plural forms of the terms defined. Whenever the context may require, any pronoun shall include the corresponding masculine, feminine and neuter forms. The words “ include ,” “ includes ” and “ including ” shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase “ without limitation .” The word “ will ” shall be construed to have the same meaning and effect as the word “ shall ,” and the words “ asset ” and “ property ” shall be construed as having the same meaning and effect and to refer to any and all tangible and intangible assets and properties, including cash, securities, accounts and contract rights. The words “ herein ”, “ hereto ”, “ hereof ” and “ hereunder ” and words of similar import when used in any Loan Document shall refer to such Loan Document as a whole and not to any particular provision thereof. All references herein to Articles, Sections, Exhibits and Schedules shall be deemed references to Articles and Sections of, and Exhibits and Schedules to, this Agreement unless the context shall otherwise require. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, (a) any reference in this Agreement to any Loan Document or any other agreement, instrument or document shall mean such document as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, but only to the extent that such amendment, restatements, supplements or modifications are not prohibited by this Agreement, (b) references to any law shall include all statutory and regulatory provisions consolidating, amending, replacing, supplementing or interpreting such law, (c) all terms of an accounting or financial nature shall be construed in accordance with GAAP, as in effect from time to time; provided that if the Borrower notifies the Administrative Agent that the Borrower wishes to amend any provision of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents to eliminate the effect of any change in GAAP occurring after the date of this Agreement on the operation of such provision (or if the Administrative Agent notifies the Borrower that the Required Lenders wish to amend any provision of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents) regardless of whether any such notice is given before or after such change in GAAP, then such provision shall be interpreted on the basis of GAAP in effect immediately before the relevant change in

 

26


GAAP became effective, until either such notice is withdrawn or such provision is amended in a manner satisfactory to the Borrower and the Required Lenders and (d) all terms of an accounting or financial nature used herein shall be construed, and all computations of amounts and ratios referred to herein shall be made (i) without giving effect to any election under Accounting Standards Codification 825-10-25 (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar result or effect) to value any Indebtedness or other liabilities of the Borrower or any Subsidiary at “ fair value ”, as defined therein, (ii) without giving effect to any treatment of Indebtedness in respect of convertible debt instruments under Accounting Standards Codification 470-20 (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar result or effect) to value any such Indebtedness in a reduced or bifurcated manner as described therein, and such Indebtedness shall at all times be valued at the full stated principal amount thereof and (iii) in a manner such that the determination of whether a lease is to be treated as an operating lease or capital lease shall be made without giving effect to any change in accounting for leases pursuant to GAAP resulting from the implementation of proposed Accounting Standards Update (ASU) Leases (Topic 840) issued August 17, 2010.

Section 1.03. Classification of Loans and Borrowings . For purposes of this Agreement, Loans and Borrowings may be classified and referred to by Type (e.g., a “ Eurodollar Loan ” or a “ Eurodollar Borrowing ”).

ARTICLE 2

T HE C REDITS

Section 2.01. Commitments . Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, each Lender agrees to make Loans to the Borrower, at any time and from time to time during the Commitment Period in accordance with the terms hereof, in an aggregate principal amount at any time outstanding that will not result in such Lender’s Exposure exceeding such Lender’s Commitment. Within the limits set forth in the preceding sentence and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, amounts repaid or prepaid in respect of Loans may be reborrowed under this Section 2.01.

Section 2.02. Loans . (a) Each Loan shall be made as part of a Borrowing consisting of Loans made by the Lenders ratably in accordance with their applicable Commitments; provided that the failure of any Lender to make any Loan shall not in itself relieve any other Lender of its obligation to lend hereunder (it being understood, however, that no Lender shall be responsible for the failure of any other Lender to make any Loan required to be made by such other Lender). The Loans comprising any Borrowing shall be in an aggregate principal amount that is (i) an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and not less than $3,000,000 or (ii) equal to the remaining available balance of the applicable Commitments.

(b) Subject to Sections 2.08 and 2.14, each Borrowing shall be comprised entirely of ABR Loans or Eurodollar Loans as the Borrower may request pursuant to Section 2.03. Each Lender may at its option make any Eurodollar Loan by causing any domestic or foreign branch or Affiliate of such Lender to make such Loan; provided that

 

27


any exercise of such option shall not affect the obligation of the Borrower to repay such Loan in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Borrowings of more than one Type may be outstanding at the same time; provided further that the Borrower shall not be entitled to request any Borrowing that, if made, would result in more than five (5) Eurodollar Borrowings outstanding hereunder at any time.

(c) Each Lender shall make each Loan to be made by it hereunder on the proposed date thereof by wire transfer of immediately available funds to such account in New York City as the Administrative Agent may designate not later than 1:00 p.m., New York City time, and the Administrative Agent shall promptly credit the amounts so received to an account designated by the Borrower in the applicable Borrowing Request or, if a Borrowing shall not occur on such date because any condition precedent herein specified shall not have been met, return the amounts so received to the respective Lenders.

(d) Unless the Administrative Agent shall have received notice from a Lender (i) in the case of a Eurodollar Loan, prior to the date of any Borrowing and (ii) in the case of an ABR Loan prior to 1:00 p.m., New York City time, on the date of any Borrowing, in either case that such Lender will not make available to the Administrative Agent such Lender’s portion of such Borrowing, the Administrative Agent may assume that such Lender has made such portion available to the Administrative Agent on the date of such Borrowing in accordance with paragraph (c) above and the Administrative Agent may, in reliance upon such assumption, make available to the Borrower on such date a corresponding amount. If the Administrative Agent shall have so made funds available then, to the extent that such Lender shall not have made such portion available to the Administrative Agent, such Lender and the Borrower severally agree to repay to the Administrative Agent forthwith on demand such corresponding amount together with interest thereon, for each day from the date such amount is made available to the Borrower to but excluding the date such amount is repaid to the Administrative Agent at (A) in the case of the Borrower, a rate per annum equal to the interest rate applicable at the time to the Loans comprising such Borrowing and (B) in the case of such Lender, a rate determined by the Administrative Agent to represent its cost of overnight or short-term funds (which determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error). If such Lender shall repay to the Administrative Agent such corresponding amount, such amount shall constitute such Lender’s Loan as part of such Borrowing for purposes of this Agreement.

(e) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Borrower shall not be entitled to request any Eurodollar Borrowing if the Interest Period requested with respect thereto would end after the Maturity Date.

Section 2.03. Borrowing Procedure . In order to request a Borrowing, the Borrower shall notify the Administrative Agent of such request in writing or by telephone (a) in the case of a Eurodollar Borrowing, not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days before a proposed Borrowing and (b) in the case of an ABR Borrowing, not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, on the date of the proposed Borrowing. Each such notice shall be irrevocable, and any telephonic notice shall be

 

28


confirmed promptly by delivery of a written Borrowing Request and shall specify the following information: (i) whether such Borrowing is to be a Eurodollar Borrowing or an ABR Borrowing; (ii) the date of such Borrowing (which shall be a Business Day); (iii) the number and location of the account to which funds are to be disbursed; (iv) the amount of such Borrowing and (v) if such Borrowing is to be a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period with respect thereto; provided that, notwithstanding any contrary specification in any Borrowing Request, each requested Borrowing shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 2.02. If no election as to the Type of Borrowing is specified in any such notice, then the requested Borrowing shall be an ABR Borrowing. If no Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing is specified in any such notice, then the Borrower shall be deemed to have selected an Interest Period of one month’s duration. The Administrative Agent shall promptly advise the applicable Lenders of any notice given pursuant to this Section 2.03 (and the contents thereof), and of each Lender’s pro rata share of the requested Borrowing.

Section 2.04. Evidence of Debt; Repayment of Loans . (a) The Borrower hereby unconditionally promises to pay to the Administrative Agent for the account of each Lender the then unpaid principal amount of each Loan of such Lender on the Maturity Date.

(b) Each Lender shall maintain in accordance with its usual practice an account or accounts evidencing the indebtedness of the Borrower to such Lender resulting from each Loan made by such Lender from time to time, including the amounts of principal and interest payable and paid to such Lender from time to time under this Agreement.

(c) The Administrative Agent shall, in accordance with its customary practice, maintain accounts in which it will record (i) the amount of each Loan made hereunder, the Class and Type thereof and, if applicable, the Interest Period applicable thereto, the amount of any principal or interest due and payable or to become due and payable from the Borrower to each Lender hereunder and (ii) the amount of any sum received by the Administrative Agent hereunder from the Borrower or any Guarantor and each Lender’s share thereof.

(d) The entries made in the accounts maintained pursuant to paragraphs (b) and (c) above shall be prima facie evidence of the existence and amounts of the obligations therein recorded; provided that the failure of any Lender or the Administrative Agent to maintain such accounts or any error therein shall not in any manner affect the obligations of the Borrower to repay the Loans in accordance with their terms.

(e) Any Lender may request that Loans made by it hereunder be evidenced by a Note. In such event, the Borrower shall execute and deliver to such Lender a Note payable to such Lender and its registered assigns. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, in the event any Lender shall request and receive such a Note, the interests represented by such Note shall at all times (including after any assignment of all

 

29


or part of such interests pursuant to Section 9.04) be represented by one or more Notes payable to the payee named therein or its registered assigns.

Section 2.05. Fees . (a) The Borrower agrees to pay to each Lender, through the Administrative Agent, on the last Business Day of March, June, September and December in each year and on each date on which any Commitment of such Lender shall expire or be terminated as provided herein, a commitment fee (a “ Commitment Fee ”) equal to 0.50% per annum on the daily unused amount of the Commitment of such Lender during the preceding quarter (or other period commencing with the date hereof or ending with the Maturity Date or the date on which the Commitments of such Lender shall expire or be terminated). All Commitment Fees shall be computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed in a year of 360 days.

(b) The Borrower agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent, for its own account, the administrative fees set forth in the Engagement Letter at the times and in the amounts specified therein (the “ Administrative Agent Fees ”).

(c) The Borrower agrees to pay on the Closing Date to each Lender party to this Agreement on the Closing Date, as compensation for the Commitment of such Lender, a closing fee in an amount equal to 0.50% of the stated principal amount of such Lender’s Commitment. Such fees shall be payable by the Borrower to each Lender on the Closing Date. Such closing fees will be in all respects fully earned, due and payable on the Closing Date and non-refundable and non-creditable thereafter.

(d) All Fees shall be paid on the dates due, in immediately available funds, to the Administrative Agent for distribution, if and as appropriate, among the Lenders. Once paid, none of the Fees shall be refundable under any circumstances.

Section 2.06. Interest on Loans . (a) Subject to the provisions of Section 2.07, the Loans comprising each ABR Borrowing shall bear interest (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 365 or 366 days, as the case may be, at all times and calculated from and including the date of such Borrowing to but excluding the date of repayment thereof) at a rate per annum equal to the Alternate Base Rate plus the Applicable Margin in effect from time to time.

(b) Subject to the provisions of Section 2.07, the Loans comprising each Eurodollar Borrowing shall bear interest (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 360 days) at a rate per annum equal to the Adjusted LIBO Rate for the Interest Period in effect for such Borrowing plus the Applicable Margin in effect from time to time.

(c) Interest on each Loan shall be payable on the Interest Payment Dates applicable to such Loan except as otherwise provided in this Agreement. The applicable Alternate Base Rate or Adjusted LIBO Rate for each Interest Period or day within an Interest Period, as the case may be, shall be determined by the Administrative Agent, and such determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

 

30


Section 2.07. Default Interest . If the Borrower shall default in the payment of any principal of or interest on any Loan or any other amount due hereunder or under any other Loan Document, by acceleration or otherwise, then, until such defaulted amount shall have been paid in full or such default is waived, to the extent permitted by law, all such overdue amounts shall bear interest (after as well as before judgment), payable on demand, (i) in the case of principal, at the rate otherwise applicable to such Loan pursuant to Section 2.06 plus 2.00% per annum and (ii) in all other cases, at a rate per annum (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 360 days at all times) equal to the rate that would be applicable to an ABR Loan plus 2.00% per annum.

Section 2.08. Alternate Rate of Interest . In the event, and on each occasion, that on the day two (2) Business Days prior to the commencement of any Interest Period for a Eurodollar Borrowing the Administrative Agent shall have determined that (a) Dollar deposits in the principal amounts of the Loans comprising such Borrowing are not generally available in the London interbank market, (b) the rates at which such Dollar deposits are being offered will not adequately and fairly reflect the cost to the majority of Lenders of making or maintaining Eurodollar Loans during such Interest Period or (c) reasonable means do not exist for ascertaining the Adjusted LIBO Rate, the Administrative Agent shall, as soon as practicable thereafter, give written or fax notice of such determination to the Borrower and the Lenders. In the event of any such determination, until the Administrative Agent shall have advised the Borrower and the Lenders that the circumstances giving rise to such notice no longer exist, any request by the Borrower for a Eurodollar Borrowing pursuant to Section 2.03 or Section 2.10 shall be deemed to be a request for an ABR Borrowing. Each determination by the Administrative Agent under this Section 2.08 shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

Section 2.09. Termination and Reduction of Commitments . (a) Unless previously extended pursuant to Section 2.23, the Commitments shall automatically terminate on the Maturity Date. Each Class of Extended Commitments shall automatically terminate on the date specified in the applicable Additional Credit Extension Amendment.

(b) Upon at least three (3) Business Days’ prior irrevocable written or telephone notice to the Administrative Agent, the Borrower may at any time in whole permanently terminate, or from time to time in part permanently reduce, the Commitments (any such telephone notice shall be confirmed promptly by delivery of written notice thereof); provided that (i) each partial reduction of the Commitments shall be in an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and in a minimum amount of $5,000,000, (ii) the Total Commitment shall not be reduced to an amount that is less than the Aggregate Exposure at the time and (iii) any such termination or reduction notice may state that such notice is conditioned upon the effectiveness of other financing arrangements, in which case such notice may be revoked by the Borrower (by notice to the Administrative Agent on or prior to the specified effective date) if such condition is not satisfied.

(c) Each reduction in the Commitments hereunder shall be made ratably among the Lenders in accordance with their respective applicable Commitments. The

 

31


Borrower shall pay to the Administrative Agent for the account of the applicable Lenders, on the date of each termination or reduction, the Commitment Fees on the amount of the Commitments so terminated or reduced accrued to but excluding the date of such termination or reduction.

Section 2.10. Conversion and Continuation of Borrowings . The Borrower shall have the right at any time upon written or telephonic notice to the Administrative Agent (a) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, on the date of conversion, to convert any Eurodollar Borrowing into an ABR Borrowing, (b) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days prior to conversion or continuation, to convert any ABR Borrowing into a Eurodollar Borrowing or to continue any Eurodollar Borrowing as a Eurodollar Borrowing for an additional Interest Period and (c) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days prior to conversion, to convert the Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing to another permissible Interest Period, subject in each case to the following:

(i) each conversion or continuation shall be made pro rata among the Lenders in accordance with the respective principal amounts of the Loans comprising the converted or continued Borrowing;

(ii) if less than all the outstanding principal amount of any Borrowing shall be converted or continued, then each resulting Borrowing shall satisfy the limitations specified in Sections 2.02(a) and 2.02(b) regarding the principal amount and maximum number of Borrowings of the relevant Type;

(iii) each conversion shall be effected by each Lender and the Administrative Agent by recording for the account of such Lender the new Borrowing of such Lender resulting from such conversion and reducing the Borrowing (or portion thereof) of such Lender being converted by an equivalent principal amount; accrued interest on any Eurodollar Loan (or portion thereof) being converted shall be paid by the Borrower at the time of conversion;

(iv) if any Eurodollar Borrowing is converted at a time other than the end of the Interest Period applicable thereto, the Borrower shall pay, upon demand, any amounts due to the Lenders pursuant to Section 2.15;

(v) any portion of a Borrowing maturing or required to be repaid in less than one month may not be converted into or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing;

(vi) any portion of a Eurodollar Borrowing that cannot be continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing by reason of the immediately preceding clause (v) shall be automatically converted at the end of the Interest Period in effect for such Borrowing into an ABR Borrowing; and

(vii) after the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, no outstanding Loan may be converted into, or continued as, a Eurodollar Loan.

 

32


Each such telephonic notice shall be irrevocable and shall be confirmed promptly by delivery of an Interest Election Request pursuant to this Section 2.10 and shall specify (a) the identity and amount of the Borrowing that the Borrower requests be converted or continued, (b) whether such Borrowing is to be converted to or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing or an ABR Borrowing, (c) if such notice requests a conversion, the date of such conversion (which shall be a Business Day) and (d) if such Borrowing is to be converted to or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period with respect thereto. If no Interest Period is specified in any such notice with respect to any conversion to or continuation as a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Borrower shall be deemed to have selected an Interest Period of one month’s duration. The Administrative Agent shall promptly advise the Lenders of any notice given pursuant to this Section 2.10 and of each Lender’s pro rata share of any converted or continued Borrowing. If the Borrower shall not have given notice in accordance with this Section 2.10 to continue any Borrowing into a subsequent Interest Period (and shall not otherwise have given notice in accordance with this Section 2.10 to convert such Borrowing), such Borrowing shall, at the end of the Interest Period applicable thereto (unless repaid pursuant to the terms hereof), automatically be converted into an ABR Borrowing.

Section 2.11. Voluntary Prepayment .  (a) The Borrower shall have the right at any time and from time to time to prepay any Borrowing, in whole or in part, upon at least three (3) Business Days’ prior written notice (or telephonic notice promptly confirmed by written notice) in the case of Eurodollar Loans, or written notice (or telephonic notice promptly confirmed by written notice) at least one (1) Business Day prior to the date of prepayment in the case of ABR Loans, to the Administrative Agent before 12:00 (noon), New York City time; provided that each partial prepayment shall be in an amount that is an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and not less than $3,000,000.

(b) Each notice of prepayment shall specify the prepayment date and the principal amount of each Borrowing (or portion thereof) to be prepaid, shall be irrevocable and shall commit the Borrower to prepay such Borrowing by the amount stated therein on the date stated therein; provided that a notice of prepayment may state that such notice is conditioned upon the effectiveness of other financing arrangements, in which case such notice may be revoked by the Borrower (by notice to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon) on the specified effective date) if such condition is not satisfied; provided further that the provisions of Section 2.15 shall apply with respect to any such revocation or extension. All prepayments under this Section 2.11 shall be subject to Section 2.15 but otherwise without premium or penalty. All prepayments under this Section 2.11 (other than prepayments of ABR Loans that are not made in connection with the termination or permanent reduction of the Commitments) shall be accompanied by accrued and unpaid interest on the principal amount to be prepaid to but excluding the date of payment.

Section 2.12. Mandatory Prepayments .  (a) In the event of any termination of all the Commitments, the Borrower shall, on the date of such termination, repay or prepay all its outstanding Borrowings. If, after giving effect to any partial reduction of the Commitments or at any other time, the Aggregate Exposure would exceed the Total

 

33


Commitment, then the Borrower shall, on the date of such reduction or at such other time, repay or prepay Borrowings in an amount sufficient to eliminate such excess.

(b) Each notice of prepayment shall specify the prepayment date, the Type of each Loan being prepaid and the principal amount of each Loan (or portion thereof) to be prepaid. All prepayments of Borrowings under this Section 2.12 shall be subject to Section 2.15, but shall otherwise be without premium or penalty, and shall be accompanied by accrued and unpaid interest on the principal amount to be prepaid to but excluding the date of payment (other than prepayments of ABR Loans that are not made in connection with the termination or permanent reduction of the Commitments).

Section 2.13. Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy .  (a) If any Change in Law shall:

(i) impose, modify or deem applicable any reserve, special deposit, compulsory loan, insurance charge or similar requirement against assets of, deposits with or for the account of or credit extended by any Lender (except any such reserve requirement which is reflected in the Adjusted LIBO Rate);

(ii) subject any Recipient to any Taxes (other than (A) Indemnified Taxes and (B) Excluded Taxes) on its loans, loan principal, commitments, or other obligations, or its deposits, reserves, other liabilities or capital attributable thereto; or

(iii) impose on any Lender or the London interbank market any other condition, cost or expense (other than Taxes) affecting this Agreement or Loans made by such Lender;

and the result of any of the foregoing shall be to increase the cost to such Lender or such other Recipient of making or maintaining any Loan or to reduce the amount of any sum received or receivable by such Lender or such other Recipient hereunder (whether of principal, interest or otherwise) then the Borrower will pay to such Lender or such other Recipient, as the case may be, upon demand such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such other Recipient, as the case may be, for such additional costs incurred or reduction suffered.

(b) If any Lender shall have determined that any Change in Law regarding capital adequacy or liquidity requirements has or would have the effect of reducing the rate of return on such Lender’s capital or on the capital of such Lender’s holding company, if any, as a consequence of this Agreement or the Loans made by such Lender pursuant hereto to a level below that which such Lender or such Lender’s holding company could have achieved but for such Change in Law (taking into consideration such Lender’s policies and the policies of such Lender’s holding company with respect to capital adequacy or liquidity) then from time to time the Borrower shall pay to such Lender such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such Lender’s holding company for any such reduction suffered.

 

34


(c) A certificate of a Lender or such other Recipient setting forth the amount or amounts necessary to compensate such Lender or such other Recipient or the holding company, as applicable, as specified in paragraph (a) or (b) above shall be delivered to the Borrower and shall be conclusive absent manifest error. Any such certificate shall set forth in reasonable detail a calculation of the amount owed. The Borrower shall pay such Lender or such other Recipient the amount shown as due on any such certificate delivered by it within ten (10) days after its receipt of the same.

(d) Failure or delay on the part of any Lender or other such Recipient to demand compensation pursuant to this Section shall not constitute a waiver of such Lender’s or such other Recipient’s right to demand such compensation; provided that the Borrower shall not be required to compensate any Lender or other such Recipient under paragraph (a) or (b) above pursuant to this Section for any increased costs incurred or reductions suffered more than six (6) months prior to the date that such Lender or other Recipient, as the case may be, notifies the Borrower of the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions, and of such Lender’s or other such Recipient’s intention to claim compensation therefor (except that, if the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions is retroactive, then the six (6) month period referred to above shall be extended to include the period of retroactive effect thereof).

Section 2.14. Change in Legality .  (a) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, if any Change in Law shall make it unlawful for any Lender to make or maintain any Eurodollar Loan or to give effect to its obligations as contemplated hereby with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, then, by written notice to the Borrower and to the Administrative Agent:

(i) such Lender may declare that Eurodollar Loans will not thereafter (for the duration of such unlawfulness) be made by such Lender hereunder (or be continued for additional Interest Periods) and ABR Loans will not thereafter (for such duration) be converted into Eurodollar Loans, whereupon any request for a Eurodollar Borrowing (or to convert an ABR Borrowing to a Eurodollar Borrowing or to continue a Eurodollar Borrowing for an additional Interest Period) shall, as to such Lender only, be deemed a request for an ABR Loan (or a request to continue an ABR Loan as such or to convert a Eurodollar Loan into an ABR Loan, as the case may be), unless such declaration shall be subsequently withdrawn; and

(ii) such Lender may require that all outstanding Eurodollar Loans made by it be converted to ABR Loans, in which event all such Eurodollar Loans shall be automatically converted to ABR Loans as of the effective date of such notice as provided in paragraph (b) below.

In the event any Lender shall exercise its rights under (i) or (ii) above, all payments and prepayments of principal that would otherwise have been applied to repay the Eurodollar Loans that would have been made by such Lender or the converted Eurodollar Loans of such Lender shall instead be applied to repay the ABR Loans made by such Lender in lieu of, or resulting from the conversion of, such Eurodollar Loans.

 

35


(b) For purposes of this Section 2.14, a notice to the Borrower by any Lender shall be effective as to each Eurodollar Loan made by such Lender, if lawful, on the last day of the Interest Period then applicable to such Eurodollar Loan; in all other cases such notice shall be effective on the date of receipt by the Borrower.

Section 2.15. Breakage .  The Borrower shall indemnify each Lender against any loss or expense that such Lender may sustain or incur as a consequence of (a) any event, other than a default by such Lender in the performance of its obligations hereunder, which results in (i) such Lender receiving or being deemed to receive any amount on account of the principal of any Eurodollar Loan prior to the end of the Interest Period in effect therefor, (ii) the conversion of any Eurodollar Loan to an ABR Loan, or the conversion of the Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, in each case other than on the last day of the Interest Period in effect therefor, or (iii) any Eurodollar Loan to be made by such Lender (including any Eurodollar Loan to be made pursuant to a conversion or continuation under Section 2.10) not being made after notice of such Loan shall have been given by the Borrower hereunder (any of the events referred to in this clause (a) being called a “ Breakage Event ”) or (b) any default in the making of any payment or prepayment required to be made hereunder. In the case of any Breakage Event, such loss shall include an amount equal to the excess, as reasonably determined by such Lender, of (i) its cost of obtaining funds for the Eurodollar Loan that is the subject of such Breakage Event for the period from the date of such Breakage Event to the last day of the Interest Period in effect (or that would have been in effect) for such Loan over (ii) the amount of interest likely to be realized by such Lender in redeploying the funds released or not utilized by reason of such Breakage Event for such period. A certificate of any Lender setting forth any amount or amounts which such Lender is entitled to receive pursuant to this Section 2.15 shall be delivered to the Borrower and shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

Section 2.16. Pro Rata Treatment .  Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, each Borrowing, each payment or prepayment of principal of any Borrowing, each payment of interest on the Loans, each payment of the Commitment Fees, each reduction of the Commitments and each conversion of any Borrowing to or continuation of any Borrowing as a Borrowing of any Type shall be allocated pro rata among the Lenders in accordance with their respective applicable Commitments (or, if such Commitments shall have expired or been terminated, in accordance with the respective principal amounts of their outstanding Loans). Each Lender agrees that in computing such Lender’s portion of any Borrowing to be made hereunder, the Administrative Agent may, in its discretion, round each Lender’s percentage of such Borrowing to the next higher or lower whole Dollar amount.

Section 2.17. Sharing of Setoffs .  If any Lender shall, by exercising any right of setoff or counterclaim or otherwise, obtain payment in respect of any principal of or interest on any of its Loans or other Obligations hereunder resulting in such Lender receiving payment of a proportion of the aggregate amount of its Loans and accrued interest thereon or other such obligations greater than its pro rata share thereof as provided herein, then the Lender receiving such greater proportion shall (a) notify the Administrative Agent of such fact, and (b) purchase (for cash at face value) participations

 

36


in the Loans and such other obligations of the other Lenders, or make such other adjustments as shall be equitable, so that the benefit of all such payments shall be shared by the Lenders ratably in accordance with the aggregate amount of principal of and accrued interest on their respective Loans and other amounts owing them; provided that:

(i) if any such participations are purchased and all or any portion of the payment giving rise thereto is recovered, such participations shall be rescinded and the purchase price restored to the extent of such recovery, without interest; and

(ii) the provisions of this Section 2.17 shall not be construed to apply to (x) any payment made by the Borrower pursuant to and in accordance with the express terms of this Agreement (including the application of funds arising from the existence of a Defaulting Lender), or (y) any payment obtained by a Lender as consideration for the assignment of or sale of a participation in any of its Loans or Commitments to any assignee or participant, other than to the Borrower or any of its Affiliates (as to which the provisions of this Section 2.17 shall apply).

The Borrower consents to the foregoing and agrees, to the extent it may effectively do so under applicable law, that any Lender acquiring a participation pursuant to the foregoing arrangements may exercise against each Loan Party rights of setoff and counterclaim with respect to such participation as fully as if such Lender were a direct creditor of each Loan Party in the amount of such participation.

Section 2.18. Payments .  (a) The Borrower shall make each payment (including principal of or interest on any Borrowing or any Fees or other amounts) hereunder or under any other Loan Document not later than 2:00 p.m., New York City time, on the date when due in immediately available Dollars, without setoff, defense or counterclaim. Any amounts received after such time on any date may, in the discretion of the Administrative Agent, be deemed to have been received on the next succeeding Business Day for purposes of calculating interest thereon. Each such payment shall be made to the Administrative Agent at its offices at Eleven Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10010. The Administrative Agent shall promptly distribute to each Lender any payments received by the Administrative Agent on behalf of such Lender.

(b) Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, whenever any payment (including principal of or interest on any Borrowing or any Fees or other amounts) hereunder or under any other Loan Document shall become due, or otherwise would occur, on a day that is not a Business Day, such payment may be made on the next succeeding Business Day, and such extension of time shall in such case be included in the computation of interest or Fees, if applicable.

Section 2.19. Taxes.

(a) Payments Free of Taxes . Any and all payments by or on account of any obligation of any Loan Party under any Loan Document shall be made without deduction or withholding for any Taxes, except as required by applicable law. If any applicable law

 

37


(as determined in the good faith discretion of an applicable Withholding Agent) requires the deduction or withholding of any Tax from any such payment by a Withholding Agent, then the applicable Withholding Agent shall be entitled to make such deduction or withholding and shall timely pay the full amount deducted or withheld to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law and, if such Tax is an Indemnified Tax, then the sum payable by the applicable Loan Party shall be increased as necessary so that after such deduction or withholding has been made (including such deductions and withholdings applicable to additional sums payable under this Section 2.19) the applicable Recipient receives an amount equal to the sum it would have received had no such deduction or withholding been made.

(b) Payment of Other Taxes by the Loan Parties . The Loan Parties shall timely pay to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law, or at the option of the Administrative Agent timely reimburse it for the payment of, any Other Taxes.

(c) Indemnification by the Loan Parties . The Borrower shall, and shall cause the other Loan Parties to, jointly and severally indemnify each Recipient, within 10 days after demand therefor, for the full amount of any Indemnified Taxes (including Indemnified Taxes imposed or asserted on or attributable to amounts payable under this Section 2.19) payable or paid by such Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to such Recipient and any reasonable expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Indemnified Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority. A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to the Borrower by a Lender (with a copy to the Administrative Agent), or by the Administrative Agent on its own behalf or on behalf of a Lender, shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

(d) Indemnification by the Lenders . Each Lender shall severally indemnify the Administrative Agent, within 10 days after demand therefor, for (i) any Indemnified Taxes attributable to such Lender (but only to the extent that any Loan Party has not already indemnified the Administrative Agent for such Indemnified Taxes and without limiting the obligation of the Loan Parties to do so), (ii) any Taxes attributable to such Lender’s failure to comply with the provisions of Section 9.04(d) relating to the maintenance of a Participant Register and (iii) any Excluded Taxes attributable to such Lender, in each case, that are payable or paid by the Administrative Agent in connection with any Loan Document, and any reasonable expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority. A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to any Lender by the Administrative Agent shall be conclusive absent manifest error. Each Lender hereby authorizes the Administrative Agent to set off and apply any and all amounts at any time owing to such Lender under any Loan Document or otherwise payable by the Administrative Agent to the Lender from any other source against any amount due to the Administrative Agent under this paragraph (d).

(e) Evidence of Payments . As soon as practicable after any payment of Taxes by any Loan Party to a Governmental Authority pursuant to this Section 2.19, such Loan

 

38


Party shall deliver to the Administrative Agent the original or a certified copy of a receipt issued by such Governmental Authority evidencing such payment, a copy of the return reporting such payment or other evidence of such payment reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(f) Status of Lenders . (i) Any Lender that is entitled to an exemption from or reduction of withholding Tax with respect to payments made under any Loan Document shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, at the time or times reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, such properly completed and executed documentation reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will permit such payments to be made without withholding or at a reduced rate of withholding. In addition, any Lender, if reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, shall deliver such other documentation prescribed by applicable law or reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will enable the Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine whether or not such Lender is subject to backup withholding or information reporting requirements. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding two sentences, the completion, execution and submission of such documentation (other than such documentation set forth in Sections 2.19(f)(ii)(A), 2.19(f)(ii)(B) and (ii)(D) below) shall not be required if in the Lender’s reasonable judgment such completion, execution or submission would subject such Lender to any material unreimbursed cost or expense or would materially prejudice the legal or commercial position of such Lender.

(ii) Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, in the event that the Borrower is a U.S. Person,

(A) any Lender that is a U.S. Person shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent on or prior to the date on which such Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed originals of IRS Form W-9 certifying that such Lender is exempt from U.S. federal backup withholding tax;

(B) any Foreign Lender shall, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as shall be requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), whichever of the following is applicable:

(1) in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of an income tax treaty to which the United States is a party (x) with respect to payments of interest under any Loan Document, executed originals of IRS Form W-8BEN establishing an exemption from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax pursuant to the “interest” article of such tax treaty and (y) with

 

39


respect to any other applicable payments under any Loan Document, IRS Form W-8BEN establishing an exemption from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax pursuant to the “business profits” or “other income” article of such tax treaty;

(2) executed originals of IRS Form W-8ECI;

(3) in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of the exemption for portfolio interest under Section 881(c) of the Code, (x) a certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-1 to the effect that such Foreign Lender is not a “bank” within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, a “10 percent shareholder” of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(B) of the Code, or a “controlled foreign corporation” described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code (a “ U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate ”) and (y) executed originals of IRS Form W-8BEN; or

(4) to the extent a Foreign Lender is not the beneficial owner, executed originals of IRS Form W-8IMY, accompanied by IRS Form W-8ECI, IRS Form W-8BEN, a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-2 or Exhibit I-3, IRS Form W-9, and/or other certification documents from each beneficial owner, as applicable; provided that if the Foreign Lender is a partnership and one or more direct or indirect partners of such Foreign Lender are claiming the portfolio interest exemption, such Foreign Lender may provide a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-4 on behalf of each such direct and indirect partner;

(C) any Foreign Lender shall, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as shall be requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed originals of any other form prescribed by applicable law as a basis for claiming exemption from or a reduction in U.S. federal withholding Tax, duly completed, together with such supplementary documentation as may be prescribed by applicable law to permit the Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine the withholding or deduction required to be made; and

(D) if a payment made to a Lender under any Loan Document would be subject to U.S. federal withholding Tax imposed by FATCA if such Lender were to fail to comply with the applicable reporting requirements of FATCA (including those contained in Section 1471(b) or 1472(b) of the Code, as applicable), such Lender shall deliver to the

 

40


Borrower and the Administrative Agent at the time or times prescribed by law and at such time or times reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent such documentation prescribed by applicable law (including as prescribed by Section 1471(b)(3)(C)(i) of the Code) and such additional documentation reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as may be necessary for the Borrower and the Administrative Agent to comply with their obligations under FATCA and to determine that such Lender has complied with such Lender’s obligations under FATCA or to determine the amount to deduct and withhold from such payment. Solely for purposes of this clause (D), “ FATCA ” shall include any amendments made to FATCA after the date of this Agreement.

Each Lender agrees that if any form or certification it previously delivered expires or becomes obsolete or inaccurate in any respect, it shall update such form or certification or promptly notify the Borrower and the Administrative Agent in writing of its legal inability to do so.

(g) Treatment of Certain Refunds . If any party determines, in its sole discretion exercised in good faith, that it has received a refund of any Taxes as to which it has been indemnified pursuant to this Section 2.19 (including by the payment of additional amounts pursuant to this Section 2.19), it shall pay to the indemnifying party an amount equal to such refund (but only to the extent of indemnity payments made under this Section 2.19 with respect to the Taxes giving rise to such refund), net of all out-of-pocket expenses (including Taxes imposed on the receipt of such refund) of such indemnified party and without interest (other than any interest paid by the relevant Governmental Authority with respect to such refund). Such indemnifying party, upon the request of such indemnified party, shall repay to such indemnified party the amount paid over pursuant to this paragraph (g) (plus any penalties, interest or other charges imposed by the relevant Governmental Authority) in the event that such indemnified party is required to repay such refund to such Governmental Authority. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this paragraph (g), in no event will the indemnified party be required to pay any amount to an indemnifying party pursuant to this paragraph (g) the payment of which would place the indemnified party in a less favorable net after-Tax position than the indemnified party would have been in if the Tax subject to indemnification had not been deducted, withheld or otherwise imposed and the indemnification payments or additional amounts giving rise to such refund had never been paid. This paragraph shall not be construed to require any indemnified party to make available its Tax returns (or any other information relating to its Taxes that it deems confidential) to the indemnifying party or any other Person.

(h) Survival . Each party’s obligations under this Section 2.19 shall survive the resignation or replacement of the Administrative Agent or any assignment of rights by, or the replacement of, a Lender, the termination of the Commitments and the repayment, satisfaction or discharge of all obligations under any Loan Document.

 

41


Section 2.20. Assignment of Commitments under Certain Circumstances; Duty to Mitigate .  (a) In the event (i) any Lender delivers a certificate requesting compensation pursuant to Section 2.13, (ii) any Lender delivers a notice described in Section 2.14, (iii) the Borrower is required to pay any Indemnified Taxes or additional amounts with respect thereto to any Lender or any Governmental Authority on account of any Lender pursuant to Section 2.19, (iv) any Lender refuses to consent to any amendment, waiver or other modification of any Loan Document requested by the Borrower that requires the consent of a greater percentage of the Lenders than the Required Lenders or from all affected Lenders and such amendment, waiver or other modification is consented to by the Required Lenders or (v) any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then, in each case, the Borrower may, at its sole expense and effort (including with respect to the processing and recordation fee referred to in Section 9.04(b)), upon notice to such Lender and the Administrative Agent, require such Lender to transfer and assign, without recourse (in accordance with and subject to the restrictions contained in Section 9.04), all of its interests, rights and obligations under this Agreement to an Eligible Assignee that shall assume such assigned obligations (and, with respect to clause (iv) above, shall consent to such requested amendment, waiver or other modification); provided that (x) such assignment shall not conflict with any law, rule or regulation or order of any court or other Governmental Authority having jurisdiction, and (y) the Borrower or such assignee shall have paid to the affected Lender in immediately available funds an amount equal to the sum of the principal of and interest accrued to the date of such payment on the outstanding Loans of such Lender, plus all Fees and other amounts accrued for the account of such Lender hereunder with respect thereto (including any amounts under Sections 2.13, 2.15 and 2.19); provided further that if prior to any such transfer and assignment the circumstances or event that resulted in such Lender’s claim for compensation under Section 2.13, notice under Section 2.14 or the amounts paid pursuant to Section 2.19, as the case may be, cease to cause such Lender to suffer increased costs or reductions in amounts received or receivable or reduction in return on capital, cease to have the consequences specified in Section 2.14 or cease to result in amounts being payable under Section 2.19, as the case may be (including as a result of any action taken by such Lender pursuant to paragraph (b) below), or if such Lender shall waive its right to claim further compensation under Section 2.13 in respect of such circumstances or event, shall withdraw its notice under Section 2.14 or shall waive its right to further payments under Section 2.19 in respect of such circumstances or event or shall consent to the proposed amendment, waiver, consent or other modification, as the case may be, then such Lender shall not thereafter be required to make any such transfer and assignment hereunder. Each Lender hereby grants to the Administrative Agent an irrevocable power of attorney (which power is coupled with an interest) to execute and deliver, on behalf of such Lender, as assignor, any Assignment and Acceptance necessary to effectuate any assignment of such Lender’s interests hereunder in the circumstances contemplated by this Section 2.20(a).

(b) If (i) any Lender shall request compensation under Section 2.13, (ii) any Lender delivers a notice described in Section 2.14 or (iii) the Borrower is required to pay any Indemnified Taxes or additional amount with respect thereto to any Lender or any Governmental Authority on account of any Lender pursuant to Section 2.19, then such Lender shall use reasonable efforts (which shall not require such Lender to incur an

 

42


unreimbursed loss or unreimbursed cost or expense or otherwise take any action inconsistent with its internal policies or legal or regulatory restrictions or suffer any disadvantage or burden deemed by it to be significant) (x) except in the case of a requirement to pay Indemnified Taxes or additional amounts with respect thereto pursuant to Section 2.19, to file any certificate or document reasonably requested in writing by the Borrower or (y) to assign its rights (other than its existing rights to payments pursuant to Section 2.13 or Section 2.19) and delegate and transfer its obligations hereunder to another of its offices, branches or affiliates, if such filing or assignment would reduce its claims for compensation under Section 2.13 or Section 2.19 enable it to withdraw its notice pursuant to Section 2.14 or would reduce amounts payable pursuant to Section 2.19, as the case may be, in the future. The Borrower hereby agrees to pay all reasonable costs and expenses incurred by any Lender in connection with any such filing or assignment, delegation and transfer.

Section 2.21. Defaulting Lender .  (a)  Defaulting Lender Adjustments . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, if any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then, until such time as such Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, to the extent permitted by applicable law:

(i) Waivers and Amendments . Such Defaulting Lender’s right to approve or disapprove any amendment, waiver or consent with respect to this Agreement shall be restricted as set forth in the definition of Required Lenders.

(ii) Defaulting Lender Waterfall . Any payment of principal, interest, fees or other amounts received by the Administrative Agent for the account of such Defaulting Lender (whether voluntary or mandatory, at maturity, pursuant to Section 7.01 or otherwise) or received by the Administrative Agent from a Defaulting Lender pursuant to Section 9.06 shall be applied at such time or times as may be determined by the Administrative Agent as follows: first, to the payment of any amounts owing by such Defaulting Lender to the Administrative Agent hereunder, second, as the Borrower may request (so long as no Default or Event of Default exists), to the funding of any Loan in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has failed to fund its portion thereof as required by this Agreement, as determined by the Administrative Agent, third, if so determined by the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to be held in a deposit account and released pro rata in order to satisfy such Defaulting Lender’s potential future funding obligations with respect to Loans under this Agreement, fourth, to the payment of any amounts owing to the Lenders as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by any Lender against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement, fifth, so long as no Default or Event of Default exists, to the payment of any amounts owing to the Borrower as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by the Borrower against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement, and sixth, to such Defaulting Lender or as otherwise directed by a court of competent jurisdiction; provided that, if (x) such payment is a payment of the principal amount of any Loans in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has

 

 

43


not fully funded its appropriate share and (y) such Loans were made at a time when the conditions set forth in Section 4.01 were satisfied or waived, such payment shall be applied solely to pay the Loans of all Non-Defaulting Lenders on a pro rata basis prior to being applied to the payment of any Loans of such Defaulting Lender until such time as all Loans are held by the Lenders pro rata in accordance with the Commitments. Any payments, prepayments or other amounts paid or payable to a Defaulting Lender that are applied (or held) to pay amounts owed by a Defaulting Lender or to post cash collateral pursuant to this Section 2.21(a)(ii) shall be deemed paid to and redirected by such Defaulting Lender, and each Lender irrevocably consents hereto.

(iii) Certain Fees . No Defaulting Lender shall be entitled to receive any Commitment Fee for any period during which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender (and the Borrower shall not be required to pay any such Commitment Fee that otherwise would have been required to have been paid to that Defaulting Lender).

(b) Defaulting Lender Cure . If the Borrower and the Administrative Agent agree in writing that a Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, the Administrative Agent will so notify the parties hereto, whereupon as of the effective date specified in such notice and subject to any conditions set forth therein (which may include arrangements with respect to any cash collateral of such Lender), that Lender will, to the extent applicable, purchase at par that portion of outstanding Loans of the other Lenders or take such other actions as the Administrative Agent may determine to be necessary to cause the Loans to be held pro rata by the Lenders in accordance with their Credit Percentages, whereupon such Lender will cease to be a Defaulting Lender; provided that no adjustments will be made retroactively with respect to fees accrued or payments made by or on behalf of the Borrower while that Lender was a Defaulting Lender; provided further that except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed by the affected parties, no change hereunder from Defaulting Lender to Lender will constitute a waiver or release of any claim of any party hereunder arising from that Lender’s having been a Defaulting Lender.

Section 2.22. Incremental Facilities .  (a) The Borrower may, by written notice to the Administrative Agent from time to time, request Incremental Commitments in an amount such that, after giving effect thereto, the Aggregate Incremental Amount does not exceed the Incremental Cap. Such notice shall set forth (i) the amount of the Incremental Commitments being requested (which shall be in minimum increments of $1,000,000 and a minimum amount of $5,000,000) and (ii) the date on which such Incremental Commitments are requested to become effective (which shall not be less than ten (10) Business Days nor more than sixty (60) days after the date of such notice (or such longer or shorter periods as the Administrative Agent shall agree)). The Borrower may seek Incremental Commitments from existing Lenders (each of which shall be entitled to agree or decline to participate in its sole discretion) or, to the extent that existing Lenders do not agree to provide Incremental Commitments in the amount requested, any Additional Lender.

 

44


(b) It shall be a condition precedent to the effectiveness of any Incremental Commitment that (i) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing immediately prior to or immediately after giving effect to such Incremental Commitment, (ii) the representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date such Incremental Commitments become effective, (iii) immediately after the effectiveness of such Incremental Commitment, Liquidity shall equal or exceed $30,000,000 and (iv) the terms of such Incremental Commitments and the Incremental Loans thereunder shall comply with Section 2.22(c).

(c) Each Incremental Commitment (and the Incremental Loans thereunder) shall be implemented as an increase to the Total Commitments and shall be on terms identical to the existing Commitments (and the Loans thereunder).

(d) In connection with any Incremental Commitments, the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and each applicable Incremental Lender shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Additional Credit Extension Amendment and such other documentation as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably specify to evidence the Incremental Commitment of each Incremental Lender. The Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each Lender as to the effectiveness of each Additional Credit Extension Amendment. Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may, without consent of any other Lender, effect such amendments to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents as may be necessary or appropriate, in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to effect the provisions of this Section 2.22, and such other technical amendments as may be necessary or appropriate in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in connection with the establishment of such new Class or tranche, in each case on terms consistent with this Section 2.22. If, on the date of such increase, there are any Loans outstanding, such Loans shall upon the effectiveness of such Incremental Commitment be prepaid from the proceeds of additional Loans made hereunder so that the Loans are thereafter held by the Lenders according to their Credit Percentages (after giving effect to the increase in Commitments), which prepayment shall be accompanied by accrued interest on the Loans being prepaid and any costs incurred by any Lender in accordance with Section 2.15. The Administrative Agent and the Lenders hereby agree that the minimum borrowing, pro rata borrowing and pro rata payment requirements contained elsewhere in this Agreement shall not apply to the transactions effected pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence.

Section 2.23. Amend and Extend Transactions .  (a) The Borrower may, by written notice to the Administrative Agent from time to time, request (each, an “ Extension ”) of the Maturity Date of any Class of Loans and Commitments to the extended maturity date specified in such notice; provided that in no event shall more than three different maturity dates be applicable to Loans and Commitments hereunder. Such notice shall set forth (i) the amount of the applicable Class of Commitments to be extended (which shall be in minimum increments of $1,000,000 and a minimum amount of $5,000,000), (ii) the date on which such Extension is requested to become effective (which shall be not less than ten (10) Business Days nor more than sixty (60) days after

 

45


the date of such Extension (or such longer or shorter periods as the Administrative Agent shall agree)) and (iii) identifying the relevant Class of Commitments to which such Extension relates. Each Lender of the applicable Class shall be offered (an “ Extension Offer ”) an opportunity to participate in such Extension on a pro rata basis and on the same terms and conditions as each other Lender of such Class pursuant to procedures established by, or reasonably acceptable to, the Administrative Agent. If the aggregate principal amount of Commitments (calculated on the face amount thereof) in respect of which Lenders shall have accepted the relevant Extension Offer shall exceed the maximum aggregate principal amount of Commitments requested to be extended by the Borrower pursuant to such Extension Offer, then the Commitments of Lenders of the applicable Class shall be extended ratably up to such maximum amount based on the respective principal amounts (but not to exceed actual holdings of record) with respect to which such Lenders have accepted such Extension Offer.

(b) It shall be a condition precedent to the effectiveness of any Extension that (i) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing immediately prior to and immediately after giving effect to such Extension, (ii) the representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date of such Extension and (iii) the terms of such Extended Commitments shall comply with Section 2.23(c).

(c) The terms of each Extension shall be determined by the Borrower and the applicable extending Lender and set forth in an Additional Credit Extension Amendment; provided that (i) the final maturity date of any Extended Commitment shall be no earlier than the Maturity Date, (ii) there shall be no scheduled amortization of the Extended Commitments, (iii) the Extended Loans will rank pari passu (or more junior) in right of payment and with respect to security with the existing Loans and the borrower and guarantors of the Extended Commitments shall be the same as the borrower and guarantors with respect to the existing Loans, (iv) the interest rate margin, rate floors, fees, original issue discounts and premiums applicable to any Extended Commitment (and the Extended Loans thereunder) shall be determined by the Borrower and the applicable extending Lender and (v) to the extent the terms of the Extended Commitments are inconsistent with the terms set forth herein (except as set forth in clause (i) through (iv) above), such terms shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(d) In connection with any Extension, the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and each applicable extending Lender shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Additional Credit Extension Amendment and such other documentation as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably specify to evidence the Extension. The Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each Lender as to the effectiveness of each Extension. Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may, without the consent of any other Lender, effect such amendments to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents as may be necessary or appropriate, in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to implement the terms of any such Extension Offer, including any amendments necessary to establish Extended Commitments as a new Class or tranche of Commitments and such other technical amendments as may be

 

46


necessary or appropriate in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in connection with the establishment of such new Class or tranche (including to preserve the pro rata treatment of the extended and non-extended Classes or tranches), in each case on terms consistent with this Section 2.23).

ARTICLE 3

R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES

The Borrower represents and warrants to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and each of the Lenders on the Closing Date and on each other date contemplated by Article 4 that:

Section 3.01. Organization; Powers .  The Borrower and each of the Restricted Subsidiaries (a) is duly organized and/or established, as the case may be, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization or establishment, as applicable, (b) has all requisite power and authority to own its material property and assets and to carry on its business as now conducted and as proposed to be conducted, (c) is qualified to do business in, and is in good standing in, every jurisdiction where such qualification is required, except where the failure so to qualify could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, and (d) has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under each of the Loan Documents and each other agreement or instrument contemplated thereby to which it is or will be a party and, in the case of the Borrower, to borrow hereunder.

Section 3.02. Authorization .  The Transactions (a) have been duly authorized by all requisite corporate and, if required, stockholder action of the Borrower and each other Loan Party and (b) will not (i) violate (A) any provision of law, statute, rule or regulation, or of the certificate or articles of incorporation, partnership agreement or other constitutive documents or by-laws of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, (B) any order of any Governmental Authority or (C) any provision of any indenture, agreement or other instrument to which the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is a party or by which any of them or any of their property is or may be bound, (ii) be in conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (alone or with the giving of notice or lapse of time or both) a default under, or give rise to any right to accelerate or to require the prepayment, repurchase or redemption of any obligation under any such indenture, agreement or other instrument or (iii) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien upon or with respect to any property or assets now owned or hereafter acquired by the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary (other than any Lien created hereunder or under the Security Documents).

Section 3.03. Enforceability .  This Agreement has been duly executed and delivered by the Borrower and constitutes, and each other Loan Document when executed and delivered by each Loan Party thereto will constitute, a legal, valid and binding obligation of such Loan Party enforceable against such Loan Party in accordance with its terms, except as the enforceability thereof may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and subject to general principles of equity.

 

47


Section 3.04. Governmental Approvals .  No action, consent or approval of, registration or filing with or any other action by any Governmental Authority or third party is or will be required in connection with the Transactions, except for (a) the filing of Uniform Commercial Code financing statements and filings with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office, (b) recordation of the Mortgages and (c) such as have been made or obtained and are in full force and effect.

Section 3.05. Financial Statements .  The Borrower has, heretofore, delivered to the Lenders (a) the consolidated balance sheets and related statements of income, stockholder’s equity and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of and for (i) the fiscal years ended December 31, 2011 and January 31, 2013, audited by and accompanied by the opinion of Ernst & Young LLP, independent public accountants, and (ii) the fiscal quarter and the portion of the fiscal year ended April 30, 2013, unaudited and certified by its chief financial officer and (b) consolidated statements of income, stockholder’s equity and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as and for the period from January 1, 2012 through and including January 31, 2012, audited by and accompanied by the opinion of Ernst & Young LLP, independent public accountants. Such financial statements present fairly in all material respects the financial condition and results of operations and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of such dates and for such periods. Such balance sheets and the notes thereto disclose all material liabilities, direct or contingent, of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the dates thereof that are required to be disclosed on financial statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. Such financial statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis, subject, in the case of unaudited financial statements, to year-end audit adjustments and the absence of footnotes.

Section 3.06. No Material Adverse Effect .  No event or circumstance has occurred that has had, or could reasonably be expected to have, a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 3.07. Title to Properties; Possession under Leases .  (a) Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has good and marketable title to, valid leasehold interests in, or easements, licenses or other limited property interests in, all its properties that are necessary for the operation of their respective businesses as currently conducted and as proposed to be conducted, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens permitted by Section 6.02).

(b) Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has complied with all obligations under all material leases to which it is a party and all such leases are in full force and effect. To the Borrower’s knowledge, each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries enjoys peaceful and undisturbed possession under all such material leases.

(c) As of the Closing Date, (i) no real property or other assets material to the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries is affected by any fire or other casualty (whether or not covered by insurance) and (ii) the Borrower has not received any notice of, nor has

 

48


any knowledge of, any pending or contemplated condemnation proceeding (or any sale or disposition thereof in lieu of condemnation) affecting any real property or other assets material to the Borrower or its Restricted Subsidiaries.

Section 3.08. Subsidiaries .  Schedule 3.08 sets forth as of the Closing Date a list of all Subsidiaries and the percentage ownership interest of the Borrower therein. The shares of capital stock or other ownership interests so indicated on Schedule 3.08 are fully paid and nonassessable and are owned by the Borrower, directly or indirectly, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens created under the Security Documents and nonconsensual Liens permitted by Section 6.02).

Section 3.09. Litigation; Compliance with Laws .  (a) There are no actions, suits or proceedings at law or in equity or by or before any Governmental Authority now pending or, to the knowledge of the Borrower, threatened against or affecting the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or any business, property or rights of any such Person (i) that involve any Loan Document or the Transactions or (ii) that could reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries or any of their respective material properties or assets is in violation of, nor will the continued operation of their material properties and assets as currently conducted violate, any law, rule or regulation (including any zoning, building, Environmental Law, ordinance, code or approval or any building permits) or any restrictions of record or agreements affecting the Mortgaged Property, or is in default with respect to any judgment, writ, injunction, decree or order of any Governmental Authority, where, in each case, such violation or default has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(c) Certificates of occupancy and permits are in effect for each Mortgaged Property as currently constructed, and true and complete copies of such certificates of occupancy have been delivered to the Collateral Agent as mortgagee with respect to each Mortgaged Property.

Section 3.10. Agreements .  (a) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is a party to any agreement or instrument or subject to any corporate restriction that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is in default in any manner under any provision of any indenture or other agreement or instrument evidencing Indebtedness, or any other material agreement or instrument to which it is a party or by which it or any of its properties or assets are or may be bound, where such default has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

49


Section 3.11. Federal Reserve Regulations .  (a) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is engaged principally, or as one of its important activities, in the business of extending credit for the purpose of buying or carrying Margin Stock.

(b) No part of the proceeds of any Loan will be used, whether directly or indirectly, and whether immediately, incidentally or ultimately, for any purpose that entails a violation of, or that is inconsistent with, the provisions of the regulations of the Board, including Regulation T, U or X.

Section 3.12. Investment Company Act.  None of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is required to register as an “ investment company ,” as defined in the Investment Company Act.

Section 3.13. Use of Proceeds .  The Borrower will use the proceeds of the Loans (other than Incremental Loans) only for the purposes specified in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Section 3.14. Taxes .  Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has filed or caused to be filed all U.S. federal, state, local and foreign tax returns or materials required to have been filed by it and has paid or caused to be paid all Taxes due and payable by it and all assessments received by it, except Taxes that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and for which the Borrower or the applicable Restricted Subsidiary, as applicable, shall have set aside on its books adequate reserves.

Section 3.15. No Material Misstatements .  No information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule furnished by or on behalf of the Borrower to the Administrative Agent or any Lender, taken as a whole, in connection with the negotiation of any Loan Document or included therein or delivered pursuant thereto contained any material misstatement of fact or omitted, as of the date so furnished, to state any material fact necessary to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not materially misleading; provided that, to the extent any such information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule was based upon or constitutes a forecast or projection, the Borrower represents and warrants only that it acted in good faith and utilized reasonable assumptions (based upon accounting principles consistent with the historical audited financial statements of the Borrower) and due care in the preparation of such information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule.

Section 3.16. Employee Benefit Plans.

(a) With respect to each employee benefit plan as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA, the Borrower, the Restricted Subsidiaries and their respective ERISA Affiliates are in compliance with the applicable provisions of ERISA and the Code and the regulations and published interpretations thereunder, except where the failure to so comply could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. No ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, when taken together with all other such ERISA Events, has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result

 

50


in a Material Adverse Effect. There exists no Unfunded Pension Liability with respect to any Plans that could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) Each Foreign Pension Plan is in compliance with all requirements of law applicable thereto and the respective requirements of the governing documents for such plan, except where the failure to so comply could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. With respect to each Foreign Pension Plan, none of the Borrower, any Subsidiaries or any of their respective directors, officers, employees or agents has engaged in a transaction which would subject the Borrower or any Subsidiary, directly or indirectly, to a tax or civil penalty which has resulted or could reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect. With respect to each Foreign Pension Plan, reserves have been established in the financial statements furnished to Lenders in respect of any unfunded liabilities in accordance with applicable law and prudent business practice or, where required, in accordance with ordinary accounting practices in the jurisdiction in which such Foreign Pension Plan is maintained. The aggregate unfunded liabilities with respect to such Foreign Pension Plans has not resulted or could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect; the present value of the aggregate accumulated benefit liabilities of all such Foreign Pension Plans (based on those assumptions used to fund each such Foreign Pension Plan) did not, as of the last annual valuation date applicable thereto, exceed by more than $5,000,000 the fair market value of the assets of all such Foreign Pension Plans.

Section 3.17. Environmental Matters .  (a) Except with respect to any matters that, individually or in the aggregate, could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, none of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries (i) has failed to comply with any Environmental Law or to obtain, maintain or comply with any permit, license or other approval required under any Environmental Law, (ii) has become subject to any Environmental Liability, (iii) has received notice of any claim with respect to any Environmental Liability or (iv) knows of any basis for any Environmental Liability.

(b) Except with respect to any matters that, individually or in the aggregate, could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect: (i) each Mortgaged Property is and has been in compliance with all Environmental Law and has obtained, maintained and complied with any permit, license or other approval required under any Environmental Law, (ii) there are no Environmental Liabilities that have arisen or exist in connection with or in any way relating to any of the Mortgaged Property and (iii) none of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries knows of any basis for any Environmental Liability in connection with or in any way relating to any of the Mortgaged Property.

(c) There has been no environmental investigation, study, audit, test, review or other analysis conducted that is within the possession, custody or control of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries in relation to the current or prior business the Borrower or any Subsidiary or any property or facility now or previously owned, leased

 

51


or operated by the Borrower or any Subsidiary, including the Mortgaged Properties, which has not been delivered to the Lenders at least five days prior to the date hereof.

(d) For purposes of this Section, the terms “ Borrower ” and “ Restricted Subsidiary ” shall include any business or business entity which is, in whole or in part, a predecessor of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary.

Section 3.18. Insurance .  Schedule 3.18 sets forth a true, complete and correct description of all insurance maintained by the Borrower or by the Borrower for its Restricted Subsidiaries as of the Closing Date. As of such date, such insurance is in full force and effect and all premiums have been duly paid. The Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries have insurance in such amounts and covering such risks and liabilities as are in accordance with normal industry practice.

Section 3.19. Security Documents .  (a) The Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, upon execution and delivery thereof by the parties thereto, will create in favor of the Collateral Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties, a legal, valid and enforceable security interest in the Collateral and the proceeds thereof and (i) when the Collateral that is required to be delivered to the Collateral Agent pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement is so delivered, the Lien created under Guarantee and Collateral Agreement shall constitute a fully perfected first priority Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in such Collateral, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, to the extent a Lien on such Collateral may be perfected by possession, and (ii) when the financing statements in appropriate form are filed in the offices specified on Schedule 3.19(a), the Lien created under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement will constitute a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in the Collateral described in such statements (other than Intellectual Property), in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, in each case, to the extent a lien on such Collateral may be perfected by filing a financing statement, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02.

(b) Upon the recordation of the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (or a short-form security agreement in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Borrower and the Collateral Agent) with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office, together with the financing statements in appropriate form filed in the offices specified on Schedule 3.19(a), the Lien created under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement shall constitute a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in the Intellectual Property in which a security interest may be perfected by filing in the United States and its territories and possessions, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02 (it being understood that subsequent recordings in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office may be necessary to perfect a Lien on registered trademarks and patents, trademark and patent applications and registered copyrights acquired by the Loan Parties after the date hereof).

 

52


(c) Each Mortgage is effective to create in favor of the Collateral Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties, a legal, valid and enforceable first priority Lien on all of the applicable Loan Party’s right, title and interest in and to the Mortgaged Property thereunder and the proceeds thereof, and when such Mortgage is filed in the office notified in writing by the Borrower to the Collateral Agent, such Mortgage shall constitute a fully perfected first priority Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of such Loan Party in such Mortgaged Property and the proceeds thereof, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02.

Section 3.20. Location of Real Property and Leased Premises .  (a) Schedule 3.20(a) lists completely and correctly as of the Closing Date all real property owned by the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries and the addresses thereof.

(b) Schedule 3.20(b) lists completely and correctly as of the Closing Date each parcel of real property leased, subleased, licensed or sublicensed by the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, the address and the owner thereof, and the expiration date of the related lease, sublease, license or sublicense.

Section 3.21. Intellectual Property .  The Borrower and each Restricted Subsidiary owns or is licensed to use all of its Intellectual Property material to its respective business, and neither the use thereof nor the conduct of their respective businesses infringes, misappropriates or otherwise violates the Intellectual Property rights of any other Person, except for any such infringements, misappropriations and other violations that could not reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 3.22. Labor Matters .  As of the Closing Date, there are no strikes, lockouts or slowdowns against the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary pending or, to the knowledge of the Borrower, threatened. The hours worked by and payments made to employees of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries have not been in violation of the Fair Labor Standards Act or any other applicable Federal, state, local or foreign law dealing with such matters except where such violation could not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. All payments due from the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, or for which any claim may be made against the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, on account of wages and employee health and welfare insurance and other benefits, have been paid or accrued as a liability on the books of the Borrower or such Restricted Subsidiary in all material respects. The consummation of the Transactions will not give rise to any right of termination or right of renegotiation on the part of any union under any collective bargaining agreement to which the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is bound.

Section 3.23. Solvency .  Immediately after the consummation of the Transactions to occur on the Closing Date and after giving effect to each Credit Event, the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, are Solvent.

 

53


Section 3.24. Sanctioned Persons .  None of the Borrower or any Subsidiary nor, to the knowledge of the Borrower, any director, officer, agent, employee or Affiliate of the Borrower or any Subsidiary is currently subject to any U.S. sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Treasury Department (“ OFAC ”); and the Borrower will not directly or indirectly use the proceeds of the Loans or otherwise make available such proceeds to any Person, for the purpose of financing the activities of any Person currently subject to any U.S. sanctions administered by OFAC.

Section 3.25. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act .  Each of the Borrower, the Subsidiaries and their respective directors, officers, agents, employees, and any person acting for or on behalf of the Borrower or such Subsidiaries has complied with, and will comply with, the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, as amended from time to time, or any other applicable anti-bribery or anti-corruption law, and it and they have not made, offered, promised, or authorized, and will not make, offer, promise, or authorize, whether directly or indirectly, any payment, of anything of value to: (a) an executive, official, employee or agent of a governmental department, agency or instrumentality, (b) a director, officer, employee or agent of a wholly or partially government-owned or government-controlled company or business, (c) a political party or official thereof, or candidate for political office or (d) an executive, official, employee or agent of a public international organization (e.g., the International Monetary Fund or the World Bank) (“ Government Official ”); while knowing or having a reasonable belief that all or some portion will be used for the purpose of: (i) influencing any act, decision or failure to act by a Government Official in his or her official capacity, (ii) inducing a Government Official to use his or her influence with a government or instrumentality to affect any act or decision of such government or entity or (iii) securing an improper advantage; in order to obtain, retain, or direct business.

Section 3.26. Anti-Terrorism Law .  Neither the Borrower nor any of the Subsidiaries is in violation of any legal requirement relating to any laws with respect to terrorism or money laundering (“ Anti-Terrorism Laws ”), including Executive Order No. 13224 on Terrorist Financing effective September 24, 2001 (the “ Executive Order ”) and the USA PATRIOT Act.

ARTICLE 4

C ONDITIONS OF L ENDING

The obligations of the Lenders to make Loans hereunder are subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

Section 4.01. All Credit Events .  On the date of each Borrowing (other than a conversion or a continuation of a Borrowing) (each such event being called a “ Credit Event ”):

(a) The Administrative Agent shall have received a notice of such Borrowing as required by Section 2.03.

 

54


(b) The representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date of such Credit Event with the same effect as though made on and as of such date, except to the extent such representations and warranties expressly relate to an earlier date.

(c) At the time of and immediately after such Credit Event, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

(d) Immediately after such Credit Event, Liquidity shall equal or exceed $30,000,000.

(e) Immediately after such Credit Event and the use of proceeds thereof, the aggregate amount of cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries shall not exceed (i) $40,000,000 plus (ii) if the Borrower issues any Qualified Capital Stock on or after August 1, 2013 to investors in transactions not involving a public offering, the lesser of (x) 50% of the net cash proceeds to the Borrower of such issuances and (y) $15,000,000; provided that if after such Credit Event the amount of cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries exceeds such amount solely as a result of compliance with the minimum borrowing amounts set forth in Section 2.02(a), then the Borrower shall be deemed to be in compliance with this clause (e) notwithstanding such excess.

The delivery of each Borrowing Request shall be deemed to constitute a representation and warranty by the Borrower on the date of such Credit Event as to the matters specified in paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Section 4.01.

Section 4.02. First Credit Event . On the Closing Date:

(a) The Administrative Agent shall have received, on behalf of itself and the Lenders, a favorable written opinion of Perkins Coie LLP, counsel for the Borrower, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent (i) dated the Closing Date, (ii) addressed to the Administrative Agent and the Lenders and (iii) covering such other matters relating to the Loan Documents and the Transactions as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably request, and the Borrower hereby requests such counsel to deliver such opinions.

(b) The Administrative Agent shall have received (i) a copy of the certificate or articles of incorporation (or comparable organizational document), including all amendments thereto, of each Loan Party, certified as of a recent date by the Secretary of State (or comparable entity) of the jurisdiction of its organization, and a certificate as to the good standing (where such concept is applicable) of each Loan Party as of a recent date, from such Secretary of State (or comparable entity), (ii) a certificate of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of each Loan Party dated the Closing Date and certifying (A) that attached thereto is a true and complete copy of the by-laws of such Loan Party as in effect on the Closing Date and at all times since a date prior to the date of the resolutions described in clause (B) below, (B) that attached thereto is a true and complete copy of resolutions duly adopted by the Board of Directors (or comparable governing body) of

 

55


such Loan Party authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of the Loan Documents to which such Loan Party is a party and, in the case of the Borrower, the borrowings hereunder, and that such resolutions have not been modified, rescinded or amended and are in full force and effect, (C) that the certificate or articles of incorporation (or comparable organizational document) of such Loan Party have not been amended since the date of the last amendment thereto shown on the certificate of good standing furnished pursuant to clause (i) above and (D) as to the incumbency and specimen signature of each officer executing any Loan Document or any other document delivered in connection herewith on behalf of such Loan Party; and (iii) a certificate of another officer as to the incumbency and specimen signature of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary executing the certificate pursuant to clause (ii) above.

(c) The Administrative Agent shall have received a certificate, dated the Closing Date and signed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower, confirming compliance with the conditions precedent set forth in Section 4.01 and this Section 4.02.

(d) The Administrative Agent shall have received all Fees, all fees payable under the Engagement Letter and all other amounts due and payable on or prior to the Closing Date, including, to the extent invoiced, reimbursement or payment of all out-of-pocket expenses required to be reimbursed or paid by the Borrower hereunder or under any other Loan Document.

(e) The Administrative Agent shall have received duly executed counterparts of this Agreement from each party hereto.

(f) (i) the Administrative Agent shall have received duly executed counterparts of each Security Document from each party thereto and (ii) the Security Documents shall be in full force and effect on the Closing Date and the Collateral Agent on behalf of the Secured Parties shall have a perfected security interest in the Collateral of the type and priority described in each Security Document.

(g) The Collateral Agent shall have received a Perfection Certificate with respect to the Loan Parties dated the Closing Date and duly executed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower, and shall have received the results of a search of the Uniform Commercial Code filings (or equivalent filings) made with respect to the Loan Parties in the states (or other jurisdictions) of formation of such Persons, in each case as indicated on such Perfection Certificate, together with copies of the financing statements (or similar documents) disclosed by such search, and accompanied by evidence satisfactory to the Collateral Agent that the Liens indicated in any such financing statement (or similar document) would be permitted under Section 6.02 or have been or will be contemporaneously released or terminated.

(h) The Administrative Agent shall have received a copy of, or a certificate as to coverage under, the insurance policies required by Section 5.02 and the applicable provisions of the Security Documents, each of which shall be endorsed or otherwise amended to include a customary lender’s loss payable endorsement and to name the

 

56


Collateral Agent as additional insured, in form and substance satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(i) All principal, premium, if any, interest, fees and other amounts due or outstanding under the Existing Debt shall have been or will be, substantially simultaneously with the Closing Date, paid in full, the commitments thereunder terminated and all guarantees and security in support thereof discharged and released and the Administrative Agent shall have received reasonably satisfactory evidence thereof. Immediately after giving effect to the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated hereby, the Borrower and the Subsidiaries shall have outstanding no Indebtedness or preferred stock other than (i) Indebtedness outstanding under this Agreement and (ii) Indebtedness set forth on Schedule 6.01(a).

(j) The Lenders shall have received the financial statements and opinion referred to in Section 3.05, which financial statements shall not be in a form materially inconsistent with the financial statements or forecasts previously provided to the Administrative Agent.

(k) The Administrative Agent shall have received a certificate from the chief financial officer of the Borrower certifying that the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, after giving effect to the Transactions to occur on the Closing Date, are Solvent.

(l) All requisite Governmental Authorities and third parties shall have approved or consented to the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated hereby to the extent required, all applicable appeal periods shall have expired and there shall not be any pending or threatened litigation, governmental, administrative or judicial action that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to restrain, prevent or impose burdensome conditions on the Transactions or the other transactions contemplated hereby.

(m) The Lenders shall have received, at least three (3) Business Days prior to the Closing Date, to the extent requested, all documentation and other information required by regulatory authorities under applicable “ know your customer ” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including the USA PATRIOT Act.

ARTICLE 5

A FFIRMATIVE C OVENANTS

The Borrower covenants and agrees with each Lender that so long as this Agreement shall remain in effect and until the Commitments have been terminated and the principal of and interest on each Loan, all Fees and all other expenses or amounts payable under any Loan Document shall have been paid in full, unless the Required Lenders shall otherwise consent in writing, the Borrower will, and will cause each of the Restricted Subsidiaries to:

 

57


Section 5.01. Existence; Compliance with Laws; Businesses and Properties .  (a) Do or cause to be done all things necessary to preserve, renew and keep in full force and effect its legal existence, except as otherwise expressly permitted under Section 6.05.

(b) Do or cause to be done all things necessary to obtain, preserve, renew, extend and keep in full force and effect the rights, licenses, permits, franchises, authorizations and Intellectual Property material to the conduct of its business; maintain and operate such business in substantially the manner in which it is presently conducted and operated and comply in all material respects with all applicable laws, rules, regulations and decrees and orders of any Governmental Authority, whether now in effect or hereafter enacted, in each case, except to the extent any such right and/or Intellectual Property is no longer used or useful in the conduct of the Borrower’s business.

(c) (i) Maintain, preserve, and protect all of its material properties and equipment necessary in the operation of its business in good working order, repair and condition (ordinary wear and tear, casualty or condemnation excepted), (ii) make all necessary renewals, repairs, replacements, modifications, improvements, upgrades, extensions and additions thereof or thereto in accordance with prudent industry practice in order that the business carried on in connection therewith may be properly conducted at all times and (iii) keep all material leases to which it is a party in full force and effect, in each case, except to the extent any such equipment is no longer used or useful in the conduct of the Borrower’s business.

Section 5.02. Insurance .  (a) Keep its insurable properties adequately insured at all times by financially sound and reputable insurers; maintain such other insurance, to such extent and against such risks, including fire and other risks insured against by extended coverage, as is customary with companies in the same or similar businesses operating in the same or similar locations, including public liability insurance against claims for personal injury or death or property damage occurring upon, in, about or in connection with the use of any properties owned, occupied or controlled by it and maintain such other insurance as may be required by law.

(b) Cause all such policies covering any Collateral to be endorsed or otherwise amended to include a customary lender’s loss payable endorsement, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, which endorsement shall provide that, from and after the Closing Date, if the insurance carrier shall have received written notice from the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent of the occurrence of an Event of Default, the insurance carrier shall pay all proceeds otherwise payable to the Borrower or the Loan Parties under such policies directly to the Collateral Agent; cause all such policies to provide that neither the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent nor any other party shall be a coinsurer thereunder and to contain a “ Replacement Cost Endorsement ,” without any deduction for depreciation, and such other provisions as the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent may reasonably require from time to time to protect their interests; deliver original or certified copies of all such policies to the Collateral Agent; cause each such policy to provide that it shall not be canceled, modified or not renewed (i) by reason of nonpayment of premium upon not less than 10 days’ prior written notice thereof by the

 

58


insurer to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent (giving the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent the right to cure defaults in the payment of premiums) or (ii) for any other reason upon not less than 30 days’ prior written notice thereof by the insurer to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent and deliver to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, prior to the cancellation, modification or nonrenewal of any such policy of insurance, a copy of a renewal or replacement policy (or other evidence of renewal of a policy previously delivered to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent) together with evidence satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent of payment of the premium therefor.

(c) If at any time the area in which the Premises (as defined in the Mortgages) are located is designated (i) a “ flood hazard area ” in any Flood Insurance Rate Map published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (or any successor agency), obtain flood insurance, if so requested by any Lender, in such total amount as the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders may from time to time require and otherwise comply with the NFIP as set forth in the Flood Laws or (ii) a “ Zone 1 ” area, obtain earthquake insurance in such total amount as the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders may from time to time require. Following the Closing Date, the Borrower shall deliver to the Collateral Agent annual renewals of the flood insurance policy or annual renewals of a force-placed flood insurance policy for each Mortgaged Property if flood insurance for such Mortgaged Property was requested by any Lender. In connection with any amendment to this Agreement pursuant to which any increase, extension, or renewal of Loans is contemplated, the Borrower shall, if requested by any Lender, cause to be delivered to the Collateral Agent for any Mortgaged Property, a Flood Determination Form, Borrower Notice and Evidence of Flood Insurance, as applicable.

(d) With respect to any Mortgaged Property, carry and maintain comprehensive general liability insurance including the “ broad form CGL endorsement ” and coverage on an occurrence basis against claims made for personal injury (including bodily injury, death and property damage) and umbrella liability insurance against any and all claims, in no event for a combined single limit of less than that which is customary for companies in the same or similar businesses operating in the same or similar locations, naming the Collateral Agent as an additional insured, on forms satisfactory to the Collateral Agent.

(e) Notify the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent promptly whenever any separate insurance concurrent in form or contributing in the event of loss with that required to be maintained under this Section 5.02 is taken out by any Loan Party and promptly deliver to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent a duplicate original copy of such policy or policies.

Section 5.03. Obligations and Taxes.  Pay its Indebtedness and other obligations promptly and in accordance with their terms and pay and discharge promptly when due all Taxes, before the same shall become delinquent or in default, as well as all lawful claims for labor, materials and supplies or otherwise that, if unpaid, might give rise to a Lien upon such properties or any part thereof; provided that such payment and discharge

 

59


shall not be required with respect to (a) any amounts not exceeding $50,000; and (b) any amounts the validity or amount of which shall be contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings, the Borrower shall have set aside on its books adequate reserves with respect thereto in accordance with GAAP, such contest operates to suspend collection of the contested obligation, tax, assessment or charge and enforcement of a Lien and, in the case of a Mortgaged Property, there is no material risk of forfeiture of such property.

Section 5.04. Financial Statements, Reports, etc .  In the case of the Borrower, furnish to the Administrative Agent, which shall furnish to each Lender (including each Public Lender):

(a) within 90 days (or, in the case of the fiscal year ending January 31, 2014, as soon as available but in no event more than 120 days) after the end of each fiscal year, its consolidated balance sheet and related statements of income, stockholders’ equity and cash flows showing the financial condition of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the close of such fiscal year and the results of its operations and the operations of such Subsidiaries during such year, together with comparative figures for the immediately preceding fiscal year, all audited by Ernst & Young LLP or other independent public accountants of recognized national standing and accompanied by an opinion of such accountants (which opinion shall be without a “going concern” or like qualification or exception and without any qualification or exception as to the scope of such audit) to the effect that such consolidated financial statements fairly present the financial condition and results of operations of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP consistently applied, together with a customary “management discussion and analysis” provision;

(b) within 45 days after the end of each of the first three fiscal quarters of each fiscal year, its consolidated balance sheet and related statements of income, stockholders’ equity and cash flows showing the financial condition of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the close of such fiscal quarter and the results of its operations and the operations of such Subsidiaries during such fiscal quarter and the then elapsed portion of the fiscal year, and comparative figures for the same periods in the immediately preceding fiscal year, all certified by one of its Financial Officers as fairly presenting the financial condition and results of operations of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP consistently applied, subject to normal year-end audit adjustments, together with a customary “management discussion and analysis” provision;

(c) concurrently with any delivery of financial statements under paragraph (a) or (b) above, a certificate of a Financial Officer in the form of Exhibit E (i) certifying that no Event of Default or Default has occurred or, if such an Event of Default or Default has occurred, specifying the nature and extent thereof and any corrective action taken or proposed to be taken with respect thereto and (ii) attaching an updated Schedule 1.01(c) or certifying that no changes to such schedule are necessary;

(d) within 30 days after the beginning of each fiscal year of the Borrower, a detailed consolidated budget for such fiscal year (including a projected consolidated

 

60


balance sheet and related statements of projected operations and cash flows as of the end of and for such fiscal year and setting forth the assumptions used for purposes of preparing such budget) and, promptly when available, any significant revisions of such budget;

(e) promptly after the same become publicly available, copies of all periodic and other reports, proxy statements and other materials filed by the Borrower or any Subsidiary with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or any Governmental Authority succeeding to any or all of the functions of said Commission, or with any national securities exchange, or distributed to its shareholders, as the case may be;

(f) promptly after the receipt thereof by the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries, a copy of any “management letter” received by any such Person from its certified public accountants and the management’s response thereto;

(g) promptly after the request by any Lender, all documentation and other information that such Lender reasonably requests in order to comply with its ongoing obligations under applicable “know your customer” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including the USA PATRIOT Act; and

(h) promptly, from time to time, such other information regarding the operations, business affairs and financial condition of the Borrower or any Subsidiary, or compliance with the terms of any Loan Document, as the Administrative Agent or any Lender may reasonably request.

Section 5.05. Litigation and Other Notices .  Furnish to the Administrative Agent and each Lender prompt written notice of the following:

(a) any Event of Default or Default, specifying the nature and extent thereof and the corrective action (if any) taken or proposed to be taken with respect thereto;

(b) the filing or commencement of, or any written threat or notice of intention of any Person to file or commence, any action, suit or proceeding, whether at law or in equity or by or before any Governmental Authority, against the Borrower or any Affiliate thereof that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

(c) any development that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 5.06. Information Regarding Collateral .  (a) Furnish to the Administrative Agent prompt written notice of any change (i) in the corporate name of any Loan Party, (ii) in the jurisdiction of organization or formation of any Loan Party, (iii) in any Loan Party’s identity or corporate structure or (iv) in any Loan Party’s Federal Taxpayer Identification Number. The Borrower agrees not to effect or permit any change referred to in the preceding sentence unless all filings have been made under the Uniform Commercial Code or otherwise that are required in order for the Collateral Agent to continue at all times following such change to have a valid, legal and perfected security

 

61


interest in all the Collateral. The Borrower also agrees promptly to notify the Administrative Agent if any material portion of the Collateral is damaged or destroyed.

(b) In the case of the Borrower, each year, at the time of delivery of the annual financial statements with respect to the preceding fiscal year pursuant to Section 5.04(a), deliver to the Administrative Agent a certificate of a Financial Officer setting forth the information required pursuant to Section 2 of the Perfection Certificate or confirming that there has been no change in such information since the date of the Perfection Certificate delivered on the Closing Date or the date of the most recent certificate delivered pursuant to this Section 5.06

Section 5.07. Maintaining Records; Access to Properties and Inspections .  Keep proper books of record and account in which full, true and correct entries in conformity with GAAP and all requirements of law are made of all dealings and transactions in relation to its business and activities. Each Loan Party will, and will cause each of its subsidiaries to, permit any representatives designated by the Administrative Agent or any Lender to visit and inspect the financial records and the properties of such Person at such reasonable times as reasonably requested and to make extracts from and copies of such financial records, and permit any representatives designated by the Administrative Agent or any Lender to discuss the affairs, finances and condition of such Person with the officers thereof and independent accountants therefor; provided that, (x) other than during the continuance of an Event of Default, the Administrative Agent and the Lenders, collectively, shall not exercise their rights under this sentence more often than once during any fiscal year and (y) no Lender shall exercise its rights under this sentence without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent.

Section 5.08. Use of Proceeds .  Use the proceeds of the Loans only for the purposes specified in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Section 5.09. Employee Benefits .  (a) Comply in all material respects with the provisions of ERISA and the Code applicable to employee benefit plans as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA and the laws applicable to any Foreign Pension Plan, (b) furnish to the Administrative Agent as soon as possible after, and in any event within ten days after any responsible officer of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate knows or has reason to know that, any ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, alone or together with any other ERISA Event that has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in liability of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate in an aggregate amount exceeding $5,000,000, a statement of a Financial Officer of the Borrower setting forth details as to such ERISA Event and the action, if any, that the Borrower proposes to take with respect thereto and (c) promptly and in any event within 30 days after the filing thereof with the United States Department of Labor, furnish to the Administrative Agent copies of each Schedule SB (Actuarial Information) to the Annual Report (Form 5500 Series) with respect to each Plan.

Section 5.10. Compliance with Environmental Laws .  Except where the failure to do so could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, comply,

 

62


and cause all lessees and any other Person leasing or occupying its properties to comply, with all applicable Environmental Laws; obtain and renew all material environmental permits necessary for its operations and properties; and conduct any remedial action in accordance with Environmental Laws; provided that none of the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall be required to undertake any remedial action to the extent that its obligation to do so is being contested by the Borrower or any Subsidiary in good faith and by proper proceedings, appropriate reserves are being maintained with respect to such circumstances in accordance with GAAP and any such delay or inaction with respect to such remedial action does not violate any Environmental Law.

Section 5.11. Preparation of Environmental Reports .  If a Default caused by reason of a breach of Section 3.17 or Section 5.10 shall have occurred and be continuing for more than 20 days without the Borrower or any Subsidiary commencing activities reasonably likely to cure such Default, at the written request of the Required Lenders through the Administrative Agent, provide to the Lenders within 45 days after such request, at the expense of the Loan Parties, an environmental site assessment report regarding the matters which are the subject of such Default prepared by an environmental consulting firm reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent and the estimated cost of any compliance, remedial action or other corrective action in connection with such Default.

Section 5.12. Further Assurances .  (a) Execute any and all further documents, financing statements, agreements and instruments, and take all further action (including filing Uniform Commercial Code and other financing statements, mortgages and deeds of trust) that may be required under applicable law, or that the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent may reasonably request, in order to effectuate the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents and in order to grant, preserve, protect and perfect the validity and first priority of the security interests created or intended to be created by the Security Documents.

(b) If, following the Closing Date, any wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary is acquired or organized (other than any Immaterial Subsidiary), or any Immaterial Subsidiary that is a wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary ceases to be an Immaterial Subsidiary, the Borrower shall promptly (and in any event within 30 days (or such longer period as the Collateral Agent shall agree) of such event) (i) notify the Collateral Agent thereof, (ii) cause such Subsidiary to become a Loan Party by executing the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (or a supplement thereto in the form specified therein), (iii) deliver to the Collateral Agent all certificates or other instruments representing Equity Interests of such Subsidiary, together with stock powers or other instruments of transfer with respect thereto endorsed in blank to the extent required by the Security Documents, (iv) cause all documents and instruments, including Uniform Commercial Code financing statements and Mortgages (if required under Section 5.12(c)), required by law or reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to be filed, registered or recorded to create the Liens intended to be created by the Security Documents and perfect or record such Liens to the extent, and with the priority, required by the Security Documents, to be filed, registered or recorded or delivered to the Collateral Agent for filing, registration or recording, (v) cause each Loan Party to take all other action required by law, under the

 

63


Security Documents or reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to perfect, register and/or record the Liens granted by it thereunder and (vi) cause to be delivered to the Lenders all such instruments and documents (including legal opinions, title insurance policies (if required under Section 5.12(c)) and lien searches) as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request to evidence compliance with this Section 5.12(b).

(c) If any fee owned real property located in the United States having a value in excess of $1,000,000 is acquired by any Loan Party after the Closing Date, the Borrower will notify the Collateral Agent thereof, and, if requested by the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders, the Borrower will, no later than 90 days after such acquisition, cause such assets to be subjected to a Lien securing the Obligations and will take such actions as shall be reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to grant and perfect such Liens, including the satisfaction of the Real Estate Collateral Requirements, all at the expense of the Borrower.

ARTICLE 6

N EGATIVE C OVENANTS

The Borrower covenants and agrees with each Lender that until the Commitments have been terminated and the principal of and interest on each Loan, all Fees and all other expenses or amounts payable under any Loan Document have been paid in full, unless the Required Lenders shall otherwise consent in writing, the Borrower will not, nor will it cause or permit any of the Restricted Subsidiaries to:

Section 6.01. Indebtedness .  Incur, create, assume or permit to exist any Indebtedness, except:

(a) Indebtedness existing on the date hereof and set forth on Schedule 6.01(a) and any Permitted Refinancing thereof;

(b) Indebtedness created hereunder and under the other Loan Documents;

(c) intercompany Indebtedness of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries to the extent permitted by Section 6.04; provided that any such Indebtedness that is owed by a Loan Party to a Subsidiary that is not a Loan Party is subordinated to the Obligations pursuant to an Affiliate Subordination Agreement;

(d) (i) Indebtedness of the Borrower or any Subsidiary incurred to finance the acquisition, construction or improvement of any fixed or capital assets; provided that (A) such Indebtedness is incurred prior to or within 120 days after such acquisition or the completion of such construction or improvement and (B) the aggregate principal amount of Indebtedness permitted by this Section 6.01(d), when combined with the aggregate principal amount of all Capital Lease Obligations incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(e), shall not exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding and (ii) any Permitted Refinancing of any such Indebtedness;

 

64


(e) Capital Lease Obligations in an aggregate principal amount, when combined with the aggregate principal amount of all Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(d), not to exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(f) Indebtedness under performance bonds or similar obligations, or with respect to workers’ compensation claims, in each case incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(g) Indebtedness incurred by Foreign Subsidiaries in an aggregate principal amount not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(h) Indebtedness of any Person that becomes a Subsidiary after the date hereof; provided that (i) such Indebtedness exists at the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary and is not created in contemplation of or in connection with such Person becoming a Subsidiary, (ii) immediately before and after such Person becomes a Subsidiary, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing and (iii) the aggregate principal amount of Indebtedness permitted by this Section 6.01(h) shall not exceed $2,500,000 at any time outstanding;

(i) if (i) at the time of the incurrence thereof and immediately after giving effect thereto no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (ii) immediately after giving effect to the incurrence thereof the Borrower is in compliance with the covenant contained in Section 6.11 and (iii) the proceeds thereof are used for working capital purposes or to finance, in whole or in part, a Permitted Acquisition or other Investment permitted under Section 6.04, other unsecured Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantors that is subordinated to the Obligations on terms reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent in an aggregate principal amount not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(j) Guarantees in respect of Indebtedness permitted under this Section 6.01; provided that (i) no Loan Party shall Guarantee the Indebtedness of any Person that is not a Loan Party unless such Guarantee is permitted by Section 6.04 and (ii) any such Guarantee permitted under this clause (j) of any Indebtedness that is subordinated to the Obligations shall be expressly subordinated to the Obligations on terms not less favorable to the Lenders than the subordination terms of such other Indebtedness;

(k) Indebtedness in respect of Secured Hedging Agreements incurred in the ordinary course of business and not for speculative purposes;

(l) Indebtedness incurred to finance deferred insurance premiums in the ordinary course of business;

(m) Indebtedness in respect of letters of credit or bankers’ acceptances supporting facility leases in an aggregate principal or face amount not exceeding $7,500,000 at any time outstanding; and

 

65


(n) Indebtedness in respect of overdraft or similar facilities incurred in the ordinary course of business in connection with deposit accounts; provided that such Indebtedness is extinguished promptly following its incurrence.

Section 6.02. Liens .  Create, incur, assume or permit to exist any Lien on any property or assets of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary (including Equity Interests or other securities of any Person, including any Subsidiary) now owned or hereafter acquired by it or on any income or revenues or rights in respect of any thereof, except:

(a) Liens on property or assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries existing on the date hereof and set forth on Schedule 6.02(a); provided that such Liens shall secure only those obligations which they secure on the date hereof and any Permitted Refinancing thereof;

(b) any Lien created under the Loan Documents;

(c) any Lien existing on any property or asset prior to the acquisition thereof by the Borrower or any Subsidiary or existing on any property or assets of any Person that becomes a Subsidiary after the date hereof prior to the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary, as the case may be; provided that (i) such Lien is not created in contemplation of or in connection with such acquisition or such Person becoming a Subsidiary, (ii) such Lien does not apply to any other property or assets of the Borrower or any Subsidiary and (iii) such Lien secures only (x) those obligations which it secures on the date of such acquisition or the date such Person becomes a Subsidiary, as the case may be and (y) any Permitted Refinancing of such obligations;

(d) Liens for Taxes not yet due or which are being contested in compliance with Section 5.03;

(e) carriers’, warehousemen’s, mechanics’, materialmen’s, repairmen’s or other like Liens arising in the ordinary course of business and securing obligations that are not due and payable or which are being contested in compliance with Section 5.03;

(f) pledges and deposits made in the ordinary course of business in compliance with workmen’s compensation, unemployment insurance and other social security laws or regulations;

(g) deposits to secure the performance of bids, trade contracts (other than for Indebtedness), leases (other than Capital Lease Obligations), statutory obligations, surety and appeal bonds, performance bonds and other obligations of a like nature incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(h) zoning restrictions, easements, rights-of-way, restrictions on use of real property and other similar encumbrances incurred in the ordinary course of business which, in the aggregate, are not substantial in amount and do not materially detract from the value of the property subject thereto or interfere with the ordinary conduct of the business of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries;

 

66


(i) security interests in respect of Indebtedness permitted by Section 6.01(d) and 6.01(e); provided that (i) such security interests are created, and the Indebtedness secured thereby is incurred, within 120 days after such acquisition (or construction), (ii) the Indebtedness secured thereby does not exceed the lesser of the cost or the fair market value of such fixed or capital assets or improvements at the time of such acquisition (or construction) and (iii) such security interests do not apply to any other property or assets of the Borrower or any Subsidiary;

(j) judgment Liens securing judgments not constituting an Event of Default under Section 7.01(i);

(k) Liens on assets of Foreign Subsidiaries; provided that (i) such Liens do not extend to, or encumber, assets that constitute Collateral or the Equity Interests of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries and (ii) such Liens extending to the assets of any Foreign Subsidiary secure only Indebtedness incurred by such Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to Section 6.01(g);

(l) to the extent constituting a Lien, any interest or title of a lessor under any operating lease entered into by the Borrower or any Subsidiary;

(m) Liens securing Indebtedness incurred to finance deferred insurance premiums permitted under Section 6.01(l); provided that such Liens are limited to unearned premiums and dividends or other payments under the applicable insurance policies;

(n) Liens arising in the ordinary course of business by virtue of any statutory, common law or customary contractual provision relating to banker’s liens, rights of set-off or similar rights and remedies as to deposit accounts, securities accounts or other funds maintained with a depository institution or securities intermediaries;

(o) Liens consisting of restricted cash balances not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time to secure merchant credit card processing and similar services in the ordinary course of business;

(p) Liens on cash deposits in respect of rental agreements in the ordinary course of business;

(q) Liens on cash pledged to secure obligations in respect of letters of credit or banker’s acceptances permitted under Section 6.01(m); and

(r) other Liens securing liabilities in an aggregate amount not to exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding.

Section 6.03. Sale and Lease-Back Transactions .  Enter into any arrangement, directly or indirectly, with any Person whereby it shall sell or transfer any property, real or personal, used or useful in its business, whether now owned or hereafter acquired, and thereafter rent or lease such property or other property which it intends to use for substantially the same purpose or purposes as the property being sold or transferred

 

67


unless (a) the sale or transfer of such property is permitted by Section 6.06 and (b) any Capital Lease Obligations or Liens arising in connection therewith are permitted by Sections 6.01 and 6.02, as the case may be.

Section 6.04. Investments, Loans and Advances .  Purchase, hold or acquire any Investment in a Person except:

(a) (i) Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries existing on the date hereof in the Equity Interests of the Subsidiaries and (ii) additional Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries in the Equity Interests of the Subsidiaries; provided that (A) any such Investment in the form of Equity Interests held by a Loan Party shall be pledged pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (subject to any limitations applicable to voting stock of a Foreign Subsidiary referred to therein), (B) no part of any such Investment by a Loan Party to a non-Loan Party shall take the form of a contribution of Intellectual Property (other than any contribution or transfer to a Foreign Subsidiary of Intellectual Property that is necessary to, or useful in, the business of such Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to the Management and Services Agreement or the Cost Sharing Agreement) and (C) the aggregate amount of Investments by the Loan Parties in Subsidiaries that are not Loan Parties (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such Investments) shall not exceed $50,000,000;

(b) Permitted Investments;

(c) loans or advances made by the Borrower to any Subsidiary and made by the Borrower or any Subsidiary to the Borrower or any other Subsidiary; provided that (i) any such loans and advances made by a Loan Party shall be evidenced by a promissory note pledged to the Collateral Agent for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, (ii) such loans and advances shall be unsecured and, to the extent owed by a Loan Party to a Person that is not a Loan Party, subordinated to the Obligations pursuant to an Affiliate Subordination Agreement and (iii) the amount of such loans and advances made by Loan Parties to Subsidiaries that are not Loan Parties shall be subject to the limitation set forth in clause (a) above;

(d) Investments received in connection with the bankruptcy or reorganization of, or settlement of delinquent accounts and disputes with, customers and suppliers, in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(e) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may make loans and advances in the ordinary course of business in accordance with their usual practice to their respective employees so long as the aggregate principal amount thereof at any time outstanding (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such loans and advances) shall not exceed $2,500,000;

(f) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may enter into Secured Hedging Agreements that are entered into the ordinary course of business and not for speculative purposes;

 

68


(g) the Borrower or any Subsidiary may acquire all or substantially all the assets of a Person or line of business of such Person or not less than 100% of the Equity Interests of a Person whether by merger or otherwise (referred to herein as the “ Acquired Entity ”); provided that (i) such acquisition was not preceded by an unsolicited tender offer for such Equity Interests by, or proxy contest initiated by, the Borrower or any Subsidiary; (ii) the Acquired Entity shall be in a similar or ancillary line of business as that of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries as conducted during the current and most recent calendar year, (iii) at the time of such transaction (A) both before and after giving effect thereto, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (B) after giving effect to such acquisition, the Borrower shall be in compliance with the covenant contained in Section 6.11, (C) the Borrower shall have delivered a certificate of a Financial Officer, certifying as to the foregoing, in form and substance satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and (D) the Borrower shall comply, and shall cause the Acquired Entity to comply, with the applicable provisions of Section 5.12 and the Security Documents and (iv) the aggregate amount of consideration expended to acquire Acquired Entities that do not become Loan Parties shall not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate (any acquisition of an Acquired Entity meeting all the criteria of this Section 6.04(g) being referred to herein as a “ Permitted Acquisition ”);

(h) Investments constituting non-cash consideration received by the Borrower or any Subsidiary in respect of any Dispositions permitted under Section 6.06;

(i) Investments to the extent that payment for such Investments is made solely with Qualified Capital Stock of the Borrower in a transaction permitted under Section 6.05; and

(j) in addition to Investments permitted by paragraphs (a) through (i) above, additional Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries so long as the aggregate amount invested, loaned or advanced pursuant to this paragraph (j) (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such Investments) does not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate.

Section 6.05. Mergers and Consolidations .  Merge into or consolidate with any other Person, or permit any other Person to merge into or consolidate with it, or sell, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of (in one transaction or in a series of transactions) all or substantially all the assets of the Borrower, except that (i) if at the time thereof and immediately after giving effect thereto no Event of Default or Default shall have occurred and be continuing (x) any Subsidiary may merge into the Borrower in a transaction in which the Borrower is the surviving corporation, and (y) any Subsidiary may merge into or consolidate with any other Subsidiary ( provided that if any party to any such transaction is (1) a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, the surviving entity of such transaction shall be a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, and (2) a Loan Party, the surviving entity of such transaction shall be a Loan Party; provided , further, that if any such transaction also involves a Subsidiary that is not a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, such transaction must also be permitted under Section 6.04) and (ii) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may make Permitted Acquisitions and Dispositions permitted under Section 6.06.

 

69


Section 6.06. Dispositions .  Dispose of any property or assets, other than:

(a) Dispositions of worn-out, obsolete or surplus equipment and property no longer used or useful in the business of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(b) Dispositions of inventory in the ordinary course of business;

(c) Dispositions of Permitted Investments;

(d) Dispositions between and among the Borrower and the Subsidiaries; provided that if the transferor in such a transaction is a Loan Party, then either (x) the transferee must be a Loan Party or (y) the portion of any such Disposition made for less than fair market value and any non-cash consideration received in exchange for such Disposition shall in each case constitute an Investment in such Subsidiary and must be otherwise permitted hereunder;

(e) Dispositions constituting leases or subleases of any real property or personal property in the ordinary course of business;

(f) Dispositions constituting non-exclusive licenses of intellectual property in the ordinary course of business which do not materially interfere with the business of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries;

(g) Dispositions resulting from any casualty, taking or condemnation of any property of the Borrower or any Subsidiary; and

(h) Dispositions not otherwise permitted hereunder; provided that (i) at the time of such Disposition, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would result from such Disposition, (ii) not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the aggregate sale price from such disposition shall be paid in cash, (iii) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds of all Dispositions pursuant to this paragraph (h) shall not exceed $5,000,000 in any fiscal year and (iv) all such Dispositions shall be for at least the fair market value of the assets or property subject to such Disposition.

Section 6.07. Restricted Payments; Restrictive Agreements .  (a) Declare or make, or agree to declare or make, directly or indirectly, any Restricted Payment, or incur any obligation (contingent or otherwise) to do so; except:

(i) any Subsidiary may declare and pay dividends or make other distributions ratably to its equity holders; and

(ii) so long as no Event of Default or Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would result therefrom, the Borrower may repurchase its Equity Interests owned by employees of the Borrower or the Subsidiaries or make payments to employees of the Borrower or the Subsidiaries upon termination of employment in connection with the exercise of stock options, stock appreciation rights or similar equity incentives or equity based incentives pursuant to

 

70


management incentive plans or in connection with the death or disability of such employees in an aggregate amount not to exceed $2,000,000 in any fiscal year.

(b) Enter into, incur or permit to exist any agreement or other arrangement that prohibits, restricts or imposes any condition upon (i) the ability of the Borrower or any Subsidiary to create, incur or permit to exist any Lien upon any of its property or assets, or (ii) the ability of any Subsidiary to pay dividends or other distributions with respect to any of its Equity Interests or to make or repay loans or advances to the Borrower or any other Subsidiary or to Guarantee Indebtedness of the Borrower or any other Subsidiary; provided that (A) the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions and conditions imposed by law or by any Loan Document, (B) the foregoing shall not apply to customary restrictions and conditions contained in agreements relating to the sale of a Subsidiary pending such sale; provided such restrictions and conditions apply only to the Subsidiary that is to be sold and such sale is permitted hereunder, (C) the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions and conditions imposed on any Foreign Subsidiary by the terms of any Indebtedness of such Foreign Subsidiary permitted to be incurred hereunder, (D) clause (i) of the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions or conditions imposed by any agreement relating to secured Indebtedness permitted by this Agreement if such restrictions or conditions apply only to the property or assets securing such Indebtedness and (E) clause (i) of the foregoing shall not apply to customary provisions in leases and other contracts restricting the assignment thereof.

Section 6.08. Transactions with Affiliates .  Sell or transfer any property or assets to, or purchase or acquire any property or assets from, or otherwise engage in any other transactions with, any of its Affiliates, except:

(a) transactions between or among Loan Parties;

(b) any Restricted Payment permitted by Section 6.07; and

(c) transactions permitted under Section 6.04(e), including related security arrangements; and

(d) the Borrower or any Subsidiary may engage in any of the foregoing transactions in the ordinary course of business at prices and on terms and conditions not less favorable to the Borrower or such Subsidiary than could be obtained on an arm’s-length basis from unrelated third parties.

Section 6.09. Business of the Borrower and Subsidiaries .  Engage at any time in any business or business activity other than the business currently conducted by them and business activities reasonably incidental thereto.

Section 6.10. Other Indebtedness and Agreements .  (a) Permit (i) any waiver, supplement, modification, amendment, termination or release of any indenture, instrument or agreement pursuant to which any Material Indebtedness of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries is outstanding if the effect of such waiver, supplement, modification, amendment, termination or release would materially increase the obligations of the obligor or confer additional material rights on the holder of such

 

71


Indebtedness in a manner adverse to the Borrower, any of the Subsidiaries or the Lenders or would permit payment thereunder otherwise prohibited by Section 6.10(b) or (ii) any waiver, supplement, modification or amendment of its certificate of incorporation, by-laws, operating, management or partnership agreement or other organizational documents to the extent any such waiver, supplement, modification or amendment would be adverse to the Lenders in any material respect.

(b) (i) Make any distribution, whether in cash, property, securities or a combination thereof, in respect of, or pay, or commit to pay, or directly or indirectly redeem, repurchase, retire or otherwise acquire for consideration, or set apart any sum for the aforesaid purposes, any Indebtedness except (A) the payment of (x) the Indebtedness created hereunder and (y) other Indebtedness permitted under Section 6.01 ( provided that any such payment shall be permitted by any provisions pursuant to which such Indebtedness is subordinated to the Obligations, if applicable), (B) refinancings of Indebtedness permitted by Section 6.01 and (C) the payment of secured Indebtedness that becomes due as a result of the voluntary sale or transfer of the property or assets securing such Indebtedness or (ii) pay in cash any amount in respect of any Indebtedness or preferred Equity Interests that may at the obligor’s option be paid in kind or in other securities.

Section 6.11. Minimum Liquidity .  Permit Liquidity to be less than $30,000,000 as of the last day of any calendar month.

Section 6.12. Fiscal Year .  With respect to the Borrower, change its fiscal year-end to a date other than January 31.

Section 6.13. Certain Equity Securities .  Issue any Equity Interest that is not Qualified Capital Stock.

ARTICLE 7

E VENTS OF D EFAULT

Section 7.01. Events of Default .  In case of the happening of any of the following events (“ Events of Default ”):

(a) any representation or warranty made or deemed made in or in connection with any Loan Document, or any representation, warranty, statement or information contained in any report, certificate, financial statement or other instrument furnished in connection with or pursuant to any Loan Document, shall prove to have been false or misleading in any material respect when so made, deemed made or furnished;

(b) default shall be made in the payment of any principal of any Loan when and as the same shall become due and payable, whether at the due date thereof or at a date fixed for prepayment thereof or by acceleration thereof or otherwise;

(c) default shall be made in the payment of any interest on any Loan or any Fee or any other amount (other than an amount referred to in (b) above) due under any

 

72


Loan Document, when and as the same shall become due and payable, and such default shall continue unremedied for a period of three (3) Business Days;

(d) default shall be made in the due observance or performance by the Borrower or any Subsidiary of any covenant, condition or agreement contained in Section 5.01(a), 5.02, 5.05, 5.08 or 5.09 or in Article 6.

(e) default shall be made in the due observance or performance by the Borrower or any Subsidiary of any covenant, condition or agreement contained in any Loan Document (other than those specified in (b), (c) or (d) above) and such default shall continue unremedied for a period of 30 days after the notice thereof from the Administrative Agent to the Borrower (which notice shall also be given at the request of any Lender);

(f) (i) the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary shall fail to pay any principal or interest due in respect of any Material Indebtedness, when and as the same shall become due and payable, or (ii) any other event or condition occurs that results in any Material Indebtedness becoming due prior to its scheduled maturity or that enables or permits (with or without the giving of notice, the lapse of time or both) the holder or holders of any Material Indebtedness or any trustee or agent on its or their behalf to cause any Material Indebtedness to become due, or to require the prepayment, repurchase, redemption or defeasance thereof, prior to its scheduled maturity; provided that this clause (ii) shall not apply to secured Indebtedness that becomes due as a result of the voluntary sale or transfer of the property or assets securing such Indebtedness;

(g) an involuntary proceeding shall be commenced or an involuntary petition shall be filed in a court of competent jurisdiction seeking (i) relief in respect of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, or of a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or a Restricted Subsidiary, under Title 11 of the United States Code, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other Federal, state or foreign bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or similar law, (ii) the appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian, sequestrator, conservator or similar official for the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or for a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or a Restricted Subsidiary or (iii) the winding-up or liquidation of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary; and such proceeding or petition shall continue undismissed for 60 days or an order or decree approving or ordering any of the foregoing shall be entered;

(h) the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary shall (i) voluntarily commence any proceeding or file any petition seeking relief under Title 11 of the United States Code, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other Federal, state or foreign bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or similar law, (ii) consent to the institution of, or fail to contest in a timely and appropriate manner, any proceeding or the filing of any petition described in paragraph (g) above, (iii) apply for or consent to the appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian, sequestrator, conservator or similar official for the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or for a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, (iv) file an answer admitting the material allegations of a petition filed against it in any such proceeding, (v) make a general

 

73


assignment for the benefit of creditors, (vi) become unable, admit in writing its inability or fail generally to pay its debts as they become due or (vii) take any action for the purpose of effecting any of the foregoing;

(i) one or more judgments shall be rendered against the Borrower, any Restricted Subsidiary or any combination thereof and the same shall remain undischarged for a period of 30 consecutive days during which execution shall not be effectively stayed, or any action shall be legally taken by a judgment creditor to levy upon assets or properties of the Borrower or any Subsidiary to enforce any such judgment and such judgment either (i) is for the payment of money in an aggregate amount in excess of $5,000,000 or (ii) is for injunctive relief and has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect;

(j) an ERISA Event shall have occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, in the opinion of the Required Lenders, when taken either alone or together with all other such ERISA Events, has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in liability of the Borrower, any Subsidiary and their respective ERISA Affiliates in an aggregate amount exceeding $5,000,000;

(k) any Guarantee under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement for any reason shall cease to be in full force and effect (other than in accordance with its terms), or any Guarantor shall deny in writing that it has any further liability under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (other than as a result of the discharge of such Guarantor in accordance with the terms of the Loan Documents);

(l) any security interest purported to be created by any Security Document shall cease to be, or shall be asserted by the Borrower or any other Loan Party not to be, a valid, perfected, first priority (except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement or such Security Document) security interest in the securities, assets or properties covered thereby; or

(m) there shall have occurred a Change in Control;

then, and in every such event (other than an event with respect to the Borrower described in paragraph (g) or (h) above), and at any time thereafter during the continuance of such event, the Administrative Agent may, and at the request of the Required Lenders shall, by notice to the Borrower, take either or both of the following actions, at the same or different times: (i) terminate forthwith the Commitments and (ii) declare the Loans then outstanding to be forthwith due and payable in whole or in part, whereupon the principal of the Loans so declared to be due and payable, together with accrued interest thereon and any unpaid accrued Fees and all other liabilities of the Borrower accrued hereunder and under any other Loan Document, shall become forthwith due and payable, without presentment, demand, protest or any other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby expressly waived by the Borrower, anything contained herein or in any other Loan Document to the contrary notwithstanding; and in any event with respect to the Borrower described in paragraph (g) or (h) above, the Commitments shall automatically terminate and the principal of the Loans then outstanding, together

 

74


with accrued interest thereon and any unpaid accrued Fees and all other liabilities of the Borrower accrued hereunder and under any other Loan Document, shall automatically become due and payable, without presentment, demand, protest or any other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby expressly waived by the Borrower, anything contained herein or in any other Loan Document to the contrary notwithstanding.

Section 7.02. Application of Proceeds .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, upon the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, the proceeds of any sale of, or other realization upon, all or any part of the Collateral shall be applied in the order specified in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

ARTICLE 8

T HE A DMINISTRATIVE A GENT AND THE C OLLATERAL A GENT

Section 8.01. Appointment and Authority .  Each Lender hereby irrevocably appoints the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent (for purposes of this Article 8, the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent are referred to collectively as the “ Agents ”) its agent, and authorizes the Agents to take such actions on its behalf and to exercise such powers as are delegated to such Agent by the terms of the Loan Documents, together with such actions and powers as are reasonably incidental thereto. The provisions of this Article 8 are solely for the benefit of the Agents and the Lenders, and neither the Borrower nor any other Loan Party shall have rights as a third-party beneficiary of any of such provisions. It is understood and agreed that the use of the term “Agent” or “agent” herein or in any other Loan Documents (or any other similar term) with reference to an Agent, is not intended to connote any fiduciary or other implied (or express) obligations arising under agency doctrine of any applicable law. Instead, such term is used as a matter of market custom, and is intended to create or reflect only an administrative relationship between the contracting parties. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Agents are hereby expressly authorized to (a) execute any and all documents (including releases) with respect to the Collateral and the rights of the Secured Parties with respect thereto, as contemplated by and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and the Security Documents and (b) negotiate, enforce or settle any claim, action or proceeding affecting the Lenders in their capacity as such, at the direction of the Required Lenders, which negotiation, enforcement or settlement will be binding upon each Lender.

Section 8.02. Rights as a Lender .  The institution serving as the Administrative Agent and/or the Collateral Agent hereunder shall have the same rights and powers in its capacity as a Lender as any other Lender, and may exercise the same as though it were not an Agent, and such bank and its Affiliates may accept deposits from, lend money to, own securities of, act as the financial advisor or in any other advisory capacity for, and generally engage in any kind of business with the Borrower or any Subsidiary or other Affiliate thereof as if it were not an Agent hereunder.

Section 8.03. Exculpatory Provisions .  Neither Agent shall have any duties or obligations except those expressly set forth in the Loan Documents, and its duties

 

75


hereunder shall be administrative in nature. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, (a) neither Agent shall be subject to any fiduciary or other implied duties, regardless of whether a Default or an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, (b) neither Agent shall have any duty to take any discretionary action or exercise any discretionary powers, except discretionary rights and powers expressly contemplated hereby that such Agent is instructed in writing to exercise by the Required Lenders (or such other number or percentage of the Lenders as shall be necessary under the circumstances as provided in Section 9.07), provided that no Agent shall be required to take any action that, in its opinion or the opinion of its counsel, may expose such Agent to liability or that is contrary to any Loan Document or applicable law, including for the avoidance of doubt any action that may be in violation of the automatic stay under any Debtor Relief Law or that may effect a forfeiture, modification or termination of property of a Defaulting Lender in violation of any Debtor Relief Law and (c) except as expressly set forth in the Loan Documents, neither Agent shall have any duty to disclose, nor shall it be liable for the failure to disclose, any information relating to the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries that is communicated to or obtained by the bank serving as Administrative Agent and/or Collateral Agent or any of its Affiliates in any capacity. Neither Agent shall be liable for any action taken or not taken by it with the consent or at the request of the Required Lenders, or such other number or percentage of the Lenders as shall be necessary or as such Agent shall in good faith believe to be necessary under the circumstances as provided in Section 9.07, or in the absence of its own gross negligence or willful misconduct as determined by a court of competent jurisdiction by final and nonappealable judgment. Neither Agent shall be deemed to have knowledge of any Default or Event of Default unless and until written notice thereof is given to such Agent by the Borrower or a Lender, and neither Agent shall be responsible for or have any duty to ascertain or inquire into (i) any statement, warranty or representation made in or in connection with any Loan Document, (ii) the contents of any certificate, report or other document delivered thereunder or in connection therewith, (iii) the performance or observance of any of the covenants, agreements or other terms or conditions set forth in any Loan Document, (iv) the validity, enforceability, effectiveness or genuineness of any Loan Document or any other agreement, instrument or document, or (v) the satisfaction of any condition set forth in Article 4 or elsewhere in any Loan Document, other than to confirm receipt of items expressly required to be delivered to such Agent.

Section 8.04. Reliance by Administrative Agent .  Each Agent shall be entitled to rely upon, and shall not incur any liability for relying upon, any notice, request, certificate, consent, statement, instrument, document or other writing believed by it to be genuine and to have been signed, sent or otherwise authenticated by the proper Person. Each Agent may also rely upon any statement made to it orally or by telephone and believed by it to have been made by the proper Person, and shall not incur any liability for relying thereon. In determining compliance with any condition hereunder to the making of a Loan that by its terms must be fulfilled to the satisfaction of a Lender, the Administrative Agent may presume that such condition is satisfactory to such Lender unless the Administrative Agent shall have received notice to the contrary from such Lender prior to the making of such Loan. Each Agent may consult with legal counsel (who may be counsel for the Borrower), independent accountants and other experts

 

76


selected by it, and shall not be liable for any action taken or not taken by it in accordance with the advice of any such counsel, accountants or experts.

Section 8.05. Delegation of Duties .  Each Agent may perform any and all its duties and exercise its rights and powers by or through any one or more subagents appointed by it. Each Agent and any such subagent may perform any and all its duties and exercise its rights and powers by or through their respective Related Parties. The exculpatory provisions of the preceding paragraphs shall apply to any such subagent and to the Related Parties of each Agent and any such subagent, and shall apply to their respective activities in connection with the syndication of the Credit Facilities as well as activities as Agent. No Agent shall be responsible for the negligence or misconduct of any subagents except to the extent that a court of competent jurisdiction determines in a final and nonappealable judgment that such Agent acted with gross negligence or willful misconduct in the selection of such subagents.

Section 8.06. Resignation of the Administrative Agent.  Subject to the appointment and acceptance of a successor Agent as provided below, either Agent may resign at any time by notifying the Lenders and the Borrower. Upon any such resignation, the Required Lenders shall have the right, in consultation with the Borrower, to appoint a successor. If no successor shall have been so appointed by the Required Lenders and shall have accepted such appointment within 30 days after the retiring Agent gives notice of its resignation, (or such earlier day as shall be agreed by the Required Lenders) (the “ Resignation Effective Date ”), then the retiring Agent may (but shall not be obligated to), on behalf of the Lenders, appoint a successor Agent which shall be a bank with an office in New York, New York, or an Affiliate of any such bank. If no successor Agent has been appointed pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence by the Resignation Effective Date, such Agent’s resignation shall become effective and the Required Lenders shall thereafter perform all the duties of such Agent hereunder and/or under any other Loan Document until such time, if any, as the Required Lenders appoint a successor Administrative Agent and/or Collateral Agent, as the case may be. Upon the acceptance of its appointment as Agent hereunder by a successor, such successor shall succeed to, and become vested with, all the rights, powers, privileges and duties of the retiring Agent, and the retiring Agent shall be discharged from its duties and obligations hereunder. The Administrative Agent Fees payable by the Borrower to a successor Agent shall be the same as those payable to its predecessor unless otherwise agreed between the Borrower and such successor. After an Agent’s resignation hereunder, the provisions of this Article 8 and Section 9.05 shall continue in effect for the benefit of such retiring Agent, its subagents and their respective Related Parties in respect of any actions taken or omitted to be taken by any of them while acting as Agent.

Section 8.07. Non-Reliance on Administrative Agent and Other Lenders .  Each Lender acknowledges that it has, independently and without reliance upon the Agents or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Agreement. Each Lender also acknowledges that it will, independently and without reliance upon the Agents or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it shall from time to time deem appropriate, continue to make its own decisions in taking or not

 

77


taking action under or based upon this Agreement or any other Loan Document, any related agreement or any document furnished hereunder or thereunder.

Section 8.08. No Other Duties, etc .  Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any provision of any other Loan Document, the Arranger is named as such for recognition purposes only, and in its capacity as such shall have no duties, responsibilities or liabilities with respect to this Agreement or any other Loan Document; it being understood and agreed that the Arranger shall be entitled to all indemnification and reimbursement rights in favor of the Agents provided herein and in the other Loan Documents. Without limitation of the foregoing, the Arranger in its capacity as such shall not, by reason of this Agreement or any other Loan Document, have any fiduciary relationship in respect of any Lender, Loan Party or any other Person.

Section 8.09. Agent May File Proofs of Claim .  In case of the pendency of any proceeding under any Debtor Relief Law, each Agent (irrespective of whether the principal of any Loan or Obligation shall then be due and payable as herein expressed or by declaration or otherwise and irrespective of whether the Agent shall have made any demand on the Borrower) shall be entitled and empowered (but not obligated) by intervention in such proceeding or otherwise:

(i) to file and prove a claim for the whole amount of the principal and interest owing and unpaid in respect of the Loans and all other Obligations that are owing and unpaid and to file such other documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Lenders and each Agent (including any claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Lenders and each Agent and their respective agents and counsel and all other amounts due the Lenders and each Agent under Sections 2.05 and 9.05) allowed in such judicial proceeding; and

(ii) to collect and receive any monies or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims and to distribute the same;

and any custodian, receiver, assignee, trustee, liquidator, sequestrator or other similar official in any such judicial proceeding is hereby authorized by each Lender to make such payments to such Agent and, in the event that such Agent shall consent to the making of such payments directly to the Lenders, to pay to such Agent any amount due for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of such Agent and its agents and counsel, and any other amounts due such Agent under Sections 2.05 and 9.05.

Section 8.10. Collateral and Guarantee Matters .  (a) The Lenders irrevocably authorize the Collateral Agent, at its option and in its sole discretion:

(i) to release any Lien on any property granted to, or held by, the Collateral Agent under any Loan Document (x) on or after the date that the Obligations (other than contingent indemnity and expense reimbursement obligations as to which no claim has been made) have been paid in full and the Commitments have been terminated, (y) with respect to any property that is sold

 

78


or otherwise disposed of or to be sold or otherwise disposed of as part of or in connection with any sale or other disposition permitted under the Loan Documents or (z), if approved, authorized or ratified in writing by the Required Lenders (or such other number of Lenders as shall be required hereunder);

(ii) to subordinate any Lien on any property granted to, or held by, the Collateral Agent under any Loan Document to the holder of any Lien on such property that is permitted by Section 6.02(i); and

(iii) to release any Subsidiary from its obligations under the Loan Documents if such Person ceases to be a Subsidiary as a result of a transaction permitted under the Loan Documents.

(b) Upon request by the Collateral Agent at any time, the Required Lenders will confirm in writing the Collateral Agent’s authority to release or subordinate its interest in particular types or items of property, or to release any Subsidiary from its obligations under the Loan Documents pursuant to this Section 8.10.

(c) Except as otherwise expressly set forth herein or in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, no Qualified Counterparty that obtains the benefits of any Guarantee pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement or any Collateral by virtue of the provisions hereof or of any Security Document shall have any right to notice of any action or to consent to, direct or object to any action hereunder or under any other Loan Document or otherwise in respect of the Collateral (including the release or impairment of any Collateral) other than in its capacity as a Lender and, in such case, only to the extent expressly provided in the Loan Documents. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article 8 to the contrary, the Administrative Agent shall not be required to verify the payment of, or that other satisfactory arrangements have been made with respect to, obligations with respect to any Secured Hedging Agreement unless the Administrative Agent has received written notice of such obligations, together with such supporting documentation as the Administrative Agent may request, from the applicable Qualified Counterparty.

(d) The Collateral Agent shall not be responsible for, or have a duty to, ascertain or inquire into any representation or warranty regarding the existence, value or collectability of any Collateral, the existence, priority or perfection of the Collateral Agent’s Lien thereon, or any certificate prepared by any Loan Party in connection therewith, nor shall the Collateral Agent be responsible or liable to the Lenders for any failure to monitor or maintain any portion of the Collateral.

ARTICLE 9

M ISCELLANEOUS

Section 9.01. Notices; Electronic Communications .  Except for notices and other communications expressly permitted to be given by telephone hereunder (and except as provided in this Section 9.01), notices and other communications provided for herein

 

79


shall be in writing and shall be delivered by hand or overnight courier service, mailed by certified or registered mail or sent by fax, as follows:

(a) if to the Borrower, to it at 4400 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA 94022, Attention of VP Finance & Treasurer (Fax No. 888-418-6762);

(b) if to the Administrative Agent, to Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, Eleven Madison Avenue, 23 rd Floor, New York, NY 10010, Attention of: Loan Operations – Agency Manager, Telephone No. 919-994-6369, Fax No. 212-322-2291, Email: agency.loanops@credit-suisse.com;

(c) if to the Collateral Agent, to Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, Eleven Madison Avenue, EMA-23, New York, NY 10010, Attention of: Loan Operations – Boutique Management, Telephone No. 212-538-3525, Email: Ops-collateral@credit-suisse.com; and

(d) if to a Lender, to it at its address (or fax number) set forth on Schedule 2.01(a) or in the Assignment and Acceptance pursuant to which such Lender shall have become a party hereto.

All notices and other communications given to any party hereto, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, shall be deemed to have been given on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or overnight courier service, or sent by fax or on the date five (5) Business Days after dispatch by certified or registered mail if mailed, in each case delivered, sent or mailed (properly addressed) to such party as provided in this Section 9.01, or in accordance with the latest unrevoked direction from such party given in accordance with this Section 9.01. As agreed to among the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the applicable Lenders from time to time, notices and other communications may also be delivered by e-mail to the e-mail address of a representative of the applicable Person provided from time to time by such Person.

The Borrower hereby agrees, unless directed otherwise by the Administrative Agent or unless the electronic mail address referred to below has not been provided by the Administrative Agent to the Borrower, that it will, and will cause its Subsidiaries to, provide to the Administrative Agent all information, documents and other materials that it is obligated to furnish to the Administrative Agent pursuant to the Loan Documents or to the Lenders under Article 5, including all notices, requests, financial statements, financial and other reports, certificates and other information materials, but excluding any such communication that (i) is or relates to a Borrowing Request or a notice pursuant to Section 2.10, (ii) relates to the payment of any principal or other amount due under this Agreement prior to the scheduled date therefor, (iii) provides notice of any Default or Event of Default under this Agreement or any other Loan Document or (iv) is required to be delivered to satisfy any condition precedent to the effectiveness of this Agreement and/or any Borrowing or other extension of credit hereunder (all such nonexcluded communications being referred to herein collectively as “ Communications ”), by transmitting the Communications in an electronic/soft medium that is properly identified in a format acceptable to the Administrative Agent to an electronic mail address as

 

80


directed by the Administrative Agent. In addition, the Borrower agrees, and agrees to cause its Subsidiaries, to continue to provide the Communications to the Administrative Agent or the Lenders, as the case may be, in the manner specified in the Loan Documents but only to the extent requested by the Administrative Agent.

The Borrower hereby acknowledges that (a) the Administrative Agent will make available to the Lenders materials and/or information provided by, or on behalf of, the Borrower hereunder (collectively, the “ Borrower Materials ”) by posting the Borrower Materials on or through Box, Intralinks or another similar electronic system (the “ Platform ”) and (b) certain of the Lenders may be “ public-side ” Lenders (i.e., Lenders that do not wish to receive material nonpublic information with respect to the Borrower or its securities) (each, a “ Public Lender ”). The Borrower hereby agrees that (i) all Borrower Materials that are to be made available to Public Lenders shall be clearly and conspicuously marked “ PUBLIC ” which, at a minimum, shall mean that the word “ PUBLIC ” shall appear prominently on the first page thereof, (ii) by marking Borrower Materials “ PUBLIC ,” the Borrower shall be deemed to have authorized the Administrative Agent and the Lenders to treat such Borrower Materials as not containing any material nonpublic information with respect to the Borrower or its securities for purposes of United States Federal and state securities laws ( provided that to the extent such Borrower Materials constitute Information, they shall be treated as set forth in Section 9.17), (iii) all Borrower Materials marked “ PUBLIC ” are permitted to be made available through a portion of the Platform designated as “ Public Investor ” and (iv) the Administrative Agent shall be entitled to treat any Borrower Materials that are not marked “ PUBLIC ” as being suitable only for posting on a portion of the Platform not marked as “ Public Investor .” Notwithstanding the foregoing, the following Borrower Materials shall be deemed to be marked “ PUBLIC ,” unless the Borrower notifies the Administrative Agent promptly that any such document contains material nonpublic information: (1) the Loan Documents, (2) any notification of changes in the terms of the Credit Facilities and (3) all information delivered pursuant to Section 5.04 (other than pursuant to clause (d) thereof).

Each Public Lender agrees to cause at least one individual at or on behalf of such Public Lender to at all times have selected the “ Private Side Information ” or similar designation on the content declaration screen of the Platform in order to enable such Public Lender or its delegate, in accordance with such Public Lender’s compliance procedures and applicable law, including United States Federal and state securities laws, to make reference to Communications that are not made available through the “ Public Side Information ” portion of the Platform and that may contain material non-public information with respect to the Borrower or its securities for purposes of United States Federal or state securities laws.

THE PLATFORM IS PROVIDED “ AS IS ” AND “ AS AVAILABLE .” NEITHER THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT NOR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES WARRANTS THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THE COMMUNICATIONS OR THE ADEQUACY OF THE PLATFORM AND EACH EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS IN THE COMMUNICATIONS. NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

 

81


STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS OR FREEDOM FROM VIRUSES OR OTHER CODE DEFECTS IS MADE BY THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT OR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE COMMUNICATIONS OR THE PLATFORM. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT OR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO ANY LOAN PARTY, ANY LENDER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER OR NOT BASED ON STRICT LIABILITY AND INCLUDING DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSSES OR EXPENSES (WHETHER IN TORT, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT OF ANY LOAN PARTY’S OR THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT’S TRANSMISSION OF COMMUNICATIONS THROUGH THE INTERNET, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THE LIABILITY OF ANY SUCH PERSON IS FOUND IN A FINAL RULING BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION TO HAVE RESULTED FROM SUCH PERSON’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.

The Administrative Agent agrees that the receipt of the Communications by the Administrative Agent at its electronic mail address set forth above shall constitute effective delivery of the Communications to the Administrative Agent for purposes of the Loan Documents. Each Lender agrees that receipt of notice to it (as provided in the next sentence) specifying that the Communications have been posted to the Platform shall constitute effective delivery of the Communications to such Lender for purposes of the Loan Documents. Each Lender agrees to notify the Administrative Agent in writing (including by electronic communication) from time to time of such Lender’s electronic mail address to which the foregoing notice may be sent by electronic transmission and that the foregoing notice may be sent to such e-mail address. Nothing herein shall prejudice the right of the Administrative Agent or any Lender to give any notice or other communication pursuant to any Loan Document in any other manner specified in such Loan Document.

Section 9.02. Survival of Agreement .  All covenants, agreements, representations and warranties made by the Borrower herein and in the certificates or other instruments prepared or delivered in connection with or pursuant to this Agreement or any other Loan Document shall be considered to have been relied upon by the Lenders and shall survive the making by the Lenders of the Loans, regardless of any investigation made by the Lenders or on their behalf, and shall continue in full force and effect as long as the principal of or any accrued interest on any Loan or any Fee or any other amount payable under this Agreement or any other Loan Document is outstanding and so long as the Commitments have not been terminated. The provisions of Sections 2.13, 2.15, 2.19 and 9.05 shall remain operative and in full force and effect regardless of the expiration of the term of this Agreement, the consummation of the transactions contemplated hereby, the repayment of any of the Loans, the expiration of the Commitments, the invalidity or unenforceability of any term or provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or any investigation made by or on behalf of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender.

 

82


Section 9.03. Binding Effect .  Subject to Section 4.02, this Agreement shall become effective when it shall have been executed by the Borrower and the Administrative Agent and when the Administrative Agent shall have received counterparts hereof which, when taken together, bear the signatures of each of the other parties hereto.

Section 9.04. Successors and Assigns.

(a) Successors and Assigns Generally . The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby, except that neither the Borrower nor any other Loan Party may assign or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent and each Lender, and no Lender may assign or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder except (i) to an assignee in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.04(b), (ii) by way of participation in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.04(d) or (iii) by way of pledge or assignment of a security interest subject to the restrictions of Section 9.04(e) (and any other attempted assignment or transfer by any party hereto shall be null and void). Nothing in this Agreement, expressed or implied, shall be construed to confer upon any Person (other than the parties hereto, their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby, Participants to the extent provided in Section 9.04(d) and, to the extent expressly contemplated hereby, the Related Parties of each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders) any legal or equitable right, remedy or claim under or by reason of this Agreement.

(b) Assignments by Lenders . Any Lender may at any time assign to one or more assignees (other than as provided in Sections 9.04(b)(v) and 9.04(b)(vi) below) all or a portion of its rights and obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitment and the Loans at the time owing to it); provided that any such assignment shall be subject to the following conditions:

(i) Minimum Amounts .

(A) in the case of an assignment of the entire remaining amount of the assigning Lender’s Commitment and/or the Loans at the time owing to it (in each case with respect to any Class) or contemporaneous assignments to related Approved Funds that equal at least the amount specified in Section 9.04(b)(i)(B) in the aggregate or in the case of an assignment to a Lender, an Affiliate of a Lender or an Approved Fund, no minimum amount need be assigned; and

(B) in any case not described in Section 9.04(b)(i)(A), the aggregate amount of the Commitment (which for this purpose includes Loans outstanding thereunder) or, if the applicable Commitment is not then in effect, the principal outstanding balance of the Loans of the assigning Lender subject to each such assignment (determined as of the date the Assignment and Acceptance with respect to such assignment is

 

83


delivered to the Administrative Agent or, if “Trade Date” is specified in the Assignment and Acceptance, as of the Trade Date) shall not be less than $5,000,000, unless each of the Administrative Agent and, so long as no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Borrower otherwise consents (each such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

(ii) Proportionate Amounts . Each partial assignment shall be made as an assignment of a proportionate part of all the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement with respect to the Loan or the Commitment assigned, except that this clause (ii) shall not prohibit any Lender from assigning all or a portion of its rights and obligations among separate Classes on a non-pro rata basis.

(iii) Required Consents . No consent shall be required for any assignment except to the extent required by Section 9.04(b)(i)(B) and, in addition:

(A) the consent of the Borrower shall be required if such assignment is to a Disqualified Lender unless an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing at the time of such assignment; and

(B) the consent of the Administrative Agent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) shall be required unless such assignment is to a Lender with a Commitment in respect of such Class, an Affiliate of such Lender or an Approved Fund with respect to such Lender.

(iv) Assignment and Acceptance . The parties to each assignment shall (A) execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Assignment and Acceptance via an electronic settlement system acceptable to the Administrative Agent or (B) if previously agreed with the Administrative Agent, manually execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Assignment and Acceptance, in each case, together with a processing and recordation fee of $3,500; provided that the Administrative Agent may, in its sole discretion, elect to waive or reduce such processing and recordation fee in the case of any assignment. For the avoidance of doubt, except as set forth in Section 2.20, the Borrower shall not, in any event, be responsible for payment of any processing or recordation fee incurred in connection with any assignment permitted pursuant to this Section 9.04. The assignee, if it is not a Lender, shall deliver to the Administrative Agent an Administrative Questionnaire (in which the assignee shall designate one or more credit contacts to whom all syndicate level information (which may contain material nonpublic information about the Loan Parties and their Related Parties or their respective securities) will be made available and who may receive such information in accordance with the assignee’s compliance procedures and applicable laws, including Federal and state securities laws) and all applicable tax forms.

 

84


(v) No Assignment to Certain Persons . No such assignment shall be made to (A) the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates or Subsidiaries, (B) any Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor ( provided that any Lender may rely on a representation and warranty from the assignee that it is not a Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor), or (C) to any Defaulting Lender or any of its Subsidiaries, or any Person who, upon becoming a Lender hereunder, would constitute any of the foregoing Persons described in this clause (C).

(vi) No Assignment to Natural Persons . No such assignment shall be made to a natural Person.

(vii) Certain Additional Payments . In connection with any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender hereunder, no such assignment shall be effective unless and until, in addition to the other conditions thereto set forth herein, the parties to the assignment shall make such additional payments to the Administrative Agent in an aggregate amount sufficient, upon distribution thereof as appropriate (which may be outright payment, purchases by the assignee of participations or subparticipations or other compensating actions, including funding, with the consent of the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, the applicable pro rata share of Loans previously requested but not funded by the Defaulting Lender, to each of which the applicable assignee and assignor hereby irrevocably consent) to (x) pay and satisfy in full all payment liabilities then owed by such Defaulting Lender to the Administrative Agent and each other Lender hereunder (and interest accrued thereon) and (y) acquire (and fund as appropriate) its full pro rata share of all Loans. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender hereunder shall become effective under applicable law without compliance with the provisions of this paragraph, then the assignee of such interest shall be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender for all purposes of this Agreement until such compliance occurs.

Subject to acceptance and recording thereof by the Administrative Agent pursuant to paragraph (c) of this Section, from and after the effective date specified in each Assignment and Acceptance, the assignee thereunder shall be a party to this Agreement and, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Acceptance, have the rights and obligations of a Lender under this Agreement, and the assigning Lender thereunder shall, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Acceptance, be released from its obligations under this Agreement (and, in the case of an Assignment and Acceptance covering all of the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement, such Lender shall cease to be a party hereto) but shall continue to be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.13, 2.15, 2.19 and 9.05, with respect to facts and circumstances occurring prior to the effective date of such assignment as well as to any Fees accrued for its account and not yet paid; provided that except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed by the affected parties, no assignment by a Defaulting Lender will constitute a waiver or release of any claim of any party hereunder arising from that Lender’s having been a Defaulting Lender. Any assignment or transfer by a Lender of

 

85


rights or obligations under this Agreement that does not comply with this paragraph shall be treated for purposes of this Agreement as a sale by such Lender of a participation in such rights and obligations in accordance with Section 9.04(d). The Borrower and each Lender acknowledges and agrees that the Administrative Agent shall not have any responsibility or obligation to determine whether any assignee is an ineligible assignee and the Administrative Agent shall have no liability with respect to any assignment made to an ineligible assignee.

(c) Register . The Administrative Agent, acting solely for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, shall maintain at one of its offices in The City of New York a copy of each Assignment and Acceptance delivered to it and a register for the recordation of the names and addresses of the Lenders, and the Commitments of, and principal amounts (and stated interest) of the Loans owing to, each Lender pursuant to the terms hereof from time to time (the “ Register ”). The entries in the Register shall be conclusive absent manifest error, and the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders shall treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Register pursuant to the terms hereof as a Lender hereunder for all purposes of this Agreement. The Register shall be available for inspection by the Borrower and any Lender, at any reasonable time and from time to time upon reasonable prior notice.

Upon its receipt of, and consent to, a duly completed Assignment and Acceptance executed by an assigning Lender and an assignee, an Administrative Questionnaire completed in respect of the assignee (unless the assignee shall already be a Lender hereunder), the processing and recordation fee referred to in paragraph (b) above, if applicable, and the written consent of the Administrative Agent and, if required, the Borrower to such assignment and any applicable tax forms, the Administrative Agent shall (i) accept such Assignment and Acceptance and (ii) promptly record the information contained therein in the Register. No assignment shall be effective unless it has been recorded in the Register as provided in this paragraph.

(d) Participations . Any Lender may at any time, without the consent of, or notice to, the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, sell participations to any Person (other than a natural Person, the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates or Subsidiaries or any Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor ( provided that any Lender may rely on a representation and warranty from the participant that it is not a Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor )) (each, a “ Participant ”) in all or a portion of such Lender’s rights and/or obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitment and/or the Loans owing to it); provided that (i) such Lender’s obligations under this Agreement shall remain unchanged, (ii) such Lender shall remain solely responsible to the other parties hereto for the performance of such obligations and (iii) the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the other Lenders shall continue to deal solely and directly with such Lender in connection with such Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, each Lender shall be responsible for the indemnity under Section 9.05(c) with respect to any payments made by such Lender to its Participant(s).

 

86


Any agreement or instrument pursuant to which a Lender sells such a participation shall provide that such Lender shall retain the sole right to enforce this Agreement and to approve any amendment, modification or waiver of any provision of this Agreement; provided that such agreement or instrument may provide that such Lender will not, without the consent of the Participant, agree to any amendment, modification or waiver with respect to the following: decreasing any fees payable to such Participant hereunder or the amount of principal of or the rate at which interest is payable on the Loans in which such Participant has an interest, or extending any scheduled principal payment date or date fixed for the payment of interest on the Loans in which such Participant has an interest, increasing or extending the Commitments in which such Participant has an interest or releasing Guarantors (other than in connection with the sale of any Guarantor in a transaction permitted by Section 6.05) or all or substantially all of the Collateral). The Borrower agrees that each Participant shall be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.13, 2.15 and 2.19 (subject to the requirements and limitations therein, including the requirements under Section 2.19 (it being understood that the documentation required under Section 2.19(f) shall be delivered to the participating Lender)) to the same extent as if it were a Lender and had acquired its interest by assignment pursuant to Section 9.04(b); provided that such Participant (A) agrees to be subject to the provisions of Section 2.20 as if it were an assignee under Section 9.04(b)) and (B) shall not be entitled to receive any greater payment under Sections 2.13, 2.15 or 2.19 with respect to any participation, than its participating Lender would have been entitled to receive, except to the extent such entitlement to receive a greater payment results from a Change in Law that occurs after the Participant acquired the applicable participation. Each Lender that sells a participation agrees, at the Borrower’s request and expense, to use reasonable efforts to cooperate with the Borrower to effectuate the provisions of Section 2.20 with respect to any Participant. To the extent permitted by law, each Participant also shall be entitled to the benefits of Section 9.06 as though it were a Lender; provided that such Participant agrees to be subject to Section 2.17 as though it were a Lender. Each Lender that sells a participation shall, acting solely for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, maintain a register on which it enters the name and address of each Participant and the principal amounts (and stated interest) of each Participant’s interest in the Loans or other obligations under the Loan Documents (the “ Participant Register ”); provided that no Lender shall have any obligation to disclose all or any portion of the Participant Register (including the identity of any Participant or any information relating to a Participant’s interest in any commitments, loans or its other obligations under any Loan Document) to any Person except to the extent that such disclosure is necessary to establish that such commitment, loan or other obligation is in registered form under Section 5f.103-1(c) of the United States Treasury Regulations. The entries in the Participant Register shall be conclusive absent manifest error, and such Lender shall treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Participant Register as the owner of such participation for all purposes of this Agreement notwithstanding any notice to the contrary. For the avoidance of doubt, the Administrative Agent (in its capacity as Administrative Agent) shall have no responsibility for maintaining a Participant Register.

(e) Certain Pledges . Any Lender may at any time pledge or assign a security interest in all or any portion of its rights under this Agreement to secure obligations of such Lender, including any pledge or assignment to secure obligations to a Federal

 

87


Reserve Bank; provided that no such pledge or assignment shall release such Lender from any of its obligations hereunder or substitute any such pledgee or assignee for such Lender as a party hereto.

Section 9.05. Expenses; Indemnity .  (a) The Borrower agrees to pay all out-of-pocket expenses incurred by the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Arranger (and each of their respective Affiliates) in connection with the syndication of the Credit Facilities and the preparation and administration of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or in connection with any amendments, modifications or waivers of the provisions hereof or thereof (whether or not the transactions hereby or thereby contemplated shall be consummated) or incurred by the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, the Arranger (and each of their respective Affiliates) or any Lender in connection with the enforcement or protection of its rights in connection with the Engagement Letter, this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or in connection with the Loans made hereunder, including (i) the reasonable fees, charges and disbursements of Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, counsel for the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, and any other counsel engaged with the consent of the Borrower (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) and (ii) in connection with any such enforcement or protection, the fees, charges and disbursements of one or more additional counsel as a result of one or more actual or perceived conflicts of interests and any special counsel and local counsel in each applicable jurisdiction, for the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, the Arranger and the Lenders (and each of their respective Affiliates).

(b) The Borrower agrees to indemnify the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, each Lender and each Related Party of any of the foregoing Persons (each such Person being called an “ Indemnitee ”) against, and to hold each Indemnitee harmless from, any and all losses, claims, damages, liabilities and related expenses, including reasonable consultant or other expert fees, charges and disbursements and the reasonable and documents fees, charges and disbursements of one firm of counsel to all Indemnitees (and one or more additional counsel as a result of one or more actual or perceived conflicts of interest and any special counsel and local counsel in each applicable jurisdiction), incurred by or asserted against any Indemnitee arising out of, in any way connected with, or as a result of (i) the execution or delivery of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or any agreement or instrument contemplated thereby, the performance by the parties thereto of their respective obligations thereunder or the consummation of the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated thereby (including the syndication of the Credit Facilities), (ii) the use of the proceeds of the Loans, (iii) any Environmental Liability related in any way to the Loan Parties, any of their respective subsidiaries or predecessors or any property currently or formerly owned, leased or operated by the Loan Parties or any of their respective subsidiaries or predecessors, including the Mortgaged Properties, or (iv) any claim, litigation, investigation or proceeding relating to any of the foregoing, whether or not any Indemnitee is a party thereto (and regardless of whether such matter is initiated by the Borrower, any other Loan Party or any of their respective Affiliates or any other Person); provided that such indemnity shall not, as to any Indemnitee, be available to the extent that such losses, claims, damages, liabilities or related expenses are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction by final and nonappealable judgment to have resulted from the

 

88


gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Indemnitee. This Section 9.05(b) shall not apply with respect to Taxes other than any Taxes that represent losses, claims, damages, liabilities and related expenses arising from any non-Tax claim.

(c) To the extent that the Borrower fails to pay any amount required to be paid by it to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates) under paragraph (a) or (b) of this Section 9.05, each Lender severally agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates), as the case may be, such Lender’s pro rata share (determined as of the time that the applicable unreimbursed expense or indemnity payment is sought) of such unpaid amount; (including any such unpaid amount in respect of a claim asserted by such Lender); provided that the unreimbursed expense or indemnified loss, claim, damage, liability or related expense, as the case may be, was incurred by or asserted against the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates) in its capacity as such. For purposes hereof, a Lender’s “ pro rata share ” shall be determined based upon its share of the sum of the Aggregate Exposure and unused Commitments at the time (in each case, determined as if no Lender were a Defaulting Lender).

(d) To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Borrower shall not assert, and hereby waives, any claim against any Indemnitee, on any theory of liability, for special, indirect, consequential or punitive damages (as opposed to direct or actual damages) arising out of, in connection with, or as a result of, this Agreement or any agreement or instrument contemplated hereby, the Transactions, any Loan or the use of the proceeds thereof.

(e) All amounts due under this Section 9.05 shall be payable on written demand therefor.

Section 9.06. Right of Setoff .  If an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, each Lender is hereby authorized at any time and from time to time, except to the extent prohibited by law, to set off and apply any and all deposits (general or special, time or demand, provisional or final) at any time held and other indebtedness at any time owing by such Lender to or for the credit or the account of the Borrower against any and all of the obligations of the Borrower now or hereafter existing under this Agreement and other Loan Documents held by such Lender, irrespective of whether or not such Lender shall have made any demand under this Agreement or such other Loan Document and although such obligations may be unmatured; provided that in the event that any Defaulting Lender shall exercise any such right of setoff, (a) all amounts so set off shall be paid over immediately to the Administrative Agent for further application in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.21 and, pending such payment, shall be segregated by such Defaulting Lender from its other funds and deemed held in trust for the benefit of the Administrative Agent and the Lenders and (b) such Defaulting Lender shall provide promptly to the Administrative Agent a statement describing in reasonable detail the Obligations owing to such Defaulting Lender as to which it exercised such right of setoff. The rights of each Lender under this Section 9.06 are in addition to other rights and remedies (including other rights of setoff) which such Lender may have.

 

89


Section 9.07. Waivers; Amendment .  (a) No failure or delay of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender in exercising any power or right hereunder or under any other Loan Document shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any such right or power, or any abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right or power, preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or power. The rights and remedies of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders hereunder and under the other Loan Documents are cumulative and are not exclusive of any rights or remedies that they would otherwise have. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or consent to any departure by the Borrower or any other Loan Party therefrom shall in any event be effective unless the same shall be permitted by paragraph (b) below, and then such waiver or consent shall be effective only in the specific instance and for the purpose for which given. No notice or demand on the Borrower in any case shall entitle the Borrower to any other or further notice or demand in similar or other circumstances.

(b) No Loan Document or provision thereof may be waived, amended or modified except, in the case of this Agreement, by an agreement or agreements in writing entered into by the Borrower and the Required Lenders or, in the case of any other Loan Document, by an agreement or agreements in writing entered into by the parties thereto with the consent of the Required Lenders; provided that, in addition to the approval of the Required Lenders, no such agreement shall:

(i) decrease the principal amount of, or extend the maturity of or any scheduled principal payment date or date for the payment of any interest on any Loan, or waive or excuse any such payment or any part thereof or decrease the rate of interest on any Loan, without the prior written consent of each Lender directly adversely affected thereby; provided , that the Required Lenders may waive payment of any default interest accruing at any time under Section 2.07,

(ii) increase or extend the Commitment or decrease or extend the date for payment of any Fees of any Lender without the prior written consent of such Lender,

(iii) amend or modify the pro rata requirements of Section 2.16, the provisions of Section 9.04(a) relating to an assignment or other transfer by the Borrower or any other Loan Party of any of its rights or obligations hereunder or release all or substantially all of the Guarantors (other than in connection with the sale of such Guarantor in a transaction permitted by Section 6.06) or all or substantially all of the Collateral, without the prior written consent of each Lender,

(iv) change the provisions of any Loan Document in a manner that by its terms adversely affects the rights of Lenders holding Loans or Commitments of one Class differently from the rights of Lenders holding Loans or Commitments of any other Class without the prior written consent of Lenders

 

90


holding a majority in interest of the outstanding Loans and unused Commitments of each adversely affected Class, or

(v) reduce the percentage contained in the definition of the term “ Required Lenders ” or the provision of this Section 9.07 without the prior written consent of each Lender (it being understood that with the consent of the Required Lenders, additional extensions of credit pursuant to this Agreement may be included in the determination of the Required Lenders on substantially the same basis as the Commitments on the date hereof);

provided further that no such agreement shall amend, modify or otherwise affect the rights or duties of the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent hereunder or under any other Loan Document without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent, respectively.

(c) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement or any other Loan Document, the Administrative Agent and the Borrower may amend any Loan Document (i) to correct administrative errors or omissions, or to effect administrative changes that are not adverse to any Lender, (ii) to make modifications contemplated by Sections 2.22 or 2.23 pursuant to an Additional Credit Extension Amendment or in connection with an Extension, as applicable, (iii) to correct, amend, cure any ambiguity, inconsistency, defect or correct any typographical error or other manifest error in this Agreement or any other Loan Document, (iv) to comply with local law or advice of local counsel in respect of a Security Document or (v) to cause a Security Document to be consistent with this Agreement and other Loan Documents. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, such amendment shall become effective without any further consent of any other party to such Loan Document.

Section 9.08. Interest Rate Limitation .  Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if at any time the interest rate applicable to any Loan, together with all fees, charges and other amounts which are treated as interest on such Loan under applicable law (collectively, the “ Charges ”), shall exceed the maximum lawful rate (the “ Maximum Rate ”) which may be contracted for, charged, taken, received or reserved by the Lender holding such Loan or participation in accordance with applicable law, the rate of interest payable in respect of such Loan or participation hereunder, together with all Charges payable in respect thereof, shall be limited to the Maximum Rate and, to the extent lawful, the interest and Charges that would have been payable in respect of such Loan or participation but were not payable as a result of the operation of this Section 9.08 shall be cumulated and the interest and Charges payable to such Lender in respect of other Loans or participations or periods shall be increased (but not above the Maximum Rate therefor) until such cumulated amount, together with interest thereon at the Federal Funds Effective Rate to the date of repayment, shall have been received by such Lender.

Section 9.09. Entire Agreement .  This Agreement, the Engagement Letter and the other Loan Documents constitute the entire contract between the parties relative to the subject matter hereof. Unless otherwise specified therein, any other previous agreement among the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof is superseded by this

 

91


Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Nothing in this Agreement or in the other Loan Documents, expressed or implied, is intended to confer upon any Person (other than the parties hereto and thereto, their respective successors and assigns permitted hereunder and, to the extent expressly contemplated hereby, the Related Parties of each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders) any rights, remedies, obligations or liabilities under or by reason of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents.

Section 9.10. WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL .  EACH PARTY HERETO HEREBY WAIVES, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS. EACH PARTY HERETO (A) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER AND (B) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT AND THE OTHER PARTIES HERETO HAVE BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT AND THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS, AS APPLICABLE, BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS IN THIS SECTION 9.10.

Section 9.11. Severability .  In the event any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement or in any other Loan Document should be held invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein and therein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby (it being understood that the invalidity of a particular provision in a particular jurisdiction shall not in and of itself affect the validity of such provision in any other jurisdiction). The parties shall endeavor in good-faith negotiations to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions with valid provisions the economic effect of which comes as close as possible to that of the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions.

Section 9.12. Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed in counterparts (and by different parties hereto on different counterparts), each of which shall constitute an original but all of which when taken together shall constitute a single contract, and shall become effective as provided in Section 9.03. Delivery of an executed signature page to this Agreement by facsimile transmission or other customary means of electronic transmission (e.g. “ pdf ”) shall be as effective as delivery of a manually signed counterpart of this Agreement.

Section 9.13. Headings .  Article and Section headings and the Table of Contents used herein are for convenience of reference only, are not part of this Agreement and are not to affect the construction of, or to be taken into consideration in interpreting, this Agreement.

 

92


Section 9.14. Applicable Law .  THIS AGREEMENT AND THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS (OTHER THAN AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS) AND ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY SUCH OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CLAIMS SOUNDING IN CONTRACT LAW OR TORT LAW ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF) SHALL BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

Section 9.15. Jurisdiction ; Consent to Service of Process .  (a) The Borrower hereby irrevocably and unconditionally agrees that it will not commence any action, litigation or proceeding of any kind or description, whether in law or equity, whether in contract or tort or otherwise, against the Administrative Agent, any Lender or any Related Party of the foregoing in any way relating to this Agreement or any other Loan Document (except as otherwise expressly stated therein) or the transactions relating hereto or thereto, in any forum other than any New York State court or Federal court of the United States of America sitting in the borough of Manhattan in New York City, and any appellate court from any thereof, and each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably and unconditionally agrees that all claims in respect of any such action or proceeding may be heard and determined in such New York State or, to the extent permitted by law, in such Federal court. Each of the parties hereto agrees that a final judgment in any such action or proceeding shall be conclusive and may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit on the judgment or in any other manner provided by law. Nothing in this Agreement shall affect any right that the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender may otherwise have to bring any action or proceeding relating to this Agreement or the other Loan Documents against the Borrower or its properties in the courts of any jurisdiction.

(b) The Borrower hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives, to the fullest extent it may legally and effectively do so, any objection which it may now or hereafter have to the laying of venue of any suit, action or proceeding arising out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the other Loan Documents in any New York State or Federal court. Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably waives, to the fullest extent permitted by law, the defense of an inconvenient forum to the maintenance of such action or proceeding in any such court.

(c) Each party to this Agreement irrevocably consents to service of process in the manner provided for notices in Section 9.01. Nothing in this Agreement will affect the right of any party to this Agreement to serve process in any other manner permitted by law.

Section 9.16. Electronic Execution of Assignments .  The words “ execution ,” “ signed ,” “ signature ,” and words of like import in any Assignment and Acceptance shall be deemed to include electronic signatures or the keeping of records in electronic form, each of which shall be of the same legal effect, validity or enforceability as a manually executed signature or the use of a paper-based recordkeeping system, as the case may be, to the extent and as provided for in any applicable law, including the Federal Electronic

 

93


Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, the New York State Electronic Signatures and Records Act, or any other similar state laws based on the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act.

Section 9.17. Confidentiality .  Each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders agrees to maintain the confidentiality of the Information (as defined below), except that Information may be disclosed (a) to its and its Affiliates’ Related Parties (it being understood that the Persons to whom such disclosure is made will be informed of the confidential nature of such Information and instructed to keep such Information confidential), (b) to the extent requested by any regulatory authority or quasi-regulatory authority (such as the National Association of Insurance Commissioners), (c) to the extent required by applicable laws or regulations or by any subpoena or similar legal process, (d) in connection with the exercise of any remedies hereunder or under the other Loan Documents or any suit, action or proceeding relating to the enforcement of its rights hereunder or thereunder, (e) to any other party hereto and, subject to an agreement containing provisions no less restrictive than this Section 9.17, to (i) any actual or prospective assignee of or Participant in any of its rights or obligations under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or (ii) any actual or prospective counterparty (or its advisors) to any swap, derivative or other transaction under which payments are to be made by reference to the Borrower or any Subsidiary or any of their respective obligations, this Agreement or payments hereunder, (f) with the consent of the Borrower, (g) to the extent such Information (x) becomes publicly available other than as a result of a breach of this Section 9.17, or (y) becomes available to the Administrative Agent, any Lender or any of their respective Affiliates on a non-confidential basis from a source other than the Borrower or (h) on a confidential basis to (w) any rating agency in connection with rating the Borrower or its Subsidiaries or the Credit Facilities hereunder, (x) the CUSIP Service Bureau or any similar agency in connection with the issuance and monitoring of CUSIP numbers with respect to the Credit Facilities, (y) service providers to the Administrative Agent in connection with the administration and management of this Agreement and the Loan Documents and (z) market data collectors and similar service providers to the lending industry. For the purposes of this Section 9.17, “ Information ” shall mean all information received from the Borrower and related to the Borrower or its business, other than any such information that was available to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender on a nonconfidential basis prior to its disclosure by the Borrower. Any Person required to maintain the confidentiality of Information as provided in this Section 9.17 shall be considered to have complied with its obligation to do so if such Person has exercised the same degree of care to maintain the confidentiality of such Information as such Person would accord its own confidential information.

Section 9.18. Lender Action .  Each Lender agrees that it shall not take or institute any actions or proceedings, judicial or otherwise, for any right or remedy against any Loan Party or any other obligor under any of the Loan Documents (including the exercise of any right of setoff, rights on account of any banker’s lien or similar claim or other rights of self-help), or institute any actions or proceedings, or otherwise commence any remedial procedures, with respect to any Collateral or any other property of any such Loan Party, unless expressly provided for herein or in any other Loan Document, without

 

94


the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent. The provisions of this Section 9.18 are for the sole benefit of the Lenders and shall not afford any right to, or constitute a defense available to, any Loan Party.

Section 9.19. USA PATRIOT Act Notice .  Each Lender and the Administrative Agent (for itself and not on behalf of any Lender) hereby notifies the Borrower that pursuant to the requirements of the USA PATRIOT Act, it is required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Borrower, which information includes the name and address of the Borrower and other information that will allow such Lender or the Administrative Agent, as applicable, to identify the Borrower in accordance with the USA PATRIOT Act.

Section 9.20. No Fiduciary Duty .  Each Agent, each Lender and their respective Affiliates (collectively, solely for purposes of this paragraph, the “ Lenders ”), may have economic interests that conflict with those of the Loan Parties, their stockholders and/or their Affiliates. Each Loan Party agrees that nothing in the Loan Documents or otherwise will be deemed to create an advisory, fiduciary or agency relationship or fiduciary or other implied duty between any Lender, on the one hand, and such Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates, on the other. The Loan Parties acknowledge and agree that (i) the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents (including the exercise of rights and remedies hereunder and thereunder) are arm’s-length commercial transactions between Lenders, on the one hand, and the Loan Parties, on the other, and (ii) in connection therewith and with the process leading thereto, (x) no Lender has assumed an advisory or fiduciary responsibility in favor of any Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby (or the exercise of rights or remedies with respect thereto) or the process leading thereto (irrespective of whether any Lender has advised, is currently advising or will advise any Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates on other matters) or any other obligation to any Loan Party except the obligations expressly set forth in the Loan Documents and (y) each Lender is acting solely as principal and not as the agent or fiduciary of any Loan Party, its management, equityholders, creditors or any other Person. Each Loan Party acknowledges and agrees that it has consulted its own legal and financial advisors to the extent it deemed appropriate and that it is responsible for making its own independent judgment with respect to such transactions and the process leading thereto. Each Loan Party agrees that it will not claim that any Lender has rendered advisory services of any nature or respect, or owes a fiduciary or similar duty to such Loan Party, in connection with such transaction or the process leading thereto.

 

95


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed by their respective authorized officers as of the day and year first above written.

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

/s/ Dylan Smith

Name:   Dylan Smith
Title:   CFO
By:  

/s/ Jennifer Ceran

Name:   Jennifer Ceran
Title:   VP Finance & Treasurer

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, individually and as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent,
By:  

/s/ William O’Daly

Name:   William O’Daly
Title:   Authorized Signatory
By:  

/s/ Philipp Horat

Name:   Philipp Horat
Title:   Authorized Signatory

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.
By:  

/s/ John Kowalczuk

Name:   John Kowalczuk
Title:   Executive Director

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Sherrese Clarke

Name:   Sherrese Clarke
Title:   Vice President

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


BMO Harris Financing, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Elizabeth Armstrong

Name:   Elizabeth Armstrong
Title:   Director

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


Schedule 1.01(a)

Disqualified Lenders

Disqualified Lender ” shall mean any Person other than (a) a Lender, (b) an Affiliate of a Lender, (c) an Approved Fund of a Lender and (d) any other Person (other than a natural person) consented to by the Borrower; provided that with respect to any assignment after the first anniversary of the Closing Date, such consent of the Borrower shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.


Schedule 1.01(b)

Guarantors

None.


Schedule 1.01(c)

Immaterial Subsidiaries

 

    Crocodoc;

 

    Box Intl Holdings Ltd;

 

    Box Intl Technology Ltd;

 

    Box.com (UK) Ltd;

 

    Box France SARL;

 

    Box Deutschland GmbH;

 

    KK Box Japan.


Schedule 2.01(a)

Lenders and Commitments

 

Lender

   Commitment  

Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch

   $ 50,000,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.

   $ 20,000,000   

Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.

   $ 20,000,000   

BMO Harris Financing, Inc.

   $ 10,000,000   


Schedule 3.08

Subsidiaries

 

    Crocodoc;

 

    Box Intl Holdings Ltd;

 

    Box Intl Technology Ltd;

 

    Box.com (UK) Ltd;

 

    Box France SARL;

 

    Box Deutschland GmbH;

 

    KK Box Japan.


Schedule 3.18

Insurance

 

Coverage

  

Carrier

   A.M. Best
Rating
   Effective Date   Policy Number  

Limits

  

Deductibles

Property    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

$ 20,000,000 Blanket Personal Property

$ 3,000,000 Blanket Business Income / Extra Expense

$ 5,000,000 Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage

$ 250,000 Contingent Business Income

$ 500,000 Personal Property Unscheduled Locations

  

$1,000 Property Deductible, EXCEPT

as noted below

24 Hours Business Income Waiting Period

$100K, 24 Hrs Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage

Liability    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

Commercial General Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Occurrence

$ 2,000,000 General Aggregate

$ 2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations - Aggregate

$ 1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury

$ 1,000,000 Damage to Premise Rented to You

$ 10,000 Medical Payments

Employee Benefits Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Claim

$ 3,000,000 Aggregate

Contingent Auto Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Accident (Hired & Non-Owned Autos)

$ 10,000 Medical Payments (Hired Autos)

$ 50,000 Physical Damage (Hired Autos)

Foreign Voluntary Workers Compensation

State of Hire - US Nationals

Country of Permanent Residence - Third Country Nationals

Employers Liability

$ 1,000,000 Bodily Injury by accident - each accident

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - each employee

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - policy limit

Repatriation Expense

$ 1,000,000 Each Employee

$ 1,000,000 Aggregate

  

 

 

 

 

$ 1,000 Employee Benefits Liability

 

 

$ 1,000 Physical Damage Deductible

Automobile Liability    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

$ 1,000,000 Liability - Per Accident (Hired &

Non-Owned Autos)

ACV Physical Damage (Hired Autos)

  

$ 100 Comprehensive

 

$ 1,000 Collision


Umbrella   

Berkley/ Berkley

National Ins Co

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         TUL7002808-10       $ 20,000,000 Occurrence   
Workers Compensation   

Berkley/ Berkley

National Ins Co

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         TWC7002779-12      

Workers Compensation - Statutory Benefits

Employers Liability

$ 1,000,000 Bodily Injury by accident - each accident

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - each employee

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - policy limit

  
Local UK EL   

WR Berkley

Ins(Europe) LTD

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         GIL130G8F073       £ 5,000,000 Limit of Indemnity   


Coverage

  

Carrier

  

A.M. Best
Rating

  

Effective Date

  

Policy Number

  

Limits

  

Deductibles

Errors & Omissions    Zurich American Ins Co    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    EOC5761260-00   

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate for All Damages, Claim Expenses

and Privacy Event Expenses under all Coverages

Information Technology and Internet Liability

(incl Media Liability)

$ 10,000,000 Each Claim

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate

9/26/2008 Retroactive Date

System Security and Privacy Liability

$ 10,000,000 Each Claim

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate

$ 1,000,000 Each Claim - Regulatory Proceeding

Sublimit

$ 1,000,000 Aggregate - Regulatory Proceeding

Sublimit

9/26/2008 Retroactive

Date Privacy Breach Cost

$ 2,000,000 Each Claim

$ 2,000,000 Aggregate

  

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

 

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

(Regulatory Proceeding)

 

 

 

 

 

$ 100,000 Retention

                 
                 
Excess E&O $10mil xs $10mil   

ACE American

Ins Co

   A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    G23671621 001   

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $10,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $20mil    XL / Greenwich Ins Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    MTE 0041520   

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $20,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $30mil    AXIS Ins Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   

MSN 775222

/01/2013

  

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $30,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $40mil    CNA / Continental Casualty Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   

MSN 775222

/01/2013

  

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $40,000,000

  


Coverage

  

Carrier

   A.M. Best
Rating
   Effective Date    Policy Number   

Limits

  

Deductibles

Fiduciary Liability    Chubb / Federal Ins Co    A++, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    8224-1170    $ 1,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability   
Crime    Chubb / Federal Ins Co    A++, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    8224-1170   

$ 5,000,000 Employee Theft

$ 2,000,000 Premises

$ 2,000,000 In Transit

$ 2,000,000 Forgery

$ 2,000,000 Computer Fraud

$ 2,000,000 Funds Transfer Fraud

$ 2,000,000 Money Orders and Counterfeit Money

$ 2,000,000 Credit Card Fraud

$ 5,000,000 Client Coverage

$ 100,000 Expense

   $ 5,000 Retention
Employment Practices Liability    HCC    A+, XIV    3/21/13-3/21/14    14-MGU-13

-A28851

   $ 5,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability    $ 100,000 Retention
Primary Directors & Officers    HCC    A+, XIV    3/21/13-3/21/14    14-MGU-13

-A28851

   $ 5,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability   

$ - Retention (Insuring Agreement A)

Non-indemnifiable Loss

$ 50,000 Retention (Insuring Agreement A)

Indemnifiable Loss

$ 50,000 Retention (Insuring Agreement B)

Excess Directors & Officers

$5mil xs $5mil

   ACE / U.S. Specialty Ins Co    A+, XV    3/21/13-3/21/14    DOX
G26793038
  

$ 5,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying D&O layers of $5,000,000

  

 

Proprietary Information : Data provided on this page is proprietary between Aon and Box, Inc.

This summary is furnished to you for general informational purposes and is accurate only as of the effective date of your coverage. This document is not an insurance policy and does not amend, alter or extend the coverage afforded by the listed proposed policy(ies);

please consult your policy(ies) for the actual terms, conditions and limits that apply to your coverage. ©Aon Corporation, 2012. All rights Reserved.

The Borrower also subscribes to the following employee benefit plans:

 

    Medical: Kaiser and Anthem

 

    Dental and Vision: Guardian

 

    Life/Disability: Guardian

 

    Business Travel Accident, Medical Benefits Abroad, and International Medical: Cigna


Schedule 3.19(a)

UCC Filing Offices

Secretary of State of the State of Delaware.


Schedule 3.20(a)

Owned Real Property

None.


Schedule 3.20(b)

Leased Real Property

Office Lease by and between Borrower and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP for the lease of the premises located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California, effective July 1, 2011 (the “ El Camino Lease ”).

Lease Agreement by and between the Borrower and J&R Realty Borrower for the lease of the premises located at 409 Sherman Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated June 10, 2008 (the “ Sherman Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Sherman Lease is the subject of a Sublease by and between Borrower and Groupon, Inc., dated September 2010.

Lease Agreement by and between the Borrower and El Camino Center for the lease of the premises located at 200-380 Portage Drive, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated March 31, 2010 (the “ Portage Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Portage Lease is the subject of (i) a Sublease by and between Borrower and Cloudera, Inc., as the Subtenant, for the premises located at 220 Portage Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated March 12, 2012; and (ii) a Sublease by and between Borrower and Wepay, Inc., as the Subtenant, for the premises located at 380 Portage Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, May 24, 2012.

Office Lease by and between the Borrower and Kilroy Realty, L.P. for the premises located at 100 First Street, 13th Floor, San Francisco, CA, dated May 11, 2012 (the “ First Street Lease ”).

Sublease by and among the Borrower, as the Subtenant, LeMessurier Consultants Inc., as the Tenant, and USREIF Central Plaza Massachusetts, LLC, as the Landlord, for the lease of the premises located at 675 Massachusetts Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02139, dated June 1, 2010, as amended (the “ Massachusetts Lease ”). A portion of the property leased pursuant to the Massachusetts Lease is the subject of a Sublease by and between Borrower and Biff Labs, Inc., dated September 1, 2011.

Lease by and between the Borrower and 4410 Los Altos, LLC for the lease of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Suites 102, 106, 107, 206 & 210, Los Altos, CA, dated August 10, 2011, as amended on September 2, 2011 and October 27, 2011 (the “ Los Altos Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Los Altos Lease is the subject of (i) a Sublease by and between Borrower, as Sublessor, and Voyageprive.com for Suite 206 of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA, dated September 13, 2011, and (ii) a Sublease by and between Borrower, as Sublessor, and WebFilings for Suite 200 of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA, dated September 30, 2011.


Schedule 6.01(a)

Existing Indebtedness

Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit, dated June 24, 2011, issued by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. on behalf of the Borrower in connection with the Office Lease by and between Borrower and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP for the lease of the premises located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California, effective July 1, 2011.

Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit, dated May 11, 2012, issued by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. on behalf of the Borrower in connection with the Office Lease by and between the Borrower and Kilroy Realty, L.P. for the premises located at 100 First Street, 13th Floor, San Francisco, CA, dated May 11, 2012 (the “ First Street LOC ”).

Shares of the Borrower’s Series A Preferred Stock, Series B Preferred Stock, Series C Preferred Stock, Series D Preferred Stock, Series D-1 Preferred Stock, Series D-2 Preferred Stock, and Series E Preferred Stock are redeemable if requested by the holders of not less than sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Preferred Stock of the Borrower, voting as a single class, at any time after July 20, 2017; provided , however , that if such a request is made, the prior approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred Stock shall also be required to redeem the shares of Series E Preferred Stock.


Schedule 6.02(a)

Existing Liens

Security Agreement issued by the Borrower to Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., in connection with the First Street LOC referenced in Section 6.01(a) above.


EXHIBIT A

[Form of]

ADMINISTRATIVE QUESTIONNAIRE

Box, Inc.

 

Agent Address:    Credit Suisse AG                          Return form to: William O’Daly
   Eleven Madison Avenue            Telephone: (212) 325-1986
   New York, NY 10010                    Facsimile: (212) 743-2254
      E-mail: william.o’daly@credit-suisse.com

 

It is very important that all of the requested information be completed accurately and that this questionnaire be returned promptly. If your institution is sub-allocating its allocation, please fill out an administrative questionnaire for each legal entity.

Legal Name of Lender to appear in Documentation:

 

 

 

Signature Block Information:  

 

 

•    Signing Credit Agreement

   ¨    Yes    ¨    No   

•    Coming in via Assignment

   ¨    Yes    ¨    No   

Type of Lender:                     

(Bank, Asset Manager, Broker/Dealer, CLO/CDO; Finance Company, Hedge Fund, Insurance, Mutual Fund, Pension Fund, Other Regulated Investment Fund, Special Purpose Vehicle, Other- please specify)

 

Lender Parent:  

 

 

Domestic Address      Eurodollar Address

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

A-1


Contacts/Notification Methods: Borrowings, Paydowns, Interest, Fees, etc.
   Primary Credit Contact       Secondary Credit Contact
Name:   

 

     

 

Company:   

 

     

 

Title:   

 

     

 

Address:   

 

     

 

  

 

     

 

Telephone:   

 

     

 

Facsimile:   

 

     

 

E-Mail Address:   

 

     

 

   Primary Operations Contact       Secondary Operations Contact
Name:   

 

     

 

Company:   

 

     

 

Title:   

 

     

 

Address:   

 

     

 

  

 

     

 

Telephone:   

 

     

 

Facsimile:   

 

     

 

E-Mail Address:   

 

     

 

Lender’s Domestic Wire Instructions
Bank Name:   

 

ABA/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

 

A-2


Lender’s Foreign Wire Instructions
Currency:   

 

Bank Name:   

 

Swift/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

Agent’s Wire Instructions
[The Agent’s wire instructions will be disclosed at the time of closing.]
Bank Name:   

 

ABA/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

 

A-3


Tax Documents

NON-U.S. LENDER INSTITUTIONS:

I. Corporations :

If your institution is incorporated outside of the United States for U.S. federal income tax purposes, and is the beneficial owner of the interest and other income it receives, you must complete one of the following tax forms, as applicable to your institution: a.) Form W-8BEN ( Certificate of Foreign Status of Beneficial Owner ) or b.) Form W-8ECI ( Income Effectively Connected to a U.S. Trade or Business )

A U.S. taxpayer identification number is required for any institution submitting Form W-8ECI. It is also required on Form W-8BEN for certain institutions claiming the benefits of a tax treaty with the U.S. Please refer to the instructions when completing the form applicable to your institution. In addition, please be advised that U.S. tax regulations do not permit the acceptance of faxed forms. An original tax form must be submitted .

II. Flow-Through Entities :

If your institution is organized outside the U.S., and is classified for U.S. federal income tax purposes as either a Partnership, Trust, Qualified or Non-Qualified Intermediary, or other non- U.S. flow-through entity, an original Form W-8IMY ( Certificate of Foreign Intermediary, Foreign Flow-Through Entity, or Certain U.S. Branches for United States Tax Withholding ) must be completed by the intermediary together with a withholding statement. Flow-through entities other than Qualified Intermediaries are required to include tax forms for each of the underlying beneficial owners.

Please refer to the instructions when completing this form. In addition, please be advised that U.S. tax regulations do not permit the acceptance of faxed forms. Original tax form(s) must be submitted .

U.S. LENDER INSTITUTIONS:

If your institution is incorporated or organized within the United States, you must complete and return Form W-9 ( Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification ). Please be advised that we request that you submit an original Form W-9 .

Pursuant to the language contained in the tax section of the Credit Agreement, the applicable tax form for your institution must be completed and returned prior to the first payment of income. Failure to provide the proper tax form when requested may subject your institution to U.S. tax withholding.

 

A-4


EXHIBIT B

[Form of]

AFFILIATE SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT

Section 1. Agreement to Subordinate . [INSERT NAME OF OBLIGOR]’s (the “ Company ”) obligations to [INSERT NAME OF LENDER] (the “ Subordinated Lender ”) under [INSERT NAME OF DOCUMENT] (the “ Subordinated Obligations ”) are subordinated in right of payment, to the extent and in the manner provided in this Affiliate Subordination Agreement (this “ Instrument ”), to the prior payment of all Senior Debt. “ Senior Debt ” means the Obligations (as defined in the Credit Agreement dated as of July [     ], 2013 (as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”) among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as the borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto from time to time and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties) and “ Senior Lender ” means the holder from time to time of the Senior Debt. The subordination provisions of this Instrument are for the benefit of and enforceable by the Senior Lender or its designated representatives.

Section 2. Liquidation, Dissolution, Bankruptcy. Upon any payment or distribution of the assets of the Company to creditors upon a total or partial liquidation or a total or partial dissolution of the Company or in a bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, receivership or similar proceeding relating to the Company or its property:

(1) the Senior Lender is entitled to receive payment in full in cash of all Senior Debt, including all interest accrued or accruing on the Senior Debt after the commencement of any bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization or similar case or proceeding at the contract rate (including, without limitation, any contract rate applicable upon default) specified in the Credit Agreement, whether or not the claim for the interest is allowed or allowable as a claim in the case or proceeding with respect to the Senior Debt (only such payment constituting “ payment in full ”) before the Subordinated Lender will be entitled to receive any payment of principal of or interest on the Subordinated Obligations; and

(2) until the Senior Debt is paid in full, any payment or distribution to which the Subordinated Lender would be entitled but for these subordination provisions shall instead be made to the Senior Lender as its interests may appear.

Section 3. Default or Event of Default on Senior Debt . Except with the written consent of, or upon demand by, the Senior Lender, the Company shall not pay any Subordinated Obligations and the Subordinated Lender shall not take or receive from the Company, directly or indirectly, in cash or other property or by set-off or in any other manner, including, without limitation, from or by way of collateral, payment of all or any of the Subordinated Obligations if, at the time, (i) the maturity of some or all of the Senior Debt shall have been accelerated or (ii) any Default or Event of Default (as defined under the Credit Agreement) has occurred or is continuing and (in the case of this clause (ii)) the Senior Lender shall have given notice to the Company prohibiting such payment.

 

B-1


Section 4. When Distribution Must Be Paid Over . If a payment or other distribution is made to the Subordinated Lender that because of these subordination provisions should not have been made to it, the Subordinated Lender shall hold it in trust for the Senior Lender and pay it over to the Senior Lender as its interests may appear.

Section 5. Subrogation . A distribution made under these subordination provisions to the Senior Lender which otherwise would have been made to the Subordinated Lender is not, as between the Company and the Subordinated Lender, a payment by the Company on the Senior Debt. After all Senior Debt is paid in full and until the Subordinated Obligations are paid in full, the Subordinated Lender will be subrogated to the rights of the Senior Lender to receive payments in respect of the Senior Debt.

Section 6. Relative Rights; Subordination Not to Prevent Events of Default or Limit Right to Accelerate . These subordination provisions define the relative rights of the Subordinated Lender and the Senior Lender and do not impair, as between the Company and the Subordinated Lender, the obligation of the Company, which is absolute and unconditional, to pay principal of and interest on the Subordinated Obligations in accordance with their terms; provided that so long as any Default or Event of Default (as defined in the Credit Agreement) has occurred and is continuing, the Subordinated Lender shall not be entitled to, and waives its right to, accelerate the maturity of the Subordinated Obligations upon a Default under this Instrument or exercise any remedies upon a Default under this Instrument. The failure to make a payment on the Subordinated Obligations by reason of these subordination provisions does not prevent the occurrence of a Default under this Instrument.

Section 7. Subordinated Lender Entitled to Rely . For the purpose of ascertaining the outstanding amount of the Senior Debt, the Senior Lender, and all other information relevant to making any payment or distribution to the Senior Lender pursuant hereto, the Subordinated Lender is entitled to rely upon an order or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction in which any proceedings of the nature referred to in Section 2 above are pending, a certificate of the liquidating trustee or other person making a payment or distribution to the Subordinated Lender, or information provided by the Senior Lender or any of the Lenders.

Section 8. Subordination May Not Be Impaired By Company . No right of the Senior Lender to enforce the subordination of the Subordinated Obligations will be impaired by any act or failure to act by the Company or by its failure to comply with the provisions hereunder.

Section 9. Reliance by Senior Lender on Subordination Provisions; No Waiver . (a) The Subordinated Lender acknowledges and agrees that these subordination provisions are, and are intended to be, an inducement and a consideration to the Senior Lender, whether the Senior Debt was created or acquired before or after the incurrence of the Subordinated Obligations, to acquire or to hold the Senior Debt, and the Senior Lender will be deemed conclusively to have relied on these subordination provisions in acquiring and holding such Senior Debt.

 

B-2


(b) The Senior Lender may, at any time and from time to time, without the consent of or notice to the Subordinated Lender, without incurring any liability or responsibility to the Subordinated Lender, and without impairing the rights of the Senior Lender under these subordination provisions, do any of the following:

(1) change the manner, place or terms of payment or extend the time of payment of, or renew or alter, the Senior Debt or any instrument evidencing the same or any agreement under which the Senior Debt is outstanding or secured;

(2) sell, exchange, release or otherwise deal with any property pledged, mortgaged or otherwise securing the Senior Debt;

(3) release any person liable in any manner for the payment of the Senior Debt; or

(4) exercise or refrain from exercising any rights against the Company and any other person.

[Signature Pages Follow]

 

B-3


[OBLIGOR]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
[LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

B-4


EXHIBIT C

[Form of]

ASSIGNMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

This Assignment and Acceptance (the “ Assignment and Acceptance ”) is dated as of the Effective Date set forth below and is entered into by and between [ Insert name of Assignor ] (the “ Assignor ”) and [ Insert name of Assignee ] (the “ Assignee ”). Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement (defined below), receipt of a copy of which is hereby acknowledged by the Assignee. The Standard Terms and Conditions set forth in Annex 1 attached hereto are hereby agreed to and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Assignment and Acceptance as if set forth herein in full.

For an agreed consideration, the Assignor hereby irrevocably sells and assigns to the Assignee, and the Assignee hereby irrevocably purchases and assumes from the Assignor, subject to and in accordance with the Standard Terms and Conditions and the Credit Agreement, as of the Effective Date inserted by the Administrative Agent as contemplated below, (i) all of the Assignor’s rights and obligations in its capacity as a Lender under the Credit Agreement and any other documents or instruments delivered pursuant thereto to the extent related to the amount and percentage interest identified below of all of such outstanding rights and obligations of the Assignor under the respective facilities identified below (including participations in any Letters of Credit included in such facilities) and (ii) to the extent permitted to be assigned under applicable law, all claims, suits, causes of action and any other right of the Assignor (in its capacity as a Lender) against any person, whether known or unknown, arising under or in connection with the Credit Agreement, any other documents or instruments delivered pursuant thereto or the loan transactions governed thereby or in any way based on or related to any of the foregoing, including, but not limited to, contract claims, tort claims, malpractice claims, statutory claims and all other claims at law or in equity related to the rights and obligations sold and assigned pursuant to clause (i) above (the rights and obligations sold and assigned pursuant to clauses (i) and (ii) above being referred to herein collectively as, the “ Assigned Interest ”). The Assignee represents and warrants that the Assignee is not a competitor of Box, Inc. or its subsidiaries or a controlled affiliate of any such competitor (the “ No Competitor Representation ”). Such sale and assignment is without recourse to the Assignor and, except as expressly provided in this Assignment and Acceptance, without representation or warranty by the Assignor.

 

1.    Assignor:   

 

2.    Assignee:   

 

      [and is an Affiliate of [ identify Lender ]]
3.    Borrower:    BOX, INC.
4.    Administrative Agent: Credit Suisse AG, as the administrative agent under the Credit Agreement

 

C-1


5.    Credit Agreement: The Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, amended and restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.
6.    Assigned Interest:

 

Facility Assigned

  

Aggregate Amount of

Commitment/Loans for

all Lenders

   Amount of
Commitment/Loans
Assigned
   Percentage Assigned of
Commitment/Loans 1
     CUSIP Number

Revolving Credit Commitment

   $    $      %      

 

 

1   Set forth, to at least 9 decimals, as a percentage of the Commitment/Loans of all Lenders thereunder.

 

C-2


Effective Date:             , 201    [TO BE INSERTED BY ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AND WHICH SHALL BE THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF RECORDATION OF TRANSFER IN THE REGISTER THEREFOR.]

The terms set forth in this Assignment and Acceptance are hereby agreed to:

 

ASSIGNOR
[NAME OF ASSIGNOR]
By:  

 

Title:  
ASSIGNEE
[NAME OF ASSIGNEE]
By:  

 

Title:  

 

C-3


Consented to and Accepted:
BOX, INC. 2
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS
 

BRANCH

as Administrative Agent 3

By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

 

 

2   To be completed to the extent consent is required under Section 9.04(b) or the definition of “Eligible Assignee”.
3   To be completed to the extent consent is required under Section 9.04(b) or the definition of “Eligible Assignee”.

 

C-4


ANNEX 1 to Assignment and Acceptance

BOX, INC.

CREDIT AGREEMENT

STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR

ASSIGNMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

1. Representations and Warranties.

1.1 Assignor . The Assignor (a) represents and warrants that (i) it is the legal and beneficial owner of the Assigned Interest, (ii) the Assigned Interest is free and clear of any lien, encumbrance or other adverse claim and (iii) it has full power and authority, and has taken all action necessary, to execute and deliver this Assignment and Acceptance and to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby, and (b) assumes no responsibility with respect to (i) any statements, warranties or representations made in or in connection with the Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, (ii) the execution, legality, validity, enforceability, genuineness, sufficiency or value of the Loan Documents or any collateral thereunder, (iii) the financial condition of the Borrower, the Subsidiaries or any of their Affiliates or any other person obligated in respect of any Loan Document or (iv) the performance or observance by the Borrower, the Subsidiaries or any of their Affiliates or any other person of any of their respective obligations under any Loan Document.

1.2. Assignee . The Assignee (a) represents and warrants that (i) it has full power and authority, and has taken all action necessary, to execute and deliver this Assignment and Acceptance and to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby and to become a Lender under the Credit Agreement, (ii) it meets all requirements of an Eligible Assignee under the Credit Agreement (subject to receipt of such consents as may be required under the Credit Agreement), (iii) from and after the Effective Date, it shall be bound by the provisions of the Credit Agreement as a Lender thereunder and, to the extent of the Assigned Interest, shall have the obligations of a Lender thereunder, (iv) it is sophisticated with respect to decisions to acquire assets of the type represented by the Assigned Interest and either it, or the Person exercising discretion in making its decision to acquire the Assigned Interest, is experienced in acquiring assets of such type, (v) it has received a copy of the Credit Agreement, and has received, or has been accorded the opportunity to receive, copies of the most recent financial statements delivered pursuant to Sections 4.02(j) or 5.04 thereof, as applicable, and such other documents and information as it has deemed appropriate to make its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Assignment and Acceptance and to purchase the Assigned Interest, (vi) it has, independently and without reliance upon the Administrative Agent or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Assignment and Acceptance and to purchase the Assigned Interest, (vii) it has duly completed an Administrative Questionnaire substantially in the form of Exhibit A to the Credit Agreement, unless it is already a Lender under the Credit Agreement, (viii) the Administrative Agent has

 

C-5


received a processing and recordation fee of $3,500 as of the Effective Date (unless such fee has been waived by the Administrative Agent), and (ix) if it is a Foreign Lender, attached to the Assignment and Acceptance is any documentation required to be delivered by it pursuant to Section 2. 19(f) of the Credit Agreement, duly completed and executed by the Assignee; and (b) agrees that (i) it will, independently and without reliance on the Administrative Agent, the Assignor or any other Lender, and based on such documents and information as it shall deem appropriate at the time, continue to make its own credit decisions in taking or not taking action under the Loan Documents and (ii) it will perform in accordance with their terms all of the obligations that by the terms of the Loan Documents are required to be performed by it as a Lender.

2. Payments . From and after the Effective Date, the Administrative Agent shall make all payments in respect of the Assigned Interest (including payments of principal, interest, fees and other amounts) to the Assignor for amounts that have accrued to but excluding the Effective Date and to the Assignee for amounts that have accrued from and after the Effective Date.

3. General Provisions . This Assignment and Acceptance shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns. This Assignment and Acceptance may be executed in any number of counterparts, which together shall constitute one instrument. Delivery of an executed counterpart of a signature page of this Assignment and Acceptance by telecopy shall be effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of this Assignment and Acceptance. This Assignment and Acceptance shall be construed in accordance with and governed by, the law of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of principles of law that would require the application of the laws of another jurisdiction. The Borrower shall be a third party beneficiary of the No Competitor Representation of the Assignee.

 

C-6


EXHIBIT D

[Form of]

BORROWING REQUEST

Credit Suisse AG

      as Administrative Agent for

the Lenders referred to below,

Eleven Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10010

Attention: [                    ]

Re: BOX, INC.

[Date]

Ladies and Gentlemen:

Reference is made to the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. The undersigned Borrower hereby gives you notice pursuant to Section 2.03 of the Credit Agreement that it requests a Borrowing under the Credit Agreement, and in that connection sets forth below the terms on which such Borrowing is requested to be made:

 

(A)   

Borrower

   Box, Inc.
(B)   

Class of Borrowing

   Revolving Borrowing
(C)   

Principal amount of Borrowing 1

  

 

(D)   

Date of Borrowing (which is a Business Day)

  

 

(E)   

Type of Borrowing

   [ABR] [Eurodollar]
(F)   

For Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period and the last day thereof

  

 

(G)   

Funds are requested to be disbursed to the undersigned Borrower’s account with [BANK] (Account No.             ).

  

 

 

 

1   Loans requested shall be in an aggregate principal amount that is (i) an integral multiple of $1.0 million and not less than $5.0 million or (ii) equal to the remaining available balance of the applicable Commitments.

 

D-1


The undersigned Borrower hereby certifies that on the proposed Date of Borrowing, both before and after giving effect thereto and to the application of proceeds therefrom, the Borrowing complies with the terms and conditions of the Credit Agreement (including, without limitation, Sections 4.01(b)-(e) of the Credit Agreement).

[Signature Page Follows]

 

D-2


BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Responsible Officer]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Responsible Officer]

 

D-3


EXHIBIT E

[Form of]

COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

Reference is made to the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. Pursuant to Section 5.04(c) of the Credit Agreement, [            ], [Financial Officer] of [            ] (in such capacity and not in his or her individual capacity), hereby certifies as follows:

a. No Default or Event of Default has occurred under the Credit Agreement which has not been previously disclosed in writing to the Administrative Agent pursuant to a Compliance Certificate.

b. As of the date of this certificate, the following constitute the Immaterial Subsidiaries: [     ].

 

E-1


Dates this [    ] day of [        ], 201[  ].

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Financial Officer]

 

E-2


EXHIBIT F

[Form of]

GUARANTEE AND COLLATERAL AGREEMENT

(Under separate cover)

 

F-1


EXHIBIT G

[Form of]

INTEREST ELECTION REQUEST

Credit Suisse AG

      as Administrative Agent for

the Lenders referred to below,

Eleven Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10010

Attention: [                    ]

[Date]

Re: BOX, INC.

Ladies and Gentlemen:

This Interest Election Request is delivered to you pursuant to Section 2.10 of the Credit Agreement, dated as of [             ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used herein but not defined shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. The undersigned Borrower hereby requests that on [            ] 1 (the “ Interest Election Date ”),

1. $[        ] of the presently outstanding principal amount of the Revolving Loans originally made on [                    ],

2. all presently being maintained as [ABR Loans][Eurodollar Loans],

3. be [converted into][continued as]

4. [Eurodollar Loans having an Interest Period of [one/two/three/six]months] [ABR Loans].

[Signature Page Follows]

 

 

1   Shall be a Business Day that is (a) the date hereof in the case of a conversion into ABR Borrowing to the extent this Interest Election Request is delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon), New York City time on the date hereof, otherwise the Business Day following the date of delivery hereof, and (b) three Business Days following the date hereof in the case of a conversion into/continuation of Eurodollar Borrowings to the extent this Interest Election Request is delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon), New York City time on the date hereof, otherwise the fourth Business Day following the date of delivery hereof, in each case.

 

G-1


The undersigned Borrower has caused this Interest Election Request to be executed and delivered by its duly authorized officer as of the date first written above.

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

G-2


EXHIBIT H

[Form of]

REVOLVING NOTE

 

$            New York, New York
  [Date]

FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned, BOX, INC., a Delaware corporation (the Borrower ), hereby promises to pay to the order of [        ] (the “ Lender ”) on the Maturity Date (as defined in the Credit Agreement referred to below), in lawful money of the United States and in immediately available funds, the principal amount of the lesser of (a)           DOLLARS ($        ) and (b) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Loans of the Lender outstanding under the Credit Agreement referred to below. The Borrower further agrees to pay interest in like money at such office specified in Section 2.18 of the Credit Agreement on the unpaid principal amount hereof from time to time from the date hereof at the rates, and on the dates, specified in Section 2.06 of such Credit Agreement.

The Lender may endorse and attach a schedule to reflect the date, Type and amount of each Loan of the Lender outstanding under the Credit Agreement, the date and amount of each payment or prepayment of principal hereof, and the date of each interest rate conversion or continuation pursuant to Section 2.10 of the Credit Agreement and the principal amount subject thereto; provided that the failure of the Lender to make any such recordation (or any error in such recordation) shall not affect the obligations of the Borrower hereunder or under the Credit Agreement.

This Revolving Note is one of the Notes referred to in the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, amended and restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders party that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties, is subject to the provisions thereof and is subject to optional and mandatory prepayment in whole or in part as provided therein. Terms used herein which are defined in the Credit Agreement shall have such defined meanings unless otherwise defined herein or unless the context otherwise requires.

This Revolving Note is secured and guaranteed as provided in the Credit Agreement and the Security Documents. Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement and the Security Documents for a description of the properties and assets in which a security interest has been granted, the nature and extent of the security and guarantees, the terms and conditions upon which the security interest and each guarantee was granted and the rights of the holder of this Revolving Note in respect thereof.

During the continuance of any one or more of the Events of Default specified in the Credit Agreement, all amounts then remaining unpaid on this Revolving Note may be declared to be immediately due and payable, all as provided in Section 7.01 thereof.

 

H-1


All parties now and hereafter liable with respect to this Revolving Note, whether maker, principal, surety, guarantor, endorser or otherwise, hereby waive presentment, demand, protest and all other notices of any kind.

THIS REVOLVING NOTE MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED EXCEPT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT. TRANSFERS OF THIS REVOLVING NOTE MUST BE RECORDED IN THE REGISTER MAINTAINED BY THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT PURSUANT TO THE TERMS OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT.

THIS REVOLVING NOTE AND ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS REVOLVING NOTE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CLAIMS SOUNDING IN CONTRACT LAW OR TORT LAW ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF) SHALL BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

[Signature Page Follows]

 

H-2


BOX, INC.,

as Borrower

By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

H-3


EXHIBIT I-1

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Lenders That Are Not Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes) Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [    ],          2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record and beneficial owner of the Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)) in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) it is not a bank within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iii) it is not a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (iv) it is not a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished the Administrative Agent and the Borrower with a certificate of its non-U.S. Person status on IRS Form W-8BEN. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished the Borrower and the Administrative Agent with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-1-1


[NAME OF LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-1-2


EXHIBIT I-2

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Participants That Are Not Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of March 23, 2012 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record and beneficial owner of the participation in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) it is not a bank within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iii) it is not a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code, and (iv) it is not a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished its participating Lender with a certificate of its non-U.S. Person status on IRS Form W-8BEN. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform such Lender in writing, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished such Lender with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-2-1


[NAME OF PARTICIPANT]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-2-2


EXHIBIT I-3

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Participants That Are Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record owner of the participation in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) its direct or indirect partners/members are the sole beneficial owners of such participation, (iii) with respect such participation, neither the undersigned nor any of its direct or indirect partners/members is a bank extending credit pursuant to a loan agreement entered into in the ordinary course of its trade or business within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iv) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (v) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished its participating Lender with IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by one of the following forms from each of its partners/members that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption: (i) an IRS Form W-8BEN or (ii) an IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by an IRS Form W-8BEN from each of such partner’s/member’s beneficial owners that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform such Lender and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished such Lender with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-3-1


[NAME OF PARTICIPANT]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:             , 201[  ]

 

I-3-2


EXHIBIT I-4

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Lenders That Are Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record owner of the Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)) in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) its direct or indirect partners/members are the sole beneficial owners of such Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)), (iii) with respect to the extension of credit pursuant to this Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, neither the undersigned nor any of its direct or indirect partners/members is a bank extending credit pursuant to a loan agreement entered into in the ordinary course of its trade or business within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iv) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (v) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished the Administrative Agent and the Borrower with IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by one of the following forms from each of its partners/members that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption: (i) an IRS Form W-8BEN or (ii) an IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by an IRS Form W-8BEN from each of such partner’s/member’s beneficial owners that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished the Borrower and the Administrative Agent with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-4-1


[NAME OF LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-4-2


AMENDMENT NO. 1 TO CREDIT AGREEMENT

AMENDMENT dated as of June 19, 2014 to the Credit Agreement dated as of August 27, 2013 (as heretofore amended, the “ Credit Agreement ”) among BOX, INC. (the “ Borrower ”), the LENDERS party thereto (the “ Lenders ”) and CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, as Administrative Agent (the “ Administrative Agent ”).

W I T N E S S E T H :

WHEREAS, Section 9.07 of the Credit Agreement permits the Credit Agreement to be amended from time to time by the Borrower and the Required Lenders; and

WHEREAS, the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the Lenders identified on the signature pages hereto which collectively constitute the Required Lenders have agreed to amend certain provisions of the Credit Agreement, subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, the parties hereto agree as follows:

SECTION 1. Defined Terms; References . Unless otherwise specifically defined herein, each term used herein that is defined in the Credit Agreement has the meaning assigned to such term in the Credit Agreement. Each reference to “hereof”, “hereunder”, “herein” and “hereby” and each other similar reference and each reference to “this Agreement” and each other similar reference contained in the Credit Agreement shall, after this Amendment becomes effective, refer to the Credit Agreement as amended hereby.

SECTION 2. Amendments . (a) Section 6.01 of the Credit Agreement is hereby amended by (i) deleting the “and” at the end of clause (m) thereof, (ii) replacing the period at the end of clause (n) thereof with “; and” and (iii) adding a new clause (o) thereto that reads as follows:

(o) (x) unsecured Indebtedness incurred by the Borrower in an aggregate principal amount not exceeding $100,000,000 and any Permitted Refinancing thereof and (y) any unsecured Guarantee by any other Loan Party of the Indebtedness permitted pursuant to clause (x); provided that (i) such Indebtedness (including any Guarantee thereof) shall be subordinated to the Obligations on terms at least as favorable to the Lenders as those then customary for high yield debt issuances, (ii) at the time of incurrence thereof and immediately after giving effect thereto, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (iii) such Indebtedness shall (A) require no amortization payments, and shall not have a scheduled maturity, prior to the date that is 180 days following the Maturity Date, (B) not have covenants or events of default that, taken as a whole, are more restrictive than the covenants and events of default included in this Agreement (as determined in good faith by the Borrower), (C) not include any mandatory prepayment, redemption, sinking fund obligation, repurchase or other provisions requiring the payment of principal that would apply prior to the date that is 180 days following the Maturity Date (other than customary provisions requiring offers to purchase upon asset sales, casualty events, condemnation events and change of control, and acceleration provisions, in each case,


that are customary for high yield debt securities (as determined in good faith by the Borrower)), (D) not include any financial maintenance covenants and (E) not be Guaranteed by any Person other than by a Loan Party (and then only on an unsecured and subordinated basis as set forth above).

(b) Section 6.10(b)(i) of the Credit Agreement is hereby amended and restated in its entirety to read as follows:

Make any distribution, whether in cash, property, securities or a combination thereof, in respect of, or pay, or commit to pay, or directly or indirectly repay, prepay, redeem, repurchase, retire or otherwise acquire for consideration, or set apart any sum for the aforesaid purposes, any Indebtedness except (A) the payment of (x) the Indebtedness created hereunder and (y) other Indebtedness permitted under Section 6.01, other than any Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(o) (provided that any such payment shall be permitted by any provisions pursuant to which such Indebtedness is subordinated to the Obligations, if applicable), (B) the payment of Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(o) with the Net Cash Proceeds of a Qualified Public Offering so long as such payment is permitted pursuant to the subordination provisions governing such Indebtedness; provided that the Borrower may make required payments of fees and regularly scheduled payments of interest on such Indebtedness so long as such payment is permitted pursuant to the subordination provisions governing such Indebtedness, (C) Permitted Refinancings of Indebtedness permitted by Section 6.01 and (D) the payment of secured Indebtedness that becomes due as a result of the voluntary sale or transfer of the property or assets securing such Indebtedness

SECTION 3. Representations of Borrower . The Borrower represents and warrants that (i) the representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 of the Credit Agreement and in the other Loan Documents will be true on and as of the Amendment Effective Date (as defined below) and (ii) no Default will have occurred and be continuing on such date.

SECTION 4. Governing Law . This Amendment shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York.

SECTION 5. Effectiveness . This Amendment shall become effective on the date (the “ Amendment Effective Date ”) when the Administrative Agent shall have received from each of the Borrower and the Required Lenders a counterpart hereof signed by such party or facsimile or other written confirmation (in form satisfactory to the Administrative Agent) that such party has signed a counterpart hereof.

SECTION 6. Miscellaneous . The parties hereto agree that any Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(o) of the Credit Agreement shall at all times be deemed to be Material Indebtedness for purposes of the Credit Agreement. This Amendment may be signed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument. This Amendment shall constitute a Loan Document for all purposes of the Credit Agreement. In accordance with Section 9.05 of the Credit

 

-2-


Agreement, the Borrower agrees to reimburse the Administrative Agent for its reasonable and documented out-of-pocket expenses in connection with this Agreement, including the reasonable and documented fees, charges and disbursements of counsel for the Administrative Agent. The Borrower acknowledges and agrees that the Administrative Agent, each Lender and each Related Party of any of the foregoing shall be entitled to the benefit of the indemnity provisions of Section 9.05 of the Credit Agreement, as if each such person was included in the definition of “Indemnitee” thereunder, this Agreement was the “Agreement” referred to therein and the transactions contemplated hereunder were the “transactions” referred to therein. Except as expressly set forth herein, this Amendment shall not by implication or otherwise limit, impair, constitute a waiver of or otherwise affect the rights and remedies of any Lender or the Administrative Agent under the Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, and shall not alter, modify, amend or in any way affect any of the terms, conditions, obligations, covenants or agreements contained in the Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, all of which are ratified and affirmed in all respects and shall continue in full force and effect. Nothing herein shall be deemed to entitle any Loan Party to a consent to, or a waiver, amendment, modification or other change of, any of the terms, conditions, obligations, covenants or agreements contained in the Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document in similar or different circumstances.

 

-3-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Amendment to be duly executed as of the date first above written.

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

/s/ Dylan Smith

  Name:   Dylan Smith
  Title:   CFO
By:  

/s/ Jennifer Ceran

  Name:   Jennifer Ceran
  Title:   VP Finance & Treasurer

 

[ Signature Page to Amendment No. 1 to the Credit Agreement ]


CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, individually and as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent
By:  

/s/ Bill O’Daly

  Name:   Bill O’Daly
  Title:   Authorized Signatory
By:  

/s/ Michael D’Onofrio

  Name:   Michael D’Onofrio
  Title:   Authorized Signatory

 

[ Signature Page to Amendment No. 1 to the Credit Agreement ]


JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.
By:  

/s/ John Kowalczuk

  Name:   John Kowalczuk
  Title:   Executive Director

 

[ Signature Page to Amendment No. 1 to the Credit Agreement ]


Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Christopher Winthrop

  Name:   Christopher Winthrop
  Title:   Vice President

 

[ Signature Page to Amendment No. 1 to the Credit Agreement ]


BMO Harris Financing, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Elizabeth Armstrong

  Name:   Elizabeth Armstrong
  Title:   Managing Director

 

[ Signature Page to Amendment No. 1 to the Credit Agreement ]

Exhibit 10.15

MASTER LICENSE AND SERVICE AGREEMENT

THIS MASTER LICENSE AND SERVICE AGREEMENT (“ Agreement ”) by and between [***] , L.L.C. , a Delaware limited liability company (“Licensor”) and BOX.NET, INC., a Washington corporation (‘Customer”) is entered into as of this 17 th day of March, 2008.

 

  1. SERVICES; TERM; PAYMENT

1.1 General . Customer shall, for the applicable Term (as defined below), license the Space (as defined below) in the Building (as defined below) from Licensor, and pay all amounts under this Agreement in connection therewith, and license and pay for the applicable Services (as defined below) to be provided to Customer pursuant to the terms of this Agreement. Licensor shall provide the applicable Services to Customer, to the extent expressly set forth in any Addendum (as defined below). Order Form (as defined below) or other document executed by Licensor and Customer in connection herewith, subject to and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.

Term ” is defined as the term of this Agreement with respect to a particular Service or the Space, as applicable, as set forth in an Addendum, Order Form and/or any other agreement executed by Customer and Licensor in connection with this Agreement. “ Building ” is defined as that certain building at [***] , together with all appurtenances, common areas and parking facilities relating thereto. “ Space ” is defined as the portion, if any, of the Building made available to Customer, as expressly specified in the Addendum or Order Form, or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement, as applicable, including, without limitation, any applicable cage, cabinet., conduit space and/or innerduct space; Customer accepts the Space “As Is”, “With All Faults”, - without any representations or warranties”. “ Services ” is defined as all services, to the extent expressly set forth in the applicable Addendum, Order Form or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement, such as colocation services, power. MDF services (e.g., cross-connections), remote hands services, and Any 2 IX Subscriber services. Customer shall not be entitled to contract directly with any utility for Services or otherwise in connection with the Building or this Agreement.

Addendum ” is defined as any Addendum mutually executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement. Any Addendum shall be deemed a part of this Agreement and all obligations and liabilities of Customer under this Agreement shall fully apply to all matters set forth in any Addendum. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement and the terms of any Addendum, the terms of the applicable Addendum shall control. “ Order Form ” means any work order form mutually executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement. Any Order Form shall be deemed a part of this Agreement, and all obligations and liabilities of Customer under this Agreement shall fully apply to all matters set forth in any Order Form. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement or the terms of any Addendum and an Order Form, the terms of this Agreement and/or the Addendum, as applicable, shall control.

 

[***] Information has been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Confidential treatment has been requested with respect to the omitted portions.


1.2 Term . Upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term with respect to a particular Service, Licensor may discontinue such Service. If Customer holds over in the Space (i.e., continues to use or occupy the Space after the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement with respect to the Space), the same shall be from month-to-month only, and shall not constitute a renewal or an extension, and, in such case, Customer shall pay Licensor monthly License Fees (as defined below) equal to one-hundred ten percent (110%) of the monthly License Fees in effect during the final month of the term of this Agreement for the Space, in addition to all other amounts (including, without limitation, Service Fees) payable by Customer in connection with this Agreement. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as consent by Licensor to any holding over or to any use of the Space or Services after the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement.

On the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Customer shall remove from the Space and Building all Customer Equipment (as defined below) and shall return the Space to Licensor in the same condition as it was when delivered to Customer, ordinary wear and tear excepted. “ Customer Equipment ” means the equipment placed by or on behalf of Customer in the Space and/or Building (including, without limitation, cabling and wiring and contents belonging to Customer that are placed in any conduit or innerduct that is part of the Space). Without limiting the foregoing, unless otherwise designated by Licensor in its sole absolute discretion, upon the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement, Customer shall immediately remove all wiring and cabling and shall promptly repair all damage resulting from such removal. If Customer does not remove the Customer Equipment (or any other items) as required by this Agreement. Licensor may, without limiting any other rights or remedies, remove and store the same, at Customer’s expense.

License Fees is defined as the fees for the license of the Space, as identified in the applicable Addendum and/or Order Form and/or other documents executed by Customer and Licensor in connection herewith, as applicable. “Service Fees” is defined as the fees for Services, as identified in the applicable Addendum and/or Order Form and/or other documents executed by Customer and Licensor in connection herewith, as applicable.

1.3 Payment . Customer shall pay all Service Fees, License Fees, and all other monthly recurring amounts in connection with this Agreement, in advance, on the first day of each month, without demand, setoff or deduction. Except to the extent otherwise specified in this Agreement, any amounts payable by Customer that are not monthly recurring amounts, shall be paid by Customer within thirty (30) days after Customer’s receipt of invoice; provided, however, any Non-Recurring Fees set forth in the Addendum(s) attached hereto shall be paid by Customer to Licensor concurrently with Customer’s execution of the applicable Addendum. Under no circumstances shall Customer be entitled to any refund of any Non-Recurring Fees, including, without limitation, in connection with any termination of this Agreement. If Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts payable by Customer are not paid within five (5) business days from when due, a late fee of three percent (3%) of the overdue amount shall be due and payable by Customer. The parties agree that it would he impracticable or extremely difficult to fix Licensor’s actual damages in the event of a late payment. Such charges for late payments are separate and cumulative and are in addition to and shall not

 

2


diminish or represent a substitute for any or all of Licensor’s rights or remedies under any other provision of this Agreement. All payments to Licensor are exclusive of all applicable taxes, fees or levies, now or in the future imposed on the transaction or the delivery of Services, all of which Customer shall pay in full as invoiced by Licensor, provided that Customer will not be responsible for Licensor’s income taxes.

1.4 Security Deposit . If a security deposit is required from Customer pursuant to an agreement mutually executed and delivered by Customer and Licensor (e.g., a mutually executed and delivered Addendum), such deposit shall secure the compliance of Customer with the terms of this Agreement, and shall be in the amount indicated on the applicable Addendum or Order Form or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer. Such security deposit shall be delivered to Licensor concurrently with Customer’s execution and delivery of this Agreement. Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, Licensor shall have the right to retain and/or apply that portion of the security deposit necessary to pay for any overdue amounts, damages incurred by Licensor for Customer’s breach of this Agreement or Default or any other damages caused by Customer or any of the Customer Parties (as defined in Section 5 below). Customer shall immediately replenish any security deposit to the extent applied or used by Licensor. Licensor shall not be required to keep the security deposit in trust, segregate it or keep it separate from Licensor’s general funds, but Licensor may commingle the security deposit with its general funds and Customer shall not be entitled to interest on such deposit.

 

  2. SPACE; CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT; CONNECTIONS

2.1 Installation . The layout, contents and weights of the Customer Equipment shall be subject to the prior written consent of Licensor (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed). Customer shall, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, comply with all of Licensor’s and Licensor’s engineers’ floor load requirements affecting the Space and/or Building (as such requirements may be reasonably modified by Licensor from time to time) and shall, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, comply with all requirements of Licensor and Licensor’s engineers with respect to the floors, ceilings, walls, structure and systems of the Space and/or Building. Customer shall not cause or permit any Hazardous Material (as defined below) to enter or be brought, kept or used in or about the Space and/or Building. “ Hazardous Material ” means any hazardous or toxic material, or other material which is or becomes regulated by any applicable governmental authority.

2.2 Access and Use . Licensor shall have access to the Space in the event of emergency, as may be required by law, to perform repairs or improvements (without obligation to do so) to perform Services, or, upon reasonable prior notice to Customer, to show or inspect the Space. Customer may use the Space only for purposes of maintaining and operating Customer Equipment in a manner reasonably acceptable to Licensor. Customer shall not use the Space for general office use or for any other purpose. Customer shall not interfere with the use or operations of the Building by Licensor, or other customers, occupants, licensees, invitees or designees of Licensor. No improvements or alterations to the Space or Building (including, without limitation, any installation of contents in any conduit and/or innerduct that is part of the Space) shall be performed by Customer unless approved in writing by Licensor (in its sole and absolute discretion), and Customer shall not cause or allow any liens to be imposed upon the Building or any of Licensor’s property.

 

3


Without limiting the foregoing, (a) Customer shall at its sole cost and expense, comply at all times with all laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances and matters of record which may be in effect from time to time (including, without limitation, those set forth by the Federal Communications Commission): and (b) Customer shall obtain and maintain at all times, at its sole cost and expense, all necessary or required approvals, permits, certificates and licenses, and Licensor shall have no obligation in connection with the same. Customer shall not use any apparatus, machinery, device or equipment which may cause any substantial or unreasonable noise or vibration. Customer shall not distribute leaflets or other advertising material in the Building. Licensor does not guarantee the security of the Customer Equipment or the Space or Building, and Licensor shall not be liable for any inability, failure or mistake in doing so. Customer shall provide to the Building manager any keys or any other means necessary to access the Space and Customer Equipment during emergencies.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Agreement except to the extent expressly set forth in an Addendum or Order Form, Customer shall not be entitled (A) to access or use outside of the Space (if any) any conduits, innerducts, shafts, risers, fiber, wiring or cabling; (B) to use or access any portion of the Building outside of the Space (if any); (C) to make connections with any other customer or other party in the Building; (D) to have any conduits, innerducts or connections “stop-off” in any room outside of the Space (if any) or any portion of the Building outside the Space (if any); or (E) to use or consume any power, electricity, water, gas or other utilities or services. Without limiting any other rights and remedies of Licensor, in the event of a material breach of the preceding sentence and Customer’s failure to cure such breach within 3 business days of written notice from Licensor describing such breach. Customer shall be obligated to pay to Licensor without offset or deduction, within ten (10) business days after demand, the Unjust Enrichment Charge. The “ Unjust Enrichment Charge ” means one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the amount that Licensor determines, in good faith, that it would charge an unaffiliated third-party customer for the item in question for the period of time during which the use or access, as applicable, occurred. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Agreement, unless and to the extent otherwise agreed to in writing by Licensor (in its sole and absolute discretion). Licensor shall have no obligation to provide any electricity, power, water, gas, other utilities or janitorial (or cleaning) services.

2.3 Cross-connections . If Customer is entitled to cross-connections under this Agreement, then Customer shall follow the procedures and rules set forth in this Agreement, and shall pay Licensor’s standard charges for the cross-connections, as specified and modified by Licensor from time to time. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, Customer shall not have any right to perform cross-connections, except to the extent agreed to in writing between Customer and Licensor (but in any event, subject to the consent of all parties to whom Customer wishes to connect). Except to the extent otherwise designated by Licensor in writing, all cross-connections by Customer shall be via the MUX and/or MDF Rooms then offered by Licensor and no cross-connections shall be performed in any other manner or location, unless otherwise designated by Licensor in writing.

2.4 Relocation . Licensor shall have the right, for legitimate business purposes, to relocate the Customer Equipment and/or Space upon at least twenty (20) days prior written notice to Customer. In connection with any such relocation, Licensor shall use commercially reasonable

 

4


efforts to minimize disruption with Customer’s use of the Services, and Customer shall cooperate in good faith with Licensor to facilitate such relocation. Licensor shall be responsible for the reasonable, out-of-pocket costs paid by Customer to unaffiliated third parties in connection with such relocation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if such relocation is due to interference of Customer Equipment, Customer shall be responsible for the costs of such relocation.

 

  3. INSURANCE

3.1 Customer Minimum Insurance Levels . Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, procure and maintain the following insurance during the term of this Agreement: (a) comprehensive general liability insurance in an amount not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) per occurrence and Three Million Dollars (S3.000.000.00) in the annual aggregate for bodily injury arid property damage and personal injury coverage, covering the insuring provisions of this Agreement; and (b) a policy of standard fire, extended coverage and special extended coverage insurance (all risks), in an amount equal to the full replacement value new without deduction for depreciation of all Customer Equipment and other property of Customer in the Building and/or Space. Such insurance shall be with insurers reasonably acceptable to Licensor: shall have commercially reasonable deductibles: shall name Licensor and its lenders, lessors and managers as additional insureds (Licensor and such additional parties shall be referred to herein as the “Additional Insureds”); shall provide that Customer’s insurance is primary and that any insurance carried by Licensor or any other Additional Insured is excess and non-contributing: and shall provide that such insurance cannot be canceled or modified upon less than thirty (30) days prior written notice to Licensor. Prior to any installation of Customer Equipment in the Space (or any other access to the Space) and prior to any expiration date of the insurance policies, Customer will furnish copies of certificates which evidence that Customer has obtained and maintains the insurance coverage required hereunder. Customer shall carry and maintain, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, increased amounts of the insurance required to be carried by Customer pursuant to this Section 3.1 and such other reasonable types of insurance coverage and in such reasonable amounts as may be reasonably required by Licensor from time to time. Customer shall require that its contractors (and any subcontractors) and any other party performing work for Customer, carry and maintain, and provide evidence thereof to Licensor, insurance policies evidencing insurance reasonably acceptable to Licensor, including, without limitation, Builder’s Risk insurance and commercial general liability insurance, in amounts reasonably acceptable to Licensor.

3.2 Waiver of Subrogation . Licensor and Customer hereby waive and shall cause their respective property insurance carriers to waive any and all rights of recovery, claim, action or causes of action against the other and their respective trustees, principals, members, affiliates, beneficiaries, partners, officers, directors, agents, employees and lenders, for any loss or damage that may occur to Licensor or Customer or any party claiming by, through or under Licensor or Customer, as the case may be, with respect to any Customer Equipment or the Space or Building, including ail rights of recovery, claims, actions or causes of action arising out of the negligence of Licensor or the negligence of Customer which loss or damage is (or would have been, had the property insurance required by this Agreement been carried) covered by property insurance.

 

5


  4. NO LEASE OR EASEMENT

This Agreement (including, without limitation, any Addenda and any Order Forms) is a services agreement and does not constitute a lease, sublease or easement of or with respect to real property. Customer acknowledges and agrees that it has been granted only a limited license to use the Space, and to obtain the Services, as applicable, in accordance with this Agreement. Licensor reserves the right to lease and/or license other portions of the Building to other parties for telecommunications purposes, or for any other purposes, including, without limitation, parties that may be direct competitors of Customer, engaging in the same business at the Building as is being engaged in by Customer in the Space or Building. Licensor makes no representations or warranties regarding the makeup of the licensees or other occupants in the Building, or the business to be conducted in the Building by any other party. Licensor shall be free, in its sole and absolute discretion, to enter into leases, licenses and other agreements with respect to the Building and/or Services, with any parties, and on any terms, that Licensor desires. Except with respect to Customer’s right to use the interior of any applicable cabinet or cage constituting the Space under this Agreement (specifically excluding conduits and innerducts, the use of which shall be on a non-exclusive basis, except as may be expressly set forth to the contrary in any applicable Addendum or Order Form executed by Licensor in connection herewith), all rights of Customer, and all Space and Services, shall be on a non-exclusive basis (and Customer expressly acknowledges that Licensor. Licensor’s designees, other customers, licensees and/or third parties may also be using such applicable Space and/or Services, as designated by Licensor from time to time).

 

  5. INDEMNIFICATION

Except to the extent caused by Licensor’s negligence or willful misconduct. Customer shall and does hereby indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless Licensor and its officers, members, partners, affiliates, representatives, lenders, directors, principals, managers and employees, together with all of their respective successors and assigns (together with Licensor, collectively, the –“ Indemnified Parties ”), from and against any and all claims, judgments, damages, penalties, fines, costs, liabilities, and losses (including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs) resulting from any claim, suit, action, or proceeding brought by any third party against any Indemnified Party alleging (a) the infringement or misappropriation of any intellectual property right or other unlawful or illegal wrongdoing by Customer or its customers, members, affiliates, partners, representatives, officers, directors, principals, licensees, invitees, representatives, employees, agents and/or sublicensees, and their respective successors and assigns (together with Customer, collectively, the “Customer Parties”); (b) injury or property damage caused by any of the Customer Parties; (c) any negligence or willful misconduct by any of the Customer Parties; (d) any breach of this Agreement by Customer; and/or (e) the use by any of the Customer Parties of the Space or Building. This Section 5 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

 

  6. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR; DAMAGES

6.1 Maintenance and Repair . Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, maintain and repair the Space and Customer Equipment in good condition and repair, in accordance with industry standards, ordinary wear and tear excepted and shall be responsible for all costs and expenses relating to the maintenance and/or repair of the Space and/or Customer Equipment. If

 

6


Customer or any of the Customer Parties damages any portion of the Building or Space, or any equipment of Licensor or any customer, licensee, invitee, lessor, lender, occupant or designee of Licensor, then Customer shall be responsible for the costs incurred in connection therewith, payable within thirty (30) days after written request.

6.2 Damages . Licensor’s liability arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be subject to the other terms of this Agreement and shall in no event exceed the amounts paid by Customer to Licensor for License Fees under this Agreement. Each of the covenants, undertakings and agreements of Licensor are made and intended not as personal covenants, undertakings and agreements of any of the indemnified Parties, or for the purpose of binding any of the Indemnified Parties personally, and that no personal liability or personal responsibility is assumed by, nor shall at any time be asserted or enforceable against any of the Indemnified Parties. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement. Licensor (and the other Indemnified Parties) shall not, under any circumstances, be liable for any consequential, indirect, punitive, exemplary or special damages of’ any nature, or for any loss of data, lost revenues, lost profits, loss of business or anticipatory profits, regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort (including, without limitation, negligence), strict liability or otherwise. Neither Licensor nor any of the other Indemnified Parties makes any express and/or implied warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to, warranties of fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, noninfringement of intellectual property rights and title, or any warranties arising from a course of dealing, usage, or trade practice.

6.3 Damage to Customer Equipment . In the event Customer damages the Space, Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, repair the Space to the state it was in prior to the damage. Licensor assumes no liability for, and Customer hereby releases Licensor and the Indemnified Parties for, any damage to, or loss of, any Customer Equipment resulting from any cause (except Licensor’s own willful misconduct or gross negligence). In any event, Licensor and the Indemnified Parties shall not, under any circumstances, be liable for any damage resulting from any type of conduct if such loss is covered by Customer’s insurance. Licensor shall not be liable for lost data or software.

 

  7. DEFAULT; REMEDIES

7.1 Default . The term - Default” is defined as any of the following items (a) through (f): (a) the failure by Customer to pay Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts due under this Agreement for five (5) business days after written notice that such Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts (as applicable), are due; (b) any material interference by Customer with the business or equipment of any other customer, licensee or occupant in the Building for two (2) business days after Licensor’s delivery of written notice to Customer: provided, however, if Licensor shall deliver three (3) notices of interference within any twelve (12) month period, then there shall be no cure period and a Default shall be deemed to have occurred; (c) with respect to any material breach not described in (a) or (b) above, or (d) through (f) below, the failure by Customer to cure such breach within thirty (30) days after receipt of written notice of such breach from Licensor; (d) the filing by Customer of a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or commences any voluntary proceeding relating to insolvency, receivership, liquidation, or composition or assignment for the benefit of its creditors; (e) Customer becomes the subject of an involuntary petition, in bankruptcy or

 

7


any involuntary proceeding relating to insolvency, receivership, liquidation or composition or assignment for the benefit of creditors if such petition or proceeding is not dismissed within thirty (30) days of filing; or (f) any “Default” specified elsewhere in this Agreement.

7.2 Licensor Remedies . In the event of a Default, Licensor shall have the right to exercise all of its available rights and remedies at law and in equity. Without limiting any other right or remedy available to Licensor, Licensor, at its sole election, shall have the right to (a) terminate this Agreement (and any Addenda. Order Forms and/or any other agreement between Customer and Licensor), and (b) require that Customer pay to Licensor, within ten (10) days of Licensor’s delivery• of its notice of such election, an amount equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the Service Fees, License Fees and all other amounts payable for all of the remaining applicable term of this Agreement. All rights and remedies of Licensor shall be cumulative and not alternative and shall be in addition to all rights and remedies given to Licensor by law or at equity, and the exercise of one or more rights or remedies shall not impair Licensor’s right to exercise any other right or remedy. If Customer fails to perform any act to be performed under this Agreement. Licensor may, but shall not be obligated to, without waiving or releasing Customer from any obligations of Customer, perform such act on Customer’s part. All sums so paid by Licensor shall be paid to Licensor by Customer within thirty (30) days after demand.

7.3 Licensor Default . Licensor shall not be in default under this Agreement unless Licensor fails to perform obligations required of Licensor within ten (10) days after written notice is delivered by Customer to Licensor specifying the obligation which Licensor has failed to perform: provided, however, that if the nature of Licensor’s obligation is such that more than ten (10) days are required for performance, then Licensor shall not be in default if Licensor commences performance within such thirty (30) day period and thereafter diligently prosecutes the same to completion. Customer hereby waives the benefit of any laws granting it the right to perform Licensor’s obligations, and Customer shall not be entitled to perform any of Licensor’s obligations.

 

  8. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

8.1 Casualty/Condemnation . Licensor may terminate this Agreement by written notice to Customer in the event (a) the Building is materially damaged by fire, windstorm, tornado, flood or by similar causes, whether or not the Space or Services are affected, and one or more of the following conditions are present: (I) in Licensor’s reasonable judgment, the repairs cannot be accomplished within 120 days after the date of discovery of the damage, provided that Licensor terminates all similarly situated license agreements for which Licensor has a termination right, (ii) any lender or lessor of Licensor requires that this Agreement be terminated, or (iii) the damage is not fully covered by Licensor’s insurance, or (b) all or any portion of the Building is taken by eminent domain (and Licensor shall retain all eminent domain proceeds).

8.2 Force Majeure . This Agreement and the obligations of each party hereunder shall not be affected or impaired because either party is unable to fulfill any of its obligations hereunder or is delayed in doing so, if such inability or delay is caused by reason of Force Majeure Event and each party’s obligations under this Agreement shall be forgiven and suspended by any such Force Majeure Event. “ Force Majeure Event ” is defined as any cause beyond each party’s reasonable control or anticipation, including, without limitation, acts of war, acts of God, terrorism,

 

8


earthquake, hurricanes, flood, fire or other casualty, embargo, riot, sabotage, labor shortage or dispute, governmental act, insurrections, epidemics, quarantines, inability to procure materials or transportation facilities, restrictive governmental laws or regulations, condemnation, failure of the Internet or other reason that is beyond the reasonable control of either party.

8.3 Governing Law; Attorneys’ Fees . This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State in which the Building is located. In any action or proceeding arising in connection with this Agreement, Licensor and Customer consent to the jurisdiction of any competent court within the County in which the Building is located. In any action to enforce this agreement, the losing party shall pay the successful party a reasonable sum for attorneys’ fees and costs in such suit.

8.4 Severability: Waiver . In the event any provision of this Agreement is held by a tribunal of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to any law or regulation, the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. A party shall not be deemed to waive any of their rights or remedies under this Agreement unless such waiver is in writing and signed by the party to be bound. The waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement will not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default.

8.5 Assignment . This Agreement and the rights accorded Customer under this Agreement (including, without limitation, any Addenda or Order Forms), are personal to Customer and may not be assigned, sub-licensed, or otherwise transferred by Customer (each a “ Transfer ”) in any fashion, regardless of whether such an arrangement is characterized as an assignment, a sublicense, a colocation agreement or any other agreement, without the prior written consent of Licensor, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld by Licensor. Licensor may require any transferee to execute documentation reasonably acceptable to Licensor in connection with the applicable Transfer, including, without limitation, an assumption agreement whereby the transferee assumes all of Customer’s liabilities, duties and obligations under this Agreement. In any event, no Transfer shall relieve or release Customer of its obligations, duties or liabilities under this Agreement. Whether or not Licensor consents to any proposed Transfer, Customer shall pay Licensor’s reasonable attorney’s fees incurred by Licensor in connection with the proposed Transfer, within thirty (30) days after written request by Licensor. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, Licensor may, in its sole and absolute discretion, assign this Agreement and/or delegate its obligations under this Agreement in whole or in part without obtaining the consent of Customer or any other party. Upon request of Licensor, Customer shall attorn to Licensor’s transferee upon any transfer and to recognize such transferee as the licensor under this Agreement.

8.6 Notices . Any notice or communication required or permitted to be given under this Agreement may be delivered by hand, sent by overnight courier, sent by United States certified mail, return receipt requested, or sent by facsimile, at the addresses set forth in the Addendum(s) or at such other address as may hereafter be furnished in writing to the other party. Such notice will be deemed to have been given as of the date it is delivered.

8.7 Entire Agreement; Counterparts . This Agreement (including, without limitation, all applicable Addenda and Order Forms) constitutes the complete and exclusive agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes and replaces any and all prior or contemporaneous discussions, negotiations, understandings and agreements,

 

9


written and oral, regarding such subject matter. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which, when combined, shall constitute one agreement.

8.8 Binding Effect; Relationship of Parties . Subject to Section 8.5 above, this Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of each party and each party’s successors and permitted assigns. There shall be no third party beneficiaries to this Agreement. The parties are independent of one another and this Agreement will not create any partnership, joint venture, employment, franchise or agency between Licensor and Customer.

8.9 Delivery of Certificate . Customer shall, within ten (10) business days’ prior written notice from Licensor (but only in connection with a sale, financing, transfer, lease or similar transaction), deliver to Licensor a signed statement certifying the following information, (but not limited to the following information in the event further information is reasonably requested by Licensor): (i) that this Agreement is unmodified and in full force and effect (or, if modified, stating the nature of such modification and certifying that this Agreement, as modified, is in full force and effect): (ii) the dates to which the Service Fees, License Fees and other charges are paid in advance, if any; (iii) the amount of Customer’s security deposit, if any; and (iv) acknowledging that there are not any uncured defaults on the part of Licensor under this Agreement (including, without limitation, all Addenda and Order Forms), and no events or conditions then in existence which, with the passage of time or notice or both, would constitute a default on the part of Licensor under this Agreement (including all Addenda and Order Forms), or specifying such defaults, events or conditions, if any are claimed. Any such statement may be relied upon by any prospective purchaser or encumbrancer of Licensor. Customer’s failure to deliver such statement within such ten (10) business day period shall, after a 3-day written reminder notice, constitute a Default.

8.10 Subordinate Agreement . Customer agrees that, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, this Agreement shall be subject and subordinate to any mortgage, deed of trust, ground lease and/or Master Lease of Licensor and to any renewals, modifications, consolidation, refinancing, and extensions thereof, whether existing or future. Customer acknowledges that (a) Licensor may be a master tenant under a master lease agreement (the “ Master Lease ”) with the owner of the Building (or other applicable party) (the “ Master Landlord ”) with respect to certain portions of the Building, (b) the Space may be leased by Licensor, as tenant, from the Master Landlord, as landlord, and Licensor’s interest in the Space and Building may be that of lessee, rather than owner, and (c) the Master Landlord may, from time to time, encumber the Building (and/or the land on which the Building is located) with mortgages, deeds of trust and/or other similar security agreements. The foregoing provisions of this Section 8.10 are hereby declared to be self-operative and no further instrument shall be required to effect such subordination of this Agreement; provided, however, Customer shall, within ten (10) days after Licensor’s written request therefor, execute, acknowledge and deliver any documents reasonably requested by Licensor to assure the subordination of this Agreement to any of the same. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if any Master Landlord or the holder of any such mortgage or deed of trust advises Licensor that they desire or require this Agreement to be prior and superior thereto, upon written request of Licensor to Customer, Customer agrees to promptly execute, acknowledge and deliver any documents which Licensor or such Master Landlord or holder(s) reasonably deem necessary for purposes thereof (and, in such event, Customer shall, at the request of Licensor, attorn to such party).

 

10


8.11 Other Taxes and Charges . Customer shall pay, prior to delinquency, all taxes assessed against or levied upon any Customer Equipment or any of’ Customer’s other property. In the event any or all of Customer’s personal property shall be assessed and taxed with property of Licensor and, as a result, taxes for the Building are increased, Customer shall pay to Licensor, within ten (10) days after written demand, the amount of taxes applicable to Customer’s property. Customer shall timely pay for all business License Fees, gross receipts taxes and similar taxes and impositions which may from time to time be assessed against or levied upon Customer, as and when the same become due and before delinquency. Customer shall be solely responsible to timely pay all taxes, consignment charges, importing and exporting fees, customs charges and duties, tariffs, shipping charges, freight charges, and all other charges, taxes, fees, duties and amounts relating to importing/exporting, delivery, shipping and/or inter-country/inter-state/cross-border transfers (all of the foregoing collectively referred to herein as “ Importing Charges ”). Without limiting any other remedies, Licensor may, without liability, in Licensor’s sole and absolute discretion, refuse, reject and turn away delivery of Customer Equipment (and other Customer property) at or to the Building. Neither Licensor nor any other Indemnified Party shall be responsible for any wrongful acceptance or rejection of delivery, or any wrongful payment of (or refusal to pay) Importing Charges. In the event Licensor or any other Indemnified Party incur any Importing Charges, including, without limitation, as a result of Licensor’s payment of any Importing Charges, then Customer shall reimburse the applicable party for all Importing Charges within thirty (30) days after written demand.

8.12 Parking; Signage . Licensor shall not be obligated to provide any parking. Customer shall not inscribe an inscription, or post, place, or in any manner display any sign, notice, picture, placard or poster, or any advertising matter, anywhere in or about the Space or Building.

8.13 Brokers . Customer warrants and represents that it has not had any dealings with any person or entity who is or might be entitled to a commission, finder’s fee or other like payment in connection herewith and does hereby indemnify, defend and agree to hold the Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any and all losses, liabilities, costs and expenses that Licensor may incur should such warranty and representation prove incorrect inaccurate or false. This Section 8.13 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

8.14 Confidentiality . Customer acknowledges that the content of this Agreement and any related documents are confidential information. Customer shall keep such confidential information strictly confidential and shall not disclose such confidential information to any person or entity other than Customer’s financial and legal consultants.

8.15 Time is of the Essence . Time is of the essence with respect to the performance of this Agreement.

8.16 Facsimile & PDF Signatures . Delivery of signatures by facsimile shall have the same force and effect as original ink signatures. Additionally, signatures delivered by electronic mail in PDF or similar scanned format shall have the same force and effect as original ink signatures.

8.17 Internet/Online Orders . Customer represents and warrants that any person completing and/or submitting and/or executing any orders or service requests on behalf of Customer

 

11


by way of the Internet or other electronic or online means (including but not limited to via the Customer Resource Center) or otherwise, has the authority to do so on Customer’s behalf and any such orders or service requests shall be binding on Customer. “ Customer Resource Center ” is defined as any website (currently http://apps.crgwest.com/login.aspx ) and/or any other remote electronic access by which customer may order Services for the Space; provided, however, Licensor makes no representations or warranties in connection with the Customer Resource Center, and shall have no liability in connection with the Customer Resource Center (including, without limitation, as a result of breakdowns, lost data, lost orders, failures or malfunctions). Licensor may modify, suspend or discontinue the Customer Resource Center.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

CUSTOMER:

 

BOX.NET, INC.
By:  

/s/ Aaron Levie

Name:  

Aaron Levie

Its:  

CEO

Date:  

3/24/2008

Licensor

 

[***], L.L.C.
By:  

/s/ Neil R. Giles

Name:   Neil R. Giles, CPM
Title:  

Managing Director for CRG West, L.L.C.,

as authorized agent for [***], L.L.C.

26 March 2008

Date:  

 

[***] Information has been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Confidential treatment has been requested with respect to the omitted portions.

 

12

Exhibit 23.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

We consent to the reference to our firm under the caption “Experts” and to the use of our report dated March 24, 2014, in Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement (Form S-1 No. 333-194767) and related Prospectus of Box, Inc. for the registration of shares of its Class A common stock.

San Francisco, California

July 7, 2014